JP7415213B1 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To improve the degree of freedom in arranging symbols on the reels while lowering the payout rate in a special game. [Solution] The game has a non-RT game in which the special prize has not been won, and a special game that can be transferred based on the winning of the special prize. In the special game, the non-winning probability is "0", and the small winning combination 01 always wins. In the special game, the specified number is "2" and the payout when winning the small role 01 is ``1'', so the payout when winning the small role 01 is less than the specified number. The ball payout rate in non-RT is "0.464," which is lower than the ball payout rate in the special game, which is "0.5." The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 01 is "1" type. [Selection diagram] Figure 152

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Slot machines have been known as one type of gaming machine (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-016110

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to improve the performance of a gaming machine.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following solving means (the structure of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses).
The present invention (10th embodiment)
A non-internal medium gaming state (non-RT), which is a state in which a predetermined special prize (1BB) has not been won;
A predetermined internal medium game state (RT1) in which a predetermined special prize is carried over;
and a predetermined special gaming state that can be transitioned based on winning a predetermined special prize and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined special prize being stopped and displayed;
The predetermined special game state is a state in which the accessory continuous operation device related to the first class special prize is operating,
The prescribed number of games that can be executed in the predetermined internal medium game state is "3",
The payout when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the predetermined internal mid-gaming state exceeds the prescribed number of "3" that can be played in the predetermined internal mid-gaming state,
The prescribed number of games that can be executed in the predetermined special game state is "2" (FIG. 152),
The payout when a specific symbol combination ("Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" corresponding to small winning combination 01) is stopped and displayed in the predetermined special game state is that the game can be executed in the predetermined special game state. (As shown in FIG. 152, the payout when winning small winning combination 01 in the special game is "1", which is less than the specified number "2" in the special game),
In the predetermined special game state, there is no chance of losing as a result of the internal lottery (FIG. 152) ;
In the predetermined special game state, a specific symbol combination is most likely to be stopped and displayed.
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, the performance as a gaming machine can be improved.

FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing control of a slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine in the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the pattern arrangement of the reel in a 1st embodiment. In the first embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the display window and each reel and active lines, and (B) is a diagram showing the names of symbol positions. It is a diagram (1) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payouts, etc. in the first embodiment. It is a diagram (2) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payouts, etc. in the first embodiment. It is a diagram (1) showing a condition device, winning combination, etc. in the first embodiment. It is a diagram (2) showing the condition device, winning combination, etc. in the first embodiment. It is a diagram (3) showing the condition device, winning combination, etc. in the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram (4) showing a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number table in 1st Embodiment. It is a transition diagram of gaming states in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing variation conditions of the gaming state in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, (1) is the first stop on the left when the small win A1 condition device is activated, the first stop on the left when the small win B1 condition device is activated, and the first left when the small win C1 condition device is activated. It is a diagram showing the symbols of the left reel that can be stopped and displayed in the display window when stopped, and (2) is a diagram showing the symbols of the left reel that can be stopped and displayed in the display window when the small role C1 condition device is activated. It is a diagram showing possible symbols on the left reel. In the first embodiment, it is a diagram showing symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the small win A1 condition device to the small win C2 condition device are activated. In the first embodiment, it is a diagram showing symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the small win D1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated. In the first embodiment, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the minor winning A1 condition device to the minor winning F2 condition device are activated, only the symbol on the middle reel is a diagram showing a symbol combination in which the “PB=1” arrangement is set. . In the first embodiment, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the minor win A1 condition device to the minor win F2 condition device are activated, this is a diagram showing a symbol combination in which only the right reel symbol is in the “PB=1” arrangement. . In the first embodiment, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the minor role A1 condition device to minor role F2 condition device are activated, only the symbol on the left reel is a symbol combination in which “PB=1” is arranged. . In the first embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning a small win 01, (2) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning a small win 02, and (3) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning a small win 02. 03 is a diagram showing the stopping number at the time of winning. In the first embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning a small win 04, (2) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning a small win 05, and (3) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning a small win 05. 06 is a diagram showing the stopping number when winning a prize. It is a figure showing the pattern arrangement of the reel in a 2nd embodiment. It is a diagram (1) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payouts, etc. in the second embodiment. It is a diagram (2) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payouts, etc. in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a transition diagram of gaming states in a second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation condition of the gaming state in 2nd Embodiment. In the second embodiment, (1) is the first stop on the left when the small win A1 condition device is activated, the first stop on the left when the small win B1 condition device is activated, and the first left when the small win C1 condition device is activated. It is a diagram showing the symbols of the left reel that can be stopped and displayed in the display window when stopped, and (2) is a diagram showing the symbols of the left reel that can be stopped and displayed in the display window when the small role C1 condition device is activated. It is a diagram showing possible symbols on the left reel. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement of the reel in the modification of 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment. In the modification of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, (1) is the first stop on the left when the small role A1 condition device is activated, the first stop on the left when the small role B1 condition device is activated, and the small role C1 It is a diagram showing the symbols of the left reel that can be stopped and displayed in the display window at the first stop on the left when the condition device is activated, and (2) is the second left reel after the first stop in the middle when the small role C1 condition device is activated. It is a diagram showing symbols on the left reel that can be stopped and displayed in the display window when stopped. In the modified examples of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the stopping number when winning the small winning combination 01, and (2) is a diagram showing the stopping number when winning the small winning combination 02. Yes, and (3) is a diagram showing the stopping number when winning the small winning combination 03. In the modified examples of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning a small winning combination 04, and (2) is a diagram showing the stopping roll when winning a small winning combination 05. Yes, and (3) is a diagram showing the stopping number when winning the small winning combination 06. It is a figure explaining the structure of main CPU, ROM, and RWM in a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored in the used area of RWM in the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the RWM usage area in the third embodiment. 35 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the RWM usage area in the third embodiment, and is a diagram following FIG. 34. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display board in the third embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing management information display LEDs in the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1 to 9 and segments A to G and P in the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 7 in the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in a third embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signal output from the output port 3 in the third embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 2 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signal output from the output port 3 in the third embodiment. _SC_LED_DSP2) and the signal output from the output port 6, and (C) is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the program start process (M_PRG_START) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL) in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows interrupt processing (I_INTR) in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flashing request flag generation process (S_LED_FLASH) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the blinking/nonapplicable item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a ratio display timer update process (S_RATE_TIME) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flashing bit test frequency table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 5 in a modified example of the third embodiment. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and signals output from output ports 3 and 6 in a modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a timer circuit and the like for executing interrupt processing in a fourth embodiment. A program example for explaining interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission in the fourth embodiment is shown, in which (A) and (B) show a main processing program, and (C) show an interrupt processing program. It is a flowchart which shows a program start (M_PRG_START) in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows interrupt processing (I_INTR) in a 4th embodiment. 12 is a time chart showing the relationship between an 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment, and shows an example in which the main processing does not have an interrupt prohibition period. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment, and shows an example in which the main processing has an interrupt prohibition period. 12 is a time chart showing an example (Example 1) in which the 8-bit counter times out multiple times in the relationship between the 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a time chart showing an example (Example 2) in which the 8-bit counter times out multiple times in the relationship between the 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a time chart showing an interrupt cycle when there is no interrupt prohibition period in main processing in the fourth embodiment. 11 is a diagram showing an example in which an interrupt prohibition period in main processing is set between interrupt processing 1 and interrupt processing 2 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a time chart illustrating an example (Example 1) in which the timing at which interrupt processing is scheduled to be executed is an interrupt prohibition period in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a time chart illustrating an example (Example 2) in which the timing at which interrupt processing is scheduled to be executed is an interrupt prohibition period in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a time chart illustrating an example (Example 3) in which the timing at which interrupt processing is scheduled to be executed is an interrupt prohibition period in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a time chart showing the relationship (Example 1) between the rotation of the reels and error detection and notification in the fifth embodiment. 77 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the progress of FIG. 76 (Example 1). FIG. It is a time chart (Example 2) showing a case where settings are changed after an error is detected during rotation of the reels in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the progress of FIG. 78 (Example 2). 12 is a time chart showing a case (Example 3) in which multiple errors are detected during setting confirmation in the fifth embodiment. 81 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the progress of FIG. 80 (Example 3). FIG. In the fifth embodiment, a time chart showing a case (Example 4) in which the first error and the second error are detected during game standby (after all reels 31 stop and before the start switch is operated (game start)). be. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the progress of FIG. 82 (Example 4). FIG. 7 is an external perspective view showing a main control board, a socket, and a main chip not mounted on the socket in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a plan view (a view viewed vertically downward from above) showing the main chip attached to the socket in more detail. FIG. 85 is an arrow view (front view) seen from the Z1 direction in FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is an arrow view (side view) seen from the Z2 direction in FIG. 85. (A) is a diagram showing enlarged product names and company names, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along arrow Z3-Z3 in (A). FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between three types of step portions. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship (Example 1) of the board|substrate and predetermined|prescribed electronic component in 7th Embodiment, (A) shows a top view, and (B) shows a front view. (A) is a view seen from the Z4 direction in FIG. 90(A), and (B) is a view seen from the Z5 direction (bottom side of the connector) in FIG. 90(B). be. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship (Example 2) of the board|substrate and predetermined|prescribed electronic component in 7th Embodiment, (A) shows a top view, and (B) shows a side view (enlarged view). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the positional relationship (Example 3) between a board and a predetermined electronic component in a seventh embodiment, in which (A) shows a front view (mounting surface of a predetermined electronic component), and (B) shows a side view. (C) shows a back view. 94 is a diagram showing a modification of Example 3 in FIG. 93, in which (A) shows a front view (mounting surface of a predetermined electronic component), (B) shows a side view, and (C) shows a back view. It is a figure which shows the 1-chip microprocessor in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map in the built-in ROM in FIG. 95 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the memory map in the built-in RWM in more detail in FIG. 95 in the eighth embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, it is a diagram explaining the interrupt initial setting address, (A) is a diagram showing the data details of the interrupt initial setting address, and (B) is the relationship between the interrupt priority and the interrupt priority setting value. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating vector address values and data values stored in the vector addresses in the eighth embodiment, where (A) shows the vector address values, and (B) shows the relationship between interrupt factors and automatic allocation values. The relationship is shown, and (C) shows an example of the data value of the vector address. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a process from when the power is turned on to when the device enters the user mode in the eighth embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a program starting from "0000H" in the program area of the used area of the built-in ROM. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example when the vector address is "00F4H" in the eighth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of a process called by an RST command in the eighth embodiment, and (A), (B), and (C) show example 1, example 2, and example 3, respectively. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing program code area setting addresses and their data values in the eighth embodiment. It is a side sectional view of the slot machine in a 9th embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine in a ninth embodiment. It is explanatory drawing (1) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in a 9th embodiment. It is an explanatory view (2) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. It is an explanatory view (3) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. It is an explanatory view (4) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. It is an explanatory view (5) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. It is an explanatory view (6) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. It is an explanatory view (7) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. It is an explanatory view (8) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram (9) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a time chart (1) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the ninth embodiment. FIG. It is a time chart (2) which shows the operation|movement mode at the time of detection of an error in 9th Embodiment, and the time of release. It is a time chart (3) which shows the operation|movement mode at the time of detecting an error and canceling an error in 9th Embodiment. It is a time chart (4) which shows the operation|movement mode at the time of the detection and release of an error in 9th Embodiment. It is a time chart (5) which shows the operation|movement mode at the time of detecting an error and canceling an error in 9th Embodiment. It is a time chart (6) showing the operation mode when detecting and canceling an error in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a time chart (7) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the ninth embodiment. FIG. It is a time chart (8) which shows the operation|movement mode at the time of detecting an error and canceling an error in 9th Embodiment. It is a time chart (1) showing the operation mode when the power is turned off during door open notification in the ninth embodiment. It is a time chart (2) showing the operation mode when the power is turned off during door open notification in the ninth embodiment. It is a time chart (3) showing an operation mode when the power is turned off during door open notification in the ninth embodiment. It is an RT transition diagram in a 10th embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing RT variation conditions in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure showing the pattern arrangement of the reel in a 10th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display window and effective line in 10th Embodiment. It is a diagram (1) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the tenth embodiment. It is a diagram (2) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payouts, etc. in the tenth embodiment. It is a diagram (3) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the tenth embodiment. It is a diagram (4) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the tenth embodiment. It is a diagram (5) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payouts, etc. in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure showing the accessory condition device in a 10th embodiment. It is a diagram (1) showing a prize winning and replay condition device in a tenth embodiment. It is a diagram (2) showing the winning and replay condition device in the tenth embodiment. It is a diagram (3) showing the winning and replay condition device in the tenth embodiment. It is a diagram (4) showing the winning and replay condition device in the tenth embodiment. It is a diagram (5) showing the winning and replay condition device in the tenth embodiment. It is a diagram (6) showing the winning and replay condition device in the tenth embodiment. It is a diagram (7) showing the winning and replay condition device in the tenth embodiment. It is a diagram (8) showing a prize winning and replay condition device in the tenth embodiment. It is a diagram (9) showing a prize winning and replay condition device in the tenth embodiment. It is a diagram (10) showing a prize winning and replay condition device in a tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number table (non-RT) in 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number table (RT1) in 10th Embodiment. It is a figure showing a number table (during special game) in a 10th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out for each condition device and each press order in non-RT and setting 1 in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out for each condition device and each press order under RT1 and setting 1 in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the characteristic of each RT in 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number table (non-RT) in the modification 1 of 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number table (RT1) in the modification 1 of 10th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out for each condition device and each press order in non-RT and setting 1 in Modification 1 of the 10th embodiment. 12 is a diagram showing the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out for each condition device and each press order under RT1 and setting 1 in Modification 1 of the 10th embodiment. FIG. It is a figure showing the characteristic of each RT state in modification 1 of a 10th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number table (non-RT) in the modification 2 of 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number table (RT1) in the modification 2 of 10th Embodiment. It is a diagram showing winning and replay condition devices (numbers 17 to 20) in Modification 2 of the tenth embodiment. It is a diagram showing winning and replay condition devices (numbers 21 to 24) in modification example 2 of the tenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out for each condition device and each press order in non-RT and setting 1 in Modification 2 of the 10th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out for each condition device and each press order under RT1 and setting 1 in Modification 2 of the tenth embodiment. It is a figure showing the characteristic of each RT in modification 2 of a 10th embodiment.

In this specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
“Bet” refers to betting medals (gaming media) in order to play a game. To bet medals, the player either inserts actual medals through the medal slot 47, or operates the bet switch 40 to bet credited (accumulated) medals.
On the other hand, "credit (also referred to as "storage")" is different from the above-mentioned "bet" and refers to the storage of medals inside the slot machine 10. In this specification, "credit" is used in a meaning that does not include "bet."
Furthermore, "insertion" refers to betting or crediting medals.
Further, the "regular number" refers to the number of bets that can be started (executed) in the game. For example, in a game where the specified number is "2" or "3", the game can be started with either the number of bets "2" or "3", and the game cannot be played with the number of bets "1".
Note that for convenience of explanation, the "prescribed number" may be referred to as the "bet number".
On the other hand, the term "number of bets" may refer to something other than the "specified number." For example, in a game with a specified number of "2" or "3", when one medal is inserted (before the game starts), the bet number is "1" (the number bet at that time).

"Care" means that the player inserts medals from the medal slot 47 (described later).
"Care bet" means that the player bets on medals by taking care of the medals from the medal slot 47.
"Care credit" means that the player credits the medals (adds credits) by taking care of the medals from the medal slot 47.

“Bet medal” refers to a medal that has been bet on.
"Reserved medals" refer to medals that have been credited (reserved).
A "storage bet" is a bet by which a player operates the bet switch 40 (described later) to place a part or all of the credited medals within the bettable range for the game in order to play the game. It means to do something.
"Automatic bet" refers to automatically betting the number of medals bet in the previous game by the control processing of the slot machine 10 when a replay wins.
Here, the fact that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed (meaning that it has stopped on the active line; the same applies hereinafter) is referred to as "winning a small winning combination".
On the other hand, the "Regulations Concerning Certification and Type Testing of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as the "Rules")" stipulates that when a symbol combination corresponding to replay is displayed in a stopped state, a conditional device related to replay is activated. This is interpreted as not "winning".
However, in the present application (this specification, etc.), replay is also treated as one of the winning combinations (replay winning combination), and the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is sometimes referred to as "replay winning."
“Settlement” refers to paying out bet medals and/or stored medals to the player. In this embodiment, the payment process is executed when the payment switch 43 (described later) is operated.

"Payout" refers to paying out medals to the player based on the winning combination, or paying out medals based on the above-mentioned settlement. When paying out medals to a player based on a winning combination, the medals are stored as credits (adding the stored medals, in other words, updating the electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described later)), and paying out the medals. This includes both dispensing actual medals from a mouth (not shown). The payout of medals is controlled so that, for example, "50" medals are credited as a limit number, and medals in excess of "50" are actually paid out to the player.
Note that "payout" may also be referred to as "granting". Therefore, the "number of payouts" may be referred to as the "number of grants."

The "gaming medium" is a medal in this embodiment, but in the case of an enclosed type (ECO) gaming machine, for example, electronic information (electronic medals, electronic data) is used as the gaming medium. Furthermore, "electronic information" refers to, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the amount of money, and part or all of that electronic information can be used to play a game on a gaming machine. Credit can be placed on a gaming machine as gaming media for playing games.
Note that "gaming media" may also be referred to as "gaming value."

Furthermore, when the game medium is electronic information, "paying out medals" means crediting (adding) to a game medium credit device provided in the game machine. Therefore, "paying out medals" does not only mean actually paying out medals from the hopper 35 (described later), but also crediting electronic information for the payout corresponding to the winning combination to the game media credit device ( It also includes processing for adding (addition).

When the game progresses from "N-1" game, "N" game, "N+1" game, etc. ("N" is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is "N" game. When the number is ``N'', the game with the ``N'' game is called the ``current game''. In addition, the "N-1" game is referred to as the "previous game." Furthermore, the "N+1" game is referred to as the "next game."

In this specification, a numerical value with "(B)" appended to the end of the number (especially 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, numbers with "(H)", "H", or "h" appended to the end of the numbers mean hexadecimal numbers. Specifically, for example, a numerical value that indicates "16" in decimal is written as "00010000 (B)" in binary, and "10 (H)", "10H", or "10h" in hexadecimal. . In addition, a numerical value meaning a decimal number is written as "16 (D)" if necessary.
However, if it is clear whether it is a binary number, decimal number, or hexadecimal number, "(B)", "(D)", "(H)", "H" or "h" respectively. The trailing symbol may be omitted.

In addition, the probability that a desired symbol can be stopped on the active line from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops (maximum number of moving pieces) is calculated by "drawing". rate (PB).
If the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate position of the reel 31 (at an operation timing that allows the target symbol to be stopped on the active line within the range of the maximum number of movement frames), the target symbol will be stopped on the active line (valid PB≠1 means that it is not possible to pull the ball up to the line.
On the other hand, no matter what position the reels 31 are at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), it is possible to always stop (draw) the target symbol on the active line. It is called "PB=1".

Further, the "operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed and/or the operation timing (the timing at which the stop switch is pressed to stop the target symbol on the active line).
Furthermore, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 refers to a game that has a payout or a number of payouts in which the game result (symbol combination that stops on an active line) is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. Refers to an operation mode in which many symbol combinations are stopped, a symbol combination that moves to an advantageous RT (promotion) is stopped, or a symbol combination that does not shift (fall) to a disadvantageous RT stops. The "advantageous operation mode" is also referred to as a correct operation mode or a correct pressing order.

"Games in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42" include, for example, games in which multiple types of small winning combinations (bells) with different payout numbers are won (so-called "push order bells"). ), this corresponds to the case where the type of winning small winning combination (bell) differs (the number of payouts differs) depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. Also, for example, in a game in which multiple types of replays are won (double replay wins, so-called "push order replay" games), RT changes depending on the type of winning replay.

The "instruction function" refers to a function that instructs the player how to operate the stop switch 42. The instruction function is, in principle, a function for instructing the player on an advantageous operating mode of the stop switch 42.
In other words, the "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning.
Note that "display" means to visually show the contents of the "instruction", and "notification" means to notify the player of the contents of the instruction. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function."

Further, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be limited to the notification of the most advantageous operation mode. The notification of the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be set as "activation of the instruction function," but the notification of any operation mode including the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be set as "instruction function activation." It may also be referred to as "operation".
For example, if the order of pressing the bell is 6 selections, the payout when the bell is won will be 1, 3, 4, 10, or missed (non-winning) depending on the order of pressing. Assume that
Here, notifying the pressing order for winning a 10-card combination is notifying an advantageous operating mode of the stop switch 42, and of course corresponds to "operation of an instruction function."
On the other hand, notifying the pressing order for winning a 1-card, 3-card, or 4-card winning combination may be referred to as "notification of an advantageous operation mode (activation of an instruction function)" or "advantageous operation mode It does not have to be "notice of".

The pressing order for winning a 4-card combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pressing order that does not allow a 10-card combination to win. However, since the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "4", and the difference in the number of coins for the game is "+1", this is an operation mode that increases the difference in number of coins, and is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.
Similarly, the pressing order for winning a 3-card combination is not the most advantageous operation mode since it is the pressing order that does not allow a 10-card combination to win. However, since the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "3", and the difference number is maintained as it is (does not decrease the difference number), this is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation state.

Furthermore, similarly, the pressing order for winning a 1-card combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pressing order that does not allow a 10-card combination to win. Furthermore, this is an operation mode in which the number of payouts is "1" for the number of bets "3", reducing the difference in the number of coins. However, since it can be said to be an operating mode that does not leave out any winnings, it may not be said to be a disadvantageous operating mode.

In this embodiment, when the instruction function is activated when the push order bell is won, the operation mode (correct answer push order) in which the combination with the largest number of payouts wins is notified.
However, for example, when the difference counter value (described later) during the advantageous section approaches the upper limit (2400 (D)), but there is still room in the remaining number of games in the advantageous section (advantageous section clear counter value described later). It is conceivable that when the push order bell is won, the push order for winning a 3-card winning combination or a 4-card winning combination is notified as described above, and the difference counter value is controlled so as to maintain the current status.

Further, in this embodiment, the operation of the instruction function is limited to one prescribed number. For example, assume that the specified number of instruction functions to be activated is set to "3". In this case, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3" during AT, when the game is started with a bet number of "3" and the push order bell is won, the instruction function can be activated. On the other hand, when the game is started with the bet number "2", the instruction function cannot be activated even if the push order bell is won.

The "gaming section" includes a "normal section (non-advantageous section)" and an "advantageous section." In addition, the No. 5.9 machine had a "waiting section" (a gaming section that won the advantageous section lottery but has not yet transitioned to the advantageous section), but under the current No. 6 machine rules, the "waiting section" etc. is not provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and game sections other than the normal section and the advantageous section may be provided.
"Normal section" refers to signals related to the instruction function, specifically the press order instruction number and winning/replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct press order), which will be described later, on the peripheral board (for example, the sub-control board 80). ), and refers to a game period that does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (no processing related to the instruction function is executed). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to the lottery of winning combinations, it is also possible to determine whether or not to move to an advantageous section (by lottery, etc.).

In the normal section, the instruction function must not be activated, so the push order instruction information cannot be displayed on a predetermined display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and the instruction function Since the signal related to this is not transmitted to the peripheral board, the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 cannot display (notify) an advantageous operation mode.

On the other hand, the "advantageous section" is a game section that has performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be activated). It refers to a game section in which a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that the content (operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section where the instruction function can be activated (the instruction function may be activated), that is, a game section where the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (or may be displayed).
However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output an effect that is contrary to the contents of the instruction given by the main control board 60 or the signal related to the received instruction function.

Moreover, even if the advantageous section is a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, there is no need to activate the instruction function.
On the other hand, during the advantageous period, in a game where the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the instruction function may be always operated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
AT (notification gaming state) is a gaming state in which the operating mode of the stop switch 42 is notified in a game where the gaming result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operating mode of the stop switch 42. Therefore, AT is always during the advantageous section and is never performed during the non-advantageous section.

Further, in a game where the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantage/disadvantage in the game result, the AT may always notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (at 100%), but the AT may notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 at all times (at 100%), In order to keep the game within the range defined by the rules, it is conceivable not to notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 even if the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
For example, if the difference counter approaches the upper limit value during AT, but the number of AT games still remains, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 will not be notified temporarily in order to prolong the life of AT. (not activating the instruction function) is also conceivable.

Furthermore, various settings can be made regarding the relationship between the advantageous section and the AT. For example, the first option is to set "advantageous section=AT". In this case, winning in the advantageous section and winning in AT are equivalent. Then, AT starts from the first game in the advantageous section. Further, AT ends at the end of the advantageous section.

A second method is to set "AT≠advantageous section".
In this case, simply moving to an advantageous section will not satisfy the AT start (execution) conditions, and on the condition that it is in an advantageous section, whether or not to execute AT is determined by lottery etc. When it is decided to execute the AT, the AT may be executed until a predetermined termination condition for the AT is satisfied. In addition, if it is non-AT when moving to the advantageous section, for example, the main game state may be set to the normal section, omen, CZ (chance zone (period where it is easy to win AT)), etc.

When transitioning to the precursor after transitioning to the advantageous section, the transition may be made to the actual precursor, and after a predetermined number of games of the actual precursor are completed, the transition may be made to AT. Alternatively, at the time of transition to an advantageous section or after a transition to an advantageous section, it may be determined by lottery whether to use a real omen or a false omen, and if it is determined to be a real omen, the transition to AT may be made after the main omen ends. . Further, when it is determined that the false sign is false, the advantageous zone may be maintained after the false sign ends, or the advantageous zone may be shifted to the normal zone.
Furthermore, when the AT termination condition is satisfied, both the AT and the advantageous section may be terminated. Alternatively, if the AT ends but the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not met, the advantageous section may be continued (non-AT and advantageous section). The same applies when AT is started at the same time as the advantageous section.

Further, when starting the advantageous section, the number of games played in the advantageous section is determined, and during the advantageous section, a lottery etc. related to the advantageous section is not executed.
Furthermore, when starting the advantageous section, the initial number of games in the advantageous section is determined, and during the advantageous section, it is determined (by lottery, etc.) whether to add (add) the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section. This can be mentioned.
Furthermore, if a predetermined end condition is set for an advantageous section, and the predetermined end condition for an advantageous section is met, even if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section (or the remaining number of games in AT) is reached, at that point One example is to end the advantageous section at .

Here, the "predetermined end condition" of the advantageous section means that the difference counter value described below exceeds "2400 (D)" or that the advantageous section clear counter (remaining number of games in the advantageous section) described below is " 0". When any of these conditions is met, it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, and the next game is shifted to the normal section (non-advantageous section). In this case, even if the final game is AT, the AT ends at the same time as the advantageous section ends.

In the advantageous section, an advantageous section display LED (also referred to as a "section indicator") 77, which will be described later, is turned on. The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at all times during the advantageous section, or may be turned on when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied after the transition to the advantageous section.
Here, the "predetermined lighting condition" includes, for example, a case where the instruction function is activated in a gaming state in which the game is in an advantageous section and the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1". Note that once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, it remains lit during the advantageous section.

In addition, "Section Sim (simulation) ball payout rate" means that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed (even when winning the "PB ≠ 1" combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed). If there are multiple types of symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player (when the push order bell is won, the high bell that will give the maximum payout) will be selected. This is the ball payout rate when it is assumed that the display is stopped. In calculating the section Sim ball payout rate, the balls (number of payouts) due to accessory actions (1BB action, etc.) are not included. In addition, in a game that won a replay, if the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts will be counted as "0", and in a replay based on a winning replay (the next game of the game that won a replay), the number of bets will be counted as "0". It is calculated as "0" and the number of payouts as "x"("x" is the number of payouts in the game). Alternatively, the number of payouts for games that win replays and the number of bets for the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the "gaming state in which the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds 1" includes RT and main game states in which the section Sim ball payout rate is set to exceed "1."
Here, examples of RTs in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1" include RTs with a high replay winning probability.
Furthermore, assuming that CZ (chance zone), AT, pullback sections, etc. are usually provided as the main game state, the main game state in which the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1" is AT.

When ending the advantageous section, more specifically, in the final game of the advantageous section, for example, during the game end check process described later, or during the game start setting process for the next game of the last game of the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off. do. When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt processing by executing an initialization process for the advantageous section display LED flag, which will be described later.

The "processing related to advantageous sections" includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Advantageous section (transition) lottery 2) Update of advantageous section clear counter (subtraction, clear)
3) Update the difference counter (calculation, clear)
4) Update of advantageous section type flag 5) Control of advantageous section display LED 77 (update of advantageous section display LED flag)

Further, the "processing related to the instruction function" includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Display of push order instruction information (operation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of game number management type AT (specification that ends AT when the number of remaining games reaches "0"), update the AT game number counter (subtraction, addition, clearing)
4) For differential number management type AT (specification that ends AT when the remaining differential number becomes "0"), update the AT differential number counter (subtraction, addition, clear)

According to the current rules, it is stipulated that both the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed in one gaming state (RT) in one prescribed number, except for the following. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the specified number is "3", the process related to the advantageous section and the process related to the instruction function can be executed, and when the specified number is "2", the process related to the advantageous section and the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed. And so.
However, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to update the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter, regardless of the specified number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result is non-winning (for example, when the winning number is "0" in FIG. 26, which will be described later), in other words, in the game when the conditional device is not activated, It is determined that such processing (advantageous section transition lottery) will not be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process related to the advantageous section may be executed even if the lottery result is non-winning.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if the lottery result is non-winning, if the probability of non-winning is more than a predetermined value (when the probability is not extremely low; for example, "1/17500" or more), the instruction function is applied. The process (AT lottery process) is made executable.

Furthermore, as a result of executing the advantageous section transfer lottery (processing related to advantageous sections), if the advantageous section transfer lottery is won, the next game will be an advantageous section. Therefore, in a game in which an advantageous section transition lottery (processing related to an advantageous section) is executed and an advantageous section is won, notification of the correct answer pressing order (processing related to the instruction function) cannot be executed.
However, there is no problem in performing the advantageous section transfer lottery (processing related to the advantageous section) and the AT lottery (processing related to the instruction function) in one game. Furthermore, for example, when a specific winning lottery result is obtained, it may be determined to be an advantageous section and AT (without executing the lottery).

The management information display LED (also referred to as a "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display") 74 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and has a two-digit identification segment (which of the following five items is displayed). (LED for displaying the calculated ratio using a predetermined symbol, etc.) and a two-digit ratio segment (LED for displaying the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratios of the following five items 1) to 5) at predetermined time intervals.
1) Either advantageous section ratio (cumulative total) (7U.) or designated accessory ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Accessory ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Continuous role ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Accessory ratio (cumulative total) (7A.)

For example, when displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative total), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the accessory ratio (cumulative total) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed. Display in the ratio segment.
Here, the "cumulative total" refers to the total sum of numerical values that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, counting is continued until the number of games has reached at least "175,000". When the cumulative total is less than "175,000" the number of games played, the ratio is displayed, for example, by a blinking display, and when it is more than "175,000" number of games, the ratio is displayed, for example, by a lighting display. Even after the total number of games exceeds "175,000", it continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
Furthermore, "6000 games" is the total number of games played for 15 sets, where one set is "400" times.

The "advantageous section ratio" refers to the ratio (ratio) of staying in the advantageous section to all gaming sections (non-advantageous section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all the game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section between them is "700", the advantageous section ratio is "70%".
Furthermore, the "instruction-inclusive accessory ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts. In addition, in a slot machine that is not equipped with an accessory, the "instruction included accessory ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
The sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated is counted by the instruction-included accessory counter.

Furthermore, the "number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function was activated" is based on the operation of the stop switch 42 according to the pressing order displayed by the activation of the instruction function, for example, when 10 bells are won, "10" is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.
On the other hand, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is pressed in a different order from the displayed order and one bell is won, for example, "1" will be displayed on the instruction-included accessory counter. is added.
Similarly, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) because the stop switch 42 was pressed in a different order from the displayed pressing order, the instruction-included accessory counter is not added to. In other words, the count value from the previous game remains the same.

In addition, when winning the common bell during AT, the instruction function is activated in the same way as when winning the push order bell, and the instruction function is activated in the same way as when winning the push order bell. There is also a case where it is not activated. When the instruction function is activated when the common bell is won, the number of payouts in the game is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.

On the other hand, when the common bell is won and the instruction function is not activated, the number of payouts for the game is not added to the instruction-included accessory counter. However, the total number of payouts will be added to the counter. In this case, the sub-control board 80 may notify the correct pressing order using images or sounds.

In addition, as special bonuses (accessories), BB (first type accessory continuous operation device; first type big bonus), RB (first type special accessory; regular bonus), and MB (second type accessory continuous operation device) Actuating device; Type 2 Big Bonus).
Here, BB is a device that can operate RB continuously. That is, during the BB game, the RB game is executed continuously. Furthermore, during the RB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases. Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out during the RB game exceeds a predetermined number, the RB game ends. Further, when the number of medals paid out during the BB game exceeds a predetermined number, the BB game ends.

Moreover, MB is a device that can continuously operate CB (class 2 special accessory). That is, during the MB game, the CB game is executed continuously. Furthermore, during the CB game, regardless of the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61, all the small winning combinations are won repeatedly, and the stop switch 42 is not operated for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31). The time from the moment when the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (the maximum number of moving frames is 1 frame). Further, the CB game ends in one game, and when the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds a predetermined number, the MB game ends.

Furthermore, when a special prize is won, the winning information of the special prize is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the won special prize stops on the active line.
A game in which a special role has not been won is called a "non-internal" game, and a game in which a special role has been won but the symbol combination corresponding to the won special role has not stopped on the active line, that is, a special role has been won. A game in which information is carried over is called "internal play."

Further, when BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the active line (BB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the BB game starts from the next game. During the BB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases as the RB game is executed continuously. When the number of medals paid out during the BB game exceeds a predetermined number, the BB game is ended and the next game returns to the gaming state before shifting to the BB game.

Furthermore, if the BB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the BB does not stop on the active line, the winning information on the BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the BB stops on the active line. A gaming state in which BB winning information is carried over is called "BB internal".
Note that the timing of transition to the inside of the BB can be set as appropriate. For example, in the game in which the BB was won, after all the reels 31 have stopped, the reels 31 may be moved to the inside of the BB, or in the game in which the BB was won, the reels were not moved to the inside of the BB, and in the next game, the reels 31 were moved to the inside of the BB. You may move it inside.

Furthermore, when RB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to RB stops on the active line (RB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the RB game starts from the next game. During the RB game, the probability of winning a small prize increases. When the number of medals paid out during the RB game exceeds a predetermined number, the RB game is ended and the next game returns to the gaming state before the transition to the RB game.

Furthermore, when an RB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the RB does not stop on the active line, the winning information of the RB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops on the active line. A gaming state in which RB winning information is carried over is called "RB internal".
Note that the timing of transition to the inside of the RB can be set as appropriate, similar to the timing of transition to the inside of the BB. For example, in the game in which the RB is won, after all the reels 31 have stopped, the reels 31 may be moved to the inside of the RB, or in the game in which the RB is won, the reels are not moved to the inside of the RB, and in the next game, the reels 31 are moved to the inside of the RB. You may move it inside.

Furthermore, if the MB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the active line (MB wins), no medals will be paid out in the current game, but the MB game will start from the next game. During the MB game, the CB game is executed continuously. When the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds a predetermined number, the MB game is ended and the next game returns to the gaming state before the transition to the MB game.
Furthermore, if the MB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the MB does not stop on the active line, the winning information of the MB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the active line. A gaming state in which MB winning information is carried over is called "MB internal".

"RT" means that the type (number) of winning combinations to be drawn and the winning probability are unique to the lottery, and "RT transition" means a transition from one RT to another RT. This means that the winning probability of at least one replay to be drawn will vary.
Therefore, the type of replay and the probability of winning for one RT are values specific to that RT, and the types of replay and the probability of winning for one RT will never be the same. do not have. However, it is acceptable for one RT and another RT to have the same total replay winning probability.
Note that "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to "RT0". Therefore, in this specification, "RT" includes non-RT.

The "continuous bonus ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the first type special bonus (RB) is activated to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in this embodiment, it refers to "the number of payouts during 1BB operation relative to the total number of payouts."
For example, if the total number of payouts in the number of games played is ``6000'' is ``2000 pieces'', and the number of payouts when the ``Class 1 special bonus (RB)'' is activated is ``500 pieces'', then The ratio (6000 games) is 25 (%).

Moreover, the "accessory object ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated to the total number of payouts. Here, "accessories" refers to the above-mentioned first-class special accessories, as well as second-class special accessories (CB), also referred to as MB (2BB). Second-class accessories continuous operation device. CB ), SB (single bonus) is included.
In addition, in the above five items, if a gaming machine is not equipped with a function corresponding to that item, the ratio segment is displayed as "--" by lighting up.
For example, if "RB (Class 1 special accessory)" is not provided, there is no continuous accessory ratio, so when displaying ratio display numbers "2" and "4", the ratio segment is set to "--" ” is displayed on the display.
As described above, five types of ratios are displayed on the management information display LED 74, and a test pattern is displayed at a predetermined timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Further, the rules stipulate that the advantageous section ratio and the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio should be 70% or less. Furthermore, it is stated that the ratio of accessories should be 70% or less, and it is stipulated that the ratio of consecutive accessories should be 60% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information is within the legal range.

Note that a gaming machine with a specification in which the advantageous section ratio is 70% or less is referred to as a "7U" type, and a gaming machine with a specification in which the instruction-included accessory ratio is 70% or less is referred to as a "7P" type. A gaming machine with an advantageous section is either of the "7U" type or the "7P" type. In the case of the "7U" type, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the "7P" type, the instruction-included accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed.
In the "7U" type, the ratio of advantageous sections to all game sections must be 70% or less, but in the "7P" type, the total number of payouts due to the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the accessory is It is sufficient to make it 70% or less of the number of payouts, and for example, the entire period or most of the game period may be an advantageous period.

For example, when moving to a non-advantageous section, the settings should be set so that there is a 100% probability of winning the advantageous section lottery, and the setting should be set so that the probability of winning the advantageous section lottery is approximately 100% (for example, about 98%). Alternatively, it may be set to have a high probability (for example, 70%) of winning the advantageous section lottery.
The "7U" type cannot perform processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery) by referring to the setting value itself, but the "7P" type can perform processing related to the instruction function by referring to the setting value itself. Is possible.

Furthermore, the management information display LED 74 can also be applied to a pachinko game machine as a performance display monitor.
In this case, the management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) is composed of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment, as in the case of a slot machine (player type gaming machine). Then, the base value in real time (during measurement) for each ``60,000'' out balls (``base value'' indicates how many safe balls are out of 100 out balls), and the ``60,000 out balls''. ” The base values of the first, second, and third base values are displayed sequentially for each item. For example, the real-time base value identification segment is displayed as "bL.", the previous base value identification segment is displayed as "b1.", and the two previous base value identification segment is displayed as "b2." and the identification segment of the base value three times before is displayed as "b3.".
In this way, the management information display LED 74 is applied not only to slot machines but also to pachinko gaming machines.

<First embodiment>
In the first embodiment, in a game in which multiple types of small winning combinations (bells) with different payout numbers are won repeatedly (a game in which the so-called "push order bell" is won), a prize is won depending on the operation mode (press order) of the stop switch 42. This is a slot machine in which the game result (number of coins paid) is advantageous/disadvantageous due to different types of small winning combinations (symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed on active lines).
The first embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram schematically showing control of a slot machine 10, which is an example of a gaming machine in the first embodiment.
Typical control boards provided in the slot machine 10 include a main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (this does not mean that it includes only those shown in FIG. 1).

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and peripheral equipment for playing the game, including operation switches such as the bet switch 40, are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection section into which signals from operating switches and the like are input, and the output port 52 is a connection section through which signals are sent to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, peripheral devices for input are indicated by arrows that direct signals from the peripheral devices toward the main control board 50, and peripheral devices for output are indicated by arrows that direct signals from the main control board 50 to the peripheral devices. (The same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium that can store (update) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game and the like.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for playing the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (IC with a calculation function) provided on the main control board 50, and executes programs and calculations necessary for the progress of the game. The controller controls the drive and pays out when a prize is won.

Furthermore, an MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and registers is mounted on the main control board 50. Note that the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided outside the MPU in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.
Note that an MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is also mounted on the sub control board 80, which will be described later. Note that the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided outside the MPU in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted through the medal slot 47 are sent into the medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 1, inside the medal selector, a passage sensor 46, a blocker 45, and an input sensor 44 (a pair of input sensors 44a and 44b) are provided (but not limited to these). These are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The medals inserted through the medal slot 47 are first detected by the passage sensor 46.

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 46. The blocker 45 is for allowing/disallowing the insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, it forms a medal passageway through which the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 are returned from the payout opening. do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage is formed to guide the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 47 to the hopper 35. The blocker 45 is, for example, a switching member that blocks an opening formed in a part of the medal passage in the medal selector (an opening leading to the medal return port) to form a medal passage for guiding the medals to the hopper 35 side. and an actuator for driving the switching member.

Here, the blocker 45 disables the insertion of medals during the game (from when the reels 31 start rotating until all the reels 31 stop and when a winning combination ends the payout corresponding to the winning combination). do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when no game is being played.

In the medal selector, an input sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. In this embodiment, the input sensor 44 is composed of a pair of input sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance apart, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since a medal is detected by one input sensor 44a, the input sensor 44 is activated by the other input sensor 44b. It is configured to be detected by Then, it is determined whether or not the correct medal has been inserted based on the timing at which the pair of input sensors 44 are turned on and off, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 also includes a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, (left, middle, right) stop switches 42, and operation switches operated by the player. A settlement switch 43 is electrically connected.
Here, the "operation switch (or simply, "switch")" is used to turn on/off an electric signal based on the operation of the operating body by the player (operator) (receiving external force). It refers to a device (including an electric circuit and/or electric parts), and does not limit the shape of the operating body operated by the player.

When the operating switch is in the off state, for example, light from the light emitting element continues to enter the light receiving element (when the light receiving element continues to detect light, the operating switch is in the off state). Then, when a player or the like operates the operation switch (the operation body thereof), the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electrical signal indicating that the operation switch has been turned on is transmitted to the main control board 50. Note that, contrary to the above, when the operation switch is in the off state, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and when the light from the light emitting element enters the light receiving element, the operation switch is in the on state. You may.

In this embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 is lever-shaped (therefore also referred to as a "start lever (switch) 41"), and includes a bet switch 40, a stop switch 42, and a settlement switch. The operating body 43 has a push button shape (therefore, it is also referred to as a "bet button (switch) 40", "stop button (switch) 42", and "settlement button (switch) 43").

Although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operating body of the operating switch and/or around or near the operating body. When the operation acceptance of the operation switch is permitted, for example, the LED corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light, and when the operation reception of the operation switch is not permitted, for example, the LED corresponding to the operation switch is emitted in blue. By emitting red light from an LED or the like, the permission/disapproval state of the operation switch is indicated to the player.

Specifically, for example, when all the reels 31 are rotating and the stop switches 42 can be operated, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit blue light to notify the player that they can be operated. Shown below. When one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to stop. Thereafter, the remaining stop switches 42 become operable only when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the reel 31 that has been controlled to stop ends and the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 is turned off. Later. Therefore, during that time, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit red light. When the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 ends and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to the stop switch 42 is turned off, the LED of the already operated stop switch 42 is turned off. Although the LEDs of the stop switches 42 that have not been operated yet are still emitting red light, they are caused to emit blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch that is operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the current game. This embodiment includes a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal, and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three medals (maximum number, specified number).
Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

Note that the prescribed number is predetermined, for example, depending on when the accessory is not activated/when it is activated. Specifically, the number is set to 3 when the accessory is not activated, when the SB is activated, when 1BB is activated, and 2 when 2BB is activated, etc. By operating the 1-bet switch 40a twice, it is possible to insert two medals, and by operating it three times, it is possible to insert three medals. Also, when the specified number is 3, you can insert 3 medals at once by operating the 3-bet switch 40b, and when the specified number is 2, you can insert 3 medals at once by operating the 3-bet switch 40b. Two medals can be inserted at once. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated in a state where less than the prescribed number has already been bet, the bet processing is performed so that the number of bets becomes three.

Further, the start switch 41 is an operation switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, right) reels 31, and are operation switches operated by the player to stop the corresponding reels 31.
Further, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) medals bet and/or stored (credit) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Note that in reality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. In this way, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other with a harness or the like, but may be connected via another separate board (relay board, etc.). For example, one or more other boards (such as a relay board) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.

The display board 75 is equipped with a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78.
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.

In addition, the acquired number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the number of payouts (the number acquired by the player) when winning a winning combination, and is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit, like the credit number display LED 76. .
Note that the acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to turn off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digits may be turned off and only the lower digits may be displayed as "0".

The acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but when an error occurs, it functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error.
Furthermore, the obtained number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays push order instruction information (notifies an advantageous push order) in a game where the push order is notified during AT. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquisition number, error details, and push order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that a dedicated LED or the like for displaying push order instruction information may be provided.
Note that during AT, notification of an advantageous pressing order is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to a motor (stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 and the like of the symbol display device.
The symbol display device includes reels 31 (three in this embodiment) that display symbols, a motor 32 that drives each reel 31, and a reel sensor 33 that detects the position of the reel 31.

The motor 32 serves as a driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control means 65, which will be described later.
Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 that is operated when stopping the left reel 31 is a left stop switch 42. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated to stop the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.
Note that the left reel 31 may be referred to as the first reel 31, the middle reel 31 may be referred to as the second reel 31, and the right reel 31 may be referred to as the third reel 31.

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (symbols forming symbol combinations corresponding to winning combinations) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel 31.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one index (or two or more indexes). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the circumferential side of the reel 31, and is used to detect whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has rotated once. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment the index is detected can be detected. Furthermore, from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, how many pulses should the (stepping) motor 32 be driven to stop the symbol at the number of symbols ahead, counting from the symbol on the reference position, on the effective line? It becomes possible to identify whether the

Further, a medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal dispensing device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when dispensing medals from the hopper 35 from a dispensing port, and a dispensing motor 36 for detecting medals dispensed from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been cleaned and accepted (determined to be normal) from the medal input port 47 are stored in the hopper 35.
In this embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 includes a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance apart. Then, when a medal is paid out, a predetermined moving member is moved by the medal. The dispensing sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off by movement of a predetermined moving member. Based on whether the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off within a predetermined time range, it is determined whether the medals are correctly paid out.

For example, if it is not detected that the pair of payout sensors 37 are turned on even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output an on signal, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.

When starting a game, the player inserts medals credited in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet) or inserts medals from the medal slot 47 (care bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with a prescribed number of medals for the game being bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) receives this signal, it performs a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, and drives and controls all the motors 32 to control all the reels 31. Control it to rotate. As the reels 31 are rotated by the motor 32 in this manner, the symbols on the reels 31 are displayed moving up and down within the display window at a predetermined speed.

Then, by pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) receives this signal, it drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 to display the lottery result (internal lottery) of the winning combination lottery means 61. The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed in accordance with the result determined by the means.

Then, the game result of the current game is displayed based on the symbol combination when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on the active line (when the winning combination is achieved), medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following combination lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in this embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The winning combination lottery means 61 performs lottery (determination, selection) of winning numbers. Here, the "drawing of winning numbers by the prize drawing means 61" is the same as the "internal drawing" in the Entertainment Business Law Regulations (regulations regarding certification of gaming machines and type examination, etc., hereinafter simply referred to as "Rules"). The lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61 is the same as the "result determined by internal lottery" in the rules. Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as "internal lottery means 61" in accordance with the rules.
When the winning number is determined by the prize lottery means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the prize condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition device becomes operable in the game. In addition, the accessory condition device will be determined. Therefore, the winning combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, or the like.

The winning lottery means 61 includes, for example, a random number generating means for lottery (hardware random numbers, etc.), a random number extracting means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generating means, and a random number extracting means based on the random number extracted by the random number extracting means. and winning number determining means for determining the winning number.

The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal notation). The random number is a random number that continues counting in the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle by a counter that counts once every 200n (nano) seconds, for example, and while the slot machine 10 is powered on, the random number is Continue counting.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs by comparing the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with a lottery table to be described later.

The winning flag control means 62 controls on/off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61. In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. When one of the winning combinations is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag for that winning combination is turned on (the winning flag is set). Note that there are two cases of winning a winning combination: a case where there is only one winning combination (single winning) and a case where there are multiple winning combinations (multiple winning).

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects a push order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct push order) based on the lottery result of the winning number by the winning combination lottery means 61 (when a push order bell or a push order replay is won). decision).
The “push order” of the press order instruction numbers selected here means a press order (correct press order) that is advantageous for the player. For example, when a push order bell is won, it refers to the push order (correct answer push order) that makes the higher bell win the prize. In addition, when a replay double win occurs, it refers to the push order that promotes to an advantageous RT or the push order that does not allow the RT to fall to a disadvantageous RT.

In this embodiment, each winning number is provided with a unique push order instruction number.
Then, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during AT, the main control board 50 displays the above-mentioned obtained number display LED 78 with push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically "=*"("*"=1, 2, . . .) information is displayed. In this manner, the function of displaying push order instruction information when a conditional device having an advantageous push order is activated is also referred to as an instruction function.
In addition, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during AT, the main control board 50 controls the sub control board at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined). 80, a command corresponding to the push order instruction number is transmitted.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it displays an image of the correct pressing order on the image display device 23.

Note that the push order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous interval (AT). Therefore, even if a push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the push order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. Note that in the normal section, it is not necessary to select the push order instruction number.

The performance group number selection means 64 is for selecting the performance group number corresponding to the winning number to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Here, the performance group number corresponding to the winning number is determined in advance. When the winning number is determined by operating the start switch 41, the performance group number selection means 64 selects the performance group number corresponding to the winning number of the game, and the main control board 50 selects the performance group number corresponding to the winning number of the game. The number is sent to the sub control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs a performance related to the winning combination based on the received performance group number. The effect group number, unlike the above-mentioned push order instruction number, is selected every game and is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.

Further, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number of the game to the sub control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning numbers of the game. However, since the sub-control board 80 receives the performance group number for each game, it is possible to output the performance based on the received performance group number. However, even if the push order bell or push order replay is won, the correct push order cannot be determined from the presentation group number, so the sub-control board 80 will not notify the correct press order based on the presentation group number. . On the other hand, during AT, when the push order bell or push order replay is won, the push order instruction number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 can notify the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number.

The reel control means 65 controls all (three) reels 31 to start rotating when receiving a command to start rotating the reels 31, particularly when detecting the operation of the start switch 41 in this embodiment. .
Further, after the winning numbers are determined by the winning combination lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on/off of the winning flag in the current game, and generates a stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off of the winning flag. is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and the motor 32 is The drive is controlled so that the reel 31 is stopped at the determined position.

For example, in a game where at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 enables the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination (the winning flag is on) within the range of stop control of the reels 31. The reels 31 are stopped so as to be stopped on the line, and the reels 31 are stopped so as not to stop symbol combinations corresponding to combinations other than winning combinations (winning flags are turned off) on the effective line.

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reels 31" refers to the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reels 31 actually stop, or the amount of rotation of the reels 31 (number of moving symbols (frames)). means within range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 revolutions per minute at constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is within 190 ms, except for a predetermined reel 31 (for example, the middle reel 31) during MB operation. is set to . As a result, in this embodiment, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to 4 symbols, excluding a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation.

On the other hand, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. As a result, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to one symbol.

At the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of stop control of the reels 31 is a symbol that should be stopped on a predetermined active line, when the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the symbol is controlled to stop at a predetermined active line.
That is, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol of the combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on the predetermined active line, the reels 31 will be stopped until the reels 31 are stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number is controlled to be stopped on a predetermined valid line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number will stop on the active line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, control is performed so that symbol combinations of winning combinations that do not correspond to the winning numbers are not stopped on the active line (kick-off stop control).
Furthermore, in a game where multiple winning combinations are won (for example, when the push order bell is won), the priority order of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed and the timing at which the stop switches 42 are operated. According to a predetermined priority order, control is performed to stop the drawing of symbols related to the most prioritized winning combination.

The winning determination means 66 determines, when the reels 31 are stopped, whether or not the symbol combination of the reels 31 that has stopped on the active line is a symbol combination that corresponds to any winning combination.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the active line. Specifically, from the condition device activated in the game, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and/or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, a symbol combination that will stop on the active line before the reel 31 actually stops is determined in advance. Or, after the reels 31 have stopped, the symbol combinations that have stopped on the active line are determined in advance.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the production output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80.
The control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, and a press order instruction number (only during AT and when a winning number with the correct press order is won). , performance group number, RT (game status) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on winning combinations, etc.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during the game and while waiting for the game.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) unidirectionally communicates with the sub-control board 80 through parallel communication. Sends information (control commands) necessary for output.
Note that the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used together.

Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to peripheral equipment for effects, such as the effect lamp 21 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. However, peripheral devices for presentation are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data etc. taken in when the sub CPU 85 controls the performance.
Further, the ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores programs for holding a lottery related to a performance, various data, etc. as performance data.

The effect lamps 21 are made of, for example, LEDs, and are lit in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met. Note that the production lamp 21 includes a back lamp that is placed on the inner circumference side of each reel 31 and illuminates the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three consecutive symbols visible from the display window) from behind. These include a fluorescent light that illuminates the symbols on the reels 31 from above, a frame lamp that is placed in front of the front door of the slot machine 10, and that blinks when a winning combination is won.

Further, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when predetermined conditions are met in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various effect images during the game (correct answer pressing order, effects corresponding to the conditional devices activated in the game, etc.). It also displays game information (the number of games played and the number of coins won when the accessory is activated or during the advantageous period (AT), etc.).

In this embodiment, the "special prize (accessory object)" includes "1BB (first-class accessory continuous operating device; first-class big bonus)" and "RB (first-class special accessory; regular bonus)". Be prepared. Therefore, the "special game" includes the "1BB game" and the "RB game."
Furthermore, in this embodiment, "1BB" includes two types: "1BB-A" and "1BB-B". Hereinafter, "1BB-A" and "1BB-B" will be collectively referred to as "1BB."

During the 1BB game, the RB game is executed continuously.
In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to RB is not set. Therefore, during the 1BB game, the RB game is executed continuously without the symbol combinations corresponding to the RB being stopped and displayed.

In addition, during the RB game, each game, a "1-card winning combination ALL" or "small winning combination ALL" is won in a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. As a result, during the RB game, that is, during the 1BB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination is higher than during the non-internal and 1BB internal.
Furthermore, during the RB game, the specified number (the number of medals bet with which you can start the game) becomes "3", and you win "1-card role ALL" with a probability of "60535/65536", and "1 ” medals will be paid out. Therefore, during the RB game, that is, during the 1BB game, the player's medals decrease.
Further, the RB game ends when the game is played "2" times, when there are "2" wins, or when the end condition of the 1BB game is satisfied. That is, the termination condition for the RB game is set to be that the game has been played "2" times, that there has been a prize winning "2" times, or that the termination condition for the 1BB game is satisfied.

Further, the 1BB game continues until the cumulative number of acquired medals (number of medals paid out, number given) exceeds "210", and ends when the cumulative number of acquired medals exceeds "210". That is, the termination condition for the 1BB game is set that the cumulative number of acquired medals exceeds "210".
Then, when the RB game ends, if the 1BB game ending condition is not satisfied, the RB game is executed again. In this way, during the 1BB game, the RB game is executed continuously.
Further, when the RB game ends, if the 1BB game ending condition is satisfied, the 1BB game ends and the game moves to non-internal mode.
Furthermore, when the 1BB game termination condition is satisfied during the RB game, the RB game is terminated, the 1BB game is terminated, and the game shifts to non-internal mode.

Further, the winning combination lottery means 61 determines the "winning number" by lottery. Therefore, the winning number lottery means 61 is also referred to as "winning number lottery (determination, selection) means". Furthermore, once the winning number is determined, a "conditional device number" corresponding to the winning number is generated. Then, when a conditional device number is generated, the conditional device corresponding to the conditional device number is activated, and the symbol combination of the winning combination corresponding to the activated conditional device can be stopped and displayed on the active line (winning the winning combination).

Moreover, the "condition device number" includes the "accessory condition device number" and the "minor role and replay condition device number."
Furthermore, the "accessory condition device number" is a condition device number corresponding to a special winning combination (accessory object), and in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, which will be described later, includes "1" to "2". .
Furthermore, the "minor prize and replay condition device number" is a condition device number corresponding to a minor prize or replay, and in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6 to 8 described later, "1" to "18" are used. Equipped with

Furthermore, when a special winning combination is won, the accessory condition device corresponding to the winning of the special winning combination becomes operable. For example, if you win 1BB, the 1BB condition device becomes operational.
Furthermore, when a small winning combination is won, a small winning combination condition device corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination becomes operable, and when a replay is won, a replay condition device corresponding to the winning of the replay becomes operable. For example, if the small winning combination A1 is won, the small winning combination A1 condition device becomes operable.

In addition, if you win a special role whose winning information can be carried over to the next game, the winning of that special role will continue until the symbol combination corresponding to that special role is stopped and displayed on the active line (the special role wins). Carry the information over to your next game.
Furthermore, when a special winning combination is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination is not displayed on the active line, it is called "internal winning". In other words, a game in which the winning information of the special role is carried over is referred to as "internal winning".

On the other hand, a game in which the winning information is not won in a special combination that can be carried over to the next game or later is referred to as a "non-internal game." In other words, a game in which the winning information of the special part is not carried over is referred to as a "non-internal game."
In this embodiment, the game that won the special prize is included in the "non-internal", but the game that won the special prize may be included in the "inside".
"1BB" is a special combination that allows winning information to be carried over to the next game.If you win "1BB" but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not displayed on the active line, "1BB internal It is called "Naka".

Further, the "special game" is also referred to as "accessory object operation". For example, "1BB game" is also referred to as "1BB operation", and "RB game" is also referred to as "RB operation".
Furthermore, "when the accessory is not activated" includes a state in which the accessory condition device has been activated, but the symbol combination corresponding to the activated accessory condition device is not stopped and displayed on the active line.
For example, when the "1BB condition device" is not activated, or when the "1BB condition device" is activated but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not displayed stopped on the active line, "When 1BB is not activated" ”. In other words, when "1BB" has not been won, or when "1BB" has been won but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not stopped and displayed on the active line (while inside 1BB), "1BB not activated""time".

Furthermore, as described above, in this embodiment, "1BB" includes two types, "1BB-A" and "1BB-B", and "accessory condition device" includes "1BB-A condition device" and "1BB-A condition device". It is equipped with two types of "1BB-B condition devices".
Furthermore, the winning combination for the "1BB-A condition device" is set to "1BB-A", and the winning combination for the "1BB-B condition device" is set to "1BB-B".

Furthermore, in the "1BB-A condition device", the lottery is held only when two medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "2"), and when three medals are inserted (the medal bet is When the number is "3"), no lottery is held. That is, in non-internal mode, the "1BB-A condition device" becomes a lottery target when two medals are inserted, but it is not a lottery target when three medals are inserted.
On the other hand, in the "1BB-B condition device", the lottery is held only when 3 medals are inserted (when the bet number of medals is "3"), and when 2 medals are inserted (medals When the number of bets is "2"), no lottery is held. That is, in non-internal mode, the "1BB-B condition device" becomes a lottery target when three medals are inserted, but it is not a lottery target when two medals are inserted.

Further, when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line (winning is possible).
Furthermore, when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is stopped and displayed on the active line, it will become a "1BB-A winning" and no medals will be paid out in this game, but next time. Shift from game to "1BB-A game" (when 1BB-A is activated).
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" does not stop and display on the active line when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the next game will shift to "1BB-A inside".
Then, in "1BB-A inside", when two medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line (winning possible), but "1BB-A inside" When three medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be stopped and displayed on the active line.

Furthermore, when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed on the active line (a prize can be won).
Furthermore, when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is stopped and displayed on the active line, it will become a "1BB-B winning" and no medals will be paid out in this game, but next time. The game shifts to "1BB-B game" (when 1BB-B is activated).
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stopped and displayed on the active line when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the next game will shift to "1BB-B inside".
Then, in "1BB-B inside", when 3 medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed on the active line (winning possible), but "1BB-B inside" When two medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be stopped and displayed on the active line.

Further, the "setting value" relates to the player's advantage, and in this embodiment, although not shown, there are six levels, setting 1 to setting 6. The higher the set value is, the higher the player's advantage becomes.
Furthermore, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is off, and the power is turned on in this state, a transition is made to a setting change state (setting change mode) in which the set value can be changed. At this time, initialization processing (RWM clear processing) for initializing a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is executed.
Further, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is on, the setting value cannot be changed, but the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is entered in which the setting value can be confirmed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the starting condition for the "advantageous section" is that the winning number "1" (small role A1 condition device) to winning number "18" (replay condition This is set to indicate that you have won (determined) one of the following devices.
That is, in the non-advantageous section, if one of the winning numbers "1" (small role A1 condition device) to winning number "18" (replay condition device) is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the game shifts to the advantageous period. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the conditions for ending the "advantageous section" are that the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" and that the advantageous section clear counter (remaining number of games in the advantageous section) reaches "0". This is set to indicate that the notification game (AT) has ended.
In other words, when the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous section exceeds 2400, the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches 1500, or the notification game (AT) ends, the advantageous section ends and the non-advantageous section ends. to move to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning any one of the winning number "1" (small role A1 condition device) to winning number "18" (replay condition device) in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 during non-internal is "50536/65536".
Therefore, even if the advantageous section ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section, after that, in the "1" game to "2" game, the winning number "1" (small role A1 condition device) to the winning number "18" (replay If you win one of the conditions (conditional device), you will move to the advantageous section.

In addition, in this embodiment, when one of the winning numbers "13" (small role G condition device) to winning number "15" (small role I condition device) is won (determined) in the lottery by the role lottery means 61. Then, AT lottery is executed. “Small role G condition device” to “Small role I condition device” have a relatively low probability of activation (winning), and are called “rare role” or “rare minor role”. . The probability of winning the AT lottery when the "Small role G condition device" to "Small role I condition device" are activated is set to ``10''%.
Furthermore, if you win the AT lottery, you will be given the right to play the notification game. Then, when the player has the right to execute the notification game and the conditions for starting the notification game are met, the notification game is started.

Further, in this embodiment, the initial value of the number of games of the notification game is set to "50" games. When the right to execute the notification game is granted and the conditions for starting the notification game are satisfied, the notification game is executed for "50" games.
Furthermore, in the case where the user already has the right to execute the notification game, when winning the AT lottery, the number of rights to execute the notification game is added (added). For example, if you have "2" rights to execute the notification game, you can execute the notification game for "(50 games + 50 games =) 100 games".

Furthermore, when the AT lottery is won during execution of the notification game, the remaining number of games of the notification game is added (added). For example, when the AT lottery is won when the number of remaining games in the notification game is "20" games, the remaining number of games in the notification game is "(20 games + 50 games =) 70 games".
Further, the operation of the instruction function and the presentation suggesting the push order can be executed only during the advantageous section, and the operation of the instruction function and the presentation suggesting the push order cannot be executed during the non-advantageous section. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the instruction function is activated and the push order suggestion effect is performed, it is assumed that the area is advantageous.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 2, in this embodiment, each reel 31 consists of "20" pieces. That is, each reel 31 has the number of symbols "20".
Further, in FIG. 2, the symbol numbers are also illustrated. For example, on the left reel 31, the symbol with symbol number "0" is "Blue 7".

Further, in this embodiment, the time from the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reel 31 stops is set within "190" ms. As a result, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reel 31 stops becomes "4" symbols.
For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated just before the "Replay" numbered "1" on the left reel 31 passes the active line, the symbol will be moved up to "4" from the concerned symbol, and the symbol will move to "5". It is possible to stop on the valid line up to the number "Red 7".
Therefore, by arranging ``4'' specific symbols at ``5'' symbol intervals on one reel 31, the specific symbols can always be stopped on the active line no matter when the stop switch 42 is operated.

Specifically, on the left reel 31, "Replay" is placed at numbers "1", "6", "11", and "16". That is, the "replay" on the left reel 31 is arranged with "5" symbol intervals and "4" symbols. Therefore, no matter at what timing the left stop switch 42 is operated on the left reel 31, the "replay" can always be stopped on the active line.
In this way, a symbol arrangement that can always stop the target symbol on the active line no matter at what timing the stop switch 42 is operated is referred to as a "PB=1" arrangement.
In contrast, the symbol arrangement is "PB≠1" in which the target symbol cannot be stopped on the active line unless the stop switch 42 is operated at an appropriate timing (within the maximum number of moving symbols from the active line). It is called.

On the left reel 31, in addition to "Replay", "Bell" and "Watermelon" are also arranged at "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the left reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", and "Watermelon" are arranged consecutively (in order) at "4" locations. Specifically, on the left reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", and "Watermelon" are consecutively arranged in numbers "1" to "3", and also in numbers "6" to "8". They are arranged consecutively, numbered "11" to "13" are also arranged consecutively, and numbered "16" to "18" are also arranged consecutively.

In addition, on the left reel 31, the "Blue 7" numbered "0", the "Red 7" numbered "5", the "black BAR" numbered "10", and the "white BAR" numbered "15" are The total number of "4" symbols is "PB=1" arrangement. Therefore, no matter at what timing the left stop switch 42 is operated, any one of "Blue 7", "Red 7", "Black BAR", or "White BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the active line. .

Similarly, on the left reel 31, the "cherries" numbered "4", "9" and "14", and the "blank" numbered "19" are "PB = 1" with the sum of these "4" symbols. It is the arrangement. Therefore, no matter at what timing the left stop switch 42 is operated, the "cherry" or "blank" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the effective line.

In addition, on the left reel 31, "Cherry/Blank" is placed on top of "Watermelon", "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" is placed on "Cherry/Blank", and "Blue 7 ``Replay'' is placed above ``/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR''. That is, on the left reel 31, "Cherry/Blank" and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are arranged between "Watermelon" and "Replay".
As a result, on the left reel 31, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR", "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon" and "Cherry/Blank" are displayed consecutively at "4" locations ( (in order). Specifically, on the left reel 31, “Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR”, “Replay”, “Bell”, “Watermelon” and “Cherry/Blank” are numbered “0” to “4”. ” are placed consecutively (in order), “5” to “9” are also placed consecutively, “10” to “14” are placed consecutively, and “15” is placed consecutively (in order). ~It is also placed consecutively at number "19".

Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, "Cherry", "Bell", "Replay", and "Watermelon" are each arranged in "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, "Cherry", "Bell", "Replay", and "Watermelon" are consecutively arranged at "4" locations. Specifically, on the middle reel 31, "Cherry", "Bell", "Replay" and "Watermelon" are consecutively arranged in numbers "0" to "3", and "5" to "8". '', consecutively placed in numbers ``10'' to ``13'', and consecutively placed in numbers ``15'' to ``18''.

Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, the “Blue 7” at number “4”, the “Red 7” at number “9”, the “black BAR” at number “14”, and the “white BAR” at number “19” are The total number of "4" symbols is "PB=1" arrangement. Therefore, no matter at what timing the middle stop switch 42 is operated, any one of "Blue 7", "Red 7", "Black BAR", or "White BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped on the active line. .

Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" is placed between "Watermelon" and "Cherry" (above "Watermelon" and below "Cherry"). .
As a result, on the middle reel 31, "Cherry", "Bell", "Replay", "Watermelon" and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are displayed consecutively (in order) at "4" locations. It is located. Specifically, on the middle reel 31, “Cherry”, “Bell”, “Replay”, “Watermelon” and “Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR” are numbered “0” to “4”. are placed consecutively (in order), are placed consecutively in numbers "5" to "9", are placed consecutively in numbers "10" to "14", and are placed consecutively in numbers "15" to "19" are also placed consecutively.

Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", and "Cherry" are each arranged in "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", and "Cherry" are arranged consecutively (in order) at "4" locations. Specifically, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", and "Cherry" are arranged consecutively (in order) at number "19" and numbers "0" to "2". , placed consecutively at numbers "4" to "7", consecutively arranged at numbers "9" to "12", and consecutively arranged at numbers "14" to "17". has been done.

Furthermore, on the right reel 31, the "Blue 7" at number "3", the "Red 7" at number "8", the "black BAR" at number "13", and the "white BAR" at number "18" are The total number of "4" symbols is "PB=1" arrangement. Therefore, no matter at what timing the middle stop switch 42 is operated, any one of "Blue 7", "Red 7", "Black BAR", or "White BAR" of the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line. .

Also, on the right reel 31, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" is placed between "Cherry" and "Replay" (above "Cherry" and below "Replay"). .
As a result, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", "Cherry" and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are displayed consecutively (in order) at "4" locations. It is located. Specifically, on the right reel 31, “Replay”, “Bell”, “Watermelon”, “Cherry” and “Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR” are numbered “19” and “0”. ~It is placed consecutively (in order) at number ``3'', it is placed consecutively at number ``4'' to ``8'', it is placed consecutively at number ``9'' to ``13'', and They are also arranged consecutively in numbers 14" to 18.

FIG. 3(A) is a diagram showing the display window 18, the positional relationship of each reel 31, and the effective line (display line that displays symbol combinations).
The reel 31 arranged inside can be seen through the display window 18.
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction. Further, each reel 31 is arranged so that "3" consecutive symbols can be seen from the display window 18.
As a result, when each reel 31 is stopped, "3" consecutive symbols of each reel 31 can be seen stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the display window 18, respectively. Therefore, when all the reels 31 are stopped, a total of "9" symbols (pieces) can be seen from the display window 18.
In addition, in FIG. 3(A), the number at the bottom right of each symbol indicates the symbol number.

Further, FIG. 3(B) illustrates the names of symbol positions in this embodiment.
The positions of the "3" symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when each reel 31 is stopped are referred to as "upper row,""middlerow," and "lower row" in order from the top. Furthermore, the positions of the "3" symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when the left reel 31 is stopped are referred to as "upper left row,""middle left row," and "lower left row," in order from the top. Similarly, the positions of the "3" symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when the middle reel 31 is stopped are referred to as "upper middle row,""middle middle row," and "lower middle row" from the top. The positions of the "3" symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when the display is stopped are referred to as "upper right row,""middle right row," and "lower right row," in order from the top.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3(A), valid lines are set for "9" symbols visible from the display window 18.
Here, the "valid line" is a line where symbols are lined up when the reels 31 are stopped, a symbol combination line (display line) that forms a symbol combination, and a symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations. This is the line that will win the prize when the line stops on that line.
Furthermore, the term "invalid line" refers to a symbol combination line that is not set as a valid line and is not a target for establishing a symbol combination.
In any gaming state and any number of bets, the active line in this embodiment is a straight line that passes through "middle left row" - "middle middle row" - "middle right row" as shown in FIG. 3(A). "Middle line" is the only line, and all other lines are invalid.

For example, the "upper line" is a straight line that passes through "upper left row" - "upper middle row" - "upper right row", the "lower line" is a straight line that passes through "lower left row" - "lower middle row" - "lower right row", A linear "down-right line" passing through "upper left row" - "middle middle row" - "lower right row", a straight "up-right line" passing through "lower left row" - "middle middle row" - "upper right row", A small chevron-shaped "Koyama line" passing through "lower left row" - "middle middle row" - "lower right row", "small V line" with a small V-shape passing through "upper left row" - "middle middle row" - "upper right row", In this embodiment, all of the "bent lines" in the form of curved lines passing through "upper left row" - "middle middle row" and "middle right row" are invalid lines.

The valid line and the invalid line are collectively referred to as the "symbol combination line."
Note that the position and number of active lines may be varied for each gaming state or number of bets. For example, in a specific game state, the downward-sloping line may be the active line. Furthermore, for a specific number of bets, there may be a plurality of active lines ("5" lines: an upper line, a middle line, a lower line, an upward line to the right, and a downward downward line to the right).

FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are diagrams showing the types of winning combinations (such as winning combinations corresponding to the winning numbers drawn by the winning lottery means 61), symbol combinations, number of coins to be paid out, etc. in this embodiment.
The roles can be broadly classified into special roles, replays (replayed roles), and small roles.
The symbol combinations and the number of coins to be paid out at the time of winning are determined for each role. When all the reels 31 are stopped and a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on the active line (a winning combination is won), the number of medals corresponding to that winning combination is paid out (a dividend (profit) is awarded). ).
However, the number of coins to be paid out when winning a special winning combination is set to "0". In addition, in replay, medals are automatically inserted and the game can be played again.

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the gaming states of this embodiment include non-internal, 1BB internal (1BB-A internal, 1BB-B internal), and 1BB gaming (1BB-A gaming). , 1BB-B game). Also, during the non-internal period, there are two lottery items when two medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "2") and when three medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "3"). are different.
In FIGS. 4 and 5, "2 medals" indicates "when two medals are inserted", and "three medals" indicates "when three medals are inserted". Furthermore, "inside" means "inside 1BB (inside 1BB-A and inside 1BB-B)", and "inside 1BB" means "inside 1BB (inside 1BB-A, and in 1BB-B)". B) is displayed.

The winning numbers "1" to "82" shown in FIGS. 4 and 5 correspond to small winnings. In this embodiment, the small winnings include "82" types of "small winnings 01" to "small winnings 82".
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, "Small win 01" to "Small win 82" are when two medals are inserted in non-internal, when three medals are inserted in non-internal, 1BB internal, and 1BB game. Any of these will be eligible for a lottery, and the corresponding symbol combination will be displayed (winning) on the active line.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, "Small win 01" to "Small win 06" are when two medals are inserted in non-internal, when three medals are inserted in non-internal, during 1BB internal, and during 1BB game. In both cases, the number of medals to be paid out (number of medals awarded) at the time of winning is set to "10".
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, "Small win 07" to "Small win 78" are when 2 medals are inserted in non-internal, 3 medals are inserted in non-internal, 1BB internal, In both the 1BB game and the 1BB game, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals awarded) at the time of winning is set to "1".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, "Small win 79" to "Small win 82" are played when two medals are inserted in a non-internal position, when three medals are inserted in a non-internal position, during a 1BB internal game, and during a 1BB game. In both cases, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals awarded) at the time of winning is set to "3".

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 01" with winning number "1", and the symbols on each reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1". In other words, in the symbol combination corresponding to "minor role 01", all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1" (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42, they always stop on the active line). It is a symbol combination consisting of (displayable) symbols.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 19 (1), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 01" is stopped and displayed on the "middle line" (valid line) (when winning "Small win 01"), , "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the "down-right line" (invalid line) passing through "Top left row" - "Middle middle row" - "Bottom right row".

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the "minor winning combination 02", which is the winning number "2", and there is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the "minor winning combination 03", which is the winning number "3". Further, there is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the "minor winning combination 04", which is the winning number "4", and there is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the "minor winning combination 05", which is the winning number "5". Furthermore, there is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the "minor winning combination 06", which is the winning number "6".
Further, in the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winning combination 02" to "minor winning combination 06", the symbols on each reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", similarly to "minor winning combination 01". In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 02" to "minor winnings 06" all have "3" symbols on all reels 31 arranged in "PB=1", similar to "minor winnings 01". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19 (2), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 02" is stopped and displayed on the "middle line" (valid line) (when winning "Small win 02"), , "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the "Upper line" (invalid line) passing through "Upper left" - "Upper middle" - "Upper right".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19 (3), which will be described later, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 03" is "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell", and when winning "Small win 03", ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' is stopped and displayed on the ``middle line'' (valid line).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (1), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 04" is stopped and displayed on the "middle line" (valid line) (when "Small win 04" wins), , "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the "upward right line" (invalid line) passing through "Lower left row" - "Middle middle row" - "Upper right row".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 20 (2), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 05" is stopped and displayed on the "middle line" (valid line) (when winning "Small win 05"), , "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the "Oyama line" (invalid line) passing through "Lower left row" - "Middle middle row" - "Lower right row".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (3), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 06" is stopped and displayed on the "middle line" (valid line) (at the time of winning of "minor combination 06") , "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the "lower line" (invalid line) passing through "lower left" - "lower middle" - "lower right".

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "small win 07" with the win number "7", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are each arranged in "PB=1", but the symbols on the middle reel 31 The symbols are arranged in "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 07" is such that the symbols on "2" reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31) are arranged in "PB=1" (the operation timing of the stop switch 42 The symbols on the other "1" reel 31 (middle reel 31) are arranged in "PB≠1" (when the stop switch 42 is operated). This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols that are sometimes stopped and displayed on the active line depending on the timing and sometimes not.

There is only one symbol combination that corresponds to “minor role 08”, which is the role number “8”, and there is only one symbol combination that corresponds to “minor role 09”, which is the role number “9”, and “small role 09”. There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "10", which is the winning number "10".
In addition, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 08" to "minor winnings 10" are all similar to "minor winnings 07", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in "PB = 1", respectively. However, the symbols on the middle reel 31 are arranged in such a way that "PB≠1".
That is, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 08" to "minor winnings 10" are all symbols on "2" reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31), similar to "minor winnings 07". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which the symbol is arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 (middle reel 31) are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. .

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "small win 11" with the win number "11", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are each arranged in "PB=1", but on the right reel 31 The symbols are arranged in such a way that PB≠1.
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 11" consists of symbols in which "2" symbols on the reels 31 (left reel 31 and middle reel 31) are arranged in "PB=1", and other This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on "1" reel 31 (right reel 31) arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

There is only one type of symbol combination that corresponds to “Small role 12”, which is the role number “12”, and there is only one type of symbol combination that corresponds to “Small role 13”, which is the role number “13”, and “Small role 13”. There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "14".
In addition, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 12" to "Small win 14" are all similar to "Small win 11", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are arranged in "PB = 1", respectively. However, the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged in such a way that "PB≠1".
That is, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 12" to "minor winnings 14" are all symbols on "2" reels 31 (left reel 31 and middle reel 31), similar to "minor winnings 11". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which the symbol is arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 (right reel 31) are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. .

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "small win 15" with the win number "15", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are each arranged in "PB=1", but on the left reel 31 The symbols are arranged in such a way that PB≠1.
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 15" consists of symbols in which "2" symbols on the reels 31 (middle reel 31 and right reel 31) are arranged in "PB=1", and other This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 (left reel 31) are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

There is only one type of symbol combination that corresponds to “Small role 16”, which is the role number “16”, and there is only one type of symbol combination that corresponds to “Small role 17”, which is the role number “17”, and “Small role 17”. There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "18".
In addition, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 16" to "Small win 18" are all similar to "Small win 15", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in "PB = 1", respectively. However, the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged in such a way that "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 16" to "Small win 18" are all symbols on "2" reels 31 (middle reel 31 and right reel 31), similar to "Small win 15". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which the symbol is arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 (left reel 31) are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. .

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 19", which is the winning number "11", and there is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 20", which is winning number "20". Further, there is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the "minor winning combination 21", which is the winning number "21", and there is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the "minor winning combination 22", which is the winning number "22".
The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 19" to "Small win 22" are similar to "Small win 11" to "Small win 14", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are "PB= 1" arrangement, but the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 19" to "minor winnings 22" are similar to "minor winnings 11" to "minor winnings 14", and the symbol combinations correspond to "2" reels 31 (left reel 31 and The symbols on the middle reel 31) consist of symbols arranged in a “PB=1” arrangement, and the symbols on the other “1” reel 31 (right reel 31) are arranged in a “PB≠1” arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 23", which is the prize number "23", and there is only one kind of symbol combination, which corresponds to the "minor prize 24", which is the prize number "24". Further, there is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 25", which is the prize number "25", and there is only one kind of symbol combination, which corresponds to "minor prize 26", which is the prize number "26".
The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 23" to "Small win 26" are similar to "Small win 15" to "Small win 18", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are "PB= 1" arrangement, but the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 23" to "Small win 26" are similar to "Small win 15" to "Small win 18", and the symbol combinations correspond to "2" reels 31 (middle reel 31 and A pattern in which the symbols on the right reel 31) are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 (left reel 31) are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 27", which is the winning number "27", and there is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 28", which is winning number "28". Further, there is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the "minor winning combination 29", which is the winning number "29", and there is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the "minor winning combination 30", which is the winning number "30".
The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 27" to "Small win 30" are similar to "Small win 07" to "Small win 10", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are "PB= 1" arrangement, but the symbols on the middle reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 27" to "minor winnings 30" are similar to "minor winnings 07" to "minor winnings 10", and the symbol combinations correspond to "2" reels 31 (left reel 31 and The symbols on the right reel 31) consist of symbols arranged in a “PB=1” arrangement, and the symbols on the other “1” reel 31 (middle reel 31) are arranged in a “PB≠1” arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.

There is only one symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 31", which is the win number "31", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", but the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are The symbols are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 31" consists of "1" symbols on the reel 31 (middle reel 31) arranged in "PB=1", and the other "2" symbols This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on the reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31) in an arrangement of "PB≠1".

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "minor winnings 32" to "minor winnings 46", respectively, with winning numbers "32" to "46".
In addition, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 32" to "Small win 46" all have the symbols on the middle reel 31 in the "PB=1" arrangement, similar to "Small win 31". The symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged such that "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 32" to "Small win 46" are all similar to "Small win 31", with "1" symbol on reel 31 (middle reel 31) being "PB= This is a symbol combination consisting of a symbol with a "1" arrangement, and symbols on the other "2" reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31) with a "PB≠1" arrangement. .

There is only one symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 47", which is the win number "47", and the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", but the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1". The symbols are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 47" consists of symbols in which "1" symbols on reel 31 (right reel 31) are arranged in "PB=1", and other "2" symbols This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on the reels 31 (left reel 31 and middle reel 31) in an arrangement of "PB≠1".

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "minor winnings 48" to "minor winnings 62", respectively, with winning numbers "48" to "62".
In addition, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 48" to "Small win 62" all have the symbols on the right reel 31 in the "PB=1" arrangement, similar to "Small win 47". The symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1".
That is, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 48" to "minor winnings 62" are all similar to "minor winnings 47", in which "1" symbol on reel 31 (right reel 31) is "PB= This is a symbol combination consisting of a symbol with a "PB≠1" arrangement, and symbols on the other "2" reels 31 (left reel 31 and middle reel 31) with a "PB≠1" arrangement. .

There is only one symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 63", the win number "63", and the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", but the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are The symbols are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 63" consists of "1" symbols on the reel 31 (left reel 31) arranged in "PB=1", and the other "2" symbols This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on the reels 31 (middle reel 31 and right reel 31) arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1".

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "minor winnings 64" to "minor winnings 78", respectively, with winning numbers "64" to "78".
In addition, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 64" to "minor winnings 78" all have the symbols on the left reel 31 in the "PB=1" arrangement, similar to "minor winnings 63". The symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 64" to "minor winnings 78" are all similar to "minor winnings 63", in which "1" symbol on reel 31 (left reel 31) is "PB= This is a symbol combination consisting of a symbol with a "1" arrangement, and symbols on the other "2" reels 31 (middle reel 31 and right reel 31) with a "PB≠1" arrangement. .

There is only one symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 79" with the win number "79", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are each arranged in "PB=1", but on the left reel 31 The symbols are arranged in "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 79" consists of symbols in which "2" symbols on reels 31 (middle reel 31 and right reel 31) are arranged in "PB=1", and other This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 (left reel 31) are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 79" is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle line) (when winning "Small win 79"), "lower left row" - "middle middle row" - "upper right row""Cherry" - "Cherry" - "Cherry" will be stopped and displayed on the "line rising to the right" (invalid line) passing through "."

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 80" with the win number "80", and similarly to "Small win 79", the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are each arranged in "PB = 1" However, the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged in such a way that "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 80" is the same as "minor prize 79", in which the symbols on "2" reels 31 (middle reel 31 and right reel 31) are arranged in "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of a symbol that is arranged in the same manner as ``PB≠1'', and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 (left reel 31) are arranged in "PB≠1".
Also, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 80" is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle line) (when winning "Small win 80"), the "lower left row" - "Cherry" - "Cherry" - "Cherry" is stopped and displayed on the "line rising to the right" (invalid line) passing through "Middle middle row" - "Top right row".

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "small win 81" with the win number "81", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are each arranged in "PB=1", but the symbols on the left reel 31 The symbols are arranged in "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 81" consists of symbols in which "2" symbols on reels 31 (middle reel 31 and right reel 31) are arranged in "PB=1", and other This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 (left reel 31) are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Winning 81" is "Cherry" - "Cherry" - "Cherry", and when winning "Small Winning 81", "Cherry" - "Cherry" - "Cherry" stops displaying.

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 82" with the winning number "82", and the symbols on each reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement.
That is, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 82" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1".
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Winning 82" is "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" - "Watermelon", and when winning "Small Winning 82", "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" is placed on the "middle line" (valid line). "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" stops displaying.

There is only one type of symbol combination corresponding to "Replay", the winning number "83", and the symbols on each reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1".
That is, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1".
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay" is "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay", and when "Replay" wins, "Replay" - "Replay" - “Replay” stops displaying.

As shown in Figure 5, "Replay" becomes a lottery target when two non-internal medals are inserted, three non-internal medals are inserted, and 1BB internal, and the corresponding symbol combination is on the active line. Although it is possible to stop display (win), it is not subject to lottery during the 1BB game, and therefore, the corresponding symbol combination will not be stopped and displayed (win) on the active line.
Furthermore, when the symbol combination corresponding to "replay" is stopped and displayed (wins), medals are automatically inserted and the game can be played again.

The winning numbers "84" and "85" shown in FIG. 5 correspond to special winning combinations (official objects). In this embodiment, there are two types of special winnings: "1BB-A" and "1BB-B".
As shown in FIG. 5, "1BB-A" becomes a lottery target only when two medals are inserted, and is not a lottery target when three medals are inserted. On the other hand, "1BB-B" becomes a lottery target only when three medals are inserted, and is not a lottery target when two medals are inserted.

In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is only one type with the winning number "84", and the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", but the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel Each of the 31 symbols is arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1".
As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the winning combination of the "1BB-A condition device" is set to "1BB-A", and when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the winning combination of "1BB-A condition device" is set to "1BB-A". The symbol combination corresponding to “-A” can be stopped and displayed on the active line (winning is possible).

Then, when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is stopped and displayed on the active line, it will become a "1BB-A winning" and no medals will be paid out in this game, but next time. Shift from game to "1BB-A game".
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" does not stop and display on the active line when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the next game will shift to "1BB-A inside".

In addition, in this embodiment, when two non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-A condition device" can be activated independently (single winning), and in the game in which the "1BB-A condition device" is activated independently, the "1BB-A condition device" can be activated independently. The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but in the game where the "1BB-A conditional device" is activated alone, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped on the active line. If it is not displayed, the next game will shift to "1BB-A Inside".
Furthermore, if the winning combination is not won by the winning combination lottery means 61 when two medals of "1BB-A inside" are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but in this embodiment, , since there is no possibility of non-winning in the winning part lottery means 61 for "1BB-A inside", once it moves to "1BB-A inside", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will be on the active line. It never stops showing up.

In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is only one type, the winning number "85", and like "1BB-A", the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1". However, the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1".
As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the winning combination of the "1BB-B condition device" is set to "1BB-B", and when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the winning combination of "1BB-B condition device" is set to "1BB-B". The symbol combination corresponding to “-B” can be stopped and displayed on the active line (winning is possible).

Then, when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is stopped and displayed on the active line, it will be a "1BB-B winning" and no medals will be paid out in this game, but next time. Shift from game to "1BB-B game".
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stopped and displayed on the active line when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the next game will shift to "1BB-B inside".

In addition, in this embodiment, when three non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-B condition device" can be operated independently (single winning), and in the game in which the "1BB-B condition device" is operated independently, " The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but in the game where the "1BB-B conditional device" is activated alone, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped on the active line. If it is not displayed, the next game will shift to "1BB-B Inside".
Furthermore, if the winning combination is not won by the winning combination lottery means 61 when three medals of "1BB-B inside" are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but in this embodiment, , since there is no possibility of non-winning in the winning part lottery means 61 for "1BB-B inside", once it moves to "1BB-B inside", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will be on the active line. It never stops showing up.

For each of the above-mentioned roles, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role does not stop and display on the active line in a game where the winning role is won, the roles that will be carried over from the next game and the roles that will not be carried over are determined. .
In this embodiment, the hand carried over is 1BB (“1BB-A” and “1BB-B”). In this embodiment, the symbol combinations corresponding to 1BB are all set to "PB≠1", so even if 1BB is won, the symbol combinations corresponding to 1BB will not be stopped and displayed on the active line (1BB is (There may be cases where the winner does not win). When 1BB is won, the winning information of 1BB is controlled to be carried over to the next game or later until 1BB is won.

On the other hand, when winning a small winning combination or a replay, the winning winning combination is valid only in the current game, and the winning information is not carried over to the next game or later. That is, in the game in which these winning combinations are won, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line; Regardless of whether or not the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the right to that winning combination disappears at the end of the game.

6 to 9 are diagrams showing the conditioner in this embodiment.
6 to 8 show the small winning combination and replay condition device in this embodiment.
In the notes column of FIGS. 6 and 7, "push order 123" indicates the push order of "left middle right," and "push order 132" indicates the push order of "left middle right." Further, the "push order 213" indicates the push order of "middle left/right", and the "push order 231" indicates the push order of "middle right/left". Furthermore, the "push order 312" indicates the push order of "right, left, center", and the "push order 321" indicates the push order of "right, center, left".

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the small winning combination condition devices correspond to the small winning combination and replay condition device number "17" from the "small winning combination A1 condition device" corresponding to the small winning combination and replay condition device number "1". It has 17 types, including the "small win ALL condition device".
In addition, "Small role A1 condition device" to "Small role I condition device" are subject to lottery when 2 medals are inserted in non-internal, 3 medals are inserted in non-internal, and in 1BB internal ( However, during the 1BB game, the lottery will not be held (the lottery will not be held).

Furthermore, the "1-card ALL condition device" becomes a lottery target when inserting 2 medals in a non-internal, when inserting 3 medals in a non-internal, in 1BB internal, and during a 1BB game ( A lottery will be held).
Furthermore, the "Small win ALL condition device" is not eligible for lottery when 2 medals are inserted in non-internal, 3 medals are inserted in non-internal, and 1BB is not included (no lottery is performed). It becomes a lottery target only during the 1BB game (the lottery is held).

Here, the following method may be used to control the reel 31 to stop when multiple types of small winning combinations with different numbers of medals are won.
As a first priority, when all the symbols (on the reel 31) constituting a winning symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.
Next, when it is not possible to stop and display all the symbols that make up the winning symbol combination on the active line (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the second priority is "quantity priority" or The reels 31 are controlled to stop using either "number priority".

Furthermore, "Priority on the number of medals" means that among the symbol combinations of winning combinations that have been won repeatedly, the symbol on the reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination with the highest number of medals paid out is given priority and stopped and displayed on the active line (drawing ) to say something.
On the other hand, "number priority" means that the symbols on the reel 31 are given priority and stopped and displayed on the active line so that the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line is maximized.

In this embodiment, when the "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" are activated, a state where multiple types of small wins (bells) with different payout numbers of medals are won repeatedly (so-called "push order bell") ).
When the pressing order bell is won, the reel 31 is controlled to stop with priority given to the number of pieces when the pressing order is correct, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped with priority given to the number of pieces when the pressing order is incorrect.
As a result, when the push order bell is won, the type of small winning combination (symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the active line) will differ depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, and this will affect the game result (number of medals paid out). There will be advantages/disadvantages.

The "small winning combination A1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning winning combinations listed in the winning winning combination column of FIG. 6.
When the winning number "1" is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination and replay condition device number "1" is generated from this winning number "1". Then, the "small win A1 condition device" corresponding to the small win and replay condition device number "1" is activated.
Furthermore, when the "minor winning combination A1 condition device" is activated, the player is in a state where the seven types of small winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of FIG. 6 are won multiple times.

Furthermore, when the "small winning combination A1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "left middle right (123)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing orders are the incorrect pressing order.
Then, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "Left, middle right (123)", the probability of "1/1" is (always) " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Small winning combination 01" (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated and the first stop is on the left, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is placed in the middle left row due to the number of winnings. When the second middle stop, "Bell" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row, and when the third right stop, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed. Display stop in the middle right row. Thereby, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 01" with "PB=1" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In this way, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the left reel 31 is stopped first and the middle reel 31 is stopped second, the number of winnings is given priority and corresponds to the "small win A1 condition device". The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 01" which pays out "10" which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19 (1), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 01" is stopped and displayed on the valid line, "Bell" - "Bell" - is displayed on the downward-to-right line (invalid line). The "bell" stops displaying.

Furthermore, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "small winning combination A1 condition device" is activated, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle stage (valid line).
As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, "Blue 7", "Red 7", "Black BAR" or "White BAR" of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, "Replay" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Bell" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.
That is, at the first stop on the left when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR", "Replay" and "Bell" on the left reel 31 are stopped within the display window 18. display.

In addition, the symbols on the left reel 31 that make up “Small win 01” are one type of “Replay”, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 that make up “Small win 01” are one type of “Bell”, and “Small win 01” is one type of “Bell”. The symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the winning combination "01" is one type of "Watermelon".
In this way, by setting the type of symbol on each reel 31 that makes up the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when the press order is correct when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the "small win A1 condition device" is activated. At times, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line can be reduced.

When the "Small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left/Right Medium (132)", the probability of "Small win 07" or "Small win 07" is "1/2" due to number priority. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 08" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left, "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row. After that, at the second stop on the right, in order to make it possible to win either "Small win 07" or "Small win 08" by giving priority to the number of pieces, move "Bell" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 to the middle right row. Stop and display. Thereafter, when the middle third stop occurs, "Red 7" or "Blue 7" (both "PB≠1") of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row.

As shown in Figure 2, since "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 is placed only at number "4", any symbol from number "0" to "4" on the middle reel 31 is on the active line. If the middle stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is positioned at , "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle middle row). Therefore, the probability that "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/4".

Similarly, since "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 is placed only on the number "9", any symbol from "5" to "9" on the middle reel 31 is located on the active line. If the middle stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is in the middle position, "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle middle stage). Therefore, the probability that "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/4".
From the above, the probability that "Blue 7" or "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/2", so it corresponds to "Small win 07" or "Small win 08". The probability that the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the left reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, "small win 01" (10 pieces paid out) is given priority to the number of pieces. When the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the active line, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small role 07" or "Small role 08" (both pay out one medal) that pays out a smaller number of medals than the one that is stopped on the active line. Make it displayable.

Also, when the first stop on the left, the press order is correct, but when the second stop on the right, the press order is incorrect, the symbol is different from the symbol (watermelon) on the right reel 31 that makes up "Small role 01". , and the "Bell" which is the symbol of "PB=1" on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Bell" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Watermelon" on the right reel 31 from stopping and displaying on the active line, so "Small role 01" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting "minor winnings 07" and "minor winnings 08" are one type of "replay", and "minor winnings 07" and "minor winnings 08" The symbol on the right reel 31 that makes up the symbol is one type of "bell".
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated.

When the "Small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle left and right (213)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 31" or "Small win 31" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 32" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop in the middle, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle middle stage by giving priority to the number of pieces. When the second left stop, "Red 7" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and when the third right stop, "Red 7" or "Red 7" on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed. "Blue 7" (both "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the middle right row.

As shown in FIG. 2, since "Red 7" on the left reel 31 is placed only at number "5", any symbol from number "1" to "5" on the left reel 31 is on the active line. If the left stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is positioned at , "Red 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability that "Red 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".

Also, since "Red 7" on the right reel 31 is placed only on number "8", any symbol from number "4" to "8" on right reel 31 is located on the active line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated at times, "Red 7" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability that "Red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".

Furthermore, since "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 is placed only on number "3", any symbol on number "19" or number "0" to "3" on right reel 31 is on the active line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is in the upper position, "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle row on the right). Therefore, the probability that "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".

From the above, the probability that "Red 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the left middle row is "1/4", and "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the right middle row. Since the probability that it can be made is "1/2", the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 31" or "Small win 32" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8". .

In this way, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" (10 pieces paid) is stopped on the active line due to quantity priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a "small winning combination 31" or "small winning combination 32" (both of which pay out one medal) that pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.

Also, if the pressing order is incorrect when the middle first stop occurs, the symbol is different from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small winning combination 01", and the symbol "PB = 1" on the middle reel 31 ``Watermelon'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "bell" on the middle reel 31 from stopping and displaying on the active line, so "Small win 01" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting "Small win 31" and "Small win 32" are one type of "Red 7", and "Small win 31" and "Small win 32" are of one type. The symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes ``Watermelon'' is one type.
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated.

When the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)", and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (213)" Similarly, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the reels are set so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 31" or "Small win 32" (both 1 piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. 31 is stopped.

When the "Small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right, Left, Middle (312)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 53" or "Small win 53" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 54" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the right, the "cherry" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row by giving priority to the number of pieces. When the second left stop is made, the "white BAR" (PB≠1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and when the middle third stop is made, the "black BAR" or " of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed. "White BAR" (both "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the middle row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 is placed only at number "15", so any symbol from number "11" to "15" on the left reel 31 is on the active line. If the left stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is positioned at , the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability that the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".
Also, since the "black BAR" on the middle reel 31 is placed only at number "14", any symbol from numbers "10" to "14" on the middle reel 31 is located on the active line. If the middle stop switch 42 is not operated at times, the "black BAR" on the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle middle row). Therefore, the probability that the "black BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/4".

Similarly, since the "white BAR" on the middle reel 31 is placed only at number "19", any symbol from number "15" to "19" on the middle reel 31 is located on the active line. If the middle stop switch 42 is not operated while the player is in the middle position, the "white BAR" on the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle middle row). Therefore, the probability that the "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/4".

From the above, the probability that the "white BAR" of the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row. Since the probability of being able to make it happen is "1/2", the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 53" or "Small win 54" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8". .

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "small winning combination A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 01" (10 pieces paid) is stopped on the active line due to the quantity priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a "minor winning combination 53" or "minor winning combination 54" (both of which pay out one medal) that pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.

Also, if the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop on the right, the symbol is different from the symbol on the right reel 31 (watermelon) that constitutes "small winning combination 01", and the symbol "PB = 1" on the right reel 31 ``Cherry'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Watermelon" on the right reel 31 from stopping and displaying on the active line, so "Small role 01" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting "minor winnings 53" and "minor winnings 54" are of one type, "white BAR", and "minor winnings 53" and "minor winnings 54" are of one type. The symbol on the right reel 31 that makes up the symbol "Cherry" is one type.
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated.

When the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the pressing order of "Right Middle Left (321)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the pressing order of "Right Left Middle (312)". In the same way as before, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 53" or "Small win 54" (both pay out 1 piece) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8" by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

As shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win A1 condition device" is activated are "Small win 01,""Small win 07,""Small win 08," and "Small win A1 condition device." These are symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination 31, 32, 53, or 54.
Further, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 01" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1".

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor prize 07" and "minor prize 08" consist of symbols in which "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and other "1" This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on the reels 31 arranged in such a way that "PB≠1".
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 31", "minor winnings 32", "minor winnings 53", and "minor winnings 54" have "1" symbols on the reel 31 arranged in "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1".

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 consist of symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement, The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1" is "4". Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (1) consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and "2" symbols in the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1". ” arrangement, and the other “1” symbols on the reel 31 are larger than the number (2) of symbol combinations consisting of symbols arranged in “PB≠1”.

Also, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, if the pressing order is correct, when all "3" reels 31 are stopped, the symbols arranged in "PB = 1" will be stopped and displayed on the active line. .
Furthermore, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, the first stop is a correct answer, but if the second stop is an incorrect answer, the "PB=1" arrangement will be made at the first and second stops. At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Furthermore, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, if the answer is incorrect at the first stop, the symbol with "PB = 1" arrangement will be stopped and displayed on the active line at the first stop, and at the second stop At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated and the first stop on the left, "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left), and when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated At the first stop in the middle, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle middle row), and at the first stop on the right when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed. "Cherry" (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row).
Therefore, when the "Small role A1 condition device" of "1BB-A inside" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be stopped and displayed on the active line, and the "1BB-B inside"" When the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stopped and displayed on the active line.

Also, as shown in Figure 5, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is "Blank" - "Red 7" - "Replay", and "Small role A1 condition device" of "1BB-A inside" This is a symbol combination that does not affect the stop control of the reels 31 with priority given to the number of symbols during operation.
For example, since the symbol on the middle reel 31 of "1BB-A" is "Red 7", among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "Small role A1 condition device" of "1BB-A internal" is activated, The number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on the reel 31 is "Red 7" is "2". Therefore, the number of symbols on the middle reel 31 is the same as the number of symbol combinations that are "watermelon", so in the game when the "small role A1 condition device" of "1BB-A internal medium" is activated, at the first stop in the middle (press When the order is incorrect), the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the active line by giving priority to the number of pieces.

Further, the symbol on the left reel 31 of "1BB-A" is "blank", and is a symbol that is not used in the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated. Therefore, the symbols on the left reel 31 of "1BB-A" do not affect the stop control of the reel 31 with priority on the number of symbols when the "small role A1 condition device" of "1BB-A inside" is activated.
Similarly, the symbol on the right reel 31 of "1BB-A" is a "replay" symbol, which is an unused symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated. Therefore, the symbols on the right reel 31 of "1BB-A" do not affect the stop control of the reel 31 with priority on the number of symbols when the "small role A1 condition device" of "1BB-A inside" is activated.

Similarly to the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is also reeled with priority on the number of pieces when the "small role A1 condition device" of "1BB-B inside" is activated. It is a symbol combination that does not affect the stop control of 31.
Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is controlled to stop the reel 31 with priority on the number of pieces when "Small win A2 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" of "1BB-A inside" is activated. It is a pattern combination that has no effect.
Similarly, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is the stop control of the reel 31 with priority on the number of pieces when "Small win A2 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" of "1BB-B inside" is activated. It is a pattern combination that does not affect.

In this embodiment, there are two types of "1BB": "1BB-A" and "1BB-B". When two medals are inserted, "1BB-A" is drawn, and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when three medals are inserted, a lottery of "1BB-B" is carried out, and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to use one type of "1BB" and always set the number of medals to be "3". In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is a symbol that does not affect the stop control of the reel 31 with priority on the number of pieces when "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" of "1BB inside" is activated. A combination is preferred.

The "Small role A2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 6, and when the "Small role A2 condition device" is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 6 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the seven types of small roles that were given.
When the "Small role A2 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "Left middle right (123)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order, just like when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated. becomes.

When the "Small win A2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left center right (123)", the "Small win The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "01" (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "Small win A2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left, right, middle (132)", the probability of "Small win 09" or "Small win 09" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 10" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

When the "Small win A2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle left/right (213)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 33" or "Small win 33" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 34" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small role A2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)" and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (213)" Similarly, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the reels are set so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 33" or "Small win 34" (both 1 piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. 31 is stopped.

When the "Small win A2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right, Left, Middle (312)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 49" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 50" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small role A2 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the pressing order of "right middle left (321)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the pushing order of "right left middle (312)". In the same way as before, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 49" or "Small win 50" (both 1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8'' by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

“Small role A2 condition device” replaces “Small role 07” and “Small role 08” of “Small role A1 condition device” with “Small role 09” and “Small role 10”, and “Small role A1 condition device” is changed to “Small role A1 condition device”. "Small win 31" and "Small win 32" in "Small win 33" and "Small win 34" are replaced, and "Small win A1 condition device""Small win 53" and "Small win 54" are replaced with "Small win 33" and "Small win 34". These are replaced with "minor winnings 49" and "minor winnings 50".
The stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win A2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated.

The "Small role B1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 6, and when the "Small role B1 condition device" is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 6 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the seven types of small roles that were given.
When the "small winning combination B1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "left and right middle (132)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing orders are the incorrect pressing order.

When the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left, right, medium (132)", the probability of "Small win 02" is (always) "1/1" due to number priority The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to `` (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "Small role B1 condition device" is activated and the first stop is on the left, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is placed in the middle left row by giving priority to the number of coins. When the second right stop is made, "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle right row, and when the middle third stop is made, "Cherry" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed. Display the stop in the middle row. Thereby, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 02" with "PB=1" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In this way, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the left reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, the number of winnings is given priority and it corresponds to the "small win B1 condition device". The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 02" which pays out "10" which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19 (2), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 02" is stopped and displayed on the valid line, "Bell" - "Bell" - ""Bell" stops and displays.

Further, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "small winning combination B1 condition device" is activated, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle stage (valid line).
As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "Small role B1 condition device" is activated, "Blue 7", "Red 7", "Black BAR" or "White BAR" of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, "Replay" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Bell" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.
That is, at the first stop on the left when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR", "Replay" and "Bell" on the left reel 31 are stopped within the display window 18. Display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting "minor prize 02" is one type of "replay", and the symbol on the middle reel 31 constituting "minor prize 02" is "cherry". ”, and the symbols on the right reel 31 constituting “Small Win 02” are one type of “Replay”.
In this way, by setting the type of symbols on each reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when the press order is correct when the "minor winning B1 condition device" is activated, the "small winning B1 condition device" is activated. At times, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line can be reduced.

When the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left center right (123)", there is a probability of "1/2" of "Small win 11" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 12" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left, "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row. After that, when the middle second stop occurs, the "bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle middle row in order to make it possible to win either "small winning combination 11" or "small winning combination 12" due to quantity priority. Stop and display. Thereafter, at the third stop on the right, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB≠1") of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle right row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 is placed only at number "13", so any symbol from number "9" to "13" on the right reel 31 is on the active line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is positioned at , the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability that the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".

Similarly, since the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 is placed only at number "18", any symbol from number "14" to "18" on the right reel 31 is located on the active line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated while the player is playing, the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability that the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/2", so it corresponds to "small win 11" or "small win 12". The probability that the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the left reel 31 is stopped first and the middle reel 31 is stopped second, "small win 02" (10 pieces paid out) is given priority to the number of pieces. When the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the active line, the symbol combination corresponding to "small role 11" or "small role 12" (both payout 1 coin) that pays out a smaller number of medals than the number of medals is stopped on the active line. Make it displayable.

Also, when the left first stop is correct, the press order is correct, but when the middle second stop is the press order is incorrect, the symbol is different from the symbol (cherry) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small winning combination 02". , and the "Bell" which is the symbol of "PB=1" on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Bell" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Cherry" on the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so that "Small role 02" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting "Small win 11" and "Small win 12" are one type of "replay", and "Small win 11" and "Small win 12" are of one type. The symbol on the middle reel 31 that makes up the symbol is one type of "bell".
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small winning combination B1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle left/right (213)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 35" or "Small win 35" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 36" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop in the middle, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle middle stage by giving priority to the number of pieces. At the second left stop, the "Black BAR" (PB≠1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed at the middle left row, and when the right third stop is made, the "Black BAR" or "Black BAR" of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed. "White BAR" (both "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the middle right row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 is placed only at number "10", so any symbol from number "6" to "10" on the left reel 31 is on the active line. If the left stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is positioned at , the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability that the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".

Also, since the "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 is only placed at number "13", any symbol from numbers "9" to "13" on the right reel 31 is located on the active line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated, the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability that the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".

Furthermore, since the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 is placed only at number "18", any symbol from number "14" to "18" on the right reel 31 is located on the active line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated while the player is playing, the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability that the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".

From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" of the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row. Since the probability that it can be made is "1/2", the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 35" or "Small win 36" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8". .

In this way, when the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 02" (10 pieces paid) is stopped on the active line due to the quantity priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a "minor winning combination 35" or "minor winning combination 36" (both payout one medal) which pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.

Also, if the pressing order is incorrect when the middle first stop occurs, the symbol is different from the symbol (cherry) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small winning combination 02", and the symbol "PB = 1" on the middle reel 31 ``Watermelon'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Cherry" on the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "Small win 02" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting "Small win 35" and "Small win 36" are of one type, "Black BAR", and "Small win 35" and "Small win 36" are of one type. The symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes ``Watermelon'' is one type.
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small winning combination B1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)" or when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (213)" Similarly, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the reels are set such that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 35" or "Small win 36" (both pay out 1 piece) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. 31 is stopped.

When the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right, left, middle (312)", the probability of "Small win 47" or "Small win 47" is "1/8" due to number priority. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 48" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "Small role B1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the right, the "cherry" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row by giving priority to the number of pieces. When the second left stop, "Red 7" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and when the middle third stop occurs, "Red 7" or "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 is stopped. "Blue 7" (both "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the middle row.

As described above, the probability that "Red 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".
Also, the probability that "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle middle row is "1/4", and the probability that "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle middle row is also "1/4". Since it is "1/4", the probability that "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/2".
Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 47" or "minor winning combination 48" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 02" (payout of 10 pieces) is stopped on the active line due to quantity priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a "minor winning combination 47" or "minor winning combination 48" (both payout one medal) which pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.

Also, if the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop on the right, the symbol is different from the symbol on the right reel 31 (replay) that constitutes "Small Role 02", and the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB = 1". ``Cherry'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Replay" on the right reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "Small role 02" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. The symbol on the right reel 31 that makes up the symbol "Cherry" is one type.
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small winning combination B1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small role B1 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "right middle left (321)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the pushing order "right left middle (312)". In the same way as when, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 47" or "Small win 48" (both 1 piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8" by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

As shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated are "Small win 02,""Small win 11,""Small win 12," and "Small win B1 condition device." These are symbol combinations corresponding to ``Win 35'', ``Small Winning 36'', ``Small Winning 47'', or ``Small Winning 48''.
Further, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 02" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1".

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 11" and "minor winnings 12" consist of symbols in which "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and other "1" This is a symbol combination in which the symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a way that "PB≠1".
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 35", "minor winnings 36", "minor winnings 47", and "minor winnings 48" have "1" symbols on the reel 31 arranged in "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols that are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1" is arranged, and the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1".

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 are composed of symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement, The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1" is "4". Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (1) consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and "2" symbols in the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1". The number of symbol combinations is greater than the number of symbol combinations (2) consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the other "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Also, when the "Small role B1 condition device" is activated, if the pressing order is correct, when all "3" reels 31 are stopped, the symbols arranged in "PB = 1" will be stopped and displayed on the active line. .
Furthermore, when the "Small role B1 condition device" is activated, the first stop is a correct answer, but if the second stop is an incorrect answer, the "PB=1" arrangement will be made at the first and second stops. At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Furthermore, when the "Small role B1 condition device" is activated, if the answer is incorrect at the first stop, the symbol with "PB = 1" arrangement will be stopped and displayed on the active line at the first stop, and at the second stop At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated and the first stop is on the left, "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left), and when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated At the first stop in the middle, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle middle row), and at the first stop on the right when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed. "Cherry" (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row).
Therefore, when the "Small role B1 condition device" of "1BB-A inside" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be stopped and displayed on the active line, and the "1BB-B inside"" When the "Small role B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stopped and displayed on the active line.

The "Small role B2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 6, and when the "Small role B2 condition device" is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 6 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the seven types of small roles that were given.
When the "Small role B2 condition device" is activated, the same as when the "Small role B1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "Left and right middle (132)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order. Become.

When the "Small win B2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left, right, middle (132)", the probability of "1/1" is (always) "Small win 02" due to number of sheets priority The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to `` (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "Small win B2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left center right (123)", there is a probability of "1/2" of "Small win 13" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 14" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

When the "Small win B2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Medium left and right (213)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 37" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 38" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small role B2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)" and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (213)" Similarly, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the reels are set so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 37" or "Small win 38" (both 1 piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. 31 is stopped.

When the "Small win B2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right, left, middle (312)", the probability of "Small win 57" or "Small win 57" is "1/8" due to number priority. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 58" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small role B2 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the pressing order of "right middle left (321)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the pushing order of "right left middle (312)". In the same way as before, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 57" or "Small win 58" (both pay out 1 piece) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8" by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

"Small role B2 condition device" replaces "Small role 11" and "Small role 12" of "Small role B1 condition device" with "Small role 13" and "Small role 14", and "Small role B1 condition device" ”, “Small role 35” and “Small role 36” are replaced with “Small role 37” and “Small role 38”, and “Small role B1 condition device” “Small role 47” and “Small role 48” are replaced with “Small role 37” and “Small role 38”. This is replaced with "Small win 57" and "Small win 58".
And, the stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win B2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated.

The “minor role C1 condition device” includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 6, and when the “minor role C1 condition device” is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 6 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the seven types of small roles that were given.
When the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "middle left and right (213)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing orders are the incorrect pressing order.

When the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Medium left and right (213)", the probability of "Small win 03" is (always) "1/1" due to number priority The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to `` (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop in the middle, the "Bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle middle stage by giving priority to the number of coins. When the second stop on the left, the "bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and when the third stop is on the right, the "bell" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed. Display stop in the middle right row. Thereby, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 03" with "PB=1" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, the number of winnings is given priority and it corresponds to the "small win C1 condition device". The symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 03" which pays out "10" which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 19 (3) which will be described later, when winning "Small winning combination 03", "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the middle line (valid line).

In addition, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time, the "bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row (effective line), and then, When the left reel 31 is stopped second, the "bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle stage (effective line).
As a result, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, the "replay" of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, "Bell" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.
That is, when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, "Replay", "Bell" and "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 are stopped. The image is stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting "minor prize 03" is one type of "bell", and the symbol on the middle reel 31 constituting "minor prize 03" is also of "bell". There is only one type of symbol, and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting “Small Win 03” is also one type of “Bell”.
In this way, by setting the type of symbol on each reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated in the pressing order correct, the "small role C1 condition device" is activated. At times, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line can be reduced.

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)", there is a probability of "1/2" of "small win 15" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 16" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, the "bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle middle row at the first stop in the middle. After that, at the second stop on the right, in order to make it possible to win either "Small win 15" or "Small win 16" due to quantity priority, move "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 to the middle right row. Stop and display. Thereafter, at the third stop on the left, "Red 7" or "Blue 7" (both "PB≠1") on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle row.

As shown in FIG. 2, since "Red 7" on the left reel 31 is placed only at number "5", any symbol from number "1" to "5" on the left reel 31 is on the active line. If the left stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is positioned at , "Red 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability that "Red 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".

Similarly, since "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 is placed only on the number "0", any symbol on the left reel 31 from "16" to "19" or "0" is on the active line. If the left stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is in the upper position, "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability that "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".
From the above, the probability that "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/2", so it corresponds to "Small win 15" or "Small win 16". The probability that the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, "small win 03" (10 pieces paid out) is given priority to the number of pieces. The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 15" or "Small win 16" (both pay out one coin) that pays out a smaller number of medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the active line is stopped on the active line. Make it displayable.

In addition, when the first stop in the middle, the pressing order is correct, but when the second stopping on the right, the pressing order is incorrect, the symbol is different from the symbol (bell) on the right reel 31 that makes up "Small Role 03". , and the "Watermelon" symbol of "PB=1" on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Watermelon" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Bell" on the right reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "Small role 03" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbols on the middle reel 31 constituting "Small Winning 15" and "Small Winning 16" are one type of "Bell", and "Small Winning 15" and "Small Winning 16" There is one type of symbol on the right reel 31, which is "Watermelon".
In this way, when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed when the press order is correct at the first stop in the middle, but the press order is incorrect at the second stop on the right. By setting the types of symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 to one each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left center right (123)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 63" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 64" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is placed in the middle left row due to the number of pieces. When the second middle stop, "Red 7" or "Blue 7" (both "PB≠1") of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row, and when the right third stop, the right "Red 7" (PB≠1) on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle right row.

As shown in Figure 2, since "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 is placed only on number "9", any symbol from number "5" to "9" on the middle reel 31 is on the active line. If the middle stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is positioned at , "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle middle row). Therefore, the probability that "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/4".

Also, since "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 is placed only at number "4", any symbol from numbers "0" to "4" on the middle reel 31 is located on the active line. If the middle stop switch 42 is not operated at times, "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle middle row). Therefore, the probability that "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/4".

Furthermore, since "Red 7" on the right reel 31 is placed only on the number "8", any symbol from numbers "4" to "8" on the right reel 31 is located on the active line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated at times, "Red 7" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability that "Red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".

From the above, the probability that "Red 7" or "Blue 7" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/2", and "Red 7" of the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the right middle row. Since the probability that it can be made is "1/4", the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 63" or "Small Win 64" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8". .

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "minor win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 03" (10 pieces paid) is stopped on the active line due to the quantity priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a "small winning combination 63" or "small winning combination 64" (both of which pay out one medal) that pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.

Also, if the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop on the left, the symbol is different from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor role 03" and the symbol "PB = 1" on the left reel 31. ``Replay'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "bell" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "small role 03" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting the "minor winnings 63" and "minor winnings 64" are one type of "replay", and the symbols "minor winnings 63" and "minor winnings 64" are of one type. There is one type of symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Red 7".
In this way, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop on the left are determined. By using one type for each type, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small role C1 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left and center (132)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left and center right (123)". In the same way as when, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 63" or "Small winning combination 64" (both one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8" by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right, Left, Middle (312)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 51" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 52" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the right, the "Cherry" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row by giving priority to the number of pieces. When the second left stop, the "black BAR" (PB≠1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and when the middle third stop occurs, the "black BAR" of the middle reel 31 or " "White BAR" (both "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the middle row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 is placed only at number "10", so any symbol from number "6" to "10" on the left reel 31 is on the active line. If the left stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is positioned at , the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability that the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the probability that the "black BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/4", and the "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row. The probability of being able to do so is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" of the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row. Since the probability that it can be made is "1/2", the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small combination 51" or "Small combination 52" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8". .

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "small winning combination C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 03" (10 pieces paid) is stopped on the active line due to the number of pieces being prioritized. A symbol combination corresponding to a "small winning combination 51" or "small winning combination 52" (both of which pay out one medal) that pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.

Also, if the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop on the right, the symbol is different from the symbol (bell) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small role 03", and the symbol "PB = 1" on the right reel 31 ``Cherry'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Bell" on the right reel 31 from stopping and displaying on the active line, so "Small role 03" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting "Small win 51" and "Small win 52" are of one type, "Black BAR", and "Small win 51" and "Small win 52" are of one type. The symbol on the right reel 31 that makes up the symbol "Cherry" is one type.
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the small winning combination C1 condition device is activated.

When the "small role C1 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "right middle left (321)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the pushing order "right left middle (312)". In the same way as when, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 51" or "Small win 52" (both pay out 1 piece) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8" by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

As shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated are "Small win 03,""Small win 15,""Small win 16," and "Small win C1 condition device." These are symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination 51, 52, 63, or 64.
Further, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 03" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1".

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor prize 15" and "minor prize 16" consist of symbols in which "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and other "1" This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on the reels 31 arranged in such a way that "PB≠1".
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 51", "minor winnings 52", "minor winnings 63", and "minor winnings 64" have "1" symbols on the reel 31 arranged in "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1".

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 are composed of symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement, The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1" is "4". Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (1) consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and "2" symbols in the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1". ” arrangement, and the other “1” symbols on the reel 31 are larger than the number (2) of symbol combinations consisting of symbols arranged in “PB≠1”.

Also, when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, if the pressing order is correct, when all "3" reels 31 are stopped, the symbols arranged in "PB = 1" will be stopped and displayed on the active line. .
Furthermore, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, the first stop is a correct answer, but if the second stop is an incorrect answer, the "PB=1" arrangement will be made at the first and second stops. At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Furthermore, when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, if the answer is incorrect at the first stop, the symbol with "PB = 1" arrangement is displayed on the active line at the first stop, and at the second stop At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated and the first stop on the left, "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left), and when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated At the first stop in the middle, the "Bell" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle middle row), and at the first stop on the right when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, the "bell" on the right reel 31 is displayed. "Cherry" (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row).
For this reason, when the "small role C1 condition device" of "1BB-A inside" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be stopped and displayed on the active line, and the "1BB-B inside"" The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated.

The "Small role C2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 6, and when the "Small role C2 condition device" is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 6 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the seven types of small roles that were given.
When the "Small role C2 condition device" is activated, the same as when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "middle left/right (213)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order. Become.

When the "Small win C2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Medium left and right (213)", the probability of "Small win 03 The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to `` (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "Small win C2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle right left (231)", there is a probability of "1/2" of "Small win 17" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 18" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

When the "Small win C2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left center right (123)", there is a probability of "Small win 65" or "Small win 65" due to number priority. The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 66" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "Small role C2 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left, middle (132)", but the stop switches 42 were also operated in the order of pressing "left, center, right (123)". In the same way as before, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 65" or "Small win 66" (both one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8" by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, middle (312)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "small win 55" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 56" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "Small role C2 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the pressing order of "Right middle left (321)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the pushing order of "Right left middle (312)". In the same way as before, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 55" or "Small win 56" (both one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8" by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

“Small role C2 condition device” replaces “Small role C1 condition device” “Small role 15” and “Small role 16” with “Small role 17” and “Small role 18”, and “Small role C1 condition device” "Small win 51" and "Small win 52" in "Small win 55" and "Small win 56" are replaced with "Small win 63" and "Small win 64" in "Small win C1 condition device", This has been replaced with "Small Winning 65" and "Small Winning 66".
The stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win C2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.

The "Small role D1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 7, and when the "Small role D1 condition device" is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 7 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the seven types of small roles that were given.
When the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "middle right left (231)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing orders are the incorrect pressing order.

When the "Small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle right left (231)", the probability of "Small win 04" is (always) "1/1" due to number priority The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to `` (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop in the middle, the "Bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle middle stage by giving priority to the number of coins. At the second stop on the right, "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle right row, and when the third stop on the left is stopped, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed. Display stop in the middle left row. As a result, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 04" with "PB=1" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In this way, when the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, it corresponds to the "small role D1 condition device" by giving priority to the number of winnings. The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 04" which pays out "10" which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (1), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 04" is stopped and displayed on the valid line, "Bell" - "Bell" - is displayed on the upward-rightward line (invalid line). The "bell" stops displaying.

In addition, when the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time, the "bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row (effective line), and then, When the right reel 31 is stopped second, "Replay" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle right row (effective line), and then when the left reel 31 is stopped third , the "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle row (active line).

As a result, when the "Small role D1 condition device" is activated, the middle reel 31 is stopped first, the right reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third. "Bell" is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Cherry" or "Blank" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.
That is, when the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, if the middle reel 31 is stopped first, the right reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, the "bell" of the left reel 31 is stopped. ”, “Watermelon” and “Cherry/Blank” are stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

Also, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting "Small Winning 04" are one type of "Watermelon", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 constituting "Small Winning 04" are one type of "Bell", The symbols on the right reel 31 constituting "Hand 04" are one type of "Replay".
In this way, by setting the type of symbol on each reel 31 that makes up the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when the press order is correct when the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, the "small role D1 condition device" is activated. At times, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line can be reduced.

When the "Small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Medium left/right (213)", there is a probability of "1/2" of "Small win 19" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 20" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop in the middle, the "bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle middle row. After that, at the second stop on the left, in order to make it possible to win either "Small win 19" or "Small win 20" due to quantity priority, move "Bell" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 to the middle left row. Stop and display. Thereafter, at the third stop on the right, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB≠1") of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle right row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 is placed only at number "13", so any symbol from number "9" to "13" on the right reel 31 is on the active line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is positioned at , the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability that the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".

Similarly, since the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 is placed only at number "18", any symbol from number "14" to "18" on the right reel 31 is located on the active line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated while the player is playing, the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability that the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/2", so it corresponds to "small win 19" or "small win 20". The probability that the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, "small win 04" (10 pieces paid out) is given priority to the number of pieces. When the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the active line, the symbol combination corresponding to "small role 19" or "small role 20" (both pay out 1 coin) that pays out a smaller number of medals is stopped on the active line. Make it displayable.

In addition, when the first stop in the middle, the press order is correct, but when the second stop on the left is the incorrect press order, the symbol is different from the symbol on the left reel 31 (watermelon) that constitutes "small role 04". , and the "Bell" which is the symbol of "PB=1" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Bell" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "Small role 04" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, the symbol on the middle reel 31 constituting "Small win 19" and "Small win 20" is one type of "bell", and the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting "Small win 19" and "Small win 20" is one type of "bell". The design is also one type of "bell".
In this way, when the "Small role D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed when the press order is correct at the first stop in the middle, but the press order is incorrect at the second stop on the left. By setting the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 to have one type of symbol each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role D1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left center right (123)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 67" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 68" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is set to the middle left row due to the number priority. When the second middle stop is made, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB≠1") of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row, and when the right third stop is made, the right The "black BAR" (PB≠1) on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle right row.

As mentioned above, the probability that the "black BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/4", and the "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row. The probability of being able to do so is "1/4", and the probability that the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/2", and the "black BAR" of the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the right middle row. Since the probability that it can be made is "1/4", the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 67" or "Small Win 68" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8". .

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "minor win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 04" (10 pieces paid) is stopped on the active line due to the quantity priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a "minor winning combination 67" or "minor winning combination 68" (both payout one medal) which pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.
Also, if the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop on the left, the symbol is different from the symbol on the left reel 31 (watermelon) that constitutes "small winning combination 04", and the symbol "PB = 1" on the left reel 31 ``Replay'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "small role 04" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, the symbols on the left reel 31 that make up "Small win 67" and "Small win 68" are one type of "replay", and the symbols on the right reel 31 that make up "Small win 67" and "Small win 68" are one type of "replay". The pattern is one type of "black BAR".
In this way, when the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is incorrect at the first left stop are determined. By using one type for each type, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small winning combination D1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small role D1 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "Left and center (132)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "Left and center right (123)". In the same way as when, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 67" or "Small win 68" (both 1 piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8'' by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "Small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right, left, middle (312)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 59" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 60" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "Small role D1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the right, the "cherry" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row by giving priority to the number of pieces. When the second left stop, "Black BAR" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and when the middle third stop occurs, "Red 7" or " "Blue 7" (both "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the middle row.

As mentioned above, the probability that the "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the probability that "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/4". The probability of being able to do so is "1/4", and the probability that "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row. Since the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 59" or "Small win 60" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8". .

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "Small win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 04" (10 pieces paid) is stopped on the active line due to number priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a "minor winning combination 59" or "minor winning combination 60" (both payout one medal) which pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.
Also, if the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop on the right, the symbol is different from the symbol on the right reel 31 (replay) that constitutes "Small win 04", and the symbol "PB = 1" on the right reel 31 ``Cherry'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Replay" on the right reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "Small role 04" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting "minor prize 59" and "minor prize 60" are one type of "black BAR", and the symbols on the right reel 31 constituting "minor prize 59" and "minor prize 60" are of one type, "black BAR". The pattern is one type of "cherry".
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win D1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small role D1 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the pressing order of "right middle left (321)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the pushing order of "right left middle (312)". In the same way as when, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 59" or "Small winning combination 60" (both 1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

As shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win D1 condition device" is activated are "Small win 04,""Small win 19,""Small win 20," and "Small win D1 condition device." These are symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination 59, 60, 67, or 68.
Further, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 04" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1".

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor prize 19" and "minor prize 20" consist of symbols in which "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and other "1" This is a symbol combination in which the symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a way that "PB≠1".
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 59", "minor winnings 60", "minor winnings 67", and "minor winnings 68" have "1" symbols on the reel 31 arranged in "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols that are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1" is arranged, and the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1".

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 are composed of symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement, The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1" is "4". Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (1) consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and "2" symbols in the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1". The number of symbol combinations is greater than the number of symbol combinations (2) consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and one symbol on another reel 31 is arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Also, when the "Small role D1 condition device" is activated, if the pressing order is correct, when all "3" reels 31 are stopped, the symbols arranged in "PB = 1" will be stopped and displayed on the active line. .
Furthermore, when the "Small role D1 condition device" is activated, the first stop is a correct answer, but if the second stop is an incorrect answer, the "PB=1" arrangement will be made at the first and second stops. At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Furthermore, when the "Small role D1 condition device" is activated, if the answer is incorrect at the first stop, the symbol with "PB = 1" arrangement is displayed on the active line at the first stop, and at the second stop At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, when the "Small role D1 condition device" is activated and the first stop on the left, "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left), and when the "Small role D1 condition device" is activated At the first stop in the middle, the "Bell" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle middle row), and at the first stop on the right when the "small role D1 condition device" is activated, the "bell" on the right reel 31 is displayed. "Cherry" (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row).
Therefore, when the "Small role D1 condition device" of "1BB-A inside" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be stopped and displayed on the active line, and the "1BB-B inside"" When the small role D1 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to ``1BB-B'' is not stopped and displayed on the active line.

The "Small role D2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 7, and when the "Small role D2 condition device" is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 7 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the 7 types of small roles that were presented twice.
When the "Small Role D2 Condition Device" is activated, the pressing order of "Middle Right Left (231)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order, just like when the "Small Role D1 Conditioning Device" is activated. Become.

When the "Small win D2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle right left (231)", the probability of "Small win 04" is (always) "1/1" due to number priority The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to `` (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "Small win D2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle left center (213)", there is a probability of "Small win 21" or "Small win 21" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 22" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

When the "Small win D2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left center right (123)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 69" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 70" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "Small role D2 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left and center (132)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left and center right (123)". In the same way as before, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 69" or "Small win 70" (both 1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8'' due to quantity priority. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "Small win D2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right, Left, Middle (312)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 59" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 60" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small role D2 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the pressing order of "right middle left (321)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the pushing order of "right left middle (312)". In the same way as when, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 59" or "Small winning combination 60" (both 1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

“Small role D2 condition device” replaces “Small role D1 condition device” “Small role 19” and “Small role 20” with “Small role 21” and “Small role 22”, and “Small role D1 condition device” "Small win 59" and "Small win 60" are replaced with "Small win 61" and "Small win 62", and "Small win D1 condition device""Small win 67" and "Small win 68" are replaced with "Small win 61" and "Small win 62". This has been replaced with "Small win 69" and "Small win 70".
The stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win D2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated.

The "minor role E1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 7, and when the "minor role E1 condition device" is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 7 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the seven types of small roles that were given.
When the "small winning combination E1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "right, left, middle (312)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing orders are the incorrect pressing order.

When the "Small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right, left, middle (312)", the probability of "Small win 05" is (always) "1/1" due to number priority The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to `` (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated, when the right first stop occurs, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row by giving priority to the number of winnings. When the second left stop, "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and when the middle third stop, "Bell" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed. Display the stop in the middle row. Thereby, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 05" with "PB=1" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In this way, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, it corresponds to the "small win E1 condition device" by giving priority to the number of winnings. The symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 05" which pays out "10" which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (2), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small role 05" is stopped and displayed on the valid line, "Bell" - "Bell" - ""Bell" stops and displays.

In addition, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle right row (active line), and then, When the left reel 31 is stopped second, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle row (effective line).
As a result, when the "small role E1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, the "bell" of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Cherry" or "Blank" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.
That is, when the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, "Bell", "Watermelon" and "Cherry/Blank" of the left reel 31 are stopped. is stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

In addition, the symbols on the left reel 31 that make up "Small win 05" are one type of "Watermelon", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 that make up "Small win 05" are one type of "Bell", and there is one type of symbol on the left reel 31 that makes up "Small win 05". The symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the winning combination "05" is one type of "Watermelon".
In this way, by setting the type of symbol on each reel 31 that makes up the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when the press order is correct when the "minor winning E1 condition device" is activated, the "minor winning E1 condition device" is activated. At times, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line can be reduced.

When the "Small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right center left (321)", there is a probability of "1/2" of "Small win 23" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 24" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated, at the first right stop, "Watermelon" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle right row. After that, when the middle second stop occurs, in order to make it possible to win either "small winning combination 23" or "small winning combination 24" due to quantity priority, the "replay" (PB = 1) of the middle reel 31 is moved to the middle middle row. Stop and display. Thereafter, at the third stop on the left, "Red 7" or "Blue 7" (both "PB≠1") on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle row.

As mentioned above, the probability that "Red 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the left middle row is "1/4", and that "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the left middle row. The probability of doing so is 1/4.
From the above, the probability that "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/2", so it corresponds to "Small win 23" or "Small win 24". The probability that the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped first and the middle reel 31 is stopped second, "small win 05" (10 pieces paid out) is given priority to the number of pieces. When the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the active line, the symbol combination corresponding to "small role 23" or "small role 24" (both pay out 1 coin) that pays out a smaller number of medals is stopped on the active line. Make it displayable.
Also, when the first stop on the right side, the pressing order is correct, but when the second stop in the middle, the pressing order is incorrect, the symbol is different from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 that makes up "Small win 05". , and "Replay", which is the symbol "PB=1" on the middle reel 31, is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "replay" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "bell" on the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "small winning combination 05" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting "Small Winning 23" and "Small Winning 24" is one type of "Watermelon", and the symbol on the middle reel 31 constituting "Small Winning 23" and "Small Winning 24" is one type of "Watermelon". The pattern is one type of "replay".
In this way, when the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed when the press order is correct at the first stop on the right, but the press order is incorrect at the second stop in the middle. By setting the right reel 31 and middle reel 31 to one type of symbol each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left center right (123)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 71" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 72" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is placed in the middle left row by giving priority to the number of pieces. When the second middle stop, "Red 7" or "Blue 7" (both "PB≠1") of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row, and when the right third stop, the right The "black BAR" (PB≠1) on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle right row.

As mentioned above, the probability that "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle middle row is "1/4", and "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle middle row. The probability of being able to do so is "1/4", and the probability that the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that "Red 7" or "Blue 7" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/2", and "Black BAR" of the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the right middle row. Since the probability that it can be made is "1/4", the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 71" or "minor prize 72" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8". .

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "minor win E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 05" (payout of 10 pieces) is stopped on the active line due to quantity priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a "small winning combination 71" or "small winning combination 72" (both of which pay out one medal) that pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.
Also, if the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop on the left, the symbol is different from the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small role 05", and the symbol "PB = 1" on the left reel 31 ``Replay'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "small role 05" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting "minor prize 71" and "minor prize 72" are one type of "replay", and the symbols on the right reel 31 constituting "minor prize 71" and "minor prize 72" are one type of "replay". The pattern is one type of "black BAR".
In this way, when the "small role E1 condition device" is activated, the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is incorrect at the first left stop are determined. By using one type for each type, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small winning combination E1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small role E1 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left and center (132)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left and center right (123)". In the same way as before, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 71" or "Small win 72" (both pay out 1 piece) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8" by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "Small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Medium left and right (213)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 43" or "Small win 43" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 46" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop of the middle, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle of the middle by giving priority to the number of pieces. At the second stop on the left, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB≠1") of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and when the third stop on the right, the right "Red 7" or "Blue 7" (both "PB≠1") on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle right row.

As mentioned above, the probability that the "black BAR" of the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the probability that the "white BAR" of the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4". The probability of doing so is 1/4. In addition, the probability that "Red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the right middle row is also "1/4", and the probability that "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the right middle row is also "1/4". It is "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/2". The probability that "Red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the right middle row is "1/4", and the probability that "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the right middle row is also "1/4". Since it is "1/4", the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 43" or "minor win 46" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "small winning combination E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 05" (10 pieces paid) is stopped on the active line due to the number of pieces being prioritized. A symbol combination corresponding to a "small winning combination 43" or "small winning combination 46" (both of which pay out one medal) that pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.
Also, if the pressing order is incorrect when the middle first stop occurs, the symbol is different from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small winning combination 05", and the symbol "PB = 1" on the middle reel 31 ``Watermelon'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Bell" on the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "Small win 05" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, there are two types of symbols on the left reel 31 that constitute "small winnings 43" and "small winnings 46", "black BAR" and "white BAR", and "small winnings 43" and "small winnings 46" are There are two types of symbols on the right reel 31, “Red 7” and “Blue 7”, but there is only one type of symbol on the middle reel 31, “Watermelon”, which makes up “Small win 43” and “Small win 46”. It is.
In this way, by reducing the number of types of symbols on the middle reel 31 to one type, which constitutes the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small winning combination E1 condition device" is activated, the "small winning combination E1 condition device" is activated. ” The number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when activated can be reduced.

When the "small role E1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)" and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (213)" Similarly, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the reels are set such that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 43" or "Small win 46" (both pay out 1 piece) is displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. 31 is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win E1 condition device" is activated are "Small win 05,""Small win 23,""Small win 24," and "Small win E1 condition device." These are symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination 43, 46, 71, or 72.
Further, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 05" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1".

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor prize 23" and "minor prize 24" consist of symbols in which "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and other "1" This is a symbol combination in which the symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a way that "PB≠1".
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 43", "minor winnings 46", "minor winnings 71", and "minor winnings 72" have "1" symbols on the reel 31 arranged in "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols that are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1" is arranged, and the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1".

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role E1 condition device" is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 are composed of symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement, The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1" is "4". Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (1) consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and "2" symbols in the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1". ” arrangement, and the other “1” symbols on the reel 31 are larger than the number (2) of symbol combinations consisting of symbols arranged in “PB≠1”.

Furthermore, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the pressing order is correct, when all three reels 31 are stopped, the symbols arranged in "PB=1" are stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, when the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated, the first stop is a correct answer, but if the second stop is an incorrect answer, the "PB=1" arrangement will be made at the first and second stops. At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Furthermore, when the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated, if the answer is incorrect at the first stop, the symbol with "PB = 1" arrangement is displayed on the active line at the first stop, and at the second stop At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, when the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated and the first stop on the left, "Replay" (PB = 1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left), and when the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated At the first stop in the middle, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle middle row), and when the first right stop when the "small role E1 condition device" is activated, "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed. "Watermelon" (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row).
Therefore, when the "small role E1 condition device" of "1BB-A inside" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be stopped and displayed on the active line, and the "1BB-B inside"" When the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stopped and displayed on the active line.

The “minor role E2 condition device” includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column in Figure 7, and when the “minor role E2 condition device” is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column in Figure 7 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the 7 types of small roles that were presented twice.
When the "Small role E2 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "Right, left, center (312)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order, just like when the "Small role E1 condition device" is activated. Become.

When the "Small win E2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right, Left, Middle (312)", the probability of "Small win 05" is (always) "1/1" due to number of coins priority. The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to `` (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "Small win E2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right center left (321)", there is a probability of "1/2" of "Small win 25" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 26" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

When the "Small win E2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left center right (123)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 77" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 78" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "Small role E2 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left and center (132)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left and center right (123)". In the same way as when, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 77" or "Small win 78" (both pay out 1 piece) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8" by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "Small win E2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle left/right (213)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 44" or "Small win 44" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 45" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small role E2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)", and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (213)" Similarly, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the reels are set so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 44" or "Small win 45" (both 1 piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. 31 is stopped.

“Small role E2 condition device” replaces “Small role 23” and “Small role 24” of “Small role E1 condition device” with “Small role 25” and “Small role 26”, and “Small role E1 condition device” is replaced with “Small role E1 condition device”. "Small win 43" and "Small win 46" in "Small win 44" and "Small win 45" are replaced, and "Small win 71" and "Small win 72" in "Small win E1 condition device" are replaced with "Small win 44" and "Small win 45". This has been replaced with "Small win 77" and "Small win 78".
The stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win E2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated.

The "minor role F1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 7, and when the "minor role F1 condition device" is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column of Figure 7 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the seven types of small roles that were given.
When the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "Right middle left (321)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing orders are the incorrect pressing order.

When the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right middle left (321)", the "Small win The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "06" (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the right first stop occurs, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row by giving priority to the number of winnings. When the second middle stop, "Replay" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row, and when the third left stop, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed. Display stop in the middle left row. As a result, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 06" with "PB=1" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In this way, when the "small role F1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, due to the number of winnings priority, The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 06" which pays out "10" which is the maximum value of the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to "minor win F1 condition device" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As shown in FIG. 20 (3), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 06" is stopped and displayed on the valid line, "Bell" - "Bell" - ""Bell" stops and displays.

Also, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "Small role F1 condition device" is activated, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle right row (active line), and then, When the middle reel 31 is stopped second, "Replay" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row (effective line), and then when the left reel 31 is stopped third , the "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle row (active line).

As a result, when the "Small Winning F1 Condition Device" is activated, the right reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third. "Bell" is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Cherry" or "Blank" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.
That is, when the "Small role F1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, the "bell" of the left reel 31 is stopped. ”, “Watermelon” and “Cherry/Blank” are stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

In addition, the symbols on the left reel 31 that make up “Small win 06” are one type of “Watermelon”, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 that make up “Small win 06” are one type of “Replay” and “Small win 06”. The symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the winning combination "06" is one type of "Watermelon".
In this way, by setting the type of symbol on each reel 31 that makes up the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when the press order is correct when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the "small win F1 condition device" is activated. At times, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line can be reduced.

When the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right, left, middle (312)", the probability of "Small win 27" or "Small win 27" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 28" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the right, "Watermelon" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle right row. After that, at the second stop on the left, in order to make it possible to win either "Small win 27" or "Small win 28" due to quantity priority, move "Bell" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 to the middle left row. Stop and display. Thereafter, when the middle third stop occurs, "Red 7" or "Blue 7" (both "PB≠1") of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row.

As mentioned above, the probability that "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle middle row is "1/4", and that "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle middle row. The probability of doing so is 1/4.
From the above, the probability that "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle reel is "1/2", so it corresponds to "Small win 27" or "Small win 28". The probability that the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, "small win 06" (10 pieces paid out) is given priority to the number of pieces. When the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the active line, the symbol combination corresponding to "small role 27" or "small role 28" (both pay out 1 coin) that pays out a smaller number of medals than the number of medals is stopped on the active line. Make it displayable.
Also, when the first stop on the right, the pressing order is correct, but when the second stopping on the left, the pressing order is incorrect, the symbol is different from the symbol on the left reel 31 (watermelon) that constitutes "Small role 06". , and the "Bell" symbol of "PB=1" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "Bell" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "Small role 06" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting "minor prize 27" and "minor prize 28" is one type of "watermelon", and the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting "minor prize 27" and "minor prize 28" is one type of "watermelon". The pattern is one type of "bell".
In this way, when the "Small role F1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed when the press order is correct at the first stop on the right, but the press order is incorrect at the second stop on the left. By setting the right reel 31 and left reel 31 to one type of symbol each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left center right (123)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 75" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 76" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "Small role F1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is set to the middle left row by giving priority to the number of pieces. When the second middle stop is made, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB≠1") of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row, and when the right third stop is made, the right "Red 7" (PB≠1) on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle right row.

As mentioned above, the probability that the "black BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/4", and the "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row. The probability of being able to do so is "1/4", and the probability that "Red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/2", and the "red 7" of the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the right middle row. Since the probability of being able to make it happen is "1/4", the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 75" or "Small win 76" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8". .

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" (payout of 10 pieces) is stopped on the active line due to quantity priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a "minor winning combination 75" or "minor winning combination 76" (both payout one medal) which pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.
Also, if the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop on the left, the symbol is different from the symbol on the left reel 31 (watermelon) that constitutes "small winning combination 06", and the symbol "PB = 1" on the left reel 31 ``Replay'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "small role 06" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting "minor prize 75" and "minor prize 76" are one type of "replay", and the symbols on the right reel 31 constituting "minor prize 75" and "minor prize 76" are one type of "replay". There is one type of pattern: "Red 7".
In this way, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is incorrect at the first left stop are determined. By using one type for each type, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated.

When the "Small role F1 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left and center (132)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "left and center right (123)". In the same way as before, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 75" or "minor winning combination 76" (both 1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8'' due to quantity priority. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle left/right (213)", the probability of "Small win 39" or "Small win 39" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 40" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "small role F1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop in the middle, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle middle stage by giving priority to the number of pieces. When the second stop on the left, "Red 7" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and when the third stop on the right, "Black BAR" or ""WhiteBAR" (both "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the middle right row.

As mentioned above, the probability that "Red 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle left row is "1/4", and that "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle right row. The probability of being able to do so is "1/4", and the probability that the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that "Red 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle left row is "1/4", and "Black BAR" or "White BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the middle right row. Since the probability that it can be made is "1/2", the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 39" or "Small win 40" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8". .

In this way, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" (10 coins paid) is stopped on the active line due to the quantity priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a "minor winning combination 39" or "minor winning combination 40" (both payout one medal) which pays out a smaller number of medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on an active line.
Also, if the pressing order is incorrect when the middle first stop occurs, the symbol is different from the symbol on the middle reel 31 (replay) that constitutes "small winning combination 06", and the symbol "PB = 1" on the middle reel 31 ``Watermelon'' is stopped and displayed on the active line.
By doing this, it is possible to prevent the "Watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "Replay" on the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so "Small win 06" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting "minor prize 39" and "minor prize 40" is one type of "red 7", and the symbol on the middle reel 31 constituting "minor prize 39" and "minor prize 40" is one type, "red 7". The pattern is one type of "watermelon".
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small role F1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small role F1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)" and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order "middle right left (213)" Similarly, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the reels are set such that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 39" or "Small win 40" (both pay out 1 piece) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. 31 is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated are "Small win 06,""Small win 27,""Small win 28," and "Small win F1 condition device." These are symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination 39, 40, 75, or 76.
Further, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 06" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1".

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor prize 27" and "minor prize 28" consist of symbols in which "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and other "1" This is a symbol combination in which the symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a way that "PB≠1".
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor prize 39", "minor prize 40", "minor prize 75", and "minor prize 76" have "1" symbols on the reel 31 arranged in "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols that are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1" is arranged, and the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1".

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role F1 condition device" is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 are composed of symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement, The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1" is "4". Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (1) consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and "2" symbols in the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1". ” arrangement, and the other “1” symbols on the reel 31 are larger than the number (2) of symbol combinations consisting of symbols arranged in “PB≠1”.

Also, when the "Small role F1 condition device" is activated, if the pressing order is correct, when all "3" reels 31 are stopped, the symbols arranged in "PB = 1" will be stopped and displayed on the active line. .
Furthermore, when the "Small role F1 condition device" is activated, the first stop is a correct answer, but if the second stop is an incorrect answer, the "PB=1" arrangement will be made at the first and second stops. At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Furthermore, when the "Small role F1 condition device" is activated, if the answer is incorrect at the first stop, the symbol with "PB = 1" arrangement will be stopped and displayed on the active line at the first stop, and at the second stop At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, when the "small role F1 condition device" is activated and the first stop is on the left, "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left), and when the "small role F1 condition device" is activated At the first stop in the middle, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle middle row), and when the first stop on the right when the "small role F1 condition device" is activated, "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed. "Watermelon" (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row).
Therefore, when the "Small role F1 condition device" of "1BB-A inside" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be stopped and displayed on the active line, and the "1BB-B inside"" When the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stopped and displayed on the active line.

"Small win F2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations listed in the winning combination column in Figure 7, and when the "minor win F2 condition device" is activated, the winning combinations listed in the winning combination column in Figure 7 are included. The player will be in a state where he or she has won the seven types of small roles that were given.
When the "Small role F2 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "Right middle left (321)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order, just like when the "Small role F1 condition device" is activated. becomes.

When the "Small win F2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right middle left (321)", the "Small win The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "06" (10 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "Small win F2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Right, Left, Middle (312)", the probability of "Small win 29" or "Small win 29" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 30" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left middle right (123)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "small win 73" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 74" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "Small role F2 condition device" was activated, the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "Left and center (132)", but the stop switches 42 were operated in the order of pressing "Left and center right (123)". In the same way as before, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 73" or "Small win 74" (both pay out 1 piece) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8" by giving priority to the number of pieces. The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "Small win F2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle left/right (213)", there is a probability of "1/8" of "Small win 41" or "Small win 41" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 42" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small role F2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)", and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (213)" Similarly, by giving priority to the number of pieces, the reels are set so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 41" or "Small win 42" (both 1 piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/8''. 31 is stopped.

“Small role F2 condition device” replaces “Small role F1 condition device” “Small role 27” and “Small role 28” with “Small role 29” and “Small role 30”, and “Small role F1 condition device” "Small win 39" and "Small win 40" in "Small win 41" and "Small win 42" are replaced, and "Small win F1 condition device""Small win 75" and "Small win 76" are replaced with "Small win 41" and "Small win 42". This is replaced with "small winning combination 73" and "small winning combination 74".
The stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win F2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated.

As shown in FIG. 8, the "Small win G condition device" includes "Small win 79" and "Small win 80" as winning combinations, and when the "Small win G condition device" is activated, "Small win G condition device" ” and “Small win 80” are won twice.
When the "Small win G condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 79" or "Small win 80" (both "PB≠1") is placed on the active line regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that they are stopped and displayed.

Specifically, when the left stops, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB≠1") on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row (effective line), and when the middle stops, the middle "Cherry" (PB=1) on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row (effective line), and when the right stops, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the right middle row (effective line). .
As mentioned above, the probability that the "black BAR" of the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the probability that the "white BAR" of the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4". The probability of doing so is 1/4.

Therefore, if the operation timing of the left stop switch 42 is random, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/2", so " The probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 79" or "Small win 80" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".
However, if you operate the left stop switch 42 at the timing when the "black BAR" (number 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed on the display window 18 (aiming at "black BAR"), the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 will be displayed. (No. 10) or "White BAR" (No. 15) can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row (effective line). In this case, since "Cherry" on the middle reel 31 and "Watermelon" on the right reel 31 are both arranged in "PB=1", it is possible to always win "minor prize 79" or "minor prize 80".
In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 79" or "Small win 80" is stopped and displayed on the active line, "Cherry" - "Cherry" - "Cherry" will be stopped and displayed on the upward-right line (invalid line). do.

As shown in FIG. 8, the "small win H condition device" includes "small win 81" as a winning combination, and when the "small win H condition device" is activated, the "small win 81" is won. Become.
When the "small win H condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are stopped so that the symbol combination (PB≠1) corresponding to "small win 81" is stopped and displayed on the active line, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. Control.

Specifically, when the left stops, the "cherry" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row (effective line), and when the middle stops, the "cherry" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed. ) is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row (effective line), and when the right stop is made, "cherry" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the right middle row (effective line).
As shown in FIG. 2, the "cherries" on the left reel 31 are arranged at three locations: "4", "9", and "14". Therefore, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols numbered "0" to "14" on the left reel 31 is located on the active line, the "cherry" on the left reel 31 is activated. It is possible to display a stop on the active line (middle left row), but the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols ``15'' to ``19'' on the left reel 31 is located on the active line. In this case, the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row).

Therefore, if the operation timing of the left stop switch 42 is random, the probability that the "cherry" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row) is "3/4", so the "small winning" The probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "81" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "3/4".
However, if you operate the left stop switch 42 at the timing when the "black BAR" (number 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed on the display window 18 (aiming at "black BAR"), the "9" number on the left reel 31 will be displayed. Alternatively, "cherry" numbered "14" can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row (effective line). In this case, since the "cherries" on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are both arranged in "PB=1", it is possible to always win the "small winning combination 81".
In addition, when winning "Small win 81", "Cherry" - "Cherry" - "Cherry" is stopped and displayed on the middle line (valid line).

As shown in FIG. 8, the "Small win I condition device" includes "Small win 82" as a winning combination, and when the "Small win I condition device" is activated, the "Small win I condition device" is in a state where "Small win 82" has been won. Become.
When the "Small win I condition device" is activated, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "Small win 82" is (always) placed on the active line with a probability of "1/1". The reels 31 are stopped and displayed so as to be stopped and displayed.

Specifically, when the left stops, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row (effective line), and when the middle stops, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed. It is stopped and displayed on the middle middle row (effective line), and when stopping on the right, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the right middle row (effective line).
Furthermore, when winning the "Small Winning 82", "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" are stopped and displayed on the middle line (valid line).

The "1-card winning ALL condition device" includes all 1-card winning combinations ("Small winning combination 07" to "Small winning combination 78"), and when the "1-card winning ALL condition device" is activated, all 1-card winning combinations are included as winning combinations. You will be in a state where you have won a single role twice.
When the "1-card winning ALL condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to any of "minor winnings 07" to "minor winnings 78" is stopped on the active line according to the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch 42. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so as to be displayed.
It should be noted that when the "1-card winning ALL condition device" is activated, any one of "small winning combination 07" to "minor winning combination 78" (all "1-card payout") will be won, and there will be no non-winning.

The "Small win ALL condition device" includes all the small wins ("Small win 01" to "Small win 82") as winning combinations, and when the "Small win ALL condition device" is activated, all the small wins are included. You will be in a state where you have been selected twice.
When the "Small win ALL condition device" is activated, a symbol combination corresponding to any of "Small win 01" to "Small win 06" is stopped and displayed on the active line according to the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch 42. The reel 31 is controlled to stop so that the reel 31 is stopped.
It should be noted that when the "minor winning ALL condition device" is activated, any one of "minor winnings 01" to "minor winnings 06" (all "10 pieces paid out") will be won, and there will be no non-winning.

As shown in FIG. 8, there is only one type of "replay condition device", which is the small winning combination and replay condition device number "18".
As shown in FIG. 8, the "replay condition device" includes "replay" as a winning combination, and when the "replay condition device" is activated, the "replay" is won.
When the "replay condition device" is activated, the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "replay" is (always) stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. Thus, the reel 31 is controlled to stop.

Specifically, when the left stops, "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row (effective line), and when the middle stops, "Replay" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is displayed. It is stopped and displayed on the middle middle stage (effective line), and when the right stop is made, the "replay" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the right middle stage (effective line).
Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to "replay" is stopped and displayed on the active line, medals are automatically inserted and the game can be played again.
In addition, when a prize is won with "Replay", "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay" is stopped and displayed on the middle line (active line).

FIG. 9 shows the accessory condition device. As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, the accessory condition devices include "1BB-A condition device" corresponding to accessory condition device number "1" and "1BB-A condition device" corresponding to accessory condition device number "2". It is equipped with two types: 1BB-B condition device.
As shown in FIG. 10, the "1BB-A condition device" becomes a lottery target only when two non-internal medals are inserted, and is not a lottery target when three non-internal medals are inserted.
On the other hand, the "1BB-B condition device" becomes a lottery target only when three non-internal medals are inserted, and is not a lottery target when two non-internal medals are inserted.

In addition, when two non-internal medals are inserted, if the winning number "19" is won in the lottery by the prize lottery means 61, the prize condition device number "1" is generated from the winning number "19", The "1BB-A condition device" corresponding to accessory condition device number "1" is activated.
On the other hand, when 3 non-internal medals are inserted, if the winning number "20" is won in the lottery by the prize lottery means 61, the prize condition device number "2" is generated from the winning number "20". Then, the "1BB-B condition device" corresponding to accessory condition device number "2" is activated.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9, the winning combination of the "1BB-A condition device" is set to "1BB-A", and when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the winning combination of "1BB-A condition device" is set to "1BB-A". The symbol combination corresponding to "A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
Then, when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is stopped and displayed on the active line, it will be a "1BB-A winning" and no medals will be paid out in this game, but next time. Shift from game to "1BB-A game".
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" does not stop and display on the active line when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the next game will shift to "1BB-A inside".

Note that if the winning combination is not won by the winning combination lottery means 61 when two medals of "1BB-A inside" are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but in this embodiment, , since there is no possibility of non-winning in the winning part lottery means 61 for "1BB-A inside", once it moves to "1BB-A inside", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will be on the active line. It never stops showing up.

Furthermore, during "1BB-A game", "RB game" is executed continuously.
In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to "RB" is not set, and during "1BB-A game", the symbol combination corresponding to "RB" is not stopped and displayed, and "RB game" is performed. are executed continuously.
In addition, during "RB gaming", only two types of "1-card role ALL condition device" and "small role ALL condition device" are subject to lottery by the role lottery means 61, and every game, "1-card role ALL condition device" Or, either the "small role ALL condition device" is activated. For this reason, the probability of winning a small winning combination is higher when "RB gaming", that is, "1BB-A playing", than when "not inside" or "while playing 1BB-A".

Furthermore, while playing RB, the specified number (bet number of medals that can start playing) becomes 3, and the 1-card hand ALL condition device is activated with a probability of 60535/65536. Then, "1" medal is paid out. Therefore, while "RB gaming", that is, "1BB-A gaming", the player's medals decrease.
Furthermore, the "RB game" ends when the "2" games are played, when there are "2" wins, or when the end conditions of the "1BB-A game" are met. In other words, the end condition for the "RB game" is set to be that "2" games have been played, that there have been "2" winnings, or that the end conditions for the "1BB-A game" have been met. has been done.

In addition, the "1BB-A game" continues until the cumulative number of medals acquired (number of medals paid out, number given) exceeds "210", and ends when the cumulative number of medals acquired exceeds "210". . That is, the end condition for the "1BB-A game" is set that the cumulative number of acquired medals exceeds "210".
Then, when the "RB game" ends, if the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again. In this way, the "RB game" is executed continuously during the "1BB-A game".
Furthermore, when the "RB game" ends, if the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is satisfied, the "1BB-A game" ends and the game moves to non-internal mode.
Furthermore, if the termination conditions for "1BB-A game" are met during "RB game", the "RB game" will be ended, "1BB-A game" will be ended, and the transition will be made to non-internal mode. do.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, the winning combination of the "1BB-B condition device" is set to "1BB-B", and when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the winning combination "1BB-B" is set to "1BB-B". The symbol combination corresponding to "B" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
Then, when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is stopped and displayed on the active line, it will become a "1BB-B winning" and no medals will be paid out in this game, but next time. Shift from game to "1BB-B game".
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stopped and displayed on the active line when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the game will shift to "1BB-B inside" from the next game.

In addition, if the winning combination is not won by the winning combination lottery means 61 when three medals of "1BB-B inside" are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but in this embodiment, , since there is no possibility of non-winning in the winning part lottery means 61 for "1BB-B inside", once it moves to "1BB-B inside", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will be on the active line. It never stops showing up.

Furthermore, during the ``1BB-B game'', the ``RB game'' is executed continuously, similar to the ``1BB-A game''.
Furthermore, similar to the "1BB-A game", the "1BB-B game" continues until the cumulative number of medals acquired (number of medals paid out, number of awards given) exceeds "210", and the number of acquired medals increases. The process ends when the cumulative total exceeds 210 pieces.
Then, when the "RB game" ends, if the end condition of the "1BB-B game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again.
Furthermore, when the "RB game" ends, if the end condition of the "1BB-B game" is satisfied, the "1BB-B game" ends and the game moves to non-internal mode.
Furthermore, if the termination conditions for "1BB-B game" are met during "RB game", the "RB game" will be ended, "1BB-B game" will be ended, and the transition will be made to non-internal mode. do.

FIG. 10 is a diagram (number table) showing the numbers of each winning number for each gaming state in this embodiment.
In FIG. 10, "2 medals" indicates "when two medals are inserted", and "three medals" indicates "when three medals are inserted". Further, "inside" indicates "inside 1BB-A" and "inside 1BB-B," and "inside 1BB" indicates "inside 1BB-A" and "inside 1BB-B."

Dividing the numbers shown in FIG. 10 by "65536" gives the probability of winning for each winning number.
For example, in FIG. 10, the number set for the winning number "1" when two non-internal medals are inserted is "2500", so the probability of winning the winning number "1" when two non-internal medals are inserted. becomes "2500/65536".
Further, for example, if the winning number "1" is won in a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning number and replay condition device number "1" is generated from this winning number "1", and the small winning combination and replay condition device number "1" is generated from this winning number "1". 1” is activated.

As shown in FIG. 10, for the “Small role A1 condition device” to “Small role I condition device”, non-internal and internal (inside 1BB-A, inside 1BB-B) are subject to lottery, but During 1BB (during 1BB-A game, 1BB-B game), it is not eligible for lottery.
In addition, the "1-card ALL condition device" is a lottery target in all gaming states.
Furthermore, the "Small role ALL condition device" is the opposite of the "Small role A1 condition device" to "Small role I condition device", and the "Small role ALL condition device" is drawn only during 1BB (during 1BB-A game, 1BB-B game). Non-internal and internal (1BB-A internal, 1BB-B internal) are not eligible for the lottery.

Furthermore, the "replay condition device", like the "small role A1 condition device" to "small role I condition device", is eligible for lottery for non-internal and internal (1BB-A internal, 1BB-B internal) However, during 1BB (during 1BB-A game, 1BB-B game), it is not eligible for lottery.
Furthermore, the "1BB-A condition device" becomes a lottery target only when two non-internal medals are inserted, and is not a lottery target in other gaming states.
On the other hand, the "1BB-B condition device" becomes a lottery target only when three non-internal medals are inserted, and is not a lottery target in other game states.

That is, when two non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-A condition device" becomes a lottery target, but the "1BB-B condition device" does not become a lottery target.
On the other hand, when three non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-B condition device" becomes a lottery target, but the "1BB-A condition device" does not become a lottery target.
In addition, in this embodiment, in any game state, one of the winning numbers "1" to "20" is won in the drawing by the winning combination drawing means 61, and there is no possibility that the winning number will not be won.

Next, the transition of the gaming state in this embodiment will be explained.
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the transition of the gaming state in this embodiment, and FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the changing conditions of the gaming state in this embodiment.
In FIG. 12, "∞" (infinite) in the number of times column means that there is no upper limit for the number of times that can be played for each gaming state, and the number of times that the game can be played in that gaming state until the transition condition described in the change opportunity column is met. means to maintain (continue).

The main control means 50 determines whether or not the transition conditions for the gaming state are satisfied when all the reels 31 are stopped in every game, and when it is determined that the transition conditions for the gaming state are satisfied, the main control means 50 causes the gaming state to transition. Control.
First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, it transitions to non-internal mode. When shipped from the factory, it transitions to non-internal. Further, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is off, and the power is turned on in this state, the setting change state is entered. At this time, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed and the process transitions to non-internal mode.

The non-internal state is maintained until the "1BB-A condition device" or "1BB-B condition device" is activated. As described above, when two non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-A condition device" is selected as a lottery target, and when three non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-B condition device" is selected as a lottery target.
Then, when two non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-A condition device" is activated (1BB-A winning), and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is stopped and displayed on the active line (1BB-A winning). Then, the game shifts to "1BB-A game" (1BB-A operation).
On the other hand, when the ``1BB-A condition device'' is activated when two non-internal medals are inserted, but the symbol combination corresponding to ``1BB-A'' does not stop and display on the active line, the ``1BB-A internal condition device'' is activated. ”.

In addition, if "1BB-A inside" is not won by the winning combination lottery means 61 when two medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but when three medals are inserted, Sometimes, even if the prize lottery means 61 does not win, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" does not stop and display on the active line.
However, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, since there is no possibility of non-winning in the winning combination lottery means 61 in "1BB-A inside", once it shifts to "1BB-A inside", after that, "1BB-A inside" will not be won. Since the symbol combination corresponding to "-A" will not be stopped and displayed on the active line, "1BB-A inside" will continue to be maintained.

Also, when 3 non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-B condition device" is activated (1BB-B winning), and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is stopped and displayed on the active line (1BB-B winning). Then, the game shifts to "1BB-B game" (1BB-B operation).
On the other hand, when the ``1BB-B condition device'' is activated when three non-internal medals are inserted, if the symbol combination corresponding to ``1BB-B'' does not stop and display on the active line, the ``1BB-B internal condition device'' is activated. ”.

In addition, if "1BB-B inside" is not won by the winning combination means 61 when three medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but when two medals are inserted, Sometimes, even if the winning combination is not won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" does not stop and display on the active line.
However, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, since there is no possibility of non-winning in the winning combination lottery means 61 in "1BB-B inside", once it moves to "1BB-B inside", after that, "1BB-B inside" will not be won. Since the symbol combination corresponding to "-B" will not be stopped and displayed on the active line, "1BB-B inside" will continue to be maintained.

Furthermore, during "1BB-A game", "RB game" is executed continuously.
Furthermore, the "RB game" ends when the "2" games are played, when there are "2" wins, or when the end conditions of the "1BB-A game" are met.
Furthermore, the "1BB-A game" continues until the cumulative number of medals acquired (number of medals paid out, number given) exceeds "210", and ends when the cumulative number of medals acquired exceeds "210". .

Then, when the "RB game" ends, if the end conditions of the "1BB-A game" are not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again.
Furthermore, when the "RB game" ends, if the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is satisfied, the "1BB-A game" is ended and the game moves to non-internal mode.
Furthermore, if the termination conditions for "1BB-A game" are met during "RB game", the "RB game" will be ended, "1BB-A game" will be ended, and the transition will be made to non-internal mode. do.

Also, during the ``1BB-B game'', the ``RB game'' is executed continuously, similar to the ``1BB-A game''.
Furthermore, like the "1BB-A game", the "1BB-B game" continues until the cumulative number of medals acquired (number of medals paid out, number of awards given) exceeds "210", and the number of medals acquired continues. The process ends when the cumulative total exceeds 210 pieces.

Then, when the "RB game" ends, if the end condition of the "1BB-B game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again.
Furthermore, when the "RB game" ends, if the end condition of the "1BB-B game" is satisfied, the "1BB-B game" ends and the game moves to non-internal mode.
Furthermore, if the termination conditions for "1BB-B game" are met during "RB game", the "RB game" will be ended, "1BB-B game" will be ended, and the transition will be made to non-internal mode. do.

Next, using FIGS. 13 to 20, the feature points of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" in this embodiment are activated, and the "small win A1 condition device" in this embodiment. The characteristic points of the stop control of the reels 31 when the "device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated will be explained.
Figure 13 (1) shows the first stop on the left when the "Small win A1 condition device" is activated, the first stop on the left when the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, and the first stop on the left when the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated. It is a diagram showing the symbols of the left reel 31 that can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the time of the first left stop.
FIG. 13(2) is a diagram showing the symbols of the left reel 31 that can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the second left stop after the middle first stop when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated.
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "small role A1 condition device" to "small role C2 condition device" are activated, and FIG. It is a diagram showing symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the condition device is activated.

FIG. 16 shows a symbol combination in which only the symbol on the middle reel 31 is in the “PB=1” arrangement among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the “minor role A1 condition device” to “minor role F2 condition device” are activated. It is a diagram.
FIG. 17 shows a symbol combination in which only the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the “PB=1” arrangement among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the “minor role A1 condition device” to “minor role F2 condition device” are activated. It is a diagram.
FIG. 18 shows a symbol combination in which only the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the “PB=1” arrangement among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the “minor role A1 condition device” to “minor role F2 condition device” are activated. It is a diagram.

FIG. 19(1) is a diagram showing the stop number when winning "Small win 01", and FIG. 19(2) is a diagram showing the stop number when winning "Small win 02". (3) is a diagram showing the stop rolls when winning "Small Win 03".
FIG. 20(1) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning "Small win 04", and FIG. 20(2) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning "Small win 05". (3) is a diagram showing the stop rolls when winning "Small win 06".

As shown in FIG. 14, when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "left middle right (123)", the probability is "1/1" due to number of winnings priority. The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small winning combination 01" (10 coins paid) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Also, at the first stop on the left when the "Small win A1 condition device" is activated, in order to win "Small win 01", the "Replay" (PB = 1) of the left reel 31 is stopped at the middle left row (valid line). Display.
As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, as shown in FIG. There is a case where "Replay" (No. 11) on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.
That is, "Black BAR" (number 10), "Replay" (number 11) and "Bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed within the display window 18.

As shown in FIG. 14, when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "left, right, middle (132)", there is a probability of "1/1" due to number of tickets priority. The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "minor combination 02" (10 coins paid) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Also, at the first stop on the left when the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, in order to win "Small win 02", the "Replay" (PB = 1) of the left reel 31 is stopped at the middle left row (valid line). Display.

As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, as shown in FIG. There is a case where "Replay" (No. 11) on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.
That is, "Black BAR" (number 10), "Replay" (number 11) and "Bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed within the display window 18.

As shown in FIG. 14, when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle Left/Right (213)", the probability of "1/1" is given by priority on the number of coins. The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small winning combination 03" (10 coins paid) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Also, at the first stop in the middle when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "bell" (PB = 1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped at the middle middle stage (effective line) in order to win "small win 03". Then, at the second stop on the left, the "bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle stage (valid line) in order to win "small winning combination 03".

As a result, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, at the second stop on the left after the first stop in the middle, as shown in FIG. , "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.
That is, “Replay” (No. 11), “Bell” (No. 12) and “Watermelon” (No. 13) on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed within the display window 18. Further, the "black BAR" (number 10) on the left reel 31 is not stopped and displayed within the display window 18.

As shown in FIG. 14, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of pressing "left middle right (123)", the probability is "1/8" due to number priority. Then, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 63" or "minor winning combination 64" (one coin paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first stop is on the left, in order to make it possible to win "small win 63" or "small win 64", the "replay" (PB = 1) of the left reel 31 is activated. Display stop in the middle left row.

As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, the "black BAR" (number 10) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, as shown in FIG. There is a case where "Replay" (number 11) on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Bell" (12) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.
That is, "Black BAR" (number 10), "Replay" (number 11) and "Bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed within the display window 18.

In this way, the first left stop when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the first left stop when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, and the left first stop when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated. When stopped, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11) and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18, as shown in FIG. 13 (1). shall be.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating conditional device (the lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 61) from being guessed from the position of the symbol on the left reel 31 that is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the time of the first left stop. .

In addition, when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, at the second stop on the left after the first stop in the middle, as shown in FIG. (No. 12) and “Watermelon” (No. 13) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18, and “Black BAR” (No. 10) on the left reel 31 is not stopped and displayed in the display window 18.
In this way, when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, the left side stops when the left first stops (when the pressing order is incorrect) and when the left second stops after the middle first stop (when the pressing order is correct). Different symbols on reels 31 are stopped and displayed in a display window 18.

When the "minor prize C1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), the symbol is different from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor prize 03", and ``Replay'', which is the symbol ``PB=1'' on the left reel 31, is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "bell" on the left reel 31 from stopping and displaying on the active line, so "minor role 03" is won. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, the symbols on the left reel 31 that make up "Small win 63" and "Small win 64" are one type of "replay", and the symbols on the right reel 31 that make up "Small win 63" and "Small win 64" are one type of "replay". There is one type of pattern: "Red 7".
In this way, the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed at the first left stop (when the pressing order is incorrect) when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated are determined respectively. By using one type, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated.

Furthermore, the probability that "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 63" and "Small Winning 64" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/4", and "Small Winning 63" and "Small Winning 64" The probability that "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31, which constitutes "Small Winning 64", can be stopped and displayed on the active line is also "1/4", and it constitutes "Small Winning 63" and "Small Winning 64". The probability that "Red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is also "1/4".
As a result, the winning probability (acquisition rate) of a single winning combination when the pressing order is incorrect when the "small winning combination C1 condition device" is activated can be lowered to "1/8", which in turn lowers the ball payout rate per game. Since it can be lowered, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "left middle right", that is, the left reel 31 is stopped first, and the second When the middle reel 31 is stopped at the third time and the right reel 31 is stopped at the third time, "10", which is the maximum value of the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the "small role A1 condition device", is paid out. The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 01" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, the symbols on the left reel 31 constituting "Small Winning 01" are one type of "Replay", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 constituting "Small Winning 01" are one type of "Bell"; The symbol on the right reel 31 constituting "Small Win 01" is one type of "Watermelon".

Furthermore, the "Replay" on the left reel 31 that makes up "Small win 01" has a "PB=1" arrangement, and the "Bell" on the middle reel 31 that makes up "Small win 01" also has a "PB=1" arrangement. ``Watermelon'' on the right reel 31 that constitutes ``Small Win 01'' is also placed in ``PB=1''.
In this way, the symbols on each reel 31 constituting the symbol combination to be stopped and displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated are set to "PB=1", and the "small win A1 condition device" is activated. The symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated by making the type of symbols on each reel 31 one type, which constitutes the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when the push order is correct during activation. The number of can be reduced.

The "small win A2 condition device" is also the same as the "small win A1 condition device."
As shown in FIG. 14, when the "small role A2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "left middle right", that is, the left reel 31 is stopped first, and the middle reel is stopped second. When the reel 31 is stopped and the right reel 31 is stopped third, a "small win" that pays out "10" which is the maximum value of the number of medals corresponding to the "small win A2 condition device" The symbol combination corresponding to "01" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As mentioned above, the symbols on each reel 31 constituting "minor prize 01" are arranged in "PB=1", and the type of symbol on each reel 31 constituting "minor prize 01" is one type. . Thereby, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small winning combination A2 condition device" is activated can be reduced.

Also, as mentioned above, the straight line that passes through "upper left row" - "upper middle row" - "upper right row" is the "upper row line", and passes through "middle left row" - "middle row" - "middle right row". A straight line is defined as a "middle line", and a straight line passing through "lower left tier" - "lower middle tier" - "lower right tier" is defined as a "lower tier line". Furthermore, a straight line passing through "upper left row" - "middle middle row" - "lower right row" is a "down-right line", and a straight line passing through "lower left row" - "middle middle row" - "upper right row" Let the line be the ``right-up line'', and the small mountain-shaped line passing through the ``lower left step'', ``middle middle step'', and ``lower right step'' be the ``small mountain line''. In this embodiment, only the "middle line" is a "valid line", and the others are "invalid lines".

Then, as shown in FIG. 19 (1), when the symbol combination ("Replay" - "Bell" - "Watermelon") corresponding to "Small win 01" is stopped and displayed on the active line ("Small win 01") When winning a prize), "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the "down-right line" (invalid line) passing through "Top left row" - "Middle middle row" - "Bottom right row".
Also, as shown in Figure 19 (2), when the symbol combination ("Replay" - "Cherry" - "Replay") corresponding to "Minor Role 02" is stopped and displayed on the active line ("Minor Role 02") When winning a prize), "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the "upper line" (invalid line) passing through "upper left row" - "upper middle row" - "upper right row".

Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "small role 03" is "bell" - "bell" - "bell", and when winning "small role 03", as shown in FIG. 19 (3), the symbol combination is "middle row". "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" is stopped and displayed on "Line" (valid line).
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20 (1), when the symbol combination ("Watermelon" - "Bell" - "Replay") corresponding to "Small win 04" is stopped and displayed on the active line ("Small win 04") When winning a prize), "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the "upward right line" (invalid line) passing through "Lower left row" - "Middle middle row" - "Upper right row".

Also, as shown in Figure 20 (2), when the symbol combination ("Watermelon" - "Bell" - "Watermelon") corresponding to "Small win 05" is stopped and displayed on the active line ("Small win 05") When a prize is won), "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the "Oyama line" (invalid line) passing through "Lower left row" - "Middle middle row" - "Lower right row".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (3), when the symbol combination ("Watermelon" - "Replay" - "Watermelon") corresponding to "Small win 06" is stopped and displayed on the active line ("Small win 06") (When winning a prize), "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the "lower line" (invalid line) passing through "lower left row" - "lower middle row" - "lower right row".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 20 (1), when the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 04" is stopped and displayed on the active line (when "minor prize 04" wins), "cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed. may be stopped and displayed within the display window 18 (upper left row).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (2), when the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 05" is stopped and displayed on the active line (when "minor winning combination 05" is won), "cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed. ” may be stopped and displayed in the display window 18 (upper left row).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (3), when the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 06" is stopped and displayed on the active line (when winning "minor winning combination 06"), the "cherry" on the left reel 31 may be stopped and displayed within the display window 18 (upper left row).
In the present embodiment, symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 are stopped and displayed on the active lines of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31. It is not a symbol combination that will win a prize regardless of the symbol drawn.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the "cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line, it does not have a winning symbol combination regardless of the symbols stopped and displayed on the active line on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31. . In other words, when a predetermined symbol on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line, a prize is won regardless of the symbols stopped and displayed on the active line on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31.There is no so-called single-shot winning combination. .

In addition, in this embodiment, there is a case where the "cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the first stop on the left when the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated. However, there is a case where the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when the pressing order is correct when the "Small win D1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" is activated.

Here, in this embodiment, an AT lottery is executed in a game in which the winning number "13" or "14" is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. In addition, in a game where the winning number "13" is won, the "small win G condition device" is activated and the "cherries" are aligned on the "small win 79" or "small win 80" (invalid line). ) can be won, and in the game where the winning number "14" is won, the "Small win H condition device" is activated and "Small win 81" ("Cherry" is aligned on the middle line (valid line)) is won. It becomes possible. Therefore, when the "cherries" line up on the upward-sloping line (invalid line) or the middle line (valid line), the player expects to win the AT lottery.

In addition, in the conventional slot machine 10, in the winning combination, a winning combination related to cherries and a special winning combination (bonus) may be won at the same time (duplicate winning), or when a winning combination related to cherries is won, an AT lottery is performed, and a winning combination related to cherries is also won. When a "cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 (upper left row, middle left row, or lower left row) in a game, regardless of the stopped display symbols on the active line of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31, the cherry will be displayed. It is known that he will win prizes for his role. In such a slot machine 10, when a "cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 and a winning combination related to cherries is won, the player expects to win a special winning combination or an AT lottery.

However, in this embodiment, the "cherry" on the left reel 31 may be stopped and displayed in the display window 18 even when the pressing order is correct when the "small win D1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated. However, at this time, the left reel 31 is at the second or third stop, and at that point two or three "bells" are aligned on the invalid line.
As a result, the player is made to recognize that the winning combination is related to the bell, and even if the "cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18, the player is prevented from having excessive expectations such as winning in the AT lottery. I try not to let it happen.

As mentioned above, in the example shown in FIG. 20(1), the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 (upper left row), but at this time, it is stopped and displayed on the active line. What is present is a symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 04". The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 04" is "Watermelon" - "Bell" - "Replay", which is a winning symbol regardless of the stopped display symbols on the active line of the middle reel 31 and right reel 31. It's not a combination. That is, the stop result shown in FIG. 20(1) is not a stop result that results in a prize regarding cherries, nor is it a stop result that results in a so-called single-shot prize. The stop results shown in FIGS. 20(2) and (3) are also the same as the stop results shown in FIG. 20(1).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win A1 condition device" is activated are "Small win 01", "Small win 07", "Small win 08", and "Small win A1 condition device". These are symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination 31, 32, 53, or 54.
Further, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 01" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1". The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 01" can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is correct.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor prize 07" and "minor prize 08" consist of symbols in which "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and other "1" This is a symbol combination in which the symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a way that "PB≠1". The symbol combinations corresponding to "small winning combination 07" and "small winning combination 08" are correct in the pressing order at the first stop, but can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order becomes incorrect at the second stop.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 31", "minor winnings 32", "minor winnings 53", and "minor winnings 54" have "1" symbols on the reel 31 arranged in "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols that are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1" is arranged, and the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a manner such that "PB≠1". The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 31", "Small win 32", "Small win 53", and "Small win 54" can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order becomes incorrect at the first stop.

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 consist of symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement, The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1" is "4". Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (1) consisting of symbols in which all "3" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and "2" symbols in the reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1". ” arrangement, and the other “1” symbols on the reel 31 are larger than the number (2) of symbol combinations consisting of symbols arranged in “PB≠1”.

Also, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, if the pressing order is correct, when all "3" reels 31 are stopped, the symbols arranged in "PB = 1" will be stopped and displayed on the active line. .
Furthermore, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, the first stop is a correct answer, but if the second stop is an incorrect answer, the "PB=1" arrangement will be made at the first and second stops. At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Furthermore, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, if the answer is incorrect at the first stop, the symbol with "PB = 1" arrangement will be stopped and displayed on the active line at the first stop, and at the second stop At the third stop, the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are stopped and displayed on the active line.

The symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when each of the condition devices "Small win A2 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" are activated are also the same as in the "Small win A1 condition device."
The symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when each condition device from “Small role A2 condition device” to “Small role F2 condition device” is activated are when “1” symbols on reel 31 are arranged in “PB=1”. , and the symbols on the other "2" reels 31 are arranged in "PB≠1", and the symbols on the other "2" reels 31 are "PB= A symbol combination consisting of a symbol with a "PB≠1" arrangement and another "1" symbol on the reel 31 with a "PB≠1" arrangement, and "3" symbols on the reel 31 It has a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in "PB=1".

In addition, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when each condition device from "Small win A2 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" is activated, "1" symbol on the reel 31 is "PB = 1 The number of symbol combinations is "4", which is made up of symbols arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Furthermore, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when each condition device from "Small win A2 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" is activated, "2" symbols on the reel 31 are "PB= The number of symbol combinations is "2", consisting of a symbol arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the other "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Furthermore, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when each condition device from “Small win A2 condition device” to “Small win F2 condition device” is activated, “3” symbols on the reel 31 are “PB=1 The number of symbol combinations made up of symbols arranged in this manner is "1".
Then, the symbols on "1" reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and the symbols on the other "2" reels 31 are arranged in "PB≠1". The number of symbol combinations consists of "2" symbols on the reels 31 arranged in "PB=1", and the other "1" symbols on the reels 31 in "PB≠1". The number of symbol combinations made up of symbols arranged in the arrangement and "3" symbols on the reel 31 is greater than the number of symbol combinations made up of the symbols arranged "PB=1".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the medal corresponding to the "small win A1 condition device" is determined according to the subsequent stop operation. The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 01" which pays out "10" which is the maximum value of the number of paid out coins can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 01" is selected according to the subsequent stop operation. A symbol combination corresponding to ``Small Win 31'' or ``Small Win 32'' that pays out ``1'' medal less than when ``Small Win 31'' or ``Small Win 32'' is paid out on the active line can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 01" is displayed according to the subsequent stop operation. A symbol combination corresponding to a "minor winning combination 53" or "minor winning combination 54" which pays out "1" medal less than when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line can be stopped and displayed on the effective line.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 31" and "minor prize 32" is "watermelon". The “watermelon” on the middle reel 31 is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to “small winning combination 01”, and “PB=1” is arranged on the middle reel 31. This is the design.
As a result, when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated and the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop in the middle, it is possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and the "bell" on the middle reel 31 can be prevented from being missed. ” can be prevented from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so it is possible to prevent “minor winning combination 01” from winning.

In addition, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 31" and "Small win 32" is one type of "Red 7", which corresponds to "Small win 31" and "Small win 32". The symbol on the middle reel 31 constituting the symbol combination is one type of "watermelon".
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small winning combination A1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 53" and "minor winning combination 54" is "cherry". The “cherry” on the right reel 31 is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the right reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to “small winning combination 01”, and “PB=1” is arranged on the right reel 31. This is the design.
As a result, when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated and the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop on the right, it is possible to prevent the "Cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and the "Watermelon" on the right reel 31 can be prevented. ” can be prevented from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so it is possible to prevent “minor winning combination 01” from winning.

In addition, the symbols on the left reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 53" and "minor winnings 54" are one type of "white BAR", which corresponds to "minor winnings 53" and "minor winnings 54". The symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the symbol combination is one type of "cherry".
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time, the medal corresponding to the "small win C1 condition device" is determined according to the subsequent stop operation. The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 03" which pays out "10" which is the maximum value of the number of paid out coins can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time when the "minor winning C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning C1 03" is determined according to the subsequent stopping operation. A symbol combination corresponding to a "minor winning combination 63" or "minor winning combination 64" which pays out "1" medal less than when "minor winning combination 64" is stopped and displayed on the effective line can be stopped and displayed on the effective line.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbols on the left reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 63" and "minor winnings 64" are "replay". The "replay" on the left reel 31 is a symbol different from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 03", and "PB=1" is arranged on the left reel 31. This is the design.
As a result, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated and the pressing order is incorrect at the first stop on the left, it is possible to prevent the "replay" of the left reel 31 from being missed, and the "bell" of the left reel 31 is not missed. ” can be prevented from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so it is possible to prevent “Small winning combination 03” from winning.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbols on the middle reel 31 constituting the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 63" and "minor winnings 64" are "red 7" or "blue 7". Both "red 7" and "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 are different symbols from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 03", and 31, this is a pattern with a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 63" and "minor prize 64" is "red 7". "Red 7" on the right reel 31 is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the right reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 03", and "PB≠1" on the right reel 31. It is a pattern that is arranged.

The symbols on the left reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 63" and "minor winnings 64" are one type of "replay", and correspond to "minor winnings 63" and "minor winnings 64". The symbols on the right reel 31 constituting the symbol combination are of one type, "Red 7".
In this way, by setting the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 to one each, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the press order is incorrect when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the small winning combination C1 condition device is activated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the left reel 31 has a part where "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11), and "Bell" (No. 12) are arranged in this order. .
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13 (1), at the first stop on the left when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, the "black BAR" (number 10), "replay" (number 11) and "Bell" (number 12) can be stopped and displayed within the display window 18.
Furthermore, among the "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11), and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, "Replay" that is stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "Small win 63". and symbols on the left reel 31 that constitute a symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 64".

And, as shown in FIG. 13(1), when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is activated, and when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is also performed, the "small role C1 condition device" is activated. "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11) and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 are stopped within the display window 18, similar to the first stop on the left when the "condition device" is activated. Make it displayable.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating conditional device (the lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 61) from being guessed from the position of the symbol on the left reel 31 that is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the time of the first left stop. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, for the "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win B2 condition device", the correct answer pressing order is "Left center right" or "Left center right". That is, the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win B2 condition device" are correct in the pressing order at the time of the first left stop.
Here, the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win B2 condition device" are referred to as the "left first stop correct answer group."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 31", "Small win 32", "Small win 53", and "Small win 54" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win A2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 33,""Small win 34,""Small win 49," and "Small win 50." is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 35", "Small win 36", "Small win 47", and "Small win 48" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win B2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 37", "Small win 38", "Small win 57", and "Small win 58" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.

From the above, among the symbol combinations included in the "left first stop correct answer group" that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the conditional device is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1". The number of symbol combinations is "16", which is made up of symbols that are arranged in such a way that the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1".

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, for the "small win C1 condition device" to "small win D2 condition device", the correct pressing order is "middle left and right" or "middle right left". That is, the "small win C1 condition device" to "small win D2 condition device" are correct in the pressing order at the time of the middle first stop.
Here, the "small win C1 condition device" to "small win D2 condition device" are referred to as the "medium first stop correct answer group."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 51", "Small win 52", "Small win 63", and "Small win 64" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win C2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 55", "Small win 56", "Small win 65", and "Small win 66" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 59", "Small win 60", "Small win 67", and "Small win 68" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win D2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 61", "Small win 62", "Small win 69", and "Small win 70" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.

From the above, among the symbol combinations included in the "medium first stop correct answer group" that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the conditional device is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1". The number of symbol combinations is "16", which is made up of symbols that are arranged in such a way that the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, for the "Small win E1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device", the correct answer press order is "Right left middle" or "Right middle left". That is, the "small win E1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are correct in the pressing order at the time of the first stop on the right.
Here, the "small win E1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are referred to as the "right first stop correct answer group."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 43", "Small win 46", "Small win 71", and "Small win 72" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win E2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 44", "Small win 45", "Small win 77", and "Small win 78" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 39", "Small win 40", "Small win 75", and "Small win 76" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win F2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 41", "Small win 42", "Small win 73", and "Small win 74" is a pattern in which "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a pattern combination consisting of.

From the above, among the symbol combinations included in the "right first stop correct answer group" that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the conditional device is activated, "1" symbols on the reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1". The number of symbol combinations is "16", which is made up of symbols that are arranged in such a way that the other "2" symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1".

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, "Small win C1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" can be used to select "middle left and right,""middle right left,""right left middle," or "right middle left." Correct answer will be pressed in order. That is, the "small win C1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" become incorrect in the pressing order at the time of the first left stop.
Here, the "small win C1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are referred to as the "left first stop incorrect answer group".

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 63" and "Small win 64" are such that the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win C2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 65" and "Small win 66" are such that the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 67" and "Small win 68" are such that the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win D2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 69" and "Small win 70" are such that the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "minor prize E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor prize 71" and "minor prize 72" are such that the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win E2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 77" and "Small win 78" are such that the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 75" and "Small win 76" are such that the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win F2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 73" and "Small win 74" are such that the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, among the symbol combinations included in the "left first stop incorrect answer group" that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the conditional device is activated, the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1" The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged such that "PB≠1" is "16".
That is, as shown in FIG. 18, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 63" to "Small win 78" can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the condition device included in the "left first stop incorrect answer group" is activated. This is a symbol combination in which the symbols (replay) on the left reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in "PB≠1". This is a symbol combination consisting of the symbols that are present. The number of these symbol combinations is "16".

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win B2 condition device" and "Small win E1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" are "left center right" , "Left-right middle", "Right-left middle", or "Right-center left" are the correct answer pressing order. That is, "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win B2 condition device" and "Small win E1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" are incorrect in the pressing order at the time of the middle first stop.
Here, "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win B2 condition device" and "Small win E1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" are referred to as "incorrect answer group at middle first stop".

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 31" and "Small win 32" are such that the symbol on the middle reel 31 is "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win A2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 33" and "Small win 34" are such that the symbol on the middle reel 31 is "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 35" and "Small win 36" are such that the symbol on the middle reel 31 is "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win B2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 37" and "Small win 38" are such that the symbol on the middle reel 31 is "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 43" and "Small win 46" are such that the symbol on the middle reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win E2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 44" and "Small win 45" are such that the symbol on the middle reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win F1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 39" and "Small win 40" are such that the symbol on the middle reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win F2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 41" and "Small win 42" are such that the symbol on the middle reel 31 is "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the conditional device is activated, which are included in the "incorrect answer group at first stop in the middle", the symbols on the middle reel 31 are arranged in "PB = 1" The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged such that "PB≠1" is "16".
That is, as shown in FIG. 16, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 31" to "Small Winning 46" can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the conditional device included in the "Incorrect answer group at first stop" is activated. This is a symbol combination in which the symbol on the middle reel 31 (watermelon) is arranged in "PB=1", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are arranged in "PB≠1". This is a symbol combination consisting of the symbols that are present. The number of these symbol combinations is "16".

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win D2 condition device" can be used to select "left middle right,""left middle right,""center right left," or "center right left." Correct answer will be pressed in order. That is, the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win D2 condition device" become incorrect in the pressing order at the time of the first stop on the right.
Here, the "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win D2 condition device" are referred to as the "right first stop incorrect answer group".

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 53" and "Small win 54" are such that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win A2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 49" and "Small win 50" are such that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 47" and "Small win 48" are such that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB=1". This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win B2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 57" and "Small win 58" are such that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 51" and "Small win 52" are such that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win C2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 55" and "Small win 56" are such that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 59" and "Small win 60" are such that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win D2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 61" and "Small win 62" are such that the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB = 1 This is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, among the symbol combinations included in the "right first stop incorrect answer group" that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the conditional device is activated, the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1" The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1" is "16".
That is, as shown in FIG. 17, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 53" to "Small win 62" can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the condition device included in the "right first stop incorrect answer group" is activated. This is a symbol combination in which the symbol (cherry) on the right reel 31 is arranged in "PB=1", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 are arranged in "PB≠1". This is a symbol combination consisting of the symbols that are present. The number of these symbol combinations is "16".

Then, ``Correct answer group at the first stop on the left'', ``Correct answer group at the first stop in the middle'', ``Correct answer group at the first right stop'', ``Incorrect answer group at the first stop on the left'', and ``Incorrect answer group at the first stop in the center''. As explained in "Correct Answer Group" and "Incorrect Answer Group at First Stop on the Right," "1" symbols on the reel 31 consist of symbols arranged in "PB=1", and the other "2" By setting the number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols on the reel 31 arranged in "PB≠1" to "16", the "minor win A1 condition device" to "minor win F2 condition device" are activated. The number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed at times can be reduced.

In other words, the condition devices included in the "incorrect answer group at the first stop in the middle" (small role A1 condition device, minor role A2 condition device, minor role B1 condition device, minor role B2 condition device, minor role E1 condition device, minor role In the game when the E2 condition device, the small win F1 condition device, the small win F2 condition device are activated, the pressing order becomes incorrect at the time of the middle first stop. Then, for a symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed at the first stop of the middle in a game when the conditional device included in the "incorrect answer group at the first stop of the middle" is activated, the symbols on the middle reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1" and There is one type (watermelon), and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are both arranged so that "PB≠1".

Furthermore, in order to give priority to the number of symbols to win the symbol combination (1 piece) that can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is correct in the game when the conditional device included in the "incorrect answer group when stopping the middle first" is activated, The number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed at the first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect) in the game when the conditional devices included in the "incorrect answer at one stop group" is activated is set to "2" for each conditional device. ” pieces.
Thereby, it is possible to minimize the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed at the first stop in the game when the conditional device included in the "incorrect answer group at the first stop in the middle" is activated.
The "group of incorrect answers at the first stop on the left" and the "group of incorrect answers at the first stop on the right" are the same as the "group of incorrect answers at the first stop in the middle".

Here, in conventional slot machines, a specification called an accelerator AT or the like is known. A slot machine equipped with this accelerator AT is equipped with a plurality of types of push order bells, and each push order bell is provided with a high bell and a cheap bell with different symbol combinations.
It should be noted that the term "high-order bell" means a bell with a large number of coins to be paid out, which is won when the push order bell is won and the push order is correct. Furthermore, the term "cheap bell" means a bell with a small number of payouts that can be won if the pushing order bell is won and the pushing order is incorrect.
In addition, during non-internal and internal games, a lottery is held for winning combinations that include all push order bells, and if each push order bell is won and the push order is correct, the corresponding high bell will be won and the push order bell will be won. If the answer is incorrect, the higher bell will not win, but any corresponding lower bell will be able to win.

On the other hand, during the special game, the lottery for the push order bells is not held, but instead, the lottery for the small role ALL is held in which all high and low bells are won at the same time (duplicate winning). In a game in which the small winning combination ALL is won, one of the higher bells wins a prize.
Then, set the winning probability of the small winning combination ALL during the special game to be higher than the winning probability of each push order bell in the non-internal medium and internal medium, and set the lottery results other than winning the small winning combination ALL as non-winning, Alternatively, it is assumed that all one-card roles are won multiple times.
As a result, while the winning probability of each high bell and each cheap bell during the special game is higher than the winning probability of each high bell and cheap bell during non-internal and internal games, players can The number of medals is decreasing.

In addition, in this embodiment, by setting the winning probability of each push order bell (small role A1 condition device to small role F2 condition device) in non-internal medium and internal medium, each high bell The probability of winning for (minor prizes 01 to 06) is set as "5000/65536."
In addition, by setting the probability of winning the small role ALL (small role ALL condition device) during the special game to "5001/65536", each high bell (small role 01 to minor role 06) during the special game can be won. The probability is set as "5001/65536".
However, the winning probability of each small role during the special game can be set to be higher than the winning probability of each small role during non-internal and internal. /65536".

By the way, the above-mentioned slot machine equipped with the conventional accelerator AT has multiple types of push order bells, as well as high and low bells with different symbol combinations for each push order bell. Problems have arisen in that the total number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when a sequential bell is won increases, and that it becomes difficult for the player to understand the symbol combinations that correspond to high bells.
Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, by appropriately setting the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed in the game when the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated, Minimizes the total number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed during play when the "Small role A1 condition device" to "Small role F2 condition device" is activated, and supports "Small role 01" to "Small role 06" To make it easy for a player to understand the number of stops when a symbol combination is stopped and displayed on an active line.

<Second embodiment>
In the second embodiment, in a game in which multiple types of small winning combinations with different numbers of coins to be paid out are won, the type of winning small winning combinations differs depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, so that the game result (number of coins paid out) is advantageous/disadvantageous. This is a slot machine in which this occurs, and the symbol arrangement is different from that of the first embodiment.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the second embodiment.
The symbol arrangement of the reel 31 in the second embodiment is such that the "bells" numbered "12" and "17" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 2 are replaced with "bell A", and The "bells" at numbers "2" and "7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "bell B", and the "bells" on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment are all replaced with "bell A". It is something that Other than that, the pattern arrangement is the same as the symbol arrangement of the reel 31 of the first embodiment shown in FIG.
In addition, in the first embodiment, the "bell" on the left reel 31 was arranged in "PB=1", but in the second embodiment, the "bell A" on the left reel 31 was arranged in "PB≠1". , “Bell B” on the left reel 31 is also placed in “PB≠1”. However, in the second embodiment, the two symbols "Bell A" and "Bell B" on the left reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1".

FIGS. 22 and 23 are diagrams showing the types of winning combinations (such as the winning combinations corresponding to the winning numbers drawn by the winning lottery means 61), symbol combinations, and the number of coins to be paid out in this embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the gaming states of this embodiment include non-internal, 1BB internal, and 1BB gaming. Further, in this embodiment, there is only one type of special winning combination, "1BB".
In FIGS. 22 and 23, "inside" indicates "inside 1BB", and "in 1BB" indicates "in 1BB game".

The symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 01", "minor winnings 04", and "minor winnings 05" are those in which the "bell" on the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "bell A".
The symbol combinations corresponding to "minor win 02" and "minor win 06" are the same as in the first embodiment.
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 03" replaces "Bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A/Bell B", and "Bell" on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A/Bell B". " has been replaced with "Bell A."

The symbol combinations corresponding to "minor winnings 07" to "minor winnings 10" are those in which the "bell" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "bell A".
The symbol combinations corresponding to “Small Win 11” to “Small Win 14” are those in which “Bell” on the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with “Bell A”.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 15" is as follows: "Red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A", and "Bell" on the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A". It has been replaced with .
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 16" is as follows: "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "White BAR", and "Bell" on the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A". It has been replaced with .
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 17" is as follows: "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell B", and "Bell" on the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A". It has been replaced with .
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 18" is as follows: "White BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Red 7", and "Bell" on the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A". It has been replaced with .

The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 19" to "Small win 22" are such that the "Bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A/Bell B", and the symbol combinations on the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "Bell A/Bell B". "Bell" is replaced with "Bell A".
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 23" is the one in which "Red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A".
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 24" is the one in which "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "White BAR".
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 25" is the one in which "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell B".
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 26" is the one in which "white BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "red 7".

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 27" is the one in which "bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "red 7".
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 28" is the one in which "bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "blue 7".
The symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 29" is the one in which "bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "black BAR".
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 30" is the one in which "BELL" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "WHITE BAR".

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 31" is the one in which "Red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A".
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 32" is the one in which "red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "white BAR".
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 33" is the one in which "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell B".
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 34" is the one in which "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "red 7".

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 35" is as follows: "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A", and "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Blue 7". ” has been replaced.
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 36" is as follows: "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "White BAR", and "White BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Blue 7 ” has been replaced.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 37" is as follows: "White BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell B", and "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Red 7". ” has been replaced.
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 38" is as follows: "White BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Red 7", and "White BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Red 7". ” has been replaced.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 39" is the one in which "Red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A".
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 40" is as follows: "Red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "White BAR", and "White BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Black BAR". ” has been replaced.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 41" is as follows: "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell B", and "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "White BAR". ” has been replaced.
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 42" is the one in which "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "red 7".

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 43" is as follows: "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A", and "Red 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "White BAR". ” has been replaced.
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 44" is as follows: "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "White BAR", and "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "White BAR". ” has been replaced.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 45" is as follows: "White BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell B", and "Red 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Black BAR". ” has been replaced.
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 46" is as follows: "White BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Red 7", and "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Black BAR". ” has been replaced.

The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small win 47" to "Small win 82" and "Replay" are the same as in the first embodiment.
The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is the same as the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, the "small role condition device" and the "replay condition device" are the same as in the first embodiment, and the "1BB condition device" is the same as the "1BB-A condition device" in the first embodiment. .

FIG. 24 is a diagram (number table) showing the numbers of each winning number for each gaming state in the second embodiment.
In FIG. 24, "inside" indicates "inside 1BB", and "inside 1BB" indicates "inside 1BB game".
Dividing the numbers shown in FIG. 24 by "65536" gives the probability of winning for each winning number, as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 24, "Small role A1 condition device" to "Small role I condition device" are eligible for lottery during non-internal and internal (inside 1BB), but during 1BB (during 1BB playing) Not eligible for lottery.
In addition, the "1-card ALL condition device" is a lottery target in all gaming states.
Furthermore, the "Small role ALL condition device", contrary to the "Small role A1 condition device" to "Small role I condition device", is eligible for lottery only during 1BB (during 1BB game), and is eligible for lottery only during non-internal and internal Medium (1BB internal medium) is not eligible for lottery.

Furthermore, the "Replay Condition Device" is similar to the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role I Condition Device", while non-internal and internal (inside 1BB) are subject to lottery, but in 1BB (1BB (during a game) are not eligible for lottery.
Further, the "1BB condition device" is a lottery target only in non-internal mode, and is not a lottery target in other gaming states.
In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, in any gaming state, one of the winning numbers "1" to "20" is won in the drawing by the winning combination drawing means 61, and the winning number is not won. There isn't.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the transition of the gaming state in the second embodiment, and FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the changing conditions of the gaming state in the present embodiment.
In Figure 26, "∞" (infinite) in the number of times column means that there is no upper limit set for each gaming state, and the number of plays in that gaming state will continue until the transition condition described in the change opportunity column is met. means to maintain (continue).

The main control means 50 determines whether or not the transition conditions for the gaming state are satisfied when all the reels 31 are stopped in every game, and when it is determined that the transition conditions for the gaming state are satisfied, the main control means 50 causes the gaming state to transition. Control.
First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, it transitions to non-internal mode. When shipped from the factory, it transitions to non-internal. Further, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is off, and the power is turned on in this state, the setting change state is entered. At this time, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed and the process transitions to non-internal mode.

While not inside, it is maintained until the "1BB condition device" is activated.
Then, when the "1BB condition device" is activated (1BB winning) while it is not inside, and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is stopped and displayed on the active line (1BB winning), the transition to "1BB game" (1BB activation) occurs. .
On the other hand, if the "1BB condition device" is activated while not inside, but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not stopped and displayed on the active line, the state shifts to "1BB inside".

Moreover, when "1BB inside" is not won by the combination lottery means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
However, in this embodiment, since there is no possibility of non-winning in the winning combination lottery means 61 for "1BB inside", once it moves to "1BB inside", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" will be on the active line. Since it will not be stopped and displayed, it will continue to maintain "inside 1BB".

Furthermore, during "1BB game", "RB game" is executed continuously.
Furthermore, the "RB game" ends when the "2" games are played, when there are "2" wins, or when the end conditions of the "1BB-A game" are met.
Further, the "1BB game" continues until the cumulative number of acquired medals (number of medals paid out, number given) exceeds "210", and ends when the cumulative number of acquired medals exceeds "210".

Then, when the "RB game" ends, if the end condition of the "1BB game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again.
Furthermore, when the "RB game" ends, if the end condition of the "1BB game" is satisfied, the "1BB game" is ended and the game moves to non-internal mode.
Furthermore, when the termination condition of the "1BB game" is satisfied during the "RB game", the "RB game" is ended, the "1BB game" is ended, and the game shifts to the non-internal state.

Next, using FIG. 27, the feature points of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" etc. are activated in the second embodiment, and the reel when the "small win A1 condition device" etc. are activated. The characteristic points of No. 31 stop control will be explained.
Figure 27 (1) is displayed at the first stop on the left when the small win A1 condition device is activated, the first stop on the left when the small win B1 condition device is activated, and the first stop on the left when the small win C1 condition device is activated. It is a diagram showing symbols on the left reel that can be stopped and displayed within the window.
FIG. 27(2) is a diagram showing the symbols of the left reel that can be stopped and displayed in the display window at the second left stop after the middle first stop when the small winning combination C1 condition device is activated.
In FIG. 27, the two-dot chain line passing through the middle left stage, middle middle stage, and right middle stage indicates the effective line. The same applies to FIG. 29, which will be described later.
In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, and the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of pressing "left middle right (123)", priority is given to the number of pieces. , the symbol combination (PB =1) is stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Also, at the first stop on the left when the "Small win A1 condition device" is activated, in order to win "Small win 01", the "Replay" (PB = 1) of the left reel 31 is stopped at the middle left row (valid line). Display.

As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, the "Black BAR" (No. 10) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, as shown on the left side of FIG. 27 (1). , "Replay" (No. 11) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and "Bell A" (No. 12) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the upper left row, and the As shown on the right side, "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle row. There is a case where "Bell B" (number 7) is stopped and displayed in the upper left row.
That is, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11) and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5), "Replay" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, 6) and "Bell B" (number 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

When the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, right, middle (132)", the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated with a probability of "1/1" due to number priority The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "minor combination 02" which pays out "10" which is the maximum value of the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to "" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Also, at the first stop on the left when the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, in order to win "Small win 02", the "Replay" (PB = 1) of the left reel 31 is stopped at the middle left row (valid line). Display.

As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "Small role B1 condition device" is activated, the "Black BAR" (No. 10) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, as shown on the left side of FIG. 27 (1). , "Replay" (No. 11) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and "Bell A" (No. 12) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the upper left row, and the As shown on the right side, "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle row. There is a case where "Bell B" (number 7) is stopped and displayed in the upper left row.
That is, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11) and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5), "Replay" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, 6) and "Bell B" (number 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

When the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Middle left/right (213)", the "Small win C1 condition device The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Small win 03" which pays out "10" which is the maximum value of the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to "" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, at the first stop in the middle when the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated, in order to win "Small win 03", the "Bell A" (PB = 1) of the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle middle row (effective line). Then, at the second stop on the left, move "Bell A" or "Bell B" on the left reel 31 ("PB = 1" arrangement with the total of 2 symbols) to the left in order to win "Small role 03". Display stop in the middle row (effective line).

As a result, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, at the second stop on the left after the middle first stop, the "replay" (number 11) of the left reel 31 is activated, as shown on the left side of FIG. 27 (2). There is a case where "Bell A" (No. 12) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, "Watermelon" (No. 13) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the upper left row, and As shown on the right side of FIG. 27 (2), "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, and "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row. , there is a case where "Watermelon" (number 8) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.

That is, "Replay" (No. 11), "Bell A" (No. 12) and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31, or "Replay" (No. 6), "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31. ) and "Watermelon" (number 8) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18. In addition, "Cherry" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not stopped and displayed in the display window 18, and "Cherry" (No. 4) and "Red 7" (No. No. 5) is also not stopped and displayed within the display window 18.

When the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "Left center right (123)", the probability of "Small win 63" is "1/8" due to number priority. Or, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small winning combination 64" (one payout in each case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first stop is on the left, in order to make it possible to win "small win 63" or "small win 64", the "replay" (PB = 1) of the left reel 31 is activated. Display stop in the middle left row.

As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, the "Black BAR" (No. 10) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, as shown on the left side of FIG. 27 (1). , "Replay" (No. 11) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and "Bell A" (No. 12) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the upper left row, and the As shown on the right side, "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle row. There is a case where "Bell B" (number 7) is stopped and displayed in the upper left row.
That is, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11) and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5), "Replay" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, 6) and "Bell B" (number 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

In this way, the first left stop when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the first left stop when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, and the left first stop when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated. When stopped, as shown in FIG. 7'' (number 5), ``Replay'' (number 6), and ``Bell B'' (number 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating conditional device (the lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 61) from being guessed from the position of the symbol on the left reel 31 that is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the time of the first left stop. .

In addition, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, at the second left stop after the first stop in the middle, as shown in FIG. ” (No. 12) and “Watermelon” (No. 13), or “Replay” (No. 6), “Bell B” (No. 7) and “Watermelon” (No. 8) on the left reel 31 are stopped in the display window 18. Make it displayable. In this case, "Cherry" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not stopped and displayed in the display window 18, and "Cherry" (No. 4) and "Red 7" on the left reel 31 are not displayed. (No. 5) is also not stopped and displayed in the display window 18.
In this way, when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, the left side stops when the left first stops (when the pressing order is incorrect) and when the left second stops after the middle first stop (when the pressing order is correct). Different symbols on reels 31 are stopped and displayed in a display window 18.

When the "minor prize C1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), the symbol is different from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor prize 03", and ``Replay'', which is the symbol ``PB=1'' on the left reel 31, is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent "Bell A" or "Bell B" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line. It is possible to prevent "Small win 03" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbols on the left reel 31 that make up "Small win 63" and "Small win 64" are one type of "replay", and the symbols on the right reel 31 that make up "Small win 63" and "Small win 64" are one type of "replay". There is one type of pattern: "Red 7".
In this way, the types of symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed at the first left stop (when the pressing order is incorrect) when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated are determined respectively. By using one type, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated.

Furthermore, the probability that "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 63" and "Small Winning 64" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/4", and "Small Winning 63" and "Small Winning 64" The probability that "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31, which constitutes "Small Winning 64", can be stopped and displayed on the active line is also "1/4", and it constitutes "Small Winning 63" and "Small Winning 64". The probability that "Red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is also "1/4".
As a result, the winning probability (acquisition rate) of a single winning combination when the pressing order is incorrect when the "small winning combination C1 condition device" is activated can be lowered to "1/8", which in turn lowers the ball payout rate per game. Since it can be lowered, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In addition, at the first stop on the left when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, And at the time of the second left stop after the middle first stop when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is not stopped and displayed in the display window 18. Thereby, it is possible to prevent players from having excessive expectations.

Although the first and second embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the second embodiment, the "bells" numbered "12" and "17" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "bell A", and the "bells" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "bell A". ” and “7” are replaced with “Bell B”, and all “Bells” on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with “Bell A”, but the symbol replacement is , but not limited to this.

For example, as shown in FIG. 28, "Replay" of numbers "11" and "16" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "Replay A", and "1" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Replay A". ” and “Replay” in numbers “6” may be replaced with “Replay B”.
Also, the "cherries" numbered "9" and "14" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "cherry A", and the "cherry" numbered "4" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "cherry A". It may be replaced with "Cherry B".

Furthermore, all "replays" on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "replay A", and all "cherries" on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "cherry A". may be replaced with
Other than that, the symbol arrangement is the same as that of the reel 31 of the first embodiment shown in FIG.
In the first embodiment, the "replay" on the left reel 31 was arranged in "PB=1", but in the modified example shown in FIG. 28, the "replay A" on the left reel 31 was arranged in "PB≠1". , and "Replay B" on the left reel 31 is also arranged in "PB≠1". However, in the modification shown in FIG. 28, "Replay A" and "Replay B" on the left reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1" with the sum of the two symbols.

Furthermore, since the symbol arrangement of each reel 31 is replaced as shown in FIG. 28, the symbols constituting the symbol combinations of the winning combinations in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 4 to 5 can be replaced as appropriate.
For example, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 01" is "Replay A/Replay B" - "Bell" - "Watermelon", and the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 02" is "Replay A/Replay B". - "Cherry" - "Replay A".
Furthermore, even if the symbol arrangement of each reel 31 is replaced as shown in FIG. 28, the small winning condition device, replay condition device, and 1BB condition device can be the same as in the first embodiment.

When the "Small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "Left center right (123)", the "Small win A1 condition device" is The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to the "small winning combination 01" which pays out "10" which is the maximum value of the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to "A1 condition device" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Also, at the first stop on the left when the "Small win A1 condition device" is activated, in order to win "Small win 01", "Replay A" or "Replay B" on the left reel 31 (the total of the two symbols is "PB = 1” arrangement) is stopped and displayed in the middle left row (effective line).

As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "Small role A1 condition device" is activated, the "Black BAR" (No. 10) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, as shown on the left side of FIG. 29 (1). , "Replay A" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row, and the display shown in FIG. 29 (1) As shown on the right side, "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and There is a case where "Bell" (number 7) is stopped and displayed in the upper left row.
That is, “Black BAR” (No. 10), “Replay A” (No. 11) and “Bell” (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or “Red 7” (No. 5) and “Replay B” on the left reel 31. (No. 6) and "Bell" (No. 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

In addition, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left and right middle (132)", the "small win B1 The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to the "small winning combination 02" that pays out "10" which is the maximum value of the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the "condition device" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Also, at the first stop on the left when the "Small win B1 condition device" is activated, in order to win "Small win 02", "Replay A" or "Replay B" on the left reel 31 (the total of the two symbols is "PB = 1” arrangement) is stopped and displayed in the middle left row (effective line).

As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "Small role B1 condition device" is activated, the "Black BAR" (No. 10) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, as shown on the left side of FIG. 29 (1). , "Replay A" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row, and the display shown in FIG. 29 (1) As shown on the right side, "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and There is a case where "Bell" (number 7) is stopped and displayed in the upper left row.
That is, “Black BAR” (No. 10), “Replay A” (No. 11) and “Bell” (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or “Red 7” (No. 5) and “Replay B” on the left reel 31. (No. 6) and "Bell" (No. 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

In addition, when the "small winning combination C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left and right (213)", the "small winning combination C1 The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to the "small winning combination 03" that pays out "10" which is the maximum value of the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the "condition device" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Also, at the first stop in the middle when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "bell" (PB = 1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped at the middle middle stage (effective line) in order to win "small win 03". Then, at the second stop on the left, the "bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle stage (valid line) in order to win "small winning combination 03".

As a result, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, at the second stop on the left after the first stop in the middle, "Replay A" (No. 11) of the left reel 31 is displayed as shown on the left side of FIG. is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row, As shown on the right side of FIG. 29 (2), "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, and "Bell" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row. , there is a case where "Watermelon" (number 8) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left row.

That is, "Replay A" (No. 11), "Bell" (No. 12) and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31, or "Replay B" (No. 6), "Bell" (No. 7) on the left reel 31. ) and "Watermelon" (number 8) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18. In addition, "Cherry A" (number 9) and "Black BAR" (number 10) on the left reel 31 are not stopped and displayed in the display window 18, and "Cherry B" (number 4) and "Red 7" on the left reel 31 are not displayed in the display window 18. ” (No. 5) is also not stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

In addition, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "left middle right (123)", the "small role A symbol combination corresponding to "63" or "minor combination 64" (one payout in either case) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first stop is on the left, "replay A" or "replay B" of the left reel 31 is set so that "small win 63" or "small win 64" can be won. (“PB=1” arrangement with 2 symbols total) is stopped and displayed in the middle left row.

As a result, at the first stop on the left when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, the "Black BAR" (No. 10) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, as shown on the left side of FIG. 29 (1). , "Replay A" (No. 11) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and "Bell" (No. 12) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the upper left row. As shown on the right side, "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the lower left row, "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle left row, and There is a case where "Bell" (number 7) is stopped and displayed in the upper left row.
That is, “Black BAR” (No. 10), “Replay A” (No. 11) and “Bell” (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or “Red 7” (No. 5) and “Replay B” on the left reel 31. (No. 6) and "Bell" (No. 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

In this way, the first left stop when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the first left stop when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, and the left first stop when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated. When stopped, as shown in FIG. 7'' (number 5), ``Replay B'' (number 6), and ``Bell'' (number 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating conditional device (the lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 61) from being guessed from the position of the symbol on the left reel 31 that is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the time of the first left stop. .

In addition, when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, at the second stop on the left after the first stop in the middle, "Replay A" (No. 11) of the left reel 31, "Bell ” (No. 12) and “Watermelon” (No. 13), or “Replay B” (No. 6), “Bell” (No. 7) and “Watermelon” (No. 8) on the left reel 31 are stopped in the display window 18. Make it displayable. In this case, “Cherry A” (No. 9) and “Black BAR” (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not stopped and displayed in the display window 18, and “Cherry B” (No. 4) and “Red BAR” on the left reel 31 are not displayed in the display window 18. 7'' (number 5) is also not stopped and displayed in the display window 18.
In this way, when the "Small role C1 condition device" is activated, the left side stops when the left first stops (when the pressing order is incorrect) and when the left second stops after the middle first stop (when the pressing order is correct). Different symbols on reels 31 are stopped and displayed in a display window 18.

When the "minor prize C1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), the symbol is different from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor prize 03", and On the left reel 31, "Replay A" or "Replay B", which is a symbol arranged in "PB=1" in total of two symbols, is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, it is possible to prevent "Replay A" or "Replay B" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent the "bell" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line. It is possible to prevent "Small win 03" from winning.

In addition, at the first stop on the left when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left when the "small role B1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, And at the second stop on the left after the middle first stop when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, "Cherry A" on the left reel 31 is not stopped and displayed in the display window 18, and the left reel 31 is "Cherry B" is also not stopped and displayed within the display window 18. Furthermore, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, "Cherry A" on the left reel 31 is not stopped and displayed in the display window 18 even at the second stop on the left after the middle first stop, and the left reel 31 is not stopped and displayed. "Cherry B" is also not stopped and displayed within the display window 18. Thereby, it is possible to prevent players from having excessive expectations.

(2) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the middle line is an effective line, but the effective line is not limited to the middle line, and the number of effective lines is not limited to "1".
For example, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the upper line can be set as a valid line, and the other lines can be set as invalid lines.
Further, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 01" can be "bell" - "replay" - "cherry". In this case, when winning "Small Win 01", "Bell" - "Replay" - "Cherry" are stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line), and the line descending to the right (invalid line) is displayed as shown in Figure 30 (1). ), "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" is stopped and displayed, so it is possible to make the stopped number the same as when winning "Small win 01" in the first embodiment.

Similarly, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 02" can be "bell" - "bell" - "bell". In this case, when "Small win 02" is won, "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line) as shown in FIG. 30 (2), so in the first embodiment It is possible to make the stopping number the same as when winning "Small win 02".
Further, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor winning combination 03" can be "watermelon"-"replay"-"watermelon". In this case, when winning "Small Win 03", "Watermelon" - "Replay" - "Watermelon" are stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line) and the middle line (invalid line) as shown in Figure 30 (3). Since "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" is displayed in a stopped state, the stopped numbers can be the same as in the first embodiment when "Small win 03" is won.

Furthermore, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 04" can be "cherry" - "replay" - "bell". In this case, when winning "Small Win 04", "Cherry" - "Replay" - "Bell" are stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line), and the line rising to the right (invalid line) is displayed as shown in Figure 31 (1). ), "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" is stopped and displayed, so the number of stops can be the same as when winning "Small win 04" in the first embodiment.
Furthermore, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor combination 05" can be "cherry"-"replay"-"cherry". In this case, when winning "Small win 05", "Cherry" - "Replay" - "Cherry" will be stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line), and the small mountain line (invalid line), as shown in Figure 31 (2). Since "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" is displayed in a stopped state, the stopped number can be the same as that when winning "Small win 05" in the first embodiment.

Further, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 06" can be "cherry"-"watermelon"-"cherry". In this case, when winning "Small Win 06", "Cherry" - "Watermelon" - "Cherry" are stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line) and the lower line (invalid line) as shown in Figure 31 (3). Since "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" is displayed in a stopped state, the stopped numbers can be the same as in the first embodiment when "Small win 06" is won.

Further, for example, the lower line can be made an effective line, or the downward-sloping line can be made an effective line.
Furthermore, for example, "5" lines, including an upper line, a middle line, a lower line, a rising right line, and a falling right line, can be used as valid lines.

(3) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, "3" reels 31, that is, the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31, are provided, but the number of reels 31 is not limited to "3". .
For example, "4" reels 31, ie, the first reel 31, the second reel 31, the third reel 31, and the fourth reel 31, may be provided side by side. In this case, "4" stop switches 42 from the first stop switch 42 to the fourth stop switch 42 can be provided corresponding to the "4" reels 31, respectively.

(4) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the number of coins to be paid out for the minor prize that will be won when the press order is correct when the "small prize A1 condition device" to "small prize F2 condition device" is activated is set to "10". However, the number of sheets is not limited to this, and for example, the number of sheets may be "8" or "15".
(5) In the first and second embodiments, the payout number of minor prizes that can be won when the press order is incorrect when the "small prize A1 condition device" to "small prize F2 condition device" is activated is set to "1". However, the number is not limited to this, and for example, the number may be "2" or "3".

(6) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, there are 12 condition devices from “Small win A1 condition device” to “Small win F2 condition device” that give an advantage/disadvantage to the game result depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. Although the types are provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be six types, for example, "Small win A condition device" to "Small win F condition device."
(7) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 when the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" is activated is "left middle right", "left middle right", Six choices were made: "center left and right,""center right left,""center right left," and "center right left."'', ``first stop is on the right, second and third stops are optional'', and ``first stop is on the right, second and third stops are optional''.

(8) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. By setting the winning probabilities of the conditional device) to ``2500/65536'', the winning probability of ``Small Win 01'' in non-inside and inside was set to ``5000/65536''.
Similarly, by setting the winning probabilities of winning numbers "3" (small role B1 condition device) to winning numbers "12" (small role F2 condition device) in non-internal and internal conditions to ``2500/65536,'' respectively. , the winning probabilities of "Small Winning 02" to "Small Winning 06" in non-inside and inside were set to "5000/65536", respectively.
In addition, by setting the winning probability of winning number "17" (small win ALL condition device) during the special game to "5001/65536", winning of "small win 01" to "small win 06" during the special game is possible. The probabilities were set to ``5001/65536''.

However, the winning probability of each small role during the special game can be set to be higher than the winning probability of each small role during non-internal and internal. ), that is, the winning probability of "minor prize 01" to "minor prize 06" during the special game, may be set to, for example, "5000/65536."

(9) In the first and second embodiments, when the push order bell is won (when the "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" are activated), the correct press order is "left center right", " There are 6 choices: ``Left/Middle'', ``Middle Left/Right'', ``Middle Right Left'', ``Right Left Middle'', and ``Right Middle Left'', and each correct answer will have a different high-eye bell for each press order. The winning combinations (in the above embodiment, "minor winnings 01" to "minor winnings 06") are made to win.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, there may be three types of high-order bells, "small winning combination 01" to "small winning combination 03". Then, when the press order is correct when the "Small role A1 condition device", "Small role A2 condition device", "Small role B1 condition device" and "Small role B2 condition device" are activated ("Left center right" or "Left center right" ”), “Small win 01” may be awarded. Similarly, when the press order is correct when the "Small role C1 condition device", "Small role C2 condition device", "Small role D1 condition device" and "Small role D2 condition device" are activated ("Middle left and right" or "Middle right left" ”), “Small win 02” may be awarded. In addition, when the press order is correct when the "Small role E1 condition device", "Small role E2 condition device", "Small role F1 condition device", and "Small role F2 condition device" are activated ("Right left center" or "Right center left ”), “Small win 03” may be awarded.

In this case, it is only necessary to set the winning probability of each small role during the special game to be higher than the winning probability of each small role during non-internal and internal. When the winning probability of winning number "12" (small role F2 condition device) to winning number "12" (small role F2 condition device) is set to "2500/65536", winning number "17" (small role ALL condition device) during the special game The probability of winning can be set to, for example, "10000/65536."

(10) In the first and second embodiments, when the push order bell is won (when the "Small win A1 condition device" to "Small win F2 condition device" are activated), the correct press order is "left center right", " Six choices were made: "center left and right," "center left and right," "center right left," "center right left," and "center right left." "The third stop is optional" (left --), "The first stop is on the right, the second and third stops are optional" (middle --), "The first stop is on the right, and the second and third stops are optional." ” (right--).

In this case, the pressing order of the bells is ``left correct bell condition device'' where ``left --'' is the correct answer pressing order, ``middle correct answer bell condition device'' where ``middle --'' is the correct answer pressing order, and ``right --''. It is possible to provide three types of ``right correct answer bell condition devices'' in which the correct answer is pressed in the order of pressing.
If the pressing order is correct when the "left correct bell condition device" is activated, "minor prize 01" will be won, and if the pressing order is correct when the "medium correct bell condition device" is activated, "minor prize 02" will be won, and "the right When the pressing order is correct when the "Correct Answer Bell Condition Device" is activated, "Small Win 03" may be won.
In this case, the winning probability of the winning numbers corresponding to the "left correct bell condition device", "medium correct bell condition device" and "right correct bell condition device" in non-internal and internal conditions is set to "5000/65536", respectively. In this case, the winning probability of the winning number corresponding to the "small win ALL condition device" during the special game can be set to, for example, "5000/65536".

(11) In the first and second embodiments, a slot machine was used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to, for example, a casino machine or an enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine).
Here, the enclosed game machine (medalless game machine) can eliminate the medal payout device (a unit including the hopper 35, the hopper motor 36, and the payout sensor 37), for example. Further, the medal slot 43 and the medal selector can also be made unnecessary. Then, all the electronic medals (electronic game media) awarded by winning combinations are stored in the stored number display LED 76. In this case, it is conceivable that the storage number display LED 76 is composed of, for example, five digits (a maximum of "99,999" electronic medals can be stored).

<Third embodiment>
The third embodiment includes a power switch 11, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153.
Further, the door switch 17, the setting key switch 152, and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51.

The power switch 11 is a switch operated to turn on/off the power.
In the following description, turning on the power switch 11 is sometimes referred to as "turning on the power,""turning on the power," or "resuming the supply of power."
Furthermore, turning off the power switch 11 is sometimes referred to as "turning off the power" or "cutting off the supply of power."

The door switch 17 is a switch that detects opening of the front door 12 and is attached to the cabinet 13 or the front door 12.
The front door 12 is normally closed, but is opened, for example, when power is turned on, when settings are changed, when settings are confirmed, when an error occurs, when medals are replenished, etc.

When the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off, and when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on. Thereby, opening of the front door 12 can be detected.
Note that by setting the door switch 17 to be turned on when the front door 12 is closed and turned off when the front door 12 is open, the front door 12 can be turned off. The opening may be detected.

The setting key switch 152 is in a setting change state (also referred to as "setting change mode" or "setting changing") in which setting values can be changed, or in a setting confirmation state ("setting confirmation mode") in which setting values cannot be changed but can be confirmed. (Also referred to as "setting confirmation in progress").
By inserting the setting key from the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 is turned on (also referred to as the "first mode"), and from this state, the setting key cannot be pressed. The setting key switch 152 is set to be turned off (also referred to as "second mode") by rotating it 90 degrees counterclockwise.

The setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that also serves as the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153.
The setting change switch 153 is a switch operated when changing a set value in a setting change state.
Further, the reset switch 153 is a switch that is operated to return to the state before the error occurred (cancel the error state) after removing the error that has occurred.
Furthermore, the RWM clear switch 153 is a switch operated when initializing (clearing) a predetermined storage area in the RWM 53.

In the following explanation, there will be cases where it will be referred to as the “setting change (reset) switch 153,” “setting change switch 153,” “reset switch 153,” and “RWM clear switch 153.” has.
In addition, when various switches such as the setting key switch 152 and the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153 are in the on state, it is referred to as "being operated", and when in the off state, it is referred to as "being operated". There are cases where it is referred to as "not being carried out".
Note that in this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, reset switch 153, and RWM clear switch 153 are integrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 153, reset switch 153, and RWM clear switch 153 may be provided separately. You can.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the "gaming section" includes a "normal section" and an "advantageous section."
The "normal section" is a game section in which it is prohibited to send signals related to the instruction function to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-control board 80), and it does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (instruction function (does not operate) is the gaming section. That is, the normal section is a game section in which the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 is not notified. Note that the normal section is sometimes referred to as a "non-advantageous section."
The "advantageous section" is a game section that has performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated). That is, the advantageous section is a game section in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (for example, the order in which the correct answer is pressed) can be notified.

Furthermore, the third embodiment includes an advantageous section display LED 77 that can display to the player that it is an advantageous section. In the normal section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, and in the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. That is, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is off, it indicates that it is a normal section, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, it indicates that it is an advantageous section. In this manner, in the third embodiment, the display mode of the advantageous section display LED 77 (lights off or on) and the game section (normal section or advantageous section) correspond in a one-to-one relationship.
For example, as shown in FIG. 31, the segment P of digit 4a of the acquisition number display LED 78 can be used as the advantageous section display LED 77. Further, an advantageous section display LED 77 may be provided separately from the acquisition number display LED 78.

Note that even when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on immediately, but after the transition to the advantageous section, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 is (When starting the notification), the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on. In this case, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, it indicates an advantageous section, but when the advantageous section display LED 77 is off, there are two cases: a normal section and an advantageous section.

FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating the configurations of the main CPU 55, ROM 54, and RWM 53 in the third embodiment.
A main CPU 55, an RWM 53, and a ROM 54 are provided on the main control board 50.
Further, as shown in FIG. 32, a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "chip") is mounted on the main control board 50, and a main CPU 55 is provided within this chip. Furthermore, the main CPU 55 has a built-in memory, and this built-in memory includes a (built-in) ROM 54 and a (built-in) RWM 53. Furthermore, the addresses of the ROM 54 and RWM 53 are continuous.

The storage area of the ROM 54 has a used area and an outside area, and the used area and the outside area each have a control area and a data area.
Here, the "use area" is a storage area in which information related to the progress of the game is stored.
Further, the "control area" is a storage area in which various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored, and is also referred to as a "program area."
Furthermore, the "data area" is a storage area in which information other than the program is stored, and is a storage area in which data used when executing the program is stored.

Furthermore, the "outside use area" is a storage area in which information not related to the progress of the game is stored, such as a program for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74, which will be described later, a program used during testing, and This is a storage area where programs for preventing fraud are stored.
Furthermore, the "outside of the used area" includes a control area and a data area, similar to the used area. The control area of the used area is sometimes referred to as a "first control area" or "first program area," and the control area outside the used area is sometimes referred to as a "second control area" or "second program area."
Furthermore, the program stored in the control area (first control area, first program area) of the used area is referred to as the "first program", and the program stored in the control area (second control area, second program area) outside the used area is referred to as the "first program". The program stored in the second program may also be referred to as the "second program."

While the program (first program) stored in the control area of the used area of the ROM 54 is being executed, reference (access) to data stored in the data area of the used area of the ROM 54 is permitted, while the used area of the ROM 54 is Reference to data stored in external data areas is prohibited.
Similarly, while the program (second program) stored in the control area outside the used area of the ROM 54 is being executed, reference to the data stored in the data area outside the used area of the ROM 54 is permitted, but the Reference to data stored in the data area of the used area is prohibited.

Like the ROM 54, the storage area of the RWM 53 has a used area and an outside area, and the used area and the outside area each have a work area and a stack area.
As shown in FIG. 32, addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" are used areas, addresses "F200(H)" to "F20F(H)" are unused areas, and addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" are outside the usage area.

While the program (first program) stored in the control area of the used area of the ROM 54 is being executed, reference (access) and rewriting (overwriting) of data stored in the used area of the RWM 53 are permitted. However, data stored outside the used area of the RWM 53 is allowed to be referenced but not rewritten.
Similarly, while the program (second program) stored in the control area outside the used area of the ROM 54 is being executed, reference and rewriting of data stored outside the used area of the RWM 53 is permitted. , the data in the used area of the RWM 53 is allowed to be referenced but not rewritten. This is to prevent the processing from becoming complicated.

In addition, in order to prevent data in the used area of the RWM 53 from being rewritten (overwritten) due to program runaway while a program (second program) outside the used area is being executed, the used area of the RWM 53 is An unused area is provided between the area and the outside area.
Furthermore, if an interrupt process occurs while a program (second program) outside the used area is being executed, the data in the used area of the RWM53 may be rewritten (overwritten) by the interrupt process. While the (second program) is being executed, interrupt processing is prohibited.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the ROM 54 has a program management area and the like as other areas in addition to the used area and the outside area.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 32, the RWM 53 has an unused area and the like in addition to the used area and the unused area.

Further, among the storage areas of the entire built-in memory, areas other than the ROM 54 and RWM 53 include a built-in register area, an unused area, and the like.
Further, the built-in register area is provided with, for example, A register to L register, a transmission register, and the like.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored in the used area of the RWM 53 in the third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 32, the address of the used area is set in the range of "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)".
Note that the data shown in FIG. 33 is for use in explaining the third embodiment, and the data stored in the used area of the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

Address “F000(H)” is a storage area for setting value data (_NB_RANK). When the set value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the set value data. In this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6". Therefore, any value from "0(H)" to "5(H)" is stored as the set value data.
Then, "N", which is obtained by adding "1" to the set value data, is displayed as the set value on the set value display LED 73.

Address “F001(H)” is a 1-byte storage area where setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is stored. When the set value is "N", "N-1" is stored in the address "F000(H)" as the set value data (_NB_RANK). Then, "N" obtained by adding "1" to the setting value data (_NB_RANK) is stored at the address "F001(H)" as the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP).

In this embodiment, the set values are "1" to "6", and the address "F000(H)" has set value data (_NB_RANK) of "0(D)" to "5(D)". Any value from "1(D)" to "6(D)" is stored in address "F001(H)" as set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP), and , the value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 as the setting value.

Address “F010(H)” is a storage area for credit number data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit number data is data to be displayed on the credit number display LED 76. In this embodiment, any value from "0" to "50 (D)" is stored as the credit number data.
Here, in this embodiment, a value obtained by converting the number of credits into a decimal number is stored as the number of credits data. For example, when the number of credits to be displayed is "29", the value "29 (H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001(B)" is stored in address "F010(H)". As a result, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of address "F010(H)" are data for displaying the lower digit of the number of credits ("9" in this example), and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are data for displaying the lower digit of the number of credits ("9" in this example). , is data for displaying the upper digit of the number of credits (“2” in this example). Note that in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of credits is "50 (D)", so the stored data values are in the range of "0" to "50".
In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 that stores the credit number data itself is not provided, but the credit number data is provided as display data of the credit number display LED 76.

Address “F011(H)” is a storage area for acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT). The acquisition number data is data to be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In the acquisition number data, similarly to the credit number data described above, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digits, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are data for displaying the upper digits. It is data.
In this embodiment, when a small winning combination is won, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning small winning combination is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, so the payout number data corresponding to the winning small winning combination is stored as the winning number data. Specifically, when a small winning combination is won and medals are paid out, the acquired number data is added as the medals are paid out, and the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when "1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data, "01" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Here, in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F040 (H)" which will be described later, "8 (H)" is stored, for example, when an 8-card winning combination is won, and the payout number data is stored in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at the time of medal payout ( (including addition to credit) is decremented by "1" in the order of "8" → "7" → ... → "0" according to the number of payouts.
On the other hand, the acquired number data stored in the address "F011 (H)" is, for example, when an 8-card winning combination is won, "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "8"``1'' is added each time one medal is paid out. Therefore, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 also counts up in the order of "0" → "1" → "2" → . . . → "8".

Further, in this embodiment, "88" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 while changing the settings. Therefore, during the setting change, display data for displaying "88" as the acquisition number data is stored during the setting change. By displaying "88" on the acquisition number display LED 78, it is possible to identify from the front side of the gaming machine that the settings are being changed. Furthermore, by lighting "88" and all segments, it is possible to confirm that there are no segment defects (that there are no segments that cannot be lit).
The upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out is 15, so when "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it can be understood that this is not a display of the number of medals to be paid out.

Furthermore, when the condition for instructing the specified number (the number of medals to be bet in this game) is met, the number of medals acquired is The specified number is instructed (displayed, notified) on the display LED 78.
In this embodiment, "0A" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 to indicate the specified number "2". Therefore, when specifying the specified number, specified specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as the acquired number data.

Further, when winning a push order bell or the like during AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78. Therefore, when displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data.
For example, when displaying the push order instruction information in a game in which the winning number "3" is won, the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Further, when a predetermined error occurs, an error number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Therefore, when a predetermined error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as acquisition number data.
For example, when the error number to be displayed is "HP", error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as acquisition number data.

Address "F030(H)" is a storage area for the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION). The operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining whether or not replay and accessories are activated.
For example, when 1BB is in operation, the D2 bit of the operating state flag is set to "1". Further, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the D0 bit of the operation state flag is set to "1".

Address “F040(H)” is a storage area for payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). The payout number data is data that indicates a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined. When a small winning combination is won, payout number data corresponding to the winning small winning combination is stored, and a medal payout process is executed. Here, each time one medal is paid out (adding "1" to the number of credits, or actually paying out one medal (from the hopper 35)), the payout number data is subtracted by "1". That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. As a result, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0".

The address "F041 (H)" is the storage area of the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Similar to the payout number data, the payout number data buffer becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined. Here, unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not subtracted every time one medal is paid out, and the initially stored value is maintained. Then, that value is maintained until the medal payout number update process for the next game. For example, when a small winning combination of 8 pieces is won in the game, "8 (H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and in the next game, when no winning combination is won, as the payout number data buffer. "0" is overwritten.

Address “F042(H)” is a storage area for automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals that are automatically bet when winning a replay prize, and in this embodiment, "2" or "3" is stored.
Address “F043(H)” is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is stored.

Address "F044(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which status display LED lighting data is stored.
As shown in FIG. 36A, which will be described later, in the third embodiment, on the display board 75, the status display LEDs 79 include a 1 bet display LED 79a, a 2 bet display LED 79b, a 3 bet display LED 79c, a game start display LED 79d, and a game start display LED 79d. It includes six LEDs: a display LED 79e and a replay display LED 79f.
The status display LED lighting data is data indicating whether or not to light up three of the six LEDs: the game start display LED 79d, the input display LED 79e, and the replay display LED 79f.

As shown in FIG. 33, the D0 bit of the status display LED lighting data is assigned to the game start display LED 79d, the D1 bit is assigned to the input display LED 79e, and the D2 bit is assigned to the replay display LED 79f. There is. Each bit of this status display LED lighting data matches each bit of the LED display counter 1 of FIG. 40(A), which will be described later.
Then, "1" is set in the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned on, and "0" is set in the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off.
For example, when the game start display LED 79d is turned on and the input display LED 79e and replay display LED 79f are turned off, "00000001 (B)" is stored as the status display LED lighting data.

Address “F051(H)” is a 1-byte storage area where LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is stored.
The LED display counter 1 is a counter for determining which digit among digits 1 to 5 is to be lit, and is continuously updated every interrupt.
Here, "digit" means a display unit (display), and in this embodiment, it is composed of one 7-segment display. Among the digits of this embodiment, digit 1 corresponds to the upper digit of the credit number (storage number) display LED 76, and digit 2 corresponds to the lower digit of the credit number display LED 76. Furthermore, digit 3 corresponds to the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78, digit 4 corresponds to the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78, and digit 5 corresponds to the setting value display LED 73.
Further, each bit of the LED display counter 1 is assigned to the D0 bit as a digit 1 signal, the D1 bit as a digit 2 signal, . . . , the D4 bit as a digit 5 signal. In the first interrupt processing, dynamic lighting of digits 1 to 5 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" in the LED display counter 1 is lit.

In the third embodiment, the LED display counter 1 takes a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter 1 is updated so that the bit "1" of the LED display counter 1 is shifted to the right by one digit as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" to... (for each interrupt). . In addition, at the next interrupt after interrupt "5", the LED display counter 1 is shifted to the right by one digit and becomes "00000000 (B)". Set counter 1 to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter 1 repeats the values of "5" → "4" → . . . → "1" → "5" → "4" → . . . for each interrupt process. That is, five interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the value of LED display counter 1 is
"N" interrupt number: 00010000 (B)
“N+1” interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
“N+3” interrupt: 00000010 (B)
“N+4” interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
“N+6” interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
becomes.

In the third embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 1 to 5 are dynamically lit. Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", a digit 5 signal is output. Then, by outputting the digit 5 signal, digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) can be lit (digits 1 to 4 are turned off). At the time of the next interrupt processing, the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)", outputs the digit 4 signal, and indicates that digit 4 (lower digit of acquisition number display LED DD78) can be lit (digits 1 to 3 and 5 are off). Become.

Address "F052(H)" is a storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag takes a value corresponding to normal mode, setting change, or setting confirmation.
In the third embodiment, during normal operation, digits 1 to 4 are lit and digit 5 is not lit, so it takes the value "00001111 (B)". Furthermore, while changing settings and confirming settings, digit 5 is lit and digits 1 to 4 are not lit, so the value is "00010000 (B)".

Address "F061 (H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous section type flag is a flag indicating whether the current game section is a normal section or an advantageous section.
The advantageous section type flag stores "00000000 (B)" when the section is a normal section, and the D0 bit becomes "1" when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section.
Note that the timing at which the advantageous section type flag is updated will be described later.

Address "F062(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous section display LED flag is a flag indicating whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, the advantageous section display LED flag becomes "0", and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the advantageous section display LED flag becomes "1".
Note that the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at any time after the transition to the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at the same time as the transition to the advantageous section).

On the other hand, even after shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not need to be turned on.
Specifically, firstly, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on at the time of transition to the advantageous section, but may be turned on afterwards (during the advantageous section).
Second, when transitioning to an advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on, and if the end condition of the advantageous section is met before the conditions for turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 are met, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even once. You may end the advantageous section without turning on the light.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when operating the instruction function (notifying the correct pressing order) in a gaming state where it is an advantageous section and the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1", the advantageous section is displayed. Turn on LED 77.
Furthermore, once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, it remains lit during the advantageous section.
Further, during the game end check process in the final game of the advantageous section, a process for turning off the advantageous section display LED 77 is executed. Specifically, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the process of initializing the advantageous section display LED flag storage area (the process of clearing the advantageous section display LED flag) is executed. As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt processing.

Furthermore, the lighting timing when lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 in a game that activates the instruction function is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the reel 31 starts rotating; until the rotation reaches a constant speed state).
However, it is not limited to this, and other lighting timings include, for example,
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the stop switch 42 can be operated,
3) When at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is rotating,
4) When all reels 31 are stopped,
5) After all the reels 31 have stopped (the game has ended), but before the payment switch 43 can be operated before the start of the next game.

However, when lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 in a game that activates the instruction function, the winning combination for the game must have been determined, so the period before the start switch 41 is operated (before the winning combination lottery) is excluded. .
When lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 in a game in which the instruction function is activated, the start switch 41 is operated and the winning combination is drawn. The timing at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before reaching the constant speed state is the shortest timing.

Address "F063 (H)" is the storage area of the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous section clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of games played during the advantageous section. The advantageous section clear counter is "0" during the normal section, and is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value when transitioning to the advantageous section. Further, the advantageous section clear counter is set to be decremented by "1" per game not only during the advantageous section but also during the normal section. However, the minimum value is "0". For this reason, in the normal section, when the advantageous section clear counter (before subtraction) is "0", a counter is used in which even if "1" is subtracted, the value after the subtraction becomes "0". Therefore, during the normal period, "1" is subtracted for each game, but "0" is maintained. In other words, when "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section (non-advantageous section).

Further, when the game moves to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value, so in the next game, the advantageous section clear counter becomes "1499 (D)".
Note that the advantageous section clear counter stores an initial value of "1500 (D)" at most, so it is composed of 2 bytes. In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is an advantageous section.

Address "F065(H)" is the storage area of the difference counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets during the advantageous section, and is also referred to as "MY counter".
The difference counter does not simply store the cumulative value of the difference number itself, but stores "a value corresponding to" the cumulative value of the difference number. For example, when the difference in the number of sheets becomes a value corresponding to a minus value, that value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, "accumulated value of difference number of sheets ≠ difference number counter value".
The difference counter is an increment counter for determining whether the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets in the advantageous section exceeds "2400 (D)". Therefore, the difference counter is composed of a 2-byte storage area.

It is sufficient for the difference number counter to count at least the cumulative value of the number of difference sheets during the advantageous section, and there is no need to count during the non-advantageous section (normal section).
Here, when updating the difference counter value on the condition that the game is in an advantageous section, it is necessary to perform a process of determining whether or not the game is in an advantageous section every game. Therefore, in this embodiment, the difference counter value is updated including during the non-advantageous section (normal section). In this way, the difference counter value can be updated every game without determining whether the game is in an advantageous section or not, so the processing can be simplified.

Furthermore, even when the difference number of coins becomes negative in the current game and the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of coins becomes data of a carry-down, the difference number counter value is updated. However, if the difference counter value is negative data as a result of the calculation, the difference counter value is corrected to "0".

To give a specific example, (the difference counter value at the start of the first game is "0 (H)"),
1st game: When the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD (H)", and the difference counter after correction is "0 (H)"
2nd game: Number of bets “3”, number of payouts “9”, difference counter after calculation “0006 (H)” (no correction)
3rd game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "0003 (H)" (no correction)
4th game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "1", difference counter after calculation "0001 (H)" (no correction)
5th game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "FFFE (H)", difference counter after correction "0 (H)"
will be updated as follows.
In addition, even if the difference counter of the previous game is "0 (H)" and the difference counter of the current game is "0 (H)", the difference counter value that reflects the number of differences of the game concerned will be changed again. Since this is a calculated result, this case also corresponds to "updating" the difference counter.

As described above, when the difference counter value after the calculation is a value with a digit drop, the difference counter value is corrected to "0" (the initial value "0" is set). Note that a method for determining whether a downgrade has occurred will be described later.
By updating the difference counter value in this way, for example, when the number of payouts is larger than the number of bets, that is, when the difference number is increasing, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example in a game during the normal period, the difference counter value will increase by the number of payouts when there is a payout based on winning a small role, but after that, the number of payouts will increase. If it becomes less than the number of bets, it will eventually become "0".

Address “F067(H)” is a storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not AT is in progress, and is set to "0" during non-AT, and set to "1" during AT. The timing at which the AT flag is set to "1" is when the AT lottery is won, and is executed in step S364 in FIG. 46, which will be described later. Further, the AT flag is turned off at the end of the final AT game, and is executed, for example, in a game end check process (step S415 in FIG. 50) to be described later. Furthermore, the data that is cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous section includes an AT flag.

Address "F068(H)" is the storage area of the AT game number counter (_CT_ART). The AT game number counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of games played during AT (including ART). Unlike the advantageous section clear counter, when the AT game number counter reaches "0", subsequent counting (subtraction) is stopped.
The AT game count counter is updated (subtracted) during AT after the start switch 41 is operated (step S281 in FIG. 46) during the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed "255 (D)", the AT game number counter is composed of a 2-byte counter. When the maximum number of AT games is "255 (D)" or less, the AT game number counter may be configured from a 1-byte counter.
When starting AT (or when transitioning to AT preparation), an initial value is set in the AT game counter. The initial value may be a fixed value, or may be determined by lottery or the like when AT is won. Furthermore, after the initial value is determined, the number of AT games may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, the number of AT games may be added when a predetermined condition is met during AT, and the number of AT games may be increased when the player wins an additional lottery. In this case, the increased amount is added to the AT game counter.
This AT game count counter is also included in the data that is cleared at the end of the advantageous section.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the number-of-games management type AT is illustrated, an AT game number counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of the difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided in place of the AT game number counter. Then, at the start of AT, an initial value of the difference number of sheets that can be acquired is set. In addition, if you win an additional prize, the difference in the number of additional tickets will be added. Then, each time there is a payout, the difference number of coins for the game is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT ends.

The 48-byte storage area at addresses "F1D0(H)" to "F1FF(H)" is a stack area of the used area.

Here, the management information display LED 74 is also called a "rotation ratio monitor" or a "ratio display", and is composed of four LEDs (digits 6 to 9 in order from the left side).
Furthermore, among the four LEDs that make up the management information display LED 74, the two LEDs on the left (digits 6 and 7) are also called "identification segments" and are used to display the type of information. The two LEDs on the right (digits 8 and 9) are also called "ratio segments" and are used to display the calculated ratio.

Furthermore,
Digit 6: Upper digit of the identification segment Digit 7: Lower digit of the identification segment Digit 8: Upper digit of the ratio segment Digit 9: Sometimes referred to as the lower digit of the ratio segment.

In the third embodiment, the management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the following six items of information 1) to 6) as management information at predetermined time intervals.
1) Ratio of accessories including instructions (cumulative total) (7 pages)
2) Continuous role ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Accessory ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Continuous role ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Accessory ratio (cumulative total) (7A.)
6) Condition ratio of accessories, etc. (cumulative total) (5H.)

For example, when displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative total), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the accessory ratio (cumulative total) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed. Display in the ratio segment.
Here, the "cumulative total" refers to the total sum of numerical values that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, counting is continued until the number of games has reached at least "175,000".
When the cumulative total is less than ``175,000'' number of games, the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment, for example, by blinking display, and when it is more than ``175,000'' number of games, the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment, for example, by lighting display.
Even after the total number of games exceeds "175,000", the total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
Furthermore, "6000 games" is the total number of games played for 15 sets, where one set is "400" times.

The "instruction-inclusive accessory ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
In addition, in a slot machine that is not equipped with an accessory, the "instruction included accessory ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
Further, the sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated is counted by the instruction-included accessory counter.

Regarding the "number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function was activated," for example, when a 15-card winning combination is won based on the stop switch 42 being operated in the displayed pressing order in the game in which the instruction function is activated. adds the payout number "15" to the instruction-included accessory counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.
For example, in a game where the minor winning combination condition device A1 to minor winning combination A6 condition device were activated during a 1BB game and the instruction function was activated (the correct answer pressing order (the pressing order in which 15 winning combinations were won) was displayed), the displayed When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order (correct answer pressing order) and a 15-card winning combination (any of the small winning combinations 01 to 06) is won, the payout is made to the instruction-included winning item counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter. Add the number of sheets “15”.

On the other hand, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different push order than the displayed push order, for example, when a 3-card winning combination is won, the instruction-included accessory counter and the total payout ( Cumulative total) Add the payout number "3" to the counter.
For example, in a game where the minor winning condition device A1 to minor winning combination A6 condition device were activated during a 1BB game and the instruction function was activated (the correct pressing order was displayed), the pressing order different from the displayed pressing order (incorrect pressing When the stop switch 42 is operated in the order (order), and a 3-card winning combination (any of the small winnings 13 to 24) is won, the number of payouts "3" is displayed on the instruction-included winnings counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter. ” is added.

In addition, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different push order from the displayed push order, and the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won), the instruction-included role counter and The total payout (cumulative total) counter has the same value as the previous game.
For example, when the stop switch 42 is operated in an incorrect pressing order, the winning combination is configured to be non-winning (none of the winning combinations is winning). During the 1BB game, the small winning combination condition device A1 to the small winning combination A6 condition device were activated and the instruction function was activated (the correct pressing order was displayed). When the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) because the stop switch 42 is operated in the previous game, the values of the designated combination counter and the total payout (accumulation) counter will be the same as the previous game. .

In addition, in this embodiment, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different push order from the displayed push order and a winning combination is missed, the instruction-included role counter and the total payout are By executing the process of adding the payout number "0" to the (cumulative) counter, the values of both counters are made to be the same value as the previous game.
When a winning combination is missed, the process of adding up the number of paid-out coins may be skipped, but in this case, before the process of adding up the number of paid-out coins, a process is included to determine whether or not a winning combination has been missed, and it is determined that the winning combination has been missed. In this case, it is necessary to configure the program to skip the process of adding up the number of coins to be paid out, which increases the usage of the ROM 54 and increases the processing load on the main CPU 55.
Therefore, in this embodiment, when a winning combination is missed, a process of adding the payout number "0" to both counters is executed. As a result, the values of both counters can be set to the same values as in the previous game without including the process of determining whether or not a winning combination has been missed, so the usage of the ROM 54 can be reduced, and the processing of the main CPU 55 can be reduced. The burden can also be reduced.

"Continuous accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the first type special accessory (RB) is activated to the total number of payouts.
For example, if the total number of payouts in the number of games played is ``6000'' is ``2000 pieces'', and the number of payouts when the ``Class 1 special bonus (RB)'' is activated is ``500 pieces'', then The ratio (6000 games) is 25 (%).

The "accessory object ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated to the total number of payouts.
Here, the term "accessory object" refers to the above-mentioned first-class special accessory (RB), second-class special accessory (CB), and MB (also referred to as 2BB). Device. CB (continuous operation), SB (single bonus) are included.

The "accessory object status ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of games when the accessory is activated and the number of games when the accessory continuous operation device is activated by the total number of games.
Further, the sum of the number of games played when the accessory is activated and the number of games played when the accessory continuous operation device is activated is counted by the accessory status counter.
In addition, in the above six items, if a gaming machine is not equipped with a function corresponding to that item, the ratio segment is displayed as "--" by lighting up.
For example, if "RB (Class 1 special accessory)" is not provided, there is no continuous accessory ratio, so when displaying ratio display numbers "2" and "4", the ratio segment is set to "--" ” is displayed.

According to the regulations, the ratio of designated accessories should be set to less than 70%, the ratio of accessories should be set to less than 70%, the ratio of continuous accessories should be set to less than 60%, and the ratio of accessories, etc. status should be set to less than 50%. There is.
By looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information is within the legal range.

Further, in order to enable equipment external to the slot machine 10, such as the hall computer 200, to grasp various ratio information, the various ratio information may be configured to be outputtable as an external signal.
For example, the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio data, continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) data, accessory ratio (cumulative) data, and accessory state ratio data displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) are used as external signals. It may be configured to be outputtable. At this time, a predetermined number of games (for example, "17,500 times" for continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) data and accessory ratio (cumulative) data, accessory ratio data including instructions, and accessory state ratio data (for example, "175,000 times"), predetermined information different from the current ratio information (for example, "FF (H)", etc.) is output as an external signal, and the predetermined number of games is played. If the conditions are met, various ratio information may be output as external signals.
Furthermore, advantageous section ratio data that is not displayed on the management information display LED 74 (rotation ratio monitor) may also be configured to be outputtable as an external signal. In this case, an advantageous section game count counter for counting the number of games played in the advantageous section and a storage area for advantageous section ratio data indicating the ratio of the number of games played in the advantageous section to the total number of games may be provided outside the usable area of the RWM 53.

34 and 35 are diagrams showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the used area of the RWM 53 in the third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 32, addresses outside the used area are set in the range of "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)".
Note that the data shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is for use in explaining the third embodiment, and the data stored outside the used area of the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

The 400 game counter at address "F210(H)" adds the number of games played every 400 games. This 400 game counter is a counter that cycles from "0" to "399 (D)" and is incremented by "1" every game. If "1" is added when the value of the 400 game counter is "399 (D)", the value of the 400 game counter becomes "0".

Note that, contrary to the above, "399 (D)" may be set as the initial value of the 400 game counter, and "1" may be subtracted every game. In this case, when the value of the 400 game counter becomes "0", it is determined that 400 games have been played. Then, when the value of the 400 game counter is "0", "1" is subtracted, and the initial value "399 (D)" is set in the 400 game counter.

The ring buffer number at address "F212(H)" is used to specify, when medals are paid out in the game, to which ring buffer the number of medals to be paid out is to be added.
Specifically, address "F212(H)" stores any one of "0" to "14(D)" as a ring buffer number.

Addresses “F213(H)” to “F230(H)” are storage areas of total payout ring buffers 0 to 14. The total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are composed of 15 ring buffers. Each total payout ring buffer consists of 2 bytes. For example, the total payout ring buffer 0 consists of addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", where the address "F213(H)" is the lower digit and the address "F214(H)" is the upper digit. In FIGS. 34 and 35, for storage areas with a number of bytes of "2" or more, the lowest address number is displayed.

One ring buffer stores the total number of coins paid out during 400 games. For example, the number of payouts for the 1st to 400th games is stored in addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", and the number of payouts for the next 401st to 800th games is stored at the address "F215(H)". H)” and “F216(H)”.
Here, whether or not the 400th game has been played is determined by referring to the 400 game counter at the address "F210(H)" mentioned above. Further, to which ring buffer value the number of medals paid out in the game is to be added (updated) is determined by referring to the ring buffer number of the address "F212(H)".

When the total number of payouts from the 1st game to the 400th game is stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 of addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", the total number of payouts from the 5601st game to the 6000th game is stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 of addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)". The number of payout coins is stored in the total payout ring buffer 14 at addresses "F22F(H)" and "F230(H)". Next, at the end of the 6000th game, the data stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 of addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)" is cleared, and the number of payouts for the 6001st to 6400th games is cleared. are stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)".

Note that the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 each consist of 2 bytes. If the maximum number of coins paid out in one game is "15", the maximum number of coins paid out during 400 games is 6000 coins, which can be stored with a storage capacity of 2 bytes.
This point is the same for successive accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14, which will be described later.

Further, addresses “F231(H)” to “F24E(H)” are storage areas of continuous accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14.
Furthermore, addresses "F24F(H)" to "F26C(H)" are storage areas of accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14.

The total number of games counter at addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)" is a counter that stores the number of games played (total), and is composed of 3 bytes. Since it is necessary to count "175,000 (D)" games as the total number of games played, the total number of games counter is made up of 3 bytes.
The total number of games counter continues counting even if the number of games exceeds "175,000 (D)" games, and stops counting when it reaches 3 bytes full ("FFFFFF(H)").

The instruction-included accessory counters at addresses “F270(H)” to “F272(H)” are counters that count the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in games where the instruction function is activated, It consists of 3 bytes.
The total payout (6000 times) counter at addresses "F273(H)" to "F275(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of medals paid out during 6000 games. Even if 15 medals are paid out for each game in 6000 games, the total will be 90000 medals, so it can be counted in 3 bytes (continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter and accessory medals described later). The same applies to the payout (6000 times) counter.)

The continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter at addresses "F276(H)" to "F278(H)" is a counter that counts the number of coins paid out when consecutive accessory objects are activated during 6000 games.
The accessory payout (6000 times) counter at addresses "F279(H)" to "F27B(H)" is a counter that counts the number of coins paid out when the accessory is activated during 6000 games.

Then, when there is a payout when the continuous accessory is not activated and the accessory is not activated, only the total payout (6000 times) counter is updated (added), and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter and the accessory payout counter are updated (added). (6000 times) The counter is not updated.
In addition, when there is a payout when the continuous accessory is not activated and the accessory is activated, the total payout (6000 times) counter and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter are updated, and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter is updated. is not updated.
Furthermore, when there is a payout during continuous accessory object operation, the total payout (6000 times) counter, the accessory payout (6000 times) counter, and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter are all updated.

The values of the total payout (6000 times) counter, the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter, and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter are updated every 400 games.
First of all, when there is a payout of medals from the first game to the 6000th game, the total payout (6000 times) will be determined depending on when the continuous accessory is activated/non-activated, and when the accessory is activated/non-activated. ) counter, continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter, and accessory payout (6000 times) counter.
At the end of the 6000th game, the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) and the accessory ratio (6000 times) are calculated. After this calculation, the number of payouts during the 400 games from before "400 x 15-1" games (5999 games) to before "400 x 15-400" games (5600 games) is calculated as follows: times) counter value, continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter value, and accessory payout (6000 times) counter value.

For example, when it is the 6000th game, the total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) value is subtracted from the total payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) value is cleared. Further, the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to the total payout ring buffer 0 and the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Similarly, when the 6000th game is played, the continuous accessory payout ring buffer 0 (F231 (H) to F232 (H)) value is subtracted from the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of the continuous accessory payout ring buffer 0 is cleared. Further, the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game when the continuous accessory is activated is added to the continuous accessory payout ring buffer 0 and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter.

Similarly, when the 6000th game is played, the value of the accessory payout ring buffer 0 (F24F(H) to F250(H)) is subtracted from the accessory payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of accessory payout ring buffer 0 is cleared. Further, the number of payouts when the accessory is activated from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to the accessory payout ring buffer 0 and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter.

To explain more specifically, for example, the total payout ring buffer stores the number of coins paid out during the following number of games.
Total payout ring buffer 0: “1” game to “400” game Total payout ring buffer 1: “401” game to “800” game Total payout ring buffer 2: “801” game to “1200” game Total payout ring buffer 3: "1201" game to "1600" game Total payout ring buffer 4: "1601" game to "2000" game Total payout ring buffer 5: "2001" game to "2400" Game total payout ring buffer 6: "2401" game to "2800" game Total payout ring buffer 7: "2801" game to "3200" game Total payout ring buffer 8: "3201" game to "3600" ” Game total payout ring buffer 9: “3601” game to “4000” game Total payout ring buffer 10: “4001” game to “4400” game Total payout ring buffer 11: “4401” game to “ 4800'' game total payout ring buffer 12: ``4801'' game ~ ``5200'' game total payout ring buffer 13: ``5201'' game ~ ``5600'' game Total payout ring buffer 14: ``5601'' game ~ "6000" game total payout (6000 times) counter: "1" game to "6000" game

Assuming that the 6000th game has been completed, all of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 store the number of coins paid out during each number of games.
Further, the value of the total payout (6000 times) counter and the sum of the values stored in the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 match.
Here, if the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this point is Σ1, and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 is Z1,
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ1-Z1
Execute the calculation.
Also,
Total payout ring buffer 0 = 0 (clear)
Execute the calculation.
In other words, the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0, which stores the number of payouts during the 400 games from before 5999 (400 x 15-1) games to before 5600 (400 x 15-400) games, is calculated as the total payout ( 6000 times) The process of subtracting from the value "Σ1" stored in the counter is executed.

Next, the process of clearing the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0, which stores the number of payouts during the 400 games from before 5999 (400 x 15-1) games to before 5600 (400 x 15-400) games. Execute.
After calculating in this way, the 6001st game is started. When there is a payout from the 6001st game to the 6400th game (here, it is assumed that the accessory did not operate from the 6001st game to the 6400th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 0, and, Total payout (6000 times) is added to the counter.

Next, assuming that the 6400th game has been completed, the total payout ring buffer stores the number of coins paid out during the following number of games.
Total payout ring buffer 0: “6001” game to “6400” game Total payout ring buffer 1: “401” game to “800” game:
Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game to "6000" game Total payout (6000 times) counter: "401" game to "6000" game, and "6001" game to "6400" game

Similarly to the above, if the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this point is Σ2, and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 1 is Z2, then
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ2-Z2
shall be.
and,
Total payout ring buffer 1 = 0
shall be.
After calculating in this way, the 6401st game is started. When there is a payout from the 6401st game to the 6800th game (here, it is assumed that the accessory did not operate from the 6401st game to the 6800th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 1, and, Total payout (6000 times) is added to the counter. Repeat the above process.

Further, although the total payout ring buffer and the total payout (6000 times) counter have been described, the same processing as above is performed when the accessory is activated or when the continuous accessory is activated.
Specifically, when the accessory is activated, the total payout ring buffer 0 to 14 is replaced with the accessory payout ring buffer 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the accessory payout (6000 times) counter. Execute processing. Note that when the accessory is activated, as described above, any of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and the total payout (6000 times) counter are also updated.

Similarly, when the continuous accessory is activated, the total payout ring buffer 0 to 14 is replaced with the continuous accessory payout ring buffer 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter. Execute the specified processing. In addition, during continuous accessory operation, any of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14, any of the accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14, the total payout (6000 times) counter, and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter. Updates will also be made.

The total payout (cumulative) counter at addresses "F27C(H)" to "F27E(H)" is a counter that counts the cumulative number of payouts, and counts the total number of payouts during at least "175,000 (D)" games. .
Similarly, the consecutive accessory payout (cumulative total) counters at addresses "F27F(H)" to "F281(H)" are counters that count the cumulative number of payouts during continuous accessory object activation, and similarly to the above, At least "175,000 (D)" The number of payouts when continuous accessory objects are activated during the game is counted.

Furthermore, similarly, the accessory payout (cumulative total) counters at addresses "F282(H)" to "F284(H)" are counters that count the cumulative number of payouts when the accessory is activated, and similarly to the above, at least "175,000 (D)" Counts the number of payouts when the accessory is activated during the game.
Note that the three types of payout (6000 times) counters mentioned above subtract the number of payouts from 5999 games ago to 5600 games ago every 400 games, but these three types of payout (cumulative) counters subtract the value. There's nothing to do.

Note that the three types of payout (cumulative) counters are composed of three bytes. For example, assuming that in 175,000 games, 15 coins were paid out for each game, the result would be "175,000×15=2,625,000", which is smaller than the value that can be stored in 3 bytes. Therefore, it can be stored with a storage capacity of 3 bytes.

The accessory state counters at addresses "F285(H)" to "F287(H)" are counters that count the total number of games played when the accessory is activated and the number of games played when the accessory continuous activation device is activated. Yes, it consists of 3 bytes.
The instruction-inclusive accessory ratio data of the address "F288 (H)" is the ratio of the total number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated, to the total number of payouts. This is a storage area for storing physical ratios.

The continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) data at the address "F289(H)" is a storage area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when continuous accessory objects are activated to the total number of payouts during 6000 games.
The accessory ratio (6000 times) data at address "F28A(H)" is a storage area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated to the total number of payouts during 6000 games.

The continuous accessory ratio (cumulative total) data at address "F28B(H)" is a storage area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts during continuous accessory object activation to the total number of payouts in the total number of games.
The accessory ratio (cumulative total) data at the address "F28C(H)" is a storage area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated to the total number of payouts in the total number of games.

The accessory state ratio data of the address "F28D(H)" is the ratio of the total number of games when the accessory is activated and the number of games when the accessory continuous operation device is activated to the total number of games. This is a storage area that stores state ratios.
The calculation result buffer at address "F28E(H)" is a storage area that temporarily stores calculation results during ratio calculation processing.

The count upper limit flag of address "F28F(H)" is the total number of games counter (addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)") or the total number of payouts (cumulative) counter (addresses "F27C(H)" to This flag is turned on when the storage capacity of "F27E(H)" is at the upper limit (3 bytes full, that is, "FFFFFF(H)").
Of the 1 byte (8 bits) data, the "D0" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag for the number of games played, and the "D1" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag for the number of coins to be paid out. Bits “D2” to “D7” are unused in the third embodiment.
For example, when the total number of games counter has reached the count upper limit value, the value of the count upper limit flag becomes "00000001 (B)".

If the payout number upper limit buffer at address "F290 (H)" exceeds 3 bytes full when the number of payouts in the game is added to the total payout (cumulative) counter, the value after addition will be 3 bytes full. This is a storage area that stores the value of .
For example, if the total payout (cumulative) counter value before the payout in the game is "FFFFFE(H)" and the number of payouts in the game is "8(H)", the counter value is "8(H)". )” will result in overflow. Therefore, in order to prevent overflow of the total payout (accumulation) counter value, a value is calculated to make the total payout (accumulation) counter value 3 bytes full, and the calculation result is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.
In the above example, "FFFFFE(H)"+"1(H)"="FFFFFF(H)", so "1(H)" is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.

The flashing request flag at address "F291(H)" is a flag for specifying an object that satisfies the flashing display condition when displaying the identification segment and the ratio segment.
For the designated accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), accessory ratio (cumulative), and accessory status ratio, if the total number of games (value stored in the total number of games counter) is less than "175,000" If so, the identification segment is controlled to blink.
Regarding the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) and the accessory ratio (6000 times), if the total number of games (value stored in the total number of games counter) is less than "6000", the identification segment will be displayed blinking. control to do so.

The ratio of designated accessories, consecutive accessories ratio (cumulative), accessory ratio (cumulative), and accessory status ratio should originally be the ratios over 175,000 games (to reduce variation). is the ratio calculated based on the number of games played less than 175,000 games, the identification segment is displayed blinking to indicate this.
Similarly, the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) and the accessory ratio (6000 times) are originally ratios for 6000 times, but when they are calculated based on the number of games played less than 6000 times, To indicate this, the identification segment is displayed blinking.

In addition, for the designated accessory ratio, accessory ratio (cumulative total), and accessory ratio (6000 times), when the displayed value is "70" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to blink. .
Furthermore, regarding the continuous accessory ratio (total) and the consecutive accessory ratio (6000 times), when the displayed value is "60" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to blink.
Furthermore, regarding the state ratio of accessories, etc., when the displayed value is "50" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to be displayed blinking.

The reason why the slot machine of this embodiment is set as described above is that the designated accessory ratio and accessory ratio are designed to be less than 70%, and the continuous accessory ratio is set to 60%. It is designed to be less than 50%, and the condition ratio of accessories etc. is designed to be less than 50%, and when the actual measured value is not within the designed value range, the ratio segment will blink. This is to let people know that by doing so.

In addition, in the blinking request flag, the D0 bit corresponds to the instructed accessory ratio blinking flag, the D1 bit corresponds to the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) blinking flag, ..., the D7 bit corresponds to the 175000 times blinking flag.
For example, when the calculated accessory ratio with instructions is less than "70", the D0 bit of the blinking request flag is "0", and when it is greater than "70", the D0 bit of the blinking request flag is "1". ”.
Similarly, when the calculated continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) is less than "70", the D1 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "0", and when it is greater than "70", the D1 bit of the blinking request flag The bit becomes "1".

In addition, when the calculated accessory state ratio is less than "50", the D5 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "0", and when it is greater than "50", the D5 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "1". ”.
Furthermore, when the total number of games counter value is less than "6000", the D6 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "1", and when it is greater than "6000", the D6 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "0". Become.
Furthermore, when the total number of games counter value is less than "175,000", the D7 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "1", and when it is greater than "175,000", the D7 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "0". .

The ratio display number at address "F292(H)" is a storage area that stores a number corresponding to the ratio to be displayed in the interrupt process.
When the ratio to be displayed in the interrupt processing is the designated accessory ratio, "1" is stored in the ratio display number of address "F292(H)". Similarly, when it is a continuous accessory ratio (6000 times), it stores "2", when it is an accessory ratio (6000 times), it stores "3", and when it is a continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) "4" is stored, when it is the accessory ratio (cumulative total), "5" is stored, and "6" is stored when it is the accessory state ratio.

The blinking switching flag at address "F293(H)" is a flag for determining whether to turn on or off when displaying the identification segment or ratio segment blinking during the interrupt processing.
In this embodiment, when displaying blinking, it is set to repeat lighting and extinguishing every approximately 0.3 seconds. Then, for about 0.3 seconds while the lights are on, the blinking switching flag is "0" (a value that indicates lighting), and for about 0.3 seconds while the lights are off, the blinking switching flag is "1" (a value indicating that the lights are off). It is set so that

The display switching time of address "F294(H)" is a counter that counts approximately 5 seconds, which is the time for displaying one ratio, and is updated by "1" every time an interrupt process is performed.
In this embodiment, display of accessory ratio with instructions (approximately 5 seconds) → accessory consecutive ratio (6000 times) display (approximately 5 seconds) → ... → accessory ratio (cumulative) display (approximately 5 seconds) → Object condition ratio display (approximately 5 seconds)→instruction accessory ratio (approximately 5 seconds)→... continues to be displayed repeatedly.
Therefore, the display switching time is stored in order to determine whether approximately 5 seconds have elapsed, that is, whether the display ratio switching time has been reached.

As mentioned above, the blinking switching time of address "F296(H)" is a counter that counts approximately 0.3 seconds when displaying the identification segment or ratio segment, and every time an interrupt process is performed. This is a counter that is updated to "1".

Address "F297(H)" is a 1-byte storage area where LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is stored.
The LED display counter 2 is a counter for determining which digit among digits 6 to 9 is to be lit, and is continuously updated every interrupt. Regarding each bit of the LED display counter 2, the D0 bit is assigned to a digit 6 signal, the D1 bit is assigned to a digit 7 signal, the D2 bit is assigned to a digit 8 signal, and the D3 bit is assigned to a digit 4 signal. In the first interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 6 to 9 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" in the LED display counter 2 is lit.

In the third embodiment, the LED display counter 2 takes a value of "00001000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter 2 is updated so as to shift the bit "1" of the LED display counter 2 to the right by one digit as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" to... (for each interrupt). . In addition, at the next interrupt after interrupt "4", the LED display counter 2 is shifted to the right by one digit and becomes "00000000 (B)". Set counter 2 to "00001000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter 2 repeats the value "4" → "3" → "2" → "1" → "4" → . . . for each interrupt process. That is, four interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the value of LED display counter 2 is
"N" interrupt number: 00001000 (B)
"N+1" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000010 (B)
“N+3” interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00001000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
“N+5” interrupt: 00000100 (B)
:
becomes.

In the third embodiment, four interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 6 to 9 are dynamically lit. Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 2 is "00001000 (B)", a digit 9 signal is output. Then, by outputting the digit 9 signal, digit 9 (lower digit of the ratio segment) can be lit. At the time of the next interrupt processing, the LED display counter becomes "00000100 (B)", a digit 8 signal is output, and digit 8 (higher digit of the ratio segment) can be lit. Also, when the LED display counter is "00000010 (B)", the digit 7 signal is output and digit 7 (lower digit of the identification segment) can be lit, and when the LED display counter is "00000001 (B)" , a digit 6 signal is output, and digit 6 (upper digit of the identification segment) can be lit.

The RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) at address "F2A0(H)" is a storage area in which RWM checksum data calculated by RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) during power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is stored.
Here, "RWM checksum data" is also referred to as "complement data", "error detection data" or "error detection information", and is from address "F000(H)" of the used area of RWM 53 to When added to the data of "F1FF(H)" and the data of addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") outside the used area, it becomes "0". The value is
In other words, the data of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM53 and the data of addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)"("F2A0(H)") outside the used area are When the "RWM checksum data (complement data)" of "F2A0(H)" is added to the added value of the data of "F2A0(H)", it becomes "0". In other words, the added value of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" becomes "0".

The power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at address "F2A1(H)" is a flag for determining whether the power-off processing has been executed normally, and is stored at the time of the power-off processing.
When the power-off process is executed normally, "55 (H)" is stored as the power-off process completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF), and when the power-off process is not executed normally, the power-off process completed flag is stored. A value other than "55 (H)" is stored as (_SF_POWER_OFF).

The power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) at address "F2A2(H)" is a flag for determining whether the checksum calculation result of RWM53 and the power-off processing completed flag are normal, and is used to start the program. It is stored during processing.
The calculation result of the checksum of RWM53 is normal (the sum of the data in the used area and outside the used area of RWM35 (excluding "F2A0(H)"), and the RWM checksum data (complement data) of "F2A0(H)" If the result of adding is "0") and the power-off processing completion flag is a normal value ("55 (H)"), "55 (H)" is set as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON). is memorized.
On the other hand, if at least one of the RWM53 checksum calculation result and the power-off processing completed flag is not normal (abnormal), "00 (H)" is set as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON). be remembered.

The stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (_SB_STACK2) at address "F2A3 (H)" is a storage area (_SB_STACK2) where the stack pointer of the used area is stored (saved) when a program (second program) outside the used area is executed. buffer).
Here, the "stack area" refers to a storage area of the RWM 53 in which data such as various registers and program return addresses can be temporarily saved (stored).
Furthermore, the "stack pointer" is used to hold an address indicating the save (storage) destination of data in the stack area.

Then, when executing a program (second program) outside the used area, the stack pointer of the used area is stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, and the program (second program) outside the used area is terminated. When returning to the program (first program), the stack pointer of the used area is restored from the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2.

The 24-byte storage area at addresses "F3E8(H)" to "F3FF(H)" is a stack area outside the used area.

Next, initialization of the used area of the RWM 53 and data outside the used area will be explained.
The data in the used area and outside the used area of the RWM 53 is not initialized and maintained only by cutting off/resuming the power supply (turning the power on/off, turning the power switch 11 on/off).
Further, even when returning from a recoverable error state, the used area of the RWM 53 and data outside the used area are maintained without being initialized.

Furthermore, it is assumed that an operation for transitioning to a setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) is performed, and it is determined that a power-off recovery abnormality has occurred. In this case, "Yes" is determined in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, which will be described later, and the process proceeds to step S2711, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the time of starting the setting change at the time of power-off recovery abnormality is set. Furthermore, since this is a power-off recovery abnormality, "Yes" is determined in step S2712 in FIG. 41, and the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ”), and the entire range outside the used area (addresses “F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)”) are initialized.
Even when returning from an unrecoverable error state, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed in the same range as when it is determined that a power-off recovery abnormality has occurred after performing an operation for transitioning to a setting change state.

Further, it is assumed that an operation for transitioning to a setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. In this case, in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. The conversion range is set.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ” to “F3FF(H)” initialization processing is executed.

Therefore, when the operation to shift to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM53 and the address "F210 ( The data of "H)" to "F291(H)" are maintained without being initialized.
In other words, the address "F292(H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. For this reason, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then switch to the setting change state. When the operation is performed and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the management information display LED 74 will display the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio data (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information. is started.

Further, it is assumed that the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. In this case, the answer in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. The conversion range is set.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ” to “F3FF(H)” initialization processing is executed.

In other words, the address "F292(H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. Therefore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then turn off the setting key switch 152. and turn on the power with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and when it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the management information display LED 74 will display the first display item of various ratio information. Display starts from certain instruction-included accessory ratio data (ratio display number "1").

Therefore, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the operation to shift to the setting change state is performed. The initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed in the same range as when it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal.
Therefore, even if you do not have the setting key or do not move to the setting change state, the same range as when the power-off recovery is determined to be normal after performing the operation to move to the setting change state. Then, the RWM 53 can be initialized.

Furthermore, at the end of the advantageous section, initialization processing is executed for a predetermined range of the used area of the RWM 53 (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in FIG. 33) in which data regarding the advantageous section is stored. Ru.
Furthermore, even if the advantageous section ends, the address "F292(H)" of the RWM 53 is not initialized. Therefore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (winning ratio monitor) displays the accessory ratio (cumulative total) data (ratio display number "5"), the advantageous section ends and the data regarding the advantageous section is stored. Even if initialization processing is executed for a predetermined range of the used area of the RWM 53 (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in FIG. 33), the display items displayed on the management information display LED 74 will not be displayed. Following the accessory ratio (cumulative total) data is accessory state ratio data (ratio display number "6").

Further, it is assumed that the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned off, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. That is, assume that the power is turned on and off normally. In this case, since the initialization process of the RWM 53 is not executed, the used area and data outside the used area of the RWM 53 at the time of power-off are maintained.
For this reason, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then press the setting key switch 152 and reset. When the power is turned on with both switches (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off state, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the state will be restored to the state at the time of power-off, so the management information display LED 74 will first display the The object ratio (cumulative) data is displayed, and then the accessory condition ratio data (ratio display number "6"), which is the next display item after the accessory ratio (cumulative) data, is displayed.

Further, it is assumed that the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned off, and it is determined that a power-off recovery abnormality has occurred. In this case, "Yes" is determined in step S2708 of FIG. 41, and the process proceeds to step S2801, where the irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed (an irreversible error state occurs), so the initialization process of the RWM 53 is not executed. . Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801 is executed, interrupt processing is prohibited (step S1490 in FIG. 43), and the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 are turned off ( Step S1495 in FIG. 43).
For this reason, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then press the setting key switch 152 and reset. When the power is turned on with both switches (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and it is determined that a power-off recovery error has occurred, interrupt processing is prohibited and the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 are turned off. The management information display LED 74 remains off.

Note that, for example, in the irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, "8" may be displayed in each of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74. In this case, turn off the power, then turn on the power with both the setting key switch 152 and reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and if it is determined that a power failure recovery error has occurred, the management information display LED 74 "8888" is displayed.

Further, for example, even if the process moves to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, interrupt processing may not be prohibited, and the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 may be maintained without being turned off. In this case, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then press the setting key switch 152 and reset. Even if the power is turned on with both switches (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off state and it is determined that a power-off recovery abnormality has occurred, the management information display LED 74 will first display the accessory ratio (cumulative) data. Next, accessory state ratio data (ratio display number "6"), which is the next display item after accessory ratio (cumulative total) data, is displayed.

FIG. 36(A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display board 75 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 36(B) is a diagram showing the management information display LED 74 in the third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 36(A), in the third embodiment, a display board 75 includes a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79.
The credit number display LED 76 is composed of digit 1 (upper digit) and digit 2 (lower digit), and the earned number display LED 78 is composed of digit 3 (upper digit) and digit 4 (lower digit). Further, digits 1 to 4 use a 7-segment display without dot segments.
Note that digits 1 to 4 may be configured using a 7-segment display with dot segments, but the dot segments may not be lit.

In addition, the status display LED 79 includes a 1-bet display LED 79a, a 2-bet display LED 79b, a 3-bet display LED 79c, a game start display LED 79d, an input display LED 79e, and a replay display LED 79f, which are composed of six LEDs. .
Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 36, the advantageous section display LED 77 is constructed using a segment P of digit 4, as shown in FIG.
Further, although the setting value display LED 73 does not appear in FIG. 36, it is provided on the main control board 50 as shown in FIG. 1, and is composed of digit 5. Digit 5 also uses a 7 segment display without dot segments.
Note that the digit 5 may be configured using a 7-segment display with dot segments, but the dot segments may not be lit.

As shown in FIG. 36(B), the management information display LED 74 displays digit 6 (upper digit of the identification segment), digit 7 (lower digit of the identification segment), digit 8 (upper digit of the ratio segment), and digit 9 (lower digit of the ratio segment). digit).
Further, digits 6 to 9 use a 7-segment display with dot segments (segment P).
Furthermore, the segment P of digit 7 (lower digit of the identification segment) functions as a digit separator display LED. The digit separator display LED is used to clearly mark the separator between the information type (identification segment) and the ratio (ratio segment).

FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating details of digits and segments in the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, the 7-segment display for digits 1-5 itself consists of segments A-G and does not include a dot segment (segment P).
However, the segment P of digit 1 constitutes the game start display LED 79d, the segment P of digit 2 constitutes the input display LED 79e, the segment P of digit 3 constitutes the replay display LED 79f, and the segment P of digit 4 constitutes the game start display LED 79d. constitutes an advantageous section display LED 77.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing output ports 2 to 7 in the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, two output ports (output ports 3 and 6) are provided for outputting digit signals, and two output ports (output ports 4 and 7) are provided for outputting segment signals. It is characterized by
In the third embodiment, digits 1 to 9 are provided.
Further, the segment of digits 1 to 5 is defined as segment 1 (segments 1A to 1P), and the segment of digits 6 to 9 is defined as segment 2 (segments 2A to 2P).

Further, in the third embodiment, the output port 3 is an output port that outputs digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digits 1 to 5 signals), and the output port 6 is an output port that outputs digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digits 1 to 5 signals). This is an output port that outputs signals (6 to 9 signals).
Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the output port 4 is an output port that outputs segment signals for digits 1 to 5 (segment 1A to 1P signals), and the output port 7 is an output port that outputs segment signals for digits 6 to 9 (segment signals). This is an output port that outputs 2A to 2P signals).
When digits 1 to 5 are turned on, the digit signal is output from the output port 3 and the segment 1 signal is output from the output port 4.
Further, when lighting digits 6 to 9, the digit signal is output from the output port 6, and the segment 2 signal is output from the output port 7.

Next, external signals will be explained. The "external signal" is a signal output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (the hall computer 200, a data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external centralized terminal board 100.
As shown in FIG. 38, in the third embodiment, external signals 1 to 6 are output from output port 5. Specifically, a "settings changing signal" is assigned to the D0 bit (external signal 1) of the output port 5, and a "settings checking signal" is assigned to the D1 bit (external signal 2). The signals shown in FIG. 38 are also assigned to the D2 to D5 bits.

The "settings changing signal" is an external signal indicating that settings are being changed and that settings have been changed. The setting change signal is output continuously during the setting change and at the end of one game after the setting change (all reels 31 stop and until the medal payout process (step S294 in FIG. 46). This is to reliably notify the outside that the setting has been changed.When the D0 bit of the output port 5 is "1", the setting changing signal is on (the setting is being changed, or one game after the setting has been changed). In addition, when the D0 bit is "0", it means that the setting change signal is off (the setting is not being changed, and the game after the setting change is not ending). shows.

The "setting confirmation signal" is an external signal indicating that the settings are being confirmed. The setting confirmation signal is output during setting confirmation. When the D1 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the setting confirmation signal is on (the setting is being confirmed), and when the D1 bit is "0", the setting confirmation signal is off. Yes (settings are not being checked).

"Fraud detection signal 1" is an external signal indicating that there is a possibility of fraud. For example, when the door switch 17 is on (when the opening of the front door 12 is detected), the fraud detection signal 1 is output. When the D2 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 1 is on (the door switch 17 is on, the front door 12 is open), and the D2 bit is "0". This indicates that the fraud detection signal 1 is off (the door switch 17 is off, the front door 12 is closed).

"Fraud detection signal 2", like fraud detection signal 1, is an external signal indicating that there is a possibility of fraud. For example, when a recoverable error state occurs, the fraud detection signal 2 is output. When the D3 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 2 is on (recoverable error state), and when the D3 bit is "0", the fraud detection signal 2 is off. (not a recoverable error state).

"Fraud detection signal 3", like fraud detection signals 1 and 2, is an external signal indicating that there is a possibility of fraud. For example, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, the fraud detection signal 3 is output. When the D4 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 3 is on (an unrecoverable error state), and when the D4 bit is "0", the fraud detection signal 3 is turned on. Indicates that it is off (not in an unrecoverable error state).

The "security signal" is an external signal indicating that any one of the settings changing signal, settings confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3 is on. When outputting any of the settings changing signal, settings confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3, a security signal is also output at the same time. When the D5 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the security signal is on (one of the settings changing signal, settings confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3 is being output); When the D5 bit is "0", it indicates that the security signal is off (none of the settings changing signal, settings confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3 are output).

As described above, the setting change in progress signal is continuously outputted until the end of one game after the setting change. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after the setting change, both the setting change in progress signal and the setting confirmation in progress signal are output. Specifically, for example, assume that the setting change state is finished and a situation is reached in which medals (game media, game value) can be bet. At this time, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on with the bet number being "0", both a setting changing signal and a setting confirming signal are output.
Furthermore, when outputting any one of the settings changing signal, settings confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3, a security signal is also output. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after the setting change, the D0 bit, D1 bit, and D5 bit of the output port 5 are turned on (“1”). After that, if you end the setting confirmation state before the end of the first game after changing the settings, the D0 bit and D5 bit of output port 5 will remain on (“1”), and the D1 bit will be off (“0”). become. When the first game after the setting change is completed, the D0 bit and D5 bit of the output port 5 are also turned off ("0").

Next, lighting control for digits 1 to 9 will be explained.
The lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, set value display LED 73) is controlled by LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 50, which will be described later. Further, the LED display control process (I_LED_OUT) is a process performed by the program (first program) of the used area.

On the other hand, the lighting of digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) is controlled by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) of FIG. 52, which will be described later. Further, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is a process performed by a program (second program) outside the usage area.
In the third embodiment, digits 1 to 5 control lighting according to a program in the used area (first program), and digits 6 to 9 control lighting according to a program outside the used area (second program). The output ports used are separated.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, the segment has digits 1 to 9, and the segment of digits 1 to 5 is defined as segment 1 (segment 1A to 1P), and the segment of digits 6 to 9 is defined as segment 2 (segment 2A to 2P). .
Segments 1A to 1G of digit 1 constitute the upper digits of the credit number display LED 76, and segment 1P of digit 1 constitutes the game start display LED 79d.
Further, segments 1A to 1G of digit 2 constitute the lower digits of the credit number display LED 76, and segment 1P of digit 2 constitutes the input display LED 79e.

Furthermore, the segments 1A to 1G of digit 3 constitute the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78, and the segment 1P of digit 3 constitutes the replay display LED 79f.
Further, segments 1A to 1G of digit 4 constitute the lower digits of the number-of-achievement display LED 78, and segment 1P of digit 4 constitutes the advantageous section display LED 77.
Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 5 constitute a setting value display LED 73.
Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 6 constitute the upper digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74.

Further, segments 2A to 2G of digit 7 constitute the lower digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74, and segment 2P of digit 7 constitutes a digit separator display LED.
Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 8 constitute the upper digits of the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74.
Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 9 constitute the lower digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74.

FIG. 40(A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signal output from the output port 3 in the third embodiment. Moreover, the same figure (B) is a figure which shows the relationship between the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) and the signal output from the output port 6 in 3rd Embodiment. Furthermore, FIG. 3C is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the third embodiment.
In this example, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) (address "F051(H)" in FIG. 33) is provided in the area used by the RWM 53, and an LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (address "F051(H)" in FIG. 35) is provided outside the area used by the RWM 53. Address "F297(H)") is provided.

The LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is a counter for outputting a digit 1 signal to a digit 5 signal for each interrupt, and is a counter with 5 interrupts per cycle.
Further, the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is a counter for outputting the digit 6 signal to digit 9 signal for each interrupt, and is a counter with 4 interrupts per cycle.
In this way, in the third embodiment, an LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 are provided separately and independently.
Furthermore, since the one cycle of the LED display counters of both are different, the lighting timing of digits 1 to 5 is different from the lighting timing of digits 6 to 9.

The LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) is data indicating a digit whose lighting is permitted, and is stored at address "F052(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 (see FIG. 33).
As shown in FIG. 40(C), the LED display request flag is 8-bit data in which the D0 bit corresponds to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit corresponds to the digit 2 signal, ..., the D4 bit corresponds to the digit 5 signal. be. Each bit of the LED display request flag is matched with the bit of output port 3 shown in FIG.
Additionally, as shown in Figure 40(C), digits 1 to 4 can be lit during normal operation (digit 5 is off), and digit 5 can be lit while changing settings or checking settings (digits 1 to 4 are off). (lights out). In addition. "Normal" refers to waiting for games and during games.

Then, in the interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 in the used area and the value of the LED display request flag are ANDed, and the digit corresponding to the bit that becomes "1" is the digit that lights up in the current interrupt processing. Become.
For example, if the value of LED display counter 1 of the used area is "00001000 (B)" and the value of the LED display request flag is "00001111 (B) (normal medium)", if the two are ANDed, "00001000 (B)", and only the digit 4 signal becomes "1".
Also, while changing settings or checking settings, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal turns on (LED display counter 1 in the used area is "00010000 (B)"), a segment signal is output from output port 4, The setting value display LED 73 (digit 5) can be lit.

Next, recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors will be explained.
A "recoverable error" is an error that can be recovered from without turning the power on or off. For example, as a recoverable error,
"HP" error: Medal jamming (retention) error in the hopper 35 "HE" error: Empty medal error in the hopper 35 "H0" error: Abnormality in the payout sensor 37 of the hopper 35 "CE" error: Medal retention error in the medal selector "CP" error: Error in incorrect passage of medals in the medal selector "CH" error: Abnormality in the passage sensor 46 located in the medal selector "C0" error: Malfunction in the input sensor 44 located in the medal selector ""C1" error: Abnormal medal insertion error "FE" error: Sub tank full "dE" error: Front door 12 opened, etc.
Note that recoverable errors are not limited to those described above.

In step S457 of interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47, which will be described later, reading processing of the input port 51 is executed, and input signals from various switches (start switch 41, etc.) and various sensors (throwing sensor 44, etc.) are read. Thereafter, various types of data (level data, rising data, falling data) are generated based on the read input signal and stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. After that, in step S463 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR), input error check processing is executed, and when any recoverable error is detected by referring to the above various data, an error detection flag indicating the detected recoverable error is set. is stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53.

In addition, in the main processing (M_MAIN) (Fig. 46), the error detection flag is checked before the operation of the start switch 41 is detected and after all the reels 31 have stopped, and if any bit of the error detection flag is When it is "1", it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, the progress of the game is stopped, and a recoverable error state is established.
Furthermore, if a recoverable error occurs between when the start switch 41 is operated and when all the reels 31 have stopped in a situation where the specified number of medals have been bet, all the reels 31 will have stopped. The progress of the game may be continued until all the reels 31 are stopped, and the progress of the game may be stopped and a recoverable error state may be created before the medal payout process is executed.
Further, when it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, error information of the recoverable error that has occurred is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. This error information display (error display) is performed in the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47.

When a recoverable error occurs, when the cause of the recoverable error is removed by the administrator (hall clerk) and the reset switch 153 is operated, the recoverable error state is canceled and the progress of the game is resumed. .
In this way, when a recoverable error occurs, the cause of the recoverable error is removed and the reset switch 153 is operated without turning the power on/off or operating the setting key switch 152. It is possible to cancel the recoverable error state and return to a state in which the game can proceed.

On the other hand, an "unrecoverable error" cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on). This is a serious error. For example, as an unrecoverable error,
"E1" error: When recovery from power off is not normal (when recovery from power off is abnormal) (when "Yes" in step S2712 of FIG. 41, which will be described later)
"E5" error: When the stopped symbols are not normal when the reel 31 stops (when a display error occurs)
"E6" error: When the set value is not within the normal range (when a set value error occurs) (when "No" in step S458 in FIG. 47)
"E7" error: When a random number error occurs (when "Yes" in step S460 in FIG. 47)
etc.
Note that unrecoverable errors are not limited to those described above.

No matter which non-recoverable error occurs, error information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. For example, when an "E1" error occurs, "E" is displayed in digit 3 and "1" is displayed in digit 4. The same message is displayed when other non-recoverable errors occur.
In addition, the process in step S2715 in the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 (program of used area (processing by the first program)).
Furthermore, when the reels 31 stop, it is determined that the stopped symbols are not normal (a display error has occurred), and the "E5" error is determined during the main processing (M_MAIN) (Fig. 46). (processing by the program (first program)).

On the other hand, it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range (a set value error has occurred), and the "E6" error is determined in step S458 during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. (processing by the program (second program)).
Similarly, it is determined that the random number value is not normal (a random number error has occurred) and that it is determined to be an "E7" error. (processing by a second program).
When it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred in the program (first program) in the used area, unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) of FIG. 43, which will be described later, is executed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred in a program outside the used area (second program), unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51, which will be described later, is executed.

When an unrecoverable error occurs, the power supply is cut off (turn off the power, turn off the power switch 11), and then the power supply is restarted (by turning on the setting key switch 152). Turn on the power and turn on the power switch 11). As a result, the answer in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 becomes "Yes", and the process advances to step S2711. Furthermore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 48, which will be described later, is not executed, so "Yes" is determined in step S2712 in FIG. 41, and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Furthermore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, which will be described later, the entire range including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the used area of the RWM 53 (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") ), and the entire range outside the used area (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)") are initialized. After that, the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 in FIG. If the set value is reset here, the unrecoverable error state is canceled and the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) of step S248 (FIG. 46).
In this way, when an unrecoverable error occurs, by turning off the power and turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the unrecoverable error state is canceled and the game can proceed. can be restored to a state where it is possible.

Furthermore, when a recoverable error occurs, the error is displayed by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 50, but when an unrecoverable error occurs, the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. Display control (I_LED_OUT) is also not executed. When an unrecoverable error occurs, an error display is performed by the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51.
Furthermore, when returning from a recoverable error state, the used area of the RWM 53 and data outside the used area are maintained without being initialized, but when returning from an unrecoverable error state, the used area and the used area of the RWM 53 The entire range of data outside is initialized.
Note that when returning from a recoverable error state, data such as an error detection flag stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 may be initialized.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50 in the third embodiment.
When the power is turned on (power switch 11 is turned on, power supply is restarted), the program starts from the program start process shown in FIG. 41.
In FIG. 41, when the program is started in step S2701, in the next step S2702, the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53. .

Next, the process advances to step S2703, and the main control board 50 executes checksum calculation processing for the RWM 53.
Specifically, in step S2703, the data of addresses “F000(H)” to “F1FF(H)” in the used area of the RWM 53 and the data of addresses “F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)” outside the used area are Add data.
That is, data of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are added.
When the result is "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 is normal, and when the result is not "0", the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 is judged to be abnormal (abnormal). ).

In addition, in step S2703, it is determined whether the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) of the address "F2A1 (H)" of the RWM 53 is "55 (H)". , it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is normal, and when it is not "55 (H)", it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is not normal (abnormal).
Here, in this embodiment, at the time of power-off processing, a power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is set in the address "F2A1 (H)" of the RWM 53 (step S2784 of RWM checksum set (S_SUM_SET) in FIG. 49). . Then, in step S2703, it is determined whether the power-off processing completed flag set during the power-off processing is a normal value ("55 (H)").

In addition, in step S2703, the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 is normal (the result of adding the data in the used area and the data outside the used area of the RWM 35 is "0"), and the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is normal. When it is the value ("55 (H)"), "55 (H)" is stored in the address "F2A2 (H)" of the RWM 53 as power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON).
On the other hand, in step S2703, if at least one of the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 and the power-off processing completed flag is not normal (abnormal), the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is set to "00 (H )” is stored in the address “F2A2(H)” of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to the next step S2704.

Proceeding to step S2704, the main control board 50 restores the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) saved in step S2702. Then, the process advances to the next step S2705.

Here, the program for the program start process is stored in a control area (first control area, first program area) of the used area of the ROM 54. That is, the program for the program start process is the first program.
On the other hand, the program for the checksum calculation process of the RWM 53 in step S2703 is stored in a control area (second control area, second program area) outside the used area of the ROM 54. That is, the program for the checksum calculation process in step S2703 is the second program.

Therefore, in FIG. 41, in the program start process which is the process by the program (first program) in the used area, when the process proceeds to step S2703, checksum calculation of the RWM 53 which is the process by the program (second program) outside the used area. When the process is executed and the checksum calculation process is completed, the process returns to the program start process, which is the process by the program (first program) of the used area.
Also, when transitioning from processing by a program in the used area (first program) to processing by a program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is used by the RWM53. The AF register is saved to the stack area of the area, and when processing by a program outside the used area (second program) is finished and returning to processing by a program in the used area (first program), the AF register is restored.

Proceeding to step S2705, the main control board 50 acquires the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) from the address "F2A2(H)" of the RWM 53 and stores it in the A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S2706.

Proceeding to step S2706, the main control board 50 determines whether the door switch signal is on. As described above, when the front door 12 is open, the door switch 17 is turned on and the door switch signal is turned on. If it is determined that the door switch signal is on (the front door 12 is in an open state), the process advances to the next step S2707. On the other hand, if it is determined that the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is in a closed state), the process advances to step S2715.

In step S2707, the main control board 50 determines whether the setting key switch signal is on. As described above, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and the setting key switch signal is turned on. If it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on, the process advances to step S2711. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key switch signal is off, the process advances to step S2708.

Proceeding to step S2708, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a power-off recovery abnormality. Specifically, when the value of the A register (power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) acquired in step S2705) is "55 (H)," it is determined that there is no power-off recovery abnormality, and the process proceeds to the next step S2709. . On the other hand, when the value of the A register is "00 (H)", it is determined that the power-off recovery is abnormal, and the process proceeds to step S2801, which is an unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP). Note that the specific contents of the irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.

In step S2709, the main control board 50 sets reset determination data. Specifically, "7" is stored in the D register. Then, the process advances to the next step S2710.
Proceeding to step S2710, the main control board 50 determines whether the reset switch signal is on. As described above, in this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 are configured as an integrated switch. Then, when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the reset switch signal is turned on, and the process advances to step S2713. On the other hand, when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the reset switch signal is turned off, and the process proceeds to power return processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721. Note that the specific contents of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) will be described later.

Proceeding to step S2711, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for the power-off recovery abnormality. In this embodiment, when the power-off recovery is abnormal (the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "00 (H)"), the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 is included. The used area and the entire range outside the used area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)") are set as the initialization range. Note that the initialization range is specified by the start address of the initialization range and the number of bytes. Then, the process advances to the next step S2712.

In step S2712, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a power-off recovery abnormality. Specifically, it is the same as step S2708. When it is determined that there is no power-off recovery abnormality, "7", which is the data for determining the setting change state, is stored in the D register, and the process proceeds to the next step S2713, where it is determined that there is a power-off recovery abnormality. If so, the process advances to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Note that the specific contents of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.

Proceeding to step S2713, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for normal power-off recovery. In this embodiment, when the power-off recovery is normal (the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "55 (H)"), the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM53 and the usage Addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the area are maintained without being initialized (cleared). Therefore, in step S2713, the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are initialized. Set as . As described above, the initialization range is specified by the start address and the number of bytes of the initialization range. Then, the process advances to the next step S2714.

In step S2714, the main control board 50 determines whether the settings can be changed. In this embodiment, the settings cannot be changed during the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46), including while the reels 31 are rotating. , the settings cannot be changed flag is turned on. Then, in step S2714, it is determined whether or not the settings can be changed by determining whether or not the settings cannot be changed flag is on. When it is determined that the settings cannot be changed (the settings cannot be changed), the process advances to the next step S2715, and when it is determined that the settings can be changed, the process advances to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731. The specific contents of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.
It should be noted that the settings may be always enabled to be changed without providing a period during which the settings cannot be changed, and therefore without providing a setting change prohibition flag.

Proceeding to step S2715, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a power-off recovery abnormality. Specifically, it is the same as step S2708. If it is determined that a power-off recovery error has occurred, the process advances to step S2801 for an unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP), and if it is determined that a power-off recovery error has not occurred, the process proceeds to power-off recovery process (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721. . Note that the specific contents of the power return processing (M_POWER_ON) and the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721 in FIG.
First, in step S2722, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. In this embodiment, the stack pointer is saved during power-off processing (step S2774 of power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 48). Then, in step S2722, the stack pointer saved at the time of power-off processing is restored.

Proceeding to the next step S2723, the main control board 50 executes the input port 51 reading process. This updates each data in the input port 51 to the latest data.
In the next step S2724, the main control board 50 clears the power-off processing completion flag. Then, the process advances to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) of step S248, and the process according to this flowchart ends.
In this embodiment, after executing the process in step S2724, the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 47 is started at a timing before proceeding to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (FIG. 46).

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
The program for unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is stored in the used area of the ROM 54, and the program for unrecoverable error handling 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is stored outside the used area of the ROM 54. That is, the program for irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is the first program, and the program for irreversible error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is the second program.

Furthermore, in unrecoverable error processing, interrupt processing is prohibited.
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that does not normally occur, and processing based on abnormal data (such as updating data in the RWM 53 based on an input signal from the input port 51 or sending a control command to the sub-control board 80) , control based on the signal output from the output port based on the data of the RWM 53), etc., interrupt processing is prohibited in unrecoverable error processing.

Here, the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is a process performed by the first program, and when the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is started, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is first executed in step S1490, which disables interrupts. prohibited.
On the other hand, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is a process performed by the second program, and execution of interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited while the second program is running, so unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) There is no processing to disable interrupts after the start.

In FIG. 43, when the process advances to step S1491, the main control board 50 sets error display data for the lower digits of the unrecoverable error. This process is a process of storing data for lighting up digit 4 (data in which only the digit 4 signal is set to "1") ("00001000 (B)") in the H register.
Next, the process advances to step S1492, and the main control board 50 sets error display data for the upper digits of the unrecoverable error. This process is a process of storing data for lighting up digit 3 (data in which only the digit 3 signal is ``1'') (``00000100(B)'').

Furthermore, in step S1492, the main control board 50 stores segment data ("01111001B") for displaying "E" in the upper digit (digit 3) of the irrecoverable error in the E register.
Note that before proceeding to unrecoverable error processing, segment data for displaying the lower digit of the unrecoverable error is stored in the L register. For example, when the unrecoverable error is an "E1" error, the lower digit (digit 4) is "1", so the L register contains segment data ("00000110B") for displaying "1". is memorized.
In the following example, it is assumed that the current unrecoverable error 1 is an "E1" error.

From the above, the D, E, H, and L register values are as follows at this point:
D register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100 (B)")
E register value: Segment data (“01111001(B)”) to display “E” in the upper digit (digit 3) of unrecoverable errors
H register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000 (B)")
L register value: Segment data (“00000110 (B)”) to display “1” in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error
becomes.

In the next step S1493, the main control board 50 sets the address of the output port to be cleared and the number of output ports. In this embodiment, the output ports to be cleared in unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) are output ports 0 to 7, and since an address is set for each output port, the address and the number of output ports (8 ).
In the next step S1494, the main control board 50 sequentially turns off the outputs of output ports 0 to 7. Specifically, for output ports 0 to 7, the output is turned off (“00000000(B)”) one by one.

In the next step S1495, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next output port. That is, the address indicating the output port is incremented by "1". For example, when the address of output port 0 is "00F1(H)", the address of output port 1 "00F2(H)" is set as the next address.
Next, the process advances to step S1496, and the main control board 50 determines whether the outputs of all output ports have been turned off, that is, whether the outputs up to output port 7 have been turned off. If it is determined that the process has not finished, the process returns to step S1494, and if it is determined that the process has finished, the process proceeds to step S1497. In this way, the processes of steps S1494 to S1496 are repeated until the outputs of all output ports are turned off, and when it is determined that the outputs of all output ports are turned off, the process advances to step S1497.

By turning off all output ports in this way, all active signals that were output before this process is executed are turned off. As a result, all the LEDs including digits 1 to 9 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, set value display LED 73, management information display LED 74) are turned off, so that burn-in of the LEDs can be prevented.

Additionally, if an unrecoverable error occurs while the excitation signal for the motor 32 is being output, unless the output port is turned off, the excitation signal for the motor 32 will continue to be output until the unrecoverable error is cleared. However, by turning off all output ports, the excitation signal for the motor 32 is turned off, so that seizure of the motor 32 can be prevented.
Furthermore, if an unrecoverable error occurs while the blocker signal is being output, unless the output port is turned off, the medal detection process will not be executed, but the blocker 45 remains on (medals are not sent to the hopper). However, by turning off all output ports, the blocker 45 is turned off and the inserted medals are returned, so the medals are swallowed. Swallowing can be prevented.

In the next step S1497, the main control board 50 outputs error display data from the output ports 3 and 4 in order to display an error in the upper digits. Output port 3 outputs the data stored in the D register, and output port 4 outputs the data stored in the E register.

Next, the process advances to step S1498, and the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent flickering of the LED. Here, the length of time to wait depends on the performance of the LED, but it may be set to about "0.1 ms", for example. Here, for example, a predetermined value (for example, "255") is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted by, for example, the internal system clock. When the B register value becomes "0", it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed. Then, the process advances to the next step S1499.

In step S1499, the main control board 50 turns off ("0") the outputs of the output ports 3 and 4. This process is for preventing afterimages.
Next, the process advances to step S1500, and the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent flickering of the LED. This is a process to ensure that the LEDs are extinguished after the outputs of output ports 3 and 4 are turned off (“0”).

Next, the process advances to step S1501, and the main control board 50 switches between the upper digit and the lower digit.
Specifically, the DE register value and HL register value are exchanged. This results in
<Before replacement>
D register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to “1”) (“00000100 (B)”)
E register value: Segment data (“01111001(B)”) to display “E” in the upper digit (digit 3) of unrecoverable errors
H register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000 (B)")
L register value: Segment data to display "1" in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error ("00000110 (B)")
<After replacement>
D register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000 (B)")
E register value: Segment data (“00000110 (B)”) to display “1” in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error
H register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100 (B)")
L register value: Segment data (“01111001(B)”) to display “E” in the upper digit (digit 3) of unrecoverable errors
becomes.

Then, the process advances to step S1502, and the main control board 50 outputs error display data from the output ports 3 and 4 in order to display an error in the lower digits. Similarly to step S1497, output port 3 outputs the D register value, and output port 4 outputs the E register value. As a result, output port 3 outputs "00001000 (B)" (data with only digit 4 signal as "1") that lights up digit 4, and output port 4 outputs a segment to display "1". Data “00000110(B)” is output.

Next, the process advances to step S1503, and the main control board 50 executes a standby process to prevent flicker. This process is similar to step S1498.
Next, the process advances to step S1504, and the main control board 50 turns off ("0") the outputs of output ports 3 and 4, similarly to step S1499.
In the next step S1505, the main control board 50 executes a standby process to prevent flickering. This process is similar to step S1500. Then, the process returns to step S1497.

As a result of the above processing, for example, in the case of an "E1" error, the display of "E" by digit 3 and the display of "1" by digit 4 are alternately and repeatedly displayed at predetermined time intervals.
Note that the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed by the interrupt process (I_INTR), but as described above, in the event of an unrecoverable error, the interrupt process (I_INTR) is not executed (prohibited), and as shown in FIG. As shown, an irreversible error is displayed by arithmetic processing using registers and hardware configuration.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731 in FIG.
The main control board 50 first initializes the specified address of the RWM 53 in step S2732, sets (specifies) the next address in the initialization range of the RWM 53 in the next step S2733, and then proceeds to the next step S2734. After proceeding, it is determined whether initialization has been completed for the entire initialization range of the RWM 53. If it is determined that the initialization has not been completed, the process returns to step S2732, and if it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2735. As a result, the processes of steps S2732 to S2734 are repeated until initialization is completed for the entire initialization range of the RWM 53.

As described above, in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, the initialization range (start address and number of bytes of the initialization range) of the RWM 53 is set.
Then, in steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is performed for the initialization range of the used area out of the initialization range of the RWM 53 set in step S2711 or S2713.
Note that the processing of steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) is executed by the program (first program) of the used area. Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is performed only for the initialization range of the used area among the initialization range of the RWM 53.

If it is determined in step S2734 that the initialization has been completed, the main control board 50 proceeds to the next step S2735 and saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53. let
Proceeding to the next step S2736, the main control board 50 initializes the initialization range outside the used area among the initialization range of the RWM 53 set in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Execute.

As described above, in steps S2732 to S2734, the used area of the initialization range of the RWM 53 is initialized, but in step S2736, of the initialization range of the RWM 53, the area outside the used area is initialized. .
Note that the process of step S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) is executed by a program (second program) outside the used area. Therefore, in step S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is executed only for the initialization range outside the used area among the initialization range of the RWM 53.
When the initialization of the initialization range outside the used area is completed in step S2736, the process proceeds to the next step S2737, where the main control board 50 stores the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) saved in step S2735. ) is restored. Then, the process advances to the next step S2738.

In step S2738, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to reset. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the answer is "Yes" in step S2710 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. In this embodiment, in step S2709 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, "7" is stored in the D register as reset determination data. Furthermore, when "Yes" in step S2710 of FIG. 41, "7" is maintained in the D register, and when "No" is determined in step S2710 of FIG. 41, the D register is cleared ("0" is stored). . Then, in step S2738 of FIG. 44, it is determined whether or not the D register is "7", and if the D register is "7", it is the reset time ("Yes" in step S2710 of FIG. 41). It is determined that this is the case, and the process advances to step S2739. On the other hand, when the D register is "0", it is determined that it is not the reset time ("No" in step S2710 of FIG. 41), and step S2739 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2740.

Proceeding to step S2739, the main control board 50 sets the display at the time of reset. Specifically, "70 (H)" is stored in the acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT) of the address "F011 (H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, "70" can be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2739, and the administrator (hall clerk) is notified that it is time to reset. be able to.

Proceeding to the next step S2740, the main control board 50 sets the setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53. The setting command set in step S2740 indicates whether to reset or change settings. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2740, so the sub-control board 80 side can determine whether it is a reset or a setting change. can be determined by

Note that in this embodiment, after executing the process in step S2740, the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 47 is started at a timing before proceeding to the process in step S2741. In other words, before the interrupt processing (I_INTR) starts, the processing for initializing the initialization range of the RWM 53 (the processing of steps S2732 to S2734 and S2736 in FIG. 44) has been completed. With this configuration, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prevented from being executed while the RWM 53 is being initialized. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the contents of the RWM 53 from being changed (rewritten or overwritten) due to interrupt processing (I_INTR) while the RWM 53 is being initialized.

Proceeding to the next step S2741, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to reset. Specifically, it is the same as step S2738. If it is determined that it is not time to reset, the process proceeds to step S2742, and if it is determined that it is time to reset, step S2742 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2743.
When proceeding to step S2742, the main control board 50 executes a setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL). The specific contents of this process will be described later. When the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) is finished, the process advances to the next step S2743.

In step S2743, the main control board 50 determines whether the standby time has elapsed. This waiting time is for waiting for the setting command to be sent. If it is determined that the standby time has elapsed, the main control board 50 proceeds to the next step S2744, sets the initialization wait time, and executes a 2-byte time wait process (wait process) in the next step S2745. . The processing in steps S2744 and S2745 is for waiting for the initialization of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 to be completed.

When the 2-byte time waiting process is completed, the process advances to the next step S2746, and the main control board 50 sets the setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53. The setting command set in step S2746 indicates that the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) has been completed and the setting value. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2746, so it is confirmed that the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) is completed and the setting The value can be determined on the sub-control board 80 side.

Proceeding to the next step S2747, the main control board 50 clears (stores "0") the acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT) of the address "F011(H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2747.
When the clearing of the acquisition number data in step S2747 is completed, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) in step S248, and the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 in FIG.
When the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is started, first, in step S2751, the main control board 50 acquires the setting value data (_NB_RANK) from the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53, and Store in A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S2752.

Proceeding to step S2752, the main control board 50 generates set value display data. Specifically, in step S2752, the A register value is first stored in the C register, and then "1" is added to the A register value. Then, the process advances to the next step S2753.
As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6", and the setting value data is managed as "0" to "5", and when the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as set value data. Therefore, "N" obtained by adding "1" to the setting value data "N-1" is used as the setting value display data.

Proceeding to step S2753, the main control board 50 stores the generated setting value display data. Specifically, in step S2753, the A register value is stored in the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to the next step S2754.
In step S2754, the main control board 50 executes interrupt wait processing. This process is a process that waits until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) has elapsed. This is because by waiting for the interrupt process (I_INTR) to be executed once, the CPU waits for the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 to turn off (“0”).

In other words, when the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is operated (turned on), the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 turns on ("1"). Thereafter, if the interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed even once, the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is turned off (“0”).
However, after the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 turns on (“1”), the processing of steps S2752 to S2758 is looped multiple times before the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed. If this happens, the process of adding "1" to the set value data will be repeated.
Therefore, by waiting for the interrupt process (I_INTR) to be executed once in step S2754, the processes in steps S2752 to S2758 are looped multiple times, and the process of adding "1" to the set value data is repeatedly executed. This prevents this from happening.
Then, in step S2754, the process waits until one interrupt time has elapsed, and then proceeds to the next step S2755.

Note that when the level data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 was "0" during the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 was "1" during the current interrupt processing, , the rising data of the signal of the reset switch 153 becomes "1".
Furthermore, if the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" during the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" during the current interrupt processing, the reset switch 153 The rising edge data of the signal becomes "0".

Similarly, if the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0" during the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0" during the current interrupt processing, the reset switch 153 The rising edge data of the signal becomes "0".
Furthermore, if the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 was "1" during the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 was "0" during the current interrupt processing, the reset switch 153 The falling data of the signal becomes "1".
Other switches such as the start switch 41, stop switch 42, and setting key switch 152 are also similar to the reset switch (setting change switch) 153.

In step S2755, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to start setting confirmation. This process is a process for determining whether it is time to confirm settings or change settings. In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on in a state where the number of bets before the start of the game is "0", "1" is stored in the D register. In step S2755, the D register value is first stored in the A register, and then it is determined whether the A register value is "1". When the A register value is "1", it is determined that it is time to confirm the settings, and the process proceeds to step S2760. If the A register value is not "1" (the D register value is "0" or "7") ), it is determined that it is not the time to confirm the settings (it is the time to change the settings), and the process advances to step S2756. After determining whether the A register value is "1", the C register value is stored in the A register. As described above, since the A register value is stored in the C register in step S2752, the set value data is stored in the C register. Therefore, when the C register value is stored in the A register, the A register value becomes set value data.
Note that when the power is restored (when the power is turned on and program start processing (M_PRG_START) is started), the A register to L register are at the initial value (“0”).

Proceeding to step S2756, the main control board 50 refers to the rising data of the signal of the start switch 41 stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Then, when the rising data of the signal of the start switch 41 is "1", that is, when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S2759. On the other hand, when the rising data of the signal of the start switch 41 is "0", that is, when it is determined that the start switch 41 is not operated, the process advances to step S2757.

In step S2757, the main control board 50 refers to the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Then, when the rising data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1", that is, when it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been operated, the process advances to step S2758. On the other hand, when the rising data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0", that is, when it is determined that the reset switch 153 is not operated, the process returns to step S2752.

Proceeding to step S2758, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the set value data. Specifically, "1" is added to the A register value. As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is set value data. Then, when "Yes" in step S2757, that is, when it is determined that the setting change (reset) switch 153 has been operated, "1" is added to the setting value data. Note that when the A register value becomes "6" due to the addition, the A register value is rewritten to "0". Then, the process returns to step S2752.

Further, when proceeding to step S2759, the main control board 50 stores the setting value data. Specifically, the A register value is stored in the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53. As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is set value data. Then, even when the answer is "Yes" in step S2756 and the process proceeds to step S2759, the A register value remains the set value data. Then, in step S2759, the A register value is stored in the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53. Thereby, the setting value data can be stored in the RWM 53.

Proceeding to the next step S2760, the main control board 50 refers to the falling data of the signal of the setting key switch 152 stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Then, the process of step S2760 is repeated until the falling data of the signal of the setting key switch 152 becomes "1", that is, until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. When becomes "1", that is, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the process advances to step S2761.

In step S2761, the main control board 50 clears (to "0") the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at the address "F001(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Moreover, when the process according to this flowchart is completed when changing settings, the process proceeds to step S2743 in FIG. 44.

Here, the transition to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation in progress) will be explained.
In this embodiment, when the power is turned on (on), the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open), and the number of bets is "0", the setting key switch is When 152 is turned on, "1" is stored in the D register, and the state shifts to a setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (the setting value does not change even if the setting change switch 153 is operated), but the current setting value can be confirmed. Further, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. Then, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends and the state returns to the state in which medals can be bet.

More specifically, in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 determines whether the setting key switch 152 is on at a timing before the operation of the start switch 41 is detected. Then, when the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and the number of bets is "0", if it is determined that the setting key switch 152 is on, the setting change confirmation shown in FIG. 45 is confirmed. Proceed to processing (M_RANK_CTL). Further, steps S2751 to S2754 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 45 are as described above.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when the number of bets before the start of the game is "0", when the setting key switch 152 is turned on, "1" is stored in the D register. ing. Then, when the process proceeds to step S2755 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 45, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to start setting confirmation. Specifically, first, the D register value is stored in the A register, and then it is determined whether the A register value is "1". When the A register value is "1", it is determined that it is time to start setting confirmation ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2760.

Thereafter, the process of step S2760 is repeated until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. Meanwhile, the current setting value continues to be displayed on the setting value display LED 73. If it is determined in step S2760 that the setting key switch 152 is off, the process proceeds to step S2761, where the main control board 50 clears the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001(H)" of the RWM 53 0”). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In addition, when the process according to this flowchart is finished when confirming the settings, the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) determines whether or not the setting key switch 152 is on (whether or not to shift to the setting confirmation state). Proceed to the next process.

In this way, in the third embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process can be executed by the same module. That is, the setting change state and the setting confirmation state are created by the same module. Based on the information stored in the D register, it is determined whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
Note that it may be determined whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state based on information stored in other registers instead of the D register, and also based on information stored in the RWM 53. It may be determined whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the third embodiment. The main process is a process for one game. While the game is in progress, the main process is repeated every game.
First, in step S271, a stack pointer is set. The stack pointer refers to an area of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power outage (e.g., register values, main processing instruction processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when a power outage occurs, and the stack pointer is set and is a process of setting the register value to the initial value in the area of the RWM 53.

In the next step S272, game start setting processing is performed. This process involves generating, updating, saving, etc. the operating state flag.
In the next step S273, the bet medals are read. This process is a process of reading the number of medals currently bet, and reads the bet number data or the automatic bet number data.
In the next step S274, the presence or absence of bet medals is determined based on the bet number read in step S273.

When it is determined in step S274 that there are bet medals, the process proceeds to step S276, and when it is determined that there are no bet medals, the process proceeds to step S275 to perform a medal insertion waiting process, and then proceeds to step S276. In the medal insertion waiting process of step S275, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on, and when it is on, processing such as shifting to the setting confirmation mode is performed.
In step S276, management processing of the inserted medals is performed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the medals have been taken care of, and determining whether or not the payment switch 43 has been operated.

In the next step S277, soft random number updating processing is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1" at a time) a processing random number for processing (arithmetic processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used by the winning combination lottery means 61. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range of "0" to "65535(D)". Note that as an updating method, processing may be performed in which an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) that is incremented at the time of an interrupt) is added to the value before updating.

In the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S279, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Note that even if the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number for the game, "No" is determined in step S278.

In step S279, processing upon reception of the start switch is executed. This process is a process that sets a flag that settings cannot be changed, sets an output request when the reel 31 starts rotating, and sets the number of outputs for outputting a medal input signal as an external signal to a hall computer, etc. .
In the next step S280, the acquisition number data is cleared. This causes the acquisition number display LED 78 to display "00" (or to turn off).

Next, the process advances to step S281, and the main control board 50 executes a process of updating the number of AT games. This process is a process of subtracting the number of AT games when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT. Therefore, this process is not executed during non-AT.
Further, during AT, whether or not to add the number of AT games is determined based on the winning combination lottery result by the winning lottery processing in step S282. For example, when a rare combination is won, the number of additional AT games may be determined. Therefore, when adding the number of AT games and adding the additional amount to the AT game number counter, it is executed after the process of step S282 (not shown in FIG. 46).
In addition, after receiving the start switch (step S279), the AT game number counter is updated in step S281, but this is not limited to this. After the winning combination lottery process in step S282 or after all reels 31 are stopped (after step S290). The AT game number counter may also be updated.
In addition, in the specifications of the difference number management type AT, when it has an AT difference number counter, the AT difference number counter is activated after all reels 31 have stopped and after the medal payout process due to winnings has been completed (after step S300). Update.

In step S282, the winning combination lottery means 61 performs a winning combination lottery at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. In addition, the random number value at the time of winning lottery is acquired in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process is performed to determine whether or not the acquired random number corresponds to any winning combination using the winning combination lottery table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes an advantageous section transition lottery process. In this embodiment, an AT lottery is also executed during the advantageous section transfer lottery.
Next, the process advances to step S284, and a push order instruction number is set. This process generates a push order instruction number and displays push order instruction information when activating the instruction function in the game during AT (displaying the push order instruction number on the acquired number display LED 78). It is processing.

In the next step S285, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed. This process executes processing to determine whether or not the minimum gaming time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed, and if the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step S286.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing a timer value of the minimum playing time, and the initial value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms x 1834≈4099 ms)". In step S279, if it is determined that the minimum playing time is "0", an initial value "1834 (D)" is set as the minimum playing time (timer value). Then, the minimum gaming time is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt processing. When the process advances to step S285 for the next game, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time is "0", and when it is determined that it is "0", the process advances to step S286.

In step S286, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 to start rotating the reel 31. When the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state, the operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted, and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, acceptance of stopping the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not an operation signal of the stop switch 42 has been received, and when the operation signal is received, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is The stopping position of the reel 31 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether all the reels 31 have stopped, and when it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290, and when it is determined that all the reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S287. .

In step S290, the acquisition number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, by activating the instruction function during AT, push order instruction information (for example, "=1") may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In this case, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "00" due to the interrupt process executed after the process in step S290.
Note that the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off. Specifically, "00010011 (B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for turning off the light may be provided as segment data and that data may be output.

In step S291, symbol display is determined. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the active line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304; if it is determined that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S293. move on.
Here, since the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 usually does not stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of symbol display determination, when a symbol that should not originally be displayed (a kicking symbol) is displayed on the active line, it is determined that there is an abnormality and an irreversible error process is executed.

When it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S293, a process for updating the number of payouts is executed. This process is a process of storing the number of payouts in the game as payout number data and a payout number data buffer.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination. Next, the process advances to step S295, and interrupt wait processing is performed. In the next step S296, interrupt processing is prohibited. Through the processing in steps S295 and S296, the interrupt is prohibited immediately after the interrupt.

In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. Next, the process advances to step S298, and ratio setting processing is executed. This "ratio setting process" is a process of updating various counter values, calculating ratios, etc. in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (rotation ratio monitor). Then, in step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and in the next step S300, interrupts are permitted (restarted). In this manner, when executing the ratio setting process, the AF register is saved and the interrupt process is prohibited before the process is executed.

Note that interrupt processing is prohibited during ratio set processing because ratio set processing uses a program stored outside the used area, and when a program outside the used area is being executed in the main process. This is because if interrupt processing is inserted into the program, programs in the used area and programs outside the used area will coexist, making the processing complicated.

Next, the process advances to step S301, and a game end check process is performed. This process is a process for clearing the condition device (winning combination) flag and the like. Then, the process proceeds to step S302, where an output request set at the end of the game is performed, and a control command set 1 is performed in the next step S303. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has ended.
When the process of step S303 is finished, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 in the third embodiment.
In the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, the process proceeds to step S2770 after step S452, and the main control board 50 determines whether a power outage has occurred. If it is determined that a power-off has occurred, the main control board 50 proceeds to step S2771 and executes a power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN). On the other hand, if it is determined that a power outage has not occurred, step S2771 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S454.

In this way, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR). Therefore, when interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed because interrupts are disabled or because a program (second program) outside the used area is being executed, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) ) is also not executed. Note that the specific contents of the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) will be described later. When the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is completed, the process advances to step S454.

In the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, the process proceeds to step S2821 after step S455, and the main control board 50 executes LED display control (I_LED_OUT). In this way, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed in the interrupt processing (I_INTR). The specific details of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) will be described later.
When the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is finished, the process proceeds to step S2765, where the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the RWM 53's used area. Then, the process advances to step S2221, and the main control board 50 executes a ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).

Here, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is a process for controlling the lighting of the credit number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78, the set value display LED 73 (digits 1 to 5), etc. ) is executed by
On the other hand, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is a process for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9), and is executed by a program (second program) outside the usage area. The specific contents of the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) will be described later. When the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is completed, the process advances to step S458.

In step S458, the main control board 50 determines whether the set value is within the normal range. Specifically, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) stored at the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is read and stored in the A register. Next, a comparison operation is performed between the A register value and "5" ("5" is subtracted from the A register value), and it is determined whether the carry flag is set to "1". Then, when the carry flag ≠ "1", it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range (the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5"), and when the carry flag = "1" determines that the set value data is not within the normal range. Then, when it is determined that it is within the normal range, the process advances to step S459, and when it is determined that it is not within the normal range, the process advances to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) of step S2811.

In the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, if "No" in step S458 or "Yes" in step S460, the process advances to step S2811, and the main control board 50 performs the unrecoverable error processing 2. Execute (S_ERROR_STOP). The specific contents of unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.
Furthermore, in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, if "No" in step S460, the process advances to step S2766, and the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register) in step S2765. flag register)). Then, the process advances to step S457.

Here, in the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, the processes of step S2221, step S458, step S459, and step S460 are executed by a program (second program) outside the used area.
Then, when transitioning from processing by a program in the used area (first program) to processing by a program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is set in step S2765. The AF register is saved in the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53, and when finishing the processing by the program outside the used area (second program) and returning to the processing by the program in the used area (first program). Bring it back.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 in FIG.
When the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 is started, first, in step S2772, the main control board 50 saves the register. This process is a process for saving various registers to the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53.

Proceeding to the next step S2773, the main control board 50 clears all output ports 52. This turns off the output of all output ports 52, and for example, when the motor 32 is being driven (while the reels 31 are rotating) or the hopper motor 36 is being driven (while paying out medals), Stop its drive.
In the next step S2774, the main control board 50 stores the stack pointer at a predetermined address in the work area of the RWM 53's used area. Note that the stack pointer saved in step S2774 is restored in step S2722 of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG. 42.

Proceeding to the next step S2775, the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to step S2776, and the main control board 50 executes RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET). The specific contents of the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) will be described later. When the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) is completed, the process advances to the next step S2777, and the main control board 50 restores the AF register saved in step S2775. Then, the process advances to the next step S2778.

Note that the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) is executed by a program (second program) outside the used area.
Then, when transitioning from processing by a program in the used area (first program) to processing by a program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is set in step S2775. The AF register is saved in the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53, and when finishing the processing by the program outside the used area (second program) and returning to the processing by the program in the used area (first program), the AF register is saved in the stack area of the used area of the RWM53. Bring it back.

Proceeding to step S2778, the main control board 50 prohibits access to the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to the next step S2779, and the main control board 50 is placed in a reset wait state (loop processing state). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 in FIG.
When the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 is started, the main control board 50 first saves the stack pointer (SP register) to a specific address in the work area outside the used area of the RWM 53 in step S2781. , In the next step 2782, a stack pointer ("F400(H)") outside the used area is set, and when the process proceeds to the next step S2783, a plurality of registers are saved to the stack area outside the used area of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to the next step S2784.

Here, in step S2781, the stack pointer (SP register) is stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3(H)" in FIG. 35).
As mentioned above, RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) is a process performed by a program outside the used area (second program), so while the program outside the used area (second program) is being executed, the program in the used area is The stack pointer used in the (first program) is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program (first program) in the used area.
Furthermore, in step S2782, the stack pointer (address "F400(H)") outside the used area is stored in the stack pointer (SP register).
Furthermore, in step S2783, various registers are saved to a stack area outside the used area.

Proceeding to step S2784, the main control board 50 sets a power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53. Here, when the power-off processing is executed, "55 (H)" is stored as the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF).
Note that when the power is restored, the power-off processing completed flag is cleared (set to "0") in step S2724 of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG. 42. Therefore, after executing the process of step S2724, the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 becomes "00(H)". If the power-off processing is not executed, the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is not set, so the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 remains "00(H)".
Proceeding to the next step S2785, the main control board 50 clears (to "0") the RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) at the address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to the next step S2786.

Proceeding to step S2786, the main control board 50 sets the start address (“F000(H)”) of the used area of the RWM 53 in an address specification register (for example, B register), and proceeds to the next step S2787. , sets the number of bytes of the used area of the RWM 53 (checksum calculation number) in the register for the number of calculations (for example, C register), and proceeds to the next step S2788. , set initial data ("00000000(B)").

Then, the process advances to the next step S2789, and the main control board 50 executes checksum calculation processing for the used area of the RWM 53.
In this embodiment, the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the range of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)", and in the next step S2790, the checksum is applied to the address "F1FF(H)" of the RWM 53. The processes of steps S2789 and S2790 are repeated until it is determined that the calculation process is completed. As a result, the checksum of the used area of the RWM 53 (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") is calculated.

More specifically, in this embodiment, in step S2789, the data indicated by the address designation register (B register) value is subtracted from the checksum calculation register (D register) value. In the next step S2790, the value of the register (C register) for the number of calculations is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether the result is "0". When it is determined that the value is "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation process for the used area of the RWM 53 has been completed, and the process advances to step S2791. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "0", the value of the register for address designation (B register) is updated ("1" is added), and the process returns to step S2789.

When the checksum calculation process for the used area of the RWM 53 is completed, the process advances to step S2791, and the main control board 50 sets the start address outside the used area of the RWM 53 ("F210(H )"), and in the next step S2792, the number of bytes outside the used area of the RWM 53 (number of checksum calculations) is set in the register for the number of calculations (C register).

Then, the process advances to the next step S2793, and the main control board 50 executes checksum calculation processing for the area outside the RWM 53's use area.
In this embodiment, the areas outside the RWM 53's use area are set to addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)", and the checksum is calculated up to the address "F3FF(H)" of the RWM 53 in the next step S2794. The processing in steps S2793 and S2794 is repeated until it is determined that the processing has ended. As a result, the checksum outside the used area of the RWM 53 (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)") is calculated.

More specifically, in this embodiment, when the process advances to step S2793, the checksum calculation result of the used area of the RWM 53 is stored in the checksum calculation register (D register). Then, in step S2793, the data indicated by the address specification register (B register) value is subtracted from the checksum calculation register (D register) value. In the next step S2794, the value of the register (C register) for the number of calculations is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether the result is "0". When it is determined that the value is "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation process for the area outside the used area of the RWM 53 has been completed, and the process advances to step S2795. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "0", the address specification register (B register) value is updated ("1" is added), and the process returns to step S2793.

In this manner, in this embodiment, RWM checksum data (also referred to as complement data, error detection data, or error detection information) is calculated by executing the processes of steps S2785 to S2794.
As mentioned above, this RWM checksum data (complement data) includes data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53, and address "F210(H)" outside the used area. ~ "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") is a value that becomes "0" when added to the added value of the data.

When the checksum calculation process outside the area used by the RWM 53 is completed, the process advances to step S2795, and the main control board 50 stores (saves) the RWM checksum data (complement data) at the address "F2A0 (H)" of the RWM 53. )do.
Proceeding to the next step S2796, the main control board 50 restores the register saved in step S2783, and in the next step S2797, restores the stack pointer saved in step S2781. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 in FIG.
First, in step S2822, output ports 3 and 4 (FIG. 38) are turned off. The output port 3 is an output port corresponding to the digit 1 signal to the digit 5 signal, and the output port 4 is an output port corresponding to the segment 1A to segment 1P signals. By outputting "00000000 (B)" for these output ports 3 and 4, output of digits 1 to 5 is temporarily disabled. This prevents different LEDs from appearing to be lit at the same time (overlapping display) even for a moment when switching the LED display (afterimage prevention).

In the next step S2823, the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) of the used area (FIG. 33 and FIG. 40(A)) is updated. Updating the LED display counter 1 is a process of shifting the bit "1" by one digit to the right. This updated value is stored in the address "F051(H)" (FIG. 33) of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to step S2824.

In step S2824, it is determined whether the value of LED display counter 1 is "00000000 (B)". If it is determined that the value is "00000000(B)", the process advances to step S2825. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "00000000(B)", step S2825 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2826.

In step S2825, the LED display counter 1 is initialized. Here, the value of the LED display counter 1 is set to "00010000 (B)" and is stored at the address "F051 (H)" of the RWM 53 (FIG. 33). Then, the process advances to step S2826.
In step S2826, the values of the LED display counter 1 (address "F051(H)" in FIG. 33) and the LED display request flag (address "F052(H)" in FIG. 33) stored in the RWM 53 are acquired. Here, the value of LED display counter 1 is stored in the E register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the A register.

Next, the process advances to step S2827, and a segment display confirmation set for the digit to be displayed this time is performed. In this process, the A register value (the value of the LED display request flag) and the E register value (the value of the LED display counter 1) are ANDed to create data for the LED to be lit this time.

for example,
LED display counter value: 00001000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00001000B
becomes.
Or, for example,
LED display counter value: 10000000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00000000B
becomes.
Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register. Furthermore, the value stored in the A register is stored in the D register.

Next, the process advances to step S2828, and it is determined whether the A register value (the value obtained by ANDing the value of the LED display counter 1 and the value of the LED display request flag) is "0". Here, if it is "0", it is determined that there is no display request ("No"), and the process advances to step S2844. On the other hand, if it is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2829.

In step S2829, error display data is acquired. When an error occurs, error display data is stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53. Then, in step S2829, error display data is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the B register.
In the next step S2830, LED segment table 2 is set. This embodiment includes an LED segment table 1 that stores data for displaying alphabetic characters on a 7-segment display, and an LED segment table 2 that stores data for displaying numbers on a 7-segment display. These are stored in the used area of the ROM 54. Note that a description of the specific configurations of the LED segment tables 1 and 2 will be omitted. Then, in step S2830, the start address of the LED segment table 2 is read and the value is stored in the HL register.

Next, the process advances to step S2831, where the set value display data (address "F001(H)" in FIG. 33) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S2832, and it is determined whether there is a request to display a set value. Specifically, it is determined whether the D4 bit (bit corresponding to digit 5) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1"("00010000(B)"). When the D4 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a setting value display request ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2843. On the other hand, when the D4 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no setting value display request ("No"), and the process advances to step S2833.

In step S2833, the credit number data (address "F010(H)" in FIG. 33) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step S2834, an offset for upper digits is obtained. This process executes an operation to divide the A register value (credit number data obtained in step S2833) by "10 (decimal number)", stores the quotient value in the A register, and stores the remainder value in the C register. This is the process of

In the next step S2835, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the number of credits. Specifically, it is determined whether the D0 bit (bit corresponding to digit 1) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1". If the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2843. On the other hand, when the D0 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the upper digits of the credit number ("No"), and the process advances to step S2836.

Proceeding to step S2836, it is determined whether there is a request to display the lower digits of the number of credits. Specifically, it is determined whether the D1 bit (bit corresponding to digit 2) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1". If the D1 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2842. On the other hand, when the D1 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("No"), and the process advances to step S2837.

In step S2837, the acquisition number data (address "F011(H)" in FIG. 33) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step S2838, it is determined whether an error is being displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether the B register value is "0" or not, and if it is "0", it is determined that an error is not displayed ("No"), and the process advances to step S2840. On the other hand, if the B register value is not "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2839.

In step S2839, LED segment table 1 is set. At the time of proceeding to step S2839, the HL register stores the start address of LED segment table 2 for displaying numbers on the 7-segment display, but when an error is displayed, the 7-segment display displays the error type. Display the corresponding alphabetic character. Therefore, in step S2839, the start address of the LED segment table 1 for displaying English characters on the 7-segment display is read and the value is stored in the HL register. As a result, the start address of LED segment table 1 is set in the HL register instead of the start address of LED segment table 2 set in step S2830.

In the next step S2840, the offset for the upper digits is obtained. At the time when the process advances to step S2840, the acquisition number data obtained in step S2837 is stored in the A register, and the error display data obtained in step S2829 is stored in the B register. If no error has occurred, execute the operation of dividing the acquired number data stored in the A register by "10 (decimal number)", store the quotient in the A register, and store the remainder in the C register. do. On the other hand, when an error occurs, the error display data stored in the B register is divided by "10 (decimal number)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register.

In the next step S2841, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (bit corresponding to digit 3) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1". If the D2 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2843. On the other hand, when the D2 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number ("No"), and the process advances to step S2842.

In step S2842, an offset for lower digits is acquired. This process is a process for storing data stored in the C register in the A register. At the time of proceeding to step S2842, the quotient calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840 is stored in the A register, and the remainder calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840 is stored in the C register. Then, in step S2842, the C register value (remainder of division) is stored in the A register.

Next, the process advances to step S2843 to obtain segment output data. Specifically, the data stored in the HL register (the start address of LED segment table 2 stored in step S2830 or the start address of LED segment table 1 stored in step S2839) and the data stored in the A register ( (offset value corresponding to the display data) is added, and data corresponding to the address after the addition is obtained from the LED segment table 1 or 2 of the ROM 54 and stored in the D register.

Next, the process advances to step S2844, and it is determined whether there is a request to display segment P.
Specifically, first, the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 (E register value) is "1" (lighting timing of digit 4), and the advantageous section display LED flag (address "F062 (H )") is "1". Then, when the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", it is determined that there is a display request for segment P ("Yes"), and step Proceed to S2845.
On the other hand, when the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the advantageous section display LED flag is not "1", it is determined that there is no display request for segment P ("No"), and step S2845 is skipped and the process advances to step S2846.

Next, if the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is not "1", the process proceeds to the following.
AND operation is performed on LED display counter 1 (E register value) and status display LED lighting data (obtained from address “F044 (H)” of RWM53 in FIG. 33), and it is determined whether the AND operation result is “0” or not. . If the AND operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is a request to display segment P ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2845. On the other hand, when the AND operation result is "0", it is determined that there is no display request for segment P ("No"), step S2845 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S2846.

Proceeding to step S2845, segment P output data is set. Specifically, the segment output data (D register value) acquired in step S2843 and "10000000 (B)" are ORed, and the OR operation result is stored in the D register. As a result, the D7 bit (bit corresponding to segment P) of the segment output data becomes "1".

Then, the process advances to the next step S2846, where the digit signal is output from the output port 3 and the segment signal is output from the output port 4. Specifically, the data stored in the E register (LED display counter 1) is output as a digit signal from the output port 3, and the data stored in the D register (segment output data) is output as a segment signal from the output port. Output from 4. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP).
As mentioned above, the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is a process performed by the second program, and since the execution of interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited during the execution of the second program, it is impossible to recover from. No interrupt disable processing is provided after the start of error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). Other than this point, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51 is similar to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43.
Note that in FIG. 51, the same steps as those in FIG. 43 are given the same step numbers.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing preparation for ratio display (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG.
Ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is executed during interrupt processing (I_INTR). Also, in a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, between the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 46) and the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46) (during a game), and in a recoverable error state, Since the interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed, so that various ratio information can be displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

When the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) process is started, the main control board 50 first stores the stack pointer (SP register) in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3 (H)" in FIG. 35) in step S2461. to be memorized.
As mentioned above, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is a process performed by a program (second program) outside the used area, so while the program (second program) outside the used area is being executed, the program (second program) in the used area is executed. The stack pointer used in the first program is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program in the used area (the first program).

In the next step S2462, the main control board 50 sets the stack pointer outside the usage area. This process is a process of storing "F400(H)" in the stack pointer (SP register).
In the next step S2463, the main control board 50 saves the register. This process saves various registers to a stack area outside the used area.
Next, the process advances to step S2464, and the main control board 50 executes flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH). This process is a process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later, and is a process for updating the blinking request flag (address "F291(H)").

In the next step S2465, the main control board 50 updates the ratio display timer (S_RATE_TIME). This process is the process shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later, and includes the blinking switching flag (address "F293(H)"), display switching time (address "F294"), and blinking switching time (address "F296(H)"). This is the process of updating the .
In the next step S2466, the main control board 50 performs ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT). This process is a process shown in FIG. 56, which will be described later, and is a process for actually displaying (turning on or off) the ratio in the interrupt process.

Next, the process advances to step S2467, and the main control board 50 restores the register. This process is a process for restoring the various registers saved in step S2463.
In the next step S2468, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. This process is a process of storing the stack pointer saved in step S2461, that is, the data stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, in the stack pointer (SP register). In other words, this process causes the tap pointer to indicate the address of the used area. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, the settings change state, the settings confirmation state, the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46) (during the game), and return Even in a possible error state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed, so ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed.
Therefore, even in the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46) (during the game), and in the recoverable error state, the ratio By the display preparation process (S_DSP_READY), it is possible to sequentially display various ratios regarding information types and game results on digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (winning ratio monitor).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can be executed regardless of whether the door switch 17 is on or off (the front door 12 is opened or closed). That is, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is executed both when the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and when the door switch 17 is off (the front door 12 is closed). It is possible.
Therefore, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is performed both when the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and when the door switch 17 is off (the front door 12 is closed). Accordingly, it is possible to sequentially display various ratios regarding information types and game results on digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (winning ratio monitor).

In response, an unrecoverable error occurs, and the unrecoverable error state (unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 43 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 51 is executed, and the game progress is stopped. In the stopped state), interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited and ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is not executed. Various ratios related to game results will no longer be displayed.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, in an unrecoverable error state, in step S1494 of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. Turn off outputs 0 to 7 (“00000000(B)”).

As a result, in an unrecoverable error state, the output from output port 6 (output port for digit 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) is "00000000 (B)". Therefore, all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off until the irreversible error state is canceled and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is restarted.
The fact that all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off is a characteristic of an unrecoverable error state. You can let us know what happened.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) in step S2464 of FIG.
When starting the flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) process, the main control board 50 first sets the number of repetitions and initial values in step S2481. This process is a process of storing "6 (H)" in the B register and "0" in the C register.
Here, the number of repetitions "6" is a value for determining whether or not the ratio segments of six items blink.

In the next step S2482, the main control board 50 sets the address of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table. This process is a process of storing the start address of the flashing/non-applicable item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the DE register.
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a blinking/non-applicable item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH). The blinking/non-applicable item determination value table defines predetermined values for the ratios of six items, respectively. For example, the instruction-included accessory ratio of "70" means that the display is made to blink when the instruction-included accessory ratio is "70" or higher.
As shown in FIG. 54, the start address of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table is "2500 (H)". Therefore, "2500 (H)" is stored in the DE register.

Furthermore, "non-applicable item" refers to the fact that the function (performance) corresponding to the item is not provided. For example, in a gaming machine that is not equipped with "RB (first class special accessory)", the continuous accessory ratio is not displayed, so when the continuous accessory ratio is displayed, "--" is displayed in the ratio segment by lighting.
In the third embodiment, the ratio of all six items is displayed, but when there is a non-applicable item, "DE( H)".

For example, in a gaming machine that is not equipped with "RB (Class 1 Special Accessory)", the addresses "2502(H)" and "2504(H)" are replaced with "60(H)" in FIG. , "DE(H)" is stored.
In this way, no matter what kind of gaming machine it is, such as one that is not equipped with a "RB (Class 1 Special Accessory)", you can manage it by simply modifying some data in the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table. Control processing is included to enable lighting control of information. Therefore, the control program can be easily used in other products.
Note that the value corresponding to the non-applicable item is not limited to "DE(H)".

In the next step S2483, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the ratio data. This process is a process of storing the address ("F28D(H)" in FIG. 35) where the accessory state ratio data is stored in the HL register.
Next, the process advances to step S2484, and the main control board 50 acquires the blinking or non-applicable item determination value. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data at the address indicated by the DE register value in the A register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the A register value.

In the next step S2485, the main control board 50 determines whether the item value is not applicable. In this process, "DD(H)" is subtracted from the A register value, and when the operation result is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the item value is not applicable.
In other words, when the item is not applicable, as described above, "DE(H)" is stored in the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table, so "1" is subtracted from "DE(H)". After that, if "DD(H)" is further subtracted, it becomes "0", and the zero flag becomes "1".

Note that when a predetermined value other than "DE (H)" is stored as a value corresponding to a non-applicable item, for example, "predetermined value - 1 - (predetermined value - 1)" is calculated, and the calculation result is "0". (Zero flag=“1”), it is determined that the item value is not applicable.
In addition, the "predetermined value" may be a value exceeding "70 (H)" in the case of the designated accessory ratio, the accessory ratio (cumulative), and the accessory ratio (6000 times), and the continuous accessory ratio ( In the case of the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times), the value may be more than "60 (H)", and in the case of the accessory state ratio, the value may be more than "50 (H)".
If it is determined that the item value is not applicable, the process proceeds to the next step S2486, and if it is determined that the item value is not applicable, the process skips step S2486 and proceeds to step S2487.

In step S2486, the main control board 50 acquires ratio data. This process is a process of storing data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In the next step S2487, the main control board 50 stores the ratio data or non-applicable item values. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value. Note that this process has the following meaning.

When there is a non-applicable item, no data is stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 where the ratio data is stored before the above storage process.
For example, if "RB (Class 1 special accessory)" is not provided, continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) data (address "F289 (H)") and continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) data (address ""00(H)" is stored in "F28B(H)").

Although the details will be described later, when displaying the ratio in the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74, the ratio is displayed based on the information stored in the address. At that time, if "00 (H)" is stored in the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) data, when displaying the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times), the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74 will be "00" is displayed. In order to prevent this, "--" is displayed by storing the value of the A register ("DD(H)" in this embodiment) obtained in step S2485 as ratio data.
Note that this program processing is also designed so that it can be used in common by gaming machines that have non-applicable items and gaming machines that do not have non-applicable items.

In the next step S2488, the main control board 50 performs a blinking determination. This process is a process of subtracting data at the address indicated by the DE register value from the A register value. It should be noted that if the result of this calculation is a downgrade, the carry flag becomes "1".
Although the details will be described later, when the carry flag = "1", it means that the item is lit in a non-blinking manner when displaying the item, and when the carry flag = "0", This means that it lights up in a blinking manner when displaying the item.

Next, the process advances to step S2489, and the main control board 50 generates a blinking request flag. This processing performs arithmetic processing to rotate and shift the carry flag and C register value to the left.
Specifically, if the carry flag value is "CY" and the C register value is "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0",
"CY", C register value "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0"
of,
"D7", C register value "D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0, CY"
Perform the calculation as follows.

For example, when the C register value is the initial value "00000000 (B)" as shown in step S2481, and the carry flag is "1" in step S2488,
"1", C register value "00000000 (B)"
of,
"0", C register value "00000001 (B)"
Perform the calculation as follows.
Therefore, the C register value becomes "00000001(B)".
This C register value ultimately becomes the blinking request flag.
In other words, the process of step S2488 registers information for determining whether or not to blink the ratio segment of the item by calculation based on the ratio data and the specific value stored in the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table. (storage area).

In the next step S2490, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the next ratio data. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value.
For example, the HL register value in the first blinking determination is "F28D(H)" (accessories state ratio data) as described above. Here, if "1" is subtracted, the HL register value becomes "F28C(H)" (accessory ratio (cumulative) data), which is the subject of the second blinking determination.

In the next step S2491, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next blinking/non-applicable item determination value table. This process is a process of adding "1" to the DE register value. For example, if "2500 (H)" is initially stored as the DE register value, it becomes "2501 (H)" through this process.
Here, as shown in FIG. Blinking/non-applicable item determination values are stored in addresses "2500 (H)" to "2505 (H)" in order of accessory ratio.
As a result, a loop process (step Through S2484 to S2492), the target address can be specified, thereby simplifying the process.

Next, the process advances to step S2492, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the repetition has ended. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) When the B register value is not "0", it is determined that the repetition has not ended.
Here, since the B register value is set to "6" in the first step S2481, the number of repetitions is "6". If it is determined that the repetition has ended, the process advances to step S2493, and if it is determined that the repetition has not ended, the process returns to step S2484.
As described above, six items of blinking judgment are performed.

After completing the flashing determination for the six items and proceeding to step S2493, the main control board 50 acquires the total number of games counter value. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the value of the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games counter (address "F26D(H)") in the HL register.
(2) Store the value of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter (address "F26D(H)") in the A register.
As described above, the total number of games counter is composed of 3 bytes, and "F26D(H)" is the storage area for storing the first digit, and its value is stored in the L register.
Furthermore, "F26E(H)" is a storage area for storing the second digit, and its value is stored in the H register.
Furthermore, "F26F(H)" is a storage area for storing the third digit, and its value is stored in the A register.

In the next step S2494, the main control board 50 determines whether the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter is "0". This process determines whether the A register value stored in step S2493 is "0". When it is determined that the value is "0", the process advances to step S2495, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process advances to step S2496.
In step S2495, the main control board 50 determines whether 6000 games have elapsed. This process subtracts "6000 (D)" from the HL register value (lower 2 byte data of the total number of games counter). As a result of this calculation, if there is a downgrade, the carry flag becomes "1". Then, when the carry flag is "1", it is determined that 6000 games have not elapsed, and the process advances to step S2497.
On the other hand, if it is determined that 6000 games have elapsed, the process advances to step S2496.

In step S2496, the main control board 50 updates the flashing request flag data. This process is to set the D6 bit of the C register to "1". Here, the C register value is set to a value corresponding to the flashing request flag at address "F291(H)" in FIG. 35 (however, at this point, the bit is in an inverted state). Therefore, when 6000 games have passed, a process is executed to set the D6 bit to "1".

In the next step S2497, the main control board 50 determines whether the upper one byte of the total number of games counter exceeds "2" ("3" or more). Here, processing is performed to subtract "3" from the A register value. If there is no downturn in this subtraction, the carry flag≠“1”. When the carry flag≠"1", it is determined that the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter exceeds "2" ("3" or more).

The reason for doing this is to first compare the upper 1 byte with "3" in order to determine whether the number of games has reached 175,000. Here, "175000 (D)" is "2AB98 (H)" in hexadecimal, so it is inevitable that the A register value exceeds "2" (A register value is "3" or more). Specifically, it can be seen that the value of the total number of games counter exceeds "175,000 (D)".
In step S2497, if the carry flag ≠ "1", it is determined that the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter exceeds "2" and the process proceeds to step S2500; if the carry flag = "1", the total It is determined that the upper 1 byte of the number of games counter does not exceed "2" and the process advances to step S2498.

In step S2498, the main control board 50 determines whether the value of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter is "2". In this process, "2" is subtracted from the A register value, and when it is determined that it is not "0", it is determined that the value of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter is not "2". When it is determined that the value of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter is not "2", the process advances to step S2501, and when it is determined that the value of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter is "2", step S2499 Proceed to.

In step S2499, the main control board 50 determines whether 175,000 games have elapsed. Specifically, "AB98(H)" is subtracted from the HL register value, and if there is a downgrade as a result of this operation, the carry flag becomes "1". When the carry flag is "1", it is determined that 175,000 games have not yet elapsed.
If it is determined in step S2499 that 175,000 games have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2500, and if it is determined that 175,000 games have not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2501.

In step S2500, the main control board 50 updates the flashing request flag data. This process sets the D7 bit of the C register to "1". The D7 bit of the C register corresponds to the D7 bit (175000 game blinking flag) of the blinking request flag at address "F291(H)" in FIG. Then, the process advances to step S2501.

In step S2501, the main control board 50 generates a blinking request flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "01111111(B)" in the A register.
(2) Exclusive OR operation (XOR) is performed between the A register value and the C register value, and the operation result is stored in the A register.

Before the process of step S2501 is executed, as described above, among the data stored in the C register, "0" is stored in the blinking item (bit). For example, when 175,000 games have elapsed, the D7 bit is "1" as described above, so in other words, when 175,000 games have not elapsed, the D7 bit is "0".
Therefore, by inverting the bits of the C register value, a blinking request flag is generated so that the blinking item (bit) becomes "1".

In the next step S2502, the main control board 50 stores the flashing request flag generated in step S2501. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the blinking request flag ("F291(H)" in FIG. 35) in the HL register.
(2) Store the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value ("F291(H)" in FIG. 35).
As a result, items that blink become "1" and items that do not blink become "0". In this way, the information corresponding to each bit is expressed as "1" or "0", and the blinking request flags regarding eight items including whether or not to blink are stored at address "F291(H)" in FIG. be remembered.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) in step S2465 in FIG.
When starting the process of updating the ratio display timer (S_RATE_TIME), the main control board 50 first updates the display switching time in step S2511. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address storing the display switching time ("F294(H)" in FIG. 35) in the HL register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the subtraction result at the address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that cycles between "0" and "2144 (D)" when expressed as a decimal number as the display switching time.

Therefore, if the process is performed when the display switching time is "0", "2144(D)" (860(H)) is stored as the display switching time.
Further, when the process is performed when the flag is "0" and "2144(D)" (860(H)) is stored as the display switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".
Note that since the interrupt process is executed every 2.235 ms, the flag changes from "0" to "2144 (D)" approximately every 4792 ms, and the carry flag becomes "1".
As a result, the ratio display contents are switched approximately every 5 seconds.

In the next step S2512, the main control board 50 determines whether the display switching time has elapsed. This determination is to determine whether or not the carry flag was set to "1" in the process of step S2511, and when the carry flag was set to "1", it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed.
When it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the process advances to step S2513, and when it is determined that the display switching time has not elapsed, the process advances to step S2518.

In step S2513, the main control board 50 stores the blinking switching time. This process stores "134(D) (86(H))" at the address (blinking switching time) indicated by the data obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value (ie, "F296(H)").
In other words, when it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the blinking switching time is saved. A time of "2.235×134=299.49 (ms)" is stored as the blinking switching time.

Next, the process advances to step S2514, and the main control board 50 turns off the blinking switching flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the blinking switching flag ("F293(H)" in FIG. 35) in the HL register.
(2) Store "0" at the address indicated by the HL register value.
As described above, when the data stored in the blinking switching flag is "0", it means the light is on, and when it is "1", it means the light is off.
That is, at the timing when the display switching time has elapsed, the blinking switching flag becomes "0" (lit).

Next, the process advances to step S2515, and the main control board 50 updates the ratio display number. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the HL register value.
In other words, the address of the RWM 53 ("F292(H)" in FIG. 35) corresponding to the ratio display number is stored in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
This process executes a cyclic addition process that cycles between "0" and "5" for the ratio display number. Therefore, if the process is performed when the ratio display number is "5", "0" is stored as the ratio display number. Furthermore, if the process is performed when the ratio display number is less than "5", the carry flag becomes "1".

In the next step S2516, the main control board 50 determines whether the updated ratio display number is "0". Here, when the carry flag = "1", it is determined that the ratio display number is not "0". In other words, if the process of step S2515 is executed when the ratio display number is "5", the carry flag ≠ "1" (= "0"), and at this time, it is determined that the ratio display number is "0". do.

Then, in step S2516, if it is determined that the updated ratio display number is "0", the process advances to step S2517, and if it is determined that it is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S2517, the main control board 50 corrects the ratio display number. This process is a process of adding "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value ("F292(H)" in FIG. 35). Through this process, when "0" is stored in the ratio display number, it is updated to "1". As a result, the ratio display number cycles through "1" to "6". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

When it is determined in step S2512 that the display switching time has not elapsed and the process proceeds to step S2518, the main control board 50 updates the blinking switching time. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the blinking switching time ("F296(H)" in FIG. 35) in the HL register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the subtraction result at the address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that cycles between "0" and "134 (D)" when expressed as a blinking switching time in decimal notation.
Therefore, if the process is performed when the blinking switching time is "0", "134(D)" (86(H)) is stored as the blinking switching time.
Further, when the process is performed when the flag is "0" and "134 (D)" (86 (H)) is stored as the blinking switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".

Next, the process advances to step S2519, and the main control board 50 determines whether the blinking switching time has elapsed. This determination is made by determining whether the carry flag is "1" or not, and when the carry flag≠"1", it is determined that the blinking switching time has not elapsed. When it is determined that the blinking switching time has elapsed, the process advances to step S2520, and when it is determined that the blinking switching time has not elapsed, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S2520, the main control board 50 updates the blinking switching flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the blinking switching flag ("F293(H)" in FIG. 35) in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the stored data at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the added result at the address.
This process executes a cyclic addition process that cycles between "0" and "1" for the blinking switching flag. Therefore, if this process is performed when the blinking switching flag is "1", "0" is stored as the blinking switching flag.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S2466 in FIG.
When the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) starts, the main control board 50 first acquires the value of the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (address "F297(H)" in FIG. 35) in step S1471. This process is a process of acquiring the value of the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) and storing it in the D register.

In the next step S1472, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a ratio display request. Here, it is determined whether there is a request to display any of digits 6 to 9. Specifically, the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in the D register and "00001111(B)" are ANDed. If the AND operation result is "0", it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if the AND operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and the process advances to step S1475.
Note that in the third embodiment, the result of the AND operation between the value of the LED display counter 2 and "00001111(B)" will never be "0", and therefore "No" will not be obtained in step S1472.

In the next step S1475, the ratio display number (address "F292(H)" in FIG. 35) is acquired. This process executes a process of acquiring a ratio display number and storing it in the A register, and further storing the A register value in the E register.
Here, the number of flashing bit tests, which will be described later, is determined based on the ratio display number. For example, here are some examples:
Example 1)
Ratio display number is "1": Obtain the number of flashing bit checks of the instruction-included accessory ratio.
Example 2)
Ratio display number is "2": Obtain the number of flashing bit tests for the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times).
Example 3)
Ratio display number is "5": Obtain the number of flashing bit tests for the accessory ratio (total cumulative total).
Example 4)
Ratio display number is "6": Obtain the number of flashing bit inspections of the state ratio of accessories, etc.
Further, by executing the process of storing the A register value in the E register, the A register value and the E register value become the same value.

In the next step S2531, the address of the flashing bit test count table is set. In this process, an address obtained by subtracting "1" from the start address of the flashing bit test count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) is stored in the HL register.
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the flashing bit test frequency table (TBL_FLASH_CHK).
As shown in FIG. 57, a predetermined value (for example, the value corresponding to the designated accessory ratio is "8 (H)") is stored for each ratio.
The first address is "2510(H)". Therefore, "250F(H)" is stored in the HL register.

It should be noted that the "flashing bit test count" is a value indicating how many bits from the D0th bit the bit to be tested is reached in the flashing request flag of the address "F292(H)".
For example, in FIG. 57, "8 (H)" is stored in the designated accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio (cumulative total), accessory ratio (cumulative total), and accessory state ratio. , is a value for determining whether or not the value of the 8th D7 bit counting from the D0 bit is "1" in the blinking request flag. The D7th bit is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of games has not reached 175,000 times, and when this D7th bit is "1", the instruction included accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio The identification segments of (cumulative total), accessory ratio (cumulative total), and accessory state ratio are to be blinked.

In addition, in FIG. 57, "7 (H)" is stored in the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) and the accessory ratio (6000 times), but this is from the D0th bit in the blinking request flag. This value is used to determine whether or not the value of the seventh D6 bit is "1". The D6th bit is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of games has not reached 6000 times, and when this D6th bit is "1", the continuous role object ratio (6000 times), The identification segment with the accessory ratio (6000 times) will be flashed.

In the next step S2532, the main control board 50 sets the number of identification segment blinking bit tests. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value in the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the B register.
For example, when the A register value (ratio display number stored in step S1475) is "3",
250F (H) + 3 (H) = 2512 (H) (=HL register value)
7(H) (=B register value)
becomes.

In other words, "250F(H)" becomes the reference address, and the data stored in the ratio display number (address "F292(H)") is used as the offset value to calculate the address of the blinking bit inspection table and store it in the address. This makes it possible to obtain the data that has been
In the above example, "7 (H)", which is the information for determining whether to blink the identification segment when the accessory ratio (6000 times) is stored in the address "2512 (H)", is obtained. be done.

Next, the process advances to step S1476, and the main control board 50 sets an identification segment offset table. This process is a process of storing the start address of the identification segment offset table (TBL_SEGID_DATA) in the HL register. The starting address is "2520(H)", and "251F(H)", which is the value obtained by subtracting "1" from this address, is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S1477, the main control board 50 acquires the identification segment offset value. This process is a process of reading from the identification segment offset table using the ratio display number stored in the A register in step S1475 as an offset value.
Specifically, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value in the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
As a result, for example, when the ratio display number is "1", "2520(H)", which is "251F(H)" plus "1(H)", is stored in the HL register and stored at the address. "7A(H)", which is the data obtained, is stored in the A register. Also, when the ratio display number is "2", "2521(H)", which is "251F(H)" plus "2(H)", is stored in the HL register, and the data stored at the address is "6B(H)" is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1478, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits) (request to display digit 6). Here, it is determined whether the D0 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits), the process advances to step S1482, and if there is no display request, the process advances to step S1479.

In step S1479, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) (request to display digit 7). Here, it is determined whether the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits), the process advances to step S1483, and if there is no display request, the process advances to step S2533.

In step S2533, the main control board 50 sets the number of ratio segment blinking bit tests. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the A register.
(2) Store the A register value in the B register.
Here, the ratio display number acquired in step S1475 is stored in the E register. Therefore, the same value is stored in the E register, A register, and B register.
Next, the process advances to step S1480. Note that the process proceeds to step S1480 when there is no request to display the ratio (1000 digits) and ratio (100 digits), that is, when there is no request to display the identification segment (when displaying the ratio segment). Therefore, in step S1480, ratio data is obtained.
In step S1480, the main control board 50 obtains a numerical value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register. For example, when the E register value is "00000001 (B)" corresponding to the ratio display number "1", the instruction-included accessory ratio data is acquired.

Acquisition of specific ratio data is as follows.
(1) In the HL register, store the value (“F287(H)”) obtained by subtracting “1” from the address of the RWM 53 where the designated accessory ratio data is stored (“F288(H)” in Figure 35). do.
(2) Store the data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value in the HL register.
(3) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In other words, the RWM address where the ratio data is stored is calculated (designated) using "F287(H)" as the reference address and the ratio display number as the offset value, and the data stored at the RWM address is stored in the register (storage area). can be retrieved (memorized).

As a result of this process, the A register contains instructional accessory ratio data, continuous accessory ratio data (6000 times), accessory ratio data (6000 times), continuous accessory ratio data (cumulative), accessory ratio data (cumulative ), an offset value for displaying any one of the accessory state ratios is stored. Note that this offset value (A register value) is used when obtaining ratio display segment data in step S1484.

Next, the process advances to step S1481, and the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display a ratio (one digit) (request to display digit 9). This process is a process of determining whether or not the D3 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1". If there is a request to display the ratio (one digit), the process advances to step S1483, and if there is no display request, the process advances to step S1482.
Note that when there is no request to display the ratio (1 digit) in step S1481, there is a request to display the ratio (10 digits).

Through the above processing, if there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits) or the ratio (10 digits), the process advances to step S1482, and if there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) or the ratio (1 digit), the process advances to step S1483. .
In step S1482, the main control board 50 sets an offset for upper digits. When the process advances to step S1482, the purpose is to light up the upper digits of the identification segment or the ratio segment. At this point, the A register stores the identification segment offset value (step S1477) or the ratio data (step S1480). Here, the following processing is executed.

(1) Swap the lower 4 bits and upper 4 bits stored in the A register.
For example, if the data before swapping is "0011/1001(B)"("/" indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits), the lower 4 bits and upper 4 bits are swapped. Then, it becomes "1001/0011(B)".
(2) Perform an AND operation on the A register value and "00001111(B)" and store the operation result in the A register. This process uses the lower 4 bits of the A register as an offset value, so the upper 4 bits are masked (set to "0").
Of the 1-byte data of the identification segment offset value and the 1-byte data of the offset value for displaying the ratio, the upper 4 bits correspond to the offset value of the upper digit, and the lower 4 bits correspond to the offset value of the lower digit. ing. Therefore, by performing the above processing, an offset value for acquiring the segment data of the upper digits is generated.

In the next step S1483, the main control board 50 sets a ratio display segment data table. This process is a process of storing the start address of the ratio display segment data table in the HL register. The start address is "2530(H)", and "2530(H)" is stored in the HL register. Note that a description of the specific structure of the ratio display segment data table will be omitted.

Next, the process advances to step S1484, and the main control board 50 acquires segment output data. This process adds the A register value (offset value) to the HL register value (the start address of the ratio display segment data table), and stores the data corresponding to the address of the ratio display segment data table after the addition in the E register. It is processing.
Specifically, for example,
HL register value = 2530 (H) (before addition; start address value of ratio display segment data table)
A register value = 5 (H)
When it is,
HL register value = 2535 (H) (after addition)
E register value = 01101101 (B) ("5" display data)
becomes.

Next, the process advances to step S1485, and the main control board 50 determines whether segment P is displayed. In this embodiment, when displaying digits 6 to 9, segment P (dot) of digit 7 is always displayed, so when there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits), it is determined that segment P is displayed. . On the other hand, when there is a request to display a ratio (1 digit), a ratio (10 digits), and a ratio (1000 digits), it is determined that there is no request to display the segment P.

Here, for example, it is determined whether the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1" or not, and when it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request for segment P, and when it is not "1", it is determined that there is a display request for segment P. determines that there is no request to display segment P. Specifically, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "00000010(B)" in the A register.
(2) Perform an AND operation on the A register value and the D register value (the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in step S1471), and if the operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is a request to display segment P.
When it is determined that there is a request to display segment P, the process advances to step S1486, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process advances to step S2534.

In step S1486, the main control board 50 sets output data corresponding to the segment P. Segment P corresponds to bit D7 of the 8-bit data, so the segment data (E register value) obtained in step S1484 is ORed with "10000000 (B)", and the result of the operation is stored in E register. Remember.

In the next step S2534, the main control board 50 acquires the blinking request flag. This process is a process for storing data of the blinking request flag (address "F291(H)" in FIG. 35) in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S2535, and the main control board 50 performs a blinking bit test. This process is a process of shifting the A register to the right by "1" and storing the overflow result in the carry flag. That is, the value of the D0 bit before being shifted by "1" is stored in the carry flag. Therefore, if the value of the D0 bit before shifting "1" is "0", the carry flag = "0", and if the value of the D0 bit before shifting "1" is "1", the carry flag = "1". Become.

In the next step S2536, the main control board 50 determines whether the inspection has ended. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) When it is determined that the B register value is "0", it is determined that the test has ended.
When it is determined that the examination has been completed, the process advances to step S2537, and when it is determined that the examination has not been completed, the process returns to step S2535.
Through the above processing, the value of the blinking request flag is shifted to the right by the number of times initially stored in the B register, and the result of overflowing at that time is stored in the carry flag.

For example, when the value of the blinking request flag is "10000000 (B)" (the 175000th blink flag of the D7th bit is on) and the B register value is "8 (H)",
1st time: “10000000 (B)” → “01000000 (B)”, carry flag = “0”
B register value = 8-1 = 7 (H)
2nd time: “01000000 (B)” → “00100000 (B)”, carry flag = “0”
B register value = 7-1 = 6 (H)
3rd time: "00100000 (B)" → "00010000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 6-1 = 5 (H)
4th time: "00010000 (B)" → "00001000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 5-1 = 4 (H)
5th time: "00001000 (B)" → "00000100 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 4-1 = 3 (H)
6th time: "00000100 (B)" → "00000010 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 3-1 = 2 (H)
7th time: “00000010 (B)” → “00000001 (B)”, carry flag = “0”
B register value = 2-1 = 1 (H)
8th time: “00000001 (B)” → “00000000 (B)”, carry flag = “1”
B register value = 1-1 = 0 (H)
becomes.

In step S2537, the main control board 50 determines whether the blinking request flag is on. In this process, it is determined whether the carry flag is "1" when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection has ended, and when it is "1", it is determined that the flashing request flag is on. When it is determined that the blinking request flag is on, the process advances to step S2538, and when it is determined that the blinking request flag is not on, the process advances to step S1487.

In step S2538, the main control board 50 determines whether the blinking switching flag is on. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data of the blinking switching flag (address "F293(H)" in FIG. 35) in the A register.
(2) When the A register value is "0" (second zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the blinking switching flag is not on.
When it is determined that the blinking switching flag is on, the process advances to step S2539, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process advances to step S1487.
Note that from steps S2537 and S2538,
a) If the blinking request flag is off (“No” in step S2537), the process does not proceed to step S2538, so even if the blinking switching flag is on, the light does not turn off.
b) Even if the blinking request flag is on (“Yes” in step S2537), if the blinking switching flag is off (“No” in step S2538), the light is turned on.
c) If the blinking request flag is on (“Yes” in step S2537) and the blinking switching flag is on (“Yes” in step S2538), the process advances to step S2539, and the light is turned off.

In step S2539, the main control board 50 clears the segment data. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the E register.
Here, the B register value is always "0" when it is determined in step S2536 that the test is completed. Therefore, this process is a process of setting "0" in the E register. In other words, when the blinking request flag is on (“1”) and the blinking switching flag is on (“1”, i.e., off), the interrupt processing turns off the display to be lit, so the segment In order to set the data (E register value) to "00000000 (B)", the process of step S2539 is executed. Then, the process advances to step S1487.

In step S1487, the main control board 50 outputs the segment signal from the output port 7 and the digit signal from the output port 6 in order to output the digit signal and the segment signal. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Exchange the DE register value and HL register value.
Here, a digit signal is stored in the D register. Furthermore, the E register stores segment signals. and,
Swap the data stored in the D register with the data stored in the H register,
The data stored in the E register and the data stored in the L register are exchanged.
This results in
A digit signal is stored in the H register,
The segment signal is stored in the L register.
(2) Output the L register value to output port 7 and output the H register value to output port 6.
This ends the processing according to this flowchart.

Next, the operation when operating the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the third embodiment will be described.
In a situation where the advantageous section display LED 77 is on and medals can be bet, if a recoverable error state occurs (e.g. medal selector medal retention error ("CE" error), etc.), the reset switch ( It is assumed that the RWM clear switch) 153 is operated and the recoverable error state is canceled.
In this case, as described above, even if the recoverable error state is canceled, the data in the used area and outside the used area of the RWM 53 is maintained without being initialized, so the data regarding the advantageous section is also maintained without being initialized. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 also remains lit.
Note that when returning from a recoverable error state, error-related data such as an error detection flag stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 may be initialized.

On the other hand, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is on and a medal can be bet, and a recoverable error state occurs, the power is turned off and the setting key switch 152 is then turned off. Assume that the power is turned on under the condition that , and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on (operated).
In this case, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. The result is "No", and the result in step S2710 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the time of starting the setting change during normal power-off recovery is set.

Furthermore, since the situation is such that medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so the result is "Yes" in step S2714, and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and the address "F292(H)" outside the used area ~"F3FF(H)" initialization processing is executed. Therefore, the data regarding the advantageous section is initialized, so the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off. However, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of address "F000(H)" is maintained without being initialized, so the setting value is not changed. Further, since it is a reset time, the answer is "Yes" in step S2741 in FIG. 44, and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped, so the setting change state is not changed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) of step S248, and the state returns to the state where medals can be bet.

In this way, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and a medal can be bet and a recoverable error state occurs, if the reset switch 153 is operated to cancel the recoverable error state, It is possible to maintain the game in an advantageous section.
On the other hand, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is on and a medal can be bet, and a recoverable error state occurs, the power is turned off once and then the reset switch 153 is turned on. When the power is turned on, the recoverable error state can be canceled and the game can be resumed from the normal period instead of the advantageous period.
This allows the manager (hall clerk) to select whether to maintain the game in the advantageous section or restart the game from the normal section.

Further, for example, suppose that the player stops playing during a game in an advantageous section (in the middle of a game in an advantageous section). In such a case, if the next player plays a game in the middle of the game in the advantageous section, that player will become too advantageous.
On the other hand, changing settings while the hall is in operation is undesirable because it may arouse the gambling spirit of the players.
Further, if the gaming machines are turned off and stopped operating while the parlor is in operation, the operating rate of the gaming machines will decrease, which is not favorable for the management of the parlor.
Therefore, in a situation where the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, the power is once turned off, and then the power is turned on with the reset switch 153 turned on. Thereby, the game can be restarted from the normal section without changing the settings.

Further, under a situation in which medals can be bet, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is on, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off (not operated). , suppose the power is turned on.
In this case, it becomes possible to shift to a setting change state (setting change mode, setting change in progress), and then, when the start switch 41 is operated and the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and the setting change state ends, medals can be bet. Return to the situation.

Specifically, in a situation where medals can be bet, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off (not operated). Under these circumstances, when the power is turned on, "Yes" is determined in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, and the process advances to step S2711. Furthermore, since this is not an abnormal time for power-off recovery, the answer in step S2712 is "No", and the process advances to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the time of starting the setting change in normal power-off recovery is set. Furthermore, since the situation is such that medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so "Yes" is determined in step S2714, and the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Further, since it is not the time of reset, "No" is returned in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, and the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742. Then, since it is not the time to start setting confirmation, "No" is obtained in step S2755 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 45, and the processes of steps S2752 to S2758 are repeated until "Yes" is obtained in step S2756. In other words, the settings are changed. Thereafter, when the start switch 41 is operated, the result becomes "Yes" in step S2756, and further, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the result becomes "Yes" in step S2760, and the setting change state ends. Then, through the processing of steps S2743 to S2747 in FIG. 44, the process proceeds to the main processing (M_MAIN) of step S248 (FIG. 46), and the state returns to the state where medals can be bet.

In addition, as described above, in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46), the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46), including during the rotation of the reels 31, are performed. During this period, the settings cannot be changed, and during this period, the settings cannot be changed flag is turned on.
Then, the power is turned off when the setting change prohibition flag is on, and then the power is turned on under a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. 41, the result is "No" in step S2714 of FIG. 41, so the process does not proceed to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731, and therefore does not proceed to the setting change state.

On the other hand, in a situation where medals can be bet, the settings cannot be changed flag is off, so in such a situation, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is on, and the reset switch is turned off. (RWM clear switch) 153 is off and when the power is turned on, the result is "Yes" in step S2714 in FIG. It will be possible to move to

Further, as described above, when the power-off recovery is normal, if an operation is performed to shift to the setting change state, the process advances to step S2713 in FIG. ” to “F1FF(H)” and addresses outside the used area “F292(H)” to “F3FF(H)” are set. Further, the initialization range of the usage area of the RWM 53 includes the credit number data (_NB_CREDIT) of the address "F010(H)" and the bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) of the address "F043(H)".

Therefore, in situations where medals can be bet, the number of bets is between "1" and "3", and the number of credits is between "1" and "50", the power is turned off. If the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered. When the game ends and the situation becomes such that medals can be bet, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Further, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is one of "1" to "3", and the number of credits is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, if the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered, the setting change state ends and medals can be bet. When this situation occurs, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Furthermore, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is one of "1" to "50", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch is turned off. 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, if the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered, the setting change state ends and the medal is bet. When the situation becomes possible, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Further, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is on, and the setting key switch 152 is reset. If the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered while the switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the setting change state ends and medals can be bet. , the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Further, under a situation in which medals can be bet, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on (operated). , suppose the power is turned on. In this case, it becomes possible to execute the initialization process of a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and after the initialization process is executed, it becomes possible to bet medals without shifting to the setting change state.

Specifically, the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned off in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. If it is turned on, the result in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. The initialization range of RWM 53 is set. Furthermore, since the situation is such that medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so the result is "Yes" in step S2714, and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and the address "F292(H)" outside the used area ~"F3FF(H)" initialization processing is executed.
Furthermore, since it is a reset time, the answer is "Yes" in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, and the process skips the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742, and proceeds to step S2743. Therefore, it does not move to the setting change state. Thereafter, through the processes of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) of step S248, and the state returns to the state where medals can be bet.

Furthermore, the power is turned off when the setting change prohibition flag is on, and then the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. Then, since the answer is "No" in step S2714 of FIG. 41, the process does not proceed to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731, and therefore, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is not executed.

On the other hand, under a situation in which medals can be bet, the settings cannot be changed flag is off, and under such a situation, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is off, and the reset switch ( When the power is turned on while the RWM clear switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the result is "Yes" in step S2714 in FIG. Processing is executed.

Further, the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. Then, in step S2713 of FIG. 41, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set to the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF" outside the used area. (H)" is set. This initialization range is the same as the initialization range that is set when an operation for transitioning to a setting change state is performed during normal power-off recovery.

In other words, under the condition that the power-off recovery is normal (not abnormal power-off recovery), the setting key switch 152 is on, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the power is turned off. When the power is turned on, the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, and the RWM 53 is turned on in the same range as when the power is turned on. Initialization processing is executed.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the setting key switch 152 is not operated, and therefore even if the setting key is not in possession, the operation can be performed within the same range as when the operation for transitioning to the setting change state is performed. , RWM 53 initialization processing can be executed.
Further, in this embodiment, the initialization process of the RWM 53 can be executed within the same range as when transitioning to the setting change state without transitioning to the setting change state.

Therefore, in situations where medals can be bet, the number of bets is between "1" and "3", and the number of credits is between "1" and "50", the power is turned off. If the power is then turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then , when it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Further, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is one of "1" to "3", and the number of credits is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. Even if the power is turned on in a situation where the RWM 53 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then medals can be bet. When this happens, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Furthermore, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is one of "1" to "50", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch is turned off. 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, even if the power is turned on, the RWM 53 initialization process is executed, and then medals can be bet. When this happens, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Further, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off and reset. Even if the power is turned on while the switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and after that, when it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets is becomes "0", and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Further, the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. Suppose that That is, it is assumed that the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on. In this case, it becomes possible to shift to a setting change state, and then the start switch 41 is operated, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the setting change state ends, the state returns to a state in which medals can be bet.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the program start process (M_PRG_START), it is determined in step S2707 whether the setting key switch signal is on, and then, in step S2710 it is determined whether the reset switch signal is on. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal is on, and then it is determined whether or not the reset switch signal is on.
Therefore, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the answer in step S2707 is "Yes" and the process does not proceed to step S2710. That is, when the power is turned on in a situation where both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the setting key switch 152 takes priority. Then, when proceeding to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, the answer is "No" in step S2741, and the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742, so that it is possible to shift to the setting change state.

Further, assume that the setting value "M" (for example, "2") is first displayed on the setting value display LED 73 when the setting change state is entered. At this time, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM53 is "M-1", and the value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) of "F001(H)" is "M". It is.
Assume that the setting change switch 153 is then operated and the setting value "N" (for example, "3") is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. At this time, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of RWM53 remains "M-1", and the value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) of "F001(H)" is " N”.

Furthermore, assume that the power is turned off without the start switch 41 being operated while the setting value "N" is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. In this case, since the start switch 41 has not been operated, the set value data after the change is not saved (memorized) at the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53, so the value of "F000(H)" is "M -1" is maintained. Furthermore, since the start switch 41 has not been operated and the setting key switch 152 has not been turned off, the power is turned off without completing the setting change state (staying in the setting change state).

It is assumed that the power is then turned on under a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. In this case, the power is simply turned on and off, and the used area and data outside the used area of the RWM53 are maintained without being initialized, so the settings will return to the same state as when the power was turned off. return to the state. Additionally, “M-1” is stored in the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of address “F000(H)” of RWM53, and “N” is stored in the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) of “F001(H)”. Therefore, when the setting change state is restored, the setting value "N" is displayed on the setting value display LED 73.

On the other hand, assume that the setting value "M" (for example, "2") is first displayed on the setting value display LED 73 when the setting change state is entered. Assume that the setting change switch 153 is then operated and the setting value "N" (for example, "3") is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. Furthermore, assume that the power is turned off without the start switch 41 being operated while the setting value "N" is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. Up to this point, the process is the same as the above case. Next, assume that the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.

In this case, the result in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 is "No", and the result in step S2710 is "Yes", so the process advances to step S2731 to initialize the RWM 53 at the time of starting the setting change during normal power-off recovery. The conversion range is set. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and the address "F292(H)" outside the used area ~"F3FF(H)" initialization processing is executed. Therefore, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is maintained as "M-1".
Furthermore, since it is a reset time, the answer is "Yes" in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, and the process skips the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742, and proceeds to step S2743. Therefore, it does not move to the setting change state. Thereafter, through the processes of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) of step S248, where it becomes possible to bet medals. At this time, the value of the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is maintained as "M-1", so the set value becomes "M".

Further, assume that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on under a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.
In this case, in an unrecoverable error state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed, and therefore power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed, so when the power is turned off, the power-off processed flag is not set, and the RWM checksum No data is saved either.

Furthermore, since the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off, the result in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 is "No", and the process advances to step S2708. Further, since the power-off processing completion flag is not set and the RWM checksum data is not saved, the answer is "Yes" in step S2708, and the process advances to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801.
That is, if the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state and then turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the power will be turned off again. , an unrecoverable error state occurs.

Note that although the power is turned on in a situation where the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 does not proceed to step S2710, so the power-off recovery process (M_POWER_ON ) is never executed, and initialization processing (M_INI_SET) is never executed.
Also, while the second program is executing the process, the interrupt process (I_INTR) is not executed and the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed, so if the power is turned off while the second program is executing the process, then When the power was turned on, the power-off processing completion flag was not set and the RWM checksum data was not saved, so "Yes" was returned in step S2708, and the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) was performed in step S2801. ). In other words, an unrecoverable error state occurs.

Also, while the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is being executed by a program outside the usage area (second program), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear When the power is turned on in a situation where the switch) 153 is on, the result in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Therefore, irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed by the program (first program) in the used area.

Similarly, while the program (first program) in the used area is executing unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch ) 153 is on, even if the power is turned on, the result in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Therefore, irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed by the program (first program) in the used area.

Further, suppose that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on under a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off.
In this case, "Yes" is determined in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, and the process proceeds to step S2711, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the time of starting the setting change at the time of power-off recovery abnormality is set. Furthermore, since this is a power-off recovery abnormality, "Yes" is determined in step S2712, and the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. and the entire range outside the used area (addresses “F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)”) is initialized. Therefore, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of address “F000(H)” of RWM53 is executed. will be "0", so the set value will be "1".

Also, since it is not the time of reset, "No" is returned in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, and the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742, and shifts to the setting change state.
Assume that in this setting change state, the power is turned off without operating the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153. In this case, since interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed in the setting change state, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed.
It is assumed that the power is then turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. In this case, since it is not a power-off recovery abnormality, the result is "No" in step S2708 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41. Furthermore, since the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the result in step S2710 is "Yes". Then, the process advances to step S2713, and the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the time of starting the setting change when the power-off recovery is normal is set.

Further, since the setting change prohibition flag is off, "Yes" is determined in step S2714 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, and the process proceeds to the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) of step S2731. Further, since it is a reset time, "Yes" is determined in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 is skipped. Therefore, this time, there is no transition to the setting change state. Thereafter, through the processes of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) of step S248, where it becomes possible to bet medals. At this time, the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is "0" as described above, so the set value becomes "1".

Also, in this embodiment, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in step S2771 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47 . Further, in step S2776 of the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 48, RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is executed. Then, in the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) of FIG. 49, RWM checksum data (complement data) is calculated by executing the processing of steps S2785 to S2794, and the calculated RWM checksum data is transferred to the step S2795. In the process, it is stored in the address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53.

As mentioned above, this RWM checksum data includes data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53, and data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") is a value that becomes "0" when added to the added value of the data.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if a recoverable error occurs and a recoverable error state (the error detection flag is turned on and the progress of the game is stopped), the interrupt processing (I_INTR ) can be executed. Therefore, even if an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (power is turned off) in a recoverable error state, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) can be executed.
In response, an unrecoverable error occurs, and the unrecoverable error state (unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51 is executed, and the game progress is stopped. (stopped state), interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited as described above. Therefore, if an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (power is turned off) in an unrecoverable error state, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed.

In this way, when the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, by not executing the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN), when the power is turned on afterwards, the program start process (FIG. 41) M_PRG_START), it can be determined in step S2708 that a power-off recovery error has occurred, and the process can proceed to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801.
That is, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, simply turning the power on and off will cause the unrecoverable error state to occur again.
When an unrecoverable error state occurs, unless you turn off the power and perform an operation to transition to the setting change state (turn on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on), It is possible to make it impossible to return to a state in which medals can be bet (a state in which the game can be played).

Furthermore, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, even if the power is turned off and the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, in the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, In step S2708, it is determined that there is a power failure recovery error, and the process proceeds to step S2801, which is an unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP), so it does not proceed to the main process (M_MAIN) (Fig. 46), so it is in a state where medals can be bet. Unable to return to a state where the game can proceed.

Also, even if a recoverable error occurs and the game is in a recoverable error state (the error detection flag is turned on and the game stops progressing), it is possible to execute interrupt processing (I_INTR), but it is not recoverable. When a possible error occurs and an unrecoverable error state occurs (unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 43 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 51 is executed and the progress of the game is stopped). , interrupt processing (I_INTR) is disabled.
Furthermore, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) controls the lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, earned number display LED 78, setting value display LED 73), and the lighting of digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74). The ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR).

Therefore, in a recoverable error state, since the interrupt process (I_INTR) can be executed, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed. Therefore, even in a recoverable error state, error information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT), and management information is displayed by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY). It is possible to sequentially display various ratios regarding information types and game results on the LED 74 (digits 6 to 9).

On the other hand, in an unrecoverable error state, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited, so the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) and the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) are not executed.
Therefore, during a non-recoverable error state, the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) is displayed by the non-recoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. Display error information.

Also, in step S1494 of the irrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or the irreversible error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. .
As a result, during an unrecoverable error state, the output from output port 6 (output port for digit 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) is "00000000 (B)". '', all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off until the irreversible error state is canceled and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is restarted.
The fact that all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off is a characteristic of an unrecoverable error state, and this indicates to the manager (hall clerk) that the unrecoverable error state You can let us know what happened.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, the output of output port 6 (output port for digit 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) is turned off during an unrecoverable error state. (“00000000(B)”), all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off.
However, the manner in which digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are displayed in an unrecoverable error state is not limited to this.

For example, during an unrecoverable error state, "8" may be displayed in each of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74. That is, the management information display LED 74 may display "8888".
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a modification of unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP), and corresponds to FIG. 51.
In FIG. 58, steps that are different from those in FIG. 51 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 51 are assigned the same step numbers.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 51 will be mainly explained.

In the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) shown in FIG. Output.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000001 (B)" (data in which only the digit 6 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals). is "1").

Next, the process advances to step S1507, and the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent flickering of the LED. The length of the standby period depends on the performance of the LED, but can be set to about "0.1 ms", for example. For example, store a predetermined value (for example, "255") in the B register, subtract this value using the internal system clock, and when the B register value becomes "0", it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed, and the next The process advances to step S1508.

In step S1508, the main control board 50 turns off the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 (“00000000(B)”). This process is for preventing afterimages.
Next, the process advances to step S1509, and the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent flickering of the LED. This process is to ensure that the LEDs are extinguished after the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 are turned off.

Proceeding to the next step S1510, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in the digit 7 from the output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000010 (B)" (data in which only the digit 7 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals). is "1").
Steps S1511 to S1513 are the same as steps S1507 to S1509.

Then, proceeding to step S1514, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in digit 8 from output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000100 (B)" (data in which only the digit 8 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals). is "1") is output.
Steps S1515 to S1517 are the same as steps S1507 to S1509.

Then, proceeding to step S1518, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in digit 9 from output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00001000 (B)" (data in which only the digit 9 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals). is "1") is output.
Steps S1519 to S1521 are the same as steps S1507 to S1509. After executing the process in step S1521, the process returns to step S1497.

In this manner, "8" may be displayed in each of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 during an unrecoverable error state.
The fact that all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are displayed as "8" is a characteristic of a non-recoverable error state. It is possible to notify that an error condition has occurred.

Note that the display on the management information display LED 74 may be "---" instead of "8888". That is, only the segments G of digits 6 to 9 may be lit.
Further, the display on the management information display LED 74 may be "...". That is, only the segments P of digits 6 to 9 may be lit.
Furthermore, the display on the management information display LED 74 may be "8.8.8.8." That is, as shown in FIG. 30(a) or (c), all segments of digits 6 to 9 (segments A to G and P) may be lit.

(2) In the above embodiment, the output of output port 6 (output port for digit 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) is turned off during an unrecoverable error state. (“00000000(B)”) so that all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off.
However, in step S1494 of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51, the outputs of output ports 6 and 7 are turned off ("00000000 (B)"). It may be maintained instead of. In this case, the display of digits 6 to 9 on the management information display LED 74 is as follows.

As described above, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are dynamically lit with four interrupts as one cycle. Therefore, for example, when "7P.65" is displayed in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74, digit 9 is "5", digit 8 is "6", digit 7 is "P.", Digit 6 "7" lights up sequentially. For example, assume that an unrecoverable error state occurs in a situation where digits 6 to 8 of the management information display LED 74 are turned off and digit 9 is lit with "5". In this case, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) stops while the signals (digit signals and segment signals) that cause digits 6 to 8 to go out and digit 9 to display "5" are being output from output ports 6 and 7. do.

Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00001000 (B)" (data in which the digit 9 signal is "1" and the others are "0"), and output port 7 outputs "01101101 (B)" (segment The interrupt processing (I_INTR) stops while the 2G, 2F, 2D, 2C, and 2A signals are "1" and the others are "0" data, and then output from output ports 6 and 7. The signals (data) to be rewritten will no longer be rewritten.
Therefore, the output of the signals (digit signals and segment signals) from output ports 6 and 7 is maintained until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is restarted. remains off, and digit 9 remains illuminated with "5".

Similarly, for example, assume that an unrecoverable error state occurs in a situation where "7" is lit and displayed in digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 and digits 7 to 9 are turned off.
In this case, the signals (digit signals and segment signals) that cause digit 6 to display "7" and digits 7 to 9 to turn off until the unrecoverable error state is released and interrupt processing (I_INTR) is restarted. Since the output from the output ports 6 and 7 continues, "7" is displayed in digit 6, and digits 7 to 9 remain unlit.

Further, for example, assume that the unrecoverable error process 2 is executed by the second program in a situation where "7" is lit and displayed in digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 and digits 7 to 9 are turned off. Assume that in the unrecoverable error processing 2 by the second program, the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 are maintained without being turned off. In this case, as described above, the signal (digit signal and segment signal) that causes digit 6 to display "7" and digits 7 to 9 to turn off continues to be output from output ports 6 and 7. "7" is displayed on digit 6, and digits 7 to 9 remain unlit.

When the power is turned off in this state, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 go out. After that, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 in the off state, "Yes" is determined in step S2708 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Processing is executed. In this case, the process does not proceed to the initialization process in step S2731, so the data in the RWM 53 is maintained without being initialized. Therefore, data regarding the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address "F292 (H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297 (H)") etc.) are also maintained without being initialized.

Here, it is assumed that in the unrecoverable error processing by the first program, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is made executable without being prohibited. In this case, since the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 is performed by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) during the interrupt process (I_INTR), digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are first set to The ratio information immediately before the possible error processing 2 is executed, that is, "7P.65" (instruction accessory ratio, ratio display number "1") is displayed.

Further, it is assumed that "7P.65" is displayed in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 for, for example, "2000 ms" immediately before the unrecoverable error process 2 is executed by the second program. In this case, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted in the unrecoverable error process by the first program, "7P.65" is displayed in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74, and "4791.84ms" is displayed. -Displayed for "2000ms" = "2791.84ms". Thereafter, the display items with the ratio display number "2" onwards are sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).

In this way, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted during unrecoverable error processing by the first program, the ratio information will be displayed from where it left off immediately before unrecoverable error processing 2 was executed by the second program. is started (resumed).
On the other hand, if interrupt processing (I_INTR) is disabled in the unrecoverable error processing by the first program, the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) will not be executed either, so digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 will not be executed. -9 remains off.

In addition, as mentioned above, regarding the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), accessory ratio (cumulative), and accessory state ratio, if the total number of games is less than "175,000", Display the identification segment blinking. Regarding the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) and the accessory ratio (6000 times), when the total number of games played is less than "6000", the identification segment is displayed blinking. Further, when the displayed value is "70" or more for the designated accessory ratio, accessory ratio (cumulative), and accessory ratio (6000 times), the ratio segment is displayed blinking. Regarding the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative total) and the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times), when the displayed value is "60" or more, the ratio segment is displayed blinking. When the displayed value of the accessory status ratio is "50" or more, the ratio segment is displayed blinking. In addition, when displaying blinking, it repeats turning on and off every about 0.3 seconds.

Therefore, all of the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may be turned off. For example, in a situation where all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are off, that is, when the output from output ports 6 and 7 is "00000000 (B)" (off), it is impossible to recover. Suppose that an error condition has occurred.
In this case, the output from output ports 6 and 7 will remain "00000000 (B)" (off) until the irrecoverable error state is canceled and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is restarted, so the management information All digits 6 to 9 of the display LED 74 remain off.

The display mode of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 as described above is a display mode specific to an unrecoverable error state. It is possible to notify that a possible error condition has occurred.

(3) In the above embodiment, the setting key switch 152 is on, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, provided that the power-off recovery is normal (not the power-off recovery is abnormal). Under the circumstances, when the power is turned on (when transitioning to the setting change state) and under the conditions where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the power is turned on. The initialization process of the RWM 53 was executed in the same range as when it was turned on.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the power is turned on (when transitioning to a setting change state) under a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, The initialization range of the RWM 53 may be different depending on when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.
For example, when the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initial state of the RWM 53 is the same as that at the end of the advantageous period. You may also perform conversion processing.
Specifically, initialization processing is executed for a predetermined range of the used area of the RWM 53 (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in FIG. 33) in which data related to advantageous sections are stored, and Ranges other than the above (for example, credit number data (_NB_CREDIT) for address "F010 (H)" in Figure 33, bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) for "F043 (H)", etc.) can be maintained without being initialized. .
In any case, the initialization range when the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on is set to be narrower than the initialization range when transitioning to the setting change state. It is preferable.

(4) In the above embodiment, it is determined whether the set value is within the normal range in step S458 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. Proceeded to 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). However, it is not limited to this.
For example, it may be determined whether the set value is within the normal range at the timing immediately after it is determined that the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46).

(5) In the above embodiment, if the power is turned off while staying in the settings change state and then the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, the transition to the settings change state occurs. The medals were moved to a place where bets could be made without causing any problems.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if the power is turned off while staying in the setting change state, and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on. When this occurs, an unrecoverable error state may occur.

Specifically, for example, a setting change state flag is provided, and when the setting change state is entered, the setting change state flag is set in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and when the setting change state termination conditions are met, Clear the setting change status flag.
Then, when the power is turned off with the settings changed and then turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, in step S2714 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Determine whether the setting change state flag is on. If it is determined that the setting change state flag is on, the process advances to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, and the process is set to an unrecoverable error state.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the set value from being set even though the operation for finalizing the set value (for example, turning on the start switch 41) has not been performed.

(6) In the above embodiment, the address “F000(H)” of the RWM 53 stores any one of the values “0(D)” to “5(D)” as the setting value data (_NB_RANK). That is, the setting value data was managed as "0(D)" to "5(D)".
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the address "F000(H)" of the RWM53 may store any value from "1(D)" to "6(D)" as the setting value data (_NB_RANK). good. That is, the setting value data may be managed as "1(D)" to "6(D)".

When moving to the setting change state, clear the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 (to "0"), and perform an operation to confirm the setting value (for example, press the start switch 41). When turning on) is performed, any value from "1 (D)" to "6 (D)" is stored as setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000 (H)" of RWM53. Good too.
In this case, when the power is turned off with the settings changed and then turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, the set value is not within the normal range ( If it is determined that a setting value error has occurred, the process may proceed to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in step S2811 to set the unrecoverable error state.

(7) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1P signal) is output from output port 4, the digit signal for digits 6 to 9 (digit 6 to 9 signal) is output from output port 6, and the segment signal for digits 6 to 9 (segment 2A to 2P signal) is output from output port 6. It was output from output port 7.
When lighting digits 1 to 5, the digit signal was output from the output port 3, and the segment 1 signal was output from the output port 4. Further, when lighting digits 6 to 9, a digit signal was output from output port 6, and a segment 2 signal was output from output port 7. In other words, the output ports to be used are divided into digits 1 to 5, which control lighting according to the program in the used area (first program), and digits 6 to 9, which control lighting according to the program outside the used area (second program). Ta.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, digits 1 to 5 control lighting according to a program in the used area (first program), and digits 6 to 9 control lighting according to a program outside the used area (second program). , the output port may also be used.
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a modification of the output port in the third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 59, segment signals for digits 1 to 9 (segment A to P signals) may be output from output port 3. Also, digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digits 1 to 5 signals) are output from output port 2, and digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digits 6 to 9 signals) are output from output port 4. can do.
In this case, during an unrecoverable error state, by turning off the output of output port 4 (output port for digit 6 to 9 signals) ("00000000 (B)"), digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 You can leave all lights off.

(8) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) for outputting the digit 1 signal to digit 5 signal is provided in the usage area of the RWM 53, and outside the usage area of the RWM 53, An LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is provided to output the digit 6 signal to digit 9 signal. That is, an LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 are provided separately and independently. However, it is not limited to this.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a modification of the LED display counter in the third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 60, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) with 5 interrupts per cycle is provided in the usage area of the RWM 53, and based on the value of this LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1), digit 1 signal to digit 5 signal In addition to outputting digit 6 signal to digit 9 signal, it is also possible to output digit 6 signal to digit 9 signal. That is, the LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and the LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 may be used together.

In this case, in step S1471 of the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in FIG. 56, the value of the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is acquired and stored in the D register.
In the next step S1472, it is determined whether there is a ratio display request. Specifically, the value of LED display counter 1 stored in the D register and "11110000 (B)" are ANDed, and when the AND operation result is "0", it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and step S1475 If the AND operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

Here, when the value of LED display counter 1 is "00001000 (B)", "00000100 (B)", "00000010 (B)", or "00000001 (B)", the AND operation result is "0". Therefore, it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and the process advances to step S1475.
On the other hand, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", the AND operation result does not become "0", so it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. In this case, since the outputs of output ports 6 and 7 are maintained, the display mode of digits 6 to 9 on the management information display LED 74 is the same as the display mode during the previous interrupt processing. For example, if digit 6 was lit to display "7" during the previous interrupt processing, digit 6 is lit to display "7" during the current interrupt processing as well.

Note that when it is determined in step S1472 that there is no ratio display request, the output of output port 6 (output port for digit 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) is turned off. (“00000000(B)”) and all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may be turned off.

(9) For example, under the condition that the power-off recovery is normal (not an abnormal power-off recovery), the setting key switch 152 is on, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. Even if the initialization range of the RWM 53 is changed depending on when the power is turned on and when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, good.
Specifically, when the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, for example, the usage area is set as the initialization range of the RWM 53. Set the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" of the area, and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. In this case, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of address “F000(H)” of RWM53 and addresses “F210(H)” to “F291(H)” outside the used area are not initialized (cleared). maintain.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set to, for example, the address "F000(H)". The entire range of the used area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)"), including the setting value data (_NB_RANK), and addresses outside the used area "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" ”. In this case, addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without being initialized (cleared), but the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of address "F000(H)" Initialize (clear). Note that in this case, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) becomes "0", so the setting value becomes "1". Thereby, the setting value can be changed to "1" simply by shifting to the setting change state.

Also, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are turned on. Even when the power is turned on while both are on, both can be made to be able to shift to a setting change state.

(10) In the above embodiment, the initialization range of the RWM 53 for normal power-off recovery is the addresses “F001(H)” to “F1FF(H)” in the used area of the RWM 53, and the address “F292” outside the used area. (H)” to “F3FF(H)” were set.
However, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is not limited to the above-mentioned range, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the slot machine 10.

For example, the initialization range of the RWM 53 can be varied depending on the contents of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) of the address "F030(H)" of the RWM 53 in FIG. 33.
Specifically, for example, when the D2 bit of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of "F030(H)" is "1" and 1BB is in operation, the address "F030(H)" is )” operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) can be removed.
On the other hand, when the D2 bit of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) of "F030(H)" is "0" and 1BB is not operating, the operation state of address "F030(H)" is included in the initialization range of RWM53. Can include a status flag (_FL_ACTION).

(11) In the above embodiment, interrupt processing is prohibited in step S1490 of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, interrupt processing may not be prohibited in unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
Specifically, when the answer is "Yes" in step S2708 or S2715 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. good.

Even while the irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is being executed, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47 can be executed, and the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 and the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 are executed. It may be possible.
As a result, digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, earned number display LED 78, setting value display LED 73) and digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) are turned on even while unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is being executed. Control may be executable.

(12) In the above embodiment, when the operation for transitioning to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) is performed and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the address of the RWM 53 is "F292(H)" (ratio display number) is initialized. For this reason, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then switch to the setting change state. When the operation is performed and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the management information display LED 74 will display the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio data (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information. is started.

However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the management information The display LED 74 first displays specific information different from the ratio information, such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8.", and then displays the instruction-containing accessory, which is the first display item of various ratio information. The display may start from the ratio data (ratio display number "1").
As a result, it is possible to check whether all the segments of digits 6 to 9 are lit, so it is possible to check whether there is a failure in the segment or whether the signal line of the segment is disconnected.
Similarly, when an operation is performed to shift to the setting change state and it is determined that a power-off recovery error has occurred, the management information display LED 74 will first display a ratio such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8." Specific information different from the information may be displayed, and then display may be started from the instruction-included accessory ratio data (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of the various ratio information.

(13) For example, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 also turned off, the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the reset switch 153 is turned off. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch 153 turned on, the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the reset switch 153 is also turned on. In any case, when the power is turned on with It is possible to display specific information that is different from the .

After that, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) indicate the on/off status of various switches when the power was turned on, and whether it was determined that the power-off recovery was normal or that the power-off recovery was abnormal. Display information accordingly. This makes it possible to check whether all segments of digits 6 to 9 light up when the power is turned on, making it possible to check whether there is a segment failure or whether the segment signal line is disconnected. be able to.

Also, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on and the reset switch 153 turned off, the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch 153 turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on and the reset switch 153 also turned on, "8888" or "8. 8.8.8.'', but when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 also turned off. , it is not necessary to display the above specific information on the management information display LED 74.

(14) In the above embodiment, when the operation for transitioning to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) is performed and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the RWM 53 Initializes data related to lighting control of management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (for example, ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address "F292 (H)" to LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297 (H)") did.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an operation is performed to shift to a setting change state and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, data (for example, address " The ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of "F292(H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297(H)", etc.) may be maintained without being initialized.

For example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then perform an operation to shift to the setting change state. Assume that it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 first displays the ratio information immediately before the power is turned off, that is, the accessory ratio ( Cumulative) data is displayed.

Further, it is assumed that accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) for, for example, "1000ms" just before turning off the power. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 displays the accessory ratio (cumulative) data from "4791.84ms" to "1000ms". ”=displayed for “3791.84ms”. Thereafter, the display items with the ratio display number "6" onwards are sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).
In this way, when the operation to transition to the setting change state is performed and the power-off recovery is determined to be normal and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the ratio information immediately before the power was turned off is Display starts (resumes) from where it left off.

(15) In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the management in the RWM 53 The data related to the lighting control of the information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of the address "F292 (H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297 (H)") has been initialized. .
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the management information in the RWM 53 The data related to the lighting control of the display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of the address "F292 (H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297 (H)") is not initialized. may be maintained at

For example, when the management information display LED 74 (winning ratio monitor) is displaying the continuous role ratio (6000 games) data (ratio display number "2"), turn off the power, and then turn off the setting key switch 152. , and the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. In this case, when the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 will first display the ratio information immediately before the power is turned off, that is, the continuous accessory ratio. (6000 games) data is displayed.

Also, assume that the continuous role object ratio (6000 games) data (ratio display number "2") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (winning ratio monitor) for, for example, "3000ms" just before turning off the power. . In this case, when the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the continuous role object ratio (6000 games) data is displayed on the management information display LED 74 as "4791.84ms" - Displayed for "3000ms" = "1791.84ms". Thereafter, the display items with the ratio display number "3" onwards are sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).
In this way, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted. When the power is turned off, the display starts (resumes) from the continuation of the ratio information immediately before the power was turned off.

(16) In the above embodiment, settings cannot be changed during the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46) (during the game), including while the reels 31 are rotating. , and during this time, the setting cannot be changed flag was turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the settings may be changed at all times without providing a period during which the settings cannot be changed, and therefore without providing a setting change prohibited flag.

(17) In the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not a power outage has occurred in step S2770 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. I_POWER_DOWN), and when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred, the process skips the power outage process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 and proceeds to step S454.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed during the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 47, and the occurrence of a power-off is detected, the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. A separate interrupt process may be executed, and a power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) may be executed in this separate interrupt process.
In this case, if a power outage is detected while the interrupt process (I_INTR) in Figure 47 is being executed, another interrupt process will not be started while the interrupt process (I_INTR) is being executed, and the interrupt process (I_INTR) will be activated. After the completion of the process, another interrupt process is started, and a power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in this other interrupt process.

(18) In the above embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there are parrots that use game balls as gaming media, enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) that use electronic information (electronic medals) without using physical (tangible) medals, and casino machines. The present invention can be applied.

<Fourth embodiment>
The fourth embodiment relates to interrupt processing and an interrupt prohibition period. Note that the "interrupt (processing)" is also referred to as "timer interrupt (processing)", but in the following description, it will be simply referred to as "interrupt (processing)".
Furthermore, in the interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment, an interrupt prohibition period may be provided. As explained in the third embodiment, interrupt processing includes maskable interrupts (INT) that can be disabled and non-maskable interrupts (NMI) that cannot be disabled. "maskable interrupt" refers to a "maskable interrupt" for which an interrupt prohibition period can be set. Note that when referring to a "non-maskable interrupt", the term "non-maskable interrupt" is used instead of the abbreviation "interrupt".
Note that the "interrupt-disabled period" is also referred to as an "interrupt-disabled section" or "interrupt-disabled state." Similarly, the "interrupt permission period" is also referred to as the "interrupt permission section" or the "interrupt permission state."
In addition, in the specification and claims of the present application, "at the time of" means "before"("before" includes "immediately"), "at the same time as" and "at the time of". ``After''(``After'' includes ``Immediately after'')'' is used as a general term that includes both. Specifically, for example, "when starting interrupt processing" can mean "before (just before) starting interrupt processing,""simultaneously with starting interrupt processing," and "after (immediately after) starting interrupt processing." It means to include.

The information processing executed by the gaming machine 10 includes a main process (FIG. 46) that is executed once for each game, and a process that interrupts the main process during the execution of the main process and temporarily exits the main process and is executed. and interrupt processing (FIG. 66, which will be described later). Interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Note that although this embodiment is configured to proceed to main processing after the initialization processing is completed (see FIG. 65), program start processing (FIG. 63), power recovery processing (FIG. 64), and initialization processing (FIG. 65) and other processing before the game starts may also be included in the concept of main processing.

FIG. 61 is a block diagram showing a timer circuit 500 and the like for executing interrupt processing. The timer circuit 500 is built into the main chip (MPU (main CPU 55)) of a one-chip microprocessor.
The timer circuit 500 includes a PTC 8-bit counter (hereinafter simply referred to as "8-bit counter") 501, a PTC prescaler register (also referred to as "PTC prescaler setting register", hereinafter simply referred to as "prescaler register") 502, and a PTC counter setting register. (also referred to as a "PTC count value setting register", hereinafter simply referred to as a "counter setting register") 503, and a PTC interrupt flag (hereinafter simply referred to as an "interrupt flag") 504.

The 8-bit counter 501 is a counter consisting of 8 bits (1 byte) for measuring the timing of interrupt processing. When the power is turned on (the power supply (switch) is turned on), "0" is set in the 8-bit counter 501. The timing at which "0" is set in the 8-bit counter 501 is, for example, before the program is started or at the same time as the program is started, as shown in FIG. 63, which will be described later.

The prescaler register 502 is a built-in register in which a setting value for selecting a clock to be supplied to the 8-bit counter 501 can be set. Specifically, it is a built-in register that allows setting how many times the system clock (SCK) is divided and supplied to the 8-bit counter 501 (once every time). For example, if the system clock is "16" MHZ and "143" is set in the prescaler register 502,
16 (MHZ) / 143 = approximately "111.8881" KHZ
serves as the clock source for the 8-bit counter 501.
Further, the system clock (SCK) is a clock supplied to the main chip (MPU). It is configured to be able to execute various programs (instructions) based on the system clock.

Counter setting register 503 is a built-in register that can set the count value of 8-bit counter 501. Specifically, it is a built-in register that can set how many times the clock number from the prescaler register 502 is input before interrupt processing is executed. For example, as described above, if the clock source of the 8-bit counter 501 is approximately "111.8881" KHZ and the clock of approximately "111.8881" KHZ is input "125" times, the 8-bit counter 501 times out. It shall be.
in this case,
125/111.8881 (KHZ) = approximately "1.117" ms
Interrupt processing becomes executable at the cycle of .
Further, after setting a value in the counter setting register 503, the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 starts to be updated based on the clock from the prescaler register 502 (for example, subtraction by "1", addition by "1", etc.).
Note that the value of the prescaler register 502 may be stored before the program (instruction) that stores the value of the counter setting register 503.

After the power is turned on, the initial value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0". When, for example, "125" is written to the counter setting register 503, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 changes from "0" to "125", and the update of the 8-bit counter 501 starts from the time it reaches "125". . As described above, "1" is subtracted approximately every "111.8881" KHZ. Then, when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "1" and is updated, it becomes "125".
Therefore,
"0" (when power is turned on) → "125" → "124" → ... → "2" → "1" → "125" → "124" → ...
Repeat.
In other words, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 becomes "0" when the power is turned on; otherwise, it does not become "0" and cycles through values between "125" and "1".

Further, the time when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1" to "125" (immediately before the update or the moment of the update) corresponds to the timeout of the 8-bit counter 501.
The period from which the value of the 8-bit counter 501 changes from "125" to "1" is approximately "1.117" ms, as described above, and this is the interrupt processing cycle (interrupt cycle. "Tc" in FIG. 71, which will be described later). ).

Also, for example, when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "n" (n = any value from "1" to "125"), the power is turned off and then turned on. When this occurs, the 8-bit counter 501 becomes "0" as described above.
In this manner, the 8-bit counter 501 cycles between "125" and "1" while the power is on, and never reaches "0" again. It becomes "0" only when the power is turned off and then turned on again.
On the other hand, even if the power is turned off when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is any value between "125" and "1", the next time the power is turned on, the initial value of the 8-bit counter 501 will be becomes "0". In this way, the time from when the power is turned on until the 8-bit counter 501 first times out can be made constant, and compared to the case where the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 is memorized when the power is turned off. The time before the first timeout can be increased.

On the other hand, a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is provided with a storage area for a timer. For example, as a timer,
A timer to measure "4.1" seconds, which is the shortest time for one game,
A timer for determining errors,
Examples include timers used to output test signals. These timer values are backed up when the power is turned off, are maintained even during the power off, and when the power is turned on again, return to the values before the power was turned off.
In this way, the timer value provided in the RWM 53 is configured so that it can maintain the value before the power is turned off, whereas the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is always "0" when the power is turned on. "become.

Furthermore, even if the main processing or interrupt processing goes out of control or the processing takes an unexpected amount of time, the 8-bit counter 501 will not stop, and if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 will Counter 501 can cycle between "125" and "1".
Furthermore, even during interrupt processing, the 8-bit counter 501 does not stop, and if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 can cycle between "125" and "1". can.
Furthermore, even during the interrupt disabled period, the 8-bit counter 501 does not stop, and if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 can cycle between "125" and "1". can.

At least one interrupt-disabled period is provided during the main processing. For example, in FIG. 46, there is an example between step S296 and step S300. Note that the purpose of prohibiting interrupts here is to prohibit interrupt processing during the ratio setting process in step S298.
The reason why interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of ratio set processing is that ratio set processing uses a program stored outside the used area, and interrupt processing is disabled when a program outside the used area is executed in main processing. This is because when processing is started, program processing within the used area and program processing outside the used area are mixed (simultaneously running in parallel), making the processing complicated.

Although not shown, examples of disabling interrupts in addition to the above include:
a) When transmitting a control command from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, when writing the control command to the control command buffer or updating the write pointer of the control command, an interrupt is generated before or after these processes. If processing is prohibited,
b) If the blocker signal is turned on (medal acceptance permitted state) and the blocker state is turned on (the input display LED is lit), and interrupt processing is prohibited before and after that,
c) When turning off the blocker signal (medal acceptance refusal state) and turning off the blocker state (turning off the input display LED), if interrupt processing is prohibited before and after that,
d) When executing the process of setting the number of outputs of the medal bet signal, if interrupt processing is prohibited before and after the process,
e) When executing the process of setting the number of outputs of the medal payout signal, interrupt processes may be prohibited before and after the process.

The purpose of a) above is to prevent malfunctions (such as writing to an address different from a normal write address) due to interrupt processing being executed during control command write processing.
In addition, in b) and c) above, if an interrupt process occurs between the process of turning the blocker signal on or off and the process of turning the blocker state on or off, one will be in the on state and the other will be in the off state. This is to prevent an inconsistency in which, for example, an ON signal is output to the blocker but an ON signal is not output to the input display LED (the light is turned off).
Furthermore, the above d) and e) are intended to prevent the medal bet signal or medal payout signal from being updated due to interrupt processing being executed during the process of setting the medal bet signal or medal payout signal.

Interrupt flag 504 is a flag indicating that 8-bit counter 501 has timed out.
The interrupt flag 504 is set (turned on) when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1" to "125" (when the 8-bit counter 501 times out). The timing for unsetting (turning off) the set interrupt flag 504 is arbitrary. For example, the timing to release (turn off) the interrupt flag 504 is as follows:
a) When executing interrupt processing b) Predetermined information (hereinafter simply referred to as "information") indicating that an interrupt request notification signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "interrupt request signal") has been generated in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 (described later) ”) may be adopted when setting the

The interrupt wait monitor register 301 is one of the built-in registers of the MPU that can store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the interrupt flag 504 is set. When 8-bit counter 501 times out, interrupt flag 504 is set. When the interrupt flag 504 is set, an interrupt request signal is output to the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register 301.
In the following, "information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register 301" will be simply referred to as "information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated in the interrupt wait monitor register 301.""Information indicating what has happened is stored."
Then, an interrupt request signal is output to the main CPU 55 via the interrupt wait monitor register 301, making it possible to execute interrupt processing. Information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared when the main CPU 55 accepts the interrupt request (when it executes interrupt processing).

Here, "a situation in which information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301" is defined as:
a) A situation in which there is an interrupt request b) A situation in which a predetermined flag related to an interrupt request is turned on (“1”) c) A predetermined flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out is turned on (“1”) It is also sometimes referred to as the situation where
Similarly, "a situation in which information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301" is expressed as follows:
a) A situation where there is no interrupt request b) A situation where a predetermined flag related to an interrupt request is turned off (“0”) c) A predetermined flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out is turned off (“0”) It is also sometimes referred to as the situation where

In a situation where the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, if the 8-bit counter 501 times out again, it is determined that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out again. Although the interrupt request signal based on the interrupt request signal is output to the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is not saved again based on the interrupt request signal (in this case, the interrupt request signal ).

In a situation where the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, interrupt processing will not start if the interrupt is disabled, but the interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. A situation is maintained in which information indicating that the event occurred is stored. Note that even in this state, the circulation of the 8-bit counter 501 continues without interruption. Then, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out again after approximately "1.117" ms has elapsed, if the interrupt prohibition period continues, it is determined that an interrupt request signal has been generated in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. The situation remains as if the information indicating the information is stored. Here, regardless of whether or not the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the process for setting the interrupt flag 504 is executed. good. Alternatively, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, it is determined whether the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, and the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores the interrupt request signal. When information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored, the process for setting the interrupt flag 504 is not executed, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. If not, processing for setting the interrupt flag 504 may be executed.
In the following, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, the interrupt flag 504 is set regardless of whether or not the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. The following explanation assumes that the process for setting is executed.

Furthermore, if the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated when the interrupt disabled period ends, interrupt processing is started and the information is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Clear the information. As a result, when starting interrupt processing, a situation arises in which the interrupt wait monitor register 301 does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.
Therefore, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during the period in which the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores the interrupt wait monitor register 301 after the interrupt disabled period ends. The number of times the interrupt process is executed is limited to "1" based on the fact that the register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.
Note that the 8-bit counter 501 continues to cycle through the values "m" to "1" even during interrupt processing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61, the one-chip microprocessor is provided with an interrupt prohibition flag 302. The interrupt prohibition flag 302 in the fourth embodiment corresponds to the IFF1 register.
The IFF1 register is a register for determining permission or prohibition of maskable interrupts. Further, the IFF2 register is a register used to restore the IFF1 register after processing a non-maskable interrupt, or to restore by a RETEX instruction after execution of a CALLEX instruction.

When (maskable) interrupt processing is executed, both the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register are set to "0" in order to change the interrupt enabled state to the interrupt disabled state. When the IFF1 register is "0", it indicates that interrupts are disabled. Then, at the end of the interrupt processing, the state changes from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state, so immediately before the end of the interrupt processing, an instruction (EI instruction) to enable the interrupt is executed, and both the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register are set to "1". Make it. When the IFF1 register is "1", it indicates that interrupts are enabled.

The interrupt prohibition period is first set in the main processing. For example, in FIG. 46, it is between step S296 and step S300.
Second, the interrupt prohibition period is set during execution of interrupt processing. For example, as shown in FIG. 66, which will be described later, when interrupt processing is executed, the IFF1 register and IFF2 register become "0". As described above, this is to prohibit duplicate interrupts in interrupt processing.

In a situation where the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, if the IFF1 register is "1", when the interrupt request signal is output to the main CPU 55 Then, the main CPU 55 receives an interrupt request signal. In other words, interrupt processing is executed.
On the other hand, in a situation where the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, if the IFF1 register is "0", an interrupt request signal is output to the main CPU 55. At this time, the main CPU 55 does not accept the interrupt request signal. In other words, no interrupt processing is executed. In this case, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 maintains storage of information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, and continues to output the interrupt request signal to the main CPU 55. Then, when the IFF1 register changes from "0" to "1" (when the interrupt permission period begins), interrupt processing is executed based on the interrupt request signal.
Note that when executing interrupt processing based on an interrupt request signal, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, is cleared. In other words, the output of the interrupt request signal to the main CPU 55 is stopped.

Next, the relationship between the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt disabled state, and the IFF1 register and IFF2 register will be explained using a simple program.
FIG. 62 shows an example program for explaining interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission. In the figure, (A) and (B) show the main processing program, and (C) shows the interrupt processing program.
In FIG. 62(A), the "DI" instruction is an instruction for disabling interrupts. Further, the "EI" instruction is an instruction for enabling interrupts.
Further, "AAAA", "BBBB", and "CCCC" are arbitrary programs (commands).
When the "DI" instruction is executed, both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value become "0", and the interrupt is disabled.

Thereafter, when the programs "AAAA" and "BBBB" are executed, and then the "EI" instruction is executed, both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value become "1", and the interrupt is enabled.
The program "CCCC" after the "EI" command includes, for example, the "RET" command. In this case, the interrupt becomes executable after the "RET" instruction is executed (ie, after the "CCCC" is executed). Note that the condition is that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at least immediately after the "RET" instruction.
As described above, even if the interrupt enable instruction "EI" is executed, interrupt processing is not executed until the next instruction (in this example, "CCCC"; for example, "RET") is executed. The command after the permission command "EI" can be reliably executed.

In FIG. 62(B), the "CALLEX" instruction disables interrupts and calls the specified address, regardless of whether interrupts are enabled or disabled at that time. This is an order to do so.
In addition, the "RETEX" instruction sets the interrupt state to the state before the "CALLEX" instruction and returns ("RET") (returns to the state before "CALLEX"), in other words, the next instruction after "CALLEX" This is an instruction that executes returning to (the program at the return address).

Here, when the "CALLEX" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register value becomes "0" and the IFF2 register value does not change.
Furthermore, when the "RETEX" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register value becomes the IFF2 register value, and the IFF2 register value does not change.
Since the "RETEX" instruction includes the "RET" instruction, interrupt processing can be executed immediately after the "RETEX" instruction.
For example, if the IFF1 register value is "1" and the IFF2 register value is "1" immediately before the "CALLEX" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register value is "0" and the IFF2 register value is "1" by the "CALLEX" instruction. 1”. Further, by the "RETEX" instruction, the IFF1 register value becomes "1" and the IFF2 register value becomes "1". In this way, by having the IFF2 register, it is possible to return to the IFF1 register value and IFF2 register value before the "CALLEX" instruction was executed.

In FIG. 62C, when executing interrupt processing (maskable interrupt (INT)), both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value become "0". As a result, interrupts (multiple interrupts) are disabled. Therefore, the "DI" instruction is not necessary when starting interrupt processing.
Furthermore, when ending the interrupt processing, the "EI" instruction is executed immediately before the end of the interrupt processing, that is, immediately before the "RETI" instruction, in order to change the state from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state. This "EI" instruction causes both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value to become "1".

Note that when the "RETI" instruction is executed thereafter, the IFF1 register value becomes the IFF2 register value, and the IFF2 register value does not change, similarly to the above-mentioned "RETEX" instruction.
From the above, the IFF1 register and IFF2 register are
When starting interrupt processing: IFF1=0, IFF2=0
↓
"EI" instruction: IFF1=1, IFF2=1
↓
“RETI” command: Changes to IFF1=IFF2, IFF2=maintain.
The configuration is such that interrupt processing can be executed after the "RETI" command. This prevents the interrupt processing from being executed redundantly, such as the interrupt processing being executed immediately after the "EI" command and then the interrupt processing being executed after the "RETI" command.

Data retention/clearing in the interrupt flag 504, the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the interrupt prohibition flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register), and the timer storage area of the RWM 53 when the power is turned on/off is as follows.
The timer storage area of the RWM 53 includes, for example, "a timer storage area for measuring 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time for one game". However, the timer storage area of the RWM 53 is not limited to the above-mentioned "timer storage area for measuring 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time for one game", but for example, Examples include a predetermined timer storage area that can measure various predetermined times, such as a standby timer storage area. Further, the predetermined timer storage area may be a 1-byte storage area or a multiple-byte storage area.

a) When the power is turned on, the setting change state does not change because the setting change conditions are not met.When the power is turned on, the setting change state does not change because the setting change conditions are not met.The 8-bit counter 501, interrupt flag 504, and interrupt The wait monitor register 301 and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register) are both cleared (become "0"). On the other hand, the predetermined timer storage area of the RWM 53 is not cleared.
For example, assume that the power is turned off under a situation where the value stored in a predetermined timer storage area of the RWM 53 is "X" and the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "Y". In this case, if the power is turned on without transitioning to the setting change state because the setting change conditions are not met, the value stored in the timer storage area is "X", and the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is returns as "0".

b) When the power is turned on when transitioning to the setting change state due to meeting the setting change conditions In this case, the 8-bit counter 501, interrupt flag 504, interrupt wait monitor register 301, and interrupt disable flag 302 (IFF1 register and Not only the IFF2 register) but also a predetermined timer storage area of the RWM 53 are cleared (becomes "0").
Therefore, the 8-bit counter 501, interrupt flag 504, interrupt wait monitor register 301, and interrupt disable flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register) determine whether the setting change conditions are satisfied (transition to setting change state) when the power is turned on. It is cleared (becomes "0") regardless of whether it is true or not.
On the other hand, the predetermined timer storage area is not cleared (does not become "0") when the power is turned on, but does not enter the setting change state because the setting change conditions are not met. It is cleared (becomes "0") when the power is turned on to shift to .

As described in the third embodiment, the setting key switch 152 is turned on by inserting the setting key from the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise. When the power is turned on in this state, in FIG. 63, which will be described later, it is determined that the door switch signal is on ("Yes" in step S2706) and the setting key switch signal is on ("Yes" in step S2707). , and other predetermined conditions are satisfied, the process moves to the initialization process of step S2863 (FIG. 65, which will be described later). Then, in step S2742 in FIG. 65, the process moves to setting change confirmation processing (see FIG. 45; also referred to as setting change confirmation mode, setting change confirmation state, setting change confirmation (processing), etc.).
The satisfaction of the conditions for transitioning to the setting change confirmation process corresponds to the above-mentioned "power-on time when transitioning to the setting change state due to the satisfaction of the setting change conditions".

Furthermore, the above is an example in which the gaming machine is the slot machine 10. On the other hand, when the game machine is a pinball game machine (pachinko game machine), "setting change conditions are met" means that the door switch (frame release switch) signal is on and the setting change key switch signal is on. It is on and corresponds to the reset switch being on. In a pinball game machine (Pachinko game machine), when it is determined that all of these three conditions are satisfied, the setting change condition is satisfied and the machine moves to a setting change state.
In addition, in a pinball game machine (pachinko game machine), when the door switch (frame release switch) signal is on, the setting change key switch signal is on, and the reset switch is off, the (setting (Although the change conditions are not met), the settings confirmation conditions are met and the state shifts to the settings confirmation state.

As described above, when the power is turned off, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is not held (the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0" when the power is restored). Thereby, the time from when the power is turned on until the first interrupt processing is started can be made constant. Furthermore, the update cycle of the 8-bit counter 501 (8.9375 microseconds) is shorter than the update cycle of the RWM 53 timer value (interrupt processing cycle: 1.117 ms). , the effect caused by clearing the 8-bit counter 501 is slight on the gaming machine as a whole.
For this reason,
a) The value of the 8-bit counter 501 when the power is turned off is retained, and when the power is turned on, the 8-bit counter 501 restarts counting from the value when the power was turned off (the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is backed up) ) and
b) A configuration in which the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0" when the power is restored (this embodiment)
When compared with , even with the configuration b) above, recovery can be achieved with an error within "1" interrupt. In the configuration b) above, there is no need for means for backing up the value of the 8-bit counter 501 when the power is turned off.

Next, the on/off timing of the interrupt prohibition flag 302 (IFF register) will be explained based on a flowchart.
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing program start (M_PRG_START) in the fourth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the third embodiment. In FIG. 63, the same steps as those in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIG. 63, step numbers different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined.
When the program is started in step S2701, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0", and the IFF1 register and IFF2 register are "0". Since the IFF1 register is "0", interrupts are disabled until the IFF1 register becomes "1".

Proceeding to step S2861, the initial value "m" is set in the counter setting register 503.
Here, in the fourth embodiment, an example in which the initial value "m" is set in the counter setting register 503 is shown as an example in which the initial value "m" is set in the counter setting register 503, and an example in which the initial value "m" is set in the counter setting register 503, an example in which the setting is performed before the execution of the RWM abnormality determination process, and an example in which the initial value "m" is set in the counter setting register 503 is performed after the execution of the RWM abnormality determination process. Note that the "RWM abnormality determination process" here is a process for determining whether or not the data stored in the RWM 53 before the power is turned off is normal, and corresponds to the processes in steps S2708, S2712, and S2715. . Step S2861 in FIG. 63 is an example in which an initial value is set in the counter setting register 503 before RWM abnormality determination.
The initial value "m" is, for example, "125" as described above. When the initial value is set in the counter setting register 503, the 8-bit counter 501 starts updating the count value and continues to update the count value until the power is turned off.
As described above, when the power is turned on and the program starts, interrupts are initially disabled, and if an initial value is set in the counter setting register 503 before RWM abnormality determination, the Bit counter 501 begins updating.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) (step S2862 in FIG. 63) in the fourth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 42 in the third embodiment. In FIG. 64, the same steps as those in FIG. 42 are given the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIG. 64, step numbers different from those in FIG. 42 are underlined.
The power recovery process in FIG. 64 shows an example in which the counter setting register 503 is set after the RWM abnormality is determined.
In this example, after step S2724, the process advances to step S2871, and the initial value "m" is set in the counter setting register 503.

When setting the initial value to the counter setting register 503 in step S2861 of FIG. 63 (when setting the counter setting register 503 before RWM abnormality determination), the process of step S2871 of FIG. 64 is not performed. On the other hand, when step S2861 in FIG. 63 is not performed (when the counter setting register 503 is set after RWM abnormality determination), if the process does not proceed to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2863 in FIG. In S2871, the initial value "m" is set in the counter setting register 503.
After step S2871, the process proceeds to the return address of the interrupt process immediately before the power-off (FIG. 66 described later).The power-off process is executed in the interrupt process (step S2771 in FIG. 66), and when the power is turned off, the interrupt at that The return address of the process is stored. After the power recovery process shown in FIG. 64, the process proceeds to the return address of the interrupt process and continues the interrupt process. In step S2892 of the interrupt processing (FIG. 66), the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register become "1", and the interrupt is enabled.

As described above, when the 8-bit counter 501 is configured to start updating before the RWM abnormality is determined, the 8-bit counter 501 is updated earlier than when updating the 8-bit counter 501 is started after the RWM abnormality is determined. (Information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301.) Therefore, an interrupt enable instruction (EI instruction) executed after RWM abnormality determination can be executed. This allows interrupt processing to be executed without delay when a request occurs.
On the other hand, if the configuration is such that updating of the 8-bit counter 501 is started after the RWM abnormality is determined, the IFF1 register may become "1" due to noise etc. before the RWM abnormality is determined, or when the power is turned on. Even if a problem occurs where the IFF1 register becomes "1" (a problem resulting in an unintended interrupt enable state), the 8-bit counter 501 has not timed out before the RWM abnormality is determined (an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt wait monitor register 301). (No information indicating that a signal has been generated is stored.) Therefore, interrupt processing is not executed before RWM abnormality determination. In other words, it is possible to prevent RWM data from changing from before the power is turned off due to interrupt processing before RWM abnormality determination. Thereby, RWM abnormality can be accurately determined.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the initialization process (M_INI_SET) (step S2863 in FIG. 63) in the fourth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 44 in the third embodiment. In FIG. 65, the same steps as those in FIG. 44 are given the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIG. 65, step numbers different from those in FIG. 44 are underlined.
In FIG. 63, when the determination in step S2712 is "Yes" or the determination in step S2714 is "Yes", the process moves to the initialization process in FIG. 65.
In this initialization process, after the AF register is restored in step S2737, a counter setting register is set in step S2881. This process is an example of executing the counter setting register set after RWM abnormality determination, and is an example of executing the counter setting register set when proceeding to the initialization process (without proceeding to the power recovery process).

Further, in step S2740, setting command set processing is executed. This process is a process of storing a control command in a control command buffer in order to send a control command to the sub-control board 80 to start the setting change confirmation process (step S2742). As described above, interrupt processing is prohibited before writing the control command to the control command buffer or updating the write pointer of the control command, and enabled after these processings are completed.
Therefore, in step S2740,
(1) DI (IFF1=0, IFF2=0)
(2) Actual setting command set (processing to write control commands to the control command buffer, processing to update the control command write pointer, etc.)
(3) EI (IFF1=1, IFF2=1)
Each process (command) is executed.
As described above, when proceeding from the program start (FIG. 63) to the initialization process (FIG. 65), the interrupt is enabled by the "EI" command in the setting command set in step S2740. In this way, the interrupt disabled state is changed to the interrupt enabled state by using the process of executing the interrupt disable instruction (DI) and interrupt enable instruction (EI) before and after processing.

Note that the setting command set in step S2746 is a process for transmitting an end command of the setting change confirmation process to the sub control board 80, and similarly to step S2740, the "DI" command and the "EI" command are set at the beginning and end of the process, respectively. Execute commands.

As described above, when writing a value to the counter setting register 503 after RWM abnormality determination, it is possible to prevent interrupt processing from starting due to a malfunction or the like while RWM abnormality determination is being performed. Note that when interrupt processing is started, RWM data may be updated.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) in the fourth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 47 of the third embodiment. In FIG. 66, the same steps as those in FIG. 47 are given the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIG. 66, step numbers different from those in FIG. 47 are underlined.
When interrupt processing is started, the IFF1 register and IFF2 register become "0". This results in an interrupt disabled state (duplicate interrupt disabled state).
In step S452 of FIG. 47, initial processing including prohibition of duplicate interrupts is executed, but in the case of the fourth embodiment, register value saving processing is executed in step S2891.

Further, after restoring the register value in step S469, the "EI" instruction is executed in step S2892. As a result, the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register become "1", and the interrupt is enabled.
Furthermore, in the final step S2893, the IFF1 register value becomes the IFF2 register value by a "RETI" instruction corresponding to a return instruction. Also, the IFF2 register value is maintained.
As described above, the interrupt is enabled by the "EI" command in step S2892, but the interrupt processing is enabled after the next "RETI" command in step S2893.
Note that after the "RETI" instruction is completed, if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the main processing program (return Resume from address). On the other hand, after the "RETI" instruction ends, if the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the interrupt process is executed again.

Next, the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing will be explained using a time chart.
FIG. 67 is a time chart showing the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing. FIG. 67 shows an example in which the main processing does not have an interrupt prohibition period.
In FIG. 67, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0" when the power is turned on, but the counter value "m" is set by the counter setting register setting process described above. The counter value "m" is "125" in the above example. Then, as in the above example, the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 is decremented by "1" at a clock of approximately "111.8881" KHZ (every "8.9375" microseconds).

When the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1", it returns to "m". When "1" is updated to "m"("T1" in the figure), the 8-bit counter 501 "times out", and when a timeout occurs, the interrupt flag 504 is set, an interrupt request signal is output, and an interrupt is waited. Information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the monitor register 301. In the figure, an off state of the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicates that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored, and an on state of the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicates that no interrupt request signal has been generated. This indicates that information indicating that the event occurred is stored (the same applies to FIGS. 68 to 75 below).
When information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is not set (interrupt enabled state), interrupt processing is started.
Note that even at the moment when the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the main process is still executing some process (instruction), and the process ( Interrupt processing begins when the command (instruction) is completed. In other words, the actual processing in the main processing and the interrupt processing do not run concurrently. The example in FIG. 67 shows an example in which information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1," and then interrupt processing is started at timing "T2." There is.

Furthermore, when starting interrupt processing, an interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set. This corresponds to "IFF1=0, IFF2=0" shown on the right side of step S2890 in FIG. 66. Then, when the interrupt processing is finished, the set state of the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is released. This process corresponds to the process related to step S2892 in FIG. 66 (IFF1=1, IFF2=1).
In the following explanation, unless otherwise specified, "the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set" means that at least IFF1 becomes "1" (IFF2 may be "0" or "1"). Point. Furthermore, "the set state of the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is canceled" or "the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is not set" means that at least IFF1 becomes "0" (IFF2 is "0"). It can be either "0" or "1").

FIG. 68 is a time chart showing the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing. FIG. 68 shows an example in which the main process has an interrupt prohibition period.
In FIG. 68, the timing "T0" which is the start of the interrupt prohibition period corresponds to the "DI" instruction or the "CALLEX" instruction shown in FIG. 62. Further, the timing "T3" at which the interrupt prohibition period ends corresponds to the "EI" command or the "RETEX" command shown in FIG. 62. Similarly, in FIG. 69 and subsequent figures, the start of the interrupt prohibition period corresponds to the "DI" instruction or the "CALLEX" instruction, and the end of the interrupt prohibition period corresponds to the "EI" instruction or the "RETEX" instruction.
The example in FIG. 68 shows an example in which an interrupt prohibition period is set in the main process at a timing "T0" which is a timing before "T1" when the 8-bit counter 501 times out. Even in this case, the point that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1" when the 8-bit counter 501 times out is the same as the example in FIG. 67. .
On the other hand, at timing "T1", it is still the interrupt prohibition period and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set, so the interrupt processing is not started. However, even after that, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

Thereafter, the interrupt prohibition period ends at timing "T3". As a result, "information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is not set", so that interrupt processing can be executed. Become. The example in FIG. 67 shows an example in which interrupt processing is started at timing "T4".
Note that if timing "T3" corresponds to the "EI" instruction and interrupt processing is started at timing "T4" after execution of one instruction (for example, "RET" instruction), timing "T3" and "T4'', a time lag of one instruction occurs. On the other hand, if a "CALLEX" command is executed at timing "T0" and a "RETEX" command is executed at timing "T3", immediately after the execution of the "RETEX" command, without executing one more command. Since the interrupt processing is started at , there is no time lag between timings "T3" and "T4".
When starting interrupt processing, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. On the other hand, since duplicate interrupts are prohibited, an interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.

FIG. 69 is a time chart showing an example (1) in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times in the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing.
In this example, after starting the interrupt prohibition period at timing "T0", the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T1", the interrupt flag 504 is set, and an interrupt request signal is generated in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. This is an example in which information indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T2". At timing "T2", the interrupt prohibition period has not yet ended. The details will be described later, but when the interrupt cycle (timeout cycle of 8-bit counter 501) is "Tc" and the designed period of interrupt processing is "Tp", the designed maximum period of the interrupt disable period is "Tc". −Tp”. Therefore, normally, when an interrupt prohibition period is started immediately after interrupt processing is finished, the next interrupt period arrives after the end of the interrupt prohibition period.

On the other hand, if the main processing goes out of control, or if the main processing to be executed during the interrupt disabled period takes longer than necessary, the 8-bit counter 501 will be counted twice within the interrupt disabled period, as shown in FIG. There may be cases where a timeout occurs.
Even in such a case, the 8-bit counter 501 continues to update the count value as long as the system clock is normal, and sets the interrupt flag 504 when a timeout occurs. In the example of FIG. 69, the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T1", the interrupt flag 504 is set, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. It shows.
Thereafter, even if the interrupt prohibition period continues, the 8-bit counter 501 continues to update the count value if it is normal, and when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, the interrupt flag 504 is set and an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt wait monitor register 301. If information indicating that a signal has been generated is already stored, that state is maintained.
Next, when the interrupt prohibition period ends at timing "T3" (interrupt enabled state is entered), interrupt processing becomes executable. Then, at "T4", interrupt processing is started, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, is cleared. Information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 until the 8-bit counter 501 times out next time and the interrupt flag 504 is set.

As described above, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (twice or more) during the interrupt disabled period, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. This is done only once. In other words, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (two or more times) during the interrupt prohibition period, the number of timeouts is not counted. After the interrupt prohibition period ends, the number of interrupts executed is one based on the fact that the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.
In other words, the interrupt process is not repeatedly (continuously) executed "n" times based on the fact that the 8-bit counter 501 times out "n" times (n≧2).
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being repeated multiple times in succession after the interrupt prohibition period ends, and from being unable to execute the main processing during that period.
Note that when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, the interrupt flag 504 is set each time, and the setting of the interrupt flag 504 is canceled at a predetermined timing thereafter.

FIG. 70 is a time chart showing an example (2) in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times in the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing.
In FIG. 70, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1", and based on this information, interrupt processing is started at timing "A1". An example is shown in which an unexpected time is required or a runaway occurs in one of the processes, and the interrupt process is not completed before the next timeout of the 8-bit counter 501 (timing "T2").
This example shows an example in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out twice (at timings "T2" and "T3") during interrupt processing that started at timing "A1." During interrupt processing, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T2", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Furthermore, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T3" thereafter, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, remains stored.

Thereafter, when the interrupt processing ends at timing "A2", the next interrupt processing is immediately executed because the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated at that point. do. In other words, the interrupt processing is executed continuously without executing the main processing. Furthermore, when executing the interrupt process, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, is cleared (timing "T4").
Next, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T5", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. On the other hand, the interrupt processing started at timing "A2" ends before timing "T5". As a result, the next interrupt process is started based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T5".
As described above, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during interrupt processing, the interrupt processing executed after the interrupt processing is completed will not cause the interrupt request signal to be generated in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. This is only done once based on the fact that information indicating that the event occurred is stored. In other words, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during interrupt processing, the interrupt processing will not be executed multiple times in succession after the interrupt processing is completed. Further, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (two or more times) during execution of the interrupt process, the number of timeouts is not counted.

Next, the execution timing of interrupt processing will be explained.
71 to 75 described below show interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 4 (however, in the example of FIG. 74, interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 3), but interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 4 are All processes are the same (the interrupt process shown in FIG. 66). Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 71, after starting interrupt processing 1 (interrupt processing shown in FIG. 66), interrupt processing 2 (same processing as interrupt processing 1) is started after "Tc" has elapsed. It means that.
FIG. 71 is a time chart showing the interrupt cycle, etc. when there is no interrupt prohibition period in the main process.
As described above, when the system clock is set to 16 MHZ, the value of the prescaler register 502 is set to ``143,'' and the value of the counter setting register 503 is set to ``125,'' the interrupt period ``Tc'' is determined by the value of the 8-bit counter 501. This is the period from when the value changes to "125" to the next value, and corresponds to about "1.117" ms.

As shown in FIG. 71, if there is no interrupt prohibition period during the period in which the interrupt process is executed four times, the interrupt process is executed at each interrupt cycle "Tc". The example in FIG. 71 shows an example in which interrupt processing is started at timings "A1", "A2", "A3", and "A4". The time "Tp" required for one interrupt processing varies depending on the content of the interrupt processing, but the design value of the interrupt processing time "Tp" is at least a time shorter than the interrupt cycle "Tc"(Tp<Tc). It is.
Further, as in the above example, during the period of interrupt processing, the interrupt is disabled, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.

Note that, as is clear from FIG. 71, no matter what value the 8-bit counter 501 has, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 will not return to "m" due to execution of the interrupt process, and the interrupt process will not return to "m". The value continues to be updated at regular intervals.
Further, in FIG. 71, the period (time) of each interrupt process is illustrated as being constant (Tp), but in reality, the period of the interrupt process is not necessarily constant. For example, the current interrupt processing may take longer than the previous interrupt processing.

FIG. 72 shows an example in which an interrupt prohibition period in the main process is set between interrupt process 1 and interrupt process 2. Interrupt processing 1 starts at timing "A1", and after interrupt processing 1 ends at timing "A1'", the interrupt disable period of the main process starts at timing "T1", and the interrupt disable period starts at timing "T2". This is an example in which the process has ended (interrupts have been enabled). Here, the timing "T2" is before the start timing "A2" of the next interrupt processing 2. Note that, as is clear from FIG. 72, if the interrupt prohibition period is "Td", "Td<Tc-Tp". In this way, if the interrupt disable period falls between the end of an interrupt process and the next interrupt process, the timing of interrupt processing is limited by the interrupt disable period even if the interrupt disable period is set. It never happens. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 72, even if the interrupt prohibition period is set after the end of interrupt processing 1 and before the start of interrupt processing 2, the interrupt is disabled when the interrupt period "Tc" arrives after the start of interrupt processing 1. Process 2 can be started.
In particular, when the interrupt disable period "Td" that satisfies "Td<Tc-Tp" is the designed maximum period of the interrupt disable period, when the interrupt process ends and returns to the main process, the interrupt is immediately disabled in the main process. When a period is set, it can be set so that the start timing of the next interrupt process arrives after the end of the interrupt prohibition period.

FIG. 73 is a time chart showing an example (Example 1) in which the timing at which the interrupt processing is scheduled to be executed is the interrupt prohibition period.
This example shows an example in which the interrupt prohibition period for the main process is set at timing "T1" after interrupt processing 1 ends and before timing "A2" of the next interrupt processing arrives. Note that the timing "A2" is after the interrupt cycle "Tc" has elapsed from the start timing "A1" of the interrupt processing 1.
During the interrupt prohibition period, the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set. Therefore, when timing "A2" arrives, interrupt processing cannot be started because the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set. In the figure, the two-dot chain line indicates the interrupt process assuming that interrupt process 2 is started at timing "A2" (it is not actually started).
On the other hand, immediately before timing "A2" arrives, the 8-bit counter 501 times out, so information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301.

Thereafter, when the interrupt prohibition period ends at timing "T2", the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is unset. Further, at timing "T2", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated remains stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. As a result, at timing "T2", the interrupt is enabled, and the second interrupt processing 2 is started. FIG. 73 shows an example in which interrupt processing 2 is started at timing "A5". When interrupt processing 2 is executed, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. Furthermore, when interrupt processing 2 is executed, an interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.

Next, at the timing "A5'" at which the interrupt processing 2 ends, the timing "A3" at which the third interrupt processing 3 is started has not yet arrived. Therefore, interrupt processing 3 can be started when timing "A3" arrives.
From the above, interrupt processing 2 cannot be executed at timing "A2", but interrupt processing 2 can be executed at subsequent timing "A5", and interrupt processing 3 can be executed at timing "A3", so interrupt processing at this point The number of times is the same as when there is no interrupt prohibition period.

In this way, the interrupt cycle "Tc" is kept constant regardless of whether or not there is an interrupt prohibition period, so that the interrupt cycle "Tc" can be kept constant. Furthermore, even if interrupt processing cannot be performed due to the interrupt prohibition period, updating of the 8-bit counter 501 will not be affected.
Furthermore, at the end of the interrupt prohibition period, if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, interrupt processing is executed without waiting for the next interrupt cycle. However, updating of the 8-bit counter 501 is not affected.

FIG. 74 is a time chart showing an example (Example 2) in which the timing at which the interrupt processing is scheduled to be executed is during the interrupt prohibition period.
In this example, after interrupt processing 1 ends, the interrupt prohibition period of the main processing starts at timing "T1" before timing "A2" of next interrupt processing 2 arrives. As a result, the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.
Therefore, at timing "A2", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, but since the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is also set, interrupt processing cannot be executed. .

When the interrupt cycle "Tc" further passes from the timing "A2" and reaches the timing "A3", the interrupt prohibition period is still continuing. Therefore, at timing "A3", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is still stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, but since the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is also set, interrupt processing cannot be executed. . Although the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "A3", there is no change in the state in which the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301.
When the interrupt prohibition period ends at timing "T2" after timing "A3", the set state of the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is released. Note that at this point, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Thereafter, interrupt processing 2 is started at timing "A6". When interrupt processing 2 is started, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.

In this example, the timing "A6'" at which the interrupt processing 2 is completed is before the timing "A4", that is, the time "3×Tc" has elapsed from the timing "A1". Therefore, after interrupt processing 2 ends at timing "A6'", the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T3", and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Ru. As a result, interrupt processing 3 is started at the subsequent timing "A4". When interrupt processing 3 is started, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.

As described above, interrupt processing cannot be executed when "Tc" has elapsed from timing "A1" (timing "A2"), and when "Tc" has elapsed from that point (timing "A3"), but interrupts are prohibited. Immediately after the period ends at timing "T2", interrupt processing 2 is executed. There is no interrupt prohibition period, and interrupt processing 3 can be executed at timing "A4" when interrupt processing 4 would normally be executed. As a result, interrupt processing can be executed three times from timing "A1" to timing "A4", which is only one less than the number of interrupt processing (four times) when there is no interrupt prohibition period.
Furthermore, at timing "A4", the interrupt cycle "Tc" from timing "A1" is not broken. Furthermore, the update status of the 8-bit counter 501 is also unchanged and constant.

FIG. 75 is a time chart showing an example (Example 3) in which the timing at which the interrupt processing is scheduled to be executed is the interrupt prohibition period.
In this example, after the end of interrupt processing 1, the interrupt prohibition period starts at timing "T1" before the next interrupt processing timing "A2" arrives, and the interrupt prohibition period ends at timing "T2". be. In other words, during the interrupt prohibition period, timing "A2" at which interrupt processing 2 would normally be executed arrives. At timing "A2", the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set, so interrupt processing cannot be executed.
However, since the 8-bit counter 501 times out just before timing "A2" arrives, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "A2".
Next, when the interrupt prohibition period ends at timing "T2", the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is unset. Note that at this point, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Therefore, interrupt processing 2 is started at the subsequent timing "A7".

Meanwhile, during execution of interrupt processing 2, timing "T3" arrives, the 8-bit counter 501 times out, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. However, at this point, since interrupt processing 2 is being executed, duplicate interrupts cannot be made. In other words, interrupt processing 3 cannot be executed at timing "A3", which is the timing at which interrupt processing 3 would normally be executed.
When interrupt processing 2 ends at timing "A8", the setting of interrupt prohibition flag 302 is canceled. Note that at this point, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Therefore, interrupt processing 3 is immediately started at timing "A8". In other words, the program (instruction) in the main processing is not executed between interrupt processing 2 and interrupt processing 3, and interrupt processing 3 is configured to start immediately after interrupt processing 2 is completed. has been done.
However, at the end of interrupt processing 2, the IFF1 register is set to "1" by the "EI" instruction in step S2892 in FIG. 66, so the set state of the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is canceled. Next, when the "RETI" instruction is executed in step S2893, the interrupt processing in step S2890 is restarted, but since the IFF1 register becomes "0" when starting the interrupt processing, the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set. Ru. Therefore, the set state of the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is released momentarily between the interrupt processing 2 and the interrupt processing 3.
When interrupt processing 3 is started, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.
At the end of interrupt processing 3, timing "A4" (when "3×Tc" has elapsed from timing "A1"), which is the start timing of interrupt processing 4, has not yet arrived.

After interrupt processing 3 is completed, the 8-bit counter 501 times out, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Since the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is not set at this point, interrupt processing becomes executable. Therefore, interrupt processing 4 is started at timing "A4". When interrupt processing 4 is started, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.
In this way, four interrupt processings can be started when "3 x Tc" has elapsed from timing "A1", and interrupt processing can be executed the same number of times as if there was no interrupt prohibition period for the main processing. can do.

As described above, if the timing to start interrupt processing is an interrupt disabled period, the next interrupt processing is started immediately after the interrupt disabled period ends. Furthermore, if an interrupt cycle arrives during execution of the next interrupt process, the next interrupt process is started immediately after the next interrupt process ends. With this configuration, it is possible to minimize the decrease in the number of interrupts and quickly return to a situation where interrupt processing is started when the original interrupt cycle arrives.

Although the fourth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and can be modified in various ways as described below.
(1) In the fourth embodiment, in order to set the interrupt period to approximately "1" ms when the system clock is "16" MHZ, the setting value of the prescaler register 502 is set to "143", and the setting value of the counter setting register 503 is set to "143". The value was set to "125". Therefore, the set value of the prescaler register 502 and the counter setting register 503 vary depending on how much the interrupt cycle is set, and are not limited to the above values. Note that the system clock is not limited to "16" MHZ, and can be set to various values such as "12" MHZ, "24" MHZ, etc., for example.
For example, if the value of the counter setting register 503 is set to "250" under the above conditions, the interrupt period is
250/(16/143)=2.234(ms)
It can be done.
In this case, even if the value of the counter setting register 503 is "250", the value can be within 1 byte.
On the other hand, the counter setting register 503 may have, for example, a 2-byte storage area instead of a 1-byte storage area. If the counter setting register 503 is a 2-byte storage area, the 8-bit counter 501 may be replaced by a 16-bit counter 501.

(2) In FIG. 63, FIG. 64, and FIG. 65, cases before RWM abnormality determination and after RWM abnormality determination are illustrated as counter setting register setting processing, but counter setting register setting processing is shown in FIGS. 64 and the timing shown in FIG. 65. It is sufficient to execute the counter setting register setting process by the desired timing to start interrupt processing.

(3) Initialization processing (Figure 65) At the time of transition, the processing to set the IFF1 register to "1" (processing to enable interrupts) uses the setting command set in step S2740, but is not limited to this. , for example, executing the "EI" command after step S2747. In this way, even if each process during the initialization process consists only of processes that do not have "DI" and "EI" instructions, as in steps S2740 and S2746, the interrupts can be enabled. becomes possible.
(4) The fourth embodiment is applicable not only to slot machines but also to pinball gaming machines (pachinko gaming machines), mahjong ball gaming machines, casino machines, and the like.

<Fifth embodiment>
The fifth embodiment relates to error history display.
FIG. 76 is a time chart showing the relationship (Example 1) between the rotation of the reel 31 and error detection (occurrence) and notification. Note that "while the reels are rotating" in this embodiment indicates a situation where at least one reel 31 is rotating. Moreover, "stopping of the reels" indicates that all the reels 31 have stopped.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when an error occurs, the error is detected with almost no time lag. In other words, in this embodiment, "when an error occurs" and "when an error is detected" are approximately equal.

Furthermore, the "error" in this embodiment corresponds to the "recoverable error" in the other embodiments described above.
FIG. 76 shows an example in which an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating. Examples of the types of errors in this case include selector-related errors (such as errors in the passage sensor 46 and errors in the input sensor 44 due to medal accumulation), hopper errors (such as errors in the dispensing sensor 37 due to abnormal dispensing), and the like. .

Note that while the reel 31 is rotating, no medals are accepted, and even if medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, they are returned by the blocker 45. However, if a fraudulent act (goto act) is performed while the reels 31 are rotating, there is a possibility that a selector error will be detected. Further, while the reels 31 are rotating, the hopper 35 is not driven, so no medals are paid out, but there is a possibility that the hopper 35 is driven and the medals are paid out due to fraudulent activity.
As described above, there are cases where an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating.

When the main control board 50 detects an error (time t0), it turns on the corresponding bit (the bit corresponding to the detected error) of the abnormal input flag provided in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. Furthermore, the main control board 50 sends a notification that an error has been detected (an error command) to the sub-control board 80, but the transmission timing in this embodiment is at the time of error notification ("t1" in FIG. 76). . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an error command may be transmitted when an error is detected, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG.
The main control board 50 determines whether or not an error is detected in the interrupt processing. Specifically, it is determined whether the bit of the above-mentioned abnormal input flag is on. This determination is executed, for example, in step S463 (input error check process) in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 47.

Further, when transmitting an error command to the sub-control board 80, it is performed by the control command transmitting process of step S464 in the interrupt process of FIG. 47, for example.
If an error command is to be sent to the sub-control board 80 immediately upon detecting an error, it may be sent to the sub-control board 80 in the first interrupt process after the abnormal input flag bit is turned on. Alternatively, if an error command is to be sent to the sub-control board 80 after all reels 31 have stopped (at the timing to notify the error), the error command is sent to the sub-control board 80 in the first interrupt process after all reels 31 have stopped. do it.

When all the reels 31 are stopped and an error command is received, the sub control board 80 notifies the user of the error using the production lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23. If an error command is transmitted at time t1 in FIG. 76, the sub control board 80 notifies the error after all reels 31 have stopped. In other words, no error is reported while the reel 31 is rotating.
Note that on the main control board 50 side as well, if an error occurs when all the reels 31 are stopped, an error notification is performed. For example, "En"("n" is an integer, and the value indicates the type of error) may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Then, when the error factor is removed and the reset switch 153 (see the third embodiment, not shown in FIG. 1) is operated, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 end the error notification. In other words, when the error factor is removed and the reset switch 153 is operated, the state returns to the state before the error was detected, provided that no error is detected. Therefore, even if the cause of the error is removed, the state before the error detection will not be restored unless the reset switch 153 is operated. Further, when the reset switch 153 is operated and no error is detected, the abnormal input flag bit stored in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is turned off.
Furthermore, the sub control board 80 stores error history (data) in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 83, and displays the error history when requested. Note that the error history of the sub-control board 80 is not erased by turning the power on and off or changing settings. Unless a serious error (unrecoverable error) occurs in the RWM of the sub-control board 80, the error history will not be erased.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example in which the error history including the progress of FIG. 76 (Example 1) is displayed as an image on the image display device 23, and two types of examples are shown as (A) and (B).
In the fifth embodiment, power off, power on, door open, and door close are not errors themselves, but are displayed together with the error history.
Further, when transitioning to a settings confirmation state or a settings change state, it is not displayed on the error history screen, but is displayed on a settings change history screen (not shown) that is separate from the error history screen.
Furthermore, although the history of detected errors is displayed, recovery from errors is not displayed on the error history screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and error recovery may also be displayed on the error history screen.

The error history can be displayed, for example, in the setting confirmation state. The setting confirmation process in this embodiment is similar to the setting change confirmation process shown in FIG. 45 (third embodiment). Specifically, as explained in the third embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on in a situation where the number of bets is "0" while waiting for the game (before the start of the game), the D It is set so that "1" is stored in the register. Then, in step S2755 in FIG. 45, the main control board 50 stores the D register value in the A register, and determines whether the A register value is "1". When the A register value is "1", the main control board 50 determines that it is time to confirm the settings, and proceeds to step S2760. After determining whether the A register value is "1", the C register value is stored in the A register. As described in the third embodiment, since the A register value is stored in the C register in step S2752, the setting value data is stored in the C register. Therefore, when the C register value is stored in the A register, the A register value becomes set value data.

In this way, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on in a situation where the number of bets waiting for the game is "0", the setting confirmation state is entered. When the setting confirmation state is entered, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73, and a menu screen for the administrator of the gaming machine 10 is displayed on the image display device 23. In this menu, there is an "Error History" item, and if you select "Error History" with the cross keys and make a decision operation (in this case, turn on the push button), the screen shown in Figure 77 will appear. An error history screen is displayed.

For example, in FIG. 77(A), "January 29, 2021, 13:27:45", which is the time of the XX error with error number "003", corresponds to time t1 in FIG. 76. In other words, if the error is reported at time t1 after 3 minutes have elapsed from the time when the error was detected (time t0 in the figure), the actual This means that an error has been detected.
However, as described above, by displaying the start date and time of error notification as the time of error, even if an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating and it takes time from the time of detection of the error to the time of notification, Since there is no discrepancy between the timing when the error is reported and the displayed error time, the administrator may be made aware that there is a problem with the gaming machine 10, or there is a possibility that fraud has been committed. You can prevent it from being recognized as such.
As mentioned above, when displaying the time of recovery from an error in the error history, "XX error recovery" is displayed together with the time in the diagram between error numbers "001" and "002". .

In FIG. 77(A), the date and time when the sub-control board 80 started error notification is displayed as the error time. The sub-control board 80 stores error details and time in association with each other. Information regarding time is acquired using, for example, an RTC (real-time clock) function provided in the sub-control board 80.
On the other hand, FIG. 77(B) is an example in which the elapsed date and time from the current time is displayed as the time. In this way, the actual time may be displayed as shown in FIG. 77(A), or the elapsed time and date from the current time may be displayed as shown in FIG. 77(B).
Furthermore, although "time" is displayed in the example of FIG. 77, "notification time", "occurrence time", "detection time", etc. may be displayed.
However, even if "occurrence time" or "detection time" is displayed, the actual error occurrence time or detection time is not displayed, but is actually the time when error notification started.

In the example of FIG. 76, when an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating, the detected error cannot be notified immediately because the reel 31 is still rotating, so the error is notified after the reel 31 has stopped. When an error is detected while the reels 31 are rotating, the reason why the error is not notified while the reels 31 are rotating is because the progress of the game (stopping the rotating reels 31) is prioritized over notifying the error. be.
On the other hand, if an error is detected in a situation where the reels 31 are not rotating (for example, during game standby after all reels 31 have stopped), an error command is immediately sent to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 An error is notified (corresponding to the first error in FIG. 82, which will be described later). Therefore, in this case, the time displayed in the error history is the same as the time when the error was detected.

Example 2 in FIG. 78 is a time chart showing a case where the settings are changed after an error is detected while the reels 31 are rotating.
Here, in the third embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a setting change prohibition flag. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated (when the reels 31 start rotating), the setting change prohibition flag is turned on, and when all the reels 31 stop, the setting change prohibition flag is turned off. In this case, when the setting change prohibition flag is on, the setting change state cannot be entered. When the power is turned off while the reel 31 is rotating, it is stored that the settings cannot be changed flag is on, and even if the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, (settings cannot be changed flag (starts up with ``on'' on), it does not change settings.
In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, the setting change prohibition flag in the third embodiment is not provided. Therefore, if the power is turned off while the reel 31 is rotating and the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the setting change state can be entered.

When an error is detected during rotation of the reel 31, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit of the abnormal input flag provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50, as described above.
Furthermore, if the power is turned off while the reel 31 is rotating, the supply of power to the motor 32 that drives the reel 31 is shut off, and the reel 31 then stops rotating. Next, when the front door is opened and the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 44, the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 45).

Here, when the initialization process (FIG. 44) is executed, the abnormal input flag in the storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is also initialized ("RWM clear when changing settings" in FIG. 78). . Therefore, when the gaming machine 10 is started up through the setting change state, the error data detected before the setting change process is erased. Therefore, when the gaming machine 10 starts up after going through the setting change state, an error detected before transitioning to the setting change state (an error based on data stored in the abnormal input flag) is not notified.

From the above, as in Example 2 of FIG. 78, if an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating and then goes through the setting change state, the error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating and before transitioning to the setting change state. Since the error detection data is erased by the RWM clearing process in the setting change state, the error will not be notified after the setting change process ends.
In addition, in this example 2, by passing through the setting change state, the data of the error detected before transitioning to the setting change state is erased, so after the setting change state ends, the main control board 50 is transferred to the sub control board 50. No error command is sent to 80. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the first interrupt processing occurs after step S2740, as shown in FIG. In this case, since the initialization process has already been executed in step S2732, the error command stored before the power is turned off has been erased by the time the first interrupt process is performed. Therefore, even if the process moves to the interrupt process (FIG. 47) and the control command sending process in step S464 in FIG. 47 is executed, the error command will not be sent to the sub control board 80.
Therefore, it is stored as an error history in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 and is not displayed.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the error history screen of FIG. 78 (Example 2). In FIG. 79, the power off with error number "004" corresponds to time t3 in FIG. 78. Further, power-on with error number "003" corresponds to time t4 in FIG. 78.
In this example, after the power is turned off, the door is opened, and the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and then the power is turned on, so that the opening of the door is detected at the same time as the power is turned on. Then, a setting change process is performed between error numbers "001" and "002", and then the door is closed. Note that, as described above, the setting change process is not displayed on the error history screen.

As mentioned above, the error data detected before entering the settings change state (before the power is turned off) is erased, so the error will not be reported even after the settings change state ends, and will also be displayed in the error history. Not done.
Therefore, since errors that have not been reported are not displayed as an error history, it is possible to ensure consistency between reported errors and errors displayed as a history, and to prevent misunderstandings from being given to the administrator. In other words, errors that have not been reported will not be displayed as an error history.

FIG. 80 is a time chart showing a case (Example 3) in which multiple errors are detected during the setting confirmation state.
In FIG. 80, the transition from the game standby state to the setting confirmation state is the same as described above.
In this example, it is assumed that the first error is detected first, and then the second error is detected during the setting confirmation state. Examples of the first error and the second error include a selector error (an error regarding the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44), a hopper error (an error regarding the dispensing sensor 37), and the like, as described above.
When the first error and the second error are respectively detected during the setting confirmation state, the main control board 50 stores information regarding the type of detected error in the storage area of the RWM 53 at the time when the error is detected. Remember.
In the setting confirmation state, similarly to when the reel 31 is rotating, even if an error is detected, the error is not reported, and the error is notified after the setting confirmation state ends. This is to give priority to control processing of the setting confirmation state over error notification.

When the main control board 50 ends the setting confirmation state, first, it transmits an error command based on the detection of the second error to the sub control board 80 (at time t5 in the figure). The sub control board 80 notifies the second error based on receiving the error command. In other words, when errors are detected in the order of the first error and the second error in the setting confirmation state, the errors are notified in the order of the second error and the first error after the setting confirmation state ends (in the order of detected errors). and vice versa). Note that when the sub control board 80 receives a second error command from the main control board 50, it stores the content of the second error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 83 as an error history in association with the notification start date and time.
The notification of the second error by the sub control board 80 continues until the cause of the second error is removed, and when the main control board 50 determines that the cause of the second error has been removed, it issues a command to that effect. It is transmitted to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives the command, it ends the notification of the second error.

Furthermore, when the cause of the second error is removed, the main control board 50 then transmits an error command based on the detection of the first error to the sub control board 80 (time t6 in the figure). The sub control board 80 notifies the first error based on receiving the error command. When the sub control board 80 receives the first error command from the main control board 50, it stores the contents of the first error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 83 as an error history in association with the notification start date and time.
Notification of the first error continues until the cause of the first error is removed, and when the main control board 50 determines that the cause of the first error has been removed, it sends a command to that effect to the sub control board 80. do. When the sub control board 80 receives the command, it ends the notification of the first error.
Note that, similarly to Example 1 in FIG. 76, when the first error is detected, the first error command is sent to the sub-control board 80 (double-dashed line in the figure), and when the second error is detected, the second error command is sent to the sub-control board 80. may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 (double-dashed line in the figure).

Here, in Example 3 of FIG. 80, it is assumed that the priority of notification of the first error and the second error are the same (there is no priority in notification).
On the other hand, there are cases where a priority level is determined for error notification. For example, if the notification priority of the first error is higher than the notification priority of the second error, the notification of the first error is performed first after the setting confirmation state ends, and the cause of the first error is removed. A second error will be notified.
Further, in this case, the first error is displayed first, and the second error is displayed after that in the error history in the order in which the errors are reported.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the error history in Example 3 of FIG. In this example, after the door with error number "004" is opened, a setting confirmation state is entered, and at the end of this setting confirmation state, a second error with error number "003" is detected. Note that the "setting confirmation state" may or may not be displayed in the error history.
Then, when the cause of the second error is removed, the first error is then notified. The first error is displayed in the error history as error number "002" (time t6 in FIG. 80). In this way, the order of the second error and the first error in the error history matches the order of the notified errors. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the difference between the error notification order and the history display order, and to prevent the administrator from being misled.
As described above, in this embodiment, if multiple errors occur in a situation where error notification is not possible, when the situation becomes such that error notification is possible, the error will be notified sequentially starting from the error detected later. It is designed to do so.

FIG. 82 is a time chart showing a case (Example 4) in which the first error and the second error are detected during game standby (after all reels 31 have stopped and before the start switch 41 is operated (before the game starts)). be.
During game standby, the reels 31 are not rotating or the settings are being checked, so if an error is detected, the detected error can be immediately notified.
First, when the main control board 50 detects a first error while waiting for a game, it transmits a command for the first error to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives the first error command, it starts notifying the first error (time t7 in the figure). The received first error information is stored in the error history in association with the notification start time information.
When the second error is detected after the first error is detected and before the cause of the first error is removed (during notification of the first error), the main control board 50 performs the same operation as in the above example, as will be described later. Similarly, it is transmitted to the sub control board 80 at the timing when the second error notification becomes possible (time t8 in the figure). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a command for the second error may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the time when the second error is detected (indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure).

When the cause of the first error is removed, the main control board 50 transmits information to that effect to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives information indicating that the cause of the first error has been removed, it ends the first error notification.
On the other hand, when the main control board 50 detects that the cause of the first error has been removed, it transmits a second error command to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives the second error command, it starts notifying the second error (time t8 in the figure). The received second error information is stored in the error history in association with the notification start time information.
When the cause of the second error is removed, the main control board 50 transmits information to that effect to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives information indicating that the cause of the second error has been removed, it ends the notification of the second error.
As described above, when errors are detected in the order of the first error and the second error while waiting for the game, unlike during the setting confirmation state, the first error and the second error are notified in the order. This is because there is no need to suspend notification of the first error when the first error is detected, and notification of the first error can be started immediately.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the error history in Example 4 of FIG. 82. In this example 4, when the first error is notified, the history of the first error is displayed at the error number "004". The time of the first error with error number "004" corresponds to time t7 in FIG. Furthermore, when the cause of the first error is removed, the second error is then notified and displayed with error number "002". The time of the second error with error number "002" corresponds to time t8 in FIG. 82.
Therefore, the notification order of the first error and the second error matches the error history order.

Further, although not illustrated in this embodiment, when errors are detected continuously, the following processing is performed.
For example, when a medal retention error in the selector (an error in the input sensor 44) is detected during game standby, a medal retention error command is sent to the sub-control board 80. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 notifies the medal retention error.
Next, assume that after the administrator removes the medal retention error and before operating the reset switch 153, the administrator inserts medals through the medal slot 47, and as a result, the medal retention error occurs again. In this case, the main control board 50 does not resend the medal retention error command to the sub control board 80. Then, when the administrator removes the medal retention error again and operates the reset switch 153, it is determined whether the error cause has been removed, and if it is determined that the error cause has been removed, information to that effect is sent to the subcontrol. It is transmitted to the board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the information, it ends the notification of the medal retention error.

In this way, for example, even if a medal retention error is detected twice on the main control board 50 side, the medal retention error command will be sent to the sub control board 80 before the reset switch 153 is operated. It only happens once. Therefore, one medal retention error is displayed in the error history by the sub-control board 80.
Although the medal retention error has been exemplified above, the present invention is not limited to the medal retention error, but also applies to other errors that are recovered by operating the reset switch 153 after the cause of the error has been removed.

<Sixth embodiment>
The sixth embodiment relates to the structure of a main control board 50, a socket (also referred to as a "chip socket") 56, and a main chip 55.
Note that in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment described later, "mounting" refers to various electronic components (CPU, ROM, RAM, resistors, connectors, 7 This refers to making it function (operate) as an electronic circuit by soldering it (segment display, etc.) or attaching it to a socket.
Further, the "main chip 55" in this embodiment is a chip that includes a main CPU 55 and a built-in memory, and further has a ROM 54 and an RWM 53 within this built-in memory, as described in FIG. 32 (third embodiment). Refers to a chip microprocessor.

FIG. 84 is an external perspective view showing the main control board 50, the socket 56, and the main chip 55 not installed in the socket 56 in the sixth embodiment.
The socket 56 is provided with the main chip 55 and is used to electrically connect the main chip 55 and the main control board 50. The socket 56 is mounted at a predetermined position on the main control board 50. Although the details will be described later, the socket 56 is made of a transparent resin material (as long as the internal cavity 56a is visible, it may be semi-transparent). A pin insertion opening 56c into which a pin 55a (terminal) of the main chip 55 is inserted is formed in the top surface of the socket 56.
Note that the reason why the resistor 50a is also shown in the main control board 50 in FIG. 84 is to compare the height of the resistor 50a and the height of the notch 56e of the socket 56. Details of this point will be described later.

FIG. 85 is a plan view (viewed vertically downward from above) showing the main chip 55 attached to the socket 56 in more detail. Moreover, FIG. 86 is an arrow view (front view) seen from the Z1 direction in FIG. 85. Furthermore, FIG. 87 is an arrow view (side view) seen from the Z2 direction in FIG. 85.
Here, in FIG. 85, the "upper side of the drawing" and the "lower side of the drawing" are respectively defined as shown.
In this example, the main chip 55 has 71 pins 55a. Here, "pin 55a (1)" refers to the first pin 55a, "pin 55a (2)" refers to the second pin 55a, ..., "pin 55a (71)" Assume that it refers to the 71st pin 55a.

At approximately the center of the upper and lower edges of the main chip 55 in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the figure), a recessed portion 55b is provided which is cut out in an approximately arc shape.
Of the 71 pins 55a, the 1st pin 55a (1) to the 35th pin 55a (35 ) are provided. Similarly, the upper edge of the main chip 55 in the longitudinal direction is provided with pins from the 36th pin 55a (36) to the 71st pin 55a (71), except for the portion where the recessed portion 55b is formed. .
Also, among the 1st to 71st pins 55a, the 17th (pin 55a (17)), 35th (pin 55a (35)), 54th (pin 55a (54)), and 71st (pin 55a ( 71)) is a GND (ground) line. Pins other than these four are signal lines.

Here, the 35th pin 55a (35) is located at the right end of the lower edge of the main chip 55, and the 71st pin 55a (71) is located at the left end of the upper edge of the main chip 55. Furthermore, the 17th pin 55a (17) and the 54th pin 55a (54), which are the GND lines, are located adjacent to the recessed portion 55b.
When the operator grips the main chip 55, the operator first holds and holds the vicinity of the 35th pin 55a (35) and the 71st pin 55a (71). By having a corner), the GND line can be located near the GND line, and the number of signal lines touched by the operator's fingers can be reduced accordingly.

Second, it is possible to hold the main chip 55 so as to grasp the vicinity of the recessed portions 55b on the lower and upper edges of the main chip 55. Since the main chip 55 has the recessed portion 55b, it becomes easier to hold the main chip 55. Furthermore, when holding the concave portion 55b, by holding the vicinity of the 17th pin 55a (17) and the 54th pin 55a (54), it is possible to hold the vicinity of the GND line in the same way as above. Therefore, the number of signal lines touched by the operator's fingers can be reduced accordingly.

Furthermore, on the upper surface of the main chip 55, a two-dimensional code 55e is printed on the left side area. Furthermore, a model number sticker 55f displaying the model number of the gaming machine 10 is attached to the right side area. The area where the two-dimensional code 55e is printed and the area where the model number sticker 55f is attached are flat surfaces (surfaces without steps). In particular, displaying the two-dimensional code 55e on a flat surface makes it easier to read the two-dimensional code. Further, by providing the model number sticker 55f on a flat surface, it becomes easier to read the information displayed on the model number sticker 55f. Furthermore, by pasting the model number sticker 55f on a flat surface, it becomes difficult to peel off.
Furthermore, a substantially semicircular step portion 55c is formed on the left side edge of the main chip 55. Note that this stepped portion 55c, as well as a stepped portion 55d and a stepped portion 55i described below, are all recessed from the surface.
The stepped portion 55c has a recessed area formed in a substantially semicircular shape.
Further, a step portion 55d is formed near the step portion 55c and at a position closer to the pin 55a(1). The stepped portion 55d has a substantially circular region that is recessed, and a number “1” is displayed within the substantially circular region. The portion marked with the number “1” may be further recessed than the approximately circular region, or conversely may be formed to be more convex than the approximately circular region (provided that it is more convex than the approximately circular region). (does not protrude above). Further, although the number "1" is shown in this example, other numbers, symbols, etc. may be used.

On the top surface of the main chip 55, between the two-dimensional code 55e and the model number sticker 55f, a product name 55g (bold-lined text in the figure) and a company name 55h (dotted-lined text in the figure) are displayed. The product name 55g is printed. Further, the company name 55h has a stepped portion 55i.
FIG. 88(A) is an enlarged view of the product name 55g and company name 55h. Further, (B) in the same figure is a sectional view taken along the arrow Z3-Z3 in (A).
As shown in FIG. 88, a region corresponding to the thickness of the line of the company name 55h is recessed from the surface, forming a stepped portion 55i.
FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the stepped portion 55c (semicircular portion), the stepped portion 55d (circular portion with the number “1” displayed inside), and the stepped portion 55i.
When the depth of the stepped portion 55c is D1, the depth of the stepped portion 55d is D2, and the depth of the stepped portion 55i is D3, the magnitude relationship is “D1>D2>D3”. In this way, by making the depths of the three step portions 55c, 55d, and 55i different, counterfeiting is made difficult.
Furthermore, since the depths of the plurality of step portions 55c, 55d, and 55i are different, an operator can grasp the mounting direction of the main chip 55 by feeling the top surface of the main chip 55.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 88(A), at least a part of the product name 55g is arranged to overlap with the company name 55h. In this example, "B" and "C" in the product name overlap with "A" in the company name, "D", "E" and "F" in the product name overlap with "B" in the company name, and "B" in the product name overlaps with "A" in the company name. The letter "G" overlaps with the letter "C" in the company name.
In other words, the characters "BCDEFG" of the product name "ABCDEFG" are arranged so as to overlap the stepped portion 55i. Displaying the product name 55g in this way makes counterfeiting difficult.
For example, if an attempt is made to form a company name 55h with a stepped portion 55i after printing the product name 55g, the portion of the product name 55g that overlaps with the stepped portion 55i may be erased.
On the other hand, when attempting to print the product name 55g after forming the company name 55h having the stepped portion 55i, the portion of the product name 55g that overlaps with the stepped portion 55i may not be printed clearly.

Furthermore, hidden characters 55j are displayed within the characters of the product name 55g. The size of each character of the hidden characters 55j is less than or equal to the line thickness of the characters of the product name 55g.
As shown in FIG. 88(A), the character "A" of the hidden character 55j is displayed within the line of the character "C" of the product name 55g. Similarly, the character "B" of the hidden character 55j is displayed within the line of the character "D" of the product name 55g, and the character "C" of the hidden character 55j is displayed within the line of the character "E" of the product name 55g. ing.
Furthermore, among the characters "A", "B", and "C" of the hidden characters 55j, the characters "A" and "C" of the hidden characters 55j are arranged so as to straddle the stepped portion 55i of the company name 55h.
Therefore, the letter "C" of the product name 55g and the letter "A" of the hidden character 55j are displayed so as to straddle the stepped portion 55i of the letter "A" of the company name 55h.
Similarly, the letter "E" of the product name 55g and the letter "C" of the hidden character 55j are displayed so as to straddle the stepped portion 55i of the letter "B" of the company name 55h.
This configuration makes counterfeiting more difficult. Furthermore, by checking the presence or absence of the hidden characters 55j, it is possible to determine whether or not it is forged.

The main body of the socket 56 is made of, for example, a transparent resin material, as described above. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 87, socket pins 56d (terminals) are provided inside the socket 56 at positions corresponding to the pins 55a of the main chip 55 to be mounted. Although FIG. 87 shows only the 35th socket pin 56d (35) and the 36th socket pin 56d (36), and the illustration of the socket pin 56d is omitted in FIG. 86, the socket pin 56d is It has socket pins 56d(1) to 56d(71) connected to pins 55a(1) to 55a(71) of the chip 55, respectively.
By soldering the socket pins 56d(1) to 56d(71) of the socket 56 to the main control board 50, the socket pins 56d and the main control board 50 are electrically connected, and the socket 56 is connected to the main control board 50. will be implemented.
Furthermore, when the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56, the pins 55a(1) to 55a(71) of the main chip 55 and the socket pins 56d(1) to 56d(71) of the socket 56 are electrically connected to each other. Connected. Thereby, the main chip 55 and the main control board 50 are electrically connected. After the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56, the main chip 55 is coupled so that it cannot be easily pulled out from the socket 56.

As shown in FIG. 85, on the surface of the main control board 50, a landmark numeral 50b and a landmark 50c are printed around the area where the socket 56 is mounted.
The landmark numeral 50b includes a numeral 50b (1) displaying the number "1", a numeral 50b (35) displaying the numeral "35", a numeral 50b (36) displaying the numeral "36", and a numeral "36". It has four landmark numbers 50b (71) displaying ``71''.
These four landmark numbers 50b (1), landmark numbers 50b (35), landmark numbers 50b (36), and landmark numbers 50b (71) correspond to pins 55a (1) and pins 55a (35) of the main chip 55, respectively. ), pin 55a (36), and pin 55a (71) correspond. Specifically, when looking vertically downward from above the main chip 55 with the main chip 55 attached to the socket 56, the pin 55a (1) is located near the landmark number 50b (1), and the pin 55a (35) is located near the landmark number 50b (35), pin 55a (36) is located near the landmark number 50b (36), and pin 55a (71) is located near the landmark number 50b (71). It is supposed to be located.

Furthermore, on the surface of the main control board 50, between the landmark number 50b(1) and the landmark number 50b(35), there are six marks 50c(5), 50c(10), and 50c(15). , a mark 50c (20), a mark 50c (25), and a mark 50c (30) are printed. These marks 50c are printed with dots.
In FIG. 85, when viewed vertically downward from above the main chip 55 with the main chip 55 attached to the socket 56, a mark 50c (5) is located approximately directly below the pin 55a (5) of the main chip 55. is located, the mark 50c (10) is located substantially directly below the pin 55a (10), the mark 50c (15) is located substantially directly below the pin 55a (15), and the mark is located substantially directly below the pin 55a (20). 50c (20) is located, the mark 50c (25) is located substantially directly below the pin 55a (25), and the mark 50c (30) is located substantially directly below the pin 55a (30).

On the other hand, on the surface of the main control board 50, between the landmark number 50b (36) and the landmark number 50b (71), there are seven marks 50c (40), 50c (45), 50c (50), A mark 50c (55), a mark 50c (60), a mark 50c (65), and a mark 50c (70) are printed. These marks 50c are printed with dots in the same way as the above marks 50c.
In FIG. 85, when viewed vertically downward from above the main chip 55 with the main chip 55 attached to the socket 56, the main control board 50 is located almost directly above the pins 55a (40) of the main chip 55. The mark 50c (40) is located almost directly above the pin 55a (45) of the main chip 55, and the mark 50c (50) is located almost directly above the pin 55a (50). The mark 50c (55) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (55), the mark 50c (60) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (60), and the mark 50c (60) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (65). The mark 50c (65) is located so that the mark 50c (70) is located substantially directly above the pin 55a (70).

With the above configuration, when the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56 and viewed from directly above, the pin number of the main chip 55 can be easily known. For example, in FIG. 85, it can be easily determined that the pin 55a (36) of the main chip 55 located almost directly below the landmark number 50b (36) is the "36th" pin. Further, for example, the pin 55a (17) (GND) is easily the "17" pin 55a due to the landmark number 50b (1), the landmark 50c (5), the landmark 50c (10), and the landmark 50c (15). I understand that.

In FIG. 85, a step portion 56b (56b(1) and 56b(71)) is formed at the left end of the surface (top surface) of the socket 56. The stepped portion 56b(1) has a substantially rectangular region recessed from the surface, and the number “1” is displayed within the substantially rectangular region. Note that the amount of recess of the step portion 56b is arbitrary, but for example, it may be set to be approximately the same as the amount of recess of the step portion 55c of the main chip 55.
Further, the number "1" of the stepped portion 56b(1) is displayed rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in FIG. 85. Therefore, when the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56, the number “1” displayed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 and the number “1” displayed on the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56 are The direction is shifted by 90 degrees. By doing this, if the main chip 55 and the socket 56 are viewed in the orientation shown in FIG. 85, the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 will be in the correct orientation.
Therefore, when the main control board 50 is attached to the gaming machine 10 in the orientation shown in FIG. 85, the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 can be seen in the correct orientation. On the other hand, when the main control board 50 is attached to the gaming machine 10 in an orientation rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the orientation in the drawing shown in FIG. You can see "1" in the correct direction. Therefore, no matter which orientation the main control board 50 is attached to the gaming machine 10, the numbers on either the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 or the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56 should be viewed in the correct orientation. This makes it easier to confirm the pin number when attaching the main chip 55 to the socket 56.

Note that the orientation of the main chip 55 can also be confirmed by looking at the position of the stepped portion 55c. That is, in the main chip 55, the side having the stepped portion 55c is the side with pin numbers "1" and "71".
Further, when main chip 55 is viewed from above, only the lower left corner in FIG. 85 of the outer shape of main chip 55 is chamfered. The chamfered corner side has pin number "1". Therefore, the position of pin number "1" can be easily confirmed by simply checking the chamfered corner.

Furthermore, the stepped portion 56b (71) has a substantially rectangular region recessed from the surface, and the number “71” is displayed within the substantially rectangular region. Similarly to the number "1" of the stepped portion 56b (1), the number "71" of the stepped portion 56b (71) is also displayed rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in FIG. 85.
When the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56, the first pin 55a(1) of the main chip 55 is located near the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56, and The th pin 55a (71) (GND) is located near the stepped portion 56b (71) of the socket 56.

The stepped portion 56b(1) and the stepped portion 56b(71) of the socket 56 are also configured to have recesses and numbers are displayed within the recessed areas, making it difficult to forge the socket 56.
Further, the number of pins 55a of the main chip 55 is "71", that is, an odd number, and in FIG. 85, the number of pins 55a is "35" on the lower side and "36" on the upper side. Since the socket 56 side also has a shape into which these pins 55a are inserted, the main chip 55 cannot be installed in the opposite direction (the side with 36 pins 55a is inserted with the side having 36 pins 55a facing downward in the figure). Thereby, incorrect attachment can be prevented. Also, when attaching the main chip 55 to the socket 56, the number “1” displayed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 and the number “1” displayed on the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56 are By matching these, it becomes possible to mount the main chip 55 in the socket 56 in the correct orientation.

Furthermore, when the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56, the number "1" on the stepped portion 56b(1) makes it easy to identify that the pin 55a(1) of the main chip 55 is the "1" pin 55a. You can check. Similarly, from the number "71" on the stepped portion 56b (71), it can be easily confirmed that the pin 55a (71) (GND) of the main chip 55 is the "71" pin 55a.

As shown in FIG. 86, notches 56e (height H1) are formed at two locations on the bottom surface of the socket 56 in the longitudinal direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 87, a notch 56f (height H2) is formed in the bottom surface of the socket 56 in the lateral direction. These notches 56e and 56f make it possible to visually confirm that no unauthorized parts are attached to the bottom surface of the socket 56. As described above, since the socket 56 main body is made of a transparent or semi-transparent resin material, it is possible to visually confirm that there are no unauthorized parts inside (the cavity 56a). 56e and 56f make it possible to visually confirm that there are no unauthorized parts on the contact surface between the socket 56 and the main control board 50.
Here, as shown in FIG. 87, a socket pin 56d is provided inside the socket 56. Therefore, if the height H1 of the notch 56e is higher than necessary in the longitudinal direction of the socket 56 (the side where the socket pins 56d are aligned), a wire or the like can be inserted through the notch 56e, which may lead to fraud. There is a risk of being exposed.

However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86, the height H1 of the notch 56e is lower than the height H3 of the resistor 50a mounted on the main control board 50 (H1<H3). Specifically, the height H1 of the notch 56e is, for example, less than 1 mm, and the height H3 of the resistor 50a is, for example, about 1 to 3 mm. It is assumed that the height H3 of the resistor 50a is the resistor with the lowest height among the plurality of types of resistors mounted on the main control board 50.
As described above, the socket 56 is configured so that it is difficult to insert a foreign object such as a wire through the notch 56e. Thereby, it is difficult to access the socket pin 56d through the notch 56e, so it is possible to suppress tribbing.

<Seventh embodiment>
The seventh embodiment relates to the positional relationship between a board and an electronic component.
In the seventh embodiment, the "board" includes, in addition to the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 described above, other control boards connected to the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, or relay boards. It will be done.
In addition, "electronic components" include (cable) connectors, 7-segment displays, and the like. If the electronic component is a 7-segment display, for example, a set value display LED 73 (1 digit), a credit number display LED 76 (2 digits), an earned number display LED 78 (2 digits), a management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 (4 digits) (see FIGS. 1 and 36).
In addition, in this embodiment, the "front surface" of the board refers to the surface on which a predetermined electronic component is mounted (so-called "component surface"), and the "back surface" refers to the surface opposite to the surface on which a predetermined electronic component is mounted. It refers to the side surface (so-called "solder surface").

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, by providing a predetermined amount of gap between the board and the bottom surface of the predetermined electronic component (the surface facing the board), unauthorized components can be removed between the bottom surface of the predetermined electronic component and the board. This makes it possible to visually confirm whether or not any of the following items are attached. In a situation where the board is attached to the gaming machine 10, the gap may not be easily visually confirmed depending on the mounting position, although this varies depending on the position where the board is attached.
However, when assembling the gaming machine 10 or during maintenance after installing the gaming machine 10, the operator can easily visually check the gap.
Furthermore, as will be described later, by illuminating the gap with an LED, it becomes possible to check the gap even in a dimly lit environment after the board is attached to the housing of the gaming machine 10.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing the positional relationship (Example 1) between a substrate and a predetermined electronic component in the seventh embodiment, in which (A) shows a plan view and (B) shows a front view.
The “predetermined electronic component” in this example 1 corresponds to the connector 57.
Further, FIG. 91(A) is a view taken from the Z4 direction in FIG. 90(A), and illustration of the substrate is omitted. Further, FIG. 90(B) is a view taken from the Z5 direction (bottom side of the connector) in FIG. 90(B), and illustration of the board is omitted.
In the example of FIG. 90, a connector 57 is mounted on the board. The connector 57 corresponds to a cable connector for connecting to another board (for example, the main control board 50) via a cable.

Further, as shown in FIG. 91(B), a plurality of leg portions 57a are formed on the bottom side of the connector 57. As a result, the entire range of the bottom surface of the connector 57 does not come into contact with the board, only the feet 57a of the connector come into contact with the board, and there is a constant distance between the bottom surface of the connector 57 (excluding the feet 57a) and the surface of the board. A gap is formed. In other words, the connector 57 is arranged so as to float above the substrate surface by the height of the foot portion 57a.
With this configuration, it is possible to visually check the gap between the connector 57 and the board, and it is possible to check whether any unauthorized parts or the like are attached.

The lead wires 57b of the connector 57 are arranged in two rows as shown in FIG. 91(B), and are arranged so as to avoid the leg portions 57a. As a result, when viewed from the front as shown in FIG. 90(B) or when viewed from the back side as shown in FIG. 91(A), it is possible to visually check that the foot portion 57a and the lead wire 57b do not overlap. Therefore, it is possible to correctly determine whether any unauthorized parts or the like are attached to the gap between the board and the connector 57.
Further, as shown in FIG. 91(A), the lead wire 57b is configured to be visible when viewed from behind the connector 57, but when viewed from directly above the connector 57, as shown in FIG. 90(A). The lead wire 57b is configured so as not to be visible.
For example, if this board is installed inside the gaming machine 10 (for example, inside the housing, on the back of the front door, etc.), it will be installed in a manner that looks like the one shown in Figure 90(A) when the front door is opened. If so, the lead wire 57b of the connector 57 cannot be visually seen from that position, thereby improving security.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the positional relationship (Example 2) between the board and a predetermined electronic component in the seventh embodiment, in which (A) shows a plan view and (B) shows a side view (enlarged view). .
The substrate of Example 2 corresponds to the display substrate 75 shown in FIG. 36 (third embodiment). Further, the "predetermined electronic component" corresponds to the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78.
To briefly explain the display board 75 again, as shown in FIG. 1, the display board 75 is a board that is electrically connected to the main control board 50, so it is preferable that countermeasures against unauthorized use be taken.

As shown in FIG. 92, a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78 are mounted on the display board 75. Each of these consists of two 7-segment displays (upper digit and lower digit) arranged in parallel.
Further, on the display board 75, six status display LEDs 79 are mounted below the credit number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 in FIG. 92(A). These are independent LEDs.

As shown in FIG. 92(B), the credit number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 have a foot portion (in the case of the acquisition number display LED 78, a foot portion 78a) on the bottom surface, similarly to the connector 57 shown in FIG. 90. The foot portion 78a has a height of “H4”. As a result, when the acquisition number display LED 78 is mounted on the display substrate 75, a gap “H4” is formed between the bottom surface of the acquisition number display LED 78 and the top of the display substrate 75. The same applies to the credit number display ED76.

In addition, when the status display LED 79 (FIG. 92(B) shows the game start display LED 79d, but this applies to all status display LEDs 79) is mounted on the display board 75, the status display is displayed in the same way as the connector 57. The lead wire of the LED 79 is soldered to the display board 75, but the gap "H5" between the bottom of the status display LED 79 and the display board 75 at that time is almost "0" or very small. be. Therefore, the gap "H4" between the bottom of the credit number display LED 76 and the number of earned number display LED 78 and the display board 75 is larger than the gap "H5" between the bottom of the status display LED 79 and the display board 75 (H5 <H4). With this configuration, the light when the status display LED 79 is turned on can illuminate the gap "H4" between the bottom surface of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 and the display board 75.

In particular, the status display LED 79 is located so close to the credit number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 that the light when the status display LED 79 is turned on reaches the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78. This makes it possible to visually check the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the earned number display LED 78 using the light when the status display LED 79 is turned on.
For example, in a situation where a medal is bet, at least one of the 1 bet display LED 79a, 2 bet display LED 79b, and 3 bet display LED 79c lights up, so if you bet a medal, the bottom of the credit number display LED 76 and the earned number display LED 78 can be visually confirmed.

In addition, if the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off while medals are being bet, when the power is turned on again, the bet number data before the power cut is read and the gaming machine 10 is restarted. Sometimes, at least one of the 1-bet display LED 79a, 2-bet display LED 79b, or 3-bet display LED 79c lights up again. Therefore, by simply turning on the power, the LEDs can be turned on, and the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the earned number display LED 78 can be visually confirmed.
Note that the above is not limited to the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c, but also applies to other LEDs. For example, after the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the replay display LED 79f will remain lit until the next game is started, and even if the power is turned off and on in this situation, the gaming machine 10 will At startup, the replay display LED 79f lights up again. Therefore, the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the earned number display LED 78 can be visually confirmed using the light when the replay display LED 79f is turned on.
The display board 75 is attached to the back side of the front door of the gaming machine 10, and a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79 are arranged so as to be visible from the control panel 12c.
Under the situation where the display board 75 is attached to the gaming machine 10 in this way, even if the status display LED 79 is turned on, it may not be easy to visually check the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the earned number display LED 78. There is. Therefore, while the display board 75 is electrically connected to the gaming machine 10 (the display board 75 is connected with a harness), the display board 75 is removed from the front door, and the operator removes the display board 75 from the front door. If you hold it in your hand and turn on the status display LED 79, you can easily visually check the bottom of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78.

FIG. 93 is a diagram showing the positional relationship (Example 3) between the board and a predetermined electronic component in the seventh embodiment, in which (A) shows the front surface (mounting surface of the predetermined electronic component), and (B) (C) shows a side view, and (C) shows a back view.
The board of this example 3 corresponds to the main control board 50. Further, the “predetermined electronic component” corresponds to the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74. The management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is the same as that shown in FIG. 1 (first embodiment) and FIG. 36(B) (third embodiment).

First, the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the example of FIG. 93 is composed of four independent 7-segment displays (digits in FIG. 36(B)) arranged in parallel. . Further, each 7-segment display is provided with a DP (decimal point) (segment P in FIG. 37), as in the example of FIG. 36(B).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 93(B), the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 has a foot portion (not shown in FIG. 93) on the bottom surface, as in the other examples of the seventh embodiment. is provided, so that a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 and the surface of the main control board 50. With this configuration, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not any unauthorized parts are attached to the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74.

Furthermore, on the back side of the main control board 50, an area where the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is attached to the front side has approximately the same dimensions as the external shape of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74. A border line 50d is printed. When the color of the main control board 50 is, for example, green, the boundary line 50d is displayed in, for example, white to make it easier to see. Further, a DP mark 50e is also printed at a position corresponding to the DP of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 on the front side. The DP mark 50e is displayed in white, for example, like the boundary line 50d.

With this configuration, it can be confirmed whether the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is attached to the correct position on the main control board 50. Specifically, it is possible to check whether the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is correctly attached to the front surface position corresponding to the boundary line 50d on the back side of the main control board 50. Furthermore, if the external dimensions of the boundary line 50d are made approximately the same as the external dimensions of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74, a different 7-segment display (for example, a 7-segment display with a different number of digits) is not attached. You can check whether
Furthermore, by checking the positions of the four DP marks 50e on the back side of the main control board 50 and the positions of the DPs on each 7-segment display of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74, the management information display LED ( It is possible to check whether the role ratio monitor) 74 is mounted in the correct direction.

94 is a diagram showing a modification of Example 3 in FIG. 93, in which, similarly to FIG. 93, (A) shows a surface view (mounting surface of a predetermined electronic component), and (B) shows a side view. , (C) shows a back view.
The management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the example of FIG. 94 is different from the example of FIG. 93 in that it is an integrally formed 4-digit 7-segment display (each digit cannot be separated). . In other words, this management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is one component.
In such a case, only the outline of the boundary line 50d on the back surface of the main control board 50 is printed (displayed), and the boundary lines for each digit are not printed. Therefore, the number of parts can be easily confirmed depending on whether the boundary line 50d in FIG. 93(B) or the boundary line 50d in FIG. 94(B) is printed.

On the other hand, as for the DP marks 50e, the number of DP marks provided on the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 are printed at positions corresponding to the respective DP positions. This makes it possible to check whether the four-digit management information display LED (rotation ratio monitor) 74 is correctly installed and whether the management information display LED (rotation ratio monitor) 74 is oriented correctly.

Although the fifth to seventh embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description and can be modified in various ways, such as the following.
A. Fifth Embodiment (1) The number of error histories to be stored or displayed is arbitrary depending on the storage capacity of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80. For example, the error history may be stored without being deleted until the upper limit of the storage area of the RWM 83 that stores the error history is reached, and all of the stored error history may be displayed. When the upper limit of the storage area of the RWM 83 that stores the error history is reached, the oldest data in the error history is sequentially deleted.
Further, for example, information that has passed a predetermined number of days (for example, half a year, one year, etc.) from the current time may be deleted from the error history data. Alternatively, error history data is stored until the upper limit of the storage area of the RWM 83 that stores error history is reached (it is preferable to configure the system so that these error histories can be checked in some way). Regarding the display of the history, for example, only the history within one month from the current time may be displayed.

(2) Although not illustrated in the above embodiment, when an error occurs while the reel 31 is rotating, the power is turned off before the reel 31 stops, and then the power is turned on (the setting change state is (when not migrated), the process is as follows.
Note that when the power is turned off after detecting an error, the data of the error is stored in the abnormal input flag as described above.
After the power is turned on, if the computer starts up without transitioning to the setting change state, the process proceeds to step S2721 (power return process) in the process of FIG. 41 (program start). Then, after step S2724 in FIG. 42 (power recovery process), an interrupt process occurs, and the error command stored before the power is turned off is transmitted to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it starts reporting the error. The time of the error history for the error is the time when notification of the error started.

(3) The error details and times shown on the error history screen are merely examples, and are not limited to these. For example, door opening and door closing do not need to be displayed in the error history. Furthermore, it is not necessary to display power on/off in the error history. On the other hand, when the state changes to the settings change state or the settings confirmation state, some information may be displayed on the error history screen together with the time so that the user can understand the fact.
Furthermore, the time may be any of those that display the day and time, those that display the month, day and time, and those that display the year, month, day and time.

(4) The error history screen can be displayed in the setting confirmation state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by performing a predetermined operation when opening the door, it is possible to switch to the store manager mode, and the error history screen can be displayed in the store manager mode. It may be possible to display the error history screen (the setting key may not be necessary for displaying the error history screen).
Alternatively, on the contrary, the error history screen may not be displayed unless the setting change state is entered.
(5) In a situation where an error is being reported, the error notification may be terminated even if the reset switch 153 is not operated when the cause of the error is removed. Alternatively, even if the cause of the error is removed and the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where an error is being reported, the error notification continues until a predetermined time has elapsed from that point, The error notification may be configured to end after the predetermined time has elapsed.

B. Sixth Embodiment (1) Two stepped portions 56b (1) and 56b (71) were provided in the socket 56, and characters "1" and "71" were displayed, respectively. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if only the stepped portion 56b(1) is provided, for example, it is possible to align with the number “1” of the stepped portion 55d in the main chip 55.
(2) In addition to the four landmark numbers 50b, thirteen landmarks 50c are displayed on the main control board 50, but the invention is not limited to this, and only the landmark numbers 50b may be displayed. Furthermore, the landmark numeral 50b may be only the landmark numeral 50b(1), or only the landmark numerals 50b(1) and 50b(71). Even if only the landmark number 50b (1) is used, it is possible to align it with the number "1" on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55.

(3) In the above embodiment, the main chip 55 is provided with a recessed portion 55b, a model number sticker 55f is attached, and a two-dimensional code 55e, product name 55g, company name 55h, and hidden characters 55j are displayed (printed). , these do not necessarily mean that they are essential requirements for the main chip 55.
(4) In the above embodiment, the number of pins of the main chip 55 is "71", but the number is not limited to this, and an even number (for example, "72") may be used. Furthermore, when using an odd number of lines, the number is not limited to "71", but may be, for example, "75" (32+33). The number of pins of the main chip 55 is determined by the number of required signal lines and the number of GNDs (grounds).

(5) The cutouts 56e and 56f of the socket 56 are not necessarily essential. However, it is preferable to provide a notch 56e or 56f in at least one location on the bottom of the socket 56 so that the gap between the bottom of the socket 56 and the main control board 50 can be visually confirmed. Moreover, even if the notches 56e and 56f are provided, it is not essential that they have the heights described above.
(6) The socket 56 can also be formed from an opaque material. However, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud, it is preferable to use a transparent or translucent material that allows the inside to be visually viewed.
(7) The stepped portion 55i of the company name 55h is not necessarily an essential requirement. Even if the company name 55h is provided, it may be a character without a stepped portion. Furthermore, the depths of the stepped portions 55c, 55d, and 55i (D1, D2, and D3 in FIG. 89) may be partly the same (for example, D1=D2 and D1≠D3), or all of the depths may be the same (for example, D1=D2 and D1≠D3). They may be the same (D1=D2=D3).

(8) The orientation of the characters on the stepped portions 56b (1) and 56b (71) was rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise with respect to the character “1” on the stepped portion 55d and the character of the landmark numeral 50b. Not limited. The orientation of the characters on the stepped portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) may be the same as the orientation of the character “1” on the stepped portion 55d and the landmark numeral 50b.
Alternatively, the characters on the stepped portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise in FIG. The orientation may be rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in FIG. 85.
(9) In the main chip 55, the pin numbers of the GND (ground) lines are No. 17, No. 35, No. 54, and No. 71, but are not limited to these. For example, No. 1, No. 35, No. 36, and No. 71 may be used as GND (ground) lines. Alternatively, pins 17, 18, 53, and 54 (all pins adjacent to recessed portion 55b) may be used as GND (ground) lines.

C. Seventh Embodiment (1) The foot portion (for ensuring a gap with the substrate) provided at the bottom of a predetermined electronic component may have any shape. For example, as shown in FIG. 91(B), the foot portions 57a of the connector 57 are formed in a line shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. Approximately cylindrical foot portions are provided at the four corners of a predetermined electronic component. You can. This applies not only to the connector 57 but also to the 7-segment display (FIGS. 92, 93, and 94).
(2) As shown in FIG. 92(B), "H5" is illustrated as the gap between the bottom surface of the LED and the substrate, but in reality, the bottom surface of the LED and the substrate are almost in contact, and the LED The gap between the bottom surface and the substrate is approximately 0.

(3) In the examples of FIGS. 93 and 94, the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is illustrated, but the display board 75 shown in FIG. 92 can be similarly configured. It is possible. For example, if the credit number display LED 76 is made up of two 7-segment displays arranged side by side, a boundary line 50d corresponding to the two 7-segment displays arranged side by side is displayed on the back side of the display board 75. , and two DP marks 50e are displayed.
In addition, when the credit number display LED 76 is an integrated 7-segment display that connects the upper and lower digits, a boundary line 50d indicating its outer shape is displayed on the back surface of the display board 75, and two A DP mark 50e is displayed. This also applies to the acquired number display LED 78.
Furthermore, it is possible to configure the setting value display LED 73 consisting of, for example, one digit in a similar manner. In this case, on the back side of the board (the main control board 50 or the board on which the set value display LED 73 is mounted), a boundary line 50d corresponding to the outer shape of the set value display LED 73 is displayed, and one DP mark 50e is displayed. be done. Note that when the setting value display LED 73 does not have a DP, only the boundary line 50d is displayed on the back surface of the board.

<Eighth embodiment>
The eighth embodiment relates to timer interrupt processing and vector addresses (also referred to as "interrupt vector addresses").
In the eighth embodiment, words and phrases are used as follows.
(1) "Timer interrupt processing" in the eighth embodiment is the same as "interrupt processing (I_INTR)" in the fourth embodiment (FIG. 66). In the following description of the eighth embodiment, "timer interrupt processing" may be simply abbreviated as "interrupt processing" if necessary.
(2) "Address value" refers to the numerical value of an address in the built-in memory. For example, in FIG. 96, which will be described later, the "vector address value" is "0004H". Note that in this specification, the term "address" and the term "address" may be referred to as necessary, but these terms have the same meaning.

(3) "Data value of address" refers to the value of data stored at the address. For example, the above-mentioned "vector address" actually consists of 2-byte addresses "0004H" and "0005H", but when referring to "data value of vector address", the addresses "0004H" and "0005H" are used. A data value (a 2-byte (16-bit) value) stored in a .
(4) Add "H" to the address value. "H" indicates hexadecimal number "hex". Further, "B" is attached to the bit value stored at the address. "B" indicates a "bit" of a binary number.
Furthermore, when indicating a 2-byte bit value (16-bit value), a "/" is added between the upper byte (8 bits) value and the lower byte (8 bits) value. For example, "00000000/00000100B".

(5) On the other hand, a register does not have an address, and the "value of a register" refers to the value of data stored in the register.
(6) In this embodiment, the storage areas in the built-in memory are referred to as "program area,""dataarea,""registerarea,""program management area,""workarea," and "stack area." . However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and these may be respectively referred to as a "program area," a "data area," a "register area," a "program management area," a "work area," and a "stack area."
The "program area" is also referred to as a "program code area" or a "program code area."

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as "chip") in the eighth embodiment. This one-chip microprocessor is mounted on the main control board 50 in FIG. 1, and is a one-chip version of the RWM 53, ROM 54, and main CPU 55.
In FIG. 95, the chip includes a main CPU 55 (same as in FIG. 1) and a built-in memory. Note that various hardware other than these two hardware is provided within the chip, but explanations and illustrations thereof are omitted.
The built-in memory includes a built-in ROM 54 having a range of addresses "0000H" to "3FFFH" (16384 bytes), and a built-in RWM 53 having a range of addresses "F000H" to "F3FFH" (1024 bytes).
The built-in ROM 54 is the same as "ROM54" in FIG. 1, and the built-in RWM 53 is the same as "RWM53" in FIG.

Further, the built-in memory includes a function setting register area and a function control register area as built-in memory register areas.
The function setting register area is a storage area of registers for operation settings including interrupt processing (for example, initial settings for interrupt processing, etc.). Specifically, the registers (including counters) stored in the function setting register area include, for example, the prescaler register 502 and the counter setting register 503 in FIG. 61 (fourth embodiment). Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 95, a register for setting the maximum value of random numbers, etc. are also provided in the function setting register area.
Similarly to the fourth embodiment, the prescaler register 502 is a register in which a setting value for selecting the clock to be supplied to the 8-bit counter 501 can be set.
Counter setting register 503 is a built-in register that can set the count value of 8-bit counter 501.

The function control register area is a storage area for registers that manage monitoring and control, such as monitoring interrupt processing and storing random values. For example, in FIG. 61 (fourth embodiment), an interrupt wait monitor register 301, an 8-bit counter 501, and an interrupt flag 504 are provided in the function control register area.
Similar to the fourth embodiment, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is a register for storing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the interrupt flag 504 is set.
The 8-bit counter 501 is a storage area for a counter value consisting of 8 bits (1 byte) for measuring the timing of interrupt processing.
The interrupt flag 504 is a flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out.
Note that the built-in memory register area is not limited to the function setting register area and the function control register area shown in FIG. 95.

On the other hand, the main CPU 55 includes a CPU register area. This CPU register area is a register area different from the built-in memory register area provided in the built-in memory.
The CPU register area is provided with general-purpose registers A, B, C, D, E, F, H, and L registers. Note that the F register is a flag register.
Further, the Q register is a register that stores the upper address "F0H" of the work area (see FIG. 97) among the used areas of the built-in RWM 53, and is used when issuing instructions. It is used in an instruction to read data whose upper address is "F0H" from the storage area of the built-in RWM 53.
Furthermore, the I register is a register called an interrupt page address register, and as will be described in detail later, is a register for determining the upper byte value of a vector address.

The interrupt prohibition flags (IFF1, IFF2) 302 are the same as those shown in FIG. 61 (fourth embodiment). The IFF1 register is a register for determining permission or prohibition of maskable interrupts. Further, the IFF2 register is a register used to restore the IFF1 register after processing a non-maskable interrupt, or to restore by a RETEX instruction after execution of a CALLEX instruction.
Note that, in addition to the above-mentioned registers, various registers such as a Q register and a U register are provided, but illustration and description thereof are omitted in the eighth embodiment.

Further, the registers, counters, and flags shown in FIG. 95 are merely examples, and are not limited to those shown in FIG. For example, although the 8-bit counter 501 is provided in the function control register area, it is not limited thereto, and may be provided in the CPU register area within the main CPU 55 or may be configured by a circuit. Furthermore, the interrupt flag 504 may be of any type as long as it has the function of storing on/off status, and may be provided in, for example, a CPU register area instead of within the function control register area, or may be configured by a circuit. In addition, the prescaler register 502, counter setting register 503, and interrupt wait monitor register 301 can be similarly provided in the CPU register area or other area in the built-in memory, or can be configured by a circuit.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the memory map in the built-in ROM 54 in FIG. 95 in more detail.
The built-in ROM 54 has a used area and an unused area.
The "use area" is a storage area in which information related to the progress of the game is stored.
Furthermore, the "outside use area" is a storage area in which information not related to the progress of the game is stored, such as a program for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 (rotation ratio monitor), and information used during testing. This is a storage area where programs, fraud prevention programs, etc. are stored.
The used area and the non-used area of the built-in ROM 54 are provided with a program area and a data area, respectively.
The "program area" is also referred to as a "control area" and is a storage area in which various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored.
Furthermore, the "data area" is a storage area in which information other than programs is stored, and is a storage area in which data used when the program is executed is stored.

Here, as shown in parentheses in FIG. 96, the "use area" may be referred to as the "first area". Furthermore, the "outside use area" may be referred to as the "second area".
The program area of the used area may also be referred to as a "first program area" or a "first control area." Further, the data area of the used area may be referred to as a "first data area."
Furthermore, the program stored in the program area of the used area may be referred to as a "first program."
Similarly, the program area outside the used area may be referred to as a "second program area" or a "second control area." Furthermore, the data area outside the used area may be referred to as a "second data area."
Furthermore, the program stored in the program area of the area outside the used area may be referred to as a "second program."

As shown in FIG. 96, in this embodiment, there is an unused area (address "11FFH") between the program area of the used area and the data area, but this unused area is eliminated and the program area of the used area is It may be arranged so that the data area is continuous.
In addition, there is an unused area (addresses "1DF7H" to "1FFFH") between the used area and the outside area, but the unused area is removed so that the used area and the outside area are continuous. May be placed.
Furthermore, regarding the area outside the used area, the program area and the data area are arranged consecutively, but like the used area, there is an unused area of 1 byte or more between the program area and the data area. You may do so.
Note that the used area and the non-used area may be defined so as to refer only to the program area and data area, and to exclude unused areas. On the other hand, when there is an unused area between the program area and the data area, such as the used area in FIG. 96, the unused area may also be referred to as the used area (or area outside the used area).

In addition to the above-mentioned used area, unused area, and unused area, the built-in ROM 54 is provided with a storage area that stores the company name, date, model name (of the gaming machine 10), etc., and a program management area. There is.
In the above, the vector address (0004H), which will be described in detail below, is provided in the program area of the used area in this embodiment.
Further, program code area start/end addresses (3FD3H to 3FD8H)) and interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) are provided in the program management area.
The program management area includes program code area setting addresses (3FD3H to 3FD8H), interrupt initial setting addresses (3FDAH), etc., which will be described later.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the memory map within the built-in RWM 53 in FIG. 95 in more detail.
Similar to the area of the built-in ROM 54, the area of the built-in RWM 53 includes a used area (which may be referred to as a "first area") and an area outside the used area (which may be referred to as a "second area"). It is provided. The concepts of these “used area” and “outside area” are the same as in the case of the built-in ROM 54.
Further, the used area and the non-used area in the built-in RWM 53 have a work area, an unused area, and a stack area, respectively.
The work area (also referred to as the "first work area") and the stack area (also referred to as the "first stack area") in the usage area are the programs stored in the program area of the usage area of the built-in ROM 54 (for the progress of the game). A storage area used (updated, referenced) during the execution of related programs.

Similarly, a work area (also referred to as a "second work area") and a stack area in an area outside the used area is also referred to as a "second stack area". ) is used (updated, (referenced) storage area.
Note that the "stack area" is a storage area in which data such as various registers and program return addresses can be temporarily saved (stored).

Next, the interrupt initial setting address will be explained.
First, "vector address" refers to an address that stores the start address (top address) of a timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR) that is executed when a timer interrupt processing factor occurs. In other words, the vector address does not store the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR) itself, but refers to an address that stores the location (starting address) of the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR).
The "interrupt initial setting address" is an address that stores data that allows the value of the vector address to be specified. In particular, in this embodiment, the vector address cannot be specified only by the data stored in the interrupt initial setting address, but the value of the vector address is specified based on the value of the I register and the data stored in the interrupt initial setting address. possible.

FIG. 98 is a diagram illustrating the interrupt initial setting address. In the figure, (A) is a diagram showing the details of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the interrupt priority order and the interrupt priority setting value.
As described with reference to FIG. 96, the interrupt initial setting address is provided in the program management area of the built-in ROM 54, and in this embodiment, the address is "3FDAH" (1 byte). However, this is an example and is not limited to this.
After the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the data value stored in this interrupt initial setting address is read, and the data value is used to determine the vector address.

In FIG. 98(A), the upper 4 bits (A7 bit to A4 bit) of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address take a predetermined value as the vector address setting value, and in this embodiment, they are "0000B". It has become. This vector address setting value constitutes a part of the vector address value, as will be described later.
In this embodiment, the vector address setting value is "0H (0000B)", but it is not limited to this, and various settings such as "8H (1000H)" and "FH (1111B)" are possible. .
Further, in the data value of the interrupt initial setting address, the A3 bit and the A2 bit are fixed values, and are set to "00B" in this embodiment. Although the details will be described later, this fixed 2-bit value is configured to be checked (in security mode) when the gaming machine 10 is started, and if the 2-bit value is not "00B", , is configured to result in an error.
Furthermore, this fixed value is not limited to "00B", but can be set in various ways, such as "11B".
Furthermore, the A1 and A0 bits, which are the lower two bits, of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address are interrupt priority setting values.
Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98(B), four types of interrupt priority setting values are provided: "00B", "01B", "10B", and "11B". .

FIG. 98(B) shows the relationship between interrupt priority setting values and interrupt factors.
In this embodiment, there are five types of interrupt factors, "IR0" to "IR5", and the smaller the number at the end, the higher the interrupt priority. In other words, the interrupt factor "IR0" has the highest interrupt priority, and the interrupt factor "IR5" has the lowest interrupt priority.
Furthermore, the types of interrupts include "PTC0" to "PTC2", "RX0" to "RX1", and "XINT". Here, "PTC0" to "PTC2" are interrupt factors used for timer interrupt processing, and "PTC2" in particular corresponds to timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, "01B" is adopted as the interrupt priority setting value. As a result, the interrupt priorities become "PTC0", "PTC1", "PTC2", "XINT", "RX0", and "RX1" in descending order of priority.
Further, when "01B" is adopted as the interrupt priority setting value, the A1 bit and the A0 bit of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address become "01B".
As described above, in this embodiment, the value of the interrupt initial setting address is "3FDAH", and the data value of the interrupt initial setting address is "00000001B".

FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating vector address values and data values stored at the vector addresses.
FIG. 99(A) shows vector address values.
In this embodiment, the vector address is provided in the program area of the used area in the built-in ROM 54 and is 2 bytes.
In the vector address value, as shown in FIG. 99(A), the value of the upper one byte is the I register value, and the value of the lower one byte consists of the vector address setting value and the automatic allocation value.

Here, the I register value in this embodiment is "00H". As shown in FIG. 95, the I register is provided in the CPU register area, and is set to "00H" after the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In other words, immediately after the gaming machine 10 is powered on, each register value provided in the CPU register area is cleared. Thereafter, unless a value other than "00H" is stored in the I register, the I register value remains "00H".
In this embodiment, no value is set in the I register after the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, the I register value maintains "00H".
Therefore, the value of the upper 1 byte of the vector address is "00H".

Next, in the lower byte of the vector address value, the A7 to A4 bit values correspond to the A7 to A4 bit values (vector address setting value) of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH). As shown in FIG. 98(A), in the data value of the interrupt initial setting address, the A7 to A4 bit values are "0000B", so this value becomes the A7 to A4 bit value of the lower byte of the vector address.

Further, in the lower byte of the vector address value, the A3 to A0 bit values are automatically assigned values.
FIG. 99(B) is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt factors and automatic allocation values. As shown in FIG. 98(B), in this embodiment, "01B" is adopted as the interrupt priority setting value, and the priority of the interrupt factor of PTC2, which is the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment, is "IR2". ”.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99(B), the automatically assigned values for the interrupt factor "IR2" and the interrupt "PTC2 (I_INTR)" are "0100B" (04H). This "0100B" becomes the A3 to A0 bit value of the vector address value.

From the above, as shown in FIG. 99(A), the value of the vector address is
"00000000/00000100B" = "0004H"
becomes.
As a result, in FIG. 96, "0004H" in the storage area of the built-in ROM 54 starting from "0000H" becomes the vector address.
Note that since the value of the vector address is 2 bytes as described above, the vector address is actually "0004H" and "0005H".

FIG. 99(C) is a diagram showing an example of data values of vector addresses. In this embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is stored starting from "1134H" in the program area of the used area of the built-in ROM 54. In other words, the start address of the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is "1134H".
Therefore, the data value of the vector address (0004H) becomes "1134H".
When storing "1134H" in a 2-byte vector address, the lower byte value "34H" is stored in the first "0004H" and "11H" is stored in the next "0005H".
This results in
0004H:34H (00110100B)
0005H:11H (00010001B)
is memorized.

When the gaming machine 10 is powered on and the main CPU 55 is activated, it is configured to be able to recognize where the vector address is based on the data value of the interrupt initial setting address and the I address value.
Specifically, first, since the upper 4 bits of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) are "0000B", the upper 4 bits of the lower byte of the vector address are "0000B".
Also, since the value of the interrupt priority setting value, which is the value of the lower 2 bits of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH), is "01B", the lower byte of the lower byte of the vector address corresponding to PTC2 (interrupt of timer counter ch2) The 4-byte value is assigned to "0100B" by the interrupt controller.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on, the value of the I register becomes "00H", so the value of the upper byte of the vector address becomes "00000000B".
From the above, the main CPU 55 determines that the vector address (the address where the first address of "I_INTR" is stored) corresponding to PTC2 (interrupt of timer counter ch2, which corresponds to timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment) is "0004H".
Therefore, from the data value stored in the vector address, it is possible to recognize at which address the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is stored (the starting address of the timer interrupt processing program).

Note that the process of setting "00H" to the I register is not executed after the power is turned on. When the power is turned on, the CPU register area on the main CPU 55 side in FIG. 95 is initialized, so that the I register value becomes "00H" like the other register values.
Furthermore, when the register is initialized after the power is turned on, "F0H" is stored in the Q register. When "F0H" is stored in the Q register, when specifying the upper address "F0H" in the storage area of the built-in RWM 53, the Q register is specified.
In this embodiment, when the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) of PTC2 is entered, the program at the address corresponding to the data (1134H) stored in the vector addresses ("0004H" and "0005H") (i.e., the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR)) is called. In other words, the program code for timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the process from turning on the power to transitioning to user mode in this embodiment.
First, before the power is turned on (when the power is off), "XSRST" is "L (low)". Here, "XSRST" indicates the operating status of the main CPU 55, and when the main CPU 55 is in a situation where it should not operate (stopped), "XSRST=L" (when the main CPU 55 is stopped ).
When the power is turned on in this situation, the system reset is canceled and when the power is stably supplied, the main CPU 55 changes from "L (low)" to "H (high)" in terms of the circuit. .

Next, the registers in the CPU register area are initialized and it is determined whether there is a PROM mode request. Here, "PROM mode" refers to a mode in which data is written to ROM (ROM is burned). When it is determined that there is a request to shift to PROM mode, the mode shifts to PROM mode, and when it is determined that there is no request to shift to PROM mode, the mode shifts to security mode. Note that gaming machines installed in the market are configured so that after the system reset is released, it is determined that there is no request to shift to PROM mode.
In the security mode, a security check is performed, and when it is determined that the security check is OK, the process shifts to the user mode, and when it is determined that the security check is NG, the execution (processing) is stopped.
As a security check in the security mode, the program code area setting address of the program management area, the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH), etc. are read. Then, a self-diagnosis is performed to check whether there is a setting error in the program management area. Also, in this security mode, the data value of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) is read and the vector address value is recognized.

Here, the data of the interrupt initial setting address is read, and if the value of the fixed value (A3 and A2 bits) is not "00B" in FIG. 98(A), it is determined that the program management area is a setting error.
If it is determined that the security check is OK in the security mode, then the mode shifts to the user mode.
This user mode corresponds to program processing starting from "0000H" in the program area of the used area of the built-in ROM 54.
Note that in FIG. 100, "running outside the designated area" will be described later.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an example of a program starting from "0000H" in the program area of the used area of the built-in ROM 54.
Here, in this embodiment, special call instructions and normal call instructions are provided as call instructions by the main CPU 5.
The special call instruction is called the "RST instruction" and the normal call instruction is called the "CALLF instruction."
The RST instruction is an instruction that can be expressed as a 1-byte (4-cycle) program. On the other hand, the CALLF instruction is an instruction that can be expressed as a 2-byte (4-cycle) program. Therefore, the number of bytes for writing the RST instruction is smaller than the number of bytes for writing the CALLF instruction, so using the RST instruction can reduce the program capacity more than using the CALLF instruction. Therefore, programs that are called frequently are called using the RST instruction.

Here, the "program with high call frequency" includes, for example, a program that is called many times (multiple times) in one game.
However, "programs that are called frequently" include, for example, programs that are called at least once per game, and programs that are not necessarily called at least once per game but are likely to be called during a game. It will be done.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the addresses that can be called using the RST command are limited to predetermined addresses.
Specifically, the "predetermined address" is
0008H
0010H
0018H
0020H
0028H
0030H
0038H
0040H
It consists of eight parts.
Note that these eight addresses are merely examples, and the value (address) and number of "predetermined addresses" can be set in various ways depending on the specifications of the chip.

By storing programs that can be called by the RST command in the eight addresses mentioned above, the program capacity can be reduced.
On the other hand, as described above, the program area of the used area starts from "0000H", and the power-on program is stored from this "0000H". The power-on program corresponds to, for example, "program start processing (M_PRG_START)" shown in FIG. 41 (third embodiment).

Further, as described above, the vector address is "0004H".
Therefore, as shown in FIG.
0000H: Power-on program (start program)
:
0004H: Vector address:
0008H: Program 1 called by RST command
:
0010H: Program 2 called by RST command
:
0018H: Program 3 called by RST command
:
0020H: Program 4 called by RST command
:
0028H: Program 5 called by RST command
:
0030H: Program 6 called by RST command
:
0038H: Program 7 called by RST command
:
0040H: Program 8 called by RST command
:
This is the arrangement of data (including instructions and programs).

Further, a jump instruction requires a capacity of 3 bytes in this embodiment. Therefore, a jump command is stored in "0001H" to "0003H", and "0050H", for example, is designated as the jump destination address. After "0050H", a program continuing from "0000H" is stored.
Here, a program that includes the jump command may be referred to as a power-on program, or a program that does not include the jump command may be referred to as a power-on program.
As a result, it is possible to start the power-on program at "0000H", jump to "0050H" with the next jump instruction at "0001H", and continue executing the power-on program from "0050H".
With this setting, the vector address can be placed at "0004H" while starting the power-on program from "0000H". Furthermore, the RST command can be placed at "0008H", "0010H", etc. while starting the power-on program from "0000H".

In addition, in the continuation of the power-on program, it is determined whether or not to shift to the setting change mode, for example.
Here, since the voltage is unstable when the power is turned on, there is a possibility that the jump instruction will not be executed normally. If the jump instruction is not executed normally, it may take a long time to shift to the setting change mode, or it may not shift to the setting change mode. Therefore, if you turn on the power after performing an operation to enter setting change mode (for example, by operating a setting key), if you do not enter setting change mode by the estimated time (T), , it can be determined that the program containing the jump instruction was not executed normally. When the administrator determines that the setting change mode will not be entered by the estimated time (T), the gaming machine 10 is powered on again. When the power is turned on again, the program goes through the security mode again and starts from address "0000H".
Further, it is preferable that the jump command of the power-on program is executed from "0000H" to "0007H". This is to enable the use of "0008H" as the RST command.

Further, when storing the program 1 called by the RST command in "0008H", the program 1 has a capacity of 8 bytes from "0008H" to "000FH", or a program that requires a capacity of 8 bytes or less is arranged.
Similarly, when storing the program 2 called by the RST command in "0010H", the program 2 has a capacity of 8 bytes from "0010H" to "0017H", or a program that requires a capacity of 8 bytes or less is arranged.

Here, if the program 2 consists of, for example, 4 bytes of "0010H" to "0013H", the addresses of "0014H" to "0017H" may be used in any way.
For example, first, addresses "0014H" to "0017H" may be set as unused areas ("00000000B" is stored).
Second, other programs that fit within 4 bytes may be stored in "0014H" to "0017H".
Furthermore, thirdly, a continuation program of the power-on program starting from "0000H" is stored in "0014H", and a jump instruction (address where the continuation program of "0014H" is stored) is stored in "0015H" to "0017H". (jump command) may be memorized.

The above also applies to "0018H", "0020H", "0028H", "0030H", "0038H" and "0040H".
For example, when storing the program 4 called by the RST command in "0020H", if the program 4 has a capacity of 14 bytes from "0020H" to "002DH", the program calling "0028H" by the RST command 5 may not be provided. However, if the program called by the RST command exceeds 8 bytes, it is preferable to store it after "0040H" where there is no limit to the program capacity. With this configuration, eight programs can be stored as programs that can be called by the RST command.
In addition, when the program called by the RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, the method of arranging the program is not only to store it after "0040H" but also to store it from "0020H" to "0024H" in the above example. However, there is a method in which a jump command is stored in "0025H" to "0027H" and the jump command is used to jump to "0040H" or later. By doing this, a program that can be called by the RST command can be stored in "0028H". If such a method is adopted, even if the program called by the RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, eight programs called by the RST instruction can be provided.
In the example of FIG. 101, an instruction to jump to "0050H" is stored in "0001H", and a program continuing from "0000H" is stored after "0050H".

Note that although the vector address is set to "0004H" in this embodiment, it is not limited to this.
Here, the upper byte of the vector address value is the value of the I register. Then, as in the present embodiment, the I register is initialized as a register of the main CPU 55 and remains at "00H" without executing the process of setting a specific value in the I register after the power is turned on. The upper byte value of the address is "00H". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when executing processing to set a specific value in the I register after initializing the I register after turning on the power, the upper byte value of the vector address can be set to the specific value. .
However, as shown in FIG. 96, when the vector address is provided in the program area of the used area in the built-in ROM 54, the value of the I register will be in the range of "00H" to "11H".
Note that, as described later, vector addresses are not limited to being provided in the program area of the used area, but can also be provided in the data area of the used area, the program area of the area outside the used area, and the data area of the area outside the used area. be.

However, when executing processing for setting a specific value in the I register after initializing the I register after the power is turned on, a program capacity corresponding to that amount is required. For example, if the specific value is "02H", it is necessary to initialize the I register after power-on, and then provide "LD I,02H" (instruction (program) to load "02H" into the I register). If the program requires a capacity of 2 bytes, for example, the program storage area will be consumed accordingly.
On the other hand, when using the initialized value "00H" as the I register value as in this embodiment, there is no need to set a specific value in the I register, so the program storage area is saved accordingly. You can save money. As a result, the program capacity can be reduced by setting the upper byte value of the vector address to "00H".

Furthermore, when the I register value is "00H", the value of the vector address is not limited to "0004H". Specifically, the value of the vector address is, for example, a value less than or equal to "00FEH" and "00FFH", and is other than the address to be called by the RST instruction (such as "0008H" or "0010H" described above). If so, you can set it as you like. For example, it can be set to "00F4H". If the value of the lower 4 bits of the lower byte of the vector address is set to "0100B (4H)", the automatic allocation value of this embodiment shown in FIG. 99(B) can be used as is.
Furthermore, when the upper 4 bits of the lower byte of the vector address are set to "FH" (1111B) as described above, the upper 4 bits of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) in FIG. (vector address setting value) becomes "1111B".

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example when the vector address value is "00F4H". In this case, since "0004H" is not a vector address, a power-on program can be stored in "0000H" to "0004H".
In addition, if 3 bytes are required as the program capacity for a jump instruction, place the jump instruction in the 3-byte storage area from "0005H" to "0007H", and place the jump instruction in the 3-byte storage area from "0005H" to "0007H", and place the jump instruction at "0008H", which is called by the RST instruction as in Figure 101. Program 1 can be stored.

Next, a program called by the RST command, that is, a program called multiple times in one game will be explained.
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of processing called by the RST command, and (A), (B), and (C) show example 1, example 2, and example 3, respectively.
Example 1 in FIG. 103(A) is a flowchart showing control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). This process corresponds to, for example, the process in step S303 in FIG. 46 (third embodiment), and is a process for setting command data to be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
Furthermore, although not shown, in FIG. 46 (third embodiment), the operating state (whether or not the BB operating symbol is displayed, whether the replay operating symbol is displayed, etc.) in the game start setting process in step S272 An output request is set, and control command set 1 is executed.
Similarly, although not shown, in the start switch acceptance process in step S279 in FIG. 46 (third embodiment), an output request at the start of reel rotation is set and control command set 1 is executed.

In FIG. 103(A), first, in step S151, the main control board 50 executes interrupt prohibition processing. In the next step S152, control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET) is executed. Then, the process advances to step S503, and the interrupt processing prohibited in step S151 is canceled (ie, interrupt is enabled). Through the above processing, interrupt processing is prohibited while control command set 2 is being executed.
Although detailed processing of control command set 2 will be omitted, this processing is processing for writing control commands. Further, since interrupt processing is prohibited while the control command set 2 is being executed, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by interrupt processing being executed during the control command write processing.

Example 2 in FIG. 103(B) is a flowchart showing interrupt wait processing (R_INTR_WAIT). This process corresponds to, for example, step S2754 in FIG. 45 (third embodiment) or step S295 in FIG. 46 (third embodiment).
First, in step S161, the main control board 50 obtains an interrupt counter value. This process is a process of storing the interrupt counter value in the A register. Note that a 16-bit (2-byte counter) interrupt counter value is stored at a predetermined address in the working area of the used area of the built-in RWM 53, and in step S161, the value stored at the lower 8-bit address is stored. is stored in the A register.
In the next step S162, the main control board 50 determines whether the value of the lower 8 bits of the interrupt counter value has changed. Specifically, the value of the lower 8 bits is subtracted from the A register value, and if the operation result is not "0" (zero flag = "0"), it is determined as "Yes". When it is determined that there has been a change, the processing according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that there has been no change, the processing of step S162 is continued.

Example 3 in FIG. 103(C) is a flowchart showing countdown (R_CNT_DOWN). This process includes, for example, the process of subtracting the advantageous section clear counter in step S301 (game end check process) in FIG. 46 (third embodiment), and the timer value in step S455 (timer measurement) in FIG. 47 (third embodiment). It is used for the process of updating the number of AT games during AT games, or the process of updating the number of AT games (not shown).
In this process, the counter value is subtracted by "1" in step S171, and the process of this flowchart is ended.
Note that the three processes shown in FIG. 103 are examples of processes that are called multiple times in one game, and are not limited to these three processes, and may include many more processes. Then, a program that has a program capacity that can be stored within the above-mentioned address and is called many times in one game is set to be called by the RST command.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing program code area designation addresses and their data values. Note that although this address will be referred to as a "program code area designation address" below, it may also be referred to as a "program code area setting address."
As shown in FIG. 96, in the program management area of the built-in ROM 54, addresses "3FD3H" to "3FD8H" are set as program code area designation addresses.
The main CPU 55 determines that the program code stored within the address range specified in the program code area is normal when it is executed, and determines that the program code stored outside the address range specified in the program code area is normal. When the program code in the above is executed, it is determined that there is an abnormality (running outside the specified area). When the main CPU 55 determines that there is an abnormality (running outside the specified area), it generates a reset.
In other words, a reset is generated when a program code (instruction) stored outside the specified area is called (instruction fetched).

This is done for the following reasons.
The first reason is that there is a risk of fraudulent activity in which malicious program code is stored in an area other than the original program area, and the malicious program code is skipped from the original program area with a jump instruction and executed. This is because there is.
The second reason is that a runaway may occur when the voltage is unstable immediately after the power is turned on, or a runaway may occur due to heat, which may cause instructions to jump to an area other than the program area. Specifically, if there is an instruction to jump from address A to address B, for example, if the instruction is not executed accurately, instructions stored after address B may not be executed within the design time. In such a case, the power should be turned off once and then turned on again (rebooted).

FIG. 100 also illustrates the processing when the vehicle travels outside the designated area.
As shown in FIG. 100, when running outside the designated area is detected during execution of the user mode, a reset is generated. In this case, the main CPU 55 initializes the register and executes the user mode again via the security mode (executes the program from address "0000H").
Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when a reset is generated by detecting running outside the designated area, the process may be executed from the user mode without going through the security mode after initializing the register.
In the example of FIG. 100, the presence or absence of a PROM mode request is determined after registers are initialized, but this is not the only option. It may also be possible not to judge the presence or absence of.
However, when a reset is generated by detecting running outside the designated area, the registers are always initialized.

FIG. 104(A) is a diagram showing addresses for specifying the end address of program code area 1. "Program code area 1" corresponds to the program area of the used area in FIG. Note that "program code area 2", which will be described later, corresponds to the program area of the area outside the used area in FIG. 96.
Here, as shown in FIG. 96, the address range of the program area of the used area is "0000H" to "11FEH". Therefore, in this embodiment, the start address "0000H" is not determined, but only the end address "11FEH" is determined. In this way, a storage area (2 bytes) for determining the start address "0000H" becomes unnecessary.
If only the end address is determined and the start address is not determined, the main CPU 55 will inevitably recognize the range from the start address to the end address of the built-in memory as program code area 1. In fact, since the program code area 1 (the program area of the used area) starts from "0000H", there is no problem even if the main CPU 55 recognizes it as described above.

The end address of the program code area 1 is stored in addresses "3FD3H" and "3FD4H" (2-byte area) of the program management area. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the lower byte is stored at address "3FD3H" and the upper byte is stored at address "3FD4H".
Therefore, "FEH" (11111110B) is stored in the address "3FD3H", and "11H" (00010001B) is stored in the address "3FD4H".

FIG. 104(B) is a diagram showing addresses for specifying the start address of program code area 2.
Addresses for specifying the start address of program code area 2 are set to "3FD5H" and "3FD6H". As shown in FIG. 96, the address range of the program area outside the used area is "2000H" to "245DH". Therefore, the start address of program code area 2 is "2000H".
Therefore, "00H" (000000000B) is stored in the address "3FD5H", and "20H" (00100000B) is stored in the address "3FD6H".

FIG. 104(C) is a diagram showing addresses for specifying the end address of program code area 2. Addresses for specifying the end address of program code area 2 are set to "3FD7H" and "3FD8H".
Then, "5DH" (01011101B) is stored in the address "3FD7H", and "24H" (00100100B) is stored in the address "3FD8H".

As described above, under the situation where the end address of program code area 1 and the start and end addresses of program code area 2 are stored in the program management area, the main CPU 55 stores the program code within these designated address ranges. When the program is being executed, it is determined to be normal, but when program code outside the specified address range is executed, it is determined to be abnormal.

Note that it is also possible not to specify the program code area. In this case, "0000H" is stored in all of the program code area 1 end address, program code area 2 start address, and program code area 2 end address.
For example, if you specify the address of only program code area 1 and do not specify the address of program code area 2, set the end address of program code area 1 to "11FEH" as shown in FIG. 104, and start the program code area 2. The address and end address may be set to "0000H".

Although the eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) Although vector addresses are provided in the program area of the used area, it is also possible to provide vector addresses in the data area of the used area, for example. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "12H", after the power is turned on, a process is executed to store "12H" in the I register.
Further, vector addresses may be provided in the program area outside the used area. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "20H", after the power is turned on, a process is executed to store "20H" in the I register.
Furthermore, vector addresses may be provided in the data area outside the used area. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "24H", after the power is turned on, a process is executed to store "24H" in the I register.
In addition, when a vector address is provided in the data area of the used area, when a vector address is provided in the program area of the area outside the used area, and when a vector address is provided in the data area of the area outside the used area, the vector Simply reading the data value stored at the address will not result in a trip outside the designated area and will not cause a reset.

(2) The data value stored in the vector address, that is, the starting address where the timer interrupt processing program is stored, can be set arbitrarily. In the example of FIG. 99(c), "1134H" is used, but it is not limited to this. Further, the start address where the timer interrupt processing program is stored may be after the vector address or may be before the vector address.
(3) In the above embodiment, two address ranges are defined as the executable range (runable area) of the program code, as shown in FIG. 104, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one address range is defined. You can.
Further, in determining the executable range of the program code in the program area of the used area of the built-in ROM 54, in the above embodiment, only the end address is determined and the start address is not determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. Both may be specified.

(4) In the above embodiment, the addresses storing the program called by the RST command are "0008H", "0010H", "0018H", "0020H", "0028H", "0030H", "0038H", and "0040H", but the address is not limited to these eight addresses. However, it is preferable that the upper byte of the address where the program called by the RST instruction is stored is set to "00H".
By doing this, by providing a module that is called multiple times in one game near the start address (0000H), at the development stage, the module is designed first, and other modules are designed later ( (examination) becomes possible.

(5) The relationship between the address where the program called by the RST instruction is stored and the vector address is as follows.
First, as shown in FIG. 101, a vector address may be placed before all addresses storing programs called by the RST instruction.
Second, as shown in FIG. 102, a vector address may be placed after all addresses where programs called by the RST instruction are stored.
Thirdly, between one address (e.g. "0020H") where a program called by the RST instruction is stored and another address (e.g. "0028H") where a program called by the RST instruction is stored (e.g. "0020H"). 0026H" and "0027H").

In this case, if the vector address is placed within the program area of the used area (within the range of "0000H" to "00FFH"), there is no need to set the upper byte value of the vector address in the I register after power is turned on. In other words, by setting the I register value to "00H", the program capacity can be reduced.
Further, as shown in FIG. 99(B), the A3-A0 bit value in the lower 1 byte of the vector address value is "0100B" in this example. Therefore, at this point, the vector address value becomes "00000000/####0100B"("#" is any value of "0" or "1").
Here, the above "###B" (vector address setting value) is "0000B" in the example of FIG. 99(A). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and "###B" may be set to "1000B (8H)" or "1111B (FH)", for example.
When "###B" is "1000B (8H)", the vector address value is "00000000/10000100B", and when "####B" is "1111B (FH)", the vector address value is "00000000/10000100B". The address value becomes "00000000/11110100B".

(6) The upper byte value of the vector address value is the I register value, which is "00H". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the upper byte of the vector address may be set to a value other than "00H", for example, "02H", although this partially overlaps with what has been described above. In this case, after turning on the power of the gaming machine 10 and initializing the I register, a process of storing "02H" in the I register is executed.
In particular, when the vector address is provided in the program area of the used area in the built-in ROM 54, the value of the I register, that is, the upper byte value of the vector address, may be in the range of "00H" to "11H".

However, each time the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the I register is initialized (becomes "00H"), so after the initialization, a process is executed to store, for example, "02H" in the I register again. . As described above, for example, a program code "LD I,02H" is provided to execute the process of storing "02H" in the I register.
On the other hand, if the value of the upper byte of the vector address is "00H" as in this embodiment, the I register value will be "00H", so the gaming machine 10 is powered on and the I register is initialized. After that, there is no need to store the specific value in the I register. In other words, there is no need to provide the program code "LD I,00H". Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced accordingly.

(7) The various modifications shown in the first to eighth embodiments and the first to eighth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations. It is.

<Ninth embodiment>
The ninth embodiment includes a medal selector 110 for sorting the medals M input from the medal input port 47, a chute member 120 for guiding the medals M allowed to be input by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35, The present invention relates to a slot machine 10 having a return member 130 for guiding medals M whose insertion is not permitted by a medal selector 110 to a medal receiving tray 19.

A ninth embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 105 is a side sectional view of the slot machine 10 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 106 is a block diagram schematically showing control of the slot machine 10 in the ninth embodiment.
Note that, in FIG. 106, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, a setting change (reset) switch 153, a push button 86, and a cross key 87 are added to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 105, the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an open front, and a front door 12 attached to cover the opening of the cabinet 13.
Furthermore, the cabinet 13 is configured into a box shape with an open front by assembling a bottom plate 13a, a back plate 13b, a top plate 13c, a right side plate, a left side plate (not shown), and the like.
Furthermore, the front door 12 is attached to the cabinet 13 so as to cover the front opening of the cabinet 13.

The front door 12 is normally closed, but is opened, for example, when the power is turned on, when settings are changed, when settings are confirmed, when an error occurs, when medals are replenished, etc.
Specifically, the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 are attached via a hinge (not shown).
Further, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the back surface of the front door 12 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the player).

Furthermore, a door key insertion slot (not shown) is provided on the front surface of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the locking device. The door key insertion slot is a portion into which a door key for operating the locking device is inserted.
When the front door 12 is closed and locked, inserting the door key into the door key insertion slot and turning the door key clockwise in this state unlocks the door. When the front door 12 is pulled in the unlocked state, the front door 12 rotates about the hinge, and the front door 12 is opened.

Further, the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 is provided with a door switch 17 (FIG. 106) for detecting whether the front door 12 is opened. When the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off, and when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on.
Furthermore, the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 (FIG. 106).
Then, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is in a closed state when the door switch 17 is off, and determines that the front door 12 is in an open state when the door switch 17 is on. It is configured to determine that.

Further, a display window 18 is provided in the center of the front door 12. The display window 18 is configured to be located in front of the symbol display device 14 when the front door 12 is closed. The three reels 31 of the symbol display device 14 can be viewed through the display window 18.
Further, below the display window 18 on the front side of the front door 12 (the side facing the player), a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal slot 47, etc. are provided. There is. The medal insertion slot 47 is a portion into which the player inserts the medal M when placing a bet or crediting the medal M.

Furthermore, a medal payout port 16 and a medal receiving tray 19 for receiving the medals M discharged from the medal payout port 16 are provided at the lower front of the front door 12. The medal payout port 16 is an opening through which the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 and the medals M whose insertion is not permitted by the medal selector 110 pass.
Further, at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47 on the back surface of the front door 12 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the player), there is a medal selector for sorting the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47. 110 is provided.

Specifically, a selector base 113 (FIG. 107) is fixed to a position corresponding to the medal slot 47 on the back side of the front door 12, and a medal selector 110 is removably attached to this selector base 113. .
The selector base 113 is for removably holding the medal selector 110, and is formed by bending sheet metal, and has a screw installed at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47 on the back side of the front door 12. is fixed. The medal selector 110 is detachably attached to the selector base 113.

Furthermore, a chute member 120 is provided on the back side of the front door 12 at a position adjacent to the medal selector 110 for guiding the medals M permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35.
Furthermore, in a position corresponding to between the medal selector 110 and the medal payout port 16 on the back side of the front door 12, the medals M whose insertion is not permitted by the medal selector 110 and the medals paid out from the medal payout device 15 are placed. A return member 130 is provided for guiding the collected medals M to the medal receiving tray 19.

Further, a medal payout device 15 is disposed at the lower inside of the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). The medal dispensing device 15 includes a hopper 35 for storing medals M, a hopper motor 36 (FIG. 106) that is driven when dispensing the medals M stored in the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 (FIG. 106) for dispensing the medals M stored in the hopper 35. A dispensing sensor 37 (FIG. 106) for detecting M is provided.

The hopper 35 is for storing medals M. Further, at the upper part of the hopper 35, a storage receiving port 35a is provided, which is an opening for receiving the medals M guided by the chute member 120. The storage receiving port 35a opens downward from the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guiding path 121).
As described in the first embodiment, the payout sensor 37 includes a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b (FIG. 106) arranged at a predetermined interval.
When the medal M is paid out, a predetermined moving member (not shown) is moved by the medal M, and due to the movement of the predetermined moving member, the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are turned on/off.

Further, in FIG. 106, the hopper motor 36 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the output port 52, and the dispensing sensor 37a and the dispensing sensor 37b are connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51. It is electrically connected to the control board 50.
The main control board 50 drives the hopper motor 36 when dispensing the medals M from the medal dispensing device 15.
Further, the main control board 50 determines whether the medals M have been normally paid out based on whether the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b have been turned on/off within a predetermined time range.

In FIG. 105, a power supply unit (not shown) is arranged in the lower part of the interior of the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). The power supply unit includes a power supply board (not shown) that supplies power to the main control board 50, sub-control board 80, etc., a power switch 11 (Fig. 106) that is operated to turn on/off the power, and a power switch 11 (Fig. 106) that supplies power to the main control board 50, sub-control board 80, etc. A setting key switch 152 (FIG. 106) that is operated when changing the state or setting confirmation state, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 (FIG. 106) that is operated when changing a setting value or canceling an error. It is equipped with

The power switch 11 is a switch operated to turn on/off the power.
Turning on the power switch 11 is sometimes referred to as "turning on the power,""turning on the power," or "resuming the supply of power."
Furthermore, turning off the power switch 11 is sometimes referred to as "turning off the power" or "cutting off the supply of power."

The setting key switch 152 is a switch operated to transition to a setting change state in which setting values can be changed, or a setting confirmation state in which setting values cannot be changed but can be confirmed.
Inserting the setting key from the setting key insertion slot 151 (FIG. 106) and rotating the setting key approximately 90 degrees clockwise turns on the setting key switch 152. When the setting key is returned to its original position, the setting key The switch 152 is configured to be turned off.

The setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that serves as both the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153.
Further, the setting change switch 153 is a switch that is operated when changing the set value in the setting change state.
Furthermore, the reset switch 153 is a switch that is operated to cancel error notification after the cause of the error has been removed.
In this way, the setting change (reset) switch 153 functions as the setting change switch 153 in the setting change state, and functions as the reset switch 153 when notifying an error.

Hereinafter, it will be referred to as "setting change (reset) switch 153,""setting change switch 153," and "reset switch 153."
Regarding various switches such as the setting change (reset) switch 153, turning on the switch is referred to as "operating", the on state is referred to as "being operated", and the off state is referred to as "being operated". This is sometimes referred to as "not being operated."
In the ninth embodiment, the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 are used together, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 may be provided separately.

In FIG. 106, a setting key switch 152 and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51.
When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on, the configuration changes to a setting change state, and when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is on, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state. has been done.

Further, when the setting change state is entered, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 mounted on the main control board 50. Further, in the setting change state, each time the setting change switch 153 is operated, the set value is changed (added by "1"). Then, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the set value is determined, the setting change state is completed, and the set value display LED 73 is turned off.
Further, when the setting confirmation state is entered, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. Then, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends and the setting value display LED 73 turns off.

Next, the medal selector 110, the chute member 120, and the return member 130 will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 107 to 115.
FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the medal selector 110, the chute member 120, and the return member 130, and is a diagram illustrating the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.
FIG. 108 is a diagram in which a hopper 35 is added to FIG. 107, and is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the hopper 35 and the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.

FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and the thickness of the medal M.
FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the dimensions of each part of the chute member 120 and the diameter and radius of the medal M.
FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between one medal M that has entered the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and another medal M that moves from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120.

FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the width of the medal guide path 121 of the chute member 120 and the dimensions of each part of the screw 127 that fixes the chute member 120.
FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating an example in which neither the return receiving port 131 nor the upper edge portion 135 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.

FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a closing member 140 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, and a part of the return acceptance port 131 is blocked by this closing member 140. It is.
FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a part of the return acceptance port 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.

As shown in FIG. 107, the medal selector 110 has a medal passage 111 through which medals inserted from the medal slot 47 pass. The medal passage 111 is formed in a substantially L-shape, and as shown in FIG. 107, it has a vertical portion 111a extending substantially vertically downward from the left side of the top surface of the medal selector 110, and a gradual portion extending diagonally downward to the right from the lower end of the vertical portion 111a. It has an inclined part 111b that is inclined and reaches the lower right side of the medal selector 110. Further, an entrance 111c of the medal passage 111 is provided on the left side of the top surface of the medal selector 110, and an exit 111d of the medal passage 111 is provided on the lower right side of the medal selector 110.

When the medal selector 110 is attached to a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12, the entrance 111c of the medal passage 111 is located vertically below the medal slot 47. The medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 are sent to a medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110.
Further, as shown in FIG. 107, a blocker 45 for permitting/disallowing the insertion of medals M is provided at an intermediate position of the inclined portion 111b of the medal passage 111. An input sensor 44 capable of detecting medals M passing through the medal passage 111 is provided downstream of the blocker 45.

The blocker 45 is for permitting/disallowing the insertion of medals M, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via an output port 52 (FIG. 106).
The main control board 50 controls the amount of medals M during the game (from when the reels 31 start rotating to when all the reels 31 stop and when a winning combination ends the payout of the medal M corresponding to the winning combination). The blocker 45 is controlled to disallow input.

Furthermore, when the specified number of medals M has already been bet and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, it is not possible to bet or credit any more medals M. The blocker 45 is controlled to disallow input.
On the other hand, when a game is not being played (after the payout of medals M is finished and before the reel 31 starts rotating), the number of bets on medals M has not reached the specified number, or the number of credits has reached the upper limit. When the medal M has not been reached, the main control board 50 controls the blocker 45 to permit the insertion of the medal M.

When the insertion of medals M is not permitted, the blocker 45 is configured to remove the medals M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 from the medal path 111 at the position of the blocker 45 and cause them to fall downward. . Further, the medals M that have come off the medal path 111 at the blocker 45 and fallen downward are guided by the return member 130, ejected from the medal payout port 16, and stored in the medal receiving tray 19.

On the other hand, when the insertion of medals M is permitted, the blocker 45 is configured to guide the medals M inserted from the medal insertion port 47 to the downstream side of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111. . Further, the medals M guided downstream from the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111 pass through the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b (hereinafter both are collectively referred to as the "input sensor 44"), and then pass through the exit of the medal passage 111. 111d, guided by the chute member 120, and stored in the hopper 35.

The input sensor 44 is for detecting the medal M guided downstream from the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, and as shown in FIG. 107, a pair of input sensors 44a are arranged at a predetermined interval. and an input sensor 44b. The input sensor 44a is placed on the upstream side, and the input sensor 44b is placed on the downstream side. Moreover, the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 (FIG. 106).

The medals M guided downstream from the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111 are first detected by the upstream input sensor 44a, and then detected by the downstream input sensor 44b.
Specifically, when the medal M is guided to the downstream side of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, the input sensor 44a on the upstream side first detects the medal M (changes from OFF to ON).
When the medal M further flows down the medal passage 111, the insertion sensor 44b on the downstream side detects the medal M (turns on from off).

When the medal M further flows down the medal passage 111, the upstream insertion sensor 44a no longer detects the medal M (turns from on to off).
When the medal M further flows down the medal passage 111, the downstream insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M (turns from on to off).
Then, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the medal M has normally passed through the medal passage 111 based on whether or not the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b are turned on/off within a predetermined time range. do.

The chute member 120 is for guiding the medals M, which are allowed to be inputted by the medal selector 110 and discharged from the exit 111d of the medal passage 111, to the hopper 35 disposed in the lower part of the interior of the cabinet 13. It is provided on the back side of the door 12 at a position adjacent to the medal selector 110.

Further, the chute member 120 has a medal guiding path 121 for guiding the medals M from the medal selector 110 (upstream) side toward the hopper 35 (downstream) side.
The medal guide path 121 is gently inclined so that the height thereof gradually decreases from the medal selector 110 (upstream) side toward the hopper 35 (downstream) side.

Further, in FIG. 107, the medal M is allowed to be inserted by the medal selector 110, and when it passes through the medal passage 111, it is discharged from the exit 111d of the medal passage 111. Here, the medal selector 110 is attached to the back surface of the front door 12, as shown in FIG. 105. Therefore, the exit 111d is located closer to the back surface of the front door 12. On the other hand, the hopper 35 is located closer to the center inside the cabinet 13, as shown in FIG. 105. In other words, the hopper 35 is located on the near side with respect to the outlet 111d in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 107. Therefore, there is a certain distance between the outlet 111d and the hopper 35. Therefore, the medal guiding passage 121 has a shape curved in an arc toward the hopper 35 side in order to guide the medals M discharged from the outlet 111d toward the hopper 35 side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107, the chute member 120 includes a bottom surface portion 122 that forms the bottom surface of the medal guiding path 121, an inner wall portion 123 that forms the inner side surface of the arc-shaped medal guiding path 121, and an arc-shaped inner wall portion 123 that forms the inner side surface of the arc-shaped medal guiding path 121. It has an outer wall portion 124 that constitutes an outer side surface of the medal guiding passage 121. Note that the upper part of the medal guiding passage 121 is open.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 110, the chute member 120 is located at a position corresponding to the middle of the medal guiding path 121 on the bottom portion 122, with the chute member 120 being higher on the hopper 35 (downstream) side than on the medal selector 110 (upstream) side. It has a step portion 125 with a low height.

As described above, the medal guide path 121 is formed in an arcuate shape. Therefore, the medal M moves on the bottom surface 122 of the medal guiding path 121 from the upstream side to the downstream side, and comes into contact with the inner wall 123 and the outer wall 124 in the middle of the medal guiding path 121. , its speed slows down.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 110, a stepped portion 125 is provided at a position corresponding to the middle of the medal guiding path 121 on the bottom surface portion 122, and the height is lower on the downstream side than on the upstream side. Then, the medal M moving from the upstream side to the downstream side of the medal guide path 121 is dropped at the stepped portion 125. Thereby, the medal M that has been decelerated by contacting the inner wall portion 123 or the outer wall portion 124 can be accelerated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107, a fixing portion 126 is provided near the end of the outer wall portion 124 of the chute member 120 on the medal selector 110 side. The fixing portion 126 is for fixing the chute member 120 to the back surface of the front door 12, and protrudes upward from the upper end of the outer wall portion 124. Further, the fixing portion 126 is provided with a screw hole (not shown) that penetrates from the front side to the back side. Further, the screw hole passing through the fixing part 126 is provided above the upper end of the outer wall part 124.

The chute member 120 is fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12 by a screw 127 passed through a screw hole in the fixing part 126. Further, when the chute member 120 is fixed to a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12 with the screw 127, the screw 127 is located above the upper end of the outer wall portion 124.

Here, as shown in FIG. 109, the thickness of the medal M is assumed to be "T".
Further, as shown in FIG. 110, the diameter of the medal M is "D", and the radius of the medal M is "R". Furthermore, the height of the stepped portion 125 is "H1", the height of the inner wall 123 is "H2", and the height of the outer wall 124 is "H3".
Further, as shown in FIG. 112, the width of the medal guiding passage 121 (the distance between the inner wall 123 and the outer wall 124) is set as "L1", the total length of the screw 127 is set as "L2", and the diameter of the screw head is set as "L1". Let it be "L3".

The width "L1" of the medal guiding path 121, the thickness "T" of the medal M, and the diameter "D" of the medal M are configured to satisfy "L1>T" and "L1<D". There is. That is, the width "L1" of the medal guiding path 121 is wider (larger) than the thickness "T" of the medal M, and narrower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M.
Thereby, the medal M is moved on the bottom part 122 of the medal guiding path 121 in an upright state.

Furthermore, the height “H2” of the inner wall portion 123, the height “H3” of the outer wall portion 124, and the diameter “D” of the medal M are set so that “H2<D” and “H3<D” are satisfied. It is configured. That is, the height "H2" of the inner wall part 123 is lower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M, and the height "H3" of the outer wall part 124 is also lower than the diameter "D" of the medal M ( small).
Thereby, the medal M moves on the bottom surface 122 of the medal guide path 121 with the upper part of the medal M protruding upward from the upper ends of the inner wall 123 and the outer wall 124.

Furthermore, regarding the height “H1” of the stepped portion 125, the height “H2” of the inner wall portion 123, the height “H3” of the outer wall portion 124, and the radius “R” of the medal M, “H1<H2”. , "H1<H3", and "H1<R". That is, the height "H1" of the step part 125 is lower (smaller) than the height "H2" of the inner wall part 123 and lower (smaller) than the height "H3" of the outer wall part 124, and Lower (smaller) than radius "R".
This prevents the medal M from climbing over the inner wall part 123 and the outer wall part 124 and jumping out of the medal guide path 121 when it falls at the stepped part 125.

Note that the height “H2” of the inner wall portion 123 and the height “H3” of the outer wall portion 124 may be configured to satisfy “H2=H3”, or may satisfy “H2<H3”. It may be configured so that "H2>H3" is satisfied.
That is, the height "H2" of the inner wall 123 may be equal to the height "H3" of the outer wall 124, or may be higher (larger) than the height "H3" of the outer wall 124. , may be lower (smaller) than the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124.

Further, the width "L1" of the medal guiding passage 121, the total length "L2" of the screw 127, and the diameter "L3" of the screw head are configured to satisfy "L1<L2" and "L1<L3". . That is, the overall length “L2” of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the width “L1” of the medal guiding path 121, and the diameter “L3” of the screw head is thicker (larger) than the width “L1” of the medal guiding path 121.
Thereby, even if the screw 127 comes off from the back surface of the front door 12, it is possible to prevent the removed screw 127 from entering the medal guiding passage 121, so that the passage of the medal M can be prevented from being obstructed. .
Further, it is configured to satisfy "L2>L3". That is, the total length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the diameter "L3" of the screw head. Thereby, the chute member 120 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the front door 12 with the screws 127.

Note that a locking portion (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position of the chute member 120. This locking portion is for locking the chute member 120 to the back surface of the front door 12. Then, while the sheet member 120 is locked to the back surface of the front door 12 by the locking portion, the chute member 120 is fixed to the back surface of the front door 12 using the screw 127 passed through the screw hole of the fixing portion 126. Therefore, even if the screw 127 comes off, the chute member 120 will not separate from the back surface of the front door 12 and fall.

Moreover, the medal slot 47 has a medal placement part (not shown) on which a plurality of medals M can be placed in a lined state. In the ninth embodiment, the medal placement section is capable of placing ten medals M in a row. Then, a plurality of medals M placed on the medal placement section in a lined manner can be successively inserted from the medal insertion slot 47.

Further, when the thickness of the medal M is "T", the width of the medal guide path 121 is "L1", and the number of medals M that can be placed on the medal placement section is "M", it is assumed that "L1< (M÷2)×T”. In other words, the width “L1” of the medal guide path 121 is narrower than the thickness “(M÷2)×T” of half the number of medals M that can be placed on the medal placement portion of the medal slot 47. (small).

The return member 130 is for guiding the medals M whose insertion is not permitted by the medal selector 110 and the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 to the medal receiving tray 19, It is provided at a position corresponding to between the medal selector 110 and the medal payout port 16 on the back surface.
When the return member 130 is fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12, a medal return passage 132 and a medal payout passage 134 are formed between the back surface of the front door 12 and the return member 130, as shown in FIG. be done.

Further, the medal return passage 132 is a passage for guiding the medals M whose insertion is not permitted by the medal selector 110 to the medal payout port 16.
Furthermore, the medal payout passage 134 is a passage that guides the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout port 16.
Note that the medal return passage 132 and the medal payout passage 134 merge in the middle to become one passage.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107, a return receiving opening 131 is provided at the top of the return member 130. The return acceptance port 131 is an opening for receiving medals M whose input is not permitted by the medal selector 110 and which has fallen off from the medal path 111 at the position of the blocker 45 and is located at the entrance of the medal return path 132. This opening is located vertically below the blocker 45 of the medal selector 110.
Then, the medals M whose insertion is not permitted by the medal selector 110 and which fall off from the medal path 111 at the position of the blocker 45 and fall downward pass through the return acceptance port 131 and are guided by the medal return path 132. The medals pass through the payout port 16 and are stored in the medal tray 19.

Further, a payout receiving opening 133 is provided below the center of the return member 130 and at a position on the right side in FIG. The payout acceptance port 133 is an opening for receiving the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15, and is an opening that serves as an entrance to the medal payout passage 134, and is an opening for receiving medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15. It is configured to be located in front of the device 15.
The medals M dispensed from the medal dispensing device 15 pass through the dispensing receiving port 133, are guided by the medal dispensing passage 134, pass through the medal dispensing port 16, and are stored in the medal receiving tray 19.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107, the peripheral edge of the return receiving port 131 at the top of the return member 130 is referred to as an "upper edge 135." That is, the upper edge portion 135 is a portion corresponding to the edge around the return acceptance port 131. When the return member 130 is fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12, the upper edge 135 is configured to be substantially horizontal.
Further, as shown in FIG. 107, a gap 112 is provided between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. Further, an upper edge portion 135 is arranged vertically below the gap 112. As a result, the return acceptance port 131 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109, the thickness of the medal M is "T", the interval between the gaps 112 is "W", and the width of the upper edge 135 is "B".
The thickness "T" of the medal M and the interval "W" between the gaps 112 are configured to satisfy "W>T". That is, the interval "W" between the gaps 112 is larger than the thickness "T" of the medal M. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 111, the medal M can be inserted into the gap 112.
More specifically, it is configured to satisfy "W≈2×T". That is, the interval "W" between the gaps 112 is approximately twice the thickness "T" of the medal M. Therefore, "2" medals M can be inserted into the gap 112.

Further, the upper edge portion 135 is arranged vertically below the gap 112, and further, regarding the thickness “T” of the medal M, the interval “W” between the gap 112, and the width “B” of the upper edge portion 135, It is configured to satisfy "B>T" and "B>W". That is, the width “B” of the upper edge portion 135 is larger than the thickness “T” of the medal M and larger than the interval “W” between the gaps 112. In addition, the upper edge 135 is configured to be substantially horizontal. Therefore, the medal M placed in the gap 112 can be placed on the upper edge 135.

For example, a hall clerk may insert a medal M into the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 during maintenance of the medal selector 110. At this time, since the medal M is placed on the upper edge 135, the medal M can remain in the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.
However, there are cases where the clerk at the hall forgets that the medal M is still in the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and closes the front door 12. In this case, the medal M falls from the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 due to the impact when the front door 12 is closed.

At this time, since the upper edge 135 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 and the return acceptance opening 131 is not arranged, the medal M that has fallen from the gap 112 does not fall into the return acceptance opening 131. . Therefore, the medal M that has fallen from the gap 112 will not pass through the medal return passage 132, pass through the medal payout port 16, and reach the medal receiving tray 19. Thereby, the clerk at the hall can prevent the player from giving the medal M inserted into the gap 112 for maintenance of the medal selector 110.

Further, as shown in FIG. 108, the gap 112 is arranged above the storage receiving port 35a of the hopper 35. That is, the storage receiving port 35a of the hopper 35 opens at a position lower than the gap 112. Thereby, the medals M that have fallen from the gap 112 when the front door 12 is closed can be dropped into the storage receiving opening 35a, and thus can be stored in the hopper 35.

Further, as described above, the interval "W" between the gaps 112 is approximately twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, so when "1" medal M is inserted into the gaps 112, the gaps 112 Since there is a gap between the medal M and the medal M, there is no possibility that "1" medal M cannot be taken out from the gap 112.
Then, when the front door 12 is closed with this "1" medal M placed in the gap 112, this "1" medal M falls from the gap 112 due to the impact and enters the storage receiving port 35a. It falls and is stored in the hopper 35.

Furthermore, if the interval "W" between the gaps 112 is slightly wider (larger) than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, when "2" medals M are inserted into the gaps 112, the "2" There is no possibility that one medal M cannot be taken out from the gap 112.
Then, when the front door 12 is closed with these "2" medals M placed in the gap 112, the same effect as when the front door 12 is closed with "1" medal M placed in the gap 112. , it falls from the gap 112 due to the impact when the front door 12 is closed, falls into the storage receiving port 35a, and is stored in the hopper 35.

Conversely, if the interval "W" between the gaps 112 is slightly narrower (smaller) than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, "2" medals M will be forced into the gaps 112. In this case, it will not become impossible to take out the "2" pushed medals M from the gap 112.
However, if the front door 12 is closed with "2" medals M being pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M may remain in the gap 112.

Here, as shown in FIG. 111, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 is inserted into the gap 112 so as to block the exit 111d of the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110. Stay in. Therefore, when one medal M remains within the gap 112, when another medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and heads toward the chute member 120, It hits the first medal M in the gap 112 and stops.

Furthermore, when another medal M passing through the medal passage 111 hits one medal M within the gap 112, the upper end of the one medal M within the gap 112 is at the center of the other medal M passing through the medal passage 111. Located higher up. Therefore, other medals M passing through the medal passage 111 will not cross over the one medal M in the gap 112.
Therefore, when one medal M enters the gap 112, other medals M cannot pass from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120.

Further, although it is not possible to directly detect that the medal M remains within the gap 112, as described above, when one medal M remains within the gap 112, it is not possible to directly detect that the medal M remains within the gap 112. The other medals M hit the one medal M in the gap 112 and stop. At this time, other medals M remain near the exit 111d of the medal passage 111, so that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on.

Further, when the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that an error has been detected in which the medal M is clogged (stagnated) in the medal selector 110, and notifies you of this fact. Thereby, it is possible to indirectly detect that the medal M remains within the gap 112. Note that error detection and notification will be described later.

Further, when the chute member 120 is fixed to a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12 with the screw 127, the return receiving port 131 is not arranged vertically below the screw 127.
Therefore, even if the screw 127 comes off from the back surface of the front door 12, the removed screw 127 will not fall into the return acceptance slot 131. Therefore, the screw 127 that has come off does not pass through the medal return passage 132, pass through the medal payout port 16, and reach the medal receiving tray 19.

Further, as shown in FIG. 106, the medal selector 110 includes a passage sensor 46. The passage sensor 46 is a sensor provided to determine whether there is an error in which the medals M become clogged (stagnated) or if there is a trifle. Although not shown in FIG. 107, the passage sensor 46 is provided in the vertical portion 111a of the medal passage 111. That is, the passage sensor 46 is provided upstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111.

Therefore, the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 are first detected by the passage sensor 46. In addition, the passage sensor 46 detects the amount of medals inserted from the medal slot 47 regardless of whether the blocker 45 allows the insertion of medals M (on state) or disallows the insertion of medals M (off state). M can be detected.

Although not shown in FIGS. 105 to 115, the chute member 120 is provided with a chute sensor in the middle of the medal guide path 121. The chute sensor, like the passage sensor 46, is a sensor provided to determine whether there is an error in which the medal M gets stuck (stagnated) or if there is a trifle. Since the chute member 120 is for guiding the medals M permitted to be input by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35, the chute sensor is provided downstream from the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b.

Further, the passage sensor 46 and the chute sensor are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51.
Note that both the passage sensor 46 and the chute sensor may be provided, only one of them may be provided, or both may be provided.

Next, error detection, error notification, and cancellation of error notification in the ninth embodiment will be described.
For example, when the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 generates an error in which the medal M gets stuck (remains) in the medal selector 110 (hereinafter referred to as a "selector retention error"). ) is detected, and a notification indicating a selector retention error (hereinafter referred to as "selector retention notification") is executed. Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code indicating a selector retention error (for example, "CE") on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification.

Further, when the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error, it transmits a command indicating the selector retention error (hereinafter referred to as a "selector retention command") to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the selector retention command, it executes selector retention notification through the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice saying "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as a selector retention notification, and displays the words "Selector error" on the image display device 23, for example.

Further, for example, when the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b are not turned on in this order (the medal M does not pass normally), the main control board 50 generates an error (hereinafter referred to as It is determined that a selector passing error (hereinafter referred to as "selector passing error") has been detected, and a notification indicating the selector passing error (hereinafter referred to as "selector passing error notification") is executed.

As described above, when the medals M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 are guided downstream from the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, the insertion sensor 44a is first turned on from off, and then the insertion sensor 44b is turned on. The input sensor 44a changes from off to on, then the input sensor 44a changes from on to off, and finally the input sensor 44b changes from on to off.
Then, when the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b are turned on and off in the above order, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b are turned on and off in the above order. If it does not turn off, it is determined that a selector passing error has been detected.

Further, when the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed through the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b normally, it executes a process of adding "1" to the number of bets or the number of credits for the medal M.
On the other hand, when the main control board 50 detects a selector passing error, it displays a code (for example, "CP") indicating the selector passing error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector passing error notification.

Further, when the main control board 50 detects a selector passing error, it transmits a command indicating the selector passing error (hereinafter referred to as a "selector passing error command") to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the selector passage error command, it executes selector passage error notification through the speaker 22, image display device 23, and the like. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice saying "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as a selector passage error notification, and displays the words "Selector error" on the image display device 23. .

Note that it may be determined that a selector passage error (or selector backflow error) has been detected when the input sensor 44b is turned on from off while the input sensor 44a is in an off state.
Also, the input sensor 44b changes from off to on, then the input sensor 44a changes from off to on, then the input sensor 44b changes from on to off, and finally, the input sensor 44a changes from on to off. When this happens, it may be determined that a selector passage error (or selector backflow error) has been detected.

Further, when the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M for a predetermined period of time after detecting the medal M, and stops detecting the medal M after the elapse of the predetermined time, the main control board 50 detects that the medal M has passed normally. I judge that I did.
On the other hand, when the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the passage sensor 46 detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has been detected.
Further, when the passage sensor 46 stops detecting the medal M before a predetermined time has elapsed since the passage sensor 46 detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passage error has been detected.

Further, if the shot sensor continues to detect the medal M for a predetermined period of time from when it detects the medal M, and stops detecting the medal M after the elapse of the predetermined time, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally. I judge that I did.
On the other hand, if the shoot sensor continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the shoot sensor detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has been detected.
Moreover, when the medal M is no longer detected before a predetermined time has elapsed since the shoot sensor detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has been detected.

The main control board 50 also includes an input monitoring counter (not shown).
The insertion monitoring counter is incremented by 1 when the medal M passes normally through the passage sensor 46 when the blocker 45 is in the ON state (a state that allows passage of the medal M), and the medal M is added to the input sensor 44a. This is a counter that is decremented by "1" when the input signal passes through the input sensor 44b normally. Therefore, the input monitoring counter repeats "1" and "0" during normal operation.
Note that when the blocker 45 is in an off state (a state in which passage of the medal M is not permitted), "1" is not added to the input monitoring counter even if the medal M passes through the passage sensor 46.
Further, the input monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 changes from an off state (a state in which the passage of the medal M is not permitted) to an on state (a state in which the passage of the medal M is permitted).

When the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the insertion monitoring counter when the medal M passes through the passage sensor 46 normally, and the medal M is added to the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b. When it passes normally, "1" is subtracted from the input monitoring counter.
When the blocker 45 is in the ON state, when the passage sensor 46 does not detect the passage of the medal M and only the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b detect the passage of the medal M, the input monitoring counter is set to "-1'', and the main control board 50 determines that an input monitoring error has been detected.

Further, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the passage sensor 46 detects the passage of the medal M, but the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M, and then the passage sensor 46 detects the passage of the medal M. , the input monitoring counter becomes "2" and the main control board 50 determines that a loading monitoring error has been detected.

In addition, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the input monitoring counter is incremented by 1 when the medal M passes through the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b normally, and when the medal M passes through the chute sensor normally. It may also be a counter that is decremented by "1" from time to time.
That is, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state and the medal M passes through the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b normally, the main control board 50 increments the input monitoring counter by "1" and the medal M is sent to the shoot. When the sensor passes normally, "1" may be subtracted from the input monitoring counter.

When the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b detect the passage of the medal M, but the chute sensor does not detect the passage of the medal M, and then the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b When detecting passage of the medal M, the input monitoring counter becomes "2", and the main control board 50 may determine that an input monitoring error has been detected.
In addition, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, when only the chute sensor detects the passage of the medal M without the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b detecting the passage of the medal M, the input monitoring counter is set to "-". 1'', and the main control board 50 may determine that an input monitoring error has been detected.

Note that the normal value of the input monitoring counter is not limited to "0" to "1". That is, the main control board 50 determines that there is a loading monitoring error not only when the loading monitoring counter reaches "2" or "-1". For example, the main control board 50 may determine that a feeding monitoring error has been detected when the feeding monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "3" or more or a predetermined value of "-2" or less. .

In addition, when adding/subtracting the input signal from the passage sensor 46 and the input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b to the loading monitoring counter, the main control board 50 switches the blocker 45 from the OFF state to the ON state. Clear the input monitoring counter when
However, when adding/subtracting the input signal from the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b and the input signal from the chute sensor to the input monitoring counter, the main control board 50 changes the blocker 45 from the off state to the on state. When doing so, the input monitoring counter may or may not be cleared.
That is, when the input signal from the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b and the input signal from the chute sensor are added/subtracted by the input monitoring counter, when the blocker 45 changes from the OFF state to the ON state, It may be cleared or may not be cleared.

Further, a charging monitoring counter for the passage sensor 46 and a charging monitoring counter for the chute sensor may be provided separately.
That is, the input monitoring counter can include a first input monitoring counter and a second input monitoring counter.
Further, the first input monitoring counter is a counter that is added/subtracted by the input signal from the passage sensor 46 and the input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b.
Furthermore, the second input monitoring counter is a counter that is added/subtracted by the input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b and the input signal from the chute sensor.

That is, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state and the medal M passes through the passage sensor 46 normally, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the first input monitoring counter, and the medal M is added to the input sensor 44a. And when it passes through the input sensor 44b normally, "1" is subtracted from the first input monitoring counter.
Then, the main control board 50 detects a loading monitoring error when the first loading monitoring counter is no longer a normal value (for example, when it reaches a predetermined value of "-1" or less or a predetermined value of "2" or more). I judge that I did.

In addition, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state and the medal M passes through the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b normally, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the second input monitoring counter, and the medal M When it passes through the chute sensor normally, "1" is subtracted from the second input monitoring counter.
Then, the main control board 50 detects a loading monitoring error when the second loading monitoring counter is no longer a normal value (for example, when it reaches a predetermined value of "-1" or less or a predetermined value of "2" or more). I judge that I did.

For example, when the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are not turned on/off even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, the main control board 50 may issue an error message indicating that no medals M are stored in the hopper 35. (hereinafter referred to as "hopper empty error") is detected, and a notification indicating the hopper empty error (hereinafter referred to as "hopper empty notification") is executed. Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code (for example, "HE") indicating a hopper empty error on the acquisition number display LED 78 (FIG. 106) as a hopper empty notification.

Further, when the main control board 50 detects a hopper empty error, it transmits a command indicating that the hopper is empty (hereinafter referred to as an "empty command") to the sub control board 80.
When the sub control board 80 receives the empty command, the sub control board 80 executes hopper empty notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice saying "Please call the attendant" from the speaker 22 as a hopper empty notification, and displays the words "Hopper empty" on the image display device 23.

Further, for example, when the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b remain on, the main control board 50 detects an error in which the medal M is jammed in the hopper 35 (hereinafter referred to as "hopper jam error"). It is determined that a hopper jam error has occurred, and a notification indicating a hopper jam error (hereinafter referred to as "hopper jam notification") is executed. Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code (for example, "HP") indicating a hopper jam error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a hopper jam notification.

Further, when the main control board 50 detects a hopper jam error, it transmits a command indicating a hopper jam (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper jam command") to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the hopper jam command, it issues a hopper jam notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice saying "Please call the attendant" from the speaker 22 as a hopper jam notification, and displays the words "Hopper Jam" on the image display device 23.

When the various errors described above are detected, the main control board 50 stops the progress of the game until the various error notifications are canceled.
Moreover, if the causes of the various errors mentioned above are removed, the main control board 50 will no longer detect various errors, but once the various error notifications are executed, the causes of the corresponding errors will be removed (error It is not canceled just when the reset switch 153 is no longer detected, but continues until the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on). Then, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 cancel various error notifications.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12 (hereinafter referred to as "door opening") by turning on the door switch 17, the main control board 50 sends a notification indicating that the front door 12 is opened (hereinafter referred to as "door opening"). , referred to as "door open notification"). Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code (for example, "dE") indicating that the front door 12 is opened on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a door opening notification.
Further, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened by turning on the door switch 17, the main control board 50 issues a command indicating the opening of the front door 12 (hereinafter referred to as a "door open command"). It is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

When the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it issues a door open notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs the sound "The door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Door open" on the image display device 23 as door open notification, for example.

Further, a release switch (not shown) for releasing the door open notification is provided near the locking device on the back surface of the front door 12 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the player). Insert the door key into the door key insertion slot and turn the door key counterclockwise about 45 degrees to turn the release switch from off to on. That is, when the door key is turned about 45 degrees in the opposite direction to unlocking the front door 12, the release switch is turned from off to on.
Note that, as described above, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot and the door key is turned 90 degrees clockwise in this state, the lock is released. When the front door 12 is pulled in the unlocked state, the front door 12 rotates about the hinge, and the front door 12 is opened.

When the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off, but once the door open notification is executed, it cannot be canceled by simply closing the front door 12 and turning off the door switch 17; Continues until the switch is turned from off to on.
Then, while the door open notification is being executed, close the front door 12, turn off the door switch 17, and in this state turn the door key counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked) by about 45 degrees. , when the release switch is turned on from off, the door open notification is released.

In this way, the operation of turning the door key in the opposite direction to that for unlocking the front door 12 is the operation for canceling the door open notification.
Furthermore, when the door open notification is canceled, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before displaying "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Furthermore, when the release switch is turned on from off, the main control board 50 transmits a command (hereinafter referred to as "notification cancellation command") indicating cancellation of the door open notification to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the notification cancellation command, the sub-control board 80 ends the door open notification that is being executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 116 to 126, operating modes at the time of error detection, error notification, and error cancellation in the ninth embodiment will be described.
FIGS. 116 to 123 are time charts showing operating modes at the time of error detection and error cancellation in the ninth embodiment.
FIG. 116 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the selector retention error, and when the release switch is operated after the front door 12 is closed.

When a selector retention error occurs at timing "X11" in FIG. 116, the main control board 50 detects the selector retention error. Further, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 execute selector retention notification.
Specifically, at the timing "X11" in FIG. 116, when the medal M is clogged in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 controls the selector It is determined that a retention error has been detected. Then, the main control board 50 displays "CE" indicating a selector retention error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error, it transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80.
When the sub control board 80 receives the selector retention command, the sub control board 80 outputs a voice saying "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as a selector retention notification, and displays a "selector retention error" message on the image display device 23. Display characters.

Thereafter, when the front door 12 is opened at timing "X12" in FIG. 116, the main control board 50 determines that the opening of the front door 12 (door opening) has been detected.
Specifically, when the front door 12 is opened at timing "X12" in FIG. 116, the door switch 17 is turned on, and the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12 (door opening). I judge that I did. However, while the selector retention notification is in progress, even if the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12, it does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector retention notification.

Further, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened, it transmits a door open command indicating the opening of the front door 12 to the sub control board 80.
However, while the selector retention notification is being executed, the sub control board 80 does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector retention notification even if it receives a door open command.

Thereafter, when the medal M stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is removed at the timing "X13" in FIG. will no longer be detected. However, once the selector retention notification is executed, it cannot be canceled simply by removing the cause of the selector retention error (no longer detecting the selector retention error), but by operating (turning on) the reset switch 153. Continue until.

Thereafter, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X14" in FIG. 116, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.
Further, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the error cancellation command, the sub control board 80 cancels the selector retention notification that was being executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

However, at the timing "X14" in FIG. 116, even if the reset switch 153 is operated and the selector retention notification is canceled, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on. After canceling the selector retention notification, the main control board 50 then executes door open notification using the acquisition number display LED 78. Specifically, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating opening of the front door 12 (door open).
Further, after canceling the selector retention notification, the sub control board 80 then executes door open notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs a sound saying "The door is open" from the speaker 22 as a door open notification, and displays the words "Door open" on the image display device 23.

Thereafter, when the front door 12 is closed at timing "X15" in FIG. 116, the door switch 17 is turned off. As a result, the main control board 50 no longer detects opening of the front door 12. However, once the door open notification is executed, it is not canceled by simply closing the front door 12 and turning off the door switch 17, but continues until the release switch is operated (turned on).

Thereafter, at timing "X16" in FIG. 116, when the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 releases the door open notification. Thereby, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before displaying the error code on the acquisition number display LED 78, and transmits a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the notification cancellation command, the sub control board 80 cancels the door open notification that is being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

FIG. 117 is a time chart showing an operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error.
In FIG. 117, when the medal M is clogged in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on at timing "X21" in FIG. 117, the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error. I judge that.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error, it displays "CE" indicating a selector retention error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification, and transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80.
Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector retention command, it outputs the voice "Please call the staff member" from the speaker 22 as a selector retention notification, and displays the words "Selector retention error" on the image display device 23. indicate.

Thereafter, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at timing "X22" in FIG. 117, the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened.
However, while the selector retention notification is in progress, even if the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12, it does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector retention notification.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12, it transmits a door open command indicating the opening of the front door 12 to the sub control board 80.
However, while the selector retention notification is being executed, the sub control board 80 does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector retention notification even if it receives a door open command.

Thereafter, at timing "X23" in FIG. 117, the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is clogged with medals M, and the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, that is, the cause of the selector retention error is removed. When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the selector stay notification is not activated, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

Further, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the error cancellation command, the sub control board 80 cancels the selector retention notification that was being executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.
However, although the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X23" in FIG. 117, the selector retention notification is then executed again at the timing "X24".

Specifically, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X23" in FIG. 117 in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 The notification is canceled, and control is then performed to execute the door open notification. Thereafter, at timing "X24" in FIG. 117, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the selector retention notification again.

That is, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating opening of the front door 12 at the timing "X23" in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of "X24", the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is controlled to be switched from "dE" to "CE". Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80 at timing "X24" in FIG.

Further, when receiving the error cancellation command at timing "X23" in FIG. 117, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector retention notification and controls to execute the door open notification this time. Thereafter, when receiving the selector retention command at timing "X24" in FIG. 117, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the selector retention notification again.

That is, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the attendant" to "The door is open" at the timing "X23" in FIG. 117, and also switches the audio output from the image display device 23 control to switch the display from "selector retention error" to "door open". Thereafter, at the timing of "X24", the audio output from the speaker 22 is switched from "The door is open" to "Please call the attendant", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "Door open" to " Control to switch to "selector retention error".

Here, various errors such as selector retention error, selector passing error, hopper empty error, and hopper jam error are managed (detected, notified, and canceled) by the main control board 50, but the main control board 50 controls door opening. There are two types of management (detection, notification, release): one is management (detection, notification, release), and the other is management (detection, notification, release) by the sub-control board 80.
Regarding the door open notification, there are two cases in which it is canceled (terminated) on the condition that a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the detection of the door open, and there are cases in which the door open notification is canceled (terminated) when the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off. In one case, the release switch is operated with the front door 12 closed and the door switch 17 turned off (from off to on, or from off to on). There is also a case where it can be canceled (terminated) on the condition that it has turned off and turned off.

Furthermore, regarding the door open notification, a code such as "dE" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, an audio output such as "the door is open" from the speaker 22, and "door open" is displayed on the image display device 23. etc., and outputting a voice such as "The door is open" from the speaker 22, and displaying characters such as "Door open" on the image display device 23. There are two cases: a case where only a voice output such as "The door is open" is executed from the speaker 22, and a case where only a text display such as "Door is open" is executed on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, in FIG. 117, depending on the content of the process to be executed after the selector retention notification is once released at the timing of "X23" and until the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24", from "X23" to There are two cases in which the time required to reach "X24" is extremely short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms), which is unrecognizable to human perception, and there are cases in which it is relatively long (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) to the extent that it is perceptible to human perception. has.
Therefore, due to the combination of the various cases described above, in FIG. 117, after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X23" and until the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24", Various modes of operation are possible.

In other words, in FIG. 117, when the door open notification is executed after the selector retention notification is once released at the timing "X23" and until the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24", and when the door open notification is executed, There is also a case where release notification is not executed.
In addition, in FIG. 117, when the door open notification is executed after the selector retention notification is once released at the timing "X23" and until the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24", the door open notification is executed. There are times when it is possible to recognize with human sight and hearing that the door open notification has been executed, and times when the human sight and hearing cannot recognize that the door open notification has been executed, or even if it is recognized, it is only for a moment. has.

Furthermore, in FIG. 117, in the case where the door open notification is not executed between once the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing "X23" and the time when the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24", When it is possible to recognize with human vision and hearing that a selector retention notification has been once canceled and then executed again, and when it is possible to recognize with human vision and hearing that a selector retention notification has been once canceled and then executed again. There are times when I can't recognize it, or even when I can recognize it, it's only for a moment.

For example, door opening is managed by the main control board 50, and the condition for canceling (terminating) the door open notification is that the release switch is operated while the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off. As the opening notification, a code such as "dE" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, an audio output such as "The door is open" is output from the speaker 22, and a character display such as "Door is open" is displayed on the image display device 23. There are cases where three are executed.

In this case, in FIG. 117, the door open notification can be executed after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X23" until the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24".
In addition, in FIG. 117, the time required from once canceling the selector retention notification at the timing "X23" to re-executing the selector retention notification at the timing "X24" has been reduced to a level that can be recognized by human perception. If it is relatively long (for example, 3 to 5 seconds), when the door open notification is executed between "X23" and "X24", this door open notification can be recognized visually and audibly by humans. .

On the other hand, in FIG. 117, the time required from once canceling the selector retention notification at the timing "X23" to re-executing the selector retention notification at the timing "X24" is so long that it cannot be recognized by human perception. If the time is extremely short (for example, 1ms to 5ms), even if the door open notification is executed between "X23" and "X23", it is difficult for humans to recognize this door open notification visually or audibly. be.
However, even if the time required from "X23" to "X24" is extremely short to the extent that it cannot be recognized by human perception, the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled at the timing of "X23" and the timing of "X24" is There are cases where the re-execution of the selector retention notification can be recognized by human hearing.

In other words, when the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", the voice outputting from the speaker 22 saying "Please call the staff member" is interrupted, and the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". When doing so, the voice "Please call the staff member" is output from the beginning. Therefore, since it sounds like, for example, "Please call the staff member... please call the staff member," it is possible to recognize with the human auditory sense that the selector retention notification was once canceled and then re-executed.
In addition, when an alarm sound such as "boo" or "beep" is output from the speaker 22 as a selector retention notification, it is difficult for human hearing to recognize that the selector retention notification has been canceled and then re-executed. Or even if I could recognize it, it would only be for a moment.

Further, for example, the door opening is managed by the sub control board 80, and the condition for canceling (terminating) the door opening notification is that a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the detection of the door opening, and as the door opening notification, There are two cases in which a voice output such as "door is open" from the speaker 22 and a character display such as "door open" on the image display device 23 are executed.
In this case, if you want to cancel the selector retention notification and execute it again before a predetermined time has elapsed from the detection of the door opening, first cancel the selector retention notification at the timing "X23" in FIG. , until the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24", the door open notification can be executed.

On the other hand, since the door open notification is not executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the detection of the door open, if the selector retention notification is canceled once and executed again after the predetermined time has elapsed from the detection of the door open, In FIG. 117, the door open notification is not executed after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X23" until the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24".

In addition, in FIG. 117, when the door open notification is not executed between once the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing "X23" and the time when the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24", The time required from "X23" to "X24" is sometimes relatively long (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) to the extent that it can be recognized by human perception.
In this case, from "X23" to "X24", the acquisition number display LED 78 displays the acquisition number before displaying "CE", and the speaker 22 outputs the voice "Please call the staff". The image display device 23 displays the screen (for example, the game screen or the game standby screen) before the words "SELECTOR ERROR" are displayed. These displays between "X23" and "X24" can be recognized visually and audibly by humans. Therefore, it is possible for humans to visually and audibly recognize that the selector retention notification is once canceled and then executed again.

In addition, in FIG. 117, when the door open notification is not executed between once the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing "X23" and the time when the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24", There are times when the time required from "X23" to "X24" is extremely short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms) to the extent that it cannot be recognized by human perception.
In this case, it is difficult for humans to recognize the acquisition number display LED 78, the display on the image display device 23, and the audio from the speaker 22 between "X23" and "X24" with human vision and hearing. .

However, when the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing of "X23", the voice output from the speaker 22 saying "Please call the staff" is cut off, and the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". If the voice ``Please call the staff member'' is output from the beginning, it will sound like ``Please call the staff member... Please call the staff member.'' It is possible to recognize by human auditory sense that it has been executed again later.

Further, in FIG. 117, the following patterns (1) to (6) can be considered as processing patterns executed between "X23" and "X24".
(1) In the same interrupt process (Figure 47), a pattern in which selector retention notification is once canceled and selector retention notification is executed again (2) In one interrupt process, selector retention notification is canceled once, and then in the next Pattern for re-executing selector retention notification during interrupt processing

(3) In the case where the selector retention notification is once canceled in the first interrupt processing and the selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled and then the selector retention notification is executed again. A pattern that requires multiple interrupt processing and does not execute the door open notification during that time. (4) In the first interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is released, and in the subsequent interrupt processing, In the case of re-executing the notification, multiple interrupt processing is required between once the selector retention notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed again, and a pattern in which the door open notification is executed during that time.

(5) In the case where the selector retention notification is once canceled in the first interrupt processing and the selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled and then the selector retention notification is executed again. A pattern in which a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required to elapse before execution, and the door open notification is not executed during that time (6) In the first interrupt process, the selector retention notification is once released, and then In the interrupt processing, when the selector retention notification is executed again, a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required between once the selector retention notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed again. A pattern in which a door open notification is executed during a period of time.

First, the pattern (1) of canceling the selector retention notification and re-executing the selector retention notification in the same interrupt process will be described.
In this case, when proceeding to the input port 51 reading process (step S457) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 controls various switches (such as the reset switch 153) and various sensors (the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b). etc.) reads the input signal. Then, based on the read input signal, various data such as level data, rising data, and falling data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

After that, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above, and the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on. When it is determined that this is the case, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected, and an error flag indicating the selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
Thereafter, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to error processing (not shown), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and executes selector retention notification.
Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the control command transmission processing (step S464) is advanced, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80.

In this case, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing "X23" in FIG. 117, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.
Furthermore, canceling the selector retention notification and re-notifying the selector retention are executed in the same interrupt process. Furthermore, interrupt processing is executed every 2.235ms. Therefore, the time required from canceling selector retention notification to executing selector retention notification again is less than the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms).

Therefore, in FIG. 117, the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled at the timing "X23", and then the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24", but between "X23" and "X24", It is difficult for humans to recognize the acquisition number display LED 78, the display on the image display device 23, and the sound from the speaker 22 visually or audibly.

However, when the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing of "X23", the voice output from the speaker 22 saying "Please call the staff" is cut off, and the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". If the voice ``Please call the staff member'' is output from the beginning, it will sound like ``Please call the staff member... Please call the staff member.'' It is possible to recognize by human auditory sense that it has been executed again later.

Next, a pattern in which the selector retention notification is once canceled in the interrupt process (2) 1 above, and then the selector retention notification is executed again in the next interrupt process will be described.
In this case, as in pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading processing (step S457), the main control board 50 receives input signals from various switches and various sensors. Load. Then, based on the read input signal, various data such as level data, rising data, and falling data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

After that, similarly to pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and inputs the When it is determined that the sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected, and an error flag indicating the selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether or not the start switch 41 is on (step S278), or when all the reels 31 are turned on. Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing subsequent to the determination process (step S289) as to whether or not it has stopped. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, when proceeding to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. A code "CE" indicating the number of acquisitions is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80.

In this case as well, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing "X23" in FIG. 117, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.
However, unlike the pattern (1) above, in the first interrupt process, the selector retention notification is canceled, and in the main process that is executed after that, an error process is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state. be done. Then, in the interrupt processing that is executed thereafter, selector retention notification is executed again. Therefore, the time required from canceling selector retention notification to executing selector retention notification again is approximately 1 interrupt time (2.235 ms) to 2 interrupt time (2.235 ms x 2 = 4.47 ms). Become.

In this case as well, the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X23" in FIG. 117, and then the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24". In between, it is difficult for humans to recognize the display on the acquired number display LED 78, the image display device 23, and the sound from the speaker 22 visually or audibly.

However, when the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing of "X23", the voice output from the speaker 22 saying "Please call the staff" is cut off, and the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". If the voice ``Please call the staff member'' is output from the beginning, it will sound like ``Please call the staff member... Please call the staff member.'' It is possible to recognize by human auditory sense that it has been executed again later.

Next, when the selector retention notification is once canceled in the interrupt processing in (3) 1 above, and the selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled and then the selector retention notification is A pattern will be described in which interrupt processing is required a plurality of times until the stay notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time.

In this case, as in pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading processing (step S457), the main control board 50 receives input signals from various switches and various sensors. Load. Then, based on the read input signal, various data such as level data, rising data, and falling data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether or not the start switch 41 is on (step S278), or when all the reels 31 are turned on. Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing subsequent to the determination process (step S289) as to whether or not it has stopped. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and temporarily releases the selector retention error state.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after canceling the selector retention error state in the error processing during the main processing, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays "CE" on the acquired number display LED 78. ” Displays the number of acquisitions before displaying.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command sending process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 sends an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.

After that, in the next interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above, and turns on the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b. If it is determined that it remains the same, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected. Then, an error flag indicating a selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, when proceeding to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. A code "CE" indicating the number of acquisitions is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80.

In this case as well, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing "X23" in FIG. 117, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.
Further, in the "Z"-th ("Z" is an integer) interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled, and in the main processing executed thereafter, the selector retention error state is temporarily canceled. Thereafter, in the "Z+1"-th interrupt processing, the number of acquisitions before displaying "CE" is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78, and in the "Z+2"-th interrupt processing, a selector retention error is detected. Furthermore, in the main processing executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state. Thereafter, in the "Z+3"-th interrupt process, selector retention notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from canceling the selector retention notification to executing the selector retention notification again is the time for 3rd interrupt (2.235ms x 3 = 6.705ms) to the time for 4th interrupt (2.235ms x 4 = 8.94ms).
Therefore, in FIG. 117, the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled at the timing "X23", and then the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24", but the acquisition between "X23" and "X24" is It is difficult for humans to recognize the display on the number display LED 78, the image display device 23, and the sound from the speaker 22 visually or audibly.

However, when the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing of "X23", the voice output from the speaker 22 saying "Please call the staff" is cut off, and the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". If the voice ``Please call the staff member'' is output from the beginning, it will sound like ``Please call the staff member... Please call the staff member.'' It is possible to recognize by human auditory sense that it has been executed again later.

Next, when the selector retention notification is once canceled in the interrupt processing in (4) 1 above, and the selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled and then the selector retention notification is A pattern will be described in which interrupt processing is required multiple times until the stay notification is executed again, and the door open notification is executed during that time.

In this case, as in pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading processing (step S457), the main control board 50 receives input signals from various switches and various sensors. Load. Then, based on the read input signal, various data such as level data, rising data, and falling data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above and determines whether the door switch 17 is on, it is determined that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected, and an error flag indicating door opening is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the door to an open state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the door is set to the open state in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 indicates that the door is open as a door open notification. The code "dE" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command sending process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 sends a door open command to the sub control board 80.

After that, in the next interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above, and turns on the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b. If it is determined that it remains the same, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected. Then, the door open notification is canceled and an error flag indicating a selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, when proceeding to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. A code "CE" indicating the number of acquisitions is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80.

In this case, at the timing "X23" in FIG. 117, the selector retention notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Then, at the timing "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed again.
In addition, in the "Z"-th ("Z" is an integer) interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is canceled and the door opening is detected, and in the main processing that is executed thereafter, the game progresses as the door is opened. Error handling to stop is executed. Thereafter, in the "Z+1"-th interrupt process, a door open notification is executed, and in the "Z+2"-th interrupt process, the door open notification is canceled and a selector retention error is detected. Furthermore, in the main processing executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state. Thereafter, in the "Z+3"-th interrupt process, selector retention notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from canceling the selector retention notification to executing the selector retention notification again is the time for 3rd interrupt (2.235ms x 3 = 6.705ms) to the time for 4th interrupt (2.235ms x 4 = 8.94ms).
Therefore, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 117, the selector retention notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed, but the fact that the door open notification has been executed may not be recognized visually or audibly by humans, or may not be recognized. Even if it were possible, it would only be for a moment. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed again.

Next, when the selector retention notification is once canceled in the interrupt processing in (5) 1 above, and the selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled and then the selector retention notification is A pattern will be described in which a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required to elapse before the stay notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time.

In this case, as in pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading processing (step S457), the main control board 50 receives input signals from various switches and various sensors. Load. Then, based on the read input signal, various data such as level data, rising data, and falling data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.
Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to timer set process (not shown), the main control board 50 measures the elapsed time after canceling the selector retention notification. Set a timer to

Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and temporarily releases the selector retention error state.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after canceling the selector retention error state in the error processing during the main processing, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays "CE" on the acquired number display LED 78. ” Displays the number of acquisitions before displaying.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command sending process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 sends an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.

In the subsequent interrupt process (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the elapsed time check process (not shown), the main control board 50 determines that a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the selector retention notification was canceled. Determine whether or not.
When it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the selector retention notification was canceled, and when it is determined in the input error check process (step S463) that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, The main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector retention error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, when proceeding to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. A code "CE" indicating the number of acquisitions is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80.

In this case, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing "X23" in FIG. 117, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.
Further, in the first interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time after the selector retention notification is canceled. In the main processing executed after that, the selector retention error state is temporarily released. In the subsequent interrupt processing, the number of acquisitions before displaying "CE" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, and an error cancellation command is sent to the sub control board 80. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the selector retention notification was canceled, a selector retention error is detected. In the main processing executed after that, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state. In the subsequent interrupt processing, selector retention notification is executed and a selector retention command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

Therefore, a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required after the selector retention notification is once canceled until the selector retention notification is executed again.
In addition, in FIG. 117, after canceling the selector retention notification at the timing "X23" and before re-executing the selector retention notification at the timing "X24", the sub-control board 80 displays the image. The screen (for example, a game screen or a game standby screen) before displaying the characters "SELECTOR ERROR" is displayed on the device 23 without displaying the characters "SELECTOR ERROR".

Therefore, in FIG. 117, the selector retention notification is canceled after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X23" until the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24". can be recognized by human vision and hearing.
Note that instead of setting the condition that a predetermined period of time has elapsed between once the selector retention notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed again, for example, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned on. The condition may be that it is turned off from on.
In this case as well, in FIG. 117, the selector retention notification is canceled after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X23" until the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24". This makes it possible for humans to recognize things visually and audibly.

In addition, in the case where the selector retention notification is once canceled in the interrupt processing in (5) 1 above, and the selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled and then the selector retention notification is The following example may be considered as a pattern in which a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required to elapse before the notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time.

First, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the input port 51 reading processing (step S457), the main control board 50 reads input signals from various switches and various sensors. Then, based on the read input signal, various data such as level data, rising data, and falling data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and temporarily releases the selector retention error state.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after canceling the selector retention error state in the error processing during the main processing, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays "CE" on the acquired number display LED 78. ” Displays the number of acquisitions before displaying.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command sending process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 sends an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.

In the subsequent interrupt process (FIG. 47), when it is determined in the input error check process (step S463) that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error. It is determined that this has occurred, and an error flag indicating a selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, when the timer set processing (not shown) is performed, the main control board 50 causes the selector retention error state to be changed to the selector retention error state. Set a timer to measure elapsed time.
In the subsequent interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the elapsed time check processing (not shown), the main control board 50 determines whether a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the selector retention error state. to judge.

When it is determined that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the selector retention error state was entered, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 issues a code "CE" indicating a selector retention error as a selector retention notification. is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80.

In this case, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing "X23" in FIG. 117, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.

Further, in the first interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled, and in the main processing executed thereafter, the selector retention error state is temporarily canceled. In the subsequent interrupt processing, the number of acquisitions before displaying "CE" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, and an error cancellation command is sent to the sub control board 80. If a selector retention error is detected in the subsequent interrupt processing, then in the main processing executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state, and in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention error is detected. Set a timer to measure the elapsed time since the error condition occurred. Then, in the interrupt process executed thereafter, when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the selector retention error state was entered, a selector retention notification is executed and a selector retention command is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

Therefore, a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required after the selector retention notification is once canceled until the selector retention notification is executed again.
In addition, in FIG. 117, the sub-control board 80 controls the image display device 23 after once canceling the selector retention notification at the timing “X23” and before re-executing the selector retention notification at the timing “X24”. , instead of displaying the words "SELECTOR ERROR", the screen (for example, the game screen or the game standby screen) before the words "SELECTOR ERROR" is displayed is displayed.

Furthermore, in FIG. 117, after once canceling the selector retention notification at the timing "X23" and before re-executing the selector retention notification at the timing "X24", the sub control board 80 transmits the " To output the voice before outputting the voice "Please call the staff member" instead of outputting the voice "Please call the staff member."
Therefore, in FIG. 117, after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X23" and until the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24", it is determined that the selector retention notification has been canceled. It can be recognized by human vision and hearing.

Finally, when the selector retention notification is once canceled in the interrupt processing in (6) 1 above, and the selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled and then the selector retention notification is A pattern will be described in which a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required to elapse before the stay notification is executed again, and the door open notification is executed during that time.

In this case, as in pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading processing (step S457), the main control board 50 receives input signals from various switches and various sensors. Load. Then, based on the read input signal, various data such as level data, rising data, and falling data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above and determines whether the door switch 17 is on, it is determined that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected, and an error flag indicating door opening is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the timer set processing (not shown) is performed, the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12, stores an error flag indicating that the door is opened, and then Set a timer to measure elapsed time.

Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the door to an open state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the door is set to the open state in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 indicates that the door is open as a door open notification. The code "dE" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command sending process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 sends a door open command to the sub control board 80.

In the subsequent interrupt process (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the elapsed time check process (not shown), the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12, stores an error flag indicating that the door is open, and then It is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds to 5 seconds) has elapsed.
Then, when it is determined that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the opening of the front door 12 was detected and the error flag indicating door opening was stored, the input error check process (step S463) checks the loading sensor 44a and the loading sensor. 44b remains on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector retention error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, when proceeding to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. A code "CE" indicating the number of acquisitions is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80.

In this case, at the timing "X23" in FIG. 117, the selector retention notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Then, at the timing "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed again.
Further, in the first interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled, door opening is detected, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time after the door opening is detected. In the main process executed after that, an error process is executed to stop the progress of the game with the door open. In the subsequent interrupt process, a door open notification is executed and a door open command is sent to the sub control board 80. Furthermore, in the interrupt processing executed thereafter, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the door opening was detected, the door opening notification is canceled and a selector retention error is detected. Furthermore, in the main processing executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state. In the subsequent interrupt processing, selector retention notification is executed and a selector retention command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

Therefore, a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required after the selector retention notification is once canceled until the selector retention notification is executed again.
In addition, in FIG. 117, after canceling the selector retention notification at the timing "X23" and before re-executing the selector retention notification at the timing "X24", the sub-control board 80 displays the image. The words "door open" are displayed on the device 23 without displaying the words "selector error".

Therefore, in FIG. 117, the selector retention notification is canceled after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X23" until the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24". , and that the door open notification has been executed can be visually and auditorily recognized by humans.
Note that instead of setting the condition that a predetermined period of time has elapsed between once the selector retention notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed again, for example, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned on. The condition may be that it is turned off from on.
In this case as well, in FIG. 117, the selector retention notification is canceled after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X23" until the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X24". It is possible to visually and audibly recognize the fact that the door has been opened and that the door open notification has been executed.

In addition, the system measures the elapsed time after detecting the opening of the front door 12 and storing an error flag indicating the opening of the door, and does not issue a door opening notification until a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed. During this time, even if the reset switch 153 or the release switch is operated, the door open notification can be prevented from being released. Thereby, it is possible to reliably notify that the front door 12 has been opened.

The same applies when an error such as a selector retention error is detected. In other words, the elapsed time after detecting an error such as a selector retention error and storing an error flag indicating the error is measured, and the selector retention notification is not issued until a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed. During this time, even if the reset switch 153 or the release switch is operated, the error notification such as the selector retention notification can be prevented from being canceled. Thereby, it is possible to reliably notify that an error such as a selector retention error has been detected.

Here, in FIG. 117, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) without removing the cause of the error was explained using the selector retention error as an example. In the case of a hopper jam error, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) without removing the cause of the error, the same operation as in the case of a selector retention error occurs.

For example, when the dispensing sensor 37a and the dispensing sensor 37b are not turned on/off even though the hopper motor 36 is driven at the timing "X21" in FIG. is determined to have been detected.
When the main control board 50 detects the hopper empty error, it displays "HE" indicating the hopper empty error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a hopper empty notification, and sends an empty command indicating the hopper empty error to the sub control board 80. Send to.

Further, upon receiving the empty command, the sub control board 80 outputs a voice saying "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as a hopper empty notification, and displays the words "Hopper empty" on the image display device 23. .
Thereafter, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at timing "X22" in FIG. 117, the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door.

However, while the hopper empty notification is being executed, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification and continues the hopper empty notification even if it detects the door opening.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door, it transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80.
However, while the hopper empty notification is being executed, the sub control board 80 does not execute the door open notification and continues the hopper empty notification even if it receives a door open command.

Thereafter, at timing "X23" in FIG. 117, the reset switch 153 is operated ( When the hopper empty notification is turned on), the main control board 50 cancels the hopper empty notification.
Further, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the error cancellation command, the sub control board 80 cancels the hopper empty notification that was being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

However, although the hopper empty notification is once canceled at the timing "X23" in FIG. 117, the hopper empty notification is executed again at the timing "X24".
Specifically, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X23" in FIG. 117 in a situation where the cause of the hopper empty error has not been removed, the main control board 50 The notification is canceled, and control is then performed to execute the door open notification. Thereafter, at timing "X24" in FIG. 117, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the hopper empty notification again.

That is, the main control board 50 switches the display of the obtained number display LED 78 from "HE" indicating the hopper empty error to "dE" indicating the opening of the front door 12 at the timing "X23" in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of "X24", the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is controlled to be switched from "dE" to "HE". Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits an empty command to the sub control board 80 at timing "X24" in FIG.

Further, when receiving the error cancellation command at timing "X23" in FIG. 117, the sub-control board 80 cancels the hopper empty notification and controls to execute the door open notification this time. Thereafter, when receiving the empty command at timing "X24" in FIG. 117, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the hopper empty notification again.

That is, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the attendant" to "The door is open" at the timing "X23" in FIG. 117, and also switches the audio output from the image display device 23 control to switch the display from "hopper empty" to "door open". Thereafter, at the timing of "X24", the audio output from the speaker 22 is switched from "The door is open" to "Please call the attendant", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "Door open" to " Hopper empty”.

For example, when the input sensor 44b is turned on from off at timing "X21" in FIG. 117, and then the input sensor 44a is turned on from off, the main control board 50 will issue is determined to have been detected.
When the main control board 50 detects a selector passing error, it displays "CP" indicating the selector passing error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector passing error notification, and sends a selector passing error command indicating the selector passing error to the sub-control. It is transmitted to the board 80.

Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector passage error command, it outputs a voice saying "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as a selector passage error notification, and displays the text "Selector error" on the image display device 23. Display.
Thereafter, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at timing "X22" in FIG. 117, the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door.
However, while the selector passage error notification is being executed, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification even if it detects the door opening, and continues to notify the selector passage error.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door, it transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80.
However, while the selector passage error notification is being executed, the sub control board 80 does not execute the door open notification even if it receives a door open command, and continues to notify the selector passage error.

After that, at the timing "X23" in FIG. 117, a situation in which the cause of the selector passage error is not removed (the input sensor 44b is turned on from off, and then the input sensor 44a is turned on from off, When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification.

Further, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the error cancellation command, the sub control board 80 cancels the selector passage error notification that was being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.
Here, although the selector passage error notification is canceled, since the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and "X24 ”, the selector retention notification is executed.

Specifically, in FIG. 117, at the timing "X23", the cause of the selector passing error is not removed (the input sensor 44b is turned on from off, and then the input sensor 44a is turned on from off). When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification and issues the door open notification. control to execute.
Since the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b continue to be on after that, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and at the timing "X24" in FIG. The door open notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is controlled to be executed.

That is, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 from "CP" indicating a selector passing error to "dE" indicating opening of the front door 12 at the timing "X23" in FIG. to control.
Thereafter, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquired number display LED 78 from "dE" indicating the opening of the front door 12 to "CE" indicating the selector retention error at the timing "X24" in FIG. to control.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80 at timing "X24" in FIG.

Further, when receiving the error cancellation command at the timing "X23" in FIG. 117, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector passing error notification and controls to execute the door open notification this time.
Thereafter, when the selector retention command is received at the timing "X24" in FIG. 117, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and controls to execute the selector retention notification this time.

That is, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the attendant" to "The door is open" at the timing "X23" in FIG. 117, and also switches the audio output from the image display device 23 control to switch the display from "Selector Error" to "Door Open".
Thereafter, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "The door is open" to "Please call the attendant" at the timing "X24" in FIG. control to switch the display from "door open" to "selector error".

In this way, when a selector passage error is detected, a selector passage error notification is executed, and if the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the cause of the selector passage error has not been removed, the selector passage error is canceled, This time, there is a case where a selector retention error is detected and a selector retention notification is executed.
Further, as described above, when a selector retention error is detected, a selector retention notification is executed, and then, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is issued once. After the release, the selector retention notification may be executed again.
That is, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the same error notification may be issued before and after the reset switch 153 is operated, and different error notifications may be issued before and after the reset switch 153 is operated. and when it is executed.

In addition, although the selector passing error notification is canceled at the timing "X23" in FIG. 117, there is a case where the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, there is a case where selector retention notification is executed at timing "X24" without executing door open notification.
For example, when reading input port 51 (step S457 in FIG. 47), input error check (step S463 in FIG. 47), and error processing (not shown) are executed in the same interrupt process (FIG. 47), , door open notification is not executed.

Specifically, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the input port 51 reading processing (step S457) is advanced, the main control board 50 controls various switches (such as the reset switch 153) and various sensors (the input sensor 44a and the input port 51). (sensor 44b, etc.) is read. Based on the read input signal, various data such as level data, rising data, and falling data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification.

After that, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above, and the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on. When it is determined that this is the case, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected, and an error flag indicating the selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
Thereafter, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to error processing (not shown), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and executes selector retention notification.
Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the control command transmission processing (step S464) is advanced, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80.

In this case, the selector passing error notification is canceled at the timing "X23" in FIG. 117, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, at the timing of "X24", the selector retention notification is executed this time without executing the door open notification.
Furthermore, canceling the selector passage error notification and selecting selector retention notification are executed in the same interrupt process. Therefore, the time required from canceling the selector passing error notification to executing the selector retention notification is less than the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms).

In addition, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), reading of the input port 51 (step S457 in FIG. 47) and input error check (step S463 in FIG. 47) are executed, and then in the main processing (FIG. 46) to be executed, Door open notification is not performed even when error processing (not shown) is performed.

Specifically, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads input signals from various switches and various sensors. Then, based on the read input signal, various data such as level data, rising data, and falling data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification.

After that, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above, and the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on. When it is determined that this is the case, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected, and an error flag indicating the selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, when proceeding to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. A code "CE" indicating the number of acquisitions is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80.

In this case as well, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing "X23" in FIG. 117, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, at the timing of "X24", the selector retention notification is executed this time without executing the door open notification.
In addition, in the first interrupt process, the selector passing error notification is canceled, and in the main process executed after that, the progress of the game is stopped as a selector retention error state, and in the subsequent interrupt process, the selector passage error notification is canceled. Execute. Therefore, the time required from canceling selector passing error notification to executing selector retention notification is approximately 1 interrupt time (2.235 ms) to 2 interrupt time (2.235 ms x 2 = 4.47 ms). .

In addition, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 117, the selector passing error notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed, but the execution of the door open notification cannot be recognized by human vision or hearing, or it can be recognized. However, there are cases where it is instantaneous. Then, at timing "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed this time.
In some cases, a plurality of interrupt processes are required from reading the input port 51 and checking input errors in the interrupt process to executing error processing in the main process. In such a case, the door open notification is executed, but the execution of the door open notification cannot be recognized visually or audibly by humans, or even if it is recognized, it is only for a moment.

Specifically, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads input signals from various switches and various sensors. Then, based on the read input signal, various data such as level data, rising data, and falling data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification.

After that, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above, and when it is determined that the door switch 17 is on. determines that opening of the front door 12 is detected, and stores an error flag indicating door opening in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the door to an open state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the door is set to the open state in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 indicates that the door is open as a door open notification. The code "dE" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command sending process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 sends a door open command to the sub control board 80.

After that, in the next interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above, and turns on the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b. If it is determined that the condition remains unchanged, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected. Then, the door open notification is canceled and an error flag indicating a selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Thereafter, the main control board 50 performs the main processing (FIG. 46) at a timing before the processing for determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or the processing for determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S278). Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, when proceeding to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. A code "CE" indicating the number of acquisitions is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80.

In this case, at the timing "X23" in FIG. 117, the selector passing error notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Then, at the timing "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed this time.
In addition, in the "Z"-th ("Z" is an integer) interrupt processing, the selector passing error notification is canceled and the door opening is detected, and in the main processing that is executed thereafter, the game is stopped as the door is open. Error handling is performed that halts progress. Thereafter, in the "Z+1"-th interrupt process, a door open notification is executed, and in the "Z+2"-th interrupt process, the door open notification is canceled and a selector retention error is detected. Furthermore, in the main processing executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state. Thereafter, in the "Z+3"-th interrupt process, selector retention notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from canceling the selector passing error notification to executing the selector retention notification is the time for 3 interrupts (2.235 ms x 3 = 6.705 ms) to the time for 4 interrupts (2.235 ms x 4 = 8 .94ms). During that time, door open notification is executed.
Therefore, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 117, the selector passage error notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed, but the execution of the door open notification may not be recognized by human vision or hearing, or it may be recognized. However, it is only a moment. Then, at the timing "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed this time.

Further, the sub control board 80 stores an error history in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 83, and is capable of displaying the stored error history when there is a request to display the error history.
In the ninth embodiment, the error history can be displayed in the setting confirmation state.
Specifically, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is on, the player is waiting for a game (before the game starts), and the number of bets is "0", the setting confirmation state is entered.

Further, when the setting confirmation state is entered, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73, and a menu screen for the administrator is displayed on the image display device 23.
Furthermore, the menu screen for the administrator is provided with an "error history" item.
Then, while the administrator's menu screen is displayed, operate the cross key (Fig. 106) to select the "Error History" item, and in this state operate (turn on) the push button 86 to display the image display device. 23, an error history screen is displayed.

In addition, the error history screen displays an error code indicating the type of error (for example, "CE", "CP", "dE", etc.) and the error notification time (for example, "September 17, 2021 15:35:25"). "Second" etc.) are displayed.
Here, for example, in FIG. 117, selector retention notification is executed at timing "X21", selector retention notification is once released at timing "X23", door open notification is executed, and at timing "X24". Assume that the door open notification is canceled at the same timing and the selector retention notification is executed again.
In this case, for example,
"CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "dE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 "CE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 Ru.

For example, in FIG. 117, the selector retention notification is executed at the timing "X21", and the selector retention notification is once released at the timing "X23", but the door open notification is not executed, and after that, the door open notification is not executed. Assume that the selector retention notification is executed again at timing "X24" without the release notification being executed.
In this case, for example,
"CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 is displayed.

For example, in FIG. 117, at the timing "X21", the selector passing error notification is executed, and at the timing "X23", the selector passing error notification is once canceled, and the door open notification is executed, and at the timing "X24". It is assumed that the door open notification is canceled at the timing of , and the selector retention notification is executed this time.
In this case, for example,
"CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "dE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 "CP" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 Ru.

For example, in FIG. 117, the selector passing error notification is executed at the timing "X21", and the selector passing error notification is once canceled at the timing "X23", but the door open notification is not executed, and thereafter , it is assumed that the selector retention notification is executed at timing "X24" without the door open notification being executed.
In this case, for example,
"CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CP" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 is displayed.

The push button 86 is also referred to as a sub-button 86, a performance button 86, a performance switch 86, etc., and is operated when advancing (developing) a performance.
The cross key 87 is also referred to as a selection switch 87 or the like, and is operated when moving the cursor position on a menu screen or the like.
The push button 86 and cross key 87 are electrically connected to the sub-control means 80 via the input port 81.
Further, the error history of the sub-control board 80 is not erased by turning the power on/off or changing settings. Unless a serious error (unrecoverable error) occurs in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, the error history will not be erased.

In this way, when a predetermined error is detected, the predetermined error notification can be executed, and in a situation where the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, the predetermined error notification can be canceled by an operation, that is, a reset switch. When the operation 153 is performed, the predetermined error notification is once canceled and then the predetermined error notification can be executed again.
Thereby, it can be confirmed that the reset switch 153 functions normally, and it can be notified again that the cause of the error has not been removed.

FIG. 118 shows when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, when the reset switch 153 is operated after the cause of the selector retention error is removed, and when the release switch is pressed with the front door 12 open. It is a time chart showing the operation mode when operated.
In FIG. 118, at timing "X31", when the medal M is clogged in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error. I judge that.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error, it displays "CE" indicating a selector retention error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification, and transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80.
Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector retention command, it outputs the voice "Please call the staff member" from the speaker 22 as a selector retention notification, and displays the words "Selector retention error" on the image display device 23. indicate.

Thereafter, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at timing "X32" in FIG. 118, the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door.
However, while the selector retention notification is being executed, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector retention notification even if it detects the door opening.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door, it transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80.
However, while the selector retention notification is being executed, the sub control board 80 does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector retention notification even if it receives a door open command.

After that, at the timing "X33" in FIG. 118, the medal M is clogged in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, and the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, that is, the cause of the selector retention error is removed. When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the selector stay notification is not activated, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

Further, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it cancels the selector retention notification that was being executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.
However, although the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing "X33" in FIG. 118, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing "X34".

Specifically, at timing “X33” in FIG. 118, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 The notification is canceled, and control is then performed to execute the door open notification. Thereafter, at timing "X34" in FIG. 118, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the selector retention notification again.

That is, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquired number display LED 78 from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating the opening of the front door 12 at the timing "X33" in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of "X34", the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is controlled to be switched from "dE" to "CE". Further, the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80 at timing "X34" in FIG.

Further, when receiving the error cancellation command at timing "X33" in FIG. 118, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector retention notification and controls to execute the door open notification this time. Thereafter, when receiving the selector retention command at timing "X34" in FIG. 118, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the selector retention notification again.

That is, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the attendant" to "The door is open" at the timing "X33" in FIG. 118, and also switches the audio output from the image display device 23 control to switch the display from "selector retention error" to "door open". Thereafter, at the timing of "X34", the audio output from the speaker 22 is switched from "door is open" to "please call the attendant", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "door open" to " control to switch to "selector retention error".

After that, when the medal M stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is removed at the timing "X35" in FIG. will no longer be detected. However, simply removing the cause of the selector retention error (no longer detecting the selector retention error) does not cancel the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X36" in FIG. 118, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.
Further, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it cancels the selector retention notification that was being executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

However, at the timing "X36" in FIG. 118, even if the reset switch 153 is operated and the selector retention notification is canceled, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on. , the main control board 50 now executes door open notification. That is, the main control board 50 controls the acquisition number display LED 78 to switch the display from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating the opening of the front door 12.

Further, at timing "X36" in FIG. 118, the sub control board 80 cancels the selector retention notification and then executes the door open notification. That is, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the attendant" to "The door is open," and changes the display on the image display device 23 from "Selector retention error" to " control to switch to "door open".

Thereafter, at timing "X37" in FIG. 118, with the front door 12 remaining open, that is, with the door switch 17 remaining on, the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is turned. Even if the main control board 50 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 continues to execute the door open notification without canceling it.

Furthermore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (door switch 17 is on), the main control board 50 sends a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification. is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Therefore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (door switch 17 is turned on), the sub-control board 80 continues to issue the door open notification without canceling it. and execute it.

Here, in FIG. 118, using a selector retention error as an example, operations are explained when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, and when the reset switch 153 is operated after the cause of the error is removed. However, in the event of a selector passage error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, and when the reset switch 153 is operated after the cause of the error has been removed. operates in the same way as when a selector retention error occurs.

For example, when the dispensing sensor 37a remains off and the dispensing sensor 37b remains on at timing "X31" in FIG. 118, the main control board 50 determines that a hopper jam error has been detected. to decide.
When the main control board 50 detects a hopper jam error, it displays "HP" indicating the hopper jam error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a hopper jam notification, and sends a hopper jam command indicating the hopper jam error to the sub control board. Send to 80.
Further, when the sub control board 80 receives the hopper jam command, it outputs a voice saying "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as a hopper jam notification, and displays the words "Hopper jam error" on the image display device 23. indicate.

Thereafter, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at timing "X32" in FIG. 118, the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door.
However, while the hopper jam notification is being executed, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification even if it detects the door opening, and continues the hopper jam notification.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door, it transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80.
However, while the hopper jam notification is being executed, the sub control board 80 does not execute the door open notification and continues the hopper jam notification even if it receives a door open command.

Thereafter, at timing "X33" in FIG. 118, the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the medal M remains jammed in the hopper 35, that is, the cause of the hopper jam error has not been removed. ), the main control board 50 controls to cancel the hopper jam notification.
Further, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it controls the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. to cancel the hopper jam notification.

However, although the hopper jam notification is once canceled at the timing "X33" in FIG. 118, the hopper jam notification is executed again at the timing "X34".
Specifically, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing “X33” in FIG. 118 in a situation where the cause of the hopper jam error has not been removed, the main control board 50 The notification is canceled, and control is then performed to execute the door open notification. Thereafter, at timing "X34" in FIG. 118, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the hopper jam notification again.

That is, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquired number display LED 78 from "HP" indicating a hopper jam error to "dE" indicating the opening of the front door 12 at the timing "X33" in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of "X34", the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is controlled to be switched from "dE" to "HP". Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits a hopper jam command to the sub control board 80 at timing "X34" in FIG.

Further, when receiving the error cancellation command at timing "X33" in FIG. 118, the sub-control board 80 cancels the hopper jam notification and controls to execute the door open notification this time. Thereafter, when receiving the hopper jam command at timing "X34" in FIG. 118, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the hopper jam notification again.

That is, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the attendant" to "The door is open" at the timing "X33" in FIG. 118, and also switches the audio output from the image display device 23 control to switch the display from "Hopper Jam Error" to "Door Open". Thereafter, at the timing of "X34", the audio output from the speaker 22 is switched from "door is open" to "please call the attendant", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "door open" to " Hopper jam error".

After that, when the medal M stuck in the hopper 35 is removed at the timing "X35" in FIG. 118, that is, when the cause of the hopper jam error is removed, the main control board 50 no longer detects the hopper jam error. . However, simply removing the cause of the hopper jam error (no longer detecting the hopper jam error) will not cancel the hopper jam notification.

Thereafter, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X36" in FIG. 118, the main control board 50 controls to cancel the hopper jam notification.
Further, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it controls the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. to cancel the hopper jam notification.

However, at the timing "X36" in FIG. 118, even if the reset switch 153 is operated and the hopper jam notification is canceled, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on. , the main control board 50 then controls to execute door open notification. That is, the main control board 50 controls the acquisition number display LED 78 to switch the display from "HP" indicating a hopper jam error to "dE" indicating the opening of the front door 12.

Further, at timing "X36" in FIG. 118, the sub control board 80 cancels the hopper jam notification and then controls the door open notification to be executed. That is, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the attendant" to "The door is open," and changes the display on the image display device 23 from "Hopper jam error" to " control to switch to "door open".

Thereafter, at timing "X37" in FIG. 118, with the front door 12 remaining open, that is, with the door switch 17 remaining on, the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is turned. Even if the main control board 50 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 continues to execute the door open notification without canceling it.

Furthermore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (door switch 17 is on), the main control board 50 sends a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification. is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Therefore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (door switch 17 is turned on), the sub-control board 80 continues to issue the door open notification without canceling it. and execute it.

In this way, when a predetermined error is detected, the predetermined error notification can be executed, and in a situation where the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, the predetermined error notification can be canceled by an operation, that is, a reset switch. When the operation 153 is performed, the predetermined error notification is once canceled and then the predetermined error notification can be executed again.
Thereby, it can be confirmed that the reset switch 153 functions normally, and it can be notified again that the cause of the error has not been removed.

Furthermore, when the opening of the front door 12 (door open) is detected, the door open alarm can be executed, and when the front door 12 is open, the release switch for canceling the door open alarm is operated (turned on). ), the door open notification can be executed continuously without being canceled.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent fraud from being committed without any notification even though the front door 12 remains open.

Note that when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on and the door open notification is executed. For example, when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened, the door It may be configured to perform release notification.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and the door key is turned clockwise in this state to release the lock, the front door 12 becomes openable. The door switch 17 may be configured to detect that the front door 12 is unlocked and can be opened.

When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is unlocked and can be opened by turning on the door switch 17, the front door 12 is opened. Even if the door is closed, the door open notification may be executed.
In this case, after the front door 12 is closed and locked, when the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 is configured to release the door open notification. be able to.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the door switch 17 is turned on and the front door 12 is unlocked and the front door 12 can be opened, the main control board 50 controls the front door 12. Even if the front door 12 is closed, a door open command indicating opening of the front door 12 may be sent to the sub-control board 80.
The sub-control board 80 may be configured to issue a door open notification through the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc. even if the front door 12 is closed when receiving the door open command. .

That is, when it is detected that the front door 12 has been opened or can be opened, the door open notification is enabled, and the door open notification is executed when the front door 12 is opened or can be opened. Even if an operation for canceling (operation of a release switch) is performed, the door open notification may be configured to continue to be executed without canceling the notification.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent fraud from being committed without any notification even though the front door 12 is open or can be opened.

FIG. 119 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, and after the selector retention notification is canceled once, the selector retention notification can be executed again. This figure shows the relationship between the time "T1" and the time "T2" from when the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is detected by the input sensor 44a to when it is no longer detected by the input sensor 44b. .

In FIG. 119, selector retention detection is turned on/off, door open detection is turned on/off, selector retention notification is turned on/off, door open notification is turned on/off, reset switch 153 is turned on/off, and release switch is turned on/off. Regarding off, it is the same as in FIG. 117.
Also, the timings of "X41", "X42", "X43" and "X44" in FIG. 119 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", "X23" and "X24" in FIG. 117, respectively. .

In FIG. 119, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed at the timing “X43”, the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector retention notification. Thereafter, at the timing of "X44", the main control board 50 controls to execute the selector retention notification again.
The time from "X43" to "X44" is the time "T1" from once the selector retention notification is canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again.

Further, in FIG. 119, assuming that a medal M is inserted from the medal slot 47 at a timing immediately before "X43" and that the medal M is detected by the input sensor 44a at a timing "X43", then, At the timing "X45", the medal M is no longer detected by the input sensor 44b.
The time from "X43" to "X45" is the time "T2" from when the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is detected by the insert sensor 44a to when it is no longer detected by the insert sensor 44b. .

Furthermore, "when the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a" means that the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the blocker 45 This means the moment when the vehicle is allowed to pass through the vehicle, approaches the input sensor 44a, and the input sensor 44a is turned on from off.
Furthermore, "when the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 are no longer detected by the input sensor 44b" means that the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 pass through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the blocker 45, passes through the input sensor 44a, and also passes through the input sensor 44b, meaning the moment when the input sensor 44b changes from on to off.

Here, the medal M falls from the medal slot 47 at an initial velocity of "0", passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, and passes through the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b in this order. It shall be detected by these. It is also assumed that the blocker 45 allows the medal M to pass through.
That is, the medal M is released from the hand at the medal slot 47 without gaining momentum, passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, is allowed to pass through the blocker 45, and passes through the input sensor 44a and the input sensor. 44b in order, and at this time, they are detected by the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b, respectively.

The ninth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1<T2". In other words, the time "T1" from once the selector retention notification is canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again is from the time when the input sensor 44a detects the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 to the time when the input sensor 44a detects the medal 44b is configured so that the time until it is no longer detected is shorter than "T2".

For example, assume that the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) and a medal M is inserted from the medal slot 47 in order to check whether the selector retention error has been released. It is assumed that at the timing "X43" in FIG. 119, the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a at the same time as the selector retention notification is canceled. At this time, if the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification will be executed again at the timing "X44" in FIG. The inserted medal M is no longer detected by the input sensor 44b.

Therefore, the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 does not pass through the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b normally, and the medal M is swallowed. It is possible to prevent the process of adding "1" to the number of bets or the number of credits from being executed.
In addition, in FIG. 119, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error is explained using the selector retention error as an example. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the same operation as in the case of a selector retention error occurs.

FIG. 120 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, and after the selector retention notification is canceled once, the selector retention notification can be executed again. This shows the relationship between the time "T1" and the time "T3" from when digit 5 is turned on until when digit 1 is turned on.

Similarly to the third embodiment, the ninth embodiment also includes digits 1 to 5.
Digit 1 corresponds to the upper digit of the credit number (storage number) display LED 76, and digit 2 corresponds to the lower digit of the credit number display LED 76. Furthermore, digit 3 corresponds to the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78, and digit 4 corresponds to the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78. Furthermore, digit 5 corresponds to the setting value display LED 73.

Further, the address “F051(H)” shown in FIG. 33 of the third embodiment is a 1-byte storage area where the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is stored.
The LED display counter 1 is a counter for determining which digit among digits 1 to 5 is to be lit, and is continuously updated every interrupt.
Furthermore, each bit of the LED display counter 1 is assigned to the D0 bit as the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit as the digit 2 signal, the D2 bit as the digit 3 signal, the D3 bit as the digit 4 signal, and the D4 bit as the digit 5 signal. . In the first interrupt processing, dynamic lighting control of digits 1 to 5 is executed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" in the LED display counter 1 is lit.

The LED display counter 1 takes a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter 1 is updated so that bit "1" of the LED display counter 1 is shifted to the right by one digit for each interrupt. In addition, at the next interrupt when the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001 (B)", LED display counter 1 becomes "00000000 (B)" by shifting one digit to the right; Initialize the counter 1 and set the value of the LED display counter 1 to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter 1 completes one cycle with five interrupts.

From the above, the value of LED display counter 1 is
"N" interrupt number: 00010000 (B)
“N+1” interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
“N+3” interrupt: 00000010 (B)
“N+4” interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
“N+6” interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
becomes.

In the ninth embodiment, similarly to the third embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 1 to 5 are dynamically illuminated.
Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", a digit 5 signal is output. Then, by outputting the digit 5 signal, digit 5 (set value display LED 73) can be lit (digits 1 to 4 are turned off).
At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00001000 (B)", and at this time, the digit 4 signal is output, and digit 4 (lower digit of acquisition number display LED 78) can be lit (digit 1 to digit 3 and digit 5 are off).

At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00000100 (B)", and at this time, the digit 3 signal is output, and digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78) can be lit (digit 1, digit 2, digit 4 and digit 5 are off).
At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00000010 (B)", and at this time, the digit 2 signal is output, and digit 2 (lower digit of credit number display LED 76) can be lit (digit 1 and digit 3 to digit 5 are off).
At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001 (B)", and at this time, the digit 1 signal is output, and digit 1 (the upper digit of the credit number display LED 76) can be lit (digit 2 to digit 5 is off).

In FIG. 120, selector retention detection is turned on/off, door open detection is turned on/off, selector retention notification is turned on/off, door open notification is turned on/off, reset switch 153 is turned on/off, and release switch is turned on/off. Regarding off, it is the same as in FIG. 117.
Also, the timings of "X51", "X52", "X53" and "X54" in FIG. 120 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", "X23" and "X24" in FIG. 117, respectively. .

In FIG. 120, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed at the timing “X53”, the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector retention notification. , After that, at the timing "X54", the main control board 50 executes the selector retention notification again.
The time from "X53" to "X54" is the time "T1" from once the selector retention notification is canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again.

Furthermore, in FIG. 120, assuming that digit 5 (set value display LED 73) lights up at the timing of "X53", then digit 1 (the upper digit of the credit number display LED 76) lights up at the timing of "X55". .
The time from "X53" to "X55" is the time "T3" from lighting up digit 5 (set value display LED 73) to lighting up digit 1 (upper digit of credit number display LED 76).

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, dynamic lighting control is performed in which digits 5 to 1 are sequentially lit for each interrupt. Further, it takes 4 interrupts from lighting up digit 5 to lighting up digit 1. Therefore, the time "T3" is the time for 4 interrupts (2.235 ms×4=8.94 ms).
The ninth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1<T3". In other words, the time "T1" from once the selector retention notification is canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again is the time "T1" from when digit 5 (set value display LED 73) is turned on to when digit 1 (upper part of the credit number display LED 76) is turned on. The time required for lighting up the digit) is configured to be shorter than "T3".

Here, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X53" in FIG. 120 in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 issues a selector retention notification. Once released, control is performed to execute door open notification. At this time, the main control board 50 controls the acquisition number display LED 78 to switch the display from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating opening of the front door 12 (door open). Thereafter, at the timing "X54", the main control board 50 controls to execute the selector retention notification again. At this time, the main control board 50 controls the acquisition number display LED 78 to switch the display from "dE" to "CE". Then, assuming that digit 5 (set value display LED 73) lights up at timing "X53", digit 1 (upper digit of credit number display LED 76) lights up at timing "X55". That is, from "X53" to "X55", digits 5 to 1 light up once each.

Therefore, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is switched from "CE" to "dE" at the timing of "X53", and then the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is switched from "dE" to "CE" at the timing of "X54". However, from "X53" to "X54", "dE" lights up only once in the acquisition number display LED 78, or "dE" does not light up even once. Therefore, it is difficult for the human eye to confirm that "dE" is lit on the acquisition number display LED 78, so it is possible to prevent the user from mistakenly believing that the cause of the selector retention error has been removed.
In addition, in FIG. 120, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error has been explained using the selector retention error as an example. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the same operation as in the case of a selector retention error occurs.

FIG. 121 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, and after the selector retention notification is canceled once, the selector retention notification can be executed again. The relationship between the time "T1" and the design value "T4" of the period from the time when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs until the time when the event where the power supply is cut off is detected. This shows that.

In FIG. 121, selector retention detection is turned on/off, door open detection is turned on/off, selector retention notification is turned on/off, door open notification is turned on/off, reset switch 153 is turned on/off, and release switch is turned on/off. Regarding off, it is the same as in FIG. 117.
Also, the timings of "X61", "X62", "X63" and "X64" in FIG. 121 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", "X23" and "X24" in FIG. 117, respectively. .

In FIG. 121, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed at the timing "X63", the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector retention notification. Thereafter, at the timing of "X64", the main control board 50 controls to execute the selector retention notification again.
The time from "X63" to "X64" is the time "T1" from once the selector retention notification is canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again.

Furthermore, in FIG. 121, if it is assumed that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs at the timing "X63", then an event in which the power supply is cut off at the timing "X65" occurs. It is detected, and power-off processing is executed at the timing of "X66".
The time from "X63" to "X65" is the design value of the period from the time when an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs until the time when the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected. It is "T4".
Further, the time from "X65" to "X66" is the time "T5" from when an event in which the power supply is cut off (power cutoff) is detected until the power cutoff process is executed.

In addition, in FIG. 121, when an event (power cutoff) that cuts off the power supply to the slot machine 10 occurs (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off, when the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, the breaker is turned off). Indicates the voltage level at the time of a power failure, power outage, etc.).
In FIG. 121, the voltage level when the power is on is set to "V0". Furthermore, the voltage level (power-off detection level) at which it is possible to detect the occurrence of an event in which the power supply is cut off is defined as "V1." When the power supply voltage is at the voltage level "V0", the slot machine 10 operates normally. Further, when the power supply voltage drops to the voltage level "V1", it becomes possible to detect that an event in which the power supply is cut off has occurred.

FIG. 121 shows an example in which an event in which the power supply is cut off (power cutoff) occurs at timing "X63". When the power is cut off at the timing "X63", the power supply voltage drops to the voltage level "V1" at the timing "X65". Further, the time from "X63" to "X65" is "T4". That is, when a power-off occurs, the power supply voltage decreases to voltage level "V1" at time "T4".

In addition, the period from the time when an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs until the time when the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected is the time of 20 interrupts (2.235ms x 20 = 44 .7ms) or more.
Note that the period from the time when an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs until the time when the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected is not limited to the 20th interrupt time, but is determined by the voltage monitoring device ( It can be set as appropriate depending on the performance of the main CPU 55 (power-off detection circuit) and the main CPU 55.

A voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) is provided on the main control board 50. When the power supply voltage falls below the power-off detection level "V1", a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51, and the power-off is detected by detecting whether or not the signal is input. Detect.

Further, when the power supply voltage further decreases from the power-off detection level "V1" and becomes less than the driving limit voltage level of the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 cannot be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
The main control board 50 cannot execute the power-off process if the power supply voltage becomes less than the drive limit voltage level, so if the power-off occurs at the timing of "X63", the power supply will be stopped by the timing of "X66". The settings are set so that the disconnection process can be terminated.

Detection of power outage is executed within the interrupt processing that is executed every 2.235 ms, but when it is detected that the power supply voltage is below the power outage detection level "V1" for 2 consecutive interrupts, the next interrupt processing is executed. Executes power-off processing. Therefore, in FIG. 121, the timing "X65" is the timing at which it is detected twice in a row that the power supply voltage is lower than the power-off detection level "V1" by the interrupt process. Then, the main control board 50 executes the power-off process in the next interrupt process (timing "X66" in FIG. 121).

The main control board 50 backs up data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 during power-off processing. Thereafter, when the power supply is resumed (power is turned on, power is turned on, power is restored from power off), the main control means 50 executes the power restoration process and transfers the backed up data to the RWM 53. Return to the specified storage area. Thereby, when the device returns from a power-off, it is possible to return to the state at the time the power-off was detected.

Furthermore, in FIG. 121, the timing when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed (the timing of "X63"), and the timing when the selector retention error is canceled and then the selector is reset again. The timing for executing the stay notification (timing of "X64") is illustrated.
Furthermore, FIG. 121 shows the timing at which an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs and the timing at which the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed. It is matched.

The ninth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1<T4". In other words, the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is once released until the selector retention notification can be executed again is the period from when the power supply is cut off (power cutoff). It is configured so that it is shorter than the design value "T4" of the period until the event of interruption is detected.

In FIG. 121, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed at the timing “X63”, the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector retention notification. control to execute door open notification. Further, it is assumed that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power cutoff) occurs approximately at the same time as the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on). In this case, the selector retention notification is controlled to be executed again at the timing "X64" in FIG. Power-off processing is executed at the timing of "X66".

Therefore, in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, if an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs almost simultaneously with the operation (on) of the reset switch 153, the power outage is detected. Then, before executing the power-off process, the selector retention notification is controlled to be executed again. Therefore, during power-off processing, it is possible to back up data indicating that selector retention notification is being executed, so that selector retention notification can be executed when power supply is resumed (recovered from power-off). be able to.
In addition, in FIG. 121, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error is explained using the selector retention error as an example. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the same operation as in the case of a selector retention error occurs.

FIG. 124 is a time chart showing an operation mode when the power supply is cut off during door open notification, then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off, and then the power supply is restarted. It is.
In FIG. 124, when the power supply is cut off means, for example, when the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, when a breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, etc.

When the front door 12 is opened at timing "X91" in FIG. 124, the main control board 50 determines that the door opening has been detected.
Specifically, when the front door 12 is opened at timing "X91" in FIG. 124, the door switch 17 is turned on, and the main control board 50 determines that the door opening has been detected. Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door, it issues a door opening notification. Specifically, as door opening notification, "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is opened is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the door is opened, it transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80. Then, upon receiving the door open command, the sub control board 80 executes door open notification. Specifically, as the door open notification, the speaker 22 outputs a voice saying "the door is open", and the image display device 23 displays the words "door open".

Thereafter, when the power supply is cut off at the timing "X92" in FIG. Since the door will no longer operate, the door open notification will also stop. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute a power-off process. As a result, data in predetermined storage areas in the main control board 50 and sub-control board 80 is backed up.
Thereafter, at timing "X93" in FIG. 124, the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off.

Thereafter, when the power supply is restarted at timing "X94" in FIG. 124, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 each execute a power-off recovery process. As a result, the data backed up during the power-off process is restored to the predetermined storage areas in the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80. As a result, the state returns to the state at the time of power-off detection. At this time, although the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute door open notification.

After that, at timing "X95" in FIG. 124, when the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction to the direction when unlocking the front door 12) and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control The board 50 cancels the door open notification. Thereby, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before displaying "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78, and transmits a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the notification cancellation command, the sub control board 80 cancels the door open notification that is being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on and the door open notification is executed. For example, when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened, It may be configured to perform release notification.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and the door key is turned clockwise in this state to release the lock, the front door 12 becomes openable. The door switch 17 may be configured to detect that the front door 12 is unlocked and can be opened. Then, when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened, the door open notification may be executed even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened while power is being supplied, door open notification can be executed. In addition, if the power supply is cut off while the door open notification is being executed, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off, when the power supply is resumed, the door open notification will be sent. be executable.

Here, the front door 12 is opened by a fraudulent act, and then the power supply is cut off by a fraudulent act while the door open notification is being executed, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off. This may be an attempt to hide fraudulent activity. Even in such a case, with the above configuration, when the power supply is resumed, the door open notification can be executed even if the front door 12 is closed, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be prevented. can do.

FIG. 125 shows a state in which the power supply is cut off during door open notification, then the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off, and then the door key is turned to the left (the release switch is operated). ) is a time chart showing an operation mode when power supply is restarted.
In FIG. 125, as in FIG. 124, the time when the power supply is cut off means, for example, when the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, when a breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, etc.

When the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at timing "X101" in FIG. 125, the main control board 50 determines that the door opening has been detected. Then, as a door opening notification, "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is opened is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened, it transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it outputs the sound "The door is open" from the speaker 22 as a door open notification, and displays the words "Door open" on the image display device 23. do.

Thereafter, when the power supply is cut off at timing "X102" in FIG. 125, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 cease to operate, and the door open notification also stops. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 each execute a power-off process and back up data in a predetermined storage area.
Thereafter, at timing "X103" in FIG. 125, the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off.

Thereafter, at timing "X104" in FIG. 125, the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked). This state continues until the timing "X105" in FIG. 125.
Thereafter, at timing "X105" in FIG. 125, the power supply is resumed with the door key being turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked). At this time, the door key is turned counterclockwise, so when the power supply is resumed, the release switch is turned on. Therefore, the main control board 50 does not issue door open notification. Further, the main control board 50 transmits a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification to the sub control board 80. Then, the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancellation command and does not execute the door open notification.

In addition, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on, and instead of executing a door open notification, for example, when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened. , the door open notification may be executed.
That is, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and the door key is turned clockwise in this state to release the lock, the front door 12 becomes openable. The door switch 17 may be configured to detect this. Then, when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened, the door open notification may be executed even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened while power is being supplied, door open notification can be executed. In addition, if the power supply is cut off while the door open notification is being executed, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off, the door key may be turned counterclockwise (released). When the power supply is resumed (with the switch being operated), it is possible to prevent the door open notification from being executed.

Note that while the door open notification is being executed, if the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and in this state the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked), the door open notification will be released. Although the configuration is such that the switch is turned on and the door open notification is canceled, the configuration may be made as shown below, for example.

While the door open notification is being executed, close the front door 12 and turn off the door switch 17. In this state, turn the door key counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked) to turn off the release switch. The door open notification may be configured to be canceled when the door key is turned on from then on, and then the door key is returned to its original position and the release switch is turned from on to off.
In this case, the operation for canceling the door open notification is to turn the door key in the opposite direction to that for unlocking the front door 12 and then return the door key to its original position.

In Figure 126, turn the door key counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked) to turn the release switch from off to on, then return the door key to its original position and turn the release switch from on to on. It is a time chart which shows the operation mode in the case where it is configured so that the door open notification is canceled when it is turned off.

Similarly to FIG. 125, in FIG. 126, the power supply is cut off during door open notification, and then the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off, and then the door key is turned to the left. (with the release switch operated), power supply is resumed.
Also, in FIG. 126, as in FIGS. 124 and 125, when the power supply is cut off means, for example, when the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, when a breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, etc. means.

When the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at timing "X111" in FIG. 126, the main control board 50 determines that the opening of the front door 12 (door opening) has been detected. Then, as a door opening notification, "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is opened is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened, it transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it outputs a sound saying "The door is open" from the speaker 22 as a door open notification, and displays the words "Door open" on the image display device 23. do.

Thereafter, when the power supply is cut off at timing "X112" in FIG. 126, both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 stop operating, so the door open notification also stops. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 each execute a power-off process and back up data in a predetermined storage area.

Thereafter, at timing "X113" in FIG. 126, the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off.
Thereafter, at timing "X114" in FIG. 126, the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked). This state continues until the timing "X116" in FIG. 126.

Thereafter, at timing "X115" in FIG. 126, the power supply is restarted with the door key being turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked). At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute a power-off recovery process. As a result, the data backed up during the power-off process is restored to the predetermined storage areas in the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80. As a result, the state returns to the state at the time of power-off detection. At this time, although the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute door open notification.

Also, since the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked), the release switch will be turned on when the power supply is resumed; Since this alone does not cancel the door open notification, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 each continue without canceling the door open notification.

Thereafter, at timing "X116" in FIG. 126, when the door key is returned to its original position and the release switch is turned from on to off, the main control board 50 releases the door open notification. Thereby, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before displaying "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78, and transmits a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the notification cancellation command, the sub control board 80 cancels the door open notification that is being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

Moreover, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on and the door switch 17 is not configured to issue a door open notification, but for example, when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to open. , the door open notification may be executed.
That is, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and the door key is turned clockwise in this state to release the lock, the front door 12 becomes openable. It may be configured such that the door switch 17 detects this. When it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened, the door open notification may be executed even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened while power is being supplied, door open notification can be executed. In addition, if the power supply is cut off while the door open notification is being executed, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off, the door key is rotated counterclockwise (the front door 12 is locked). When the supply of power is resumed while the door is turned in the opposite direction to that when the door is released, the door open notification can be executed. Thereafter, when the door key is returned to its original position and the release switch is turned from on to off, the door open notification is released.

As a result, it is possible to open the front door 12 due to a fraudulent act, then cut off the power supply due to a fraudulent act while the door open notification is being executed, and then close the front door 12 while the power supply is cut off. Even if the front door is closed, even if the front door is closed, even if the front door is closed, the door open notification can be executed when the power supply is resumed, even if an attempt is made to hide the fraudulent activity. This prevents the fraudulent activity described above. can.

Although the ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) In the ninth embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off, and when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on. Not limited to.
For example, when the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned on, and when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned off. The opening may be detected.

(2) In the ninth embodiment, when the opening of the front door 12 is detected by turning on the door switch 17, a notification indicating the opening of the front door 12 (door open notification) is executed. Not exclusively.
For example, if a door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and the door key is turned clockwise in this state, the lock will be released. You can also do this.

When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is unlocked by turning on the door switch 17, it issues a door open notification even if the front door 12 is closed. You can.
Further, the main control board 50 can display, for example, "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a door open notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is unlocked by turning on the door switch 17, the main control board 50 opens the front door 12 even if the front door 12 is closed. A command indicating this (door open command) may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, the sub control board 80 may issue the door open notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. even if the front door 12 is closed.
Further, the sub-control board 80 can output a sound saying "The door is open" from the speaker 22 or display the words "Door open" on the image display device 23 as a door open notification, for example. .

(3) In the ninth embodiment, when the opening of the front door 12 is detected by turning on the door switch 17, both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 indicate that the front door 12 is open. Although the notification (door open notification) was executed, the notification is not limited to this.
When the door switch 17 is turned on and the opening of the front door 12 is detected, the main control board 50 executes door open notification, but the sub control board 80 does not need to execute door open notification. good.

Furthermore, when the door switch 17 is turned on and the opening of the front door 12 is detected, the main control board 50 does not issue a door open notification, and only the sub control board 80 issues the door open notification. You can.
In this case, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened by turning on the door switch 17, the main control board 50 does not issue a door open notification, but the main control board 50 does not issue a command indicating the opening of the front door 12 (door open command ) may be sent to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it can issue a door open notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

(4) In the ninth embodiment, the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the main control board 50, but the door switch 17 is not limited to this, and may be electrically connected to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 detects that the front door 12 is opened by turning on the door switch 17, it can issue a door-opening notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 10, commands are sent in one direction from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Therefore, when the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 and the opening of the front door 12 is detected by the sub-control board 80, the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12. It cannot be detected, nor can it receive a door open command from the sub-control board 80. Therefore, even if the front door 12 is opened, the main control board 50 does not issue a door open notification and does not stop the progress of the game due to the door being in the open state. That is, even when the front door 12 is open, the main control board 50 can allow the game to proceed.

(5) In the ninth embodiment, while the door open notification is being executed, the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off, and in this state, the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked). ) and turn the release switch from off to on, the door open notification is released, but the invention is not limited thereto.
For example, while the door open notification is being executed, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and in this state, the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked) and the release switch is turned off. The door open notification may be canceled by turning the door key from off to on, then returning the door key to its original position, and turning the release switch from on to off.

In this case, simply turning the door key counterclockwise (in the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked) and turning the release switch from off to on will not release the door open notification and will continue.
Then, turning the door key in the opposite direction to unlocking the front door 12 and then returning the door key to its original position is an operation for canceling the door open notification.

(6) In the ninth embodiment, by arranging the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, the return receiving opening 131 is not arranged. configured, but is not limited to this.
For example, as shown in FIG. 113, by arranging the return receiving port 131 and the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 on the left side of the vertically downward side of the gap 112, the return receiving port 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112. It may be configured not to do so. In this case, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112 either.

Furthermore, even if the upper edge portion 135 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112, if the interval "W" between the gaps 112 is slightly narrower than the thickness "T" of the medal M, "1" By pushing the medal M into the gap 112, "1" medal M can be kept in the gap 112. In this case, there is no possibility that the pushed "1" medal M cannot be taken out from the gap 112.

If the front door 12 is closed while "1" medal M is pushed into the gap 112, "1" medal M may fly out from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time. At this time, since the return receiving port 131 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112, the "1" medal M that has jumped out from the gap 112 does not fall into the return receiving port 131, but instead is placed in the storage receiving port 35a. The hopper 35 can fall into the hopper 35 and be stored in the hopper 35.

Furthermore, even if the upper edge 135 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112, for example, if the interval "W" between the gaps 112 is slightly narrower than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, " By pushing ``2'' medals M into the gap 112, the ``2'' medals can be kept within the gap 112. In this case, the two pushed medals M will not become impossible to take out from the gap 112.

Furthermore, if the front door 12 is closed with "2" medals M being pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M may fly out from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time. Then, in the same way as when the front door 12 is closed while "1" medal M is pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M that pop out from the gap 112 do not fall into the return acceptance slot 131. First, it can fall into the storage receiving port 35a and be stored in the hopper 35.

(7) In the ninth embodiment, the upper edge portion 135 of the return member 130 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
For example, as shown in FIG. 114, a closing member 140 may be provided vertically below the gap 112, and this closing member 140 may close a portion of the return acceptance port 131 that corresponds to the vertically below the gap 112. That is, a portion of the return acceptance port 131 that corresponds to the vertically downward portion of the gap 112 may be covered with the blocking member 140. Further, the cover member 140 can be configured to be substantially horizontal.

In this case, the medal M inserted into the gap 112 can be placed on the cover member 140. Then, when the front door 12 is closed with the medal M placed in the gap 112, the medal M falls from the gap 112 due to the impact. At this time, since the portion of the return acceptance port 131 that corresponds to the vertically downward direction of the gap 112 is blocked by the closing member 140, the medal M that has fallen from the gap 112 does not fall into the return acceptance port 131. It can fall into the storage receiving port 35a and be stored in the hopper 35.

(8) In the ninth embodiment, the return acceptance port 131 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as shown in FIG. As shown, a portion of the return acceptance port 131 may be arranged vertically below the gap 112.
Furthermore, even if a part of the return receiving port 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112, if the interval "W" between the gaps 112 is slightly narrower than the thickness "T" of the medal M, By pushing one medal M into the gap 112, "1" medal M can be kept within the gap 112. In this case, there is no possibility that the pushed "1" medal M cannot be taken out from the gap 112.

If the front door 12 is closed while "1" medal M is pushed into the gap 112, "1" medal M may fly out from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time. At this time, since a part of the return acceptance port 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112, the "1" medal M that jumped out from the gap 112 falls into the return acceptance port 131, and is placed in the medal return passage 132. , through the medal payout port 16 , and guided to the medal receiving tray 19 .

Further, even if a part of the return receiving port 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112, for example, if the interval "W" between the gaps 112 is slightly narrower than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, By pushing "2" medals M into the gap 112, "2" medals can be kept within the gap 112. In this case, the two pushed medals M will not become impossible to take out from the gap 112.

Furthermore, if the front door 12 is closed with "2" medals M being pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M may fly out from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time. Then, in the same way as when the front door 12 is closed while "1" medal M is pushed into the gap 112, "2" medals M that pop out from the gap 112 fall into the return acceptance slot 131, It is possible to pass through the medal return passage 132, pass through the medal payout port 16, and be guided to the medal receiving tray 19.

(9) In the ninth embodiment, regarding the width “L1” of the medal guiding path 121, the length “L2” of the screw 127, and the width “L3” of the screw 127, “L1<L2” and “L1<L3” are satisfied. It was configured to satisfy the following. That is, the length "L2" of the screw 127 is made longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guiding passage 121, and the width "L3" of the screw 127 is also made thicker (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guiding passage 121. ), but it is not limited to this.

For example, the configuration may be such that "L1<L2" and "L1>L3" are satisfied. That is, the length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guiding path 121, but the width "L3" of the screw 127 is thinner (smaller) than the width "L1" of the medal guiding path 121. ) may be done.
With this, when the screw 127 comes off from the back side of the front door 12, the screw 127 that came off can enter into the medal guide path 121, so it is possible to prevent the screw 127 that came off from being lost. .

Note that, as described above, a locking portion for locking the chute member 120 to the back surface of the front door 12 is provided at a predetermined position of the chute member 120. Then, while the sheet member 120 is locked to the back surface of the front door 12 by the locking portion, the chute member 120 is fixed to the back surface of the front door 12 using the screw 127 passed through the screw hole of the fixing portion 126. Therefore, even if the screw 127 comes off, the chute member 120 will not separate from the back surface of the front door 12 and fall.

(10) In the ninth embodiment, when one medal M enters the gap 112, other medals M cannot pass from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, even when one medal M enters the gap 112, other medals M may be configured to be able to pass from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120.
As a result, when the front door 12 is closed with one medal M placed in the gap 112, even if one medal M remains in the gap 112, other medals M will be directed from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120. Since the passage is not obstructed, the progress of the game can be prevented from being obstructed.

(11) In the ninth embodiment, five digits (indicator), digit 1 to digit 5, are provided, and dynamic lighting control is performed in which digit 5 to digit 1 are sequentially lit, with 5 interrupts as one cycle.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to include four digits, digit 1 to digit 4, and to sequentially light up digits 4 to 1 by dynamic lighting control, with 4 interrupts as one cycle.
That is, the number of digits (indicators) is not limited to five, but can be set as appropriate as necessary. Furthermore, the cycle of the dynamic lighting control is not limited to 5 interrupts, but can be set as appropriate depending on the number of digits, etc.

(12) In the ninth embodiment, the time "T1" from once the selector retention notification is canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again, and the event that the power supply is cut off (power outage) occur. The design value "T4" for the period from time to time when the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected is configured to satisfy "T1<T4", but conversely, it is configured to satisfy "T1>T4". It may be configured as follows.

FIG. 122 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, and after the selector retention notification is canceled once, the selector retention notification can be executed again. The relationship between the time "T1" and the design value "T4" of the period from the time when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs until the time when the event where the power supply is cut off is detected. This shows that.

In FIG. 122, selector retention detection is turned on/off, door open detection is turned on/off, selector retention notification is turned on/off, door open notification is turned on/off, reset switch 153 is turned on/off, and release switch is turned on/off. Regarding off, it is the same as in FIG. 117.
Furthermore, the timings of "X71", "X72", and "X73" in FIG. 122 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", and "X23" in FIG. 117, respectively.

When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X73" in FIG. 122 in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector retention notification. . Thereafter, if an event that cuts off the power supply (power cutoff) does not occur, the main control board 50 enables the selector retention notification to be executed again at the timing of "X76".
The time from "X73" to "X76" is the time "T1" from once the selector retention notification is canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again.

Furthermore, in FIG. 122, if it is assumed that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs at the timing of "X73", then an event in which the power supply is cut off occurs at the timing of "X74". It is detected, and power-off processing is executed at the timing of "X75".
The time from "X73" to "X74" is the design value of the period from the time when an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs until the time when the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected. It is "T4".
Further, the time from "X74" to "X75" is the time "T5" from when an event in which the power supply is cut off (power cutoff) is detected until the power cutoff process is executed.

Furthermore, similarly to FIG. 121, FIG. 122 also shows the voltage level when an event in which the power supply to the slot machine 10 is cut off (power cutoff) occurs.
In FIG. 122, the voltage level when the power is on is "V0". Further, the voltage level (power-off detection level) at which it is possible to detect the occurrence of an event in which the power supply is cut off is defined as "V1".

Further, FIG. 122 shows an example in which an event in which the power supply is cut off (power cutoff) occurs at timing "X73". When the power is cut off at the timing "X73", the power supply voltage drops to the voltage level "V1" at the timing "X74". Further, the time from "X73" to "X74" is "T4".
Furthermore, if the power supply voltage becomes less than the drive limit voltage level, power-off processing cannot be executed, so if the power-off occurs at the timing "X73" in FIG. The disconnection process is set to end.

In addition, in FIG. 122, the timing when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed (the timing of "X73"), and the timing when the power supply is turned off after the selector retention notification is once released. The figure shows the timing (timing of "X76") at which the selector retention notification can be executed again if the event of supply cutoff (power cutoff) does not occur.
Furthermore, FIG. 122 shows the timing at which an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs and the timing at which the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed. It is matched.

And, it is configured to satisfy "T1>T4". In other words, the design value "T4" for the period from the time when an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs until the time when the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected is the design value "T4", which is the period when the selector retention notification is once released. After that, if an event in which the power supply is cut off (power cutoff) does not occur, the time required until the selector retention notification can be executed again is configured to be shorter than "T1".

In FIG. 122, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed at timing “X73”, the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector retention notification. and execute door open notification. Further, it is assumed that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power cutoff) occurs approximately at the same time as the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on). In this case, an event in which the power supply is cut off is detected at the timing "X74" in FIG. 122, and thereafter, the power cutoff process is executed at the timing "X75". After that, if an event that cuts off the power supply (power cutoff) does not occur, the selector retention notification can be executed again at the timing "X76" in FIG. 122.

Therefore, in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, if an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs at approximately the same time as the reset switch 153 is operated (on), the selector retention alarm is issued. Once released, and then before re-executing the selector retention notification, a power-off is detected and a power-off process is executed. Therefore, in the power-off process, data indicating execution of selector retention notification is not backed up, so that when power supply is resumed (recovery from power-off), selector retention notification can be prevented from being executed.

In addition, in FIG. 122, at the timing "X75", door open notification is executed instead of selector retention notification. Therefore, in the power-off process, data indicating that the door open notification is being executed is backed up, so when the power supply is restarted (recovered from the power-off), the door open notification is executed.
Furthermore, in FIG. 122, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error has been explained using the selector retention error as an example. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the same operation as in the case of a selector retention error occurs.

(13) In the ninth embodiment, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is canceled once, and then the operation is performed again without the need for any operation. Although selector retention notification has been executed, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the front door 12 is opened and the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is canceled, the door open notification is executed, and then the front When the release switch is operated in a situation where the door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the door open notification may be canceled and the selector retention notification may be executed again. .

FIG. 123 shows a case where the reset switch 153 is operated with the front door 12 open and the cause of the selector retention error not removed, and a case where the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector retention error is removed. 12 is a time chart showing an operation mode when a release switch is operated in a situation where the release switch is not in use.
In FIG. 123, at timing "X81", when the medal M is clogged in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error. I judge that.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error, it displays "CE" indicating a selector retention error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification, and transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80.
Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector retention command, it outputs the voice "Please call the staff member" from the speaker 22 as a selector retention notification, and displays the words "Selector retention error" on the image display device 23. indicate.

Thereafter, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at timing "X82" in FIG. 123, the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12, but executes the selector retention notification. During this time, selector retention notification is continued without executing door open notification.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12, it transmits a door open command indicating the opening of the front door 12 to the sub control board 80. However, while the selector retention notification is being executed, the sub control board 80 continues the selector retention notification without executing the door open notification even if it receives a door open command.

Thereafter, at timing "X83" in FIG. 123, when the front door 12 is opened and the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 cancels selector retention notification and executes door open notification. Specifically, the display on the acquisition number display LED 78 is switched from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating opening of the front door 12.

Further, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error release command, it releases the selector retention notification and executes the door open notification. Specifically, the audio output from the speaker 22 is switched from "Please call the attendant" to "The door is open," and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "Selector retention error" to "Door open." Switch to

Thereafter, at timing "X84" in FIG. 123, when the front door 12 is closed in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the door switch 17 is turned off. As a result, the main control board 50 no longer detects opening of the front door 12. However, the door open notification is not canceled even if the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and continues until the release switch is operated (turned on).

Thereafter, at timing "X85" in FIG. 123, the front door 12 is closed and the door key is turned counterclockwise (counterclockwise) to release the door key, with the cause of the selector retention error not being removed. When the switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and executes the selector retention notification. Specifically, the display on the acquisition number display LED 78 is switched from "dE" indicating a selector retention error to "CE" indicating opening of the front door 12.

Further, when the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancellation command, it cancels the door open notification and executes the selector retention notification. Specifically, the audio output from the speaker 22 is switched from "door is open" to "please call an attendant" and the display on the image display device 23 is switched from "door open" to "selector retention error". Switch to

Here, in FIG. 123, the selector retention error is taken as an example, and when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the front door 12 is opened and the cause of the error has not been removed, and when the front door 12 is closed and We have explained the behavior when the release switch is operated in a situation where the cause of the error has not been removed.
However, this is not limited to this, and also applies to selector passage errors, hopper empty errors, and hopper jam errors when the reset switch 153 is operated while the front door 12 is open and the cause of the error has not been removed. , and when the release switch is operated in a situation where the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the error has not been removed, the same operation as in the case of a selector retention error occurs.

Furthermore, in FIG. 123, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on and the door open notification is executed. When detected, the configuration may be such that a door open notification is executed.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and the door key is turned clockwise in this state to release the lock, the front door 12 becomes openable. The door switch 17 may be configured to detect that the front door 12 is unlocked and can be opened.

When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is unlocked and can be opened by turning on the door switch 17, the front door 12 is opened. Even if the door is closed, the door open notification may be executed.
In this case, after the front door 12 is closed and locked, when the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 is configured to release the door open notification. be able to.

In this way, when a predetermined error is detected, a predetermined error notification can be executed. Thereafter, when it is detected that the front door 12 has been opened or can be opened, and the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, an operation for canceling the predetermined error notification (pressing the reset switch 153) is performed. operation) is performed, the predetermined error notification is once canceled, and then the door open notification is made executable. After that, when the front door 12 is closed or locked and the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, if an operation to cancel the door open alarm (operation of the release switch) is performed, the door open alarm will be activated. After canceling the error notification, the predetermined error notification can be notified again.

Thereby, it can be confirmed that the reset switch 153 functions normally, and it can be notified again that the cause of the error has not been removed.
In addition, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the front door 12 is opened and the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, the predetermined error notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Since it is possible to notify the user that the front door 12 is open, fraudulent acts can be prevented.

(14) In the ninth embodiment, processes related to error detection, execution of error notification, and cancellation of error notification are executed in interrupt processing.
Then, in the same interrupt process, there is a case where the error notification is once canceled and then the error notification is executed again.
In the example shown in FIG. 117, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X23" in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is canceled and the door is opened. A notification was issued. Thereafter, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification was canceled and the selector retention notification was executed again.

However, in the same interrupt process, the selector retention notification may be canceled and then the selector retention notification may be executed again. In this case, door open notification is not executed.
In this way, the selector retention notification is canceled according to the order of error detection, error notification execution, and error notification cancellation in the interrupt processing, and then the selector retention notification is executed again without executing the door open notification. There are cases where

Further, in one interrupt process, only one of the processes related to error detection, execution of error notification, and cancellation of error notification may be executed. In such a case, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is canceled, the door open notification is executed, and then, There is a case where the door open notification is canceled and the selector retention notification is executed again.

(15) In the ninth embodiment, when the return member 130 is fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12, the upper edge 135 is configured to be substantially horizontal.
However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the upper edge portion 135 may be inclined so that the height thereof gradually decreases from the front side toward the back side in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 107. That is, the upper edge portion 135 may be inclined so that the height on the front side is high and the height on the back side is low in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 107.

In this case, when a medal M is inserted into the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135, the medal M is subjected to a force that causes it to slide toward the back in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. work. That is, a force acts on the medal M to cause it to slide toward the back surface of the front door 12. Therefore, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 tends to stay within the gap 112. Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed with the medal M placed in the gap 112, the medal M is unlikely to fall from the gap 112 even if a shock is applied when the front door 12 is closed.

Then, while one medal M remains within the gap 112, another medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 hits the first medal M within the gap 112 and stops. At this time, as other medals M stay in the medal passage 111, the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, and the selector retention notification is performed. It is possible to indirectly detect that

Further, contrary to the above, the upper edge portion 135 may be inclined such that the height thereof gradually decreases from the back side toward the front side in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 107. That is, the upper edge portion 135 may be inclined so that the height on the back side is high and the height on the near side is low in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 107.

In this case, when a medal M is inserted into the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135, a force that tends to cause the medal M to slide toward the near side in the direction perpendicular to the page of FIG. 107 is applied to the medal M. work. That is, a force acts on the medal M so that it tends to slide in a direction opposite to the back surface of the front door 12 (toward the inside of the cabinet 13). Therefore, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 easily slides down from the gap 112 towards the inside of the cabinet 13. Therefore, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 becomes difficult to stay in the gap 112.

(16) In the ninth embodiment, the opening at the top of the hopper 35 is the storage receiving port 35a. The storage receiving port 35a is provided below the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guiding path 121).
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the upper edge of the side wall of the hopper 35 may be arranged above the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide path 121). That is, the upper opening of the hopper 35 may be arranged above the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guiding path 121).

In this case, for example, a recess cut out downward from the upper end of the side wall of the hopper 35 is provided at a predetermined position on the side wall of the hopper 35. Further, the lower end of this recess is disposed below the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide path 121). This concave portion can be used as a storage receiving opening 35a for receiving medals M guided by the chute member 120.

In this case, with the front door 12 closed, the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guiding path 121) should face the recessed portion serving as the storage receiving port 35a. .
Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed, the vicinity of the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guiding passage 121) is inserted into the inside of the recessed portion serving as the storage receiving port 35a. You can do it like this.

(17) The various modifications shown in the first to ninth embodiments and the first to ninth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations. It is.

<Tenth embodiment>
The tenth embodiment relates to a slot machine 10 in which the payout rate in the special game is lowered so that the player's medals decrease in the special game.
A tenth embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 127 is an RT transition diagram in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 128 is a diagram showing RT variation conditions in the tenth embodiment.
In Figure 128, "∞" (infinite) in the number of times column means that there is no upper limit for the number of games played for each RT, and that RT will be maintained until the transition condition described in the change opportunity column is met. (continue) means to continue.

In the 10th embodiment, the special prize includes 1BB (first type bonus continuous operating device; first type big bonus) and RB (first type special bonus; regular bonus). Therefore, the special game includes a 1BB game and an RB game.
Here, the special prize is also referred to as a prize item, the winning of a special prize is also referred to as a bonus condition device activation, and the special game is also referred to as a bonus item activation.
For example, a 1BB win is also referred to as a 1BB condition device activation, and a 1BB game is also referred to as a 1BB operation.
In addition, when a special role is won (the accessory condition device is activated), the winning information of the special role will be used in the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the won special role is stopped and displayed on the active line (the special role wins). carry over to
Games that have not won a special role are called "non-internal" games that have won a special role, but the symbol combination corresponding to the won special role is not displayed on the active line, that is, a game that has won a special role. Games in which winning information is carried over are referred to as "internal play."
For example, when 1BB is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is not displayed on the active line, it is referred to as being inside 1BB.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, in a game in which a special prize is won (the prize conditional device is activated), the reels 31 are moved inside before they can be stopped. Therefore, in the game in which the special winning combination is won, the internal reel 31 is controlled to stop.
Note that the timing of transition to the inside can be set as appropriate. For example, in the game in which the special prize was won, the reels 31 may be moved to the internal state before they can be stopped, or in the game in which the special prize was won, after all the reels 31 have stopped, the reels 31 may be moved to the internal state. Alternatively, in the game in which the special winning combination has been won, it may not be moved to the inside, but it may be moved to the inside in the next game. In other words, the game that won the special winning combination may be set as an inside game, or the game that won the special winning role may be set as a non-inside game, and the next game may be set as an inside game.

Further, while the winning information for the special role can be carried over to the next game, the winning information for the small role and replay is valid only for the game in which the winning is won, and is not carried over to the next game. That is, the special role is a role that can be carried over to the next game, whereas the small role and replay are roles that cannot be carried over to the next game.
In addition, "when the accessory is not activated" means that the special prize has been won (the prize conditional device is activated), but the symbol combination corresponding to the won special prize has not been stopped and displayed on the active line, and the symbol combination that corresponds to the won special prize has not yet been displayed. Including the state where the accessory is not in operation. Therefore, during the non-internal period when 1BB is not won (1BB condition device is activated), the accessory is not activated, and even though 1BB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed on the active line. The inside of 1BB where (1BB won) is also the time when the accessory is not activated. Then, when 1BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed on the active line, the game shifts to 1BB game (1BB operation).

As shown in FIG. 127, the tenth embodiment includes "three" RTs: non-RT, RT1, and special games.
Here, "RT" means that the type (number) of conditional devices (accessories, replays, small prizes) that are subject to lottery and the probability of winning are a unique lottery state, and is referred to as "RT transition". means that the winning probability of at least "1" replay to be drawn varies by shifting from one RT to another RT.
The main control board 50 determines whether or not the RT transition conditions are satisfied, and when it is determined that the RT transition conditions are satisfied, controls the RT to transition.
Furthermore, "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to RT0. Therefore, non-RTs are included in RTs. That is, a non-RT is one of the RTs.
Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, the special game is included in RT. That is, the special game is one type of RT.
In the tenth embodiment, non-RT corresponds to non-internal, and RT1 corresponds to internal.

First, with the power off, turn on the setting key switch 152, and when the power is turned on in this state, the device shifts to a setting change state (setting change mode) in which set values can be changed. At this time, RWM initialization processing (RWM clear processing) that initializes a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is executed, and the state shifts to non-RT (non-internal).
Non-RT (non-internal) continues until 1BB is won (1BB condition device is activated).
In the tenth embodiment, when 1BB is won alone in non-RT, the game shifts to RT1 (internal) before the reels 31 can be stopped in the game. At this time, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB can be stopped and displayed on the active line. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed on the active line (1BB wins), no medals are paid out in the game, but the next game shifts to a special game (when 1BB is activated).

On the other hand, if you win 1BB alone in non-RT (non-internal), but the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB does not stop and display on the active line in the game, the winning information of 1BB will be carried over, so it will not be used from the next game onwards. It becomes RT1 (internal).
Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, when 1BB and a small winning combination are won in non-RT (non-internal), the game shifts to RT1 (internal) before the reels 31 can be stopped in the game. At this time, since the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is not stopped and displayed on the active line. Therefore, since the winning information of 1BB is carried over, the next game and subsequent games will be RT1.

In addition, in RT1 (internal), if the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 is non-winning (losing), the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
However, in the tenth embodiment, there is no non-winning in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 in RT1, and any of the small winning combinations or replays are won.
Then, when a small winning combination is won in RT1, the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, so the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed on the active line. There's nothing to do.
Also, when winning a replay in RT1, the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, so the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed on the active line. There isn't.
Therefore, in the tenth embodiment, once the game moves to RT1, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB will not be stopped and displayed on the active line after that, so the game continues to stay at RT1 without moving to the special game. Then, while staying at RT1, non-AT and AT are repeated.
Note that when the RWM initialization process (RWM clear process) is executed in RT1, the process thereafter shifts to non-RT (non-internal).

Moreover, 1BB is an accessory that can operate RB continuously. That is, during the 1BB game, the RB game is executed continuously.
Note that in the tenth embodiment, symbol combinations corresponding to RB are not set. Therefore, during the 1BB game, the RB game is executed continuously without the symbol combination corresponding to the RB being stopped and displayed on the active line. Therefore, if 1BB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed, and the game moves to the 1BB game, the RB will be activated when the 1BB is activated in every game.
Also, during the RB game (when the RB is activated), the winning number "36" is won in a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 every game, and the winning K condition device is activated (FIG. 147, which will be described later). As a result, during the RB game, that is, during the 1BB game, the winning probability of the small winning combination (the operating probability of the small winning condition condition device) is higher than that of non-RT (non-internal) and RT1 (internal).
Furthermore, during the RB game, the prescribed number becomes ``2'' and the winning number ``36'' is won with a probability of ``60536/65536'' every game, and the winning K condition device is activated. Then, when the winning K condition device is activated, one of the winning combinations wins and "1" medal is paid out (FIG. 144, which will be described later). Therefore, during RB games, that is, during 1BB games, "2" medals are bet every game and "1" medal is paid out, so the ball payout rate is "0.5". , the player's medals are decreasing.

Further, the RB game ends when the game is played "2" times, when there are "2" wins, or when the end condition of the 1BB game is satisfied. That is, the termination condition for the RB game is set to be that the game has been played "2" times, that there has been a prize winning "2" times, or that the termination condition for the 1BB game is satisfied.
Further, the 1BB game continues until the cumulative number of acquired medals (number of medals paid out, number given) exceeds "50", and ends when the cumulative number of acquired medals exceeds "50". That is, the termination condition for the 1BB game is set that the cumulative number of acquired medals exceeds "50".
Then, when the RB game ends, if the 1BB game ending condition is not satisfied, the RB game is executed again. In this way, during the 1BB game, the RB game is executed continuously.
Further, when the RB game ends, if the 1BB game ending condition is satisfied, the 1BB game ends and the game shifts to non-RT (non-internal).
Furthermore, when the 1BB game termination condition is satisfied during the RB game, the RB game is ended, the 1BB game is ended, and the game shifts to non-RT (non-inside).

In addition, the "specified number" means the number of bets for medals at which the game can be started.
In the tenth embodiment, the specified number of non-RT (non-internal) and RT1 (internal), that is, the specified number when the accessory is not activated, is set to “1” type of “3”, and the 1BB game The specified number is set to "2" and "1" type. Therefore, in non-RT and RT1, a game cannot be executed by betting "1" or "2" medals, but a game is executed by betting "3" medals. Furthermore, in a 1BB game, the game cannot be executed with a bet of "1" medal, but the game is executed with a bet of "2" medals. Note that in the 1BB game, it is not possible to bet "3" medals.
Furthermore, "payout" means the number of medals to be paid out when the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line (winning winning combination).
Furthermore, the "expected value of the number of medals to be paid out" is the "operation probability of the conditional device (winning probability)" x "winning probability of the winning combination included in the conditional device" for all conditional devices that are subject to lottery in each RT. ” x “Number of coins paid out at the time of winning”.
Further, the "ball payout rate" refers to the value obtained by dividing the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out by the number of bets ("expected value of the number of medals to be paid out/number of bets").
When the "Ball Out Rate" is "1", the player's medals are maintained; when the "Ball Out Rate" exceeds "1", the player's medals are increased; When the "ball output rate" is less than "1", the player's medals are decreasing.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the tenth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 129, in the tenth embodiment as well, each reel 31 consists of "20" pieces, similarly to the first embodiment. That is, each reel 31 has the number of symbols "20".
In FIG. 129, the symbol numbers are also illustrated. For example, on the left reel 31, the symbol with symbol number "0" is "Replay".

Further, in the tenth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the time from the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reel 31 stops is set within "190" ms. As a result, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reel 31 stops becomes "4" symbols.
For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated just before the "Bell" numbered "1" on the left reel 31 passes the active line, the symbol will be moved up to "4" from the concerned symbol, and the number will be "5". It is possible to stop on the active line until the "replay" of the number.
Therefore, by arranging ``4'' specific symbols at ``5'' symbol intervals on one reel 31, the specific symbols can always be stopped on the active line no matter when the stop switch 42 is operated.

Specifically, on the left reel 31, "bells" are placed at numbers "1", "6", "11", and "16". That is, the "bells" on the left reel 31 are arranged at "4" intervals of "5" symbols. Therefore, no matter at what timing the left stop switch 42 is operated on the left reel 31, the "bell" can always be stopped on the active line.
In this way, a symbol arrangement that can always stop the target symbol on the active line no matter at what timing the stop switch 42 is operated is referred to as a "PB=1" arrangement.
In contrast, the symbol arrangement is "PB≠1" where the target symbol cannot be stopped on the active line unless the stop switch 42 is operated at an appropriate timing (within the maximum number of symbols moved from the active line). It is called.

On the left reel 31, in addition to "Bell", "Replay" and "Watermelon" are also arranged at "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the left reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", and "Watermelon" are arranged consecutively (in order) at "4" locations. Specifically, on the left reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", and "Watermelon" are consecutively arranged from numbers "0" to "2", and also from numbers "5" to "7". They are arranged consecutively, and the numbers "10" to "12" are also arranged consecutively, and the numbers "15" to "17" are also arranged consecutively.

In addition, on the left reel 31, "Blank A" of numbers "3", "13", and "18", and "Cherry A" of number "8" are the sum of these "4" symbols, and "PB= 1” arrangement. Therefore, no matter at what timing the left stop switch 42 is operated, "Blank A" or "Cherry A" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the effective line.
Similarly, on the left reel 31, "Blank B" of number "4", "Bar A" of number "9", "7" of number "14", and "Bar B" of number "19" are The total number of "4" symbols is "PB=1" arrangement. Therefore, no matter at what timing the left stop switch 42 is operated, "Blank B", "Bar A", "7" or "Bar B" of the left reel 31 can be stopped on the effective line.

Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, “Bell”, “Replay” and “Blank A” are each arranged in “PB=1”.
Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, the "Watermelon" numbers "3", "8", and "13", and the "Blank B" number "18" are the sum of these "4" symbols, and "PB= 1” arrangement.
Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, "Bar A" of number "4", "7" of number "9", "Cherry A" of number "14", and "Bar B" of number "19" are The total number of ``4'' symbols is ``PB=1'' arrangement.

Furthermore, on the right reel 31, “Bell” and “Replay” are each arranged in “PB=1”.
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Blank A" of numbers "1", "6", and "11", and "Blank B" of number "16" are the "PB" with a total of these "4" symbols. = 1'' arrangement.
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Bar A" at number "4", "7" at number "9", "Cherry A" at number "14", and "Bar B" at number "19" are The total number of ``4'' symbols is ``PB=1'' arrangement.
In addition, on the right reel 31, "Watermelon" numbered "5", "10", and "0", and "Cherry B" numbered "15", the sum of these "4" symbols is "PB = 1". ” arrangement.

FIG. 130 is a diagram showing the display window 18, the positional relationship of each reel 31, and the effective line (display line that displays symbol combinations).
In the tenth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, "3" reels 31 are arranged so that they can be seen from the display window 18, and "3" symbols on each reel 31 can be seen. It is located in
As a result, when each reel 31 is stopped, "3" consecutive symbols of each reel 31 can be seen stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the display window 18, respectively. Therefore, when all the reels 31 are stopped, a total of "9" symbols (pieces) can be seen from the display window 18.

Also, the positions of the "3" symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when each reel 31 is stopped are referred to as "upper row,""middlerow," and "lower row" in order from the top, as in the first embodiment. It is.
Furthermore, the positions of the "3" symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when the left reel 31 is stopped may be referred to as "upper left row,""middle left row," and "lower left row" in order from the top. This is similar to the embodiment.
Furthermore, the positions of the "3" symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when the middle reel 31 is stopped are referred to as "upper middle row,""middle middle row," and "lower middle row," in order from the top. Similarly to the first embodiment, the positions of the "3" symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display window 18 are referred to as "upper right row,""middle right row," and "lower right row" in order from the top.

Furthermore, the meanings of the valid line and invalid line are also the same as in the first embodiment.
The active line in the tenth embodiment is in any of the non-RT (non-internal), RT1 (internal), and special games (1BB activated, RB activated), and in any number of bets. As shown in FIG. 130, there is only one "middle row line" that is a straight line that passes through "middle row on the left" - "middle row on the middle" and "middle row on the right", and the other lines are invalid lines.
Note that the position and number of active lines may be varied for each RT or number of bets. For example, for a specific RT, a downward-sloping line may be the valid line. Furthermore, for a specific number of bets, there may be a plurality of active lines ("5" lines: an upper line, a middle line, a lower line, an upward line to the right, and a downward downward line to the right).

FIGS. 131 to 135 are diagrams showing the types of winning combinations (such as winning winning numbers drawn by the winning combination lottery means 61), symbol combinations, number of payouts (dividends), etc. in the tenth embodiment.
The roles can be broadly classified into special roles, replays (replayed roles), and small roles.
The symbol combinations and the number of coins to be paid out (dividends) at the time of winning are determined for each role. When all the reels 31 are stopped, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line (a winning combination is won), the number of medals corresponding to that winning combination is paid out (a dividend (profit) is awarded). ).
However, the number of coins to be paid out when winning a special winning combination is set to "0". In addition, in replay, medals are automatically inserted and the game can be played again.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, "3" RTs are provided: non-RT (non-internal), RT1 (internal), and special game (when RB is activated when 1BB is activated).
In addition, the specified number of non-RT (non-internal) and RT1 (internal), that is, the specified number when the accessory is not activated, is set to ``1'' of ``3'', and the special game (when 1BB is activated) is set to ``1'' of ``3''. The prescribed number of (when RB is activated) is set to "2" and "1" type.
In FIGS. 131 to 135, the specified number "3" corresponds to when the accessory is not activated (non-RT and RT), and the specified number "2" corresponds to when the RB is activated when 1BB is activated ( Special games).
Furthermore, in the column for the specified number of tickets "2" in FIGS. 131 and 132, "-" means that the tickets are not eligible for lottery (no lottery is held).
As shown in FIGS. 131 to 135, in the tenth embodiment, the number of coins to be paid out (dividend) when the specified number is "3" and when the specified number is "2", and when the lottery target and small winning combination are won. are different.

The winning number "1" shown in FIG. 131 corresponds to a special winning. In the tenth embodiment, the special winning combination includes "1" type of 1BB.
As shown in Figure 131, 1BB becomes a lottery target when the specified number of pieces is ``3'' (when the accessory is not activated), but when the specified number is ``2'' (when RB is activated), it is not selected for the lottery. It won't happen. More specifically, 1BB is a lottery target in non-RT (non-internal) when the specified number is "3", but it is not a lottery target in RT1 (internal). Then, if you win 1BB in non-RT (non-internal) and the symbol combination of "Bar B" - "Cherry A" - "Cherry A" corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed on the active line, medals will be paid out in the game. However, the next game will be a 1BB game (1BB operation), which corresponds to a special game.

The winning numbers "2" to "80" shown in FIGS. 131 and 132 correspond to replays (replay winnings). In the tenth embodiment, replays include "11" types of replays 01 to 11.
As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, Replay 01 to Replay 11 are eligible for lottery when the specified number is "3" (when the accessory is not activated), but when the specified number is "2" (when the RB is activated) ) are not eligible for lottery.
Furthermore, when the symbol combinations corresponding to Replay 01 to Replay 11 are stopped and displayed on the active line, medals are automatically inserted and the game can be played again.

The symbol combination corresponding to Replay 01 is "1" type with the winning number "1". Furthermore, the symbols on each reel 31 constituting Replay 01 are "Replay", and all of them are arranged in "PB=1". Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 01 is the "PB=1" arrangement.
The symbol combinations corresponding to Replay 02 are "8" types with winning numbers "2" to "10". Also, the symbols on the middle reel 31 that make up Replay 02 are arranged in "PB=1", and the symbols on the right reel 31 that make up Replay 02 are arranged in total as "PB=1", but they make up Replay 02. The symbols on the left reel 31 are "7" or "blank B", and the arrangement is "PB≠1". Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 02 is the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to Replay 03 is "1" type of winning number "11". Furthermore, the symbols on each reel 31 constituting Replay 03 are all arranged in "PB=1". Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 03 is the "PB=1" arrangement.
The symbol combinations corresponding to Replay 04 are "4" types with winning numbers "12" to "15". In addition, "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 that makes up Replay 04 has a "PB=1" arrangement, and "Replay" on the middle reel 31 that makes up Replay 04 also has a "PB=1" arrangement. The "bar B" of the right reel 31 is arranged in such a manner that "PB≠1". Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 04 is the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combinations corresponding to Replay 05 are "2" types with winning numbers "16" and "17". Furthermore, the “Replay” on the left reel 31 that makes up Replay 05 has a “PB=1” arrangement, and the “Bell” on the middle reel 31 that makes up Replay 05 also has a “PB=1” arrangement, making up Replay 05. ``Blank A'' and ``Blank B'' on the right reel 31 have a total arrangement of ``PB=1''. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 05 is the "PB=1" arrangement.
The symbol combinations corresponding to Replay 06 are "8" types with winning numbers "18" to "25". Furthermore, “7”, “Bar A”, “Bar B” and “Blank B” of the left reel 31 that constitutes Replay 06 are arranged in total as “PB=1”, and that of the middle reel 31 that constitutes Replay 06. “Replay” has a “PB=1” arrangement, and “Blank A” and “Blank B” of the right reel 31 forming Replay 06 have a “PB=1” arrangement in total. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 06 is the "PB=1" arrangement.

The symbol combinations corresponding to Replay 07 are "3" types with winning numbers "26" to "28". Furthermore, the “Replay” on the left reel 31 that makes up Replay 07 has a “PB=1” arrangement, and the “Replay” on the middle reel 31 that makes up Replay 07 also has a “PB=1” arrangement, making up Replay 07. "Watermelon" and "Cherry B" on the right reel 31 are arranged in total with "PB=1". Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 07 is the "PB=1" arrangement.
The symbol combinations corresponding to Replay 08 are "4" types with winning numbers "29" to "32". In addition, the “bell” on the left reel 31 that makes up Replay 08 has a “PB=1” arrangement, and the “Watermelon” and “Blank B” on the middle reel 31 that make up Replay 08 have a “PB=1” arrangement in total. , and “Watermelon” and “Cherry B” on the right reel 31 constituting Replay 08 have a total arrangement of “PB=1”. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 08 is the "PB=1" arrangement.

The symbol combinations corresponding to Replay 09 are "8" types with winning numbers "33" to "40". In addition, the “bell” on the left reel 31 that makes up Replay 09 has a “PB=1” arrangement, and the “Watermelon” and “Blank B” on the middle reel 31 that make up Replay 09 have a “PB=1” arrangement in total. "7", "Bar A", "Bar B" and "Cherry A" on the right reel 31 constituting Replay 09 are arranged in a total of "PB=1". Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 09 is the "PB=1" arrangement.
The symbol combinations corresponding to Replay 10 are "16" types with winning numbers "41" to "56". In addition, “7”, “Bar B”, “Watermelon” and “Cherry A” on the middle reel 31 constituting the replay 10 are arranged in total with “PB=1”, and “PB=1” is arranged on the right reel 31 constituting the replay 10. 7'', ``Bar A'', ``Bar B'', and ``Cherry A'' are placed in total with ``PB=1'', but ``Bar A'' on the left reel 31 that makes up Replay 10 is placed with ``PB≠1''. It is. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 10 is the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combinations corresponding to Replay 11 are "24" types with winning numbers "57" to "80". In addition, “7”, “Bar A”, “Bar B” and “Cherry A” on the middle reel 31 making up the replay 11 have a total arrangement of “PB=1”, and on the right reel 31 making up the replay 11, the total arrangement is “PB=1”. "Watermelon" and "Cherry B" have a total arrangement of "PB=1", but "7", "Bar B" and "Blank B" of the left reel 31 that constitute Replay 11 are arranged "PB≠1" It is. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 11 is the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The winning numbers "81" to "181" shown in FIGS. 133 to 135 correspond to small winnings. In the tenth embodiment, the small winnings include "42" types of small winnings 01 to 42.
As shown in FIGS. 133 to 135, small winnings 01 to 42 are played both when the specified number is "3" (when the accessory is not activated) and when the specified number is "2" (when RB is activated). Subject to lottery.
However, for small roles 01 to 08, the corresponding symbol combination will be on the active line when the specified number is "3" (when the role object is not activated) and when the specified number is "2" (when RB is activated). The number of medals paid out (dividend) is different when the display is stopped (winning).

In particular, for the small winning combination 01, when the specified number is "3" (when the accessory is not activated), the payout when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line exceeds the specified number, and the specified number is "2". At the time of printing (when RB is activated), the payout when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line is less than the specified number.
In addition, for minor roles 02 to 08, when the specified number is "3" (when the accessory is not activated), the payout when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line is the same as the specified number. , when the specified number is "2" (when RB is activated), the payout when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line is less than the specified number.

The symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination 01 is of type “1” with the winning number “81”. Further, the “bells” of each reel 31 constituting the small winning combination 01 are arranged in “PB=1”. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 01 is the "PB=1" arrangement.
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 01 is stopped and displayed on the active line when the prescribed number is "3" (when the accessory is not activated), the payout is "11", which exceeds the prescribed number "3".
On the other hand, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 01 is stopped and displayed on the active line when the prescribed number is "2" (when RB is activated), the payout is "1", which is less than the prescribed number "2".

The symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination 02 is of the type “1” with the winning number “82”. In addition, the “bell” on the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 02 has a “PB=1” arrangement, but the “watermelon” on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 02 has a “PB≠1” arrangement, and the small “Blank A” on the right reel 31 constituting winning combination 02 is also arranged in “PB≠1”. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 02 is arranged as "PB≠1".
The symbol combinations corresponding to the minor winning combination 03 are "2" types of winning numbers "83" and "84". In addition, the "replay" of the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 that make up the small winning combination 03 are each set to "PB=1", and the "blank A" and "blank B" of the right reel 31 that make up the small winning combination 03 are In total, the arrangement is "PB=1". Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 03 is the "PB=1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 04 is the type "1" of the winning number "85". In addition, "Replay" on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 that make up the small winning combination 04 are each arranged in "PB=1", and "Bell" on the middle reel 31 making up the small winning combination 04 is also arranged as "PB=1". It is. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 04 is the "PB=1" arrangement.
The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 05 are "8" types with winning numbers "86" to "93". In addition, "Replay" on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 that make up the small winning combination 05 are each arranged in "PB=1", and "Bell" on the right reel 31 making up the small winning combination 05 is also arranged as "PB=1". It is. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 05 is the "PB=1" arrangement.

The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 06 are "8" types with winning numbers "94" to "101". In addition, "Replay" on the left reel 31 and "Blank A" on the middle reel 31, which make up the small winning combination 06, are each arranged in "PB=1", and "Watermelon" and ""CherryB" has a total arrangement of "PB=1". Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 06 is the "PB=1" arrangement.
The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 07 are "2" types with the winning numbers "102" and "103". In addition, "Blank A" on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 07 is arranged in "PB=1", and "Blank A" and "Blank B" on the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 07 have a total of "PB=1". =1'' arrangement, but the "Blank A" of the left reel 31 constituting the small winning combination 07 is arranged as "PB≠1". Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 07 is arranged as "PB≠1".

The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 08 are "6" types with winning numbers "104" to "109". In addition, the “Watermelon” on the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 08 is arranged with “PB=1”, and the “Watermelon” and “Cherry B” on the right reel 31 that make up the small winning combination 08 have a total of “PB=1”. ” arrangement, but the “bar B” of the middle reel 31 that constitutes the small winning combination 08 is arranged as “PB≠1”. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 08 is the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Also, for small roles 02 to 08, when the specified number of coins is ``3'' (when the accessory is not activated), the payout is ``3'', which is the same as the specified number of ``3'', but When winning with the number "2" (when RB is activated), the payout is "1", which is less than the specified number "2".

The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 09 is the type "1" of the winning number "110". In addition, "Replay" on the left reel 31 and "Bell" on the middle reel 31, which make up the small winning combination 09, are each set to "PB=1", but "7" on the right reel 31, making up the small winning combination 09, is "PB=1". PB≠1” arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 09 is arranged as "PB≠1".
The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 10 is the type "1" of the winning number "111". In addition, "Replay" on the left reel 31 and "Bell" on the middle reel 31 that make up the small win 10 are each arranged in "PB=1", but "Bar A" on the right reel 31 that makes up the small win 10 is This is a “PB≠1” arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 10 is arranged as "PB≠1".

The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 11 is of the type “1” with the winning number “112”. In addition, “Replay” on the left reel 31 and “Bell” on the middle reel 31 that make up the small win 11 are each arranged in “PB=1”, but “Bar B” on the right reel 31 that makes up the small win 11 is This is a “PB≠1” arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 11 is arranged as "PB≠1".
The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 12 is the type "1" of the winning number "113". In addition, "Replay" on the left reel 31 and "Bell" on the middle reel 31, which make up the small winning combination 12, are each arranged in "PB=1", but "Cherry A" on the right reel 31, making up the small winning combination 12, This is a “PB≠1” arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 12 is arranged as "PB≠1".

The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 13 are "4" types with winning numbers "114" to "117". In addition, the “Bell” on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 13 has a “PB=1” arrangement, and the “Watermelon” and “Cherry B” on the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 13 have a total of “PB=1”. ” arrangement, but “7” and “bar A” on the left reel 31 that constitute the small winning combination 13 are arranged as “PB≠1”. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 is arranged as "PB≠1".
The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 14 are "4" types with winning numbers "118" to "121". In addition, the “Bell” on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 14 has a “PB=1” arrangement, and the “Watermelon” and “Cherry B” on the right reel 31 that make up the small winning combination 14 have a total of “PB=1”. ” arrangement, but the “bar B” and “blank B” of the left reel 31 that constitute the small winning combination 14 are arranged in a “PB≠1” arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 14 is arranged as "PB≠1".

The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 15 are "4" types with winning numbers "122" to "125". In addition, “Cherry A” and “Blank A” on the left reel 31 that make up the small winning combination 15 have a total arrangement of “PB=1”, and “Bell” on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 15 has a “PB=1” arrangement. 1" arrangement, but "7" and "bar A" of the right reel 31 that constitute the small winning combination 15 are arranged as "PB≠1". Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 15 is arranged as "PB≠1".
The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 16 are "4" types with winning numbers "126" to "129". In addition, “Cherry A” and “Blank A” on the left reel 31 that make up the small win 16 are arranged in total with “PB=1”, and “Bell” on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small win 16 is “PB=1”. However, the "bar B" and "cherry A" of the right reel 31 that constitute the small winning combination 16 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 16 is arranged as "PB≠1".

The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 17 are "4" types with winning numbers "130" to "133". In addition, “Watermelon” and “Blank B” on the middle reel 31 that make up the small winning combination 17 have a total arrangement of “PB=1”, and “Bell” on the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 17 has a “PB=1” arrangement. ” arrangement, but “7” and “bar A” on the left reel 31 that constitute the small winning combination 17 are arranged as “PB≠1”. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 17 is arranged as "PB≠1".
The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 18 are "4" types with winning numbers "134" to "137". In addition, "Watermelon" and "Blank B" on the middle reel 31 that make up the small winning combination 18 have a total arrangement of "PB=1", and "Bell" on the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 18 has a "PB=1" arrangement. ” arrangement, but the “bar B” and “blank B” of the left reel 31 that constitute the small winning combination 18 are arranged in a “PB≠1” arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 18 is arranged as "PB≠1".

The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 19 are "2" types of winning numbers "138" and "139". In addition, "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 and "Bell" on the right reel 31, which make up the small winning combination 19, are each placed in "PB=1", but "7" and "Bell" on the middle reel 31, making up the small winning combination 19, "Bar A" has a "PB≠1" arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 19 is arranged as "PB≠1".
The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 20 are "2" types of winning numbers "140" and "141". In addition, "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 and "Bell" on the right reel 31, which make up the small winning combination 20, are each arranged in "PB=1", but "Bar B" and "Bell" on the middle reel 31, which make up the small winning combination 20, "Cherry A" has a "PB≠1" arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 20 is arranged as "PB≠1".

The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 21 are "3" types with winning numbers "142" to "144". In addition, "Replay" on the left reel 31 and "Blank A" on the middle reel 31, which make up the small winning combination 21, are each arranged in "PB=1", but "7" on the right reel 31, making up the small winning combination 21, This is a “PB≠1” arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 21 is arranged as "PB≠1".
The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 22 are "3" types with winning numbers "145" to "147". In addition, “Replay” on the left reel 31 and “Blank A” on the middle reel 31 that make up the small winning combination 22 are each arranged in “PB=1”, but “Bar A” on the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 22 is a “PB≠1” arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 22 is arranged as "PB≠1".

The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 23 are "3" types with winning numbers "148" to "150". In addition, “Replay” on the left reel 31 and “Blank A” on the middle reel 31 that make up the small winning combination 23 are each arranged in “PB=1”, but “Bar B” on the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 23 is a “PB≠1” arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 23 is arranged as "PB≠1".
The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 24 are "3" types with winning numbers "151" to "153". In addition, "Replay" on the left reel 31 and "Blank A" on the middle reel 31, which make up the small winning combination 24, are each arranged in "PB=1", but "Cherry A" on the right reel 31, which makes up the small winning combination 24. is a “PB≠1” arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 24 is arranged as "PB≠1".

The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 25 is of type “1” with the winning number “154”. In addition, “Blank A” on the middle reel 31 and “Replay” on the right reel 31, which make up the small winning combination 25, are each arranged in “PB=1”, but “7” on the left reel 31, making up the small winning combination 25, This is a “PB≠1” arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 25 is arranged as "PB≠1".
The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 26 is of type “1” with the winning number “155”. In addition, "Blank A" on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 26 and "Replay" on the right reel 31 are each arranged in "PB=1", but "Bar A" on the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 26 is a “PB≠1” arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 26 is arranged as "PB≠1".

The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 27 is of type “1” with the winning number “156”. In addition, "Blank A" of the middle reel 31 that constitutes the small winning combination 27 and "Replay" of the right reel 31 are each arranged in "PB = 1", but "Bar B" of the left reel 31 that forms the small winning combination 27 is a “PB≠1” arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 27 is arranged as "PB≠1".
The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 28 is of type “1” with the winning number “157”. In addition, "Blank A" of the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 28 and "Replay" of the right reel 31 are each arranged in "PB=1", but "Blank B" of the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 28 is a “PB≠1” arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 28 is arranged as "PB≠1".

The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 29 are "2" types of winning numbers "158" and "159". In addition, “Replay” on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 29 has a “PB=1” arrangement, and “Watermelon” and “Cherry B” on the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 29 have a total of “PB=1”. ” arrangement, but “7” on the left reel 31 that constitutes the small winning combination 29 is arranged as “PB≠1”. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 29 is arranged as "PB≠1".
The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 30 are "2" types of winning numbers "160" and "161". In addition, "Replay" on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 30 has a "PB=1" arrangement, and "Watermelon" and "Cherry B" on the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 30 have a total of "PB=1". ” arrangement, but the “bar A” of the left reel 31 that constitutes the small winning combination 30 is arranged as “PB≠1”. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 30 is arranged as "PB≠1".

The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 31 are "2" types of winning numbers "162" and "163". In addition, "Replay" on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 31 has a "PB=1" arrangement, and "Watermelon" and "Cherry B" on the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 31 have a total of "PB=1". ” arrangement, but the “bar B” of the left reel 31 that constitutes the small winning combination 31 is arranged as “PB≠1”. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 31 is arranged as "PB≠1".
The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 32 are "2" types of winning numbers "164" and "165". In addition, “Replay” on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 32 has a “PB=1” arrangement, and “Watermelon” and “Cherry B” on the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 32 have a total of “PB=1”. ” arrangement, but the “Blank B” of the left reel 31 that constitutes the small winning combination 32 is arranged as “PB≠1”. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 32 is arranged as "PB≠1".

The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 33 are "2" types of winning numbers "166" and "167". In addition, the “Bell” on the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 33 has a “PB=1” arrangement, and the “Watermelon” and “Cherry B” on the right reel 31 that make up the small winning combination 33 have a total of “PB=1”. ” arrangement, but “7” on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the small winning combination 33 is arranged as “PB≠1”. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 33 is arranged as "PB≠1".
The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 34 are "2" types of winning numbers "168" and "169". In addition, the “Bell” on the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 34 has a “PB=1” arrangement, and the “Watermelon” and “Cherry B” on the right reel 31 that make up the small winning combination 34 have a total of “PB=1”. ” arrangement, but the “bar A” of the middle reel 31 that constitutes the small winning combination 34 is arranged as “PB≠1”. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 34 is arranged as "PB≠1".

The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 35 are "2" types of winning numbers "170" and "171". In addition, the “Bell” on the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 35 has a “PB=1” arrangement, and the “Watermelon” and “Cherry B” on the right reel 31 that make up the small winning combination 35 have a total of “PB=1”. ” arrangement, but the “bar B” of the middle reel 31 that constitutes the small winning combination 35 is arranged as “PB≠1”. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 35 is arranged as "PB≠1".
The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 36 are "2" types with winning numbers "172" and "173". In addition, the “Bell” on the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 36 has a “PB=1” arrangement, and the “Watermelon” and “Cherry B” on the right reel 31 that make up the small winning combination 36 have a total of “PB=1”. ” arrangement, but “Cherry A” on the middle reel 31 constituting the small winning combination 36 has a “PB≠1” arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 36 is arranged as "PB≠1".

The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 37 is of type “1” with the winning number “174”. In addition, “Bell” on the left reel 31 and “Blank A” on the middle reel 31 that make up the small winning combination 37 are each arranged in “PB=1”, but “7” on the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 37 is This is a “PB≠1” arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 37 is arranged as "PB≠1".
The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 38 is of type “1” with the winning number “175”. In addition, "Bell" on the left reel 31 and "Blank A" on the middle reel 31 that make up the small winning combination 38 are each arranged in "PB=1", but "Bar A" on the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 38 is a “PB≠1” arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 38 is arranged as "PB≠1".

The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 39 is of type “1” with the winning number “176”. In addition, the “Bell” on the left reel 31 and the “Blank A” on the middle reel 31 that make up the small winning combination 39 are each arranged in “PB=1”, but the “bar B” on the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 39 is a “PB≠1” arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 39 is arranged as "PB≠1".
The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 40 is of type “1” with the winning number “177”. In addition, "Bell" on the left reel 31 and "Blank A" on the middle reel 31 that make up the small winning combination 40 are each arranged in "PB=1", but "Cherry A" on the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 40 is a “PB≠1” arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 40 is arranged as "PB≠1".

The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 41 are "2" types of winning numbers "178" and "179". In addition, “Blank A” on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 41 has a “PB=1” arrangement, and “Watermelon” and “Cherry B” on the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 41 have a total of “PB=1”. 1" arrangement, but the "blank A" of the left reel 31 that constitutes the small winning combination 41 has a "PB≠1" arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 41 is arranged as "PB≠1".
The symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination 42 are "2" types of winning numbers "180" and "181". In addition, “Blank A” on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 42 has a “PB=1” arrangement, and “Watermelon” and “Cherry B” on the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 42 have a total of “PB=1”. 1" arrangement, but "Cherry A" on the left reel 31 that constitutes the small winning combination 42 has a "PB≠1" arrangement. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 42 is arranged as "PB≠1".

FIGS. 136 to 146 are diagrams showing the condition device in the tenth embodiment.
FIG. 136 shows the accessory condition device, and FIGS. 137 to 146 show the winning and accessory condition devices.
In the control details columns of FIGS. 136 to 146, "push order 123" indicates the push order of left-center right, and "push order 132" indicates the push order of left-center middle. Further, "push order 213" indicates the push order of middle left and right, and "push order 231" indicates the push order of middle right and left. Furthermore, "push order 312" indicates the push order of right, left, middle, and "push order 321" indicates the push order of right, middle, left.

For example, in the control details column of FIG. 136, "1BB at 1/64" means that the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB will be stopped and displayed on the active line (1BB wins) with a probability of "1/64". Otherwise (with a probability of 63/64), it means that you will miss out on the winning combination (not win).
Furthermore, for example, in the control details column of FIG. 137, "Replay 01, 02 at 1/1" means that replay 01 or replay 02 will occur with a probability of "1/1" (with a probability of 100%, always). This means that the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line (Replay 01 or Replay 02 wins).
Furthermore, for example, in the control details column of Fig. 139, "minor winning combination 01 (11 pieces) at 1/1" means that the symbol combination corresponding to minor winning combination 01 will stop on the active line with a probability of "1/1". This means that "11" pieces will be displayed and paid out.

For example, in the control details column of Figure 139, "1/4 small winning combination 35 (1 piece)" means that the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 35 will stop on the active line with a probability of "1/4". This means that if it is displayed, "1" card will be paid out, and otherwise (with a probability of "3/4") the winning combination will be missed.
Furthermore, for example, in the control details column of FIG. 146, "Small winning combination 02 (3 pieces) on 9/16, Small winning combination 25 (1 piece) on 1/16" means that the probability is "9/16". The symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination 02 will be stopped and displayed on the active line and "3" pieces will be paid out, and the symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination 25 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/16" and will be "1". This means that the winning combination will be a payout, and that otherwise (with a probability of 6/16) the winning combination will be missed.
Furthermore, for example, in the control details column of FIG. 146, "Small winning combination 01 to 42 (1 piece) at 1/1" means that any of the small winning combinations 01 to 42 will be played with a probability of "1/1". This means that the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line and "1" piece is paid out.

As shown in FIG. 136, in the tenth embodiment, the accessory condition device includes "1" type of 1BB condition device corresponding to the accessory condition device number "1".
In the tenth embodiment, the 1BB condition device becomes a lottery target only in non-RT (non-interior) (FIG. 147).
Further, in the tenth embodiment, the 1BB condition device has a case where it operates alone (single winning) and a case where it operates in combination with the winning C1 condition device to winning C4 condition device (duplicate winning).

In the tenth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, when a winning number is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, a conditional device number corresponding to the winning number is generated, and the conditional device number that is generated is The corresponding condition device is activated, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination included in the activated condition device can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, in non-RT (non-internal), when the winning number "0" is won in the lottery by the prize lottery means 61, the prize condition device number "1" is generated from this winning number "0". Then, the 1BB condition device corresponding to accessory condition device number “1” operates independently.
In addition, in non-RT (non-internal), when the winning number "25" is won in the lottery by the prize lottery means 61, from this winning number "25", the prize condition device number "1" and the winning and replay conditions A device number "25" is generated. Then, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the accessory condition device number “1” and the winning C1 condition device corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number “25” operate in duplicate.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, in non-RT (non-internal), if the winning number "0" is won in the lottery by the prize lottery means 61, before the reel 31 can be stopped in the game, the prize condition is The device number "1" is generated, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the accessory condition device number "1" is activated, and the state shifts to RT1 (internal). At this time, stop control of the reel 31 when the 1BB condition device is activated in RT1 shown in FIG. 136 is performed.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 136, when the 1BB condition device is activated in RT1 (inside), no matter which order the stop switch 42 is pressed, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB will occur with a probability of "1/64". A stop display is displayed on the active line (1BB wins), and there is a probability of ``63/64'' that the winning combination will be missed (not won).

Specifically, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is "Bar B"-"Cherry A"-"Cherry A" (FIG. 131). In addition, "Bar B" on the left reel 31 is placed only at the "1" location of the symbol number "19", and "Cherry A" on the middle reel 31 is placed only at the "1" location of the symbol number "14". “Cherry A” on the right reel 31 is placed only at the “1” location of symbol number “14” (FIG. 129).
Therefore, when any symbol from "Replay" with symbol number "15" to "Bar B" with symbol number "19" on the left reel 31 is located on the active line (middle left row), the left stop switch is activated. 42 is not operated, the "bar B" of the left reel 31 cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, the probability that "bar B" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/20=1/4".

Similarly, the middle stop occurs when any symbol from "Blank A" with symbol number "10" to "Cherry A" with symbol number "14" on the middle reel 31 is located on the active line (middle middle row). Unless the switch 42 is operated, "Cherry A" on the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped on the effective line. Therefore, the probability that "Cherry A" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/20=1/4".
In addition, when any symbol from "Watermelon" with symbol number "10" to "Cherry A" with symbol number "14" on the right reel 31 is located on the active line (middle row on the right), the right stop switch 42 Unless is operated, "Cherry A" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, the probability that "Cherry A" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/20=1/4".

From the above, the probability that "Bar B" - "Cherry A" - "Cherry A" corresponding to 1BB can be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle line) is "(1/4) x (1/4) x (1/4)=1/64''.
Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed on the active line (1BB wins), no medals are paid out in the game, but the next game shifts to a special game (when 1BB is activated).
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is not stopped and displayed on the active line, the winning information of 1BB will be carried over, so the next game and subsequent games will be RT1 (internal).

In addition, in RT1 (internal), if the lottery by the role lottery means 61 is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB in the game can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but in the 10th embodiment, in RT1, There is no possibility of non-winning in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 (FIG. 147).
For this reason, in non-RT (non-internal), if the winning number "0" is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB does not stop and display in the game in which the 1BB condition device is activated independently, After that, RT1 (internal) is maintained until the RWM initialization process (RWM clear process) is executed, so the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB will not be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, in non-RT (non-internal), when the winning number "25" is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning number "25" is drawn from the winning number "25" before the reel 31 can be stopped in the game. A property condition device number “1” and a prize winning and replay condition device number “25” are generated, and a 1BB condition device corresponding to the accessory condition device number “1” and a prize winning and replay condition device number “25” are generated. The winning prize C1 condition device is operated in duplicate, and the state shifts to RT1 (inside). At this time, stop control of the reels 31 when the winning C1 condition device is activated in RT1 shown in FIG. 143 is performed. Therefore, the stop control of the reel 31 when the 1BB condition device is activated in RT1 shown in FIG. 136 is not performed. The same applies when winning numbers "26" to "28" are won in a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT.
Furthermore, in non-RT (non-internal), the reel 31 is not controlled to stop when the 1BB condition device is activated, and even in special games (when RB is activated when the 1BB condition is activated), when the 1BB condition device is activated. Stop control of the reels 31 is never performed.

As shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, in the tenth embodiment, the replay condition devices range from the replay A condition device corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number “1” to the replay condition device corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number “8”. There are 8 types of replay H condition devices.
In the tenth embodiment, the replay condition device is a lottery target in non-RT (non-internal) and RT1 (internal), but is not a lottery target in special games (when RB is activated when 1BB is activated). 147 to 149).

The Replay A condition device includes "3" types of winning combinations, Replay 01 to Replay 03, and when the Replay A condition device is activated, any one of the winning combinations included in the winning combination is activated, depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, in non-RT (not inside), when the replay A condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in push order 123 (left center right), with a probability of "1/1" ( The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 01 or Replay 02 is stopped and displayed on the active line (Replay 01 or Replay 02 wins) (at a 100% probability, always).

As mentioned above, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 01 is "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay", and the arrangement is "PB=1". Therefore, no matter at which operation timing the stop switch 42 is operated, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 01 can always be stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 02 is arranged in "PB≠1", but at the first stop on the left when the Replay A condition device is activated, either Replay 01 or Replay 02 is selected depending on the operation timing of the stop switch 42. By stopping the symbols corresponding to the crabs on the active line, the number of stopping results is diversified.

Also, in non-RT mode, when the Replay A condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 132 (center left/right), there is a probability of "1/1" that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 01 will be on the active line. The reels 31 are stopped and displayed so as to be stopped and displayed.
Furthermore, in non-RT, when the replay A condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 213 (middle left and right), there is a probability of "1/1" that the symbol corresponding to replay 01 or replay 02 will be displayed. The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the combination is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Furthermore, in non-RT, when the replay A condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in push order 231 (middle right left), push order 312 (right left middle), or push order 321 (right middle left), The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 03 is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1".
In addition, since the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 03 is arranged in "PB=1", it can always be stopped and displayed on the active line.
Also, in RT1 (inside), when the replay A condition device is activated, the 1BB condition device and the replay A condition device are activated simultaneously, but when the replay A condition device of RT1 is activated, the replay of non-RT The same stop control of the reel 31 as when the A condition device is activated is performed.

The Replay B condition device includes "4" types of winning combinations, Replay 01 to Replay 04, and when the Replay B condition device is activated, any one of the winning combinations included in the winning combination is activated, depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed on the active line.
At press order 123 and press order 213 when the Replay B condition device is activated in non-RT (non-internal), the press order 123 and press order 213 are the same as when the Replay A condition device is activated in non-RT. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 01 or Replay 02 is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "/1".
In addition, at press order 231 and press order 321 when the Replay B condition device is activated in non-RT, "1/1" is pressed in the same way as press order 231 and press order 321 when the Replay A condition device is activated in non-RT. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 03 is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of .

In non-RT, at press order 132 when the Replay B condition device is activated, the reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 01 or Replay 04 is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1". .
In addition, in non-RT, at press order 312 when the Replay B condition device is activated, the reels 31 are stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 03 or Replay 04 is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1". Control.
The symbol combination corresponding to Replay 04 is "PB≠1" arrangement, but it corresponds to Replay 04 according to the operation timing of the stop switch 42 at press order 132 or press order 312 when the Replay B condition device is activated. By stopping the symbols to be played on the active line, the number of stopping results is diversified.
Furthermore, when the replay B condition device of RT1 (inside) is activated, the 1BB condition device and the replay B condition device are activated simultaneously, but when the replay B condition device of RT1 is activated, the non-RT replay B condition device is activated. The same stop control of the reel 31 as at the time is performed.

The Replay C condition device includes "4" types of winning combinations, Replay 01 to Replay 03 and Replay 05, and when the Replay C condition device is activated, the winning combinations include the winning combinations depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to any replay is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In non-RT (not inside), when the Replay C condition device is activated, press order 123, press order 132, press order 213, and press order 231 correspond to replay 05 with a probability of "1/1". The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combinations are stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, since the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 05 is arranged in "PB=1", it can always be stopped and displayed on the active line.

Also, at press order 312 and press order 321 when the Replay C condition device is activated in non-RT, "1/1" is pressed in the same way as press order 312 and press order 321 when the Replay A condition device is activated in non-RT. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 03 is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of .
Note that when the RT1 (internal) Replay C condition device is activated, the 1BB condition device and the Replay C condition device are activated at the same time, but when the RT1 Replay C condition device is activated, the non-RT Replay C condition device is activated. The same stop control of the reel 31 as at the time is performed.

The Replay D condition device includes "4" types of winning combinations, Replay 01 to Replay 03 and Replay 06, and when the Replay D condition device is activated, the winning combinations include the winning combinations depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to any replay is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In non-RT (not inside), when the Replay D condition device is activated, press order 123, press order 132, press order 213, and press order 231 correspond to replay 06 with a probability of "1/1". The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combinations are stopped and displayed on the active line.
Note that since the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 06 is arranged in "PB=1", it can always be stopped and displayed on the active line.

Also, at press order 312 and press order 321 when the Replay D condition device is activated in non-RT, "1/1" is pressed in the same way as press order 312 and press order 321 when the Replay A condition device is activated in non-RT. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 03 is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of .
Furthermore, when the Replay D condition device of RT1 (inside) is activated, the 1BB condition device and the Replay D condition device are activated simultaneously, but when the Replay D condition device of RT1 is activated, the Replay D condition device of non-RT is activated. The same stop control of the reel 31 as at the time is performed.

The Replay E condition device includes "4" types of winning combinations, Replay 01 to Replay 03 and Replay 07, and when the Replay E condition device is activated, the winning combinations include the winning combinations depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to any replay is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In non-RT (not inside), when the Replay E condition device is activated, press order 123, press order 132, press order 213, and press order 231 correspond to replay 07 with a probability of "1/1". The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combinations are stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, since the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 07 is arranged in "PB=1", it can always be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, at press order 312 and press order 321 when the Replay E condition device is activated in non-RT, "1/1" is pressed in the same way as press order 312 and press order 321 when the Replay A condition device is activated in non-RT. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 03 is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of .
Note that when the Replay E condition device of RT1 (inside) is activated, the 1BB condition device and the Replay E condition device are activated at the same time, but when the Replay E condition device of RT1 is activated, the Replay E condition device of non-RT is activated. The same stop control of the reel 31 as at the time is performed.

The Replay F condition device includes "4" types of winning combinations, Replay 01 to Replay 03 and Replay 08, and when the Replay F condition device is activated, the winning combinations include the winning combinations depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to any replay is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In non-RT (not inside), when the Replay F condition device is activated, press order 123, press order 132, press order 213, and press order 231 correspond to replay 08 with a probability of "1/1". The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combinations are stopped and displayed on the active line.
Note that since the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 08 is arranged in "PB=1", it can always be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, at press order 312 and press order 321 when the replay F condition device is activated in non-RT, "1/1" is pressed in the same way as press order 312 and press order 321 when the replay A condition device is activated in non-RT. The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 03 is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of .
Note that when the replay F condition device of RT1 (inside) is activated, the 1BB condition device and the replay F condition device are activated at the same time, but when the replay F condition device of RT1 is activated, the replay F condition device of the non-RT is activated. The same stop control of the reel 31 as at the time is performed.

The Replay G condition device includes "5" types of winning combinations, Replay 01 to Replay 03, Replay 06, and Replay 09. When the Replay G condition device is activated, the winning combinations The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any replay included in the replay is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In non-RT (non-internal), at press order 123 and press order 132 when the Replay G condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 09 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1". , controls the reel 31 to stop.
Note that since the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 09 is arranged in "PB=1", it can always be stopped and displayed on the active line.

Also, at press order 213 when the Replay G condition device is activated in a non-RT, it corresponds to Replay 01 or Replay 02 with a probability of "1/1", similar to the press order 213 when the Replay A condition device is activated in a non-RT. The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combinations to be performed are stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, when the replay G condition device is activated in non-RT, the push order is 231, the push order is 312, and the push order is 321. Similarly to time 321, the reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 03 is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1".
Furthermore, when the replay G condition device of RT1 (inside) is activated, the 1BB condition device and the replay G condition device are activated simultaneously, but when the replay G condition device of RT1 is activated, the replay G condition device of non-RT is activated. The same stop control of the reel 31 as at the time is performed.

The Replay H condition device includes "5" types of winning combinations, Replay 01 to Replay 03, Replay 10, and Replay 11. When the Replay H condition device is activated, the winning combinations The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to any replay included in the replay is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In non-RT (non-internal), at press order 123 and press order 132 when the Replay H condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 10 or Replay 11 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" The reel 31 is controlled to stop so as to do so.

Here, the "bar A" of the left reel 31 constituting the replay 10 has a "PB≠1" arrangement, but the "7", "bar B", "watermelon" and "bar" of the middle reel 31 constituting the replay 10 "Cherry A" has a total arrangement of "PB = 1", and "7", "Bar A", "Bar B" and "Cherry A" on the right reel 31 that constitute Replay 10 have a total of "PB = 1" It is the arrangement.
In addition, "7", "bar B" and "blank B" of the left reel 31 that constitute the replay 11 are arranged in "PB≠1", but "7", "bar B" of the middle reel 31 that constitutes the replay 11 are "A", "Bar B" and "Cherry A" are placed in a total of "PB = 1", and "Watermelon" and "Cherry B" on the right reel 31 that constitutes Replay 11 are placed in a total of "PB = 1" It is.
Further, "bar A", "7", "bar B" and "blank B" on the left reel 31 are totaled "PB=1".
Therefore, at the first stop on the left, any of the symbols "Bar A", "7", "Bar B", or "Blank B" on the left reel 31 can always be stopped on the active line, so the replay H At the time of the first left stop when the conditional device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 10 or Replay 11 can always be stopped and displayed on the active line.

Also, at press order 213 when the Replay H condition device is activated in non-RT, it corresponds to Replay 01 or Replay 02 with a probability of "1/1", similar to press order 213 when the Replay A condition device is activated in non-RT. The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combinations to be performed are stopped and displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, when the replay H condition device is activated in non-RT, the push order is 231, the push order is 312, and the push order is 321. Similarly to time 321, the reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 03 is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1".
Note that when the replay H condition device of RT1 (inside) is activated, the 1BB condition device and the replay H condition device are activated at the same time, but when the replay H condition device of RT1 is activated, the replay H condition device of the non-RT is activated. The same stop control of the reel 31 as at the time is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 139 to 146, in the tenth embodiment, the winning condition devices range from winning A1 condition device corresponding to winning and replay condition device number “9” to winning condition device corresponding to winning and replay condition device number “36”. It has 28 types of winning conditions.
In the tenth embodiment, the winning A1 condition device to the winning J condition device are subject to lottery in non-RT (non-internal) and RT1 (internal), but in the special game (when RB is activated when 1BB is activated). are not eligible for lottery (Figures 147 to 149).
In addition, the winning K condition device is subject to a lottery in special games (when RB is activated when 1BB is activated), but not in non-RT (non-internal) and RT1 (internal) (Fig. 147~ Figure 149).

The winning A1 condition device selects the following winning combinations as winning combinations: Small Win 01, Small Win 03, Small Win 04, Small Win 13, Small Win 15, Small Win 21 to Small Win 24, Small Win 31, Small Win 35, Small Win 41, and This includes "13" types of small winning combinations 42. When the winning A1 condition device is activated, these small winning combinations will be won in duplicate, and the symbol combination corresponding to any of the small winning combinations included in the winning winning combination will be stopped and displayed on the active line depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The reel 31 is controlled to stop so as to do so.

Here, the following method can be cited as a method for stopping the reels 31 when multiple types of small winning combinations with different numbers of medals are won.
As a first priority, if all the symbols (on the reel 31) constituting the winning symbol combination can be stopped on the active line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.
Next, when it is not possible to stop all the symbols constituting the winning symbol combination on the active line (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the second priority is "quantity priority" or " The reels 31 are controlled to stop by either "Number Priority".
Furthermore, "priority on the number of medals" means that among the symbol combinations of winning combinations, the symbol on the reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination with the highest number of medals paid out is prioritized and stopped (drawn) on the active line. Say something.
On the other hand, "number priority" means that the symbols on the reel 31 are prioritized and stopped on the active line so that the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line is maximized.

In the tenth embodiment, when the win A1 condition device to the win B8 condition device are activated, a state is entered in which multiple types of small winning combinations with different payout numbers of medals are won multiple times.
When the win A1 condition device to the win B8 condition device are activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop with priority given to the number of pieces when the push order is correct, and the reels 31 are controlled to be stopped with priority given to the number of pieces when the push order is incorrect.
As a result, when the win A1 condition device to the win B8 condition device are activated, the symbol combinations (types of small winning combinations) that are stopped and displayed on the active line will differ depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, and this will affect the game result. There will be an advantage/disadvantage in (the number of medals paid out).

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, when the win A1 condition device to the win B8 condition device are activated, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the operation mode (pressing order and/or operation timing) of the stop switch 42. .
In this way, a winning combination in which the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is referred to as a "biased winning combination".
That is, a biased combination has different winning combinations depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, and has a unilaterally advantageous pressing order and another pressing order (unilaterally disadvantageous pressing order), When the stop switch 42 is operated in a unilaterally advantageous press order in a game in which a winning combination is won, the medals for that one game are This is a winning combination in which the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out (the expected value without considering the expected value related to AT) is high.

The biased winning combination is composed of multiple types of small winning combinations, and the winning of the biased winning combination corresponds to the multiple winning of these multiple types of small winning combinations. When a biased winning combination is won (when multiple types of small winning combinations are won), if the stop switch 42 is operated in a unilaterally advantageous pressing order, the small winning combination with the largest number of payouts (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as "higher bid") may win a prize. On the other hand, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than the unilaterally advantageous pressing order when winning a biased combination, the number priority control will cause the minor winning combination with the highest number of payouts to not be won, and the other minor winning combinations will not win. (hereinafter referred to as the "Guideline") will be eligible to win.
It should be noted that when the quantity priority control is executed, generally the higher number wins with "PB=1".
On the other hand, when quantity priority control is executed,
a) When the low price is "PB=1" and you win,
b) There is a case where the low bet wins with "PB≠1", or where none of the minor roles wins (misses winning of the winning role).

In the tenth embodiment, the win A1 condition device to the win B8 condition device correspond to the biased combination. The winning A1 condition device to the winning A8 condition device are collectively referred to as the “biased bell A group”, and the winning B1 condition device to the winning B8 condition device are collectively referred to as the “biased bell B group”.
Furthermore, the order of pressing the stop switch 42 includes sequential pressing (left first stop) and irregular pressing (middle first stop or right first stop). "Jun" corresponds to an irregular push.
Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, the small winning combination 01 corresponds to a high bet (also referred to as a "high bell"), and the small winning combinations 02 to 42 correspond to a cheap bet (also referred to as a "cheap bell"). Equivalent to.

Furthermore, in the biased combination, the correct answer pressing order is not evenly assigned to the pressing order of the six choices. In the tenth embodiment, the correct press order is not assigned to the regular presses, and the correct press order is assigned to the irregular presses. Then, when a biased combination is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated by an irregular press, the player is unilaterally advantageous. From this, when winning a biased combination, the irregular push becomes a unilaterally advantageous push order, and the regular push becomes a unilaterally disadvantageous push order. Furthermore, "unbalanced" indicates that the advantageous pressing order is biased towards irregular pressing.
Specifically, in a game in which a biased winning combination is won, the rate at which the high number wins when the stop switch 42 is operated by sequential pressing is set as "R1 (%)", and the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing. When the percentage of high bets winning is defined as "R2 (%)",
"R1<R2"
It is configured so that.
In particular, in the tenth embodiment, "R1=0 (%)" is set.

In non-RT (non-internal), when the winning A1 condition device is activated, the press order 213 (middle left and right) is the correct press order, and the other press orders are incorrect press orders.
In non-RT, when the winning A1 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 213, there is a probability of "1/1" (with a probability of 100%, always) due to the number of coins. The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to combination 01 (11 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop in the middle when the winning A1 condition device is activated, the "bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped at the middle middle row due to the number of winnings, and at the second stop on the left, , the "bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped at the middle left stage, and at the third stop on the right, the "bell" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped at the middle right stage. Thereby, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 01 can be stopped and displayed on the active line with "PB=1".

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 231 when the winning A1 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/2" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``1/2'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop of the winning A1 condition device operation, the "Bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 constituting the small winning combination 01 is given priority to the number of winnings, as described above. Stop at the middle middle stage. Thereafter, at the second stop on the right, "Watermelon" or "Cherry B" (total "PB=1") on the right reel 31 constituting the small winning combination 13 is stopped at the middle right row based on quantity priority. Thereafter, at the third stop on the left, control is performed so that "7" or "bar A" (both "PB≠1") of the left reel 31 is stopped at the middle row on the left.

Here, "7" on the left reel 31 is placed only at "1" location of symbol number "14". Therefore, when any symbol from "Replay" of symbol number "10" to "7" of symbol number "14" on the left reel 31 is located on the active line (middle left row), the left stop switch 42 Unless is operated, "7" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, the probability that "7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/20=1/4".

Similarly, the "bar A" on the left reel 31 is placed only at the "1" location of the symbol number "9". Therefore, when any symbol from symbol number "5""Replay" to symbol number "9""BarA" on the left reel 31 is located on the active line (left middle row), the left stop switch is activated. 42 is not operated, the "bar A" of the left reel 31 cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, the probability that "bar A" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/20=1/4".
From the above, the probability that "7" or "bar A" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the active line (middle left row) is "10/20=1/2".
Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 123 when the winning A1 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 03 (payout of 3 pieces) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" due to number priority. .
Specifically, in non-RT, when the first stop on the left when the winning A1 condition device is activated, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped at the middle left row due to the number of pieces, and when the second stop is in the middle, , the "Replay" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped at the middle middle row, and when the right third stop is made, the "Blank A" or "Blank B" (total "PB=1") of the right reel 31 is moved to the right. Stop in the middle. Thereby, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 03 can be stopped and displayed on the active line with "PB=1".
In addition, in non-RT, at press order 132 when the winning A1 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 03 (payout of 3 pieces) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" due to number priority. .

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 312 when the winning A1 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 35 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop on the right when the winning A1 condition device is activated, "Watermelon" or "Cherry B" (total "PB = 1") on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row based on quantity priority. to stop. After that, at the second stop on the left, the "bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 constituting the small winning combination 35 is stopped at the middle left row, and when the third stop in the middle, the "Bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 constituting the small winning combination 35 is stopped at the middle row. The bar B" (PB≠1) is controlled so as to be stopped at the middle stage.

Here, the "bar B" of the middle reel 31 is arranged only at the "1" location of the symbol number "19". Therefore, when any symbol from "Blank A" of symbol number "15" to "Bar B" of symbol number "19" on the middle reel 31 is located on the active line (middle middle row), the middle stop occurs. Unless the switch 42 is operated, the "bar B" of the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, the probability that "bar B" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/20=1/4".
Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 35 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/4".

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 321 when the winning A1 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 31 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop on the right when the winning A1 condition device is activated, "Watermelon" or "Cherry B" (total "PB = 1") on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row based on quantity priority. to stop. After that, at the second stop in the middle, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 constituting the small winning combination 31 is stopped in the middle middle row, and when the third stop on the left is stopped, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 forming the small winning combination 31 is stopped in the middle middle row. Control is performed so that the bar "B" (PB≠1) is stopped at the middle left position.

Here, the "bar B" on the left reel 31 is placed only at the "1" location of the symbol number "19". Therefore, when any symbol from "Replay" with symbol number "15" to "Bar B" with symbol number "19" on the left reel 31 is located on the active line (middle left row), the left stop switch is activated. 42 is not operated, the "bar B" of the left reel 31 cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, the probability that "bar B" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/20=1/4".
Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 31 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/4".
In addition, in RT1 (inside), when the winning A1 condition device is activated, the 1BB condition device and the winning A1 condition device are activated simultaneously, but when the winning A1 condition device of RT1 is activated, the winning A1 condition device of non-RT The same stop control of the reel 31 as when the A1 condition device is activated is performed.

The winning A2 condition device selects the following winning combinations as winning combinations: Small Win 01, Small Win 03, Small Win 04, Small Win 14, Small Win 16, Small Win 21 to Small Win 24, Small Win 29, Small Win 33, Small Win 41, and This includes "13" types of small winning combinations 42.
In non-RT (non-internal), when the winning prize A2 condition device is activated, the press order 213 (middle left and right) is the correct press order, and the other press orders are the incorrect press order.
In non-RT mode, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 213 when the winning A2 condition device is activated, the small winning combination 01 (payout of 11 coins) is given priority to the number of coins with a probability of "1/1". The symbol combination (PB=1) will be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 231 when the winning A2 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 14 (1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/2" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``1/2'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop in the middle when the winning A2 condition device is activated, the “Bell” (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 that constitutes the small winning combination 01 is stopped in the middle middle row by giving priority to the number of winnings. . Thereafter, at the second stop on the right, "Watermelon" or "Cherry B" (total "PB=1") on the right reel 31 constituting the small winning combination 14 is stopped at the middle right row based on quantity priority. Thereafter, at the third stop on the left, the "bar B" or "blank B" (both "PB≠1") of the left reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the middle row on the left.

Here, the "bar B" on the left reel 31 is arranged only at the "1" position of the symbol number "19". Therefore, when any symbol from "Replay" of symbol number "15" to "Bar B" of symbol number "19" on the left reel 31 is located on the active line (middle left row), the left stop switch 42 is not operated, the "bar B" of the left reel 31 cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, the probability that "bar B" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/20=1/4".

Similarly, "Blank B" on the left reel 31 is placed only at the "1" location of symbol number "4". Therefore, when any symbol from "Replay" with symbol number "0" to "Blank B" with symbol number "4" on the left reel 31 is located on the active line (middle left row), the left stop switch 42 is not operated, the "blank B" of the left reel 31 cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, the probability that "Blank B" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/20=1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "bar B" or "blank B" of the left reel 31 can be stopped on the active line (left middle row) is "10/20=1/2".
Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 14 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 123 when the winning A2 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 03 (payout of 3 pieces) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" due to number priority. .
Furthermore, in non-RT, when the winning A2 condition device is activated and the push order is 132, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 03 (payout of 3 pieces) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" due to number priority. do.

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 312 when the winning A2 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 33 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop on the right when the winning A2 condition device is activated, "Watermelon" or "Cherry B" (total "PB = 1") on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row based on the number of pieces. to stop. After that, at the second stop on the left, the "Bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 constituting the small win 33 is stopped at the middle left row, and when the third stop is in the middle, the "Bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 constituting the small win 33 is stopped at the middle row. 7'' (PB≠1) is controlled so as to stop at the middle stage.

Here, "7" on the middle reel 31 is placed only at the "1" location of symbol number "9". Therefore, when any symbol from "Blank A" of symbol number "5" to "7" of symbol number "9" on the middle reel 31 is located on the active line (middle middle row), the middle stop switch is activated. 42 is not operated, "7" on the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped on the effective line. Therefore, the probability that "7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/20=1/4".
Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 33 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/4".

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 321 when the winning A2 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 29 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop on the right when the winning A2 condition device is activated, "Watermelon" or "Cherry B" (total "PB = 1") on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row based on quantity priority. to stop. After that, at the second stop in the middle, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 29 is stopped in the middle middle row, and when the third stop on the left is made, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 29 is stopped. 7'' (PB≠1) is controlled to stop at the middle left position.

Here, "7" on the left reel 31 is placed only at the "1" location of symbol number "14". Therefore, when any symbol from "Replay" of symbol number "10" to "7" of symbol number "14" on the left reel 31 is located on the active line (middle left row), the left stop switch 42 If is not operated, "7" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, the probability that "7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/20=1/4".
Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 29 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/4".
Furthermore, when the RT1 winning A2 condition device is activated, the same stop control of the reels 31 is performed as when the non-RT winning A2 condition device is activated.

The winning A3 condition device selects the following winning combinations as winning combinations: Small Win 01, Small Win 03, Small Win 04, Small Win 13, Small Win 15, Small Win 21 to Small Win 24, Small Win 32, Small Win 36, Small Win 41, and This includes "13" types of small winning combinations 42.
In non-RT (non-internal), when the winning prize A3 condition device is activated, the press order 231 (middle right, left) is the correct press order, and the other press orders are the incorrect press order.
In non-RT mode, when the winning A3 condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 231, the number of coins is given priority, and the small winning combination 01 (11 coins paid out) is supported with a probability of "1/1". The symbol combination (PB=1) will be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 213 when the winning A3 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 15 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/2" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``1/2'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop in the middle when the winning A3 condition device is activated, the "Bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 that constitutes the small winning combination 01 is stopped in the middle middle row, with priority given to the number of winnings. . After that, at the second stop on the left, "Cherry A" or "Blank A" (total "PB=1") of the left reel 31 constituting the small winning combination 15 is stopped at the middle row on the left by giving priority to the number of pieces. Thereafter, at the third stop on the right, control is performed so that "7" or "bar A" (both "PB≠1") of the right reel 31 is stopped at the middle row on the right.

Here, since the "7" on the right reel 31 is placed only at the "1" location of the symbol number "9", the probability that the "7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/ 20=1/4''.
Similarly, since "Bar A" on the right reel 31 is placed only in the "1" position of symbol number "4", the probability that "Bar A" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/20=1/4''.
From the above, the probability that "7" or "bar A" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line (middle right row) is "10/20=1/2".
Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 15 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 123 when the winning A3 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 03 (payout of 3 pieces) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" due to number priority. .
Furthermore, in non-RT, at press order 132 when the winning A3 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 03 (payout of 3 pieces) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" due to number priority. do.

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 312 when the winning A3 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 36 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop on the right when the winning A3 condition device is activated, "Watermelon" or "Cherry B" (total "PB = 1") on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row based on quantity priority. to stop. After that, at the second stop on the left, the "bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 constituting the small winning combination 36 is stopped at the middle left row, and when the third stop in the middle, the "bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 forming the small winning combination 36 is stopped at the middle row. Cherry A'' (PB≠1) is controlled so as to be stopped in the middle row.
Here, since "Cherry A" on the middle reel 31 is placed only at "1" location of symbol number "14", the probability that "Cherry A" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/20=1/4''.
Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 36 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/4".

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 321 when the winning A3 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 32 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop on the right when the winning A3 condition device is activated, "Watermelon" or "Cherry B" (total "PB = 1") on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row based on quantity priority. to stop. After that, at the second stop in the middle, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 32 is stopped in the middle middle row, and when the third stop on the left is made, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 32 is stopped. Blank B'' (PB≠1) is controlled to be stopped at the middle left position.

Here, since "Blank B" on the left reel 31 is placed only at "1" location of symbol number "4", the probability that "Blank B" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/20=1/4''.
Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 32 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/4".
Further, when the RT1 winning A3 condition device is activated, the same stop control of the reels 31 as when the non-RT winning A3 condition device is activated is performed.

The winning A4 condition device selects the following winning combinations as winning combinations: Small Win 01, Small Win 03, Small Win 04, Small Win 14, Small Win 16, Small Win 21 to Small Win 24, Small Win 30, Small Win 34, Small Win 41, and This includes "13" types of small winning combinations 42.
In non-RT (non-internal), when the winning A4 condition device is activated, the press order 231 (middle right, left) is the correct press order, and the other press orders are the incorrect press order.
In non-RT mode, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 231 when the winning A4 condition device is activated, the small winning combination 01 (payout of 11 coins) is given priority to the number of coins with a probability of "1/1". The symbol combination (PB=1) will be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 213 when the winning A4 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 16 (1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/2" due to number priority. , the probability of losing the winning hand is "1/2".
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop in the middle when the winning A4 condition device is activated, the “Bell” (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 that constitutes the small winning combination 01 is stopped in the middle middle row, with priority given to the number of winnings. . Thereafter, at the second left stop, the "cherry A" or "blank A" (total "PB=1") of the left reel 31 constituting the small winning combination 16 is stopped at the middle row on the left by giving priority to the number of pieces. Thereafter, at the third stop on the right, the "bar B" or "cherry A" (both "PB≠1") of the right reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the middle row on the right.

Here, since "Bar B" on the right reel 31 is placed only at "1" location of symbol number "19", the probability that "Bar B" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/20=1/4''.
Similarly, since "Cherry A" on the right reel 31 is placed only at "1" location of symbol number "14", the probability that "Cherry A" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/20=1/4''.
From the above, the probability that "Bar B" or "Cherry A" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line (middle right row) is "10/20=1/2".
Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 16 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 123 when the winning A4 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 03 (payout of 3 pieces) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" due to number priority. .
Furthermore, in non-RT, at press order 132 when the winning A4 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 03 (payout of 3 pieces) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/1'' due to number priority. do.

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 312 when the winning A4 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 34 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop on the right when the winning A4 condition device is activated, "Watermelon" or "Cherry B" (total "PB = 1") on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row based on quantity priority. to stop. After that, at the second stop on the left, the "Bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 constituting the small winning combination 34 is stopped at the middle left row, and when the third stop in the middle occurs, the "Bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 forming the small winning combination 34 is stopped at the middle row. The bar A" (PB≠1) is controlled so as to be stopped at the middle stage.
Here, since the "bar A" on the middle reel 31 is placed only at the "1" location of the symbol number "4", the probability that the "bar A" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/20=1/4''.
Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 34 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/4".

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 321 when the winning A4 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 30 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop on the right when the winning A4 condition device is activated, "Watermelon" or "Cherry B" (total "PB = 1") on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row based on quantity priority. to stop. After that, at the second stop in the middle, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 constituting the small winning combination 30 is stopped in the middle middle row, and when the third stop on the left is stopped, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 forming the small winning combination 30 is stopped in the middle middle row. The bar A" (PB≠1) is controlled so as to be stopped at the middle left position.

Here, since "Bar A" on the left reel 31 is placed only at "1" location of symbol number "9", the probability that "Bar A" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/20=1/4''.
Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 30 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/4".
Further, when the RT1 winning A4 condition device is activated, the same stop control of the reel 31 is performed as when the non-RT winning A4 condition device is activated.

The winning A5 condition device selects the following winning combinations as winning combinations: Small Win 01, Small Win 03, Small Win 04, Small Win 17, Small Win 19, Small Win 21 to Small Win 24, Small Win 27, Small Win 37, Small Win 41, and This includes "13" types of small winning combinations 42.
In non-RT (non-internal), when the winning A5 condition device is activated, the press order 312 (right, left, middle) is the correct press order, and the other press orders are the incorrect press order.
In non-RT mode, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 312 when the winning A5 condition device is activated, the small winning combination 01 (payout of 11 pieces) is given priority to the number of pieces with a probability of "1/1". The symbol combination (PB=1) will be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 321 when the winning A5 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 17 (1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/2" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``1/2'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop on the right when the winning A5 condition device is activated, the “bell” (PB=1) of the right reel 31 constituting the small winning combination 01 is stopped in the middle right row with priority given to the number of winnings. . Thereafter, at the time of the middle second stop, the "Watermelon" or "Blank B" (total "PB=1") of the middle reel 31 constituting the small winning combination 17 is stopped at the middle middle row by giving priority to the number of pieces. Thereafter, at the third stop on the left, control is performed so that "7" or "bar A" (both "PB≠1") of the left reel 31 is stopped at the middle row on the left.
As mentioned above, the probability that "7" or "bar A" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "1/2", so the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 17 can be stopped on the active line. The probability that it can be displayed is "1/2".

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 123 when the winning A5 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 03 (payout of 3 pieces) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" due to number priority. .
Furthermore, in non-RT, at press order 132 when the winning A5 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 03 (payout of 3 pieces) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/1'' due to number priority. do.

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 213 when the winning A5 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 23 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop in the middle when the winning A5 condition device is activated, the "blank A" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle row due to the number of objects. After that, at the second stop on the left, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 23 is stopped at the middle left stage, and when the third stop on the right is made, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 23 is stopped. Control is performed so that the bar "B" (PB≠1) is stopped at the middle right position.
Here, since "Bar B" on the right reel 31 is placed only at "1" location of symbol number "19", the probability that "Bar B" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "5/20=1/4''.
Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 23 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/4".

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 231 when the winning A5 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 27 (one piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop in the middle when the winning A5 condition device is activated, the "blank A" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle row due to number priority. After that, at the second stop on the right, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 27 is stopped at the middle right row, and when the third stop on the left is made, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 27 is stopped. Control is performed so that the bar "B" (PB≠1) is stopped at the middle left position.
As mentioned above, the probability that the "bar B" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "1/4", so the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 27 can be stopped and displayed on the active line. The probability of doing so is "1/4".
Further, when the RT1 winning A5 condition device is activated, the same stop control of the reel 31 is performed as when the non-RT winning A5 condition device is activated.

The winning A6 condition device has "13" types of winning combinations: small winning combinations 01, 03, 04, 18, 20 to 25, 38, 41, and 42. This includes:
In non-RT (non-internal), when the winning prize A6 condition device is activated, the press order 312 (right, left, center) is the correct press order, and the other press orders are the incorrect press order.
Then, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 312 when the winning A6 condition device is activated, the small winning combination 01 (payout of 11 pieces) is given priority to the number of pieces with a probability of "1/1". The symbol combination (PB=1) will be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 321 when the winning A6 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 18 (1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/2" due to number priority. , the probability of losing the winning hand is "1/2".
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop on the right when the winning A6 condition device is activated, the “bell” (PB=1) of the right reel 31 that constitutes the small winning combination 01 is stopped in the middle right row by giving priority to the number of winnings. . Thereafter, at the time of the middle second stop, the "Watermelon" or "Blank B" (total "PB=1") of the middle reel 31 constituting the small winning combination 18 is stopped at the middle stage by giving priority to the number of pieces. Thereafter, at the third stop on the left, the "bar B" or "blank B" (both "PB≠1") of the left reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the middle row on the left.
As mentioned above, the probability that "Bar B" or "Blank B" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on an active line is "1/2", so the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 18 can be stopped on an active line. The probability that the display can be stopped is "1/2".

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 123 when the winning A6 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 03 (3 pieces paid) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" due to number priority. .
Furthermore, in non-RT, at press order 132 when the winning A6 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 03 (payout of 3 pieces) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" due to number priority. do.

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 213 when the winning A6 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 21 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop in the middle when the winning A6 condition device is activated, the "blank A" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row based on the number of objects. After that, at the second stop on the left, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 21 is stopped at the middle left row, and when the third stop on the right is made, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 21 is stopped. 7'' (PB≠1) is controlled to stop at the middle right position.
As mentioned above, the probability that "7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "1/4", so the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 21 can be stopped and displayed on the active line. The probability is "1/4".

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 231 when the winning A6 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 25 (1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop in the middle when the winning A6 condition device is activated, the "blank A" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle row due to the number of pieces. After that, at the second stop on the right, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 constituting the small win 25 is stopped at the middle right row, and when the third stop on the left is stopped, the "Replay" (PB = 1) of the right reel 31 constituting the small win 25 is stopped. 7'' (PB≠1) is controlled to stop at the middle left position.
As mentioned above, the probability that "7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "1/4", so the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 25 can be stopped and displayed on the active line. The probability is "1/4".
Further, when the RT1 winning A6 condition device is activated, the same stop control of the reel 31 is performed as when the non-RT winning A6 condition device is activated.

The winning A7 condition device selects the following winning combinations as winning combinations: Small Win 01, Small Win 03, Small Win 04, Small Win 17, Small Win 19, Small Win 21 to Small Win 24, Small Win 28, Small Win 39, Small Win 41, and This includes "13" types of small winning combinations 42.
In non-RT (non-internal), when the winning prize A7 condition device is activated, the press order 321 (right middle left) is the correct press order, and the other press orders are the incorrect press order.
In non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 321 when the winning A7 condition device is activated, the small winning combination 01 (payout of 11 coins) is given priority to the number of coins with a probability of "1/1". The symbol combination (PB=1) will be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 312 when the winning A7 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 19 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/2" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``1/2'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, when the right first stop occurs when the winning A7 condition device is activated, the “bell” (PB=1) of the right reel 31 that constitutes the small winning combination 01 is stopped in the middle right row, with priority given to the number of winnings. . Thereafter, at the second stop on the left, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 constituting the small winning combination 19 is stopped at the middle row on the left by giving priority to the number of pieces. Thereafter, at the time of the middle third stop, control is performed so that "7" or "bar A" (both "PB≠1") of the middle reel 31 is stopped at the middle middle stage.
The "7" on the middle reel 31 is placed only at the "1" location of the symbol number "9", and the "bar A" of the middle reel 31 is located only at the "1" location of the symbol number "4". The probability that "7" or "bar A" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "1/2". Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 19 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 123 when the winning A7 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 03 (payout of 3 pieces) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of ``1/1'' due to number priority. .
Furthermore, in non-RT, at press order 132 when the winning A7 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 03 (payout of 3 pieces) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" due to number priority. do.

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 213 when the winning A7 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 24 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop in the middle when the winning A7 condition device is activated, the "blank A" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle row due to number priority. After that, at the second stop on the left, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 24 is stopped at the middle left stage, and when the third stop on the right is made, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 24 is stopped. Cherry A" (PB≠1) is controlled to stop at the middle right row.
As mentioned above, the probability that "Cherry A" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "1/4", so the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 24 can be stopped and displayed on the active line. The probability of doing so is "1/4".

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 231 when the winning A7 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 28 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop in the middle when the winning A7 condition device is activated, the "blank A" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row based on the number of objects. After that, at the second stop on the right, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 28 is stopped at the middle right row, and when the third stop on the left is made, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 28 is stopped. Blank B'' (PB≠1) is controlled to be stopped at the middle left position.
As mentioned above, the probability that "Blank B" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "1/4", so the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 28 can be stopped and displayed on the active line. The probability of doing so is "1/4".
Further, when the RT1 winning A7 condition device is activated, the same stop control of the reel 31 is performed as when the non-RT winning A7 condition device is activated.

The winning A8 condition device has ``13'' types of winning combinations: Small Win 01, Small Win 03, Small Win 04, Small Win 18, Small Win 20 to Small Win 24, Small Win 26, and Small Win 40 to Small Win 42. This includes:
In non-RT (non-internal), when the winning prize A8 condition device is activated, the press order 321 (right center left) is the correct press order, and the other press orders are the incorrect press order.
Then, in non-RT, when the winning A8 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 321, the number of coins is prioritized, and the small winning combination 01 (11 coins paid out) is supported with a probability of "1/1". The symbol combination (PB=1) will be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 312 when the winning A8 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 20 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/2" due to number priority. , the probability of losing the winning hand is "1/2".
Specifically, in non-RT, when the right first stop occurs when the winning A8 condition device is activated, the “bell” (PB=1) of the right reel 31 that constitutes the small winning combination 01 is stopped in the middle right row based on the number of winnings. . Thereafter, at the second stop on the left, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 constituting the small winning combination 20 is stopped at the middle row on the left by giving priority to the number of pieces. Thereafter, at the time of the middle third stop, the "bar B" or "cherry A" (both "PB≠1") of the middle reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the middle middle stage.
“Bar B” on the middle reel 31 is placed only at the “1” location of symbol number “19”, and “Cherry A” on the middle reel 31 is placed only at the “1” location of the symbol number “14”. , the probability that "Bar B" or "Cherry A" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "1/2". Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 20 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 123 when the winning A8 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 03 (payout of 3 pieces) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" due to number priority. .
Furthermore, in non-RT, when the winning A8 condition device is activated and the push order is 132, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 03 (payout of 3 pieces) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" due to number priority. do.

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 213 when the winning A8 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 22 (one coin payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop in the middle when the winning A8 condition device is activated, the "blank A" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row based on the number of objects. After that, at the second stop on the left, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 22 is stopped at the middle left row, and when the third stop on the right is made, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 22 is stopped. Control is performed so that the bar A'' (PB≠1) is stopped at the middle right position.
As mentioned above, the probability that the "bar A" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "1/4", so the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 22 can be stopped and displayed on the active line. The probability of doing so is "1/4".

In addition, in non-RT, at press order 231 when the winning A8 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 26 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" due to number priority. , there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
Specifically, in non-RT, at the first stop in the middle when the winning A8 condition device is activated, the "blank A" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped in the middle middle row based on the number of objects. After that, at the second stop on the right, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 26 is stopped at the middle right stage, and when the third stop on the left is made, the "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 26 is stopped. The bar A" (PB≠1) is controlled so as to be stopped at the middle left position.
As mentioned above, the probability that "bar A" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "1/4", so the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 26 can be stopped and displayed on the active line. The probability of doing so is "1/4".
Further, when the RT1 winning A8 condition device is activated, the same stop control of the reel 31 is performed as when the non-RT winning A8 condition device is activated.

In this way, for the winning A1 condition device to the winning A8 condition device, the correct answer is that the small winning combination 01 (high bell) wins in the irregular press (press order 213, press order 231, press order 312, or press order 321). While the pressing order is assigned, the correct pressing order in which the small winning combination 01 wins is not assigned to the pressing order (pressing order 123 or pressing order 132). Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated in order when the winning A1 condition device to the winning prize A8 condition device are operated, the small winning combination 01 does not win, but the small winning combination 03 (cheap bell) wins. Therefore, normal pressing corresponds to a pressing order that is unilaterally disadvantageous, and irregular pressing corresponds to a unilaterally advantageous pressing order.
However, when the win A1 condition device to the win A8 condition device are activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in order, the small winning combination 03 (3 pieces paid) will be won with a probability of “1/1”, so the game medals will not be reduced. The order of pressing when the winning A1 condition device to the winning A8 condition device is activated is a unilaterally disadvantageous pressing order, but the player's medals are prevented from decreasing and the player is not disadvantaged too much. .

Next, the prize winning B1 condition device to winning prize B8 condition device will be explained.
For the winning B1 condition device to the winning B8 condition device, the stop control of the reel 31 is different between non-RT (non-internal) and RT1 (internal).
The winning B1 condition device has "9" types of winning combinations: Small Win 01, Small Win 11, Small Win 13, Small Win 15, Small Win 23, Small Win 31, Small Win 35, Small Win 41, and Small Win 42. This includes:
In non-RT (non-internal mode), when the winning B1 condition device is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that any one-card winning combination is won even when the stop switch 42 is operated in any pressing order. . Furthermore, in non-RT, when the winning B1 condition device is activated, the winning probability of a one-card winning combination differs depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.

Specifically, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in push order 123 or push order 132 when the winning B1 condition device is activated, there is a probability of "1/4" that the small winning combination 23 (1 piece payout ) The symbol combination corresponding to the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, and there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning combination will be missed.
The "replay" on the left reel 31 that makes up the small win 23 has a "PB=1" arrangement, and the "Blank A" on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small win 23 also has a "PB=1" arrangement, but the small win ``Bar B'' of the right reel 31 constituting 23 is placed only at the ``1'' location of the symbol number ``19''. Therefore, the probability that the "bar B" of the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "1/4", so the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 23 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/4". is "1/4".

In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 213 when the winning B1 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 15 (1 piece payout) is obtained with a probability of "1/2". It will stop and display on the active line, and there is a probability of ``1/2'' that you will miss the winning combination. This point is similar to the pressing order 213 when the winning prize A3 condition device is activated.
In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 231 when the winning B1 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 (1 piece payout) is obtained with a probability of 1/2. It will stop and display on the active line, and there is a probability of ``1/2'' that you will miss the winning combination. This point is similar to the pressing order 231 when the winning A1 condition device is activated.

In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 312 or 321 when the winning B1 condition device is activated, there is a probability of "1/1" that the small win 41 or the small win 42 (both The symbol combination corresponding to the one-piece payout is stopped and displayed on the active line.
"Blank A" on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the small winnings 41 and 42 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and "Watermelon" and "Cherry B" on the right reel 31 that make up the small winnings 41 and 42 The sum is "PB=1" arrangement.
In addition, "Blank A" on the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 41 has a "PB≠1" arrangement, and "Cherry A" on the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 42 also has a "PB≠1" arrangement. , "Blank A" and "Cherry A" on the left reel 31 have a total arrangement of "PB=1".
In this way, the symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combinations 41 and 42 are individually arranged in "PB≠1", but since the small winning combinations 41 and 42 are won twice, the small winning combinations 41 and 42 are A symbol combination corresponding to any of the small winning combinations 42 can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In RT1 (inside middle), when the winning prize B1 condition device is activated, the push order 213 (middle left and right) becomes the correct push order, and the other push orders become incorrect push orders.
Then, in RT1, when the winning B1 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 213, it corresponds to the small winning combination 01 (11 coins paid out) with a probability of "1/1" due to the number of coins priority. The symbol combination (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, in RT1, at press order 231 when the winning B1 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 (1 piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/2" due to the number of pieces priority. There is a probability of ``1/2'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is similar to the pressing order 231 when the winning A1 condition device is activated.

In addition, in RT1, at press order 123 or press order 132 when the winning B1 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 23 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4". There is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is the same as the push order 123 or the push order 132 when the winning prize B1 condition device is activated in non-RT.
In addition, in RT1, at press order 312 when the winning B1 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 35 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", and the winning combination will be displayed on the active line with a probability of "3/4". It will be left out. Furthermore, in RT1, at press order 321 when the winning B1 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 31 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", and a winning combination will be displayed on the active line with a probability of "3/4". will be left out. This point is the same as the push order 312 and the push order 321 when the winning A1 condition device is activated.

The winning B2 condition device has "9" types of winning combinations: Small Win 01, Small Win 09, Small Win 14, Small Win 16, Small Win 21, Small Win 29, Small Win 33, Small Win 41, and Small Win 42. This includes:
In non-RT (non-internal mode), when the winning B2 condition device is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that any one-card winning combination is won even when the stop switch 42 is operated in any pressing order. . Furthermore, in non-RT, when the winning B2 condition device is activated, the winning probability of a one-card winning combination differs depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.

Specifically, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in push order 123 or push order 132 when the winning prize B2 condition device is activated, there is a probability of "1/4" that the small winning combination 21 (1 piece payout ) The symbol combination corresponding to the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, and there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning combination will be missed.
The "replay" on the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 21 has a "PB=1" arrangement, and the "blank A" on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 21 also has a "PB=1" arrangement, but the small winning combination 21 on the right reel 31 is placed only at the "1" position of symbol number "9". Therefore, the probability that "7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "1/4", so the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 21 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is 1/4. It is "1/4".

In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 213 when the winning B2 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 16 (one coin payout) is obtained with a probability of "1/2". It will stop and display on the active line, and there is a probability of ``1/2'' that you will miss the winning combination. This point is similar to the press order 213 when the winning A4 condition device is activated.
In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 231 when the winning B2 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 14 (one coin payout) is obtained with a probability of "1/2". It will stop and display on the active line, and there is a probability of ``1/2'' that you will miss the winning combination. This point is similar to the press order 231 when the winning prize A2 condition device is activated.
In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 312 or 321 when the winning B2 condition device is activated, there is a probability of "1/1" that the small win 41 or the small win 42 (both The symbol combination corresponding to the one-piece payout is stopped and displayed on the active line. This point is the same as the push order 312 or the push order 321 when the winning prize B1 condition device is activated in non-RT.

In RT1 (inside middle), when the winning prize B2 condition device is activated, the push order 213 (middle left and right) becomes the correct push order, and the other push orders become incorrect push orders.
Then, in RT1, when the winning B2 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 213, it corresponds to the small winning combination 01 (paying out 11 pieces) with a probability of "1/1" due to the number of pieces priority. The symbol combination (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, in RT1, at the press order 231 when the winning B2 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 14 (1 piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/2" due to number priority. There is a probability of ``1/2'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is similar to the press order 231 when the winning prize A2 condition device is activated.

In addition, in RT1, at press order 123 or press order 132 when the winning B2 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 21 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4". There is a ``3/4'' probability that the winning hand will be missed. This point is the same as the push order 123 or the push order 132 when the winning prize B2 condition device is activated in non-RT.
In addition, in RT1, at press order 312 when the winning B2 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 33 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", and the winning combination will be displayed on the active line with a probability of "3/4". It will be left out. Furthermore, in RT1, at press order 321 when the winning B2 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 29 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", and a winning combination will be displayed on the active line with a probability of "3/4". will be left out. This point is the same as the push order 312 and the push order 321 when the winning prize A2 condition device is activated.

The winning B3 condition device has "9" types of winning combinations: small winnings 01, small winnings 12, small winnings 13, small winnings 15, small winnings 24, small winnings 32, small winnings 36, small winnings 41, and small winnings 42. This includes:
In non-RT (non-internal), when the winning B3 condition device is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that any one-card winning combination is won even when the stop switch 42 is operated in any pressing order. . Furthermore, in non-RT, when the winning B3 condition device is activated, the winning probability of a one-card winning combination differs depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.

Specifically, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in push order 123 or push order 132 when the winning B3 condition device is activated, there is a probability of "1/4" that the small winning combination 24 (1 piece payout ) The symbol combination corresponding to the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, and there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning combination will be missed.
The "replay" on the left reel 31 that makes up the small win 24 has a "PB=1" arrangement, and the "blank A" on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small win 24 also has a "PB=1" arrangement, but the small win ``Cherry A'' on the right reel 31 constituting the number 24 is placed only at the ``1'' position of the symbol number ``14''. Therefore, the probability that "Cherry A" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "1/4", so the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 24 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/4". is "1/4".

In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 213 when the winning B3 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 15 (one payout) will be produced with a probability of "1/2". It will stop and display on the active line, and there is a probability of ``1/2'' that you will miss the winning combination. This point is the same as the push order 213 when the winning A3 condition device is activated.
In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 231 when the winning B3 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 (1 piece payout) is obtained with a probability of "1/2". It will stop and display on the active line, and there is a probability of ``1/2'' that you will miss the winning combination. This point is similar to the press order 231 when the winning A1 condition device is activated.
In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 312 or 321 when the winning prize B3 condition device is activated, there is a probability of "1/1" that the small win 41 or the small win 42 (both The symbol combination corresponding to the one-piece payout is stopped and displayed on the active line. This point is the same as the push order 312 or the push order 321 when the winning prize B1 condition device is activated in non-RT.

In RT1 (inside), when the winning prize B3 condition device is activated, the press order 231 (middle right, left) is the correct press order, and the other press orders are the incorrect press order.
Then, in RT1, when the winning B3 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 231, the small winning combination 01 (payout of 11 pieces) is given priority to the number of pieces with a probability of "1/1". The symbol combination (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, in RT1, at press order 213 when the winning B3 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 15 (1 piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/2" due to number priority. There is a probability of ``1/2'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is the same as the push order 213 when the winning A3 condition device is activated.

In addition, in RT1, at press order 123 or press order 132 when the winning B3 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 24 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", There is a ``3/4'' probability that the winning hand will be missed. This point is the same as the push order 123 or the push order 132 when the winning prize B3 condition device is activated in non-RT.
In addition, in RT1, at press order 312 when the winning B3 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 36 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", and the winning combination will be displayed with a probability of "3/4". It will be left out. Furthermore, in RT1, at press order 321 when the winning B3 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 32 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", and a winning combination will be displayed on the active line with a probability of "3/4". will be left out. This point is the same as the push order 312 and the push order 321 when the winning prize A3 condition device is activated.

The winning B4 condition device has "9" types of winning combinations: Small Win 01, Small Win 10, Small Win 14, Small Win 16, Small Win 22, Small Win 30, Small Win 34, Small Win 41, and Small Win 42. This includes:
In non-RT (non-internal), when the winning B4 condition device is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that any one-card winning combination is won even when the stop switch 42 is operated in any pressing order. . Furthermore, in non-RT, when the winning B4 condition device is activated, the winning probability of a one-card winning combination differs depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.

Specifically, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in push order 123 or push order 132 when the winning B4 condition device is activated, there is a probability of "1/4" that the small winning combination 22 (1 piece payout ) The symbol combination corresponding to the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, and there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning combination will be missed.
"Replay" on the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 22 has a "PB=1" arrangement, and "Blank A" on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 22 also has a "PB=1" arrangement, but the small winning combination ``Bar A'' of the right reel 31 constituting 22 is placed only at the ``1'' location of the symbol number ``4''. Therefore, the probability that "bar A" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "1/4", so the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 22 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/4". is "1/4".

In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 213 when the winning B4 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 16 (1 piece payout) is obtained with a probability of "1/2". It will stop and display on the active line, and there is a probability of ``1/2'' that you will miss the winning combination. This point is similar to the press order 213 when the winning A4 condition device is activated.
In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 231 when the winning B4 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 14 (one coin payout) is obtained with a probability of "1/2". It will stop and display on the active line, and there is a probability of ``1/2'' that you will miss the winning combination. This point is similar to the press order 231 when the winning prize A2 condition device is activated.
In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 312 or 321 when the winning B4 condition device is activated, there is a probability of "1/1" that the small win 41 or the small win 42 (both The symbol combination corresponding to the one-piece payout is stopped and displayed on the active line. This point is the same as the push order 312 or the push order 321 when the winning prize B1 condition device is activated in non-RT.

In RT1 (inside), when the winning prize B4 condition device is activated, the press order 231 (middle right, left) is the correct press order, and the other press orders are the incorrect press order.
Then, in RT1, when the winning B4 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 231, it corresponds to the small winning combination 01 (paying out 11 pieces) with a probability of "1/1" due to the number of pieces priority. The symbol combination (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, in RT1, at press order 213 when the winning B4 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 16 (1 piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/2" due to the number of pieces priority. There is a probability of ``1/2'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is the same as the press order 213 when the winning A4 condition device is activated.

In addition, in RT1, at press order 123 or press order 132 when the winning B4 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 22 (one piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", There is a ``3/4'' probability that the winning hand will be missed. This point is the same as the push order 123 or the push order 132 when the winning prize B4 condition device is activated in non-RT.
In addition, in RT1, at press order 312 when the winning B4 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 34 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", and the winning combination will be displayed with a probability of "3/4". It will be left out. Furthermore, in RT1, at press order 321 when the winning B4 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 30 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", and a winning combination will be displayed on the active line with a probability of "3/4". will be left out. This point is the same as the push order 312 and the push order 321 when the winning A4 condition device is activated.

The winning B5 condition device has ``9'' types of winning combinations: Small Win 01, Small Win 11, Small Win 17, Small Win 19, Small Win 23, Small Win 27, Small Win 37, Small Win 41, and Small Win 42. This includes:
In non-RT (non-internal), when the winning B5 condition device is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that any one-card winning combination is won when the stop switch 42 is operated in any pressing order. . Furthermore, in non-RT, when the winning B5 condition device is activated, the winning probability of a one-card winning combination differs depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.

Specifically, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in push order 123 or push order 132 when the winning prize B5 condition device is activated, there is a probability of "1/4" that the small winning combination 23 (1 piece payout ) The symbol combination corresponding to the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, and there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning combination will be missed. This point is the same as the push order 123 or the push order 132 when the winning prize B1 condition device is activated.
In addition, in non-RT, when the winning B5 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 213 or the push order 231, there is a probability of "1/1" that the small win 41 or the small win 42 (both The symbol combination corresponding to the one-piece payout is stopped and displayed on the active line. This point is the same as the push order 312 or the push order 321 when the winning prize B1 condition device is activated in non-RT.

In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 312 when the winning B5 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 19 (one coin payout) is obtained with a probability of "1/2". It will stop and display on the active line, and there is a probability of ``1/2'' that you will miss the winning combination. This point is similar to the press order 312 when the winning prize A7 condition device is activated.
In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 321 when the winning B5 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 17 (one coin payout) is obtained with a probability of "1/2". It will stop and display on the active line, and there is a probability of ``1/2'' that you will miss the winning combination. This point is similar to the pressing order 321 when the winning A5 condition device is activated.

In RT1 (inside middle), when the winning prize B5 condition device is activated, the push order 312 (right, left, middle) is the correct push order, and the other push orders are the incorrect push order.
Then, in RT1, when the winning B5 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 312, the small winning combination 01 (payout of 11 pieces) is given priority to the number of pieces with a probability of "1/1". The symbol combination (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, in RT1, at press order 321 when the winning B5 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 17 (one piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/2" due to number priority. There is a probability of ``1/2'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is the same as the push order 321 when the winning A5 condition device is activated.

In addition, in RT1, at press order 123 or press order 132 when the winning B5 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 23 (one piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4". There is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is similar to the push order 123 or the push order 132 when the winning prize B5 condition device is activated in non-RT.
In addition, in RT1, at press order 213 when the winning B5 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 23 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", and the winning combination will be displayed with a probability of "3/4". It will be left out. Furthermore, in RT1, at press order 231 when the winning B5 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 27 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", and a winning combination will be displayed with a probability of "3/4". will be left out. This point is the same as the push order 213 and the push order 231 when the winning prize A5 condition device is activated.

The winning B6 condition device has ``9'' types of winning combinations: Small Win 01, Small Win 09, Small Win 18, Small Win 20, Small Win 21, Small Win 25, Small Win 38, Small Win 41, and Small Win 42. This includes:
In non-RT (non-internal mode), when the winning B6 condition device is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that any one-card winning combination is won when the stop switch 42 is operated in any pressing order. . Furthermore, in non-RT, when the winning B6 condition device is activated, the winning probability of a one-card winning combination differs depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.

Specifically, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in push order 123 or push order 132 when the winning B6 condition device is activated, there is a probability of "1/4" that the small winning combination 21 (1 piece payout ) The symbol combination corresponding to the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, and there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning combination will be missed. This point is the same as the push order 123 or the push order 132 when the winning prize B2 condition device is activated.
In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 213 or 231 when the winning B6 condition device is activated, there is a probability of "1/1" that the small win 41 or the small win 42 (both The symbol combination corresponding to the one-piece payout is stopped and displayed on the active line. This point is the same as the push order 312 or the push order 321 when the winning prize B1 condition device is activated in non-RT.

In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 312 when the winning B6 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 20 (1 piece payout) is obtained with a probability of "1/2". It will stop and display on the active line, and there is a probability of ``1/2'' that you will miss the winning combination. This point is similar to the press order 312 when the winning A8 condition device is activated.
In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 321 when the winning B6 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 18 (1 piece payout) will be produced with a probability of "1/2". It will stop and display on the active line, and there is a probability of ``1/2'' that you will miss the winning combination. This point is similar to the pressing order 321 when the winning prize A6 condition device is activated.

In RT1 (inside middle), when the winning prize B6 condition device is activated, the push order 312 (right, left, middle) is the correct push order, and the other push orders are the incorrect push order.
Then, in RT1, when the winning B6 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 312, the small winning combination 01 (payout of 11 pieces) is given priority to the number of pieces with a probability of "1/1". The symbol combination (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, in RT1, at press order 321 when the winning B6 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 18 (1 piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/2" due to the number of pieces priority. There is a probability of ``1/2'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is similar to the pressing order 321 when the winning prize A6 condition device is activated.

In addition, in RT1, at press order 123 or press order 132 when the winning B6 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 21 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", There is a ``3/4'' probability that the winning hand will be missed. This point is the same as the push order 123 or the push order 132 when the winning prize B6 condition device is activated in non-RT.
In addition, in RT1, at press order 213 when the winning B6 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 21 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", and the winning combination will be displayed with a probability of "3/4". It will be left out. Furthermore, in RT1, at press order 231 when the winning B6 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 25 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", and a winning combination will be displayed with a probability of "3/4". will be left out. This point is the same as the push order 213 and the push order 231 when the winning prize A6 condition device is activated.

The winning B7 condition device has "9" types of winning combinations: small winning combinations 01, 12, 17, 19, 24, 28, 39, 41, and 42. This includes:
In non-RT (non-internal mode), when the winning B7 condition device is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that any one-card winning combination is won even when the stop switch 42 is operated in any pressing order. . Furthermore, in non-RT, when the winning B7 condition device is activated, the winning probability of a one-card winning combination differs depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.

Specifically, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in push order 123 or push order 132 when the winning prize B7 condition device is activated, there is a probability of "1/4" that the small winning combination 24 (1 piece payout ) The symbol combination corresponding to the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, and there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning combination will be missed. This point is the same as the push order 123 or the push order 132 when the winning prize B3 condition device is activated.
In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 213 or 231 when the winning B7 condition device is activated, there is a probability of "1/1" that the small win 41 or the small win 42 (both The symbol combination corresponding to the one-piece payout is stopped and displayed on the active line. This point is the same as the push order 312 or the push order 321 when the winning prize B1 condition device is activated in non-RT.

In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 312 when the winning B7 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 19 (one coin payout) is obtained with a probability of "1/2". It will stop and display on the active line, and there is a probability of ``1/2'' that you will miss the winning combination. This point is similar to the press order 312 when the winning prize A7 condition device is activated.
In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 321 when the winning B7 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 17 (one payout) will be produced with a probability of "1/2". It will stop and display on the active line, and there is a probability of ``1/2'' that you will miss the winning combination. This point is similar to the pressing order 321 when the winning A5 condition device is activated.

In RT1 (inside), when the winning prize B7 condition device is activated, the push order 321 (right middle left) is the correct push order, and the other push orders are the incorrect push order.
Then, in RT1, when the winning B7 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 321, the small winning combination 01 (payout of 11 pieces) is given priority to the number of pieces with a probability of "1/1". The symbol combination (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, in RT1, at press order 312 when the winning B7 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 19 (1 piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/2" due to number priority. There is a probability of ``1/2'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is similar to the press order 312 when the winning prize A7 condition device is activated.

In addition, in RT1, at press order 123 or press order 132 when the winning B7 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 24 (one piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4". There is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is the same as the push order 123 or the push order 132 when the winning prize B7 condition device is activated in non-RT.
In addition, in RT1, at press order 213 when the winning B7 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 24 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", and the winning combination will be displayed with a probability of "3/4". It will be left out. Furthermore, in RT1, at press order 231 when the winning B7 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 28 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", and a winning combination will be displayed on the active line with a probability of "3/4". will be left out. This point is the same as the push order 213 and the push order 231 when the winning prize A7 condition device is activated.

The winning prize B8 condition device includes "9" types of winning combinations: minor prize 01, minor prize 10, minor prize 18, minor prize 20, minor prize 22, minor prize 26, and minor prize 40 to minor prize 42.
In non-RT (non-internal mode), when the winning B8 condition device is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that any one-card winning combination is won even when the stop switch 42 is operated in any pressing order. . Furthermore, in non-RT, when the winning B8 condition device is activated, the winning probability of a one-card winning combination differs depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.

Specifically, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in push order 123 or push order 132 when the winning prize B8 condition device is activated, there is a probability of "1/4" that the small winning combination 22 (1 piece payout ) The symbol combination corresponding to the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, and there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning combination will be missed. This point is the same as the push order 123 or the push order 132 when the winning prize B4 condition device is activated.
In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 213 or 231 when the winning prize B8 condition device is activated, there is a probability of "1/1" that the small win 41 or the small win 42 (both The symbol combination corresponding to the one-piece payout is stopped and displayed on the active line. This point is the same as the push order 312 or the push order 321 when the winning prize B1 condition device is activated in non-RT.

In addition, in non-RT, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 312 when the winning B8 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 20 (one piece payout) is obtained with a probability of "1/2". It will stop and display on the active line, and there is a probability of ``1/2'' that you will miss the winning combination. This point is the same as the pressing order 312 when the winning A8 condition device is activated.
In addition, in non-RT mode, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 321 when the winning B8 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 18 (one piece payout) is obtained with a probability of "1/2". It will stop and display on the active line, and there is a probability of ``1/2'' that you will miss the winning combination. This point is the same as the pressing order 321 when the winning prize A6 condition device is activated.

In RT1 (inside middle), when the winning prize B8 condition device is activated, the push order 321 (right middle left) is the correct push order, and the other push orders are the incorrect push order.
Then, in RT1, when the winning B8 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 321, it corresponds to the small winning combination 01 (paying out 11 pieces) with a probability of "1/1" due to the number of pieces priority. The symbol combination (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, in RT1, at press order 312 when the winning B8 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 20 (1 piece payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/2" due to number priority. There is a probability of ``1/2'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is the same as the pressing order 312 when the winning A8 condition device is activated.

In addition, in RT1, at press order 123 or press order 132 when the winning B8 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 22 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", There is a ``3/4'' probability that the winning hand will be missed. This point is the same as the push order 123 or the push order 132 when the winning prize B8 condition device is activated in non-RT.
In addition, in RT1, at press order 213 when the winning B8 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 22 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", and the winning combination will be displayed with a probability of "3/4". It will be left out. Furthermore, in RT1, at press order 231 when the winning B8 condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 26 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4", and a winning combination will be displayed on the active line with a probability of "3/4". will be left out. This point is the same as the push order 213 and the push order 231 when the winning prize A8 condition device is activated.

In this way, in RT1, for the winning B1 condition device to the winning B8 condition device, the small winning combination 01 (high bell) is placed in the irregular press (press order 213, press order 231, press order 312, or press order 321). The correct pressing order for winning a prize is assigned, and the correct pressing order for winning the small winning combination 01 is not assigned to the pressing order (pressing order 123 or pressing order 132).
Then, in RT1, when the winning B1 condition device to the winning AB condition device are activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in order, the small winning combination 01 will not be won, and the small winning combination 21 to small winning combination 24 (small winning combination 21 to small winning combination 24) will not be won. Mebel) wins the prize. Therefore, normal pressing corresponds to a pressing order that is unilaterally disadvantageous, and irregular pressing corresponds to a unilaterally advantageous pressing order.
Also, when the stop switch 42 is operated in order when the winning B1 condition device to winning B8 condition device is activated, there is a probability of "1/4" that minor winnings 21 to 24 (one coin will be paid out in each case) Since there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the player wins a prize and loses the winning combination, the player's medals decrease, which is also disadvantageous for the player.

Next, the winning C1 condition device to the winning C4 condition device will be explained.
The winning C1 condition device to the winning C4 condition device are subject to lottery in non-RT (non-internal) and RT1 (internal).
However, in non-RT, the winning C1 condition device to the winning C4 condition device do not operate independently (single winning), but operate in duplicate with the 1BB condition device (multiple winning).
For example, in a non-RT, when the winning number "25" is won in a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, from this winning number "25", the prize condition device number "1" and the winning/replay condition device number "25" are selected. is generated. Then, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the accessory condition device number “1” and the winning C1 condition device corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number “25” operate in duplicate. In this case, in order to shift to RT1 before the reels 31 can be stopped in the game, control to stop the reels 31 when the winning C1 condition device is activated in RT1 is performed.
Therefore, in non-RT, stop control of the reels 31 is not performed when the winning C1 condition device to the winning C4 condition device are activated.
In addition, when the winning C1 condition device to the winning C4 condition device of RT1 are activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that any one-card winning combination is won even when the stop switch 42 is operated in any pressing order. . Further, when the winning C1 condition device to the winning C1 condition device of RT1 are activated, the type of winning one-card combination and the winning probability of the one-card winning combination differ depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.

The winning C1 condition device includes ``11'' types of winning combinations: Small Win 13, Small Win 21 to Small Win 25, Small Win 29, Small Win 33, Small Win 37, Small Win 41, and Small Win 42.
When the RT1 winning C1 condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 123 or the push order 132, there is a probability of "1/1" that one of the small winning combinations 21 to 24 (each one is 1 piece) The symbol combination corresponding to the payout will be stopped and displayed on the active line.
“Replay” on the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combinations 21 to 24 and “Blank A” on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combinations 21 to 24 are both arranged in “PB=1”.
In addition, "7" on the right reel 31 forming the small winning combination 21, "Bar A" on the right reel 31 forming the small winning combination 22, "Bar B" on the right reel 31 forming the small winning combination 23, and the small winning combination 24. The "Cherry A" on the right reel 31 that makes up the symbol is all arranged in "PB≠1", but the total arrangement of these four symbols is "PB=1".
In this way, the symbol combinations corresponding to the small roles 21 to 24 are arranged in "PB≠1" individually, but since the small roles 21 to 24 are won multiple times, the small roles 21 to 24 are A symbol combination corresponding to any of the small winning combinations 24 can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

When the RT1 winning C1 condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 213, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 37 (1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/4. However, there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
The “Bell” on the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 37 and the “Blank A” on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 37 are both arranged in “PB=1”, but the right side that makes up the small winning combination 37 The number "7" on the reel 31 is placed only at the "1" location of the symbol number "9". Therefore, the probability that "7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "1/4", so the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 37 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is 1/4. It is "1/4".

When the RT1 winning C1 condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 231, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 25 (1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/4. However, there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is similar to the pressing order 231 when the winning A6 condition device is activated.
When the RT1 winning C1 condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 312, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 33 (1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/4. However, there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is the same as the press order 312 when the winning prize A2 condition device is activated.
When the RT1 winning C1 condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 321, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 29 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" However, there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is the same as the push order 321 when the winning prize A2 condition device is activated.

The winning C2 condition device has "11" types of winning combinations: Small Win 13, Small Win 21 to Small Win 24, Small Win 26, Small Win 30, Small Win 34, Small Win 38, Small Win 41, and Small Win 42. This includes:
When the RT1 winning C2 condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in push order 123 or push order 132, there is a probability of "1/1" that one of the small winning combinations 21 to 24 (each one is 1 piece) The symbol combination corresponding to the payout will be stopped and displayed on the active line. This point is the same as the push order 123 or the push order 132 when the winning C1 condition device is activated.
When the RT1 winning C2 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 213, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 38 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" However, there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
The "Bell" on the left reel 31 that makes up the small win 38 and the "Blank A" on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small win 38 are both in the "PB=1" arrangement, but the right side that makes up the small win 38 The "bar A" on the reel 31 is placed only at the "1" location of the symbol number "4". Therefore, the probability that the "bar A" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "1/4", so the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 38 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is 1/4. is "1/4".

When the RT1 winning C2 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 231, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 26 (1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/4. However, there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is the same as the pressing order 231 when the winning A8 condition device is activated.
When the RT1 winning C2 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 312, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 34 (1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/4. However, there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is similar to the push order 312 when the winning A4 condition device is activated.
When the RT1 winning C2 condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 321, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 30 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" However, there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is the same as the push order 321 when the winning A4 condition device is activated.

The winning C3 condition device has "11" types of winning combinations: Small Win 13, Small Win 21 to Small Win 24, Small Win 27, Small Win 31, Small Win 35, Small Win 39, Small Win 41, and Small Win 42. This includes:
When the RT1 winning C3 condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in push order 123 or push order 132, there is a probability of "1/1" that one of the minor winnings 21 to 24 (each with 1 piece) The symbol combination corresponding to payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line. This point is the same as the push order 123 or the push order 132 when the winning prize C1 condition device is activated.
When the RT1 winning C3 condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 213, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 39 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" However, there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
The “Bell” on the left reel 31 that makes up the small win 39 and the “Blank A” on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small win 39 are both in the “PB=1” arrangement, but the right side that makes up the small win 39 The "bar B" on the reel 31 is placed only at the "1" position of the symbol number "19". Therefore, the probability that "bar B" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "1/4", so the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 39 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/4". is "1/4".

When the RT1 winning C3 condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 231, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 27 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" However, there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is the same as the pressing order 231 when the winning prize A5 condition device is activated.
When the RT1 winning C3 condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 312, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 35 (1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/4. However, there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is similar to the press order 312 when the winning A1 condition device is activated.
When the RT1 winning C3 condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 321, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 31 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" However, there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is the same as the push order 321 when the winning A1 condition device is activated.

The winning C4 condition device includes ``11'' types of winning combinations: Minor Win 13, Minor Win 21 to Minor Win 24, Minor Win 28, Minor Win 32, Minor Win 36, and Minor Win 40 to Minor Win 42.
When the RT1 winning C4 condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 123 or the push order 132, there is a probability of "1/1" that one of the small winnings 21 to 24 (each one is 1 piece) The symbol combination corresponding to the payout will be stopped and displayed on the active line. This point is the same as the push order 123 or the push order 132 when the winning C1 condition device is activated.
When the RT1 winning C4 condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 213, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 40 (1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/4. However, there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed.
“Bell” on the left reel 31 that makes up the small win 40 and “Blank A” on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small win 40 are both arranged in “PB=1”, but the right side that makes up the small win 40 "Cherry A" on the reel 31 is placed only at the "1" location of the symbol number "14". Therefore, the probability that "Cherry A" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on the active line is "1/4", so the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 40 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/4". is "1/4".

When the RT1 winning C4 condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 231, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 28 (1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" However, there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is similar to the pressing order 231 when the winning A7 condition device is activated.
When the RT1 winning C4 condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 312, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 36 (1 piece payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/4. However, there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is similar to the press order 312 when the winning A3 condition device is activated.
When the RT1 winning C4 condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 321, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 32 (one payout) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/4" However, there is a probability of ``3/4'' that the winning hand will be missed. This point is the same as the pressing order 321 when the winning A3 condition device is activated.

The winning prize D condition device includes "4" types of winning combinations, ie, minor winning combinations 21 to 24.
When the non-RT winning prize D condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in any of the following pressing orders: press order 123, press order 132, press order 213, press order 231, press order 312, or press order 321, A symbol combination corresponding to any of the minor winning combinations 21 to 24 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1". This point is the same as the push order 123 or the push order 132 when the winning C1 condition device is activated.
When the winning D condition device of RT1 is activated, the same stop control of the reel 31 is performed as when the winning D condition device of non-RT is activated.

The winning prize E condition device includes "5" types of small winning combinations 03 to 07 as winning combinations.
When the non-RT winning E condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in either push order 123 or push order 132, there is a probability of "1/1" that the small winning combination 06 (3 pieces paid) will be awarded. The corresponding symbol combination (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the non-RT winning E condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in either push order 213 or push order 231, there is a probability of "1/1" that the small winning combination 05 (3 pieces paid) will be awarded. The corresponding symbol combination (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the non-RT winning E condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in either push order 312 or push order 321, there is a probability of "1/1" that the small winning combination 03 (3 pieces paid) will be awarded. The corresponding symbol combination (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the winning E condition device of RT1 is activated, the same stop control of the reel 31 is performed as when the winning E condition device of non-RT is activated.

The winning F condition device includes "4" types of winning combinations, ie, minor winning combinations 03 to 06.
When the non-RT winning F condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in either push order 123 or push order 132, there is a probability of "1/1" that the small winning combination 03 (3 pieces paid) will be awarded. The corresponding symbol combination (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the non-RT winning F condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in any of push order 213, push order 231, push order 312, or push order 321, there is a probability of "1/1". The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to the small winning combination 05 (3 pieces paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the winning F condition device of RT1 is activated, the same stop control of the reels 31 is performed as when the winning F condition device of non-RT is activated.

The winning prize G condition device includes "5" types of small winning combinations 03 to 06 and small winning combination 13 as winning combinations. When the winning G condition device is activated, the same stop control of the reels 31 as when the winning F condition device is activated is performed.
The winning prize H condition device includes "5" types of small winning combinations 03 to 06 and small winning combination 08 as winning combinations. When the winning H condition device is activated, the same stop control of the reels 31 as when the winning F condition device is activated is performed.

The winning prize I condition device includes "2" types of small winning combinations 02 and 25 as winning combinations.
When the non-RT winning I condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in either push order 123 or push order 132, there is a probability of "9/16" that the small winning combination 02 (3 pieces paid) will be awarded. The corresponding symbol combination will be stopped and displayed on the active line, and the winning combination will be missed with a probability of "7/16".
The “bell” on the left reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 02 has a “PB=1” arrangement, but the “watermelon” on the middle reel 31 that makes up the small winning combination 02 has symbol numbers “3”, “8”, and “13”. "Blank A" of the right reel 31, which constitutes the small winning combination 02, is placed at the "3" location of symbol numbers "1", "6", and "11".
Therefore, the probability that "Watermelon" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped on an active line is "3/4", and the probability that "Blank A" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on an active line is also "3/4". /4'', so the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 02 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is ``(3/4) x (3/4) = 9/16''.

When the non-RT winning I condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in any of push order 213, push order 231, push order 312, or push order 321, the probability is "9/16". In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 02 (paying out 3 pieces) will be stopped and displayed on the active line, and the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 25 (paying out 1 piece) will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/16". , the probability of losing the winning hand is 6/16.
Specifically, when the non-RT winning I condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in push order 213, push order 231, push order 312, or push order 321, the symbol combination corresponding to small winning combination 02 is activated. Priority is given to displaying the symbol combination on the active line, and when it is not possible to display the symbol combination corresponding to the minor role 02 on the active line, the symbol combination corresponding to the minor role 25 is stopped and displayed on the active line. Control. If the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 25 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line, the winning combination will be missed.

As mentioned above, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination 02 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "9/16".
In addition, “7” on the left reel 31 that constitutes the small winning combination 25 is placed only at the “1” location of the symbol number “14”, and “Blank A” on the middle reel 31 that forms the small winning combination 25 is “PB=1”. ” arrangement, and the “Replay” of the right reel 31 that constitutes the small winning combination 25 is the “PB=1” arrangement.
When the "Watermelon" on the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped on the effective line at the first stop when the winning prize I condition device is activated, the "blank A" on the middle reel 31 is stopped on the effective line. Thereafter, when the left is stopped, the "7" of the left reel 31 is stopped at the effective line, and when the right is stopped, the "replay" of the right reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the effective line.
In addition, the probability that "Watermelon" on the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped on the active line (probability that "Blank A" on the middle reel 31 will stop on the active line) is "1/4", and the "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 is "1/4". The probability that "7" can be stopped on a valid line is "1/4", and the probability that "Replay" of the right reel 31 can be stopped on a valid line is "1/1".
Therefore, when the middle reel 31 stops first, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 25 can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the small winning combination 02 is missed is "(1/4) x (1/4)". )×(1/1)=1/16”.

Similarly, when the "blank A" of the right reel 31 cannot be stopped at the valid line at the first right stop when the winning I condition device is activated, the "replay" of the right reel 31 is stopped at the valid line. Thereafter, when stopping on the left, "7" of the left reel 31 is stopped at the effective line, and when stopping in the middle, the "blank A" of the middle reel 31 is controlled so as to stop on the effective line.
Furthermore, the probability that "Blank A" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped on the active line (probability that "Replay" on the right reel 31 will stop on the active line) is "1/4", and the "Blank A" on the left reel 31 is "1/4". The probability that "Blank A" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped on the effective line is "1/4", and the probability that "Blank A" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped on the effective line is "1/1".
Therefore, when the right reel 31 stops first, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 25 can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the small winning combination 02 is missed is "(1/4) x (1/4)". )×(1/1)=1/16”.
When the RT1 winning I condition device is activated, the same stop control of the reels 31 is performed as when the non-RT winning I condition device is activated.

The winning J condition device includes "20" types of winning combinations from minor winning combination 21 to minor winning combination 40.
When the non-RT winning J condition device is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in any of the following pressing orders: press order 123, press order 132, press order 213, press order 231, press order 312, or press order 321, A symbol combination corresponding to any of the minor winning combinations 21 to 24 will be stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1". This point is the same as the push order 123 or the push order 132 when the winning C1 condition device is activated.
When the winning J condition device of RT1 is activated, the same stop control of the reels 31 is performed as when the winning J condition device of non-RT is activated.

The winning K condition device is not subject to lottery in non-RT (non-internal) and RT1 (internal), but is subject to lottery only in special games (when RB is activated when 1BB is activated) (Figs. 149).
The winning K condition device includes all "42" types of small winning combinations from small winning combination 01 to small winning combination 42 as winning combinations.
When the special game winning K condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in push order 123, push order 132, push order 213, or push order 231, it corresponds to small win 01 with a probability of "1/1". The symbol combination (PB=1) to be stopped is displayed on the active line.
Also, when the special game winning K condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 312 or the push order 321, there is a probability of "1/1" that one of the small winnings 01 to 42 will be won. The corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line.

As mentioned above, the payout when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 01 is stopped and displayed on the active line is "11" in non-RT and RT1, but is "1" in the special game.
Further, when the symbol combinations corresponding to the minor winning combinations 02 to 08 are stopped and displayed on the active line, the payout is "3" in non-RT and RT1, but it is "1" in the special game.
Furthermore, when the symbol combinations corresponding to the minor winning combinations 09 to 42 are stopped and displayed on the active line, the payout is "1" in any of the non-RT, RT1, and special games.

FIGS. 147 to 149 are diagrams (number tables) showing the numbers of winning numbers for each RT and each set value in the tenth embodiment.
FIG. 147 shows the number table for non-RT (non-internal), FIG. 148 shows the number table for RT1 (inside), and FIG. 149 shows the number table for special games (when 1BB is activated and when RB is activated). It shows a numerical table.
Dividing the numbers shown in FIGS. 147 to 149 by "65536" gives the winning probability of each winning number. For example, in FIG. 147, the winning number "1" has a common value of "6307" for all settings, so the winning probability of the winning number "1" in non-RT is "6307/65536".
In addition, in FIGS. 147 to 149, the 1BB total value, replay total value, winning total value, and non-winning value are shown at the bottom of each number table.
Note that the number set when the 1BB condition device and the winning prize condition device are won multiple times (operating simultaneously) is added to both the 1BB total value and the winning prize total value. Therefore, the total from the 1BB total value to the non-winning value may not be "65536".

The setting value relates to the player's advantage, and in the tenth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 147 to 149, "6" stages of setting "1" to "6" are provided. The higher the set value is, the higher the player's advantage becomes.
Note that when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is off, and the power is turned on in this state, the device shifts to a setting change state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed.
Further, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is on, the setting value cannot be changed, but the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is entered in which the setting value can be confirmed.

When a winning number is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, a condition device number corresponding to the winning number is generated, a condition device corresponding to the generated condition device number is activated, and a condition device included in the activated condition device is generated. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
For example, in a non-RT (non-internal), if the winning number "25" is won in a lottery by the prize lottery means 61, the prize condition device number "1" is determined from the winning number "25" and the winning and replay conditions. A device number "25" is generated. Then, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the accessory condition device number “1” and the winning C1 condition device corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number “25” are activated.
For example, in RT1 (internal), when the winning number "26" is won in the lottery by the prize lottery means 61, the prize condition device number "1" is determined from the winning number "26" and the winning and replay conditions. A device number "26" is generated. Then, the winning prize C2 condition device corresponding to the winning prize and replay condition device number “26” is activated. However, since the 1BB condition device is already operating in RT1, the generated accessory condition device number "1" is cleared.

In Figures 147 to 149, an "○" in the lottery column means that it will be a lottery target (a lottery will be held), and an "x" in the lottery column means that it will not be a lottery target (a lottery will not be held). ) means.
As shown in FIG. 147, in non-RT, winning numbers "0" to "35" are subject to lottery, but winning number "36" (winning K condition device) is not subject to lottery.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 148, in RT1, winning numbers "1" to "35" are subject to lottery, but winning numbers "0" (1BB condition device) and "36" (winning K condition device) are subject to lottery. Not applicable.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 149, in the special game, the winning number "36" (winning K condition device) is subject to a lottery, but the winning numbers "0" to "35" are not subject to a lottery.

In FIGS. 147 to 149, "○" in the column of advantageous section means transition from a normal section (non-advantageous section) to an advantageous section, and "x" in the column of advantageous section means transition from normal section to advantageous section. This means that there will be no transition to .
As described in the first embodiment, the normal section is a game section in which transmitting a signal related to the instruction function to the peripheral board is prohibited, and is a game section in which processing related to the instruction function is not executed.
Further, the advantageous section is a game section in which an instruction function may be activated, and a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Furthermore, AT (notification gaming state) is a gaming state in which the operating mode of the stop switch 42 that is advantageous to the player is notified in a game where the gaming result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operating mode (pressing order) of the stop switch 42. It is. Therefore, AT is always in the advantageous section, and AT is never performed in the normal section.

In the tenth embodiment, the starting condition for the advantageous section is set to be that one of the winning numbers "3" to "35" is won in a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 in the normal section.
Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, the end condition for the advantageous section is set to be that the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches "4000" or that the difference in the number of coins from the start of the advantageous section exceeds "2400". has been done.
Note that when the RWM initialization process (RWM clear process) that initializes a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is executed, the period shifts to the normal section and non-RT (non-internal).
Furthermore, in the case of medalless gaming machines (also referred to as "smart slots") that use electronic information (electronic medals, electronic gaming media) instead of physical medals (as tangible objects) as gaming media, it is advantageous. There is no need to set an upper limit on the number of games played in a section.

As shown in FIG. 147, in the case of non-RT and the setting is "1", the probability of winning any of the winning numbers "3" to "35" is "58925/65536". Therefore, even if the advantageous section ends and you move to the normal section, if you win one of the winning numbers "3" to "35" in the "1" to "2" games after that, you will be transferred from the normal section to the advantageous section. to move to.
In addition, in the normal section, when any of the winning numbers "0" to "2" is won by the winning lottery means 61, the normal section is maintained without shifting to the advantageous section.
Furthermore, when any of the winning numbers "3" to "35" is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is maintained.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when any of the winning numbers "4" (replay D condition device) to "9" (replay H condition device) is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the AT lottery is executed. do. Winning numbers "4" to "9" have relatively low winning probabilities and are called "rare replays." The probability of winning the AT lottery when winning numbers ``4'' to ``9'' is selected is set to ``10''%.
Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, the AT lottery is also executed when winning numbers "33" (minor prize H condition device) to "34" (winning prize I condition device) are won in the lottery by the prize lottery means 61. do. Winning numbers "33" to "34" have relatively low winning probabilities and are called "rare combinations." The probability of winning the AT lottery when the winning numbers ``33'' to ``34'' are won is set to ``20''%.

If you win the AT lottery, you will be given the right to perform AT. When the user has the right to execute AT, if the AT start condition is met, AT is started.
In the tenth embodiment, the initial value of the number of AT games is set to "50" games. When the right to execute AT is granted and the AT start conditions are met, AT will be executed for "50" games.
Further, in the case where the player has the right to execute AT, if he/she wins the AT lottery, the number of rights to execute AT is added (added). For example, if you have "2" AT execution rights, you can execute AT for "50+50=100" games.
Furthermore, when the AT lottery is won during the execution of AT, the number of remaining AT games is added (added). For example, if the AT lottery is won when the remaining number of AT games is "20" games, the remaining number of AT games will be "20+50=70" games.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 150 and 151, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out for each condition device and for each press order will be described.
FIG. 150 shows the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out for each condition device and each press order in non-RT (non-internal) and setting "1".
The expected value of the number of medals to be paid out is calculated by calculating the "operation probability of the conditional device (winning probability)" x "winning probability of the winning combination included in the conditional device" x "at the time of winning" for all conditional devices that are subject to the lottery in each RT. It can be calculated by the sum of the number of coins paid out.
When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed on the active line (replay wins), the number of coins paid out in the current game is set to "3", and the number of bets in the next game is set to "3".

With non-RT and setting "1", the probability that the Replay A condition device will operate (win) is "6307/65536". Further, the probability that Replay 01 or Replay 02 will win in the press order 123 (left center right) when the Replay A condition device is activated is "1/1". Furthermore, the number of coins to be paid out at the time of winning Replay 01 or Replay 02 is set to "3".
From the above, in the case of non-RT, setting "1", and push order 123, the expected value of the number of medals paid out based on the Replay A condition device is "(6307/65536) x (1/1) x 3 ≒ 0. 289".

The expected value of the number of medals to be paid out at press order 132, press order 213, press order 231, press order 312, or press order 321 when the replay A condition device is activated when non-RT and setting "1" is calculated in the same way. can do. Specifically, it is as shown in FIG. 150.
In non-RT and setting "1", the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out in the press order 123 to press order 321 when the replay B condition device to replay H condition device are activated can be calculated in the same way. Specifically, it is as shown in FIG. 150.

If it is not RT and the setting is "1", the probability that the winning A1 condition device will operate (win) is "700/65536". Further, the probability that the small winning combination 03 will win in the press order 123 (left center right) when the winning A1 condition device is activated is "1/1". Furthermore, the number of coins paid out at the time of winning the small winning combination 03 is "3".
From the above, in the case of non-RT, setting "1", and push order 123, the expected value of the number of medals paid out based on the winning A1 condition device is "(700/65536) x (1/1) x 3 ≒ 0. 0320". The same applies to the push order 132 when the winning A1 condition device is activated.

The probability that the small winning combination 01 will win when the press order 213 (middle left/right) when the winning A1 condition device is activated is "1/1". Furthermore, the number of coins paid out at the time of winning the minor winning combination 01 is "1".
From the above, in the case of non-RT, setting "1", and push order 213, the expected value of the number of medals paid out based on the winning A1 condition device is "(700/65536) x (1/1) x 11 ≒ 0. 117".
The probability that the small winning combination 13 will win in the press order 231 (middle right, left) when the winning A1 condition device is activated is "1/2". Further, the number of coins paid out at the time of winning 13 small winnings is "1".
From the above, in the case of non-RT, setting "1", and push order 231, the expected value of the number of medals paid out based on the winning A1 condition device is "(700/65536) x (1/2) x 1 ≒ 0. 00534”.

The probability that the small winning combination 35 will win in the press order 312 (right, left, middle) when the winning A1 condition device is activated is "1/2". Furthermore, the number of coins paid out when winning 35 small winnings is "1".
From the above, in the case of non-RT, setting "1", and push order 312, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out based on the winning A1 condition device is "(700/65536) x (1/4) x 1 ≒ 0. 00267". The same applies to the pressing order 321 when the winning A1 condition device is activated.
In non-RT and setting "1", the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out in the press order 123 to press order 321 when the winning A2 condition device to the winning J condition device are activated can be calculated in the same way. Specifically, it is as shown in FIG. 150.

The expected value of the number of coins to be paid out when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 123 in each game with non-RT and setting "1" is the "operation probability of the conditional device" for all conditional devices targeted for lottery. Since it can be calculated by the sum of x "winning probability at press order 123" x "number of coins paid out when winning", it is "1.25" as shown in FIG. 150.
Similarly, the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out when the stop switch 42 is operated in push order 132 in every game with non-RT and setting "1" is "1.25".
In addition, when non-RT and setting is "1", the expected value of the number of coins paid out when the stop switch 42 is operated in any of the press order 213, press order 231, press order 312, or press order 321 in each game is "1". .46".
FIG. 151 shows the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out for each condition device and for each press order under RT1 (internal medium) and setting "1". 1", the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be calculated.

Next, the characteristics of each RT will be explained with reference to FIG. 152.
As shown in FIG. 152, the prescribed number in non-RT (non-internal) and RT1 (internal) is ``1'' of ``3'', and the prescribed number in the special game (when RB is activated when 1BB is activated) is This is the “1” type of “2”.
In addition, in non-RT and RT1, the payout is "11" when the symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination 01 is stopped and displayed on the active line, and in the special game, the symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination 01 is stopped and displayed on the active line. The dividend at that time is "1".
For this reason, in non-RT and RT1, when the symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination 01 is stopped and displayed on the active line, the payout exceeds the specified number, and in the special game, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 01 is stopped and displayed on the active line. When the dividend is less than the specified number.

In addition, in all of the non-RT, RT1, and special games, the number of active lines is "1", and the type of symbol combination corresponding to the small win 01 is "1", and the number of active lines is "1", and the type of symbol combination corresponding to the small win 01 is "1", The probability of not winning the lottery is "0".
Furthermore, the expected value of the number of coins paid out for non-RT and setting "1" is "1.25" for push order 123 and push order 132, and for push order 213, push order 231, push order 312, and push order In order 321, it is "1.46".
Furthermore, regarding the expected value of the number of coins paid out in non-RT and setting "1", if we take the average value of all press orders, we get "(1.25 + 1.25 + 1.46 + 1.46 + 1.46 + 1.46) / 6 = 1 .39”. That is, the average expected value of the number of coins to be paid out in all pressing orders in non-RT and setting "1" is "1.39".

Also, the ball output rate is the expected value of the number of coins paid out divided by the number of bets (expected value of the number of coins paid out/number of bets), so the ball output rate for non-RT and setting "1" is 123 in the order of pressing. , and the push order 132 is "0.417", and the push order 213, the push order 231, the push order 312, and the push order 321 are "0.487".
Furthermore, regarding the ball payout rate for non-RT and setting "1", if we take the average value for all press orders, we get "(0.417+0.417+0.487+0.487+0.487+0.487)/6≒0.464 ”. That is, the average value of the ball payout rate in all pressing orders in non-RT and setting "1" is "0.464".
Here, the numerical value of the ball output rate shown in FIG. 152 is a designed value. The same applies to FIGS. 157 and 164.
Note that the actual value of the ball payout rate varies when the number of games played is small, but when the number of games played becomes sufficiently large, it converges to the designed value.
Furthermore, the "175,000" game is a sufficiently large number of games, and when the number of games reaches "175,000" games, the actual value of the ball payout rate converges to the designed value.
Therefore, the numerical value of the ball payout rate shown in FIG. 152 can be considered as an actual value of the ball payout rate as a result of playing the "175,000" game.

Here, in conventional slot machines, there is a known specification that lowers the payout rate in special games. Slot machines equipped with this specification are equipped with multiple types of push order bells that give an advantage/disadvantage to the game result depending on the order in which the stop switch is pressed. It has a bell.
A high bell is a bell with a large number of coins that can be won when the pressing order is correct when the pressing order bell is won, and a low number of coins can be won when the pressing order is incorrect when the pressing order bell is won. There are fewer bells.
In non-internal and internal games, a lottery is held for winning combinations that include multiple types of push order bells, and in a game where any push order bell is won, if the push order is correct, the corresponding higher bell will be won. If the pressing order is incorrect, the higher bell will not win, but the corresponding lower bell will be able to win.
On the other hand, in the special game, there is no lottery for the push order bells, but instead a lottery for ALL small roles in which all high and low bells are won at the same time (duplicate winning) is held. In a game in which the small winning combination ALL is won, one of the higher bells wins a prize.

Then, the winning probability of the small winning combination ALL in the special game is set to be higher than the winning probability of each push order bell in the non-internal medium and internal medium, and the lottery results other than winning the small winning combination ALL in the special game are set as non-winning. do.
As a result, the winning probability of each high bell and each cheap bell in the special game is higher than the winning probability of each high bell and cheap bell in non-internal medium and internal medium, while lowering the ball output rate in the special game. Thus, in the special game, the player's medals decrease.
However, in a slot machine equipped with a conventional accelerator AT, there are multiple types of push order bells, and each push order bell has a high bell and a low bell with different symbol combinations, so when the push order bell is won, A problem has arisen in that the total number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed increases, which limits the degree of freedom in arranging symbols on each reel.

On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, the prescribed number for non-RT (non-internal) and RT1 (internal) is set to "3", and the prescribed number for the special game is set to "2".
Furthermore, regarding the small winning combination 01, the payout in non-RT and RT1 is set to "11", and the payout in the special game is set to "1".
As a result, for the small winning combination 01, the payout exceeds the specified number in non-RT and RT1, but the payout falls below the specified number in the special game.
Therefore, in the special game, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 01 is stopped and displayed on the active line, the player's medals decrease.

In the special game, in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, there is no possibility of non-winning, and in every game, all the minor roles including the minor role 01 are won at the same time (duplicate winning), and the minor role 01 is won at the same time. Any one of the "1" winning combinations including the winning combination is made to win the prize.
That is, as shown in FIG. 149, in each special game, the winning number "36" is won in the drawing by the winning combination drawing means 61, and the winning K condition device is activated. Then, as shown in FIG. 146, when the winning K condition device is activated, all the small winnings including the small winning combination 01 are won at the same time (duplicate winning), and at this time, press order 123, press order 132, press No matter which order the stop switch 42 is pressed in order 213, push order 231, push order 312, and push order 321, any "1" winning combination including the minor winning combination 01 will be won, so the payout will be Symbol combinations that are less than the specified number will be stopped and displayed on the active line.
Thereby, it is possible to reduce the number of medals of the player in the special game, and in turn, it is possible to lower the payout rate in the special game.

In addition, in the special game, in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, there is no possibility of non-winning, and all the small winnings including the small winning 01 are won at the same time (duplicate winning) in every game.
Furthermore, for the small winning combination 01, the payout exceeds the specified number in non-RT and RT1, but the payout is less than the specified number in the special game. It is possible to reduce the number of medals of the player in the game, and in turn, it is possible to lower the ball payout rate in the special game.

Therefore, the payout rate in the special game can be lowered without providing multiple types of high-quality bells with different symbol combinations, and the total number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the push order bell is won can be reduced. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging symbols on each reel 31 can be improved.
In particular, in the tenth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 01 is "1" type of "bell" - "bell" - "bell", so the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed when the push order bell is won. The total number of symbols can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in arranging symbols on each reel 31 can be improved.
Furthermore, by reducing the total number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the push order bell is won, the amount of ROM 54 used can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 152, in the non-RT setting "1", the ball payout rate when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 123 in every game is "0.417". On the other hand, when the special game setting is "1", the ball payout rate when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 123 in every game is "0.5". In other words, the ball payout rate when the push order is 123 in the non-RT is lower than the ball payout rate when the push order is 123 in the special game. Therefore, the special game is more advantageous for the player than the non-RT game.
Similarly, the ball payout rate for each push order of push order 132, push order 213, push order 231, push order 312, and push order 321 in non-RT is as follows: push order 132, push order 213, push order 231, push order 312, and push order 321. Therefore, the special game is more advantageous for the player than the non-RT game.

In addition, the ball payout rate when the push order is 132 in the non-RT is "0.417", which is lower than the ball payout rate "0.5" when the push order is 123 in the special game.
Similarly, the ball payout rate for each push order of push order 213, push order 231, push order 312, and push order 321 in non-RT is "0.487", and for push order 123 in the special game. Ball payout rate is below 0.5.
In other words, the ball payout rate when the stop switch 42 is operated in any one push order (operation mode) during non-internal play is the same as the ball payout rate when the stop switch 42 is operated in a predetermined push order (operation mode) in the special game. Below the ball payout rate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 152, when the non-RT setting is "1", the average value of the ball payout rate in all pressing orders is "0.464". On the other hand, when the special game is set to "1", the average value of the ball payout rates in all pressing orders is "0.5". In other words, the average value of the ball payout rate in the full press order in non-RT is lower than the average value of the ball payout rate in the full press order in the special game. Therefore, the special game is more advantageous for the player than the non-RT game.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 152, when the setting of RT1 is "1", the ball payout rate when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 123 in every game is "0.417". On the other hand, when the special game setting is "1", the ball payout rate when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 123 in every game is "0.5". In other words, the ball payout rate when the push order is 123 in RT1 is lower than the ball payout rate when the push order is 123 in the special game. In this respect, the special game is a game more advantageous to the player than RT1.

However, the ball payout rate in each push order of push order 213, push order 231, push order 312, and push order 321 in RT1 is "0.903", and in the special game push order 213, push order 231, push order 312 and 321, the ball output rate exceeds "0.5" in each push order.
Further, when the setting of RT1 is "1", the average value of the ball payout rate in all pressing orders is "0.741". On the other hand, when the special game setting is "1", the average value of the ball payout rates in all pressing orders is "0.5". That is, the average value of the ball payout rate in full press order in RT1 exceeds the average value of the ball payout rate in full press order in the special game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, the operating probability (winning probability) of each condition device from the winning A1 condition device to the winning A8 condition device in non-RT and RT1 is “700/65536”.
Furthermore, the operation probability (winning probability) of each of the winning B1 condition device to the winning B8 condition device in non-RT and RT1 is “4550/65536”.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 149, the operating probability (winning probability) of the winning K condition device in the special game is "65536/65536".
Therefore, the operating probability (winning probability) of each conditional device in the special game is higher than the operating probability (winning probability) of each conditional device in non-RT and RT1.

In addition, in the special game, the winning K condition device is activated (winning) with a probability of "65536/65536" every game, and when the winning K condition device is activated, no matter which order the stop switch 42 is pressed, , one of the small winning combinations 01 to 42 will win with a probability of "1/1". Therefore, the probability that any combination will win in the special game is "100"%.
On the other hand, in both non-RT and RT1, there are cases where winning combinations are missed, so the probability that any combination will win in non-RT and RT1 is less than 100%.
Therefore, the probability that any combination will win in the special game is higher than the probability that any combination will win in non-RT and RT1.

Although the tenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) FIGS. 153 to 157 show a first modification of the tenth embodiment.
FIG. 153 is a diagram showing a number table (non-RT) in Modification 1 of the tenth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 147.
In FIG. 153, the numbers of the win A1 condition device to the win B8 condition device in the setting "1" are different from those in FIG. 147, but other than that the numbers are the same as in FIG. 147.
Specifically, in FIG. 147, the number of settings for the winning A1 condition device to the winning A8 condition device in setting “1” is “700”, whereas in FIG. The number set in the winning A8 condition device is "900".
In addition, in FIG. 147, the number of settings for the winning B1 condition device to winning B8 condition device in the setting "1" is "4550", whereas in FIG. The device number is "4350".

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing a number table (RT1) in Modification 1 of the tenth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 148.
In FIG. 154, the numbers of the winning A1 condition device to winning prize B8 condition device in the setting "1" are different from those in FIG. 148, but the rest is the same as FIG. 148.
Specifically, in FIG. 148, the number of settings for the winning A1 condition device to the winning A8 condition device in setting “1” is “700”, whereas in FIG. The number set in the winning A8 condition device is "900".
In addition, in FIG. 148, the number of settings for the winning B1 condition device to winning B8 condition device in setting "1" is "4550", whereas in FIG. The device number is "4350".

FIG. 155 is a diagram showing the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out for each condition device and each press order when non-RT and setting "1" in Modification 1 of the 10th embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 150. be.
FIG. 156 is a diagram showing the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out for each condition device and each press order under RT1 and setting "1" in Modification 1 of the 10th embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 151. .
As described above, in FIGS. 153 and 154, the numbers of winning A1 condition devices to winning B8 condition devices in setting "1" are different from those in FIGS. 147 and 148.
Therefore, in FIGS. 155 and 156, the expected values of the number of coins to be paid out for the winning A1 condition device to the winning prize B8 condition device are different from those in FIGS. 150 and 151.

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing the characteristics of each RT state in Modification 1 of the tenth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 152.
As shown in FIG. 157, the expected value of the number of coins paid out in non-RT and setting "1" is "1.32" in push order 123 and push order 132, push order 213, push order 231, push order 312 and the push order 321 are "1.51".
Also, regarding the expected value of the number of coins paid out in non-RT and setting "1", if we take the average value of all press orders, we get "(1.32 + 1.32 + 1.51 + 1.51 + 1.51 + 1.51) / 6 = 1 .45". That is, the average expected value of the number of coins to be paid out in all pressing orders in non-RT and setting "1" is "1.45".

Furthermore, the ball payout rate for non-RT and setting "1" is "0.440" for push order 123 and push order 132, and for push order 213, push order 231, push order 312, and push order 321. Then, it is "0.503".
Furthermore, regarding the ball payout rate for non-RT and setting "1", if we take the average value for all press orders, we find that "(0.440 + 0.440 + 0.503 + 0.503 + 0.503 + 0.503) / 6 ≒ 0.482 ”. That is, the average value of the ball payout rate in all pressing orders in non-RT and setting "1" is "0.482".

Further, as shown in FIG. 157, in the non-RT setting "1", the ball payout rate when the stop switch 42 is operated in push order 123 in every game is "0.440".
On the other hand, when the special game setting is "1", the ball payout rate when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 123 in every game is "0.5".
That is, the ball payout rate when the push order is 123 in the non-RT is lower than the ball payout rate when the push order is 123 in the special game.
Similarly, the ball payout rate when the push order is 132 in the non-RT is lower than the ball payout rate when the push order is 132 in the special game.
Therefore, in this respect, the special game is more advantageous for the player than the non-RT game.

However, the ball payout rate in each of the push orders 213, 231, 312, and 321 in non-RT is 0.503.
On the other hand, the ball payout rate in each of the pressing orders 213, 231, 312, and 321 in the special game is 0.5.
In other words, the ball payout rate in the push order 213, push order 231, push order 312, and push order 321 in non-RT is the same as the push order 213, push order 231, push order 312, and push order in the special game. 321 each exceeds the ball payout rate in each pressing order.
In this way, the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out and the ball payout rate can be adjusted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 157, when the non-RT setting is "1", the average value of the ball payout rate in all pressing orders is "0.482". On the other hand, when the special game setting is "1", the average value of the ball payout rates in all pressing orders is "0.5". In other words, the average value of the ball payout rate in the full press order in non-RT is lower than the average value of the ball payout rate in the full press order in the special game. Therefore, the special game is more advantageous for the player than the non-RT game.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 157, when the setting of RT1 is "1", the ball payout rate when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 123 in every game is "0.440". On the other hand, when the special game setting is "1", the ball payout rate when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 123 in every game is "0.5". In other words, the ball payout rate when the push order is 123 in RT1 is lower than the ball payout rate when the push order is 123 in the special game. In this respect, the special game is a game more advantageous to the player than RT1.

However, the ball payout rate in each of the push orders 213, 231, 312, and 321 in RT1 is 0.903.
On the other hand, the ball payout rate in each of the pressing orders 213, 231, 312, and 321 in the special game is 0.5.
In other words, the ball payout rate in the push order 213, push order 231, push order 312, and push order 321 in RT1 is the same as the push order 213, push order 231, push order 312, and push order 321 in the special game. Exceed the ball payout rate in each press order.

Further, when the setting of RT1 is "1", the average value of the ball payout rate in all the pressing orders is "0.749".
On the other hand, when the special game setting is "1", the average value of the ball payout rates in all pressing orders is "0.5".
That is, the average value of the ball payout rate in full press order in RT1 exceeds the average value of the ball payout rate in full press order in the special game.
In this way, the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out and the ball payout rate can be adjusted.

(2) FIGS. 158 to 164 show a second modification of the tenth embodiment.
FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a number table (non-RT) in Modification 2 of the tenth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 147.
In FIG. 158, the number of placements of the winning A1 condition device to the winning prize B8 condition device in setting "1" is different from that in FIG. 147, but the rest is the same as FIG. 147.
Specifically, in FIG. 147, the number of settings for the winning A1 condition device to the winning A8 condition device in setting “1” is “700”, whereas in FIG. The number set in the winning A8 condition device is "1300".
In addition, in FIG. 147, the number of settings for the winning B1 condition device to winning B8 condition device in the setting "1" is "4550", whereas in FIG. The device number is "3950".

FIG. 159 is a diagram showing a number table (RT1) in Modification 2 of the tenth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 148.
In FIG. 159, the numbers of the winning A1 condition device to winning prize B8 condition device in the setting "1" are different from those in FIG. 148, but the rest is the same as FIG. 148.
Specifically, in FIG. 148, the number of settings for the winning A1 condition device to the winning A8 condition device in setting “1” is “700”, whereas in FIG. The number set in the winning A8 condition device is "1300".
In addition, in FIG. 148, the number of settings for the winning B1 condition device to winning B8 condition device in the setting "1" is "4550", whereas in FIG. The device number is "3950".

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing the winning and replay condition devices (numbers 17 to 20) in the second modification of the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 161 is a diagram showing the winning and replay condition devices (numbers 17 to 20) in the second modification of the tenth embodiment. 21 to 24). These correspond to the prize winning B1 condition device to winning prize B8 condition device in FIGS. 141 to 143.
In FIGS. 141 to 143, the stop control of each reel 31 when the winning B1 condition device to winning B8 condition device is activated is different between non-RT and RT1, but in FIGS. 160 and 161, non-RT and RT1 , the stop control of each reel 31 during the operation of the winning B1 condition device to the winning prize B8 condition device is the same.

FIG. 162 is a diagram illustrating the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out for each condition device and each press order in non-RT and setting “1” in Modification 2 of the 10th embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 150. be.
FIG. 163 is a diagram showing the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out for each condition device and each press order under RT1 and setting "1" in Modification 2 of the 10th embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 151. .
As described above, in FIGS. 158 and 159, the numbers of the win A1 condition device to win B8 condition device in setting "1" are different from those in FIGS. 147 and 148.
Therefore, in FIGS. 162 and 163, the expected values of the number of coins to be paid out for the winning A1 condition device to the winning prize B8 condition device are different from those in FIGS. 150 and 151.

FIG. 164 is a diagram showing the characteristics of each RT state in Modification 2 of the tenth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 152.
As shown in FIG. 164, the expected value of the number of coins paid out for non-RT and setting "1" is "1.46" for push order 123 and push order 132, push order 213, push order 231, push order 312 and the push order 321 are "2.71".
Also, regarding the expected value of the number of coins paid out in non-RT and setting "1", if we take the average value of all press orders, we get "(1.46 + 1.46 + 2.71 + 2.71 + 2.71 + 2.71) / 6 = 2 .29". That is, the average expected value of the number of coins to be paid out in all pressing orders in non-RT and setting "1" is "2.29".

Furthermore, the ball payout rate for non-RT and setting "1" is "0.487" for push order 123 and push order 132, and for push order 213, push order 231, push order 312, and push order 321. Then, it is "0.903".
Furthermore, regarding the ball payout rate for non-RT and setting "1", if we take the average value for all press orders, we find that "(0.487 + 0.487 + 0.903 + 0.903 + 0.903 + 0.903) / 6 ≒ 0.764 ”. That is, the average value of the ball payout rate in all pressing orders in non-RT and setting "1" is "0.764".

Further, as shown in FIG. 164, in the non-RT setting "1", the ball payout rate when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 123 in every game is "0.487".
On the other hand, when the special game setting is "1", the ball payout rate when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 123 in every game is "0.5".
That is, the ball payout rate when the push order is 123 in the non-RT is lower than the ball payout rate when the push order is 123 in the special game.
Similarly, the ball payout rate at push order 132 in non-RT is lower than the ball payout rate at push order 132 in the special game.
Therefore, in this respect, the special game is more advantageous for the player than the non-RT game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 164, when the setting of RT1 is "1", the ball payout rate when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 123 in every game is "0.487".
On the other hand, when the special game setting is "1", the ball payout rate when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order 123 in every game is "0.5".
That is, the ball payout rate when the push order is 123 in RT1 is lower than the ball payout rate when the push order is 123 in the special game.
In this respect, the special game is a game more advantageous to the player than RT1.

However, the ball payout rate in each of the push orders 213, 231, 312, and 321 in non-RT is 0.903.
On the other hand, the ball payout rate in each of the pressing orders 213, 231, 312, and 321 in the special game is 0.5.
In other words, the ball payout rate in the push order 213, push order 231, push order 312, and push order 321 in non-RT is the same as the push order 213, push order 231, push order 312, and push order in the special game. 321 each exceeds the ball payout rate in each pressing order.

Further, as shown in FIG. 164, when the non-RT setting is "1", the average value of the ball payout rate in all pressing orders is "0.764".
On the other hand, when the special game is set to "1", the average value of the ball payout rates in all pressing orders is "0.5".
That is, the average value of the ball payout rate in the full press order in non-RT exceeds the average value of the ball payout rate in the full press order in the special game.

Further, the ball payout rate in each of the push orders 213, 231, 312, and 321 in RT1 is 0.903.
On the other hand, the ball payout rate in each of the pressing orders 213, 231, 312, and 321 in the special game is 0.5.
In other words, the ball payout rate in the push order 213, push order 231, push order 312, and push order 321 in RT1 is the same as the push order 213, push order 231, push order 312, and push order 321 in the special game. Exceed the ball payout rate in each press order.

Further, when the setting of RT1 is "1", the average value of the ball payout rate in all the pressing orders is "0.764".
On the other hand, when the special game setting is "1", the average value of the ball payout rates in all pressing orders is "0.5".
That is, the average value of the ball payout rate in full press order in RT1 exceeds the average value of the ball payout rate in full press order in the special game.
In this way, the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out and the ball payout rate can be adjusted.

(3) In the 10th embodiment, "1" type of 1BB is provided as a special winning combination, and "1" type of "Bar B" - "Cherry A" - "Cherry A" is provided as a symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination. , we have set up "1" type of 1BB internal as the internal medium that carries over the special winnings, and we have set "1" type of 1BB game (1BB operation) as the special game, but the special winning is not limited to the "1" type. , multiple types can be provided.
For example, there are two types of special winnings, 1BB-A and 1BB-B, and a symbol combination corresponding to 1BB-A and a symbol combination corresponding to 1BB-B are provided, and the special winnings are carried over. There are 2 types of games: 1BB-A inside and 1BB-B inside, and 2 types of special games: 1BB-A game (1BB-A operation) and 1BB-B game (1BB-B operation). can be provided.

Similarly to the 1BB game of the 10th embodiment, the prescribed number in each of the 1BB-A game and 1BB-B game is set to "2", and each of the 1BB-A game and 1BB-B game corresponds to the small role 01. The payout when "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" is stopped and displayed is "1", and there is no chance of winning in the winning combination in each of the 1BB-A game and 1BB-B game. You can do it like this.
In addition, the specified number in the 1BB-A game is "2", and the payout when "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" corresponding to the small winning combination 01 is stopped and displayed in the 1BB-A game is "1", In the 1BB-A game, there will be no chance of non-winning in the winning combination lottery, and the specified number in the 1BB-B game is set to "3", and in the 1BB-B game, the "bell" corresponding to the small role 01 is set. - "Bell" - When the "Bell" is stopped and displayed, the payout is set to "11", and there may be a case where the prize is not won in the winning combination in the 1BB-B game.

Furthermore, as a special prize, "3" or more types of 1BB may be provided, and 1BB and MB (second type bonus continuous operating device; second type big bonus) may be provided.
Furthermore, it is possible to provide a symbol combination corresponding to the MB, provide an MB interior that carries over the MB, and provide an MB game (MB operation) as a special game.
MB is a device that can continuously operate CB (class 2 special accessory). During the CB game (CB operation), regardless of the lottery result by the prize lottery means 61, all minor prizes are won repeatedly, and the stop switch 42 is turned off for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31). The time from the moment of operation until the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (maximum number of moving frames is 1 frame). Further, the CB game ends after one game, and when the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds a predetermined number, the MB game ends.
Similarly to the 1BB game of the tenth embodiment, the specified number in the MB game is set to "2", and when "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" corresponding to the small winning combination 01 in the MB game are stopped and displayed. It is possible to set the payout to "1" so that there is no possibility that the winning combination will not be won in the lottery in the MB game.

(4) In the 10th embodiment, in the special game, when the winning K condition device is activated and the stop operation is performed in push order 123, push order 132, push order 213, or push order 231, "1/1" If the small winning combination 01 (1 piece in the special game) is won with a probability of 1/1 and the stop operation is performed in the push order 312 or 321, the small winning combination 01 to the small winning combination will be won with a probability of "1/1". 42 (in the special game, each one is 1 coin) to win a prize.
However, the present invention is not limited to this; in a special game, when the winning K condition device is activated, no matter which order the stop switch 42 is pressed, there is a probability of "1/1" that the small winning combination 01 (in the special game, 1) may win a prize.

(5) In the tenth embodiment, in the special game, the winning number "36" is won with a probability of "65536/65536", and the winning K condition device is activated. When the winning K condition device is activated, no matter which order the button is pressed, any one-card winning combination will be won with a probability of "1/1".
However, the invention is not limited to this. For example, in a special game, the winning number "36" is won with a probability of "60000/65536", the winning K condition device is activated, and the winning number is won with a probability of "5536/65536". The winning L condition device may be activated when the number "37" is won.

In addition, when the winning K condition device is activated, it becomes a state in which 42 types of small winnings from small winning combination 01 to small winning combination 42 (each in the special game is 1 piece) are won repeatedly, and at this time, whichever press order Even if the stop operation is performed, any one-card winning combination including the minor winning combination 01 can be won with a probability of "1/1".
Furthermore, when the winning L condition device is activated, it becomes a state in which ``41'' types of small winnings from small winning combination 02 to small winning combination 42 (in the special game, each one is 1 piece) are won multiple times, and at this time, whichever press order Even if the stop operation is performed, it is possible to win any one of the small winning combinations 02 to 42 with a probability of "1/1".

(6) In the tenth embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of the gaming machine, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, there are medalless gaming machines (also called "smart slots") that use electronic information (electronic medals, electronic gaming media) instead of physical (tangible) medals as gaming media, and casino machines. , the present invention can be applied.
(7) The various modifications shown in the first to tenth embodiments and the first to tenth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations. It is.

<Additional notes>
In conventional gaming machines, it is known to lower the payout rate in special games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2020-130454).
This gaming machine is equipped with a plurality of types of bells in which the order of pressing is determined to be advantageous/disadvantageous to the game result depending on the order in which the stop switch is pressed, as well as a high bell and a low bell with different symbol combinations for each press order bell. There is.
A high bell is a bell with a large number of coins that can be won when the pressing order is correct when the pressing order bell is won, and a low number of coins can be won when the pressing order is incorrect when the pressing order bell is won. There are fewer bells.

During non-internal and internal games, a lottery is held for winning combinations that include multiple types of push order bells, and in a game where any push order bell is won, if the push order is correct, the corresponding higher bell will be won. If the pressing order is incorrect, the higher bell will not win a prize, but the corresponding lower bell will be able to win a prize.
On the other hand, in the special game, there is no lottery for the push order bells, but instead a lottery for ALL small roles in which all high and low bells are won at the same time (duplicate winning) is held. In a game in which the small winning combination ALL is won, one of the higher bells wins a prize.
Then, the winning probability of the small winning combination ALL in the special game is set to be higher than the winning probability of each push order bell in the non-internal medium and internal medium, and the lottery results other than winning the small winning combination ALL in the special game are set as non-winning. .
As a result, the winning probability of each high bell and each cheap bell in the special game is higher than the winning probability of each high bell and cheap bell in non-internal medium and internal medium, while lowering the ball output rate in the special game. Thus, in the special game, the player's medals decrease.

However, conventional gaming machines have multiple types of push order bells, and each push order bell has a high bell and a low bell with different symbol combinations, so it is possible to stop display when the push order bell is won. A problem has arisen in that the total number of symbol combinations increases, which limits the degree of freedom in arranging symbols on each reel.
The inventions (original inventions) described in the original specification, etc. of this application include, for example, the following original inventions 1 to 5, and the problem that these inventions attempt to solve is to lower the ball payout rate in special games. At the same time, it is to improve the degree of freedom in arranging symbols on each reel.

1. Original invention 1
Initial invention 1 (10th embodiment) is
A non-internal medium game (non-RT) in which the predetermined special prize (1BB) has not been won,
A predetermined internal medium game (RT1) in which a predetermined special prize is carried over;
and a predetermined special game that can be transferred based on winning a predetermined special prize and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined special prize being stopped and displayed,
The prescribed number in the predetermined special game is "2" (Fig. 152),
When a specific symbol combination ("Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" corresponding to small winning combination 01) is stopped and displayed in a predetermined special game, the payout is less than the specified number in the predetermined special game (as shown in Figure 152). (For example, when winning small role 01 in the special game, the payout is "1", which is less than the specified number "2" in the special game),
In the predetermined special game, there is no chance of winning a winning combination (Figure 152)
It is characterized by

According to the first invention, in a predetermined special game, there is no case where a winning combination is not won, so any winning combination is won.
In addition, since the payout when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined special game is less than the specified number, the player's medals will decrease each time a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined special game. It can be done. Therefore, by adjusting the probability that a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined special game, it is possible to lower the ball payout rate in a predetermined special game.
In order to lower the payout rate in a predetermined special game, it is only necessary to provide "1" such specific symbol combination, so the total number of symbol combinations can be reduced, and as a result, the number of symbols on each reel can be reduced. The degree of freedom in arrangement can be improved.

2. Original invention 2
Initial invention 2 (10th embodiment) is
A non-internal medium game (non-RT) in which the predetermined special prize (1BB) has not been won,
A predetermined internal medium game (RT1) in which a predetermined special prize is carried over;
and a predetermined special game that can be transferred based on winning a predetermined special prize and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined special prize being stopped and displayed,
The prescribed number in the non-internal medium game and the predetermined internal medium game is "3" (Fig. 152),
The prescribed number in the predetermined special game is "2" (Fig. 152),
In the non-internal medium game, the payout when the specific symbol combination (“Bell”-“Bell”-“Bell” corresponding to the small winning combination 01) is stopped and displayed exceeds the specified number in the non-internal medium game (as shown in Figure 152). (So, when small role 01 wins in non-RT, the payout is "11", which exceeds the specified number "3"),
When a specific symbol combination ("Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" corresponding to small winning combination 01) is stopped and displayed in a predetermined internal medium game, the payout exceeds the specified number in the predetermined internal medium game (Fig. 152 As shown in the figure, when small role 01 wins in RT1, the payout is "11", which exceeds the specified number "3"),
The payout when the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the predetermined special game is less than the specified number in the predetermined special game (as shown in Figure 152, the payout when winning small role 01 in the special game is "1") and is less than the specified number "2" in the special game),
In the predetermined special game, there is no chance of winning a winning combination (Figure 152),
The ball output rate when the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operation mode in a non-internal medium game is lower than the ball output rate when the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operation mode in a predetermined special game (as shown in FIG. 152). In non-RT, the ball payout rate when the stop switch is operated in the press order 123 is "0.417", and the ball payout rate when the stop switch is operated in the press order 123 in the special game is "0.5". (below)
It is characterized by

According to the second invention, in a predetermined special game, there is no case where winning of a winning combination results in non-winning, so any winning combination is won.
Further, the ball output rate when the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operation mode in a predetermined special game exceeds the ball output rate when the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operation mode in a non-internal medium game.
Furthermore, the payout when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a non-internal medium game and a predetermined internal medium game is higher than the specified number, but the payout when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined special game is less than the specified number. Therefore, each time a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined special game, the player's medals can be reduced. Therefore, by adjusting the probability that a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined special game, it is possible to lower the ball payout rate in a predetermined special game.
In order to lower the payout rate in a predetermined special game, it is only necessary to provide "1" such specific symbol combination, so the total number of symbol combinations can be reduced, and as a result, the number of symbols on each reel can be reduced. The degree of freedom in arrangement can be improved.

3. Original invention 3
Initial invention 3 (10th embodiment) is
A non-internal medium game (non-RT) in which the predetermined special prize (1BB) has not been won,
A predetermined internal medium game (RT1) in which a predetermined special prize is carried over;
and a predetermined special game that can be transferred based on winning a predetermined special prize and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined special prize being stopped and displayed,
The prescribed number in the non-internal medium game is "1" type (Fig. 152),
The prescribed number in a predetermined internal medium game is "1" type (Fig. 152),
The prescribed number in a predetermined special game is "1" type (Fig. 152),
The prescribed number in the predetermined special game is "2" (Fig. 152),
The payout when the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the predetermined special game is less than the specified number in the predetermined special game (as shown in Figure 152, the payout when winning small role 01 in the special game is "1") and is less than the specified number "2" in the special game),
There are "1" types of specific symbol combinations (Figure 152),
The effective line is "1" (Figure 152),
In the predetermined special game, there is no chance of winning in the winning combination (Figure 152)
It is characterized by

According to the third aspect of the invention, in a predetermined special game, there is no case where winning of a winning combination results in non-winning, so any winning combination is won.
In addition, since the payout when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined special game is less than the specified number, the player's medals will decrease each time a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined special game. It can be done. Therefore, by adjusting the probability that a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined special game, it is possible to lower the ball payout rate in a predetermined special game.
In order to lower the payout rate in a predetermined special game, it is only necessary to provide "1" such specific symbol combination, so the total number of symbol combinations can be reduced, and as a result, the number of symbols on each reel can be reduced. The degree of freedom in arrangement can be improved.
Furthermore, since the number of active lines is "1", the degree of freedom in arranging symbols on each reel can be improved in this respect as well.

4. Original invention 4
Initial invention 4 (10th embodiment) is
A non-internal medium game (non-RT) in which the predetermined special prize (1BB) has not been won,
A predetermined internal medium game (RT1) in which a predetermined special prize is carried over;
and a predetermined special game that can be transferred based on winning a predetermined special prize and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined special prize being stopped and displayed,
The prescribed number in the predetermined special game is "2" (Fig. 152),
The payout when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined special game is less than the specified number in the predetermined special game (as shown in Figure 152, the payout when winning small role 01 in the special game is "1") and is less than the specified number "2" in the special game),
In the predetermined special game, there is no chance of winning a winning combination (Figure 152),
In a predetermined special game, if the result of the winning combination is that a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed, no matter which operation mode you operate the stop switch, the specific symbol combination will be stopped and displayed, and the specific symbol combination will be stopped and displayed. When the stop switch is displayed, the payout is less than the specified number in the predetermined special game (when the winning K condition device shown in FIG. 146 is activated, a winning combination of "1" will be won no matter which order the stop switch is pressed)
It is characterized by

According to the original invention 4, in a predetermined special game, there is no case where winning of a winning combination is non-winning, so any winning combination is won.
In addition, since the payout when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined special game is less than the specified number, the player's medals will decrease each time a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined special game. It can be done. Furthermore, in a predetermined special game, if the result of the winning combination is that a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed, no matter which operation mode you operate the stop switch, the specific symbol combination will be stopped and displayed. It is possible to cause the player's medals to decrease. Therefore, it is possible to lower the payout rate in a predetermined special game.
In order to lower the payout rate in a predetermined special game, it is only necessary to provide "1" such specific symbol combination, so the total number of symbol combinations can be reduced, and as a result, the number of symbols on each reel can be reduced. The degree of freedom in arrangement can be improved.

5. Original invention 5
Initial invention 5 (10th embodiment) is
A non-internal medium game (non-RT) in which the predetermined special prize (1BB) has not been won,
A predetermined internal medium game (RT1) in which a predetermined special prize is carried over;
and a predetermined special game that can be transferred based on winning a predetermined special prize and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined special prize being stopped and displayed,
The prescribed number in the non-internal medium game and the predetermined internal medium game is "3" (Fig. 152),
The prescribed number in the predetermined special game is "2" (Fig. 152),
When a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a non-internal medium game, the payout exceeds the specified number in the non-internal medium game (as shown in Figure 152, the payout when winning small role 01 in a non-RT is "11") , which is less than the specified number "3" in non-RT),
When a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined internal medium game, the payout exceeds the specified number in the predetermined internal medium game (as shown in FIG. 152, the payout when winning small role 01 in RT1 is "11 ”, which is less than the specified number “3” in RT1),
The payout when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined special game is less than the specified number in the predetermined special game (as shown in Figure 152, the payout when winning small role 01 in the special game is "1") and is less than the specified number "2" in the special game),
In the predetermined special game, there is no chance of winning in the winning combination (Figure 152),
The ball output rate when the stop switch is operated in any one operation mode in a non-internal medium game is lower than the ball output rate when the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operation mode in a predetermined special game (see Figure 152). As shown, the ball payout rate when the stop switch is operated in the press order 123 or press order 132 in non-RT is "0.417", and the ball payout rate when the stop switch is operated in the press order 123 in the special game is "0.417". The rate is lower than "0.5".In addition, when the stop switch is operated in push order 213, push order 231, push order 312, or push order 321 in non-RT, the ball payout rate is "0.487", In the special game, the ball payout rate is lower than "0.5" when the stop switch is operated in push order 123.)
It is characterized by

According to the original invention 5, in a predetermined special game, there is no case where winning of a winning combination results in non-winning, so any winning combination is won.
Further, the ball payout rate when the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operation mode in a predetermined special game exceeds the ball payout rate when the stop switch is operated in any one operation mode in a non-internal medium game.
Furthermore, the payout when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a non-internal medium game and a predetermined internal medium game is higher than the specified number, but the payout when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined special game is less than the specified number. Therefore, each time a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined special game, the player's medals can be reduced. Therefore, by adjusting the probability that a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined special game, it is possible to lower the ball payout rate in a predetermined special game.
In order to lower the payout rate in a predetermined special game, it is only necessary to provide "1" such specific symbol combination, so the total number of symbol combinations can be reduced, and as a result, the number of symbols on each reel can be reduced. The degree of freedom in arrangement can be improved.

10 Slot machine (gaming machine)
10a Lower panel 11 Power switch 12 Front door 12c Control panel 13 Cabinet 13a Bottom plate 13b Back plate 13c Top plate 14 Symbol display device 15 Medal payout device 16 Medal payout port 17 Door switch 18 Display window 19 Medal tray 21 Performance lamp (decorative lamp part )
22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 (24A, 24B) Operation button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 35a Storage receiving port 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Payout sensor 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 43 Settlement switch 44a, 44b Input sensor 45 Blocker 46 Passage sensor 47 Medal inlet 50 Main control board (main control means)
50a Resistance 50b Mark number 50c Mark 50d Boundary line 50e DP mark 51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU (main chip)
55a Pin 55b Hollow part 55c Step part 55d Step part 55e Two-dimensional code 55f Model number sticker 55g Product name 55h Company name 55i Step part 55j Hidden character 56 Socket 56a Hollow part 56b Step part 56c Pin insertion hole 56d Socket pin 56e Notch part 57 Connector 57a Foot part 57b Lead wire 61 Role lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Performance group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Prize determination means 67 Payout means 71 Control command transmission means 73 Setting value display LED
74 Management information display LED (role ratio monitor)
75 Display board 76 Credit number display LED
77 Advantageous period display LED
78 Obtained number display LED
79 Status display LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2 bet display LED
79c 3 bet display LED
79d Game start display LED
79e Loading display LED
79f Replay display LED
80 Sub control board (sub control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
86 Push button 87 Cross key 91 Production output control means 110 Medal selector 111 Medal passage 111a Vertical part 111b Inclined part 111c Entrance 111d Exit 112 Clearance 113 Selector base 120 Shoot member 121 Medal guiding passage 122 Bottom part 123 Inner wall part 124 Outer wall part 125 Step part 126 Fixing part 127 Screw 130 Return member 131 Return acceptance port 132 Medal return passage 133 Payout acceptance port 134 Medal payout passage 135 Upper edge 140 Closure member 151 Setting key insertion slot 152 Setting key switch 153 Setting change (reset) switch 200 Hall computer 301 Interrupt wait monitor register 302 Interrupt prohibition flag (IFF1 register, IFF2 register)
500 Timer circuit 501 (PTC) 8-bit counter 502 (PTC) Prescaler register 503 (PTC) Counter setting register 504 (PTC) Interrupt flag

Claims (1)

a non-internal medium game state in which a predetermined special prize has not been won;
a predetermined internal medium game state in which a predetermined special prize is carried over;
and a predetermined special game state that can be transitioned based on the stop display of a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined special winning combination,
The predetermined special game state is a state in which the accessory continuous operation device related to the first class special prize is operating,
The prescribed number of games that can be executed in the predetermined internal medium game state is "3",
The payout when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the predetermined internal mid-gaming state exceeds the prescribed number of "3" that can be played in the predetermined internal mid-gaming state,
The prescribed number of games that can be executed in the predetermined special game state is "2",
The payout when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the predetermined special game state is less than the prescribed number of "2" that can be played in the predetermined special game state,
In the predetermined special gaming state, there is no chance of losing as a result of the internal lottery ;
In the predetermined special game state, a specific symbol combination is most likely to be stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images